B ENGINE
A
ACC
SECTION
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... 2
Removal and Installation .......................................... 2
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 2
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 3
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 5
Accelerator Control ................................................... 5
ACCELERATOR PEDAL STROKE AND
TRAVEL ................................................................. 5
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
ACC-1
2005 Titan
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
PFP:18005
EBS00L3P
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
LBIA0379E
1.
Adjustable accelerator pedal assem- 2.
bly
4.
Adjustable brake pedal cable (part
of the accelerator pedal assembly)
Adjustable accelerator pedal bracket
(part of the accelerator pedal assembly)
3.
Adjustable pedal electric motor (part
of the accelerator pedal assembly)
CAUTION:
●
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
●
Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the frontmost position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals.
●
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
●
Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
●
Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
●
Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal.
● Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Revision: October 2004
ACC-2
2005 Titan
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.
Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts.
Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
A
ACC
C
LBIA0380E
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
●
E
Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
Adjustable accelerator pedal – total pedal applied stroke
Adjustable accelerator pedal – total pedal adjustment travel
●
●
: 48.3 mm (1.90 in)
: 73.2 mm (2.88 in)
F
Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position.
Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-588, "DTC P2138
APP SENSOR" .
CAUTION:
When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform
″Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning″. Refer to EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning" .
G
H
I
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
J
K
L
M
LBIA0404E
Revision: October 2004
ACC-3
2005 Titan
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
1.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal
A/T cable attachment bracket
(part of the accelerator pedal
assembly)
2.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal position
sensor (part of the accelerator pedal
assembly)
3.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal
assembly
CAUTION:
●
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
●
Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
●
Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
●
Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.
Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts.
Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
●
Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal – total pedal applied stroke
●
●
: 48 mm (1.89 in)
Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position.
Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-588, "DTC P2138
APP SENSOR" .
CAUTION:
When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform
″Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning″. Refer to EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning" .
Revision: October 2004
ACC-4
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accelerator Control
PFP:00030
A
EBS00L3Q
ACCELERATOR PEDAL STROKE AND TRAVEL
Unit: mm (in)
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke
48 (1.89)
Adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke
48.3 (1.90)
Adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal adjustment travel
73.2 (2.88)
ACC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
ACC-5
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
ACC-6
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
F
ASCD
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)..... 2
Description ............................................................... 2
G
H
I
J
ACS
L
M
Revision: October 2004
ACS-1
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[ASCD]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Description
PFP:18930
EKS00AR3
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" .
Revision: October 2004
ACS-2
2005 Titan
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 2
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM ................................ 3
Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Adjustable
Pedal ........................................................................ 3
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)..... 4
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
F
G
H
AP
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AP-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS004GT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution
EIS004GU
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
Revision: October 2004
AP-2
2005 Titan
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Adjustable Pedal
PFP:98800
A
EIS004GV
Refer to SE-11, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
AP
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AP-3
2005 Titan
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
EIS004GW
WIRING DIAGRAM — PEDAL —
WIWA0721E
Revision: October 2004
AP-4
2005 Titan
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
AP
J
K
L
M
WIWA0722E
Revision: October 2004
AP-5
2005 Titan
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
EIS004GY
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" and BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
Revision: October 2004
AP-6
2005 Titan
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
A
B
SECTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
AT
D
E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 7
PrecautionsforOnBoardDiagnostic(OBD)System
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7
Precautions .............................................................. 8
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 9
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 9
PREPARATION ......................................................... 10
Special Service Tools ............................................. 10
Commercial Service Tools .......................................11
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 12
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 12
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 12
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 12
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 15
Cross-Sectional View (2WD models) ..................... 15
Cross-Sectional View (4WD models) ..................... 16
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 17
TCM Function ......................................................... 30
CAN Communication .............................................. 32
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 32
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 33
Shift Control ........................................................... 34
Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 35
Engine Brake Control ............................................. 37
Control Valve .......................................................... 37
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 39
Introduction ............................................................ 39
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 42
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 43
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 43
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 43
Revision: October 2004
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 45
A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 50
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 51
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 52
Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 56
Check at Idle ........................................................... 56
Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 57
Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 59
Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 60
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ...................... 62
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Complete Lock-up .................................................. 62
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Slip Lock-up ............................................................ 62
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 63
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 84
CONSULT-II FUNCTION (A/T) ............................... 85
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 97
Description .............................................................. 97
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 97
Possible Cause ....................................................... 97
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 97
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ................................ 98
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 99
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 100
Description ............................................................ 100
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 100
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 100
Possible Cause ..................................................... 100
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 100
Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG .......................... 101
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 102
DTC P0700 TCM ..................................................... 104
Description ............................................................ 104
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 104
Possible Cause ..................................................... 104
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 104
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 104
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 105
AT-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Description ............................................................ 105
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 105
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105
Possible Cause ..................................................... 105
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 105
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 106
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 107
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 109
Description ............................................................ 109
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 109
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 109
Possible Cause ..................................................... 109
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 109
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ..........................111
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 112
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 114
Description ............................................................ 114
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 114
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 114
Possible Cause ..................................................... 114
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 114
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 114
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 116
Description ............................................................ 116
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 116
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116
Possible Cause ..................................................... 116
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 116
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 117
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 118
Description ............................................................ 118
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 118
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 118
Possible Cause ..................................................... 118
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 118
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 119
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 120
Description ............................................................ 120
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 120
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 120
Possible Cause ..................................................... 120
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 120
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 121
DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
(RAM) ...................................................................... 122
Description ............................................................ 122
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 122
Possible Cause ..................................................... 122
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 122
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122
DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
(ROM) ...................................................................... 123
Description ............................................................ 123
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123
Possible Cause ..................................................... 123
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 123
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 123
Revision: October 2004
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ........ 124
Description ............................................................ 124
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 124
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 124
Possible Cause ..................................................... 124
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 124
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 125
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT .................................................................. 127
Description ............................................................ 127
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 127
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127
Possible Cause ..................................................... 127
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 127
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 128
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 129
Component Inspection .......................................... 131
DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 132
Description ............................................................ 132
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 132
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 132
Possible Cause ..................................................... 132
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 132
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 133
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 134
Description ............................................................ 134
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 134
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 134
Possible Cause ..................................................... 134
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 134
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 135
DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 136
Description ............................................................ 136
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136
Possible Cause ..................................................... 136
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 136
Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 136
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 137
DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 139
Description ............................................................ 139
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 139
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 139
Possible Cause ..................................................... 139
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 139
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 140
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 141
Description ............................................................ 141
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 141
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141
Possible Cause ..................................................... 141
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 141
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 142
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION .............................................................. 143
Description ............................................................ 143
CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 143
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 143
Possible Cause ..................................................... 143
AT-2
2005 Titan
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 143
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE . 145
Description ........................................................... 145
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 145
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 145
Possible Cause .................................................... 145
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 145
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 146
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION .............................................................. 147
Description ........................................................... 147
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 147
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 147
Possible Cause .................................................... 147
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 147
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 148
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 149
Description ........................................................... 149
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 149
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 149
Possible Cause .................................................... 149
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 149
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 150
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION .............................................................. 151
Description ........................................................... 151
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 151
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 151
Possible Cause .................................................... 151
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 151
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 152
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 153
Description ........................................................... 153
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 153
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 153
Possible Cause .................................................... 153
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 153
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 154
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ............................. 155
Description ........................................................... 155
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 155
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 155
Possible Cause .................................................... 155
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 155
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 156
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE ..................................................................... 157
Description ........................................................... 157
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 157
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 157
Possible Cause .................................................... 157
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 157
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION ................................................. 159
Description ........................................................... 159
Revision: October 2004
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 159
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159
Possible Cause ..................................................... 159
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 159
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 161
Description ............................................................ 161
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 161
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161
Possible Cause ..................................................... 161
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 161
Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 162
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 163
Component Inspection .......................................... 164
Position Indicator Lamp ........................................ 164
DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 166
Description ............................................................ 166
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 166
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166
Possible Cause ..................................................... 166
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 166
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 167
DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 168
Description ............................................................ 168
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 168
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 168
Possible Cause ..................................................... 168
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 168
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 169
DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 170
Description ............................................................ 170
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 170
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 170
Possible Cause ..................................................... 170
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 171
DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 172
Description ............................................................ 172
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 172
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172
Possible Cause ..................................................... 172
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 172
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 173
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT. 174
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 174
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 175
TOW MODE SWITCH ............................................. 178
Description ............................................................ 178
Wiring Diagram — AT — TMSW .......................... 179
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 180
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN
THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT ............................ 181
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 181
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................................... 182
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 182
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 182
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 183
AT-3
2005 Titan
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 183
AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on ..... 186
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 186
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 187
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 188
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 189
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. 192
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 195
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 197
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 200
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 202
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 204
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 207
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ............................ 209
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 211
Lock-up Is Not Released ...................................... 213
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ................ 214
CannotBeChangedtoManualMode(ColumnShift)
. 215
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift
Models) ................................................................. 215
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Column
Shift Models) ......................................................... 218
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift
Models) ................................................................. 220
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Column
Shift Models) ......................................................... 222
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift
Models) ................................................................. 224
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Column
Shift Models) ......................................................... 226
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift
Models) ................................................................. 228
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Column
Shift Models) ......................................................... 231
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 233
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 236
Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 236
Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 238
Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 238
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 239
Description ............................................................ 239
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 239
Wiring Diagram — A/T — SHIFT .......................... 241
Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............. 243
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ............................... 244
Component Inspection .......................................... 246
Revision: October 2004
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 248
Components .......................................................... 248
Removal ................................................................ 248
Installation ............................................................. 249
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 250
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2 ................................................................ 250
Rear Oil Seal ......................................................... 262
AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 263
Removal and Installation ....................................... 263
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................. 265
Removal and Installation (4x2) ............................. 265
Removal and Installation (4x4) ............................. 268
OVERHAUL ............................................................. 271
Components .......................................................... 271
Oil Channel ........................................................... 279
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 281
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 283
Disassembly .......................................................... 283
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 300
Oil Pump ............................................................... 300
Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 302
Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 305
Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low
Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 310
High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 315
Direct Clutch ......................................................... 317
ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 319
Assembly (1) ......................................................... 319
Adjustment ............................................................ 332
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 334
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 341
General Specifications .......................................... 341
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 341
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Complete Lock-up ................................................. 342
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Slip Lock-up .......................................................... 342
Stall Speed ............................................................ 342
Line Pressure ........................................................ 342
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 342
Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 342
Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ... 342
Reverse brake ....................................................... 343
Total End Play ....................................................... 343
AT-4
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index
PFP:00024
A
ECS00AVO
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-97 .
B
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
OBD-II
Except OBD-II
Reference page
CONSULT-II GST (*1)
CONSULT-II only “A/T”
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING
—
P1731
AT-139
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC
—
P1841
AT-166
ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC
—
P1843
AT-168
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC
—
P1845
AT-170
ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC
—
P1846
AT-172
A/T INTERLOCK
P1730
P1730
AT-136
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
P0744
AT-118
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
P1710
AT-127
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
U1000
AT-97
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC
P1762
P1762
AT-149
P1764 (*2 )
P1764
AT-151
—
P0725
AT-114
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC
P1757
P1757
AT-145
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT
P1759
P1759
AT-147
HLR/C SOL/CIRC
P1767
P1767
AT-153
HLR/C SOL FNCTN
P1769 (*2 )
P1769
AT-155
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC
P1752
P1752
AT-141
P1754 (*2 )
P1754
AT-143
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
P0745
AT-120
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC
P1772
P1772
AT-157
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT
P1774
P1774
AT-159
MANU MODE SW/CIR
—
P1815
AT-161
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN
ENGINE SPEED SIG
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
P0705
AT-105
STARTER RELAY/CIRC
—
P0615
AT-100
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
P0740
AT-116
TCM
P0700
P0700
AT-104
TCM·RAM
—
P1702
AT-122
TCM·ROM
—
P1703
AT-123
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
—
P1705
AT-124
P1716
P1716
AT-132
TURBINE REV S/CIRC
VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR
—
P1721
AT-134
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
P0720
P0720
AT-109
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
Revision: October 2004
AT-5
2005 Titan
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index
ECS00AVP
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-97 .
DTC
OBD-II
Except OBD-II
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST (*1)
CONSULT-II
only “A/T”
—
P0615
STARTER RELAY/CIRC
AT-100
P0700
P0700
TCM
AT-104
P0705
P0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-105
P0710
P1710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-127
P0720
P0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
AT-109
Reference page
—
P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
AT-114
P0740
P0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-116
P0744
P0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-118
P0745
P0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-120
—
P1702
TCM·RAM
AT-122
—
P1703
TCM·ROM
AT-123
—
P1705
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
AT-124
P1716
P1716
TURBINE REV S/CIRC
AT-132
—
P1721
VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR
AT-134
P1730
P1730
A/T INTERLOCK
AT-136
—
P1731
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING
AT-139
P1752
P1752
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-141
P1754 (*2 )
P1754
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN
AT-143
P1757
P1757
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-145
P1759 (*2 )
P1759
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT
AT-147
P1762
P1762
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-149
P1764 (*2 )
P1764
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN
AT-151
P1767
P1767
HLR/C SOL/CIRC
AT-153
P1769
P1769
HLR/C SOL FNCTN
AT-155
P1772
P1772
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-157
P1774
P1774
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT
AT-159
—
P1815
MANU MODE SW/CIR
AT-161
—
P1841
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC
AT-166
—
P1843
ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC
AT-168
—
P1845
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC
AT-170
—
P1846
ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC
AT-172
U1000
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
AT-97
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
Revision: October 2004
AT-6
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
ECS00CLV
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine
ECS00AVR
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. Will cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. May cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-7
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
ECS00AVS
NOTE:
If any malfunctions occur in the RE5R05A model transmission, replace the entire transmission assembly.
●
Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative
battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM
even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
SEF289H
●
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in
the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
SEF217U
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
After replacing the ATF, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to
prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to
AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .
After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" , MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-8
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions
ECS00AVT
A
ATF COOLER SERVICE
●
If A/T fluid contains fictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or
replaced, inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush
cooler lines with cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure,
refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . For radiator replacement, refer to CO-12, "REMOVAL" .
B
CHECKING AND CHANGING A/T FLUID
AT
Increase ATF oil temperature to 80°C (176°F) first, then check and adjust oil level at 65°C (149°F).
NOTE:
The A/T has both water cooling and air cooling systems. The air cooling system has a bypass valve.
When ATF oil temperature is at or below 50°C (122°F), it does not flow through the air cooled system. If A/ D
T oil level is adjusted without flow throughout the entire system, the level will be 10mm lower than
required. Therefore, all piping should be filled with oil when adjusting level.
E
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
●
A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. Refer to the table on AT-87,
"SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
●
The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.
Always perform the procedure on AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD-II, refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
●
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-69, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" .
●
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
F
G
H
ECS00AVU
I
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-9
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
ECS00AVV
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST2505S001
(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
(
—
)
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
(
—
)
Hose
3 ST25053000
(
—
)
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000
(
—
)
Adapter
5 ST25055000
(
—
)
Adapter
Measuring line pressure
ZZA0600D
KV31103600
(J-45674)
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)
Measuring line pressure
ZZA1227D
ST33400001
(J-26082)
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia
●
Installing rear oil seal (2WD models)
●
Installing oil pump housing oil seal
NT086
KV31102400
(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
Installing reverse brake return spring retainer
NT423
Revision: October 2004
AT-10
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST25850000
(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
Remove oil pump assembly
A
B
AT
NT422
—
(J-47002)
Transmission jack adapter kit
1.
—
(J-47002-2)
Center bracket
2.
—
(J-47002-3)
Adapter plate
3.
—
(J-47002-4)
Adapter block
Assist in removal of transmission and transfer
case as one assembly using only one transmission jack.
D
E
F
WCIA0499E
G
Commercial Service Tools
ECS00AVW
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
H
I
J
PBIC0190E
Drift
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Installing manual shaft seal
K
L
NT083
Drift
a: 64 mm (2.52 in)
Installing rear oil seal (4WD models)
M
NT083
Revision: October 2004
AT-11
2005 Titan
A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID
Changing A/T Fluid
PFP:KLE40
ECS00CCU
Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Checking A/T Fluid
ECS00CCV
Refer to MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
ECS00AVZ
Whenever an automatic transmission is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan.
SCIA3830E
5.
6.
7.
8.
Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
SCIA3831E
SCIA3832E
Revision: October 2004
AT-12
2005 Titan
A/T FLUID
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transmission.
Remove the banjo bolts.
Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying Transmission Cooler
Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection procedure. Refer to AT-14, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE" .
A
B
AT
D
E
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA3831E
K
L
M
SCIA3833E
6.
7.
Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection procedure. AT-14, "A/T
FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE" .
8.
SCIA3834E
Revision: October 2004
AT-13
2005 Titan
A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
a.
Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E
b.
If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid
cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended.Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" .
SCIA5257E
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
Revision: October 2004
AT-14
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View (2WD models)
PFP:31036
A
ECS00AW0
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
SCIA5267E
1.
Front planetary gear
2.
Mid planetary gear
3.
Rear planetary gear
4.
Direct clutch
5.
High & low reverse clutch
6.
Reverse brake
7.
Drum support
Low coast brake
8.
Forward brake
9.
10. Input shaft
11.
Torque converter
12. Oil pump
13. Front brake
14. 3rd one-way clutch
15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch
17. Control valve with TCM
18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension
20.
J
K
L
Output shaft
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-15
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View (4WD models)
ECS00AW1
SCIA5268E
1.
Front planetary gear
2.
Mid planetary gear
3.
Rear planetary gear
4.
Direct clutch
5.
High & low reverse clutch
6.
Reverse brake
7.
Drum support
Low coast brake
8.
Forward brake
9.
10. Input shaft
11.
Torque converter
12. Oil pump
13. Front brake
14. 3rd one-way clutch
15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch
17. Control valve with TCM
18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Adapter case
20.
Revision: October 2004
Output shaft
AT-16
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism
ECS00AW2
The automatic transmission uses compact dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
A
B
CONSTRUCTION
AT
D
E
F
G
H
PCIA0002J
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
11.
Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
10. 3rd one-way clutch
Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
I
J
13.
K
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Name of the Part
L
Abbreviation
Function
Front brake (1)
FR/B
Input clutch (2)
I/C
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal
gear (13).
Direct clutch (3)
D/C
Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16).
High and low reverse clutch (4)
HLR/C
Fastens the front sun gear (11).
Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16).
Reverse brake (5)
R/B
Fastens the rear carrier (15).
Forward brake (6)
F/B
Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
LC/B
Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Low coast brake (7)
1st one-way clutch (8)
Forward one-way clutch (9)
3rd one-way clutch (10)
Revision: October 2004
1st/O.C
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear
(17) but fastens it for reverse rotation.
F/O.C
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it
for reverse rotation.
3rd/O.C
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens
it for reverse rotation.
AT-17
2005 Titan
M
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART (FLOOR SHIFT MODELS)
Shift position
I/C
HLR/C
D/C
R/B
FR/B
LC/B
Fwd/B
1st
OWC
Fwd
OWC
3rd
OWC
Remarks
P
PARK POSITION
R
REVERSE
POSITION
N
NEUTRAL POSITION
1st
2nd
D
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
3rd
4th
5th
1st
2nd
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4
4
3rd
4th
1st
2nd
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇐4
3
3rd
4th
1st
2nd
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇐3⇐4
2
3rd
4th
1st
Locks (held stationary in 1st
gear)
1⇐2⇐3⇐4
2nd
1
3rd
4th
●
—Operates
●
—Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
●
—Operates and effects power transmission while coasting.
●
—Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission.
●
●
—Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition
—Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during D (4,3,2,1) ÞN shift.
Revision: October 2004
AT-18
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
AT
SCIA5642E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-19
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART (COLUMN SHIFT MODELS)
Shift position
I/C
HLR/C
D/C
R/B
FR/B
LC/B
Fwd/B
1st
OWC
Fwd
OWC
3rd
OWC
Remarks
P
PARK POSITION
R
REVERSE
POSITION
N
NEUTRAL POSITION
1st
2nd
D
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
3rd
4th
5th
1st
2nd
M5
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
3rd
4th
5th
1st
2nd
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4
M4
3rd
4th
1st
M3
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3
2nd
3rd
1st
Automatic shift
1⇔2
M2
2nd
Locks (held stationary in 1st
gear)
1st
M1
2nd
●
—Operates
●
—Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
●
—Operates and effects power transmission while coasting.
●
—Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission.
●
●
—Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition
—Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during D (4,3,2,1) ÞN shift.
Revision: October 2004
AT-20
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
AT
SCIA5642E
D
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” position
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
E
“P” position
●
●
The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
The parking pawl linked with the select lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCIA0003J
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17.
Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-21
2005 Titan
M
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D”, “M5”, “M4”, “M3”, “M2” positions (column shift), “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” positions (floor shift)
1st Gear
●
●
●
●
The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.
SCIA1512E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-22
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“M1” position (column shift), “1 ” position (floor shift) 1st Gear
●
●
●
●
●
The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
SCIA1513E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
Rear internal gear
L
M
21. Output shaft
20.
22. Parking gear
Revision: October 2004
23. Parking pawl
AT-23
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D”, “M5”, “M4”, “M3” positions (column shift), “D”, “4”, “3” positions (floor shift) 2nd Gear
●
●
●
●
The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
The direct clutch is coupled and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine
brake is not activated.
SCIA1514E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
12. Input shaft
Rear carrier
15.
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23.
Revision: October 2004
Parking pawl
AT-24
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“M2”, “M1” positions (column shift), “2”, “1” positions (floor shift) 2nd Gear
●
●
●
●
●
The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
SCIA1515E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-25
L
M
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D”, “M5”, “M4”, “M3” positions (column shift), “D”, “4”, “3” positions (floor shift) 3rd Gear
●
●
●
The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
SCIA1516E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-26
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D”, “M5”, “M4” positions (column shift), “D”, “4” positions (floor shift) 4th Gear
●
●
●
●
The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three
planetary gears rotate forward as one unit.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA1517E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-27
K
Direct clutch
L
M
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D”, “M5” positions (column shift), “D” position (floor shift) 5th Gear
●
●
●
The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
SCIA4984E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
Direct clutch
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-28
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“R” position
●
●
●
The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA1519E
1.
Front brake
2.
Input clutch
3.
4.
High and low reverse clutch
5.
Reverse brake
6.
Direct clutch
Forward brake
7.
Low coast brake
8.
1st one-way clutch
9.
Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch
11. Front sun gear
12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear
14. Front internal gear
15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear
17. Mid sun gear
18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier
20. Rear internal gear
21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear
23. Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-29
K
L
M
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TCM Function
ECS00AW3
The function of the TCM is to:
●
Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
●
Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
●
Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE (FLOOR SHIFT)
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNALS)
TCM
ACTUATORS
PNP switch
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Closed throttle position signal
Wide open throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Turbine revolution sensor
1st position switch signal
4th position switch signal
ATF pressure switch
Tow mode switch signal
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Engine brake control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT-II communication line
Duet-EA control
CAN system
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
Low coast brake solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Starter relay
Back-up lamp relay
Þ
Þ
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
SCIA5624E
Revision: October 2004
AT-30
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE (COLUMN SHIFT)
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNALS)
PNP switch
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Closed throttle position signal
Wide open throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Turbine revolution sensor
Manual mode switch
Tow mode switch signal
Þ
TCM
ACTUATORS
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Engine brake control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT-II communication line
Duet-EA control
CAN system
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
Low coast brake solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Starter relay
Back-up lamp relay
Þ
A
B
AT
D
E
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5625E
Revision: October 2004
AT-31
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication
ECS00AW4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-7,
"CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Input/Output Signal of TCM
Line
pressure
control
Vehicle
speed
control
Shift
control
Lock-up
control
Engine
brake
control
Fail-safe
function
(*3)
Self-diagnostics
function
Accelerator pedal position signal (*4)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Vehicle speed sensor A/T
(revolution sensor)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*4)
X
X
X
X
Closed throttle position signal(*4)
(*2) X
(*2) X
Wide open throttle position signal(*4)
(*2) X
(*2) X
Turbine revolution sensor 1
X
X
X
X
X
Turbine revolution sensor 2
(for 4th speed only)
X
X
X
X
X
Control item
Input
ECS00AW5
X
Engine speed signals(*4)
(*2) X
X
(*2) X
X
X
X
PNP switch
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Operation signal(*4)
ASCD
Overdrive cancel
X
signal(*4)
TCM power supply voltage signal
Output
X
X
X
Direct clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 5)
X
X
X
X
Input clutch solenoid (ATF pressure
switch 3)
X
X
X
X
High & low reverse clutch solenoid
(ATF pressure switch 6)
X
X
X
X
Front brake solenoid (ATF pressure
switch 1)
X
X
X
X
Low coast brake solenoid (ATF
pressure switch 2)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Line pressure solenoid
X
X
TCC solenoid
X
X
X
Self-diagnostics table(*4)
X
Starter relay
X
X
*1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: CAN communications
Revision: October 2004
AT-32
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Line Pressure Control
●
●
ECS00AW6
When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the
pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the
driving state.
A
B
AT
D
E
PCIA0007E
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC
PATTERN
●
●
The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current valve and thus controls the line pressure.
F
G
H
Normal control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
I
J
K
PCIA0008E
L
Back-up control (Engine brake)
When the select operation is performed during driving and the transmission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the
vehicle speed.
M
PCIA0009E
Revision: October 2004
AT-33
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
During shift change
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is
set according to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
PCIA0010E
At low fluid temperature
When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
PCIA0011E
Shift Control
ECS00AW7
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained.
PCIA0012E
SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information, etc.
Revision: October 2004
AT-34
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Shift change system diagram
A
B
AT
D
E
F
PCIA0013E
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Lock-Up Control
ECS00AW8
G
H
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
I
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
J
Select lever
D position
M5 position
M4 or 4 position
M3 or 3 position
M2 or 2 position
Gear position
5
4
5
4
3
2
Lock-up
×
–
×
×
×
×
Slip lock-up
×
×
–
–
–
–
K
L
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-up control system diagram
M
PCIA0014E
Lock-up released
●
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Revision: October 2004
AT-35
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Lock-up applied
●
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched state
●
The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to gradually increase
the torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put
into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly.
Slip lock-up control
●
In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.
Revision: October 2004
AT-36
2005 Titan
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Engine Brake Control
●
ECS00AW9
The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
SCIA1520E
●
The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls
the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.
Control Valve
H
I
ECS00AWA
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE
Name
Torque converter regulator valve
J
Function
In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive,
the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pressure).
Pressure regulator valve
Pressure regulator plug
Pressure regulator sleeve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
the driving state.
Front brake control valve
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
(front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Accumulator control valve
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston
and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
Pilot valve A
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Pilot valve B
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve
During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
Low coast brake reducing valve
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator
Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve
Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity.
High and low reverse clutch control valve
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low
reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Revision: October 2004
AT-37
2005 Titan
K
L
M
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Name
Function
Input clutch control valve
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
(input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
Direct clutch control valve
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
(direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
TCC control valve
TCC control plug
TCC control sleeve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
Torque converter lubrication valve
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system
oil path.
Cool bypass valve
Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve
Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit.
N-D accumulator
Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Manual valve
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
the line pressure is not sent drain.
FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH
Name
Function
Pressure switch 1 (FR/B)
Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any
malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Pressure switch 3 (I/C)
Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Pressure switch 5 (D/C)
Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Pressure switch 6 (HLR/C)
Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it
detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Revision: October 2004
AT-38
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
PFP:00028
A
ECS00AWB
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System
ECS00AWC
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
D
E
F
ECS00AWD
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
G
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
The “Trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
I
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
J
ECS00AWE
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-II or
GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
●
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●
Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.
SAT014K
Revision: October 2004
AT-39
2005 Titan
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
Items
Freeze frame data
2
3
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
●
If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
●
When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-49, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" .
●
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
●
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
●
Freeze frame data
Revision: October 2004
AT-40
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
●
●
●
1st trip freeze frame data
System readiness test (SRT) codes
Test values
A
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
●
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B
If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
AT
Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
D
Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
Touch “ENGINE”.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
E
Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5334E
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
1.
2.
If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details refer to EC-136, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" .
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
1.
2.
Disconnect battery for 24 hours.
Reconnect battery.
Revision: October 2004
AT-41
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
ECS00AWF
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
●
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
Revision: October 2004
AT-42
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
PFP:00004
A
ECS00AWG
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
B
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-97 .
AT
Priority
Detected items (DTC)
1
U1000 CAN communication line
2
Except above
D
Fail-Safe
ECS00AWH
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is an error in a
main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode the transmission is fixed in 2nd, 4th, or 5th (depending on the breakdown position), so the
customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”.
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe
mode. If this happens, switch “OFF” the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it “ON” again to return to
the normal shift pattern. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the
“diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-46, "WORK FLOW" ).
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to mark driving possible.
E
F
G
H
Vehicle Speed Sensor
●
Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the
transmission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in
one of the systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and
manual mode are prohibited.
I
J
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
●
If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow
systems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
K
Throttle Position Sensor
●
If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow
systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based
on input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order
to make driving possible.
PNP Switch
●
In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched “OFF”, the
starter relay is switched “OFF” (starter starting is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched “OFF” (backup lamp is OFF) and the position is fixed to the “D” range to make driving possible.
Starter Relay
●
The starter relay is switched “OFF”. (Starter starting is disabled.)
Revision: October 2004
AT-43
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Interlock
●
●
If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving possible.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed,
but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction.
When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is performed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG X: OK
ATF pressure switch output
Gear position
A/T interlock coupling pattern
SW3
(I/C)
SW6
(HLR/
C)
SW5
(D/C)
SW1
(FR/B)
SW2
(LC/B)
3rd
–
X
X
–
●
4th
–
X
X
–
5th
X
X
–
X
Fail-safe
function
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe function
I/C
HLR/C
D/C
FR/B
LC/B
L/U
Held in
2nd gear
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
●
Held in
2nd gear
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
●
Held in
2nd gear
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
A/T 1st Engine Braking
●
When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is
switched “OFF” to avoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure Solenoid
●
The solenoid is switched “OFF” and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make
driving possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
●
The solenoid is switched “OFF” to release the lock-up.
Low Coast Brake Solenoid
●
When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, the engine brake is
not applied in 1st and 2nd gear.
Input Clutch Solenoid
●
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Direct Clutch Solenoid
●
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Front Brake Clutch Solenoid
●
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid “ON”, in order to make driving possible,
the A/T is held in 5th gear; if the solenoid is OFF, 4th gear.
High & Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
●
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2
●
The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are prohibited.
Revision: October 2004
AT-44
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair
ECS00AWI
A
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
B
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malAT
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operD
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc.
SAT631IB
It is much more difficult to diagnose a error that occurs intermittently
rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor
electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good
parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-46, "WORK FLOW" .
E
F
G
H
SAT632I
I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to AT-47 ) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
J
K
L
SEF234G
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-45
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-47 ) and “Diagnostic
Worksheet” (Refer to AT-47 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart
WCIA0251E
*1.
AT-47
*2.
AT-47
*3.
AT-43
*4.
AT-52
*5.
AT-52, AT-53
*6.
AT-55
*7.
AT-85
*8.
AT-39
*9.
AT-97
*10. AT-178
*11. AT-183
*12.
AT-233
*13. AT-63
*14. AT-40
*15.
AT-97, AT-172
*16. EC-49
Revision: October 2004
AT-46
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer
A
KEY POINTS
●
WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
●
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
●
WHERE..... Road conditions
●
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name
MR/MS
B
AT
Model & Year
VIN
Trans. Model
Engine
Mileage
Malfunction Date
Manuf. Date
In Service Date
Frequency
❏ Continuous
Symptoms
❏ Vehicle does not move.
❏ No up-shift
❏ Intermittent (
times a day)
❏ Particular position)
(❏ Any position
(❏ 1st → 2nd
❏ No down-shift
D
❏ 2nd → 3rd
E
❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
(❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd
❏ 3rd → 2nd
❏ 2nd → 1st)
F
❏ Lock-up malfunction
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip
(❏ N → D
❏ Lock-up
❏ Any drive position)
G
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
H
❏ No pattern select
❏ Others
(
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
)
❏ Continuously lit
I
❏ Not lit
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart
1
❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint.
AT-43
J
❏ ATF inspection
2
❏ Leak (Repair leak location.)
❏ State
❏ Amount
AT-52
K
❏ Stall test and line pressure test
L
❏ Stall test
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch
❏ Front brake
❏ High and low reverse clutch
❏ Low coast brake
❏ Forward brake
❏ Reverse brake
❏ Forward one-way clutch
3
❏ 1st one-way clutch
❏ 3rd one-way clutch
❏ Engine
❏ Line pressure low
❏ Except for input clutch and direct
clutch, clutches and brakes OK
AT-52, AT53
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
Revision: October 2004
AT-47
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items.
AT-55
Check before engine is started
❏ The AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-186 .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
AT-56
❏ AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-120, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-141, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-157, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
❏ AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-136, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" .
❏ AT-139, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" .
❏ AT-100, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
4-1.
4
Idle inspection
4-2.
❏ AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
❏ AT-187, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed" .
❏ AT-188, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" .
❏ AT-189, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" .
❏ AT-192, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" .
❏ AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" .
AT-56
Driving tests
Part 1
4-3.
❏ AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-200, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" .
❏ AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
❏ AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" .
❏ AT-207, "A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5" .
❏ AT-209, "A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up"
❏ AT-211, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" .
❏ AT-213, "Lock-up Is Not Released" .
❏ AT-214, "Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-48
AT-57
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Part 2
❏ AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-200, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" .
❏ AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
❏ AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" .
A
AT-59
B
Part 3
Column
shift
models
Floor
shift
models
4
4-3
❏ AT-215, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode (Column Shift)" .
❏ AT-215, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-224, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-228, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-233, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
AT
AT-60
❏ AT-215, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-224, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-228, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models)" .
❏ AT-233, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
E
F
❏ AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-120, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-141, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-157, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
❏ AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-136, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" .
❏ AT-139, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" .
❏ AT-100, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
G
H
I
J
K
5
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction
parts.
6
❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items.
AT-55
7
❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts.
See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.)
AT-63
8
❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM.
Revision: October 2004
AT-49
D
L
AT-40
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
ECS00AWJ
WCIA0500E
Revision: October 2004
AT-50
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram
ECS00AWK
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0330E
Revision: October 2004
AT-51
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis
ECS00AWM
A/T FLUID CHECK
Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check
Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
●
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid condition
Conceivable Cause
Required Operation
Varnished (viscous
varnish state)
Clutch, brake
scorched
Replace the ATF and check the A/T
main unit and the vehicle for malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler
pipes, etc.)
Milky white or
cloudy
Water in the fluid
Replace the ATF and check for
places where water is getting in.
Large amount of
metal powder mixed
in
Unusual wear of
sliding parts within
A/T
Replace the ATF and check for
improper operation of the A/T.
SAT638A
STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1.
2.
Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
SAT647B
3.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA1224E
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
Move the selector lever to the “N” position.
Cool down the ATF.
Revision: October 2004
AT-52
SAT514G
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute.
Stall speed:
A
2,500 - 2,800 rpm
Judgement of Stall Test
B
Selector lever position
D
H
Expected problem location
R
O
Stall rotation
●
Forward brake
●
Forward one-way clutch
●
1st one-way clutch
●
3rd one-way clutch
AT
D
O
H
●
Reverse clutch
L
L
●
Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H
H
●
Line pressure low
E
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
F
Stall test standard value position
G
Does not shift-up D, M position 1 → 2
Slipping in 2nd, 3rd, 4th gears
Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D, M position 2 → 3
Slipping in 3rd, 4th, 5th gears
High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D, M position 3 → 4
Slipping in 4th, 5th gears
Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D, M position 4 → 5
Slipping in 5th gear
Front brake slippage
H
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Line Pressure Test Port
I
J
K
L
SCIA2187E
Line Pressure Test Procedure
1.
2.
M
Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the ATF reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F), then inspect the amount of ATF and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.
Revision: October 2004
AT-53
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3.
After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and
install the oil pressure gauge [ST2505S001(J-34301-C)].
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the Oring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
SCIA5309E
4.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA1224E
5.
6.
Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed.
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the regulation torque below.
: 7.3 N·m (0.74 kg-m, 65 in-lb)
SAT493G
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Line Pressure
Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)]
Engine speed
R position
D, M position
At idle speed
392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64)
373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61)
At stall speed
1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274)
1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)
Revision: October 2004
AT-54
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Judgement of Line Pressure Test
Judgement
A
Possible cause
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
Low for all positions
(P, R, N, D, M)
Idle speed
Only low for a specific position
B
●
Oil pump wear
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
●
Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
●
Engine idle speed too low
AT
Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment function.
For example
High
●
Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
●
ATF temperature sensor malfunction
●
Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in “OFF” state, filter clog, cut line)
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
D
E
F
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example
Oil pressure does
not rise higher than
the oil pressure for
idle.
Stall speed
The pressure rises,
but does not enter
the standard position.
Only low for a specific position
●
Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
●
TCM breakdown
●
Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in“ ON” state)
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
●
Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
G
H
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example
●
Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
●
Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
●
Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
J
Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
ROAD TEST
Description
●
●
1.
2.
3.
●
●
K
L
The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
The road test is carried out in the following three stages.
Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-56 .
Check at idle. Refer to AT-56 .
Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-57 , AT-59 , AT-60 .
Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.
Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are complete.
Revision: October 2004
I
AT-55
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Check Before Engine is Started
ECS00AWN
1. CHECK AT CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
Does AT CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch to "OFF" position.
2. Carry out the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostic worksheet. Refer to AT87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
3. Go to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
NO
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-186, "AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" .
Check at Idle
ECS00AWO
1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine start in either position?
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
YES >> Enter a check mark at "In "N" Position Vehicle Moves When Pushed" on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
AT-56
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS
A
1. Start the engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
B
3. Release the parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Enter a check mark at "In "P" Position Vehicle Moves" on the diagnostics worksheet, then conAT
tinue the road test.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
D
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
YES >> Enter a check mark at "Large Shock ("N" to "D” Position)" on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS
7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS
Cruise Test - Part 1
I
K
L
ECS00AWP
1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1
M
Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and ATF.
Appropriate temperature for the ATF: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Move selector lever to “P” position.
Start the engine.
Move selector lever to “D” position.
Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
Read off the gear positions.
Starts from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Cannot be Started From D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
Revision: October 2004
H
J
Inspect whether the vehicle creeps forward when the transmission is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” positions?
YES >> Go to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part
3" .
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In "D" Position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F
G
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Release the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In "R" Position” on the diagnostics
worksheet, then continue the road test.
1.
E
AT-57
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
Revision: October 2004
AT-58
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK LOCK-UP
A
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
B
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T.
Does it lock-up?
AT
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
D
CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD
7.
E
Does it maintain lock-up status?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE
F
G
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T.
Does lock-up cancel?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up Is Not Released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test.
9. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4
H
I
J
Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position and engine speed.
When the A/T shift-down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-59 ).
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-59 ).
Cruise Test - Part 2
ECS00AWQ
1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1
1.
2.
Move selector lever the “D” position.
Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Does it start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
Revision: October 2004
AT-59
2005 Titan
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2)
at the correct speed.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift: D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3)
at the correct speed.
●
Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift: D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE
When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. See AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift: D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 3
ECS00AWR
1. IDENTIFY SHIFTER LOCATION
Identify the shifter location.
Is the shifter located on the steering column?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
2. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION
Move to manual mode from D position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode (Column Shift)”
on diagnostics worksheet.
Revision: October 2004
AT-60
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
A
During manual mode driving, move gear selector from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1.
With CONSULT-II
B
Read the gear position.
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, AT
3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
4. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
D
During D5 driving, move gear selector from D → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd,
3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
E
F
5. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
G
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position (column shift) or 11 position (floor shift)?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Carry out the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue trouble diagnosis.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-61
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears
ECS00AWS
NORMAL MODE
Final
gear
ratio
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
Full throttle
70 - 74
(44 - 46)
112 - 120
(70 - 75)
176 - 186
(110 - 116)
249 - 259
(155 - 161)
245 - 255
(152 - 159)
166 - 176
(103 - 110)
100 - 108
(62 - 67)
43 - 47
(27 - 30)
Half throttle
46 - 50
(29 - 31)
74 - 82
(46 - 51)
103 - 113
(64 - 71)
135 - 145
(84 - 90)
109 - 119
(68 - 74)
69 - 79
(43 - 49)
44 - 52
(28 - 33)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
Full throttle
61 - 65
(38 - 41)
97 - 105
(61 - 66)
153 - 163
(95 - 102)
236 - 246
(147 - 153)
232 - 242
(144 - 151)
143 - 153
(89 - 95)
87 - 95
(54 - 59)
43 - 47
(27 - 30)
Half throttle
41 - 45
(26 - 28)
66 - 74
(41 - 46)
89 - 99
(56 - 62)
117 - 127
(73 - 79)
95 - 105
(59 - 66)
59 - 69
(37 - 43)
38 - 46
(24 - 29)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
2.937
3.357
●
At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
TOW MODE
Final
gear
ratio
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
Full throttle
70 - 74
(44 - 46)
112 - 120
(70 - 75)
176 - 186
(110 - 116)
249 - 259
(155 - 161)
245 - 255
(152 - 159)
166 - 176
(103 - 110)
100 - 108
(62 - 67)
43 - 47
(27 - 30)
Half throttle
50 - 54
(31 - 34)
81 - 89
(50 - 55)
113 - 123
(70 - 76)
135 - 145
(84 - 90)
109 - 119
(68 - 74)
69 - 79
(43 - 49)
44 - 52
(28 - 33)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
Full throttle
61 - 65
(38 - 41)
97 - 105
(61 - 66)
153 - 163
(95 - 102)
236 - 246
(147 - 153)
232 - 242
(144 - 151)
143 - 153
(89 - 95)
87 - 95
(54 - 59)
43 - 47
(27 - 30)
Half throttle
46 - 50
(28 - 31)
72 - 80
(45 - 50)
98 - 108
(61 - 67)
117 - 127
(73 - 79)
95 - 105
(59 - 66)
59 - 69
(37 - 43)
38 - 46
(24 - 29)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
2.937
3.357
●
At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up
Final
gear
ratio
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Closed throttle
2.937
Half throttle
Closed throttle
3.357
ECS00AWT
Half throttle
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
74 - 82 (46 - 51)
71 - 79 (45 - 49)
188 - 196 (117 - 122)
136 - 144 (85 - 90)
65 - 73 (41 - 46)
62 - 70 (39 - 44)
168 - 176 (105 - 110)
118 - 126 (74 - 79)
●
At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition.
●
At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up
Final
gear
ratio
Throttle position
2.937
Closed throttle
3.357
●
ECS00AWU
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Closed throttle
Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
52 - 60 (33 - 38)
49 - 57 (31 - 36)
5th
52 - 60 (33 - 38)
49 - 57 (31 - 36)
4th
46 - 54 (29 - 34)
43 - 51 (27 - 32)
5th
46 - 54 (29 - 34)
43 - 51 (27 - 32)
At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition.
Revision: October 2004
AT-62
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Chart
ECS00AWV
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
Overhaul and inspect inside the A/T only if A/T fluid condition is NG. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" .
●
●
No.
Items
Symptom
Large shock. (“N” →“
D” position)
Refer to AT-189,
"Large Shock (“N” to
“D” Position)" .
1
Condition
2
Shock is too large
when changing D1 →
D2 , 11 → 22 or M1
→ M2 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
3
Shock is too large
when changing D2 →
D3 , 22 → 33 or M2
→ M3 .
EC-76
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
5. ATF temperature sensor
AT-127
6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
7. CAN communication line
AT-97
8. Fluid level and state
AT-52
9. Line pressure test
AT-53
10. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
ON vehicle
AT-283
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
AT-114
6. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
8. Fluid level and state
AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
10. Direct clutch
AT-317
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Engine speed signal
AT-114
6. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
10. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
AT-63
D
E
F
H
I
AT-97
5. Engine speed signal
8. Fluid level and state
AT
G
11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
4. CAN communication line
B
Reference
page
1. Engine idle speed
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Shift
Shock
Diagnostic Item
A
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Shock is too large
when changing D3 →
D4 , 33 → 44 or M3
→ M4 .
4
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Engine speed signal
AT-114
6. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
8. Fluid level and state
AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
10. Input clutch
AT-305
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. CAN communication line
5
Shift
Shock
Shock is too large
when changing D4 →
D5 , 44 → D5 or M4
→ M5 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
6
Shock is too large for
downshift when accelerator pedal is
pressed.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Reference
page
AT-97
5. Engine speed signal
AT-114
6. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
8. Fluid level and state
AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
10. Front brake (brake band)
AT-271
11. Input clutch
AT-305
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. Engine speed signal
AT-114
5. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
7. Fluid level and state
AT-52
8. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
9. Front brake (brake band)
AT-271
10. Input clutch
AT-305
11. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
12. Direct clutch
AT-317
AT-64
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Shock is too large for
upshift when accelerator pedal is released.
7
OFF vehicle
Shift
Shock
8
Shock is too large for
lock-up.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
9
Shock is too large
during engine brake.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. Engine speed signal
AT-114
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
7. Fluid level and state
AT-52
8. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
9. Front brake (brake band)
AT-271
10. Input clutch
AT-305
11. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
12. Direct clutch
AT-317
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. Engine speed signal
AT-114
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
8. Fluid level and state
AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
10. Torque converter
AT-283
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. Fluid level and state
AT-52
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. Front brake (brake band)
AT-271
7. Input clutch
AT-305
8. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
9. Direct clutch
AT-317
AT-65
2005 Titan
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
Gear does not change
from D1 → D2 .
Refer to AT-200, "A/T
Does Not Shift: D1 →
D2" .
10
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Gear does not change
from D2 → D3 .
Refer to AT-202, "A/T
Does Not Shift: D2 →
D3" .
11
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
12
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
4. Line pressure test
AT-53
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Direct clutch
AT-317
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
4. Line pressure test
AT-53
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
13
Gear does not change
from D4 → D5 .
Refer to AT-207, "A/T
Does Not Shift: D4 →
D5" .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
AT-52
AT-109,
AT-134
No Up
Shift
Gear does not change
from D3 → D4 .
Refer to AT-204, "A/T
Does Not Shift: D3 →
D4" .
Reference
page
5. Line pressure test
AT-53
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Input clutch
AT-305
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
5. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. CAN communication line
AT-97
8. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
9. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
10. Input clutch
AT-305
AT-66
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
In D, 4 or M range,
does not downshift to
4th gear.
Refer to AT-215, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 5th
gear → 4th gear
(Floor Shift Models)" .
14
15
No Down
Shift
In D, 3 or M range,
does not downshift to
3rd gear.
Refer to AT-220, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 4th
gear → 3rd gear
(Floor Shift Models)" .
OFF vehicle
16
In D, 2 or M range,
does not downshift to
2nd gear.
Refer to AT-224, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 3rd
gear → 2nd gear
(Floor Shift Models)" .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
17
In D, 1 or M range,
does not downshift to
1st gear.
Refer to AT-228, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 2nd
gear → 1st gear
(Floor Shift Models)" .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
9. Input clutch
AT-305
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
ON vehicle
A
AT-52
AT-109,
AT-134
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Reference
page
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Input clutch
AT-305
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Line pressure test
AT-53
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Line pressure test
AT-53
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Direct clutch
AT-317
AT-67
2005 Titan
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
ON vehicle
When D or M position,
remains in 1st gear.
18
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
engage
19
When D or M position,
remains in 2nd gear.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-149
4. Line pressure test
AT-53
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
8. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
9. Gear system
AT-271
10. Reverse brake
AT-283
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
ON vehicle
Reference
page
AT-109 ,
AT-134
3. Low coast brake solenoid valve
AT-157
4. Line pressure test
AT-53
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
8. Gear system
AT-271
9. Direct clutch
AT-317
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
AT-68
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
ON vehicle
When D or M position,
remains in 3rd gear.
20
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
engage
ON vehicle
21
When D or M position,
remains in 4th gear.
OFF vehicle
Reference
page
A
AT-52
AT-109,
AT-134
B
3. Line pressure test
AT-53
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
7. Gear system
AT-271
8. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
E
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
F
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,AT149
5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
6. Low coast brake solenoid valve
AT-157
7. Front brake solenoid valve
AT-145
8. Line pressure test
AT-53
9. CAN communication line
AT-97
10. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
11. Input clutch
AT-305
12. Gear system
AT-271
13. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
14. Direct clutch
AT-317
AT
D
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-69
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
ON vehicle
When D or M position,
remains in 5th gear.
22
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
Engage
23
Vehicle cannot be
started from D1 .
Refer to AT-197,
"Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
OFF vehicle
24
Does not lock-up.
Refer to AT-209, "A/T
Does Not Perform
Lock-up" .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Reference
page
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. Line pressure test
AT-53
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
8. Input clutch
AT-305
9. Gear system
AT-271
10. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
3. Line pressure test
AT-53
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. Torque converter
AT-283
7. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
8. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
9. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. Reverse brake
AT-283
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Engine speed signal
AT-114
4. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
AT-70
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Does not hold lock-up
condition.
Refer to AT-211, "A/T
Does Not Hold Lockup Condition" .
25
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Lock-up is not
released.
Refer to AT-213,
"Lock-up Is Not
Released" .
26
Slips/Will
Not
engage
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
27
No shock at all or the
clutch slips when
vehicle changes
speed D1 → D2 , 11
→ 22 or M1 → M2 .
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Engine speed signal
AT-114
4. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Engine speed signal
AT-114
4. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Line pressure test
AT-53
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. Direct clutch
AT-317
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
AT-71
2005 Titan
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
ON vehicle
No shock at all or the
clutch slips when
vehicle changes
speed D2 → D3 , 22
→ 33 or M2 → M3 .
28
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
engage
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Line pressure test
AT-53
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
ON vehicle
29
AT-52
AT-109,
AT-134
1. Fluid level and state
No shock at all or the
clutch slips when
vehicle changes
speed D3 → D4 , 33
→ 44 or M3 → M4 .
Reference
page
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
10. Input clutch
AT-305
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
13. Direct clutch
AT-317
AT-72
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
30
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
engage
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
10. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
11. Input clutch
AT-305
12. Gear system
AT-271
13. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
ON vehicle
31
When you press the
accelerator pedal and
shift speed D5 → D4 ,
D5 → 44 or M5 →M4
the engine idles or the
transmission slips.
OFF vehicle
A
AT-52
AT-109,
AT-134
ON vehicle
No shock at all or the
clutch slips when
vehicle changes
speed D4 → D5 , 44
→ D5 or M4 → M5 .
Reference
page
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
10. Input clutch
AT-305
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
13. Direct clutch
AT-317
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-73
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
32
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
engage
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
10. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
ON vehicle
33
When you press the
accelerator pedal and
shift speed D3 → D2 ,
33 → 22 or M3 →M2
the engine idles or the
transmission slips.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
AT-52
AT-109,
AT-134
ON vehicle
When you press the
accelerator pedal and
shift speed D4 → D3 ,
44 → 33 or M4 →M3
the engine idles or the
transmission slips.
Reference
page
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Line pressure test
AT-53
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
10. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. Direct clutch
AT-317
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
AT-74
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
ON vehicle
When you press the
accelerator pedal and
shift speed D2 → D1 ,
22 → 11 or M2 →M1
the engine idles or the
transmission slips.
34
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
Engage
ON vehicle
35
With selector lever in
D position, acceleration is extremely poor.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Reference
page
AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Line pressure test
AT-53
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
10. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. Reverse brake
AT-283
13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. PNP switch
AT-105
6. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
10. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. Reverse brake
AT-283
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
AT-75
A
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
With selector lever in
R position, acceleration is extremely poor.
36
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
37
Slips/Will
Not
Engage
While starting off by
accelerating in 1st,
engine races or slippage occurs.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
AT-172,
AT-153
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. PNP switch
AT-105
7. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
8. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
9. Gear system
AT-271
10. Output shaft
AT-283
11. Reverse brake
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. Torque converter
AT-283
7. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
8. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
9. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. Reverse brake
AT-283
12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
38
While accelerating in
2nd, engine races or
slippage occurs.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Reference
page
AT-170,
AT-149
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. Direct clutch
AT-317
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
AT-76
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
While accelerating in
3rd, engine races or
slippage occurs.
39
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not
Engage
ON vehicle
40
While accelerating in
4th, engine races or
slippage occurs.
OFF vehicle
Reference
page
AT-172,
AT-153
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. 3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
A
B
AT
D
E
F
AT-97
5. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-168,
AT-141
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. Input clutch
AT-305
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
12. Direct clutch
AT-317
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-77
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
While accelerating in
5th, engine races or
slippage occurs.
41
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
42
Slips at lock-up.
Slips/Will
Not
Engage
OFF vehicle
43
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
AT-166,
AT-145
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
10. Input clutch
AT-305
11. Gear system
AT-271
12. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Engine speed signal
AT-114
4. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Torque converter
AT-283
9. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
5. PNP switch
AT-105
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
8. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
9. Torque converter
AT-283
10. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
11. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
12. Gear system
AT-271
13. Reverse brake
AT-283
14. Direct clutch
AT-317
15. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
16. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
ON vehicle
No creep at all.
Refer to AT-192,
"Vehicle Does Not
Creep Backward In
“R” Position" , AT-195,
"Vehicle Does Not
Creep Forward In “D”
Position"
Reference
page
AT-78
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Vehicle cannot run in
all positions.
44
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
45
Slips/Will
Not
Engage
With selector lever in
D position, driving is
not possible.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
With selector lever in
R position, driving is
not possible.
46
OFF vehicle
47
Others
Shift point is high in D
position.
Revision: October 2004
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. PNP switch
AT-105
4. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
7. Gear system
AT-271
8. Output shaft
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. PNP switch
AT-105
4. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. Torque converter
AT-283
7. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
8. 1st one-way clutch
AT-310
9. Gear system
AT-271
10. Reverse brake
AT-283
11. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. PNP switch
AT-105
4. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
6. Gear system
AT-271
7. Output shaft
AT-283
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
8. Reverse brake
AT-283
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-127
5. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
AT-79
A
2005 Titan
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Shift point is low in D
position.
48
Judder occurs during
lock-up.
49
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “R”
position.
Others
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
51
Strange noise in “N”
position.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
52
Strange noise in “D”
position.
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Reference
page
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
4. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
5. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
50
Diagnostic Item
Condition
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
8. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
9. Torque converter
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
5. Torque converter
AT-283
6. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
7. Gear system
AT-271
8. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
9. Reverse brake
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
5. Torque converter
AT-283
6. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
7. Gear system
AT-271
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. CAN communication line
AT-97
4. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
5. Torque converter
AT-283
6. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
7. Gear system
AT-271
8. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
AT-80
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Vehicle dose not
decelerate by engine
brake.
Refer to AT-233,
"Vehicle Does Not
Decelerate By Engine
Brake" .
53
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
54
Others
Engine brake does
not operate in “2”
position.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
55
Engine brake does
not operate in “1”
position.
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. PNP switch
AT-105
2. Fluid level and state
AT-52
3. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
4. 1st position switch
AT-233
5. ATF pressure switch 5
AT-170
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Input clutch
AT-305
9. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
10. Direct clutch
AT-317
1. PNP switch
AT-105
2. Fluid level and state
AT-52
3. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
5. ATF pressure switch 6
AT-172
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
9. Input clutch
AT-305
10. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
1. PNP switch
AT-105
2. Fluid level and state
AT-52
3. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
4. 1st position switch
AT-233
5. ATF pressure switch 5
AT-170
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Input clutch
AT-305
9. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
10. Direct clutch
AT-317
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-81
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
56
Maximum speed low.
OFF vehicle
Others
57
Extremely large
creep.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
58
59
With selector lever in
P position, vehicle
does not enter parking
condition or, with
selector lever in
another position, parking condition is not
cancelled.
Refer to AT-187, "In
“P” Position, Vehicle
Moves When Pushed"
.
Vehicle runs with
transmission in “ P”
position.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Line pressure test
AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
4. CAN communication line
AT-97
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-149
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
8. Oil pump assembly
AT-300
9. Input clutch
AT-305
10. Gear system
AT-271
11. High and low reverse clutch
AT-315
12. Direct clutch
AT-317
13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
14 Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
1. Engine idle speed
EC-76
2. CAN communication line
AT-97
3. ATF pressure switch 5
AT-170
4. Torque converter
AT-283
1. PNP switch
AT-105
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. Parking pawl components
AT-271
1. PNP switch
AT-105
2. Fluid level and state
AT-52
3. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
4. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
5. Parking pawl components
AT-271
6. Gear system
AT-271
AT-82
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Vehicle runs with
transmission in “N”
position.
Refer to AT-188, "In
“N” Position, Vehicle
Moves" .
60
Engine does not start
in “N” or “P” position.
Refer to AT-186,
"Engine Cannot Be
Started In “P” or “N”
Position" .
61
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. PNP switch
AT-105
2. Fluid level and state
AT-52
3. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
4. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
5. Input clutch
AT-305
6. Gear system
AT-271
7. Direct clutch
AT-317
8. Reverse brake
AT-283
9. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-15 , AT-16 .)
AT-283
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16
.)
AT-283
62
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
63
Engine stall.
OFF vehicle
64
Engine stalls when
select lever shifted “N”
→ “D”, “R”.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: October 2004
PG-4, SC10
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. PNP switch
AT-105
1. Ignition switch and starter
PG-4, SC10
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-238
3. PNP switch
AT-105
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
1. Fluid level and state
AT-52
2. Engine speed signal
AT-114
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-132
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-116
5. CAN communication line
AT-97
6. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
7. Torque converter
AT-283
AT-83
A
B
AT
D
E
F
1. Ignition switch and starter
Others
Engine starts in positions other than “N” or
“P”.
Reference
page
2005 Titan
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Reference
page
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
65
Engine speed does
not return to idle.
Refer to AT-214,
"Engine Speed Does
Not Return To Idle" .
Others
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
AT-52
2. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-170,
AT-149
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-166,
AT-145
4. Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-124
5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-109,
AT-134
6. CAN communication line
AT-97
7. Control valve with TCM
AT-250
8. Front brake (brake band)
AT-283
9. Direct clutch
AT-317
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values
ECS00AWW
A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
SCIA1658E
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal
Wire
Item
Condition
No.
color
Data (Approx.)
1
P
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Always
Battery voltage
2
P
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Always
Battery voltage
3
L
CAN-H
4
V
K-line (CONSULTII signal)
5
B
Ground
6
7
8
BR *1
Y/R *2
R
P
–
–
The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II.
Always
–
0V
–
Battery voltage
–
0V
Selector lever in “R” position.
0V
Selector lever in other positions.
Battery voltage
Power supply
Back-up lamp
relay
CAN-L
Revision: October 2004
–
AT-84
–
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
9
B/R
10
B
Item
Condition
Starter relay
Data (Approx.)
Selector lever in “N”,“ P” positions.
Battery voltage
Selector lever in other positions.
0V
Ground
Always
A
B
0V
*1: Column shift
*2: Floor shift
AT
CONSULT-II FUNCTION (A/T)
ECS00CBV
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
D
FUNCTION
TCM diagnostic mode
Description
E
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status
suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is
displayed.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays TCM self-diagnosis results.
DATA MONITOR
Displays TCM input/output data in real time.
F
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is “OK” or
“NG”.
ECU PART NUMBER
TCM part number can be read.
G
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE
I
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
–
Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
–
Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
–
Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
Item name
Condition
ATF TEMP SE 1
ATF TEMP SE 2
TCC SOLENOID
SLCT LVR POSI
Revision: October 2004
H
Display value (Approx.)
2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V
0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V
When perform slip lock-up
0.2 - 0.4 A
When perform lock-up
0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever in “N”,“P” position.
N/P
Selector lever in “R” position.
R
Selector lever in “D” position.
D
Selector lever in “4” position.
4
Selector lever in “3” position.
3
Selector lever in “2” position.
2
Selector lever in “1” position.
1
AT-85
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Item name
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
VHCL/S SE·A/T
During driving
Approximately matches the
speedometer reading.
ENGINE SPEED
Engine running
Closely matches the tachometer
reading.
LINE PRES SOL
During driving
0.2 - 0.6 A
TURBINE REV
During driving (lock-up ON)
Approximately matches the
engine speed.
VHCL/S SE·MTR
During driving
Approximately matches the
speedometer reading.
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
ON
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
OFF
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
ON
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
OFF
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
ON
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
OFF
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20
ON
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20
OFF
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
0.6 - 0.8 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
0 - 0.05 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
0.6 - 0.8 A
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
0.6 - 0.8 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20
0.6 - 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20
0 - 0.05 A
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20
OFF
Selector lever in “N”,“P” position.
ON
ATF PRES SW 1
ATF PRES SW 2
ATF PRES SW 3
ATF PRES SW 5
ATF PRES SW 6
I/C SOLENOID
FR/B SOLENOID
D/C SOLENOID
HLR/C SOL
ON OFF SOL
STARTER RELAY
ACCELE POSI
THROTTLE POSI
CLSD THL POS
W/O THL POS
BRAKE SW
Revision: October 2004
Selector lever in other position.
OFF
Released accelerator pedal.
0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
8/8
Released accelerator pedal.
0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
8/8
Released accelerator pedal.
ON
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
ON
Released accelerator pedal.
OFF
Depressed brake pedal.
ON
Released brake pedal.
OFF
AT-86
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
A
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
B
●
For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
AT
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
D
BDIA0013E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
E
F
G
H
BCIA0029E
5.
6.
Touch “A/T”.
If “A/T” or “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II
Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
I
J
K
L
BCIA0030E
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
Operation Procedure
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-87 ), place check
marks for results on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the
items.
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
Revision: October 2004
AT-87
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
BCIA0031E
Display Items List
X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Malfunction is detected when...
TCM selfdiagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
“A/T” with
CONSULT-II
MIL indicator
lamp*1,
“ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II or
GST
●
When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications
U1000
U1000
●
If this signal is ON other than in P or N position, this is
judged to be a malfunction.
(And if it is OFF in P or N position, this too is judged to be a
malfunction.)
P0615
—
●
TCM is malfunctioning
P0700
P0700
●
PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern
●
P position is detected from N position without any other
position being detected in between.
P0705
P0705
●
Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor)
not input due to cut line or the like
●
Unexpected signal input during running
P0720
P0720
●
After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input
from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts
moving
●
TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from
the ECM.
P0725
—
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
short, or the like
P0740
P0740
●
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value
with slip rotation.
P0744
P0744*2
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
short, or the like
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
P0745
P0745
●
TCM·RAM
●
TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.
P1702
—
TCM·ROM
●
TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning.
P1703
—
●
TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position
signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
P1705
—
●
During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage
is excessively high or low
P1710
P0710
●
TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the
sensor.
TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for
turbine revolution sensor 2.
P1716
P1716
●
STARTER RELAY/CIRC
TCM
PNP SW/CIRC
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT (Revolution
sensor)
ENGINE SPEED SIG
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
TURBINE REV S/CIRC
Revision: October 2004
AT-88
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
Malfunction is detected when...
●
VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR
OBD-II (DTC)
“A/T” with
CONSULT-II
MIL indicator
lamp*1,
“ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II or
GST
P1721
—
●
Unexpected signal input during running
●
Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pressure switch states are monitored and comparative judgement made.
P1730
P1730
Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is monitored and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st
gear other than in the “M1” or “1” position, a malfunction is
detected.
P1731
—
A/T INTERLOCK
●
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
●
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
●
TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
●
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
short, or the like
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
●
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
●
TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN
HLR/C SOL/CIRC
AT-89
A
B
AT
D
E
F
P1752
P1752
G
P1754
P1754*2
H
I
P1757
P1757
J
K
P1759
P1759*2
TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
●
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC
Revision: October 2004
Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor
MTR not input due to cut line or the like
TCM selfdiagnosis
L
P1762
P1762
P1764
P1764*2
P1767
P1767
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
Malfunction is detected when...
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT
MANU MODE SW/CIRC
“A/T” with
CONSULT-II
MIL indicator
lamp*1,
“ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II or
GST
P1769
P1769*2
P1772
P1772
P1774
P1774*2
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
●
TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
●
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
●
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
●
Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear
ratio is irregular.
●
When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a
malfunction is detected.
P1815
—
●
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
P1841
—
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
P1843
—
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
P1845
—
TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
P1846
—
X
X
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC
●
ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC
●
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC
●
ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC
NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED
OBD-II (DTC)
●
HLR/C SOL FNCTN
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC
TCM selfdiagnosis
●
No NG item has been detected.
*1: Refer to AT-42, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results
1.
2.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Touch “SELF-DAIG RESULTS”.
BCIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
AT-90
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3.
Touch “ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)
A
B
AT
PCIA0061E
D
DATA MONITOR MODE
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs
“REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS”. Also, any malfunction detected
while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
E
F
G
H
I
BCIA0031E
Display Items List
X: Standard, —: Not applicable
J
Monitor Item Selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h)
X
X
X
VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h)
X
—
X
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8)
X
—
X
Accelerator pedal position signal
Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM
For fail-safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
Monitored item (Unit)
Remarks
K
Revolution sensor
L
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8)
X
X
X
CLSD THL POS (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
W/O THL POS (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
BRAKE SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
Stop lamp switch
GEAR
—
X
X
Gear position recognized by the TCM
updated after gear-shifting
ENGINE SPEED (rpm)
X
X
X
TURBINE REV (rpm)
X
X
X
OUTPUT REV (rpm)
X
X
X
GEAR RATIO
—
X
X
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm)
—
X
X
F SUN GW REV (rpm)
—
—
X
Revision: October 2004
AT-91
Signal input with CAN communications
Difference between engine speed and
torque converter input shaft speed
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitor Item Selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
F CARR GR REV (rpm)
—
—
X
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V)
X
—
X
ATF TEMP SE 2 (V)
X
—
X
ATF TEMP 1 (°C)
—
X
X
ATF TEMP 2 (°C)
—
X
X
BATTERY VOLT (V)
X
—
X
ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF display)
X
X
X
(for FR/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF display)
X
X
X
(for LC/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 3 (ON-OFF display)
X
X
X
(for I/C solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 5 (ON-OFF display)
X
X
X
(for D/C solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 6 (ON-OFF display)
X
X
X
(for HLR/C solenoid)
PNP SW 1 (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
PNP SW 2 (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
PNP SW 3 (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
PNP SW 4 (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
Monitored item (Unit)
Remarks
SLCTLVR POSI
—
X
X
Selector lever position is recognized by
the TCM.
For fail-safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
4th position switch
POWER SHIFT SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
Not mounted but displayed.
HOLD SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF display)
X
—
X
SFT UP ST SW (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
SFT DWN ST SW (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
ASCD·OD CUT (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
ASCD·CRUISE (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
ABS SIGNAL (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
ACC OD CUT (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
ACC SIGNAL (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
TCC SOLENOID (A)
—
X
X
LINE PRES SOL (A)
—
X
X
I/C SOLENOID (A)
—
X
X
FR/B SOLENOID (A)
—
X
X
D/C SOLENOID (A)
—
X
X
HLR/C SOL (A)
—
X
X
Revision: October 2004
AT-92
Not mounted but displayed.
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitor Item Selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
TCC SOL MON (A)
—
—
X
L/P SOL MON (A)
—
—
X
I/C SL MON (A)
—
—
X
FR/B SOL MON (A)
—
—
X
D/C SOL MON (A)
—
—
X
HLR/C SOL MON (A)
—
—
X
ONOFF SOL MON (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
P POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
R POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
N POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
D POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
4TH POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
3RD POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
2ND POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
1ST POSI IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
MANU MODE IND (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
POWER M LAMP (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
F-SAFE IND/L (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
ATF WARN LAMP (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
BACK-UP LAMP (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
STARTER RELAY (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
PNP SW3 MON (ON-OFF display)
—
—
X
C/V CLB ID1
—
—
X
C/V CLB ID2
—
—
X
C/V CLB ID3
—
—
X
UNIT CLB ID1
—
—
X
UNIT CLB ID2
—
—
X
UNIT CLB ID3
—
—
X
TRGT GR RATIO
—
—
X
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa)
—
—
X
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa)
—
—
X
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa)
—
—
X
TRGT PRES FR/B (kPa)
—
—
X
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa)
—
—
X
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa)
—
—
X
SHIFT PATTERN
—
—
X
DRV CST JUDGE
—
—
X
START RLY MON
—
—
X
NEXT GR POSI
—
—
X
SHIFT MODE
—
—
X
MANU GR POSI
—
—
X
Monitored item (Unit)
Revision: October 2004
AT-93
A
Remarks
B
LC/B solenoid
AT
D
LC/B solenoid
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitor Item Selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h)
—
X
X
Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
Voltage (V)
—
—
X
Displays the value measured by the voltage probe.
Frequency (Hz)
—
—
X
DUTY·HI (high) (%)
—
—
X
DUTY·LOW (low) (%)
—
—
X
PLS WIDTH·HI (ms)
—
—
X
PLS WIDTH·LOW (ms)
—
—
X
Monitored item (Unit)
Remarks
The value measured by the pulse probe
is displayed.
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
BCIA0031E
3.
Touch select item menu.
SCIA0512E
4.
Touch “START”.
SCIA5159E
Revision: October 2004
AT-94
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5.
Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
A
B
AT
SCIA5160E
D
●
When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
E
F
G
SCIA5161E
6.
Stop vehicle.
H
I
J
SCIA5164E
●
If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go
to “Diagnostic Procedure”.
K
L
M
SCIA5162E
Revision: October 2004
AT-95
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7.
8.
9.
Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with
instructions displayed.
Touch “YES” or “NO”.
CONSULT-II procedure is ended.
SCIA5163E
●
If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go
to “Diagnostic Procedure”.
SCIA5162E
Display Items List
DTC work support item
Description
Check item
I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK*
—
—
FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK*
—
—
D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK*
—
—
HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK*
—
—
LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK*
—
—
Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be confirmed.
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK
●
●
Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
or not)
●
TCC solenoid valve
●
Hydraulic control circuit
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
*: Do not use, but displayed.
Revision: October 2004
AT-96
2005 Titan
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:23710
A
ECS00AWY
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. B
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
AT
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AWZ
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot
communicate to other control units.
E
Possible Cause
ECS00AX0
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AX1
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
G
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-99, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
K
SAT014K
WITH GST
L
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-97
2005 Titan
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN
ECS00CBW
BCWA0320E
Revision: October 2004
AT-98
2005 Titan
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground
Terminal
Wire
Color
Item
Condition
Data (Approx.)
3
L
CAN-H
-
-
8
P
CAN-L
-
-
Diagnostic Procedure
A
B
ECS00AX2
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
AT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated?
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section.
Refer to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II"
.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
D
E
F
G
PCIA0061E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-99
2005 Titan
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:25230
ECS00AX3
TCM prohibits cranking other than at "P" or "N" position.
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AX4
Item name
Condition
Display value
Selector lever in “N”,“P” position.
ON
Selector lever in other position.
OFF
STARTER RELAY
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AX5
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when park/neutral
(PNP) relay (starter relay) is switched “ON” other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or when switched “OFF” at
“P” or “N” position).
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00AX6
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) relay (starter relay) and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
Park/neutral position (PNP) relay (starter relay)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AX7
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-102, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
Revision: October 2004
AT-100
2005 Titan
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG
ECS00CBX
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0321E
Revision: October 2004
AT-101
2005 Titan
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
9
B/R
Data (Approx.)
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions.
Battery voltage
Selector lever in other positions.
0V
Starter relay
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CBY
1. CHECK STARTER RELAY
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF.
Item name
STARTER RELAY
Condition
Display value
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions.
ON
Selector lever in other positions.
OFF
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between the IPDM E/R connector and ground.
Item
Connector
Starter
relay
E122
Terminal
(Wirer color)
48
(B/R)
Ground
Shift position
PCIA0056E
Voltage (Approx.)
“N” and “P”
Battery voltage
“R” and “D”
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LCIA0320E
2.
CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR AND IPDM E/R CONNEC-
TOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector and
IPDM E/R connector.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness connector
F9
9 (B/R)
E122
48 (B/R)
IPDM E/R connector
Continuity
Yes
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
AT-102
LCIA0388E
2005 Titan
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminal and TCM connector terminal.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness connector
F9
9 (G)
TCM connector
AT
Continuity
D
Yes
F502
B
8 (G)
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
E
SCIA5440E
F
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
G
Check the following items:
●
Starter relay, Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
●
IPDM E/R, Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
I
J
5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-100, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-103
2005 Titan
DTC P0700 TCM
DTC P0700 TCM
Description
PFP:31036
ECS00AX9
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AXA
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0700 TCM” with CONSULT-II is detected when the TCM is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
ECS00AXB
TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AXC
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-104, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AXD
1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-104, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250,
"CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-104
SCIA5304E
2005 Titan
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description
PFP:32006
A
ECS00AXE
The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch.
The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AXF
Item name
Condition
Display value
Selector lever in “N”,“P” positions.
N/P
Selector lever in “R” position.
R
Selector lever in “D” position.
D
Selector lever in “4” position.
4
Selector lever in “3” position.
3
Selector lever in “2” position.
2
Selector lever in “1” position.
1
SLCTLVR POSI
●
–
–
●
D
E
ECS00AXG
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0705 PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4 based on the gear
position.
When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” positions.
Possible Cause
●
AT
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
B
ECS00AXH
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-105
K
L
M
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
If DTC is detected, go to AT-107, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
I
ECS00AXI
WITH CONSULT-II
5.
H
J
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
2005 Titan
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
ECS00CBZ
BCWA0334E
Revision: October 2004
AT-106
2005 Titan
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC0
1. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Check if correct selector lever position (N/P, R or D) is displayed
as selector lever is moved into each position.
B
1.
2.
Item name
Condition
D
Display value
Selector lever in "N", "P" positions.
SLCTLVR POSI
AT
N/P
Selector lever in "R" position.
R
Selector lever in "D" position.
D
Selector lever in "4" position.
4
Selector lever in "3" position.
3
Selector lever in "2" position.
2
Selector lever in "1" position.
1
E
PCIA0034E
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
I
J
K
Check the following items:
●
A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-107
2005 Titan
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
1 (BR)
TCM connector
F503
13 (BR)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
2 (W)
TCM connector
F503
11 (W)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
3 (GR)
TCM connector
F503
12 (GR)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
5 (L)
TCM connector
F503
14 (L)
Continuity
Yes
Yes
SCIA5457E
Yes
Yes
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-105, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-108
2005 Titan
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
PFP:32702
A
ECS00AXK
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal.
The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AXL
Item name
VHCL/S SE·A/T
Condition
Display value (km/h)
During driving
Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
●
AT
ECS00AXM
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
After ignition switch is turned “ON”, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving.
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed sensor MTR
ECS00AXO
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T”
value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
SAT014K
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
F
H
WITH CONSULT-II
6.
E
G
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
4.
5.
D
ECS00AXN
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
B
AT-109
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-110
2005 Titan
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
ECS00CC1
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0322E
Revision: October 2004
AT-111
2005 Titan
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC2
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
1.
2.
Item name
Condition
Display value (km/h)
VHCL/S SE·A/T
During driving
Approximately matches
the speedometer reading.
SCIA2148E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-112
2005 Titan
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
8 (Y)
TCM connector
F503
20 (Y)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
9 (R)
TCM connector
F503
17 (R)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
10 (B)
TCM connector
F503
AT
Continuity
D
Yes
E
Yes
SCIA5458E
F
Yes
16 (B)
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
5. REPLACE THE REVOLUTION SENSOR AND CHECK DTC
I
1. Replace the revolution sensor. Refer to AT-283, "Disassembly" .
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-109, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
6. CHECK DTC
J
K
L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-109, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
B
AT-113
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description
PFP:24825
ECS00AXQ
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AXR
Item name
ENGINE SPEED
Condition
Display value (rpm)
Engine running
Closely matches the tachometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AXS
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not
receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or running.
Possible Cause
ECS00AXT
Harness or connectors
(The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AXU
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8
Selector lever: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-114, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AXV
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-114
2005 Titan
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change
corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal.
1.
2.
Item name
Condition
Display value (rpm)
ENGINE SPEED
Engine running
Closely matches the
tachometer reading.
B
AT
D
PCIA0041E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the ignition signal circuit.
● Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
E
F
3. CHECK DTC
G
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-114, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
H
4. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
I
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
K
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-115
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
ECS00AXW
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , D5 by the TCM in response
to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
●
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AXX
Item name
TCC SOLENOID
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
When performing slip lock-up
0.2 - 0.4
When performing lock-up
0.4 - 0.6
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00AXY
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00AXZ
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AY0
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
SELECTOR LEVER: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If DTC is detected go to AT-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-116
2005 Titan
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AY1
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
B
1.
2.
Item name
TCC SOLENOID
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
When performing slip lock-up
0.2 - 0.4 A
When performing lock-up
0.4 - 0.6 A
AT
D
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA4793E
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
I
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
J
K
L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-116, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
G
AT-117
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
Description
PFP:31940
ECS00AY2
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch
does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or
shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AY3
Item name
TCC SOLENOID
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
When performing slip lock-up
0.2 - 0.4
When performing lock-up
0.4 - 0.6
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00AY4
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
ECS00AY5
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AY6
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
–
–
–
3.
Start engine and Select “TCC S/V FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch
“START”.
Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever: “D” position
[Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50
SAT014K
MPH)]
Make sure “GEAR” shows “5”.
For shift schedule, refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lockup" .
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In
case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC”.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-119, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to shift schedule, AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-118
2005 Titan
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AY7
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
Start the engine.
Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
Item name
TCC SOLENOID
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
When performing slip lock-up
0.2 - 0.4 A
When performing lock-up
0.4 - 0.6 A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
AT
D
E
SCIA4793E
F
G
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
K
L
M
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-118, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
J
AT-119
2005 Titan
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
ECS00AY8
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal sent from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position signal is “ON”.
To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until
the closed throttle position signal is “OFF”.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
LINE PRES SOL
ECS00AY9
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
During driving
0.2 - 0.6
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00AYA
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00AYB
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Line pressure solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AYC
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Engine start and wait at least 5 second.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-121, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-120
2005 Titan
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC3
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving.
B
1.
2.
Item name
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
LINE PRES SOL
During driving
0.2 - 0.6 A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
AT
D
E
SCIA4793E
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
F
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
J
K
4. CHECK DTC
L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-120, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-121
M
2005 Titan
DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)
DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)
Description
PFP:31036
ECS00AYE
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AYF
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1702 TCM·RAM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory RAM is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
ECS00AYG
TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AYH
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AYI
1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”, AT-122, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·RAM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250,
"CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
AT-122
SCIA5304E
2005 Titan
DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)
DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)
Description
PFP:31036
A
ECS00AYJ
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
B
ECS00AYK
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
AT
Diagnostic trouble code “P1703 TCM·ROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory ROM is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
ECS00AYL
D
ECS00AYM
E
TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
F
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Turn ignition switch to “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-123, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
H
I
SAT014K
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AYN
1. CHECK DTC
K
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”, AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·ROM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250,
"CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
J
AT-123
L
M
SCIA5304E
2005 Titan
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description
PFP:22620
ECS00AYO
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN communication.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ACCELE POSI
THROTTLE POSI
ECS00AYP
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
Released accelerator pedal.
0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
8/8
Released accelerator pedal.
0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
8/8
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AYQ
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not
receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
Possible Cause
ECS00AYR
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AYS
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-125, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
Revision: October 2004
AT-124
2005 Titan
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC4
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
A
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
AT
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCELE
POSI” and “THROTTLE POSI”.
Item name
ACCELE POSI
B
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Released accelerator pedal.
0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
8/8
D
E
F
G
PCIA0070E
THROTTLE POSI
Released accelerator pedal.
0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
8/8
H
4.
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
J
3. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to EC-127, "SELFDIAG RESULTS MODE" .
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-97,
"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
K
L
M
SAT014K
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-124, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: October 2004
I
AT-125
2005 Titan
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-126
2005 Titan
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00AYU
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AYV
Condition °C (°F)
Item name
ATF TEMP SE 1
ATF TEMP SE 2
●
●
2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45
ECS00AYW
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an
excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause
●
AT
2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
Display value (Approx.) V
D
E
ECS00AYX
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AYY
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
G
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-127
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
ECS00CC5
BCWA0323E
Revision: October 2004
AT-128
2005 Titan
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC6
1. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1”.
B
1.
2.
Item name
Condition °C (°F)
Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 1
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V
AT
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
PCIA0039E
2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 SIGNAL
F
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 2”.
Item name
Condition °C (°F)
Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 2
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
G
H
I
PCIA0039E
J
3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Refer to AT-131, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
K
L
4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1.
2.
M
Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
6 (G)
TCM connector
F503
19 (G)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505
7 (O)
TCM connector
F503
18 (O)
Continuity
Yes
Yes
SCIA5461E
3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
AT-129
2005 Titan
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-131, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-258, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
6. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector and TCM connector.
Check continuity between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector
F507
1 (W/Y)
TCM connector
F502
3 (W/Y)
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector
F507
2 (W/R)
TCM connector
F502
5 (W/R)
Continuity
Yes
Yes
SCIA5462E
3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
CIRCUIT" .
2. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
8. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-127, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-130
2005 Titan
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Component Inspection
ECS00CC7
A
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
1.
2.
Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
Check resistance between terminals.
Name
Connector
A/T fluid temperature
sensor 1
3.
F505
Terminal
6-7
Temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance
(Approx.) (kΩ)
0 (32)
15
20 (68)
6.5
80 (176)
0.9
B
AT
D
If NG, replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250,
"Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
SCIA5463E
E
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
1.
2.
Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-258, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
Check resistance between terminals.
Name
Connector
Terminal
Temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance
(Approx.) (kΩ)
0 (32)
10
A/T fluid temperature
sensor 2
F507
1-2
20 (68)
4
80 (176)
0.5
3.
If NG, replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT258, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" .
F
G
H
I
SCIA5271E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-131
2005 Titan
DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Description
PFP:31935
ECS00AZ1
The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of
the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
ECS00AZ2
Item name
TURBINE REV
Condition
Display value (rpm)
During driving (lock-up ON)
Approximately matches the engine speed.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00AZ3
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00AZ4
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Turbine revolution sensor 1, 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AZ5
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more
ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 or more
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 1): 4th or 5th position
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-133, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-132
2005 Titan
DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC8
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”.
B
1.
2.
Item name
Condition
Display value (rpm)
TURBINE REV
During driving (lock-up ON)
Approximately matches
the engine speed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
AT
D
E
PCIA0041E
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
F
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
I
J
K
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-132, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-133
L
M
2005 Titan
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
Description
PFP:24814
ECS00AZ7
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
VHCL/S SE·MTR
ECS00AZ8
Condition
Display value (km/h)
During driving
Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00AZ9
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1721 VHE SPD SE·MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not
receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination
meter.
Possible Cause
ECS00AZA
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AZB
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1/8 or less
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
If DTC is detected, go to AT-135, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
Revision: October 2004
AT-134
2005 Titan
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CC9
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
A
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the result?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
B
AT
2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”.
Item name
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (km/h)
VHCL/S SE·MTR
During driving
Approximately matches the
speedometer reading.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
E
F
G
SCIA2148E
3. CHECK COMBINATION METERS
H
Check combination meters. Refer to DI-17, "How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
J
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-134, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
K
L
5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-135
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK
DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK
Description
●
PFP:00000
ECS00AZD
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
●
ECS00AZE
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1730 A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not
receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch.
TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each ATF pressure switch when gear is
steady.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
ECS00AZF
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Low coast brake solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AZG
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-137, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Judgement of A/T Interlock
ECS00AZH
When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear, and should be set
in a condition in which it can travel.
When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the individual pattern should be performed.
Revision: October 2004
AT-136
2005 Titan
DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG, X: OK
ATF pressure switch output
Gear position
A/T interlock
coupling pattern
SW3
(I/C)
SW6
(HLR/
C)
SW5
(D/C)
SW1
(FR/B)
SW2
(LC/B)
3rd
–
X
X
–
●
4th
–
X
X
–
5th
X
X
–
X
A
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe function
Fail-safe
function
B
I/C
HLR/C
D/C
FR/B
LC/B
L/U
Held in
2nd gear
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
●
Held in
2nd gear
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
●
Held in
2nd gear
OFF
Diagnostic Procedure
AT
D
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ECS00CCA
E
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
With CONSULT-II
Drive vehicle.
Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
G
H
I
SCIA5304E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-157, "DTC P1772 LOW
COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" ,AT-159, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION" .
2. CHECK DTC
K
L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-136, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
3. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
J
AT-137
2005 Titan
DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-138
2005 Titan
DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
Description
PFP:00000
A
ECS00AZJ
Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at 1 or M1 position.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
ECS00AZK
Condition
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
●
AT
D
ECS00AZL
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at 1 position.
Possible Cause
●
Display value
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Low coast brake solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 2
I
ECS00AZN
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm
Selector lever: “1” position
Gear position: 1st gear
If DTC is detected, go to AT-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
SAT014K
Revision: October 2004
G
H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously preformed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
5.
F
ECS00AZM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
AT-139
2005 Titan
DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00AZO
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “1” or “M” position (1st gear), and confirm the
ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.
1.
2.
Item name
ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES
SW 2
Condition
Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4670E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
Refer to AT-139, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-140
2005 Titan
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00AZP
Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
B
ECS00AZQ
AT
Item name
I/C SOLENOID
Condition
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
D
ECS00AZR
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
Display value (Approx.) (A)
ECS00AZS
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Input clutch solenoid valve
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If DTC is detected go to AT-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
L
M
SAT014K
WITH GST
AT-141
I
K
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
G
ECS00AZT
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
5.
F
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
2005 Titan
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCB
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving.
1.
2.
Item name
I/C SOLENOID
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-142
2005 Titan
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00AZV
Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
AT
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
I/C SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 3
ECS00AZW
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
●
E
ECS00AZX
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
D
ECS00AZY
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
Input clutch solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 3
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00AZZ
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1754) is detected, refer to AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-169, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
H
I
K
L
M
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
4.
5.
G
J
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.
F
AT-143
SAT014K
2005 Titan
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCC
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the
ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 3” and electrical current
value of “I/C SOLENOID”.
Item name
I/C SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 3
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
0 - 0.05 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4795E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
●
Refer to AT-143, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-144
2005 Titan
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B01
Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
B
ECS00B02
AT
Item name
FR/B SOLENOID
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00B03
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
D
ECS00B04
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Front brake solenoid valve
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If DTC is detected go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
L
M
SAT014K
WITH GST
AT-145
I
K
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
G
ECS00B05
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
5.
F
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
2005 Titan
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCD
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving.
1.
2.
Item name
FR/B SOLENOID
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-145, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-146
2005 Titan
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B07
Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
AT
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
FR/B SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 1
ECS00B08
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
●
E
ECS00B09
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
D
ECS00B0A
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
Front brake solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B0B
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1759) is detected, refer to AT-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
H
I
K
L
M
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
4.
5.
G
J
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.
F
AT-147
SAT014K
2005 Titan
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B0C
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1” and electrical
current value of “FR/B SOLENOID”.
Item name
FR/B SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 1
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
0 - 0.05 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4796E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-147, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-148
2005 Titan
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B0D
Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
B
ECS00B0E
AT
Item name
D/C SOLENOID
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
0.6 - 0.8
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
0 - 0.05
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00B0F
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
D
ECS00B0G
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Direct clutch solenoid valve
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
M
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
G
ECS00B0H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
5.
F
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
AT-149
2005 Titan
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving.
1.
2.
Item name
D/C SOLENOID
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-149, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-150
2005 Titan
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B0J
Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch,
vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
AT
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
D/C SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 5
ECS00B0K
Condition
Display value (Approx) (A)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
0 - 0.05
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
●
E
ECS00B0L
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
D
ECS00B0M
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
Direct clutch solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 5
DTC Confirmation Procedure
F
G
H
I
J
ECS00B0N
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1764) is detected, refer to AT-152, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-151
2005 Titan
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B0O
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm
the display actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5” and electrical current value of “D/C SOLENOID”.
1.
2.
Item name
D/C SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 5
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4797E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-151, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-152
2005 Titan
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B0P
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
B
ECS00B0Q
AT
Item name
HLR/C SOL
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
0.6 - 0.8
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS00B0R
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
D
ECS00B0S
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
L
M
SAT014K
WITH GST
AT-153
I
K
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
G
ECS00B0T
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
5.
F
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
2005 Titan
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCF
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “HLR/C SOLENOID” while driving.
1.
2.
Item name
HLR/C SOL
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer
to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to
AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-153, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-154
2005 Titan
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
PFP:31940
Description
A
ECS00B0V
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
B
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malAT
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
HLR/C SOL
ATF PRES SW 6
ECS00B0W
Condition
Display value (Approx.) (A)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
0.6 - 0.8
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
0 - 0.05
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
ON
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
●
–
–
ECS00B0X
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
●
●
E
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
D
ECS00B0Y
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 6
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B0Z
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1769) is detected, refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-155
H
I
J
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.
G
SAT014K
2005 Titan
K
L
M
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B10
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6” and electrical
current value of “HLR/C SOL”.
Item name
HLR/C SOL
ATF PRES SW 6
Condition
Display value
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged.
Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0.6 - 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer
to AT-18 , AT-20 .
0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer
to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
High and low reverse clutch disengaged.
Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4798E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-155, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-156
2005 Titan
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B11
Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
B
ECS00B12
AT
Item name
ON OFF SOL
Condition
Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00B13
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
●
●
D
ECS00B14
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Low coast brake solenoid valve
E
F
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B15
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “1” or “2”
Gear position: “1st” or “2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
If DTC is detected, go to AT-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
AT-157
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCG
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving.
1.
2.
Item name
ON OFF SOL
Condition
Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4794E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-158
2005 Titan
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00B17
Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears B
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
AT
●
●
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
ECS00B18
Condition
Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
●
●
E
ECS00B19
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following
conditions.
When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
D
ECS00B1A
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
Low coast brake solenoid valve
ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B1B
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
Selector lever: “1” or “2” position
Gear position: “1st” or “2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1774) is detected, refer to AT-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: October 2004
H
I
K
L
M
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
4.
5.
G
J
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.
F
AT-159
2005 Titan
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCH
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the 1 or 2 position ("1 " or "2 " gear) or manual
mode (“M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear), and confirm the ON/OFF
actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.
1.
2.
Item name
ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
Condition
Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
SCIA4794E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-160
2005 Titan
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Description
PFP:34901
A
ECS00B1D
When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, this is judged to be an irregularity.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Monitor Item
Condition
MANU MODE SW
[ON - OFF]
NON M-MODE SW
[ON - OFF]
UP SW LEVER
[ON - OFF]
DOWN SW LEVER
[ON - OFF]
●
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Manual shift gate position
OFF
Other than the above
ON
Select lever: + side
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Select lever: - side
ON
Other than the above
OFF
●
●
AT
D
E
F
ECS00B1F
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors Manual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input
pattern occurs 1 second or more.
ECS00B1G
Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
Mode select switch (Into control device)
Position select switch (Into control device)
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B1H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
M
SAT014K
AT-161
J
L
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Move selector lever to “M” position.
Start engine and drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-163, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
G
H
Possible Cause
●
Reference Value
Manual shift gate position (neutral)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
ECS00B1E
2005 Titan
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW
ECS00B1I
BCWA0339E
Revision: October 2004
AT-162
2005 Titan
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B1J
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
A
Perform the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
B
AT
2. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP INPUT SIGNALS” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode for “METER A/C AMP” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “AT-M GEAR”.
D
E
F
G
PKIA2062E
Without CONSULT-II
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the
position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
I
J
Check the following items.
●
Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-164, "Component Inspection" .
●
Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
●
Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode
switch).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK TCM
Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: October 2004
H
AT-163
2005 Titan
K
L
M
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Power supply and ground circuit for TCM.
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the transmission assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Removal and Installation (4x2)" , AT-268,
"Removal and Installation (4x4)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
●
Refer to AT-161, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Component Inspection
ECS00B1K
MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between terminals.
Item
Position
Manual mode
(select) switch
Manual
UP switch
DOWN switch
UP
Connector
No.
Terminal No.
(Unit side)
Continuity
2-6
M34
DOWN
2-4
Yes
2-5
WCIA0245E
Position Indicator Lamp
ECS00B1L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with
CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually
coincide when the select lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check the following items.
PCIA0065E
Position Indicator Lamp Symptom Chart
Revision: October 2004
AT-164
2005 Titan
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Items
Presumed Location of Trouble
The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the
manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode
possible).
The position indicator lamp is not indicated.
Manual mode switch
Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated)
The actual gear position changes, but the position indicator lamp
is not indicated.
Perform the self-diagnosis function.
●
●
Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
A
B
Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
AT
Perform the self-diagnosis function.
The actual gear position and the indication on the position indicator lamp do not coincide.
●
Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the
position indicator lamp.
Check the combination meter.
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-165
2005 Titan
DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1
DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1
Description
PFP:25240
ECS00B1M
Fail-safe function to detect front brake clutch solenoid valve condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ATF PRES SW 1
ECS00B1N
Condition
Display value
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00B1O
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00B1P
ATF pressure switch 1
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B1Q
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-166
SAT014K
2005 Titan
DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCI
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
B
1.
2.
Item name
ATF PRES SW 1
Condition
Display value
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
AT
D
E
PCIA0067E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-166, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
H
AT-167
J
K
L
M
2005 Titan
DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3
DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3
Description
PFP:25240
ECS00B1S
Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ATF PRES SW 3
ECS00B1T
Condition
Display value
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
ON
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00B1U
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00B1V
ATF pressure switch 3
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B1W
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-169, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-168
SAT014K
2005 Titan
DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCJ
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”.
B
1.
2.
Item name
ATF PRES SW 3
Condition
Display value
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
AT
D
E
PCIA0067E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-168, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
H
AT-169
J
K
L
M
2005 Titan
DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5
DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5
Description
PFP:25240
ECS00B1Y
Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ATF PRES SW 5
ECS00B1Z
Condition
Display value
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
ON
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00B20
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00B21
ATF pressure switch 5
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B22
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-170
SAT014K
2005 Titan
DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCK
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”.
B
1.
2.
Item name
ATF PRES SW 5
Condition
Display value
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 .
ON
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 ,
AT-20 .
OFF
AT
D
E
PCIA0067E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
H
AT-171
J
K
L
M
2005 Titan
DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6
DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6
Description
PFP:25240
ECS00B24
Fail-safe function to detect high & low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
ATF PRES SW 6
ECS00B25
Condition
Display value
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
ON
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 .
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00B26
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS00B27
ATF pressure switch 6
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00B28
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
Perform step “2” again.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII.
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-172
SAT014K
2005 Titan
DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCL
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”.
B
1.
2.
Item name
ATF PRES SW 6
Condition
Display value
High and low reverse clutch engaged.
Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
ON
High and low reverse clutch disengaged
Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 .
OFF
AT
D
E
PCIA0067E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
●
Refer to AT-172, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
H
AT-173
J
K
L
M
2005 Titan
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
PFP:00100
ECS00CCM
BCWA0382E
Revision: October 2004
AT-174
2005 Titan
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
Data (Approx.)
P
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Always
2
P
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Always
Battery voltage
5
B
Ground
Always
0V
6
BR *1
Y/R *2
1
A
Battery voltage
B
–
AT
Battery voltage
D
Power supply
–
0V
E
10
B
Ground
Always
0V
*1: Column shift
*2: Floor shift
F
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00CCN
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
F9
I
Voltage
1 (P) - Ground
TCM
H
Battery voltage
2 (P) - Ground
J
6 (BR *1 or Y/R *2) Ground
0V
SCIA2104E
K
*1: Column shift
*2: Floor shift
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-175
2005 Titan
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Voltage
1 (P) - Ground
TCM
F44
2 (P) - Ground
Battery voltage
6 (BR *1 or Y/R *2) Ground
SCIA2105E
*1: Column shift
*2: Floor shift
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly harness connector terminals 1, 2
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly harness connector terminal 6
●
10A fuse [No. 3, 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 10A fuse (No. 49, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
Ignition switch, Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA2106E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
The A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-176
2005 Titan
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
6. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
A
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
B
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG-1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 7.
NG-2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULT MODE" .
AT
7. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Item
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness connector
F9
1 (W)
F502
9 (W)
F9
2 (GR)
F502
10 (GR)
F9
6 (R)
F502
4 (R)
TCM connector
A/T assembly harness connector
TCM connector
A/T assembly harness connector
TCM connector
4.
G
Yes
H
SCIA5464E
Yes
I
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness connector
F9
5 (B)
F504
21 (B)
F9
10 (Y)
F504
22 (Y)
TCM connector
A/T assembly harness connector
TCM connector
J
Continuity
K
Yes
L
Yes
SCIA5465E
5. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid
Temperature Sensor 2" .
NG
>> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
E
F
Continuity
Yes
Item
D
AT-177
2005 Titan
M
TOW MODE SWITCH
TOW MODE SWITCH
Description
PFP:25129
ECS00B2A
When tow mode switch is “ON”, tow mode switch signals are sent to TCM from combination meter by CAN
communication line.Then it`s a tow mode condition.
Revision: October 2004
AT-178
2005 Titan
TOW MODE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — TMSW
ECS00CCS
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0383E
Revision: October 2004
AT-179
2005 Titan
TOW MODE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B2B
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is any malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK POWER SOURCE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check the voltage between tow mode switch connector terminal
1 and ground.
Condition
Tow mode
switch
Data (Approx.)
ON
0V
When ignition switch is turned to “ON”
OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA5156E
3. CHECK TOW MODE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect tow mode switch connector.
Check continuity between tow mode switch connector M254 terminals 1 and 2.
Condition
Continuity
Tow mode switch “ON”
Yes
Tow mode switch “OFF”
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace tow mode switch.
SCIA5584E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
Harness for short or open between combination meter connector terminal 35 and tow mode switch connector terminal 1.
●
Harness for short or open between tow mode switch connector terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
5. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-180
2005 Titan
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT
PFP:18002
CONSULT-II Reference Value
A
ECS00B2C
Item name
CLSD THL POS
W/O THL POS
Condition
Display value
Released accelerator pedal.
ON
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal.
ON
Released accelerator pedal.
OFF
B
AT
D
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B2D
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
E
F
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL
POS” and “W/O THL POS”.
H
I
Monitor Item
Accelerator Pedal Operation
CLSD THL POS
W/O THL POS
Released
ON
OFF
Fully depressed
OFF
ON
J
PCIA0070E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Revision: October 2004
AT-181
L
M
2005 Titan
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
CONSULT-II Reference Value
Item name
BRAKE SW
PFP:25320
ECS00B2E
Condition
Display value
Depressed brake pedal.
ON
Released brake pedal.
OFF
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00B2F
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
PCIA0070E
3. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2.
Condition
Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed
Yes
When brake pedal is released
No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch.
● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch and combination meter.
Revision: October 2004
AT-182
SCIA2144E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC
PFP:00007
A
ECS00CCT
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0411E
Revision: October 2004
AT-183
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
BCWA0326E
Revision: October 2004
AT-184
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0327E
Revision: October 2004
AT-185
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Terminal
color
Condition
3
L
CAN-H
4
V
K-line (CONSULTII signal)
7
R
Back-up lamp relay
–
The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II
Selector lever in "R" position.
Selector lever in other positions.
8
P
CAN-L
–
AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on
Data (Approx.)
–
–
0V
Battery voltage
–
ECS00B2G
SYMPTOM:
AT CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to
“ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer toAT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position
ECS00B2H
SYMPTOM:
●
●
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch?
Yes
>> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-186
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
A
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
B
AT
D
LCIA0345E
3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
E
Check the starting system. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed
ECS00B2I
G
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated,
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
H
SYMPTOM:
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
I
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
L
M
LCIA0345E
3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
J
AT-187
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58)
SCIA5199E
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
ECS00B2J
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
LCIA0345E
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
Revision: October 2004
AT-188
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.67).
B
AT
D
SCIA5199E
E
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
F
G
6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)
H
I
J
ECS00B2K
SYMPTOM:
K
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
L
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate A/T fluid temperature sensor, engine speed signal, accelerator pedal
position sensor, ATF pressure switch 1, front brake solenoid valve, CAN communication line?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" ., AT-124, "DTC P1705
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-145,
"DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED
Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair.
Revision: October 2004
AT-189
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
LCIA0345E
4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7.
SAT494G
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-190
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
B
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
AT
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
D
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
E
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
1.
2.
F
G
H
SCIA5199E
I
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.1).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
J
K
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
L
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 11.
M
11. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-191
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position
ECS00B2L
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 6, high and low
reverse clutch solenoid valve, CAN communication line, PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND
LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
LCIA0345E
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
4. CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>GO TO 5.
NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 8.
SAT493G
Revision: October 2004
AT-192
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
1.
2.
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Reverse brake. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
D
Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 7.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 8.
E
F
G
SAT494G
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-193
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
9. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
SCIA5199E
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
11. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-194
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position
ECS00B2M
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication line, PNP
switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN- D
SOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
E
CHECK CONTROL CABLE
2.
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
F
G
H
LCIA0345E
I
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
J
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
K
L
SAT638A
4. CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
SAT493G
Revision: October 2004
AT-195
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.
SAT494G
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
Revision: October 2004
AT-196
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
B
AT
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 11.
D
E
11. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
F
G
H
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
ECS00B2N
SYMPTOM:
I
J
K
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
L
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-192, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" .
M
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
AT-197
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION (APP) SENSOR
Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor.
4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.
SAT494G
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-198
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
B
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
AT
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
D
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
E
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
1.
2.
F
G
H
SCIA5199E
I
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.23).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
J
K
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
L
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 11.
M
11. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-199
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.23).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2
ECS00B2O
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 5, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal
position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" ,
AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION
SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.
SAT494G
Revision: October 2004
AT-200
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
B
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
6.
1.
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
F
G
H
7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
1.
2.
I
J
K
L
SCIA5199E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
M
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.10).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: October 2004
AT-201
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
1.
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.10).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
ECS00B2P
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve,
accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor
MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" ,
AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
Revision: October 2004
AT-202
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
A
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.
B
AT
D
SAT494G
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
E
1.
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
G
H
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
J
K
L
M
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
Revision: October 2004
I
AT-203
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.11).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.11).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
ECS00B2Q
SYMPTOM:
●
●
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3, front brake solenoid
valve, input clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" ,
AT-168, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" , AT-141, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC
Revision: October 2004
AT-204
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
NO
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
A
B
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
AT
D
E
SAT638A
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
F
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.
G
H
I
SAT494G
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
J
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-205
2005 Titan
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
SCIA5199E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.12).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.12).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-206
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5
ECS00B2R
A
SYMPTOM:
●
●
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
AT
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, front brake solenoid
valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, turbine revolution sensor, vehicle speed
sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" ,
AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE
SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124,
"DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION
SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" ,
AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
F
G
H
I
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
J
K
L
SAT638A
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.
SAT494G
Revision: October 2004
AT-207
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.13).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: October 2004
AT-208
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
A
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness B
connector.
OK or NG
AT
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
D
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.13).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
E
F
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
ECS00B2S
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
G
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
H
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-132, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
I
J
K
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
L
M
SAT638A
Revision: October 2004
AT-209
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 4.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 5.
SAT494G
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" .
–
Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
Revision: October 2004
AT-210
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.24).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
B
AT
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
D
E
9. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
F
G
H
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.24).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
ECS00B2T
SYMPTOM:
I
J
K
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
L
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, CAN communication?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-132, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-211
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
SCIA5199E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.25).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
AT-212
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.25).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
B
AT
Lock-up Is Not Released
ECS00B2U
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, CAN communication?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-132, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
I
J
3. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-213
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle
ECS00B2V
SYMPTOM:
When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, ATF pressure
switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE" , AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF
PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-124, "DTC
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.72).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-214
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
A
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
B
6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
AT
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
D
E
F
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.72).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode (Column Shift)
G
H
ECS00B2W
SYMPTOM:
I
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
J
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
L
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate turbine revolution sensor?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models)
ECS00B2X
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from D5 to 44 position, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gears.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AT-215
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK 4TH POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select "ECU INPUT SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for
"A/T" with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out "OD CONT SW" switch moving selector lever to each
position.
1.
2.
Monitor item
Condition
Display value
ON
OD CONT SW
When setting the selector
lever to "4" and "3" positions.
When setting selector
lever to other positions.
OFF
1.
2.
LCIA0339E
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine)
Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal
and ground.
Item
4th position
switch
Connector No.
M203
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
1 (SB) Ground
Condition
Data
(Approx.)
When setting
the selector
lever to "4"
and "3" positions.
0V
LCIA0340E
When setting
selector lever
to other positions.
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
Revision: October 2004
AT-216
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
A
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
B
AT
D
LCIA0345E
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
E
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
F
G
H
SCIA5199E
I
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
K
L
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
M
8. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
Revision: October 2004
J
AT-217
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Column Shift Models)
ECS00CCO
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check the control linkage.
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
●
LCIA0345E
4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-218
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
B
AT
D
SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
F
G
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. CHECK TCM
J
Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
K
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-219
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models)
ECS00B2Y
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 44 to 33 position, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gears.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-168, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
LCIA0345E
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
Revision: October 2004
AT-220
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
B
AT
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
D
E
7. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
F
G
H
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-221
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Column Shift Models)
ECS00CCP
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-168, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check the control linkage.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
LCIA0345E
4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-222
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
B
AT
D
SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
F
G
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. CHECK TCM
J
Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
K
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-223
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models)
ECS00B2Z
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 33 to 22 position, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gears.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
LCIA0345E
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
Revision: October 2004
AT-224
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
B
AT
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
D
E
7. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
F
G
H
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-225
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Column Shift Models)
ECS00CCQ
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check the control linkage.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
LCIA0345E
4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-226
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
B
AT
D
SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
F
G
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. CHECK TCM
J
Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
K
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-227
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models)
ECS00B30
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 22 to 11 position, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gears.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select "ECU INPUT SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for
"A/T" with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out "OVERDRIVE SW" switch moving selector lever to
each position.
1.
2.
Monitor item
1 POSITION SW
Condition
Display value
When setting the selector
lever to "1" position.
ON
When setting selector
lever to other positions.
OFF
LCIA0339E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine)
2. Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal
and ground.
Item
1st position
switch
Connector No.
M203
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
7 (Y/G) Ground
Condition
Data
(Approx.)
When setting
the selector
lever to "1"
position.
When setting
selector lever
to other positions.
0V
LCIA0341E
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-228
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
A
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
B
AT
D
SAT638A
4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
E
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
F
G
H
LCIA0345E
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
I
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
1.
2.
J
K
L
SCIA5199E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: October 2004
AT-229
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
8. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
1.
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-230
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Column Shift Models)
ECS00CCR
A
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
D
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
E
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
F
G
H
SAT638A
3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
I
Check the control linkage.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
J
K
L
LCIA0345E
4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
M
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-231
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1.
2.
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
SCIA5199E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-232
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
ECS00B31
A
SYMPTOM:
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 22 to 11 .
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
AT
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
D
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
E
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select "ECU INPUT SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for
"A/T" with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out "OVERDRIVE SW" switch moving selector lever to
each position.
1.
2.
Monitor item
1 POSITION SW
Condition
Display value
When setting the selector
lever to "1" position.
ON
When setting selector
lever to other positions.
OFF
F
G
H
LCIA0339E
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine)
2. Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal
and ground.
Item
1st position
switch
Connector No.
M203
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
7 (Y/G) Ground
Condition
K
Data
(Approx.)
When setting
the selector
lever to "1"
position.
When setting
selector lever
to other positions.
J
L
0V
LCIA0341E
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
AT-233
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
LCIA0345E
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
1.
2.
SCIA5199E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: October 2004
AT-234
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
8. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION
A
Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness B
connector.
OK or NG
AT
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
D
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-235
2005 Titan
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Device Removal and Installation
PFP:34901
ECS00B32
Floor shift models
LCIA0348E
1.
Selector lever knob
2.
A/T console finisher
3.
Control device assembly
4.
Position lamp
5.
A/T selector control cable
6.
Lock plate
Revision: October 2004
AT-236
2005 Titan
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Column shift models
A
B
AT
D
E
F
LCIA0346E
1.
Column shift control
2.
Shift cable
3.
A/T cable lock plate clip
G
REMOVAL
Floor shift
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
Remove A/T finisher. Refer to IP-13, "A/T FINISHER" .
Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
Disconnect selector control cable.
Remove control device assembly.
I
Column shift
1.
2.
Remove the column shift control. Refer to PS-9, "STEERING COLUMN" .
Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from
column shifter pin.
J
K
L
M
LCIA0343E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
●
After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position, refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position"
and adjust if necessary, refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-237
2005 Titan
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Adjustment of A/T Position
1.
2.
3.
ECS00B33
Loosen nut of control cable.
Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position.
After pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a
force of 9.8 N·m (1kg-m, 2.2 lb-ft), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten control cable nut to specifications.
Control cable nut
: 14.5 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
LCIA0345E
Checking of A/T Position
ECS00B34
NOTE:
Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers.
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON
(engine stop).
2. Make sure selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make sure selector
lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is
depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking,
noise or rattle.
4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of
engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check
whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in
matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and
the transmission body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the figure.
6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed
in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the
“P” or “N” position.
7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
the “P” and “N” positions.
8. Make sure transmission is locked completely in “P” position.
LCIA0325E
LCIA0347E
Revision: October 2004
AT-238
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
PFP:34950
A
ECS00B35
FLOOR SHIFT
●
●
The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
B
With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
AT
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.
D
COLUMN SHIFT
●
●
The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
ECS00B36
FLOOR SHIFT
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LCIA0326E
Revision: October 2004
AT-239
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
COLUMN SHIFT
LCIA0344E
Revision: October 2004
AT-240
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — A/T — SHIFT
ECS00B37
A
FLOOR SHIFT
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0337E
Revision: October 2004
AT-241
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
COLUMN SHIFT
BCWA0338E
Revision: October 2004
AT-242
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values
ECS00B38
A
SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS LAYOUT
B
AT
D
LCIA0327E
SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Data are reference values.
TERWIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
1
Y/R
ITEM
Power source
2
L/R
Detention switch
(for key)
3
GR
Detention switch
(for shift)
4
R/G
Stop lamp switch
5
W/R
Vehicle speed signal
6
G/R
Ignition signal
7
R/W
Shift lock solenoid
8
B
9
10
G/W
W/G
CONDITION
Key unlock solenoid
VOLTAGE
(V)
Ignition switch: “ON”
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: “OFF”
Battery voltage
When selector lever is not in “P” position with key inserted.
Battery voltage
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When selector lever is not in “P” position
Battery voltage
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
When brake pedal is released
Approx. 0V
—
—
—
Approx. 0V
Ignition switch: “ON”
Battery voltage
When brake pedal is depressed with ignition switch “ON”.
Approx. 0V
When brake pedal is depressed.
Battery voltage
Always
Approx. 0V
When the selector lever is set to a position other than the “P”
position, and the key switch is turned from “ON” to “OFF”
Battery voltage for
approx. 0.1 sec.
(Note)
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When ignition switch is not in “ON” position with key inserted.
Battery voltage for
approx. 0.1 sec.
(Note)
Except the above
Approx. 0V
NOTE:
Confirm that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it
should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms.
Revision: October 2004
AT-243
F
G
H
I
—
Ignition switch: “OFF”
Ground
Key lock solenoid
E
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
ECS00B39
COLUMN SHIFT
SYMPTOM 1:
●
Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal
applied.
●
Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
●
Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
●
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
●
Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”.
1. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
Check the selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .
2. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect A/T device harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Selector lever is set in “P” position.
Check operation sound.
Condition
Brake pedal
Operation sound
When ignition switch is turned to
“ON” position and selector lever
is set in “P” position.
Depressed
Yes
Released
No
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Selector lever is set in “P” position.
Check the voltage between A/T device connector M68 terminal
3 (G/R) and ground.
Condition
Brake pedal
Data (Approx.)
When ignition switch is turned to
“ON” position.
Depressed
Battery voltage
Released
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
SCIA5657E
AT-244
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector E38 terminals 3 and 4.
Condition
B
Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed
Yes
When brake pedal is released
No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
D
WCIA0247E
E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
F
Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Harness for short or open between fuse block (J/B) and stop lamp switch terminal 4 (G/R)
●
Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch terminal 3 (G/R) and A/T device terminal 3 (G/R).
●
10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
I
6. CHECK A/T DEVICE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect A/T device connector.
Check continuity between A/T device connector M68 terminal 1
and terminal 3.
Condition
K
Continuity
Selector lever in “P” position
No
Selector lever in other position
Yes
4. Connect A/T device connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch.
L
M
WCIA0248E
7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect A/T device connector.
Check continuity between A/T device connector M68 terminal 1
(B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
AT-245
SCIA5656E
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Component Inspection
ECS00B3A
FLOOR SHIFT
Shift Lock Solenoid
Check operation by applying battery voltage to the A/T device.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
●
Connector No.
Terminal No.
M203
9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground)
LCIA0328E
DETENTION SWITCH
For Key
●
Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device.
Condition
Connector
No.
Terminal No.
M203
5-6
Continuity
When selector lever is “P”
position.
When selector lever is not “P”
position.
No
Yes
LIIA1599E
For Shift
●
Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device.
Condition
When selector lever is “P”
position.
Connector
No.
Terminal No.
M203
3-4
Continuity
No
When selector lever is not “P”
position.
Yes
WCIA0401E
KEY LOCK SOLENOID
Key Lock
Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
●
Connector No.
Terminal No. (Wire color)
M80
1 (O) (Battery voltage) - 2 (B) (Ground)
WCIA0240E
Revision: October 2004
AT-246
2005 Titan
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Key Unlock
A
Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
●
Connector No.
Terminal No. (Wire color)
M80
2 (B) (Battery voltage) - 1 (O) (Ground)
B
AT
WCIA0241E
D
KEY SWITCH
●
Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key
lock solenoid.
Condition
Connector No.
Key inserted
M80
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
E
Continuity
F
Yes
3 (R/L) - 4 (R/L)
Key withdrawn
No
G
SCIA5662E
H
STOP LAMP SWITCH
●
Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch.
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
Connector
No.
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
E38
1 (R/Y) - 2 (R/G)
I
Continuity
When brake pedal is released
Yes
J
No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal.
K
WCIA0255E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-247
2005 Titan
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
PFP:34908
ECS00B3B
LCIA0349E
CAUTION:
●
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts.
●
After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than
39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Removal
1.
ECS00B3C
Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.
LCIA0350E
Revision: October 2004
AT-248
2005 Titan
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
2.
Remove casing cap from bracket.
A
B
AT
LCIA0356E
D
3.
Disconnect the holder from the key cylinder and remove the key
interlock cable.
E
F
G
LCIA0351E
Installation
1.
2.
3.
ECS00B3D
Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder.
Set selector lever to P position.
Turn key to lock position.
H
I
J
K
LCIA0351E
4.
5.
6.
Insert key interlock rod into adjuster holder.
Install casing cap to bracket.
Move slider in order to lock adjuster holder to interlock rod.
CAUTION:
● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be
damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with
adjacent parts.
● After installing key interlock cable to control device,
make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured
in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an
external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace
key interlock cable with new one.
Revision: October 2004
AT-249
L
M
LCIA0356E
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
PFP:00000
ECS00B3E
COMPONENTS
SCIA5478E
1.
Transmission
2.
Snap ring
3.
Sub-harness
4.
Control valve with TCM
5.
Bracket
6.
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
7.
Oil pan gasket
8.
Oil pan
9.
Magnet
10. Drain plug
11. Drain plug gasket
13. Terminal cord assembly
14. O-ring
12. Oil pan bolt
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal.
Drain ATF through drain plug.
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Revision: October 2004
AT-250
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4.
Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
A
B
AT
SCIA5021E
D
5.
Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
E
F
G
SCIA5022E
6.
Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
H
I
J
SCIA2308E
7.
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .
L
M
SCIA5199E
8.
Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA5200E
Revision: October 2004
AT-251
K
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
9.
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5023E
10. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and A/T
fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
SCIA5446E
11. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5024E
12. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
SCIA3969E
13. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
42 (1.65)
5
B
55 (2.17)
6
C
40 (1.57)
1
SCIA5139E
Revision: October 2004
AT-252
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
14. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
A
B
AT
SCIA5142E
D
15. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
E
F
G
SCIA5301E
16. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
H
I
J
SCIA5307E
K
17. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
L
M
SCIA5155E
18. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.
SCIA5447E
Revision: October 2004
AT-253
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
19. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve
with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA5448E
20. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch
connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5449E
Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T
Fluid" and MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
SCIA5449E
2.
Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with
TCM.
SCIA5450E
Revision: October 2004
AT-254
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
3.
Connect TCM connectors.
A
B
AT
SCIA5447E
D
4.
Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
E
F
G
SCIA5155E
5.
Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
H
I
J
SCIA5306E
6.
Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control
valve with TCM.
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
K
L
M
SCIA5301E
7.
Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine revolution sensor hole.
● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
SCIA5034E
Revision: October 2004
AT-255
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
●
Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with
manual plate projection.
SCIA5142E
8.
Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
42 (1.65)
5
B
55 (2.17)
6
C
40 (1.57)
1
SCIA5139E
9.
Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After
that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
SCIA5140E
10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
SCIA5023E
11. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
SCIA5446E
Revision: October 2004
AT-256
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
12. Connect revolution sensor connector.
A
B
AT
SCIA5024E
D
13. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
E
F
G
SCIA3969E
14. Install magnets in oil pan.
H
I
J
SCIA5200E
15. Install oil pan in transmission case.
a. Install new oil pan gasket in oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surfaces.
b.
Install oil pan (with new oil pan gasket) in transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan mounting surfaces.
SCIA2308E
Revision: October 2004
AT-257
2005 Titan
K
L
M
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
c.
Tighten oil pan bolts to the specified torque in numerical order
as shown after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-250,
"COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
16. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-250,
"COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
SCIA2492E
17. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5038E
18. Install snap ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
19. Connect A/T assembly harness connector.
20. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
21. Connect the negative battery terminal
SCIA5039E
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal.
Drain ATF through drain plug.
Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
SCIA2308E
Revision: October 2004
AT-258
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4.
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .
A
B
AT
SCIA5199E
D
5.
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
E
F
G
SCIA5023E
6.
Straighten terminal clips to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
H
I
J
SCIA5146E
7.
K
Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
L
M
SCIA5253E
8.
Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
SCIA5307E
Revision: October 2004
AT-259
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T
Fluid" and MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket.
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
SCIA5306E
2.
Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in control valve with TCM.
(With bracket.)
SCIA5253E
3.
Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
SCIA5023E
4.
Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
SCIA5146E
5.
a.
Install oil pan in transmission case.
Install new oil pan gasket in oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surfaces.
Revision: October 2004
AT-260
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
b.
Install new oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from oil pan mounting surfaces.
A
B
AT
SCIA2308E
c.
6.
7.
8.
Tighten oil pan bolts to the specified torque in numerical order
as shown after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-250,
"COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-250,
"COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Connect the negative battery terminal
D
E
F
G
SCIA2492E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-261
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Oil Seal
ECS00B3F
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear propeller shaft.Refer to PR-8, "Removal and
Installation" .
Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). Refer to TF87, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver or suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD
models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models).
SCIA5254E
Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T
Fluid" and MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. Install new rear oil seal into the extension case (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models) until it is flush with component face,
using Tool or suitable drift.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
● Do not reuse rear oil seal
2. Install transfer on transmission (4WD models). Refer to TF-87,
"Removal and Installation" .
3. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
SCIA5583E
Revision: October 2004
AT-262
2005 Titan
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation
PFP:31098
A
ECS00B3G
4X2
Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LCIA0352E
CAUTION:
●
When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to crush or block the hose by folding or bending.
●
When inserting a hose in to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend portion.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-263
2005 Titan
AIR BREATHER HOSE
4X4
Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
LCIA0353E
CAUTION:
●
When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the hose.
●
When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend portion.
Revision: October 2004
AT-264
2005 Titan
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (4x2)
PFP:31020
A
ECS00B3H
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LCIA0354E
1.
A/T fluid indicator pipe
2.
A/T fluid indicator
3.
O-ring
6.
A/T cross member
4.
Transmission assembly
5.
A/T fluid cooler tube
7.
Insulator
8.
Copper washers
K
L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from
the A/T assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal.
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove A/T fluid indicator gauge.
4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
5. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" .
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
7. Remove A/T control cable. Refer to AT-236, "SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-265
2005 Titan
M
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.
9. Remove fluid cooler tube.
10. Remove dust cover from converter housing part.
LCIA0334E
11. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four bolts for drive plate and
torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
it to collide against the drain plug.
13. Remove cross member with power tool.
14. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-263, "Removal and
Installation" .
15. Disconnect A/T unit assembly connector.
16. Remove A/T fluid indicator pipe from A/T assembly.
17. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
18. Remove the A/T assembly to engine bolts with power tool.
19. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle with a transmission jack.
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
● Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
LCIA0335E
SCIA0499E
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
●
After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to
check dimension A to ensure it is within the reference value
limit.
Dimension A
: 24.0 mm (0.94 in) or more
SAT017B
Revision: October 2004
AT-266
2005 Titan
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
A
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of the removal.
●
When installing transmission to the engine, attach the bolts as shown.
Transmission to
engine bolts
: 113 N·m (12 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
B
NOTE:
*: No.2 bolt also secures air breather vent.
AT
D
LCIA0371E
E
Align the positions of bolts for drive plate with those of the torque
converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the
bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
●
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
●
After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that transmission
rotates freely without binding.
●
Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).
LCIA0335E
●
After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and
the positions of A/T. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-238,
"Checking of A/T Position" .
●
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-267
2005 Titan
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (4x4)
ECS00B3I
COMPONENTS
WCIA0428E
1.
A/T fluid indicator pipe
4.
Transmission assembly
7.
A/T cross member
2.
A/T fluid indicator
3. O-ring
5.
Fluid cooler tube
6.
8.
Insulator
Copper washer
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from
the A/T assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal.
2. Remove engine cover with power tool.
3. Remove A/T fluid indicator.
4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
5. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" .
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" , PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
7. Remove A/T control cable. Refer to AT-236, "SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: October 2004
AT-268
2005 Titan
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.
9. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler tube from A/T assembly.
10. Remove dust cover from converter housing part.
A
B
AT
LCIA0334E
D
11. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four bolts for drive plate and
torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
it to collide against the drain plug.
13. Remove cross member with power tool.
LCIA0335E
14. Tilt the transmission slightly to keep the clearance between
body and transmission, and then disconnect air breather hose from charging pipe. Refer to AT-263,
"Removal and Installation" .
15. Disconnect A/T unit assembly connector and transfer unit connector.
16. Remove A/T fluid indicator pipe.
17. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
18. Remove A/T assembly to engine bolts with power tool.
19. Remove A/T assembly with transfer from vehicle, using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
H
I
J
L
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to
check dimension A to ensure it is within the reference value
limit.
: 24.0 mm (0.94 in) or more
SAT017B
Revision: October 2004
G
K
SCIA2203E
Dimension A
F
(J-47002)
CAUTION:
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
● Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
NOTE:
The actual special service tool may differ from tool as shown.
20. Remove transfer from A/T assembly. Refer to TF-87, "Removal
and Installation" .
●
E
AT-269
2005 Titan
M
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the revers order of removal.
●
When installing transmission to the engine, attach the bolts as shown.
Transmission to
engine bolts
: 113 N·m (12 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
NOTE:
*: No.2 bolt also secures air breather vent.
LCIA0371E
Align the positions of bolts for drive plate with those of the torque
converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the
bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
●
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
●
After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that transmission
rotates freely without binding.
●
Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).
LCIA0335E
●
After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and
the positions of A/T. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-238,
"Checking of A/T Position" .
●
Revision: October 2004
AT-270
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
OVERHAUL
Components
PFP:00000
A
ECS00B3J
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5180E
Revision: October 2004
AT-271
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
1.
O-ring
2.
Oil pump cover
3.
O-ring
4.
Oil pump housing
5.
Self-sealing bolt
6.
Torque converter
7.
Converter housing
8.
Oil pump housing oil seal
9.
Bearing race
10. Needle bearing
11. O-ring
12. Front carrier assembly
13. Needle bearing
14. Snap ring
15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch
17. Snap ring
18. Bearing race
19. Needle bearing
20. Seal ring
21. Input clutch assembly
22. Needle bearing
23. Rear internal gear
24. Brake band
25. Mid carrier assembly
26. Needle bearing
27. Bearing race
28. Rear carrier assembly
29. Needle bearing
30. Mid sun gear
31. Seal ring
32. Rear sun gear
33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring
35. Needle bearing
36. High and low reverse clutch hub
37. Snap ring
38. Bearing race
39. Bearing race
40. Needle bearing
Revision: October 2004
AT-272
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5181E
1.
Bearing race
2.
High and low reverse clutch assembly
3.
Needle bearing
4.
Direct clutch assembly
5.
Needle bearing
6.
Reverse brake dish plate
Revision: October 2004
AT-273
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
7.
Reverse brake driven plate
8.
N-sprig
9.
Snap ring
10. Reverse brake retaining plate
11. Reverse brake drive plate
12. Snap ring
13. Spring retainer
14. Return spring
15. Reverse brake piston
16. D-ring
17. Lip seal
Revision: October 2004
AT-274
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
2WD models
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5663E
1.
Rear oil seal
2.
Bracket
3.
Bracket
4.
Rear extension
5.
Parking actuator support
6.
Return spring
Revision: October 2004
AT-275
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
7.
Parking pawl
10. Bracket
8.
Pawl shaft
11. Seal ring
9.
Self-sealing bolt
12. Needle bearing
13. Revolution sensor
14. Parking gear
15. Output shaft
16. Bearing race
17. Needle bearing
18. Manual plate
19. Parking rod
20. Manual shaft oil seal
21. Manual shaft
22. O-ring
23. Band servo anchor end pin
24. Detent spring
25. Spacer
26. Seal rings
27. Return spring
28. O-ring
29. Servo assembly
30. Snap ring
31. Snap ring
32. Sub-harness
33. Control valve with TCM
34. Bracket
35. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
36. Oil pan
37. Magnet
38. Drain plug
39. Drain plug gasket
40. Oil pan mounting bolt
41. Oil pan gasket
42. Terminal cord assembly
43. O-ring
44. Retaining pin
45. Transmission case
Revision: October 2004
AT-276
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
4WD models
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5664E
1.
Rear oil seal
2.
Bracket
3.
Adapter case
4.
Parking actuator support
5.
Return spring
6.
Parking pawl
Revision: October 2004
AT-277
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
7.
Pawl shaft
10. Seal ring
8.
Bracket
9.
11. Needle bearing
Self-sealing bolt
12. Gasket
13. Revolution sensor
14. Parking gear
15. Output shaft
16. Bearing race
17. Needle bearing
18. Manual plate
19. Parking rod
20. Manual shaft oil seal
21. Manual shaft
22. O-ring
23. Band servo anchor end pin
24. Detent spring
25. Spacer
26. Seal rings
27. Return spring
28. O-ring
29. Servo assembly
30. Snap ring
31. Snap ring
32. Sub-harness
33. Control valve with TCM
34. Bracket
35. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
36. Oil pan
37. Magnet
38. Drain plug
39. Drain plug gasket
40. Oil pan mounting bolt
41. Oil pan gasket
42. Terminal cord assembly
43. O-ring
44. Retaining pin
45. Transmission case
Revision: October 2004
AT-278
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel
ECS00B3K
A
2WD models
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5185E
Revision: October 2004
AT-279
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
4WD models
SCIA5189E
Revision: October 2004
AT-280
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap
Rings
ECS00B3L
A
2WD models
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5196E
Revision: October 2004
AT-281
2005 Titan
OVERHAUL
4WD models
SCIA5197E
Revision: October 2004
AT-282
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly
PFP:31020
A
ECS00CCW
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to AT-15, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD models)" B
or AT-16, "Cross-Sectional View (4WD models)" .
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while
AT
pulling straight out.
D
E
SCIA5010E
3.
a.
b.
c.
Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as
shown.
Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way
clutch spline using screwdriver.
Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
SCIA3171E
4.
Remove converter housing from transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
SCIA5171E
Revision: October 2004
AT-283
2005 Titan
M
DISASSEMBLY
5.
Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.
SCIA5011E
6.
Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmission case.
SCIA2300E
7.
Attach sliding hammer to oil pump assembly and extract it
evenly from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Fully tighten sliding hammer screw.
● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface.
SCIA5012E
8.
Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
SCIA5172E
Revision: October 2004
AT-284
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
9.
Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA5252E
D
10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA2808E
11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly.
NOTE:
Remove front sun gear assembly by rotating left/right.
H
I
J
SCIA5014E
K
12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.
L
M
SCIA5269E
13. Remove front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear
internal gear as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with needle bearing.
SCIA5173E
Revision: October 2004
AT-285
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.
SCIA5016E
15. Remove brake band from transmission case.
SCIA5345E
●
●
To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at left.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns.
SAT655
16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a
unit.
SCIA5344E
Revision: October 2004
AT-286
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA5174E
D
18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA5176E
19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
H
I
J
SCIA5177E
K
20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly.
L
M
SCIA5178E
21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5179E
Revision: October 2004
AT-287
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove then with bearing races and needle
bearing.
SCIA5018E
23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface.
SCIA2306E
24. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.
SCIA5019E
25. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.
SCIA5198E
26. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5021E
Revision: October 2004
AT-288
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
27. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
A
B
AT
SCIA5022E
D
28. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
E
F
G
SCIA2308E
H
29. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-12, "A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING
PROCEDURE" .
I
J
K
SCIA5199E
30. Remove magnets from oil pan.
L
M
SCIA5200E
Revision: October 2004
AT-289
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
31. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5023E
32. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
SCIA5146E
33. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5024E
34. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
SCIA5293E
35. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
42 (1.65)
5
B
55 (2.17)
6
C
40 (1.57)
1
SCIA5025E
Revision: October 2004
AT-290
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
36. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with transmission assembly terminal connector and the manual valve notch and manual
plate height.Remove it vertically.
A
B
AT
SCIA5308E
D
37. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
E
F
G
SCIA5301E
38. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
H
I
J
SCIA5264E
K
39. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
L
M
SCIA5155E
40. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to
the following procedures.
Revision: October 2004
AT-291
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
a.
i.
ii.
2WD models
Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and transmission case.
Remove bracket.
SCIA5349E
iii. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.
SCIA5028E
iv. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With
needle bearing)
SCIA5029E
b.
i.
ii.
4WD models
Remove tightening bolts for adapter case assembly and transmission case.
Remove bracket.
SCIA5203E
Revision: October 2004
AT-292
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
iii. Tap adapter case assembly with soft hammer.
A
iv. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With
needle bearing)
B
AT
D
SCIA5205E
v.
Remove gasket from transmission case.
E
F
G
SCIA5231E
H
41. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
I
J
K
SCIA5245E
L
42. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/
right.
M
SCIA5030E
Revision: October 2004
AT-293
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
43. Remove parking gear from output shaft.
SCIA5247E
44. Remove seal rings from output shaft.
SCIA5209E
45. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
SCIA5213E
46. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
● Be careful not to damage harness with the edge of case.
● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's
front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.
SCIA2320E
47. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flatbladed screwdrivers.
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap
using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another
screwdriver.
48. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.
SCIA5032E
Revision: October 2004
AT-294
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
49. Remove N-spring from transmission case.
A
B
AT
SCIA5214E
D
50. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate
from transmission case.
E
F
G
SCIA2322E
51. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) from transmission
case while compressing return spring, using Tool.
Tool number
H
: KV31102400 (J-34285, J-34285-87)
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5217E
52. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission
case.
SCIA2324E
Revision: October 2004
AT-295
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
53. Remove seal rings from drum support.
SCIA3333E
54. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.
SCIA2796E
55. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with compressed air. Refer to AT-279, "Oil Channel" .
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pistons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the pistons.
SCIA5047E
56. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.
SCIA5340E
Revision: October 2004
AT-296
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
57. Use a pin punch (4mm dia. commercial service tool) to knock
out retaining pin.
A
B
AT
SCIA2328E
D
58. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with pliers.
E
F
G
SCIA5218E
59. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.
H
I
J
SCIA5219E
60. Remove parking rod from manual plate.
61. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
K
L
M
SCIA5220E
62. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.
SCIA5355E
Revision: October 2004
AT-297
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
63. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.
SCIA5248E
64. Using snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from transmission
case.
SCIA2333E
65. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission
case.
66. Remove return spring from servo assembly.
67. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.
SCIA2334E
68. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD
models) or adapter case (4WD models).
SCIA3423E
Revision: October 2004
AT-298
2005 Titan
DISASSEMBLY
69. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models).
A
B
AT
SCIA3424E
D
70. Remove return spring from parking pawl.
E
F
G
SCIA2445E
71. Remove needle bearing from rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models).
H
I
J
SCIA5221E
72. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models).
K
L
M
SCIA5272E
Revision: October 2004
AT-299
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump
PFP:00000
ECS00CCX
COMPONENTS
SCIA5227E
1.
O-ring
2.
Oil pump cover
4.
Oil pump housing
5.
Oil pump housing oil seal
3.
O-ring
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
SCIA5228E
2.
Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SCIA2840E
Revision: October 2004
AT-300
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
3.
Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
A
B
AT
SCIA2841E
D
4.
Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.
E
F
G
SCIA5230E
ASSEMBLY
1.
H
Install O-ring to oil pump cover.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
I
J
K
SCIA5230E
2.
L
Install O-ring to oil pump housing.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
M
SCIA2841E
Revision: October 2004
AT-301
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
3.
Install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump housing until it is
flush.
Tool number
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.
●
SCIA2839E
4.
Install oil pump housing in oil pump cover. Tighten oil pump
housing fitting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271,
"Components" .
SCIA5228E
Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch
ECS00CCY
COMPONENTS
SCIA3114E
1.
Front sun gear
Revision: October 2004
2.
3rd one-way clutch
AT-302
3.
Snap ring
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
DISASSEMBLY
1.
A
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun
gear.
B
AT
SCIA3110E
2.
D
Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.
E
F
G
SCIA3111E
H
INSPECTION
3rd One-way Clutch
●
I
Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch.
J
Front Sun Gear Snap Ring
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
K
Front Sun Gear
●
L
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front sun gear.
M
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch.
SCIA3111E
Revision: October 2004
AT-303
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
2.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun
gear.
SCIA3110E
3.
a.
b.
Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch.
Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of
3rd one-way clutch.
SCIA3131E
Revision: October 2004
AT-304
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear
ECS00CCZ
A
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA5244E
1.
Seal ring
2.
O-ring
3.
Needle bearing
4.
Bearing race
5.
Front carrier assembly
6.
Needle bearing
7.
Snap ring
8.
Snap ring
9.
Retaining plate
10. Driven plate
11. Input clutch drum
12. Drive plate
13. Rear internal gear
Revision: October 2004
AT-305
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.
Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly.
SCIA5339E
a.
Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.
SCIA5232E
b.
Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly.
SCIA5233E
c.
Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA5234E
Revision: October 2004
AT-306
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
4.
a.
Disassemble input clutch assembly.
Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA5235E
D
b.
Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA2853E
c.
d.
Remove snap ring from input clutch drum, using flat-bladed
screwdriver.
Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from input
clutch drum.
H
I
J
SCIA2864E
K
INSPECTION
Front Carrier Snap Ring
●
L
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
M
Input Clutch Snap Ring
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drive Plates
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Revision: October 2004
AT-307
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Front Carrier Assembly
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear internal gear.
ASSEMBLY
1.
a.
Install input clutch.
Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input
clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.
SCIA5237E
b.
Install snap ring in input clutch drum, using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA2864E
Revision: October 2004
AT-308
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
c.
Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
A
B
AT
SCIA2853E
D
d.
Install new O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
E
F
G
SCIA5235E
2.
a.
Install front carrier assembly.
Install snap ring to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
H
I
J
SCIA5234E
b.
Install needle bearing in front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to
AT-281, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" .
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
L
M
SCIA5233E
c.
d.
Install bearing race in front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.
SCIA5232E
Revision: October 2004
AT-309
K
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
3.
4.
Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.
Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.
SCIA5339E
Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
ECS00CD0
COMPONENTS
SCIA5343E
1.
Needle bearing
4.
High and low reverse clutch hub
7.
1st one-way clutch
2.
Bearing race
3.
Snap ring
5.
Needle bearing
6.
Snap ring
8.
Rear sun gear
9.
Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove needle bearing and bearing races from high and low
reverse clutch hub.
SCIA5238E
Revision: October 2004
AT-310
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
2.
Using a snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from mid sun gear
assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
A
B
AT
SCIA2855E
D
3.
Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA2856E
a.
Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.
H
I
J
SCIA2857E
4.
K
Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.
L
M
SCIA2858E
Revision: October 2004
AT-311
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
a.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun
gear.
SCIA2859E
b.
Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.
SCIA4633E
5.
Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
SCIA2861E
INSPECTION
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
1st One-way Clutch
●
Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
Mid Sun Gear
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the mid sun gear.
Rear Sun Gear
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
Revision: October 2004
AT-312
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.
A
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install seal rings from mid sun gear.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
B
AT
D
SCIA2861E
2.
Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch.
E
F
G
H
SCIA4633E
3.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring to rear sun
gear.
I
J
K
SCIA2859E
4.
L
Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.
M
SCIA2858E
Revision: October 2004
AT-313
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
5.
Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.
CAUTION:
● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to
AT-281, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" .
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA2857E
6.
Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assembly.
SCIA2856E
7.
Using a snap ring pliers, install snap ring to mid sun gear
assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA2855E
8.
a.
b.
Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of
1st one-way clutch.
SCIA3132E
9.
Install needle bearing and bearing races to high and low reverse
clutch hub.
CAUTION:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing
races.
● Take care with order of bearing races.
SCIA5238E
Revision: October 2004
AT-314
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High and Low Reverse Clutch
ECS00CD1
COMPONENTS
A
B
AT
D
E
F
SCIA5239E
1.
High and low reverse clutch drum
2.
Driven plate
3.
Retaining plate
4.
Snap ring
5.
Drive plate
6.
Bearing race
G
H
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.
I
J
K
SCIA5240E
2.
3.
L
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and
low reverse clutch drum.
Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high
and low reverse clutch drum.
M
SCIA2868E
INSPECTION
●
Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
●
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Revision: October 2004
AT-315
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and
low reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with the order of plates.
SCIA5241E
2.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low
reverse clutch drum.
SCIA2868E
3.
Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
SCIA5240E
Revision: October 2004
AT-316
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Direct Clutch
ECS00CD2
A
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
SCIA5242E
1.
Direct clutch drum
2.
Driven plate
4.
Snap ring
5.
Drive plate
3.
H
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
G
Retaining plate
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap rings from direct
clutch drum.
Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from
direct clutch drum.
I
J
K
SCIA2868E
INSPECTION
●
L
Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.
Direct Clutch Snap Rings
●
M
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Direct Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Revision: October 2004
AT-317
2005 Titan
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in direct
clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with the order of plates.
SCIA5243E
2.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap rings in direct clutch
drum.
SCIA2868E
Revision: October 2004
AT-318
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
1.
PFP:00000
A
ECS00CD3
As shown in the right figure illustration, use a drift [commercial
service tool φ22 mm (0.87 in)] to drive manual shaft oil seals into
the transmission case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals.
B
AT
D
SCIA5256E
2.
E
Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case. Tighten
bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
F
G
H
SCIA5248E
3.
4.
Install manual shaft to transmission case.
Install parking rod to manual plate.
I
J
K
SCIA5220E
5.
L
Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.
M
SCIA5219E
Revision: October 2004
AT-319
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
6.
a.
b.
Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft
with a pin punch.
Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm over the manual
plate.
● Do not reuse retaining pin.
SCIA5297E
7.
a.
b.
Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual
shaft with a pin punch.
Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm over the transmission case.
● Do not reuse retaining pin.
SCIA2427E
8.
Install O-rings to servo assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings.
9. Install return spring to servo assembly.
10. Install servo assembly in transmission case.
SCIA2334E
11. Using snap ring pliers, install snap ring to transmission case.
SCIA2333E
12. Install D-rings in reverse brake piston.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse D-rings.
● Apply ATF to D-rings.
SCIA5340E
Revision: October 2004
AT-320
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.
A
B
AT
SCIA2325E
14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
D
E
F
G
SCIA2796E
15. Install seal rings to drum support.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
H
I
J
SCIA3333E
K
16. Install spring retainer and return spring in transmission case.
L
M
SCIA2324E
Revision: October 2004
AT-321
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
17. Set SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring
retainer) in transmission case while compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.
SCIA5217E
18. Install reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate in
transmission case.
CAUTION:
Take care with the order and direction of plates.
SCIA5342E
Revision: October 2004
AT-322
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
19. Assemble N-spring.
20. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
SCIA5249E
21. Install snap ring in transmission case.
H
I
J
SCIA2439E
K
22. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
L
Specified clearance “A”:
Standard: 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to AT-343, "Reverse brake" .
M
SCIA5341E
23. Install needle bearing to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer
toAT-281, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" .
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA5213E
Revision: October 2004
AT-323
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
24. Install revolution sensor to transmission case. Tighten revolution
sensor bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
● Be careful not to damage harness with the edge of case.
● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's
front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.
SCIA2320E
25. As shown in the right figure illustration, use a drift to drive rear
oil seal into the rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case
(4WD models) until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
● Do not reuse rear oil seal.
SCIA5270E
26. Install return spring to parking pawl.
SCIA2445E
27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models).
SCIA3424E
Revision: October 2004
AT-324
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD models)
or adapter case (4WD models).
A
B
AT
SCIA3423E
D
29. Install needle bearing to rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models).
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
E
F
G
SCIA5221E
30. Install seal rings to output shaft.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
H
I
J
SCIA5209E
K
31. Install parking gear to output shaft.
L
M
SCIA5247E
32. Install output shaft in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
SCIA5030E
Revision: October 2004
AT-325
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
33. Install bearing race in output shaft.
SCIA5245E
34. Install rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to the
following procedures.
a. 2WD models
i. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in
illustration.
CAUTION:
Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
From the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.
SCIA5212E
ii.
Install rear extension assembly to transmission case.
SCIA5029E
iii. Install bracket.
iv. Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Rear extension assembly bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
SCIA5349E
Revision: October 2004
AT-326
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
b.
i.
4WD models
Install gasket to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse gasket.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
From the transmission case and adapter case assembly
mounting surfaces.
A
B
AT
SCIA5231E
D
ii.
Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.
E
F
G
SCIA5205E
iii. Install bracket.
iv. Tighten adapter case assembly bolts to specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
H
I
Adapter case assembly bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
J
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
K
L
M
SCIA5203E
35. Install needle bearing in drum support edge surface.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA5198E
Revision: October 2004
AT-327
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
36. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake.
SCIA5019E
37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch
assembly.
SCIA2306E
38. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, range the drive plate.
SCIA3169E
39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
SCIA5018E
Revision: October 2004
AT-328
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Check that portion A of high and low reverse clutch drum
protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of
rear sun gear.
A
B
AT
SCIA3130E
40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
D
E
F
G
SCIA5179E
H
41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
I
J
K
SCIA5178E
42. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum.
L
M
SCIA2462E
Revision: October 2004
AT-329
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
43. Install needle bearing (rear side) in mid carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA5177E
44. Install needle bearing (front side) in mid carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA5176E
45. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5344E
46. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear
internal gear as a unit.
SCIA5173E
47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SCIA5269E
Revision: October 2004
AT-330
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission
case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin.
A
B
AT
SCIA5016E
49. Install brake band in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installation faces servo side.
D
E
F
G
SCIA2809E
50. Install front sun gear assembly to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear radial bearing and 3rd one-way
clutch end bearing.
H
I
J
SCIA5014E
51. Install needle bearing in front sun gear assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
K
L
M
SCIA2808E
52. Adjust brake band tilting using clips so that brake band contacts
front sun gear drum evenly.
SCIA5033E
Revision: October 2004
AT-331
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
53. Adjust brake band.
a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque.
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)
c.
d.
Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.
Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified
torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
SCIA2809E
Adjustment
ECS00CD4
TOTAL END PLAY
●
●
Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race for
oil pump cover.
Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within
specifications.
SCIA2810E
1.
Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension
“J”.
SCIA5350E
a.
Measure dimension “K”.
SCIA5351E
Revision: October 2004
AT-332
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
b.
c.
Measure dimension “L”.
Calculate dimension “J”.
A
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case and needle bearing mating surface
of front sun gear.
J=K–L
B
AT
SCIA5352E
2.
D
Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimension “M”.
E
F
G
SCIA3125E
a.
Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
H
I
J
SCIA3124E
b.
K
Measure dimension “M1 ”.
L
M
SCIA3126E
c.
Measure dimension “M2 ”.
SCIA3127E
Revision: October 2004
AT-333
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
d.
Calculate dimension “M”.
“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.
M = M1 – M2
SCIA3125E
3.
Adjust total end play “T1 ”.
T1 = J – M
Total end play “T1 ”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
●
Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
Bearing races:
Refer to AT-343, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" .
Assembly (2)
1.
SCIA2810E
ECS00CD5
Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA5172E
2.
Install bearing race to oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
SCIA5252E
Revision: October 2004
AT-334
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
3.
Install oil pump assembly in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump radial bearing.
A
B
AT
SCIA2811E
D
4.
Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown.
CAUTION:
Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
From the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces.
E
F
G
SCIA5321E
5.
Tighten oil pump bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-271,
"Components" .
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
H
I
J
SCIA2300E
6.
Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
K
L
M
SCIA5011E
7.
Install converter housing to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Converter housing bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
SCIA5171E
Revision: October 2004
AT-335
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
8.
Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution
sensor hole.
SCIA5034E
9.
a.
Install control valve with TCM.
Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
SCIA5264E
b.
Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control
valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 mounting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
SCIA5301E
c.
Install O-ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA5155E
d.
Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine revolution sensor hole.
● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
● Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so
as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
SCIA5034E
Revision: October 2004
AT-336
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
●
Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with
manual plate projection.
A
B
AT
SCIA5035E
e.
D
Install bolts A, B and C to control valve with TCM.
Bolt symbol
Length: mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
42 (1.65)
5
B
55 (2.17)
6
C
40 (1.57)
1
E
F
G
SCIA5025E
f.
g.
Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After
that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
H
I
J
SCIA5037E
K
10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
L
M
SCIA5023E
11. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip.
SCIA5146E
Revision: October 2004
AT-337
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
12. Connect revolution sensor connector.
SCIA5024E
13. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
SCIA5293E
14. Pull down A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5299E
15. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5300E
16. Install magnets in oil pan.
SCIA5200E
Revision: October 2004
AT-338
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
17. Install oil pan to transmission case.
A
a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
B
● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. From the oil pan gasket mounting surfaces.
AT
b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
D
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
E
From the oil pan mounting surfaces.
F
SCIA2308E
c.
Tighten oil pan bolts to the specified torque in numerical order
shown after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
18. Install drain plug to oil pan. Tighten drain plug to the specified
torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
G
H
I
SCIA4113E
19. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is
required for a new torque converter.
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
J
K
L
M
SAT428DA
b.
Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION:
Install torque converter while rotating it.
SCIA5010E
Revision: October 2004
AT-339
2005 Titan
ASSEMBLY
c.
Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper
position.
Distance “A”:
: 24.0 mm (0.94 in) or more
SAT017B
Revision: October 2004
AT-340
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
Applied model
PFP:00030
A
ECS00CD6
4x2
4x4
Automatic transmission model
Transmission model code number
95X17
Stall torque ratio
Transmission gear ratio
B
RE5R05A
95X18
2.0: 1
1st
3.827
2nd
2.368
3rd
1.520
4th
1.000
5th
0.834
Reverse
2.613
Recommended fluid
AT
D
E
NISSAN Matic Fluid J*1
Fluid capacity
F
10.6 liter (11-1/4 US qt, 9-3/8 Imp qt)
CAUTION:
Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.
●
●
Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN an ATF Matic Fluid J will deteriorate in driveability and
automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
G
*1: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
H
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears
ECS00CD7
NORMAL MODE
Final
gear
ratio
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
Full throttle
70 - 74
(44 - 46)
112 - 120
(70 - 75)
176 - 186
(110 - 116)
249 - 259
(155 - 161)
245 - 255
(152 - 159)
166 - 176
(103 - 110)
100 - 108
(62 - 67)
43 - 47
(27 - 30)
Half throttle
46 - 50
(28 - 31)
74 - 82
(46 - 51)
103 - 113
(64 - 70)
135 - 145
(84 - 90)
109 - 119
(68 - 74)
69 - 79
(43 - 49)
44 - 52
(27 - 32)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
Full throttle
61 - 65
(38 - 41)
97 - 105
(61 - 66)
153 - 163
(95 - 102)
236 - 246
(147 - 153)
232 - 242
(144 - 151)
143 - 153
(89 - 95)
87 - 95
(54 - 59)
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
Half throttle
41 - 45
(26 - 28)
66 - 74
(41 - 46)
89 - 99
(56 - 62)
117 - 127
(73 - 79)
95 - 105
(59 - 65)
59 - 69
(37 - 43)
38 - 46
(24 - 29)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
2.937
3.357
●
I
D1 →D2
K
L
At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
TOW MODE
Final
gear
ratio
M
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
Full throttle
70 - 74
(44 - 46)
112 - 120
(70 - 75)
176 - 186
(110 - 116)
249 - 259
(155 - 161)
245 - 255
(152 - 159)
166 - 176
(103 - 110)
100 - 108
(62 - 67)
43 - 47
(27 - 30)
Half throttle
50 - 54
(31 - 34)
81 - 89
(50 - 55)
113 - 123
(70 - 76)
135 - 145
(84 - 90)
109 - 119
(68 - 74)
68 - 78
(42 - 48)
44 - 52
(27 - 32)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
Full throttle
61 - 65
(38 - 41)
97 - 105
(61 - 66)
153 - 163
(95 - 102)
236 - 246
(147 - 153)
232 - 242
(144 - 151)
143 - 153
(89 - 95)
87 - 95
(54 - 59)
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
Half throttle
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
72 - 80
(45 - 50)
98 - 108
(61 - 67)
117 - 127
(73 - 79)
95 - 105
(59 - 65)
59 - 69
(37 - 43)
37 - 45
(23 - 28)
11 - 15
(7 - 10)
2.937
3.357
●
J
At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Revision: October 2004
AT-341
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up
Final
gear
ratio
2.937
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Closed throttle
Half throttle
3.357
ECS00CD8
Closed throttle
Half throttle
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
74 - 82 (46 - 51)
71 - 79 (45 - 49)
188 - 196 (117 - 122)
136 - 144 (85 - 90)
65 - 73 (41 - 46)
62 - 70 (39 - 44)
168 - 176 (105 - 110)
118 - 126 (74 - 79)
●
At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition.
●
At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up
●
Final
gear
ratio
Throttle position
2.937
Closed throttle
3.357
Closed throttle
ECS00CD9
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
52 - 60 (33 - 38)
49 - 57 (31 - 36)
5th
52 - 60 (33 - 38)
49 - 57 (31 - 36)
4th
46 - 54 (29 - 34)
43 - 51 (27 - 32)
5th
46 - 54 (29 - 34)
43 - 51 (27 - 32)
At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition.
Stall Speed
ECS00CDA
Stall speed
2,500 - 2,800 rpm
Line Pressure
ECS00CDB
Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)]
Engine speed
R position
D position
At idle speed
392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64)
373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61)
At stall speed
1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274)
1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
ECS00CDC
Name
Condition
0°C (32°F)
2.2
15
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1
20°C (68°F)
1.8
6.5
80°C (176°F)
0.6
0.9
0°C (32°F)
2.2
10
20°C (68°F)
1.7
4
80°C (176°F)
0.45
0.5
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V)
Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ)
Turbine Revolution Sensor
Name
ECS00CDD
Condition
Turbine revolution
sensor 1
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle position switch
“OFF”.
Turbine revolution
sensor 2
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle position switch
“OFF”.
Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)
Name
Revolution sensor
Condition
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH).
Revision: October 2004
Data (Approx.)
1.3 (kHz)
ECS00CDE
Data (Approx.)
185 (Hz)
AT-342
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Reverse brake
ECS00CDF
A
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
Thickness of retaining plates
31667 90X14
31667 90X15
31667 90X16
31667 90X17
31667 90X18
31667 90X19
B
AT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Total End Play
Total end play
ECS00CDG
mm (in)
D
0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY
Thickness
mm (in)
E
Part number*
0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
31435 95X00
31435 95X01
31435 95X02
31435 95X03
31435 95X04
31435 95X05
F
G
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AT-343
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
AT-344
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5
AUDIO ......................................................................... 6
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6
System Description .................................................. 7
BASE SYSTEM ..................................................... 7
MIDLINE SYSTEM ................................................ 7
PREMIUM SYSTEM ............................................. 8
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM .............. 9
CAN Communication System Description ................ 9
Schematic .............................................................. 10
BASE SYSTEM ................................................... 10
MIDLINE SYSTEM ...............................................11
PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI) .............. 12
PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITH NAVI) ...................... 13
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — ................................. 14
BASE SYSTEM ................................................... 14
MIDLINE SYSTEM .............................................. 16
PREMIUM SYSTEM ........................................... 20
TerminalsandReferenceValueforAudioUnit(Base
System) .................................................................. 30
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Midline System) ........................................................... 31
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Premium System) ........................................................ 34
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Amp. ..... 37
Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Audio
Remote Control Unit ............................................... 40
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch ....... 41
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ........................ 43
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
(MIDLINE SYSTEM AND PREMIUM SYSTEM
WITHOUT NAVI) ................................................. 43
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
(PREMIUM SYSTEM WITH NAVI) ...................... 43
Revision: October 2004
AV-1
EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE ........... 43
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ..................................... 43
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 44
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE
SYSTEM) ............................................................ 44
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (MIDLINE OR PREMIUM SYSTEM) ........................... 44
FOR RADIO ONLY .............................................. 45
FOR CD ONLY .................................................... 45
Noise Inspection ..................................................... 45
TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE ........ 45
Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 46
Steering Switch Check ............................................ 47
AV Switch Check .................................................... 49
AudioCommunicationLine Check (WithNavigation
System) .................................................................. 49
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or
Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System) ................ 50
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or
Rear Door Tweeter (Base or Midline System) ........ 52
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or
Front Tweeter (Premium System) ........................... 54
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or
Rear Door Tweeter (Premium System) .................. 58
Sound Is Not Heard From Center Speaker (Premium System) ......................................................... 61
Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (Premium
System) .................................................................. 62
Removal and Installation for Audio Unit ................. 65
Removal and Installation for AV Switch .................. 65
Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker ... 65
Removal and Installation of Rear Door Speaker ... 65
Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter ............. 66
Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter ..... 66
Removal and Installation of Center Speaker .......... 66
Removal and Installation of Subwoofer (Premium
System) .................................................................. 66
Removal and Installation of Audio Amp. ................. 66
Removal and Installation of Rear Audio Remote
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Control Unit ............................................................. 67
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio
Control Switches ..................................................... 67
AUDIO ANTENNA ..................................................... 68
Location of Antenna ................................................ 68
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ............................ 69
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 69
System Description ................................................. 70
Schematic ............................................................... 71
Wiring Diagram — DVD — ..................................... 72
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 75
Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 76
Removal and Installation of DVD Player ................. 77
Removal and Installation of Video Monitor ............. 77
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............................................. 78
System Description ................................................. 78
TRAVEL DISTANCE ............................................ 78
TRAVEL DIRECTION .......................................... 78
MAP-MATCHING ................................................. 78
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .......... 79
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 80
BIRDVIEW™ ....................................................... 80
MAP DISPLAY ..................................................... 81
FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH ..................... 82
“VIEW” MODE ..................................................... 87
“HEADING” MODE .............................................. 88
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE ................... 88
“SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ............... 88
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ........... 88
“AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE ................................. 89
“AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE ...................... 89
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE ................................. 89
“EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE ........................ 90
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE ............................. 90
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE... 90
“SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE ........................ 90
“TRACKING” MODE ............................................ 91
GUIDANCE VOLUME ......................................... 91
DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON ........ 91
TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2 ............................................... 92
FUEL ECONOMY ................................................ 92
MAINTENANCE .................................................. 92
ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION ..................... 92
TIRE PRESSURE ................................................ 93
WARNING INDICATIONS ................................... 93
CAN Communication System Description .............. 93
Component Parts Location ..................................... 94
Schematic ............................................................... 95
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — ..................................... 96
Schematic ............................................................. 103
Wiring Diagram — COMM — ............................... 104
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control
Unit ....................................................................... 107
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control
Unit ....................................................................... 109
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit . 113
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch ..... 115
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 116
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 118
Revision: October 2004
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 118
DIAGNOSIS ITEM ............................................. 118
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) .................................. 118
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 118
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 120
Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) ................................. 121
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 121
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 122
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ............................. 124
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 124
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 125
VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 125
NAVIGATION ..................................................... 126
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 126
VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 127
HISTORY OF ERRORS ..................................... 127
DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS .......... 127
NAVIGATION ..................................................... 129
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR ........................ 131
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 131
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 132
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI
Control Unit ........................................................... 133
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display
Control Unit ........................................................... 134
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display
Unit ........................................................................ 135
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV
Switch ................................................................... 137
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.138
VehicleSpeedSignalCheckforDisplayControlUnit. 139
Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ... 140
Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.140
Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit .......... 140
Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit ...... 141
Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ........ 141
Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit .... 141
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) ...................... 142
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) .......................... 143
Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) ....................... 145
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and AV Switch) .................................. 147
CAN Communication Line Check ......................... 148
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map
is Not Inserted ....................................................... 148
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVDROM Map is Malfunctioning or If It is Impossible to
Load Data from DVD-ROM Map ........................... 148
If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS
Antenna is Malfunctioning ..................................... 149
Operating Screen for Audio and A/C is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen ..................... 149
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Bluish) ............................................ 151
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Reddish) ......................................... 152
AV-2
2005 Titan
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Yellowish) ...................................... 153
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look
Bluish) .................................................................. 154
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look
Reddish) ............................................................... 155
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look
Yellowish) ............................................................. 156
NAVI Screen is Rolling ......................................... 157
Guide Sound is Not Heard ................................... 159
Screen is Not Shown ............................................ 160
A/C Screen is Not Shown (NAVI Screen is Shown). 160
FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown .............. 160
Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“
*** ” is Shown) ...................................................... 160
Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ”
is Shown) ............................................................. 161
DrivingDistanceor AverageSpeedDisplayedis Not
Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ....................................... 161
WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown . 161
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to
Start Self-Diagnosis) ............................................ 162
Audio Does Not Work ........................................... 162
Navigation System Does Not Activate ................. 162
Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored ............ 163
Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored ........ 163
Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct. 163
Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received. 163
Driving Test .......................................................... 164
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction . 165
BASIC OPERATION ......................................... 165
VEHICLE MARK ............................................... 165
DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU
ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET .............. 166
VOICE GUIDE ................................................... 166
ROUTE SEARCH .............................................. 167
EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK
DISPLACEMENT .............................................. 168
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG ........ 171
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS ............. 171
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR
SEA ................................................................... 172
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN
RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG
PLACE ............................................................... 172
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW .................................................... 172
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS
GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN
TO CORRECT LOCATION ................................ 172
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED ............................................................. 172
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN ........ 172
Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit ................. 173
Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit ..... 174
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna ........... 174
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch. 174
Removal and Installation of AV Switch ................. 175
Removal and Installation of Display Unit .............. 175
Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit . 175
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-3
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS00ANU
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00ANV
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Revision: October 2004
AV-4
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EKS00ANW
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
B
C
D
PBIC0191E
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-5
2005 Titan
AUDIO
AUDIO
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28111
EKS00ANX
WKIA3599E
Revision: October 2004
AV-6
2005 Titan
AUDIO
System Description
EKS00ANY
A
BASE SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to audio unit terminal 6.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Then audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
●
to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH and
●
to terminals + and - of rear door tweeter LH and RH (crew cab only).
B
C
D
E
F
MIDLINE SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
G
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to audio unit terminal 6 and
H
●
to AV switch terminal 1.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I
●
to audio unit terminal 10 and
●
to AV switch terminal 2.
J
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
●
to AV switch terminal 5
AV
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
L
●
to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH and
M
●
to terminals + and - of rear door tweeter LH and RH (crew cab only).
When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes
depending on which button is pushed.
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit (Crew Cab Only)
Power is supplied
●
from audio unit terminal 32
●
to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13.
Ground is supplied
●
to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15
●
through body grounds B117 and B132.
Audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29
●
to terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4 of rear audio remote control unit.
Revision: October 2004
AV-7
2005 Titan
AUDIO
AUX In Jack
The AUX in jack allows input of audio signals to the audio unit from an auxiliary audio device.
Audio signals are supplied
●
from AUX in jack terminals 1 and 4
●
to audio unit terminals 74 and 75.
PREMIUM SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 15A fuse [No. 17, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to audio amp. terminal 17
●
through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to audio unit terminal 6
●
to audio amp. terminal 1
●
to AV switch terminal 1 and
●
to display control unit terminal 1 (with NAVI).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to audio unit terminal 10
●
to AV switch terminal 2 and
●
to display control unit terminal 10 (with NAVI).
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to display control unit terminal 12 (with NAVI).
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
●
to audio amp. terminals 4 and 20
●
to AV switch terminal 5
●
to display unit terminal 1 (with NAVI) and
●
to display control unit terminal 3 (with NAVI)
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
●
to audio amp. terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, 21, 22, 23 and 24.
Audio signals are amplified by the audio amp.
The amplified audio signals are supplied
●
through audio amp. terminals 2, 3, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32
●
to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of center speaker
●
to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of rear door tweeter LH and RH (crew cab) and
●
to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of subwoofer.
When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes
depending on which button is pushed.
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit
Power is supplied
●
from audio unit terminal 32
●
to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13.
Ground is supplied
Revision: October 2004
AV-8
2005 Titan
AUDIO
to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15
●
through body grounds B117 and B132.
Audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29
●
to terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4 of rear audio remote control unit.
●
A
B
AUX In Jack (With Midline and Premium Systems)
The AUX in jack allows input of audio signals to the audio unit from an auxiliary audio device.
Audio signals are supplied
●
from AUX in jack terminals 1 and 4
●
to audio unit terminals 74 and 75.
C
D
Satellite Radio Tuner (Pre-wiring) (With Midline and Premium Systems)
The satellite radio tuner pre-wiring allows connection of a satellite radio tuner.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 32.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 36.
Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner.
Then audio signals are supplied
●
through satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminals 21, 22, 23 and 24
●
to audio unit terminals 41, 42, 43 and 44.
E
F
G
H
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS00ANZ
I
J
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-9
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Schematic
EKS00AO0
BASE SYSTEM
WKWA1014E
Revision: October 2004
AV-10
2005 Titan
AUDIO
MIDLINE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2356E
Revision: October 2004
AV-11
2005 Titan
AUDIO
PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI)
WKWA2357E
Revision: October 2004
AV-12
2005 Titan
AUDIO
PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITH NAVI)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2358E
Revision: October 2004
AV-13
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —
EKS00AO1
BASE SYSTEM
WKWA2331E
Revision: October 2004
AV-14
2005 Titan
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2332E
Revision: October 2004
AV-15
2005 Titan
AUDIO
MIDLINE SYSTEM
WKWA2333E
Revision: October 2004
AV-16
2005 Titan
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2334E
Revision: October 2004
AV-17
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WKWA1554E
Revision: October 2004
AV-18
2005 Titan
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2335E
Revision: October 2004
AV-19
2005 Titan
AUDIO
PREMIUM SYSTEM
WKWA2336E
Revision: October 2004
AV-20
2005 Titan
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2337E
Revision: October 2004
AV-21
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WKWA1557E
Revision: October 2004
AV-22
2005 Titan
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2338E
Revision: October 2004
AV-23
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WKWA2339E
Revision: October 2004
AV-24
2005 Titan
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1558E
Revision: October 2004
AV-25
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVI
WKWA2340E
Revision: October 2004
AV-26
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WITH NAVI
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2341E
Revision: October 2004
AV-27
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WKWA2342E
Revision: October 2004
AV-28
2005 Titan
AUDIO
WITH MIDLINE OR PREMIUM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2438E
Revision: October 2004
AV-29
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Base System)
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
2 (L/W)
1 (L/R)
Audio sound
signal front
LH
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Receive audio
signal
Reference value
(Approx.)
EKS00AO2
Example of symptom
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
SKIA0177E
4 (W/B)
3 (L/B)
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
6 (Y)
7 (BR)
8 (R/L)
10 (V)
14 (SB)
Ground
Battery
power
Ground
Illumination
control signal
Ground
Illumination
signal
Ground
ACC signal
13 (B/Y)
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Input
Input
Input
Input
Output
System does not
work properly.
–
–
Battery voltage
ON
Illumination
control switch
is operated by
lighting switch
in 1st position.
Changes between 0 and 12V
Lighting switch
is in 1st position.
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
is OFF.
3V or less
ON
Ignition switch
ACC or ON
Battery voltage
ON
Receive audio
signal
OFF
Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled.
Audio unit illumination does not come
on when lighting
switch is in 1st position.
System does not
work properly.
No sound from rear
door speaker LH or
rear door tweeter
LH.
SKIA0177E
16 (O/L)
15 (R/L)
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
door speaker RH or
rear door tweeter
RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: October 2004
AV-30
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Midline System)
EKS00AO3
A
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
B
Operation
C
2 (L/W)
1 (L/R)
Audio sound
signal front
LH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
D
SKIA0177E
E
4 (W/B)
3 (L/B)
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
6 (Y)
7 (BR)
8 (R/L)
10 (V)
14 (SB)
Ground
Battery
power
Ground
Illumination
control signal
Ground
Ground
13 (B/Y)
Illumination
signal
ACC signal
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Input
Input
Input
Input
Output
–
–
ON
Illumination control switch is
operated by lighting switch in 1st
position.
Battery voltage
ON
G
System does not
work properly.
H
Changes between 0 and 12V
Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled.
I
Lighting switch is
in 1st position.
Battery voltage
Lighting switch is
OFF.
3V or less
–
Battery voltage
OFF
ON
Audio unit illumination does not come
on when lighting
switch is in 1st position.
16 (O/L)
15 (R/L)
Output
ON
System does not
work properly.
No sound from rear
door speaker LH or
rear door tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
No sound from rear
door speaker RH or
rear door tweeter
RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
21 (V)
Ground
Remote
control A
Revision: October 2004
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
AV-31
5V
J
AV
SKIA0177E
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
F
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
2005 Titan
L
M
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
+
–
22 (P)
Ground
Remote
control B
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
23 (BR/Y)
Ground
Remote
control C
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
24 (L)
Ground
Remote
control D
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
25 (LG)
–
Remote
control
ground
–
–
0V
Rear audio remote
control switches do
not function.
27 (O/L)
26 (O)
Output
ON
Audio sound
signal LH
Operation
–
Receive audio
signal
No sound from LH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
29 (W)
28 (W/L)
Audio sound
signal RH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from RH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
30
–
–
Ground
Remote
control
enable signal
Output
ON
32 (V)
Ground
Remote
control
switch
power supply
Output
ON
65 (O/L)
Ground
Audio RX
Input
ON
31 (O)
–
Shield
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
headphones or rear
audio remote control
unit switches not
operating properly.
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
Audio unit ON
12V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
–
Operate audio
volume
Audio does not operate properly.
SKIA4403E
Revision: October 2004
AV-32
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
Example of symptom
Operation
B
66 (W/L)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Operate audio
volume
Audio does not operate properly.
SKIA4402E
67
–
Shield
72 (W/B)
Ground
CD eject
signal
73 (Y/B)
Ground
CD load signal
Ground
Auxiliary
audio input
RH (+)
–
ON
–
Input
ON
Operate EJECT
button
Input
ON
Operate LOAD
button
C
D
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
0V → 5V
CD will not eject from
audio unit.
0V → 5V
CD will not load into
audio unit.
E
F
G
74 (BR)
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal (AUX
input)
No sound from auxiliary audio source
right channel.
H
SKIA0177E
I
75 (B/R)
Ground
Auxiliary
audio input
LH (+)
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal (AUX
input)
No sound from auxiliary audio source left
channel.
SKIA0177E
76
–
Shield
–
–
–
0V
J
AV
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-33
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Premium System)
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
2 (W)
1 (B)
Audio sound
signal front
LH
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Reference value
(Approx.)
EKS00AO4
Example of symptom
Operation
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
4 (Y)
3 (BR)
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
6 (Y)
7 (BR)
8 (R/L)
9
Ground
Battery
power
Ground
Illumination
control signal
Ground
–
Illumination
signal
Shield
Input
Input
Input
System does not
work properly.
–
–
Battery voltage
ON
Illumination control switch is
operated by lighting switch in 1st
position.
Changes between 0 and 12V
Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled.
Lighting switch is
in 1st position.
Battery voltage
Audio unit illumination does not come
on when lighting
switch is in 1st position.
Lighting switch is
OFF.
3V or less
OFF
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
–
–
–
0V
Input
ON
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
–
More than 6.5V
Amp. does not work
properly.
10 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
12 (G/W)
Ground
Amp. ON
signal
Output
ON
14 (BR)
13 (B/R)
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
door speaker LH or
rear door tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
16 (L)
15 (B/W)
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
door speaker RH or
rear door speaker
RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: October 2004
AV-34
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
A
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
B
Operation
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
21 (V)
Ground
Remote
control A
Ground
Remote
control B
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
C
22 (P)
23 (BR/Y)
Ground
Remote
control C
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
D
24 (L)
Ground
Remote
control D
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
E
25 (LG)
–
Remote
control
ground
–
–
0V
Rear audio remote
control switches do
not function.
F
–
G
27 (O/L)
26 (O)
Audio sound
signal LH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from LH
headphone channel.
H
SKIA0177E
I
29 (W)
28 (W/L)
Audio sound
signal RH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from RH
headphone channel.
AV
SKIA0177E
30
31 (O)
32 (V)
42 (R)
–
Shield
–
–
–
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
headphones or rear
audio remote control
unit switches not
operating properly.
L
M
Ground
Remote
control
enable signal
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
Ground
Remote
control
switch
power supply
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
12V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
41 (G)
Audio left
channel
sound signal from satellite radio
tuner
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from satellite radio tuner left
channel.
SKIA0177E
Revision: October 2004
J
AV-35
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
44 (W)
–
43 (B)
Audio right
channel
sound signal from satellite radio
tuner
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
Operation
No sound from satellite radio tuner right
channel.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
45
–
Shield
ground
(audio signal)
46
–
Shield
ground
(data)
48 (L)
Ground
Satellite
radio tuner
request to
audio unit
49 (O/L)
Ground
Audio RX
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Input
ON
Turn audio unit
ON
5V
Input
ON
Operate audio
volume
Satellite radio tuner
does not operate
properly.
Satellite radio tuner
audio information
does not display
properly.
SKIA4403E
50 (W/L)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Satellite radio tuner
audio information
does not display
properly.
Operate audio
volume
SKIA4402E
65 (O/L)
Ground
Audio RX
Input
ON
Operate audio
volume
Audio does not operate properly.
SKIA4403E
66 (W/L)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Operate audio
volume
Audio does not operate properly.
SKIA4402E
67
–
Shield
–
ON
–
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
70
–
Shield
–
–
–
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
Revision: October 2004
AV-36
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ignition
switch
A
Example of symptom
Operation
B
71 (B)
69 (W)
Voice guide
signal (with
NAVI)
Output
Press the
"GUIDE/VOICE"
button.
ON
Only route guide and
operation guide are
not heard.
SKIA0171J
72 (W/B)
Ground
CD eject
signal
73 (Y/B)
Ground
CD load signal
Ground
Auxiliary
audio input
RH (+)
Input
Input
C
D
ON
Operate EJECT
button
0V → 5V
CD will not eject from
audio unit.
ON
Operate LOAD
button
0V → 5V
CD will not load into
audio unit.
E
F
74 (BR)
Input
Receive audio
signal (AUX
input)
ON
No sound from auxiliary audio source
right channel.
G
SKIA0177E
H
75 (B/R)
Ground
Auxiliary
audio input
LH (+)
Input
Receive audio
signal (AUX
input)
ON
No sound from auxiliary audio source left
channel.
J
SKIA0177E
76
–
Shield
–
–
–
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
0V
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Amp.
Terminal
(wire color)
+
–
1 (Y)
Ground
2 (W)
18 (B)
Item
Battery
Subwoofer
Signal
input/
output
L
Reference value
(Approx.)
Operation
Input
–
–
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
Example of
symptom
M
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
No sound from
subwoofer.
SKIA0177E
3 (BR/W)
19 (BR)
Subwoofer
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from
subwoofer.
SKIA0177E
Revision: October 2004
AV
EKS00AO5
Condition
Ignition
switch
I
AV-37
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminal
(wire color)
Item
+
–
4 (B)
Ground
Ground
9 (G/W)
Ground
Amp. ON signal
10 (L/W)
26 (L/B)
Center
speaker
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
–
Ignition
switch
Operation
–
ON
–
–
Input
ON
–
More than 6.5V
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
System does not
work properly.
No sound from
center speaker.
SKIA0177E
11 (SB)
27 (B/Y)
Rear door
speaker LH
and rear door
tweeter LH
Output
ON
No sound from
rear door speaker
LH or rear door
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
12 (O/L)
28 (R/L)
Rear door
speaker RH
and rear door
tweeter RH
Output
ON
No sound from
rear door speaker
RH or rear door
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
13 (W/B)
29 (L/B)
Front door
tweeter RH
Output
ON
No sound from
front door tweeter
RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
14 (L/W)
30 (L/R)
Front tweeter
LH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from
front tweeter LH.
SKIA0177E
15 (L/W)
31 (L/R)
Front door
speaker LH
Output
ON
No sound from
front door speaker
LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: October 2004
AV-38
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminal
(wire color)
Item
+
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
A
Operation
B
16 (W/B)
32 (L/B)
Front door
speaker RH
Output
ON
No sound from
front door speaker
RH.
Receive audio
signal
D
SKIA0177E
17 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery
Input
–
–
Battery voltage
20 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
–
21 (Y)
5 (BR)
Audio sound
signal front RH
Input
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
No sound from
front door speaker
RH or front tweeter
RH.
Receive audio
signal
C
E
F
G
SKIA0177E
H
22 (W)
6 (B)
Audio sound
signal front LH
Input
ON
No sound from
front door speaker
LH or front tweeter
LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
23 (L)
7 (B/W)
Audio sound
signal rear RH
Input
ON
J
No sound from
rear door speaker
RH or rear door
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
I
AV
L
SKIA0177E
M
24 (BR)
8 (B/R)
Audio sound
signal rear LH
Input
ON
No sound from
rear door speaker
LH or rear door
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: October 2004
AV-39
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
2 (G)
1 (B)
Audio sound
signal LH
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Reference value
(Approx.)
EKS00AO6
Example of symptom
Operation
Receive audio
signal
No sound from LH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
4 (W)
3 (R)
Audio sound
signal RH
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from RH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
5
6 (R/L)
7 (LG)
–
Ground
–
Shield
Illumination
Remote
control
ground
–
Input
–
ON
–
–
Input
ON
–
0V
Lighting switch
ON
12V
Lighting switch
OFF
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
headphones or rear
audio remote control
unit switches not
operating properly.
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
illuminate.
0V
Rear audio remote
control unit switches
do not function.
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
–
8 (O)
Ground
Remote
control
enable signal
9 (V)
Ground
Remote
control A
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
10 (P)
Ground
Remote
control B
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
11 (BR/
Y)
Ground
Remote
control C
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
12 (L)
Ground
Remote
control D
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
13 (V)
Ground
Remote
control
switch
power supply
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
12V
Rear audio remote
control does not
operate.
15 (B)
–
–
ON
Ground
Revision: October 2004
–
AV-40
0V
–
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch
EKS00AO7
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
1 (Y)
Ground
2 (V)
3 (R/L)
4 (BR)
5 (B)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Battery
power
ACC signal
Illumination
signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
OFF
–
ACC
–
Lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Input
Illumination
control signal
Input
Ground
–
OFF
ON
ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Battery voltage
Turn lighting switch
OFF.
Approx. 3.0V or less
Illumination control
switch is operated
by lighting switch in
1st position.
Changes between 0 and 12V.
–
0V
AV switch illumination does not
come on when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
AV switch illumination cannot be
controlled.
B
C
D
E
F
–
G
6 (V)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
H
SKIA0175E
7
(with
NAVI)
–
Shield
ground
I
–
–
–
–
–
J
8 (LG)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
Communication signal (-)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
SKIA0176E
12 (R)
13 (G)
Ground
Ground
Remote control A
Remote control B
Input
Input
ON
ON
14 (L)
–
Remote control ground
–
–
16 (W/B)
Ground
CD EJECT
signal
Output
ON
Revision: October 2004
Press MODE switch
0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
0.75V
Press VOL UP
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
Press POWER
switch
0V
Press SEEK DOWN
switch
0.75V
Press VOL DOWN
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
–
–
Pressed
0V
Released
5V
AV-41
AV
L
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
CD eject does
not function.
2005 Titan
M
AUDIO
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
+
–
17 (Y/B)
Ground
CD LOAD
signal
Output
ON
18 (O/L)
(without
NAVI)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Operation
Pressed
0V
Released
5V
CD load does
not function.
Audio information does not
display properly.
Operate audio volume
SKIA4403E
19 (W/L)
(without
NAVI)
Ground
Audio RX
Input
ON
Audio information does not
display properly.
Operate audio volume
SKIA4402E
24 (W/R)
(without
NAVI)
Ground
Vehicle
speed signal
Input
ON
Speed sensitive
volume function
does not work
properly.
Vehicle is driven
SKIA0175E
Revision: October 2004
AV-42
2005 Titan
AUDIO
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
EKS00AO8
It can check ON/OFF operation of each switch in the AV switch and diagnose the input signals from the steering switch.
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (MIDLINE SYSTEM AND PREMIUM SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVI)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC.
Press and hold the “PAUSE/MUTE” switch and turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise
for 30 clicks or more.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA1688E
3.
4.
Then the self-diagnosis operates. A single beep indicates self-diagnosis mode is active.
Initially, all display segments will be illuminated.
J
Press each switch. When each switch is pressed, its name and communication code will be displayed
NOTE:
CD player LOAD and EJECT buttons are not included in this test and will not change the display when AV
pressed.
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (PREMIUM SYSTEM WITH NAVI)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC.
Within 10 seconds press and hold the switches “PAUSE/MUTE”
and “PREV” simultaneously for 3 seconds.
Then the self-diagnosis operates. A single beep indicates selfdiagnosis mode is active.
Press each switch and listen for beep.
NOTE:
CD player LOAD and EJECT buttons are not included in this test
and will not beep when pressed.
L
M
WKIA1489E
EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
Turn ignition switch OFF. Then the self-diagnosis ends.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
●
●
It can check for continuity of the switches by sounding the beep when each AV switch and steering switch
is pressed.
It can check for continuity of harness between AV switch and steering switch.
Revision: October 2004
AV-43
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00AO9
The majority of the audio troubles are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.). Check the inspection items below to diagnose the malfunction.
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE SYSTEM)
Symptom
Possible cause
●
Inoperative
Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Audio unit presets are lost when ignition switch is
turned OFF
All speakers do not sound
●
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
●
Audio unit
●
Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-50, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front
Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System)" .
●
Rear door speaker check. Refer to AV-52, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear
Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Base or Midline System)" .
●
Audio unit
●
Speaker
●
Audio unit
●
Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
One or several speakers do not sound
Poor sound
Noisy
Audio unit B+ power circuit check. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (MIDLINE OR PREMIUM SYSTEM)
Before proceeding on models with NAVI, confirm that other AV switch functions (except audio functions) operate. If not, refer to AV-162, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" .
Symptom
Inoperative
Possible cause
●
Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
●
AV switch check. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Check" .
●
Audio communication line check (with Navigation System). Refer to AV-143,
"Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and
Audio Unit)" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Steering switch does not operate
●
Steering switch check. Refer to AV-47, "Steering Switch Check" .
●
AV switch check. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Check" .
●
Audio communication line check (with Navigation System). Refer to AV-143,
"Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and
Audio Unit)" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Audio information is not displayed on screen (with
NAVI)
All speakers do not sound
●
Display unit check. Refer to AV-118, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" .
●
Audio unit
●
Audio amp. ON signal (with Premium)
●
Audio amp. power and ground circuit check (with Premium). Refer to AV-46,
"Power Supply Circuit Inspection" .
●
Audio amp. (with Premium)
●
Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-54, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front
Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Premium System)" .
●
Rear door speaker check. Refer to AV-58, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear
Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Premium System)" .
●
Subwoofer check. Refer to AV-62, "Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer
(Premium System)" .
●
Center speaker check. Refer to AV-61, "Sound Is Not Heard From Center
Speaker (Premium System)" .
One or several speakers do not sound
Revision: October 2004
AV-44
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Symptom
Possible cause
Poor sound
Noisy
A
●
Audio unit
●
Audio amp. (with Premium)
●
Speaker
●
Audio unit
●
Audio amp. (with Premium)
●
Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
B
C
FOR RADIO ONLY
Symptom
Possible cause
No sound
Noisy
D
●
Audio unit
●
Antenna feeder, wiring or connections
●
Antenna
●
Audio unit
●
Audio unit case ground
●
Antenna
●
Noise prevention parts
●
Electrical equipment
●
Wire harness of each piece of electrical equipment
●
Audio unit power circuit. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
●
Audio unit
All radio stations stored in memory are deleted
E
F
G
H
NOTE:
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
●
Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal.
●
Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
FOR CD ONLY
I
J
AV
Symptom
Possible cause
CD cannot be inserted.
CD cannot be ejected.
●
CD
The CD cannot be played.
●
Audio unit
L
The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted.
M
Noise Inspection
EKS00AOA
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE
Occurrence condition
Occurs only when engine is ON.
Possible cause
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
●
Ignition components
A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed is
high. A booming noise occurs while the engine is
running and the lighting switch is ON.
●
Generator
●
Fuel pump condenser
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump.
Revision: October 2004
AV-45
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Occurrence condition
Noise only occurs when various
electrical components are operating.
Possible cause
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the
operation of various switches.
The noise occurs when various motors are operating.
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions.
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially
when it is vibrating excessively.
●
Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
●
Motor case ground
●
Motor
●
Poor ground of antenna feeder line
●
Ground wire of body parts
●
Ground due to improper part installation
●
Wiring connections or a short circuit
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
EKS00AOB
1. CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit
Audio unit
AV switch (except Base)
Audio amp. (with Premium)
Terminals
Signal name
Fuse No.
6
Battery power
31
10
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
1
Battery power
31
2
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
1
Battery power
31
17
Battery power
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-46
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
A
Disconnect audio unit connector M43 or audio amp. connector M112 (with Premium).
Check voltage between the audio unit and ground.
B
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
Connector
Audio unit
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
6 (Y)
Ground
M43
10 (V)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
C
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
D
SKIA1992E
3.
E
Check voltage between audio amp. (with Premium) and ground.
F
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
Audio
amp.
(-)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
M112
1 (Y)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
G
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
H
WKIA1657E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
I
J
Check continuity between audio amp. (with Premium) harness connector M112 terminal 4 (B), 20 (B) and ground.
AV
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
L
M
WKIA1658E
Steering Switch Check
EKS00AOC
1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-43, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
2. Operate steering switch.
Does steering switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
AV-47
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV switch connector M98 and spiral cable connector M30.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and AV switch harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
AV switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
32 (G)
M30
13 (G)
31 (L)
M98
14 (L)
24 (R)
4.
Continuity
Yes
12 (R)
Check continuity between AV switch and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1600E
AV switch
Connector
Continuity
—
Terminal (Wire color)
12 (R)
M98
13 (G)
Ground
No
14 (L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
3. SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect spiral cable connectors M30 and M102.
Check continuity between spiral cable terminals.
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
Terminal
Connector
32
M30
31
24
Continuity
Terminal
16
M102
17
Yes
20
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-46, "SPIRAL CABLE" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-48
WKIA3489E
2005 Titan
AUDIO
4. CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
A
Check resistance between steering switch terminals.
Terminal
16
20
17
17
Signal name
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Seek (down)
Depress (station) down switch.
Power
Depress power switch.
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
652
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
B
165
C
0
D
0
652
WKIA3490E
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" .
AV Switch Check
E
F
EKS00AOD
1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
G
Perform AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-43, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
Does AV switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK AV SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
I
Check AV switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-137, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
for AV Switch" .
J
OK or NG
YES >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" .
AV
NO
>> Repair malfunctioning part.
Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System)
EKS00AOE
1. CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE
L
Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-143, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and Audio Unit)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning part.
Revision: October 2004
AV-49
2005 Titan
M
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline
System)
EKS00AOF
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect speaker or tweeter connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and suspect speaker or tweeter harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
2 (L/W)
+ (L/W)
D12
1 (L/R)
4 (W/B)
2 (L/W)
- (L/B)
+ (L/W)
M109
1 (L/R)
4 (W/B)
Yes
- (L/R)
+ (W/B)
M111
3 (L/B)
3.
- (L/R)
+ (W/B)
D112
3 (L/B)
M43
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
- (L/B)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1220E
Audio unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
2 (L/W)
1 (L/R)
M43
4 (W/B)
Ground
No
3 (L/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-50
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Connect audio unit connector and front speaker or tweeter connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
B
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
(-)
Connector
2 (L/W)
M43
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
D
E
1 (L/R)
M43
4 (W/B)
3 (L/B)
Receive
audio
signal
F
G
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" or AV-66, "Removal and
Installation of Front Tweeter" .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
H
SKIA4278E
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-51
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Base or
Midline System)
EKS00AOG
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and suspect speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
13 (B/Y)
- (B/Y)
D207
14 (SB)
15 (R/L)
13 (B/Y)
+ (O/L)
- (B/Y)
D208
14 (SB)
15 (R/L)
Yes
+ (SB)
- (R/L)
D308
16 (O/L)
3.
+ (SB)
- (R/L)
D307
16 (O/L)
M44
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
+ (O/L)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and ground.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
WKIA1164E
—
13 (B/Y)
14 (SB)
M44
15 (R/L)
Ground
No
16 (O/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-52
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Connect audio unit connector and rear speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
B
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
Condition
Reference
signal
D
E
14
(SB)
M44
Terminal
(Wire
color)
13
(B/Y)
M44
16
(O/L)
15 (R/L)
Receive
audio
signal
F
G
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal
and Installation of Rear Door Speaker" or AV-66,
"Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter" .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
H
SKIA4281E
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-53
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Premium System)
EKS00AOH
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal M113 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
15 (L/W)
+ (L/W)
D12
31 (L/R)
16 (W/B)
14 (L/W)
- (L/B)
+ (L/W)
M109
30 (L/R)
13 (W/B)
Yes
- (L/R)
+ (W/B)
M111
29 (L/B)
3.
- (L/R)
+ (W/B)
D112
32 (L/B)
M113
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
- (L/B)
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal M113 and ground.
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
WKIA1659E
—
15 (L/W)
31 (L/R)
16 (W/B)
M113
32 (L/B)
Ground
No
14 (L/W)
30 (L/R)
13 (W/B)
29 (L/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-54
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Connect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector M113
terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
B
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
15 (L/W)
31 (L/R)
16 (W/B)
32 (L/B)
14 (L/W)
M113
30 (L/R)
M113
13 (W/B)
Condition
Reference
signal
D
E
WKIA1660E
Receive
audio
signal
F
G
29 (L/B)
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" or
AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-55
2005 Titan
AUDIO
3. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and audio amp. connector M113.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminals and audio amp. harness connector terminals.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Audio amp.
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
1 (B)
6 (B)
2 (W)
M43
22 (W)
M113
3 (BR)
4 (Y)
3.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
5 (BR)
Yes
21 (Y)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
1 (B)
2 (W)
M43
3 (BR)
Ground
No
WKIA1661E
4 (Y)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-56
2005 Titan
AUDIO
4. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Connect audio unit connector and audio amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
B
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
2 (W)
M43
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
D
E
1 (B)
M43
4 (Y)
3 (BR)
Receive
audio
signal
F
G
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and
Installation of Audio Amp." .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
H
SKIA4278E
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-57
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Premium
System)
EKS00AOI
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal M113 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
11 (SB)
+ (SB)
D207
27 (B/Y)
12 (O/L)
11 (SB)
- (R/L)
+ (SB)
D208
27 (B/Y)
12 (O/L)
Yes
- (B/Y)
+ (O/L)
D308
28 (R/L)
3.
- (B/Y)
+ (O/L)
D307
28 (R/L)
M113
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
- (R/L)
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M113
terminal and ground.
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
WKIA1662E
—
11 (SB)
27 (B/Y)
M113
12 (O/L)
Ground
No
28 (R/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-58
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Connect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector M113
terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
B
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
(-)
Connector
11 (SB)
M113
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
D
27 (B/Y)
M113
12 (O/L)
28 (R/L)
E
Receive
audio
signal
F
G
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal
and Installation of Rear Door Speaker" or AV-66,
"Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
WKIA1663E
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-59
2005 Titan
AUDIO
3. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and audio amp. connector M113.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminals and audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Audio amp.
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
13 (B/R)
8 (B/R)
14 (BR)
M44
24 (BR)
15 (B/W)
M113
16 (L)
3.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
7 (B/W)
Yes
23 (L)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
13 (B/R)
14 (BR)
M44
15 (B/W)
Ground
No
WKIA1664E
16 (L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-60
2005 Titan
AUDIO
4. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Connect audio unit connector M44 and audio amp. connector M113.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M44
terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
B
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
Reference
signal
D
E
14
(BR)
M44
Condition
Terminal
(Wire
color)
13 (B/R)
Receive
audio
signal
M44
16 (L)
15 (B/W)
F
G
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and
Installation of Audio Amp." .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
Sound Is Not Heard From Center Speaker (Premium System)
H
SKIA4316E
EKS00AOJ
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
J
Disconnect audio amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110.
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M113
terminals and center speaker harness connector M110 terminals.
AV
L
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Center speaker
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
26 (L/B)
M113
3.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
M
- (L/B)
M110
10 (L/W)
+ (L/W)
Yes
WKIA1665E
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M113
terminals and ground.
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
26 (L/B)
M113
10 (L/W)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
I
AV-61
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2. CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect audio amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push the “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector M113
terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
WKIA1666E
M113
10 (L/W)
M113
26 (L/B)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Center Speaker" .
NG
>> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Audio Amp." .
Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (Premium System)
EKS00AOK
1. CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Unit
Terminal
Audio amp.
Signal name
Fuse No.
17
Battery power
17
1
Battery power
31
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio amp. connector.
Check voltage between the audio amp. and ground.
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
Connector
Audio
amp.
Terminal
(wire color)
M112
17 (Y/G)
1 (Y)
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
(-)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-62
WKIA1685E
2005 Titan
AUDIO
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
A
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M112 terminal 4 (B) and ground, and 20 (B) and ground.
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
C
D
WKIA1658E
4. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
E
Disconnect audio amp. connector M112 and subwoofer connector B72.
Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal and subwoofer harness connector harness connector terminal.
F
Terminals
G
Audio amp.
Connector
Subwoofer
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
3 (BR/W)
1 (W)
B72
18 (B)
19 (BR)
3.
H
3 (BR/W)
2 (W)
M112
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
2 (B)
Yes
WKIA1668E
I
4 (BR)
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and ground.
J
Terminals
Audio amp.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
AV
—
3 (BR)
L
2 (W)
M112
18 (B)
Ground
No
19 (BR)
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-63
2005 Titan
AUDIO
5. SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect audio amp. connector and subwoofer connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
3
(BR/
W)
Condition
Reference
signal
18
(B)
2 (W)
M112
Terminal
(Wire
color)
M112
19
(BR)
WKIA1669E
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Subwoofer (Premium System)" .
NG
>> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Audio Amp." .
Revision: October 2004
AV-64
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Removal and Installation for Audio Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00AOL
A
Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" .
Using power tool, remove the four audio unit screws.
Pull out audio unit and disconnect connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
C
D
WKIA1490E
Removal and Installation for AV Switch
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
EKS00AOM
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" .
Remove the four AV switch screws.
Carefully remove the AV switch.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
WKIA1491E
Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker
1.
2.
3.
EKS00AON
J
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .
Remove the four front door speaker screws, disconnect the connector and remove the speaker.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front door speaker
screws
AV
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
L
M
WKIA1498E
Removal and Installation of Rear Door Speaker
1.
2.
3.
EKS00AOO
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .
Remove the three rear speaker screws, disconnect the connector and remove speaker.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear speaker screws
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
WKIA1492E
Revision: October 2004
AV-65
2005 Titan
AUDIO
Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS00AOP
Remove tweeter grille.
Remove push pins.
Remove tweeter and disconnect connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1493E
Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter
1.
2.
3.
EKS00AOQ
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .
Remove screws and remove tweeter.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1494E
Removal and Installation of Center Speaker
1.
2.
3.
EKS00AOR
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID D" .
Remove the screws and the center speaker.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1495E
Removal and Installation of Subwoofer (Premium System)
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS00AOS
Remove front seat LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the subwoofer bolts.
Disconnect the connector and remove the subwoofer.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Subwoofer bolts
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
WKIA1764E
Removal and Installation of Audio Amp.
1.
EKS00AOT
Remove BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-66
2005 Titan
AUDIO
2.
3.
4.
Remove audio amp. bracket screws and slide audio speaker
amp. down.
Disconnect connectors and remove audio speaker amp.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Audio amp. mounting
screws
A
B
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
C
WKIA1605E
Removal and Installation of Rear Audio Remote Control Unit
1.
2.
3.
D
EKS00AOU
Carefully remove the rear audio remote control unit from the roof
console assembly.
CAUTION:
Wrap removal tool with clean shop cloth to prevent damage
to the headliner.
Disconnect connector and remove the rear audio control unit.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
WKIA1201E
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS00AOV
Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove steering wheel rear cover screws and remove steering wheel rear cover.
Remove steering wheel switch assembly screws and steering
wheel switches.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
H
I
J
AV
L
WKIA1226E
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-67
2005 Titan
AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna
PFP:28200
EKS00AOW
WKIA1672E
Revision: October 2004
AV-68
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28184
A
EKS00AOX
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKIA3600E
Revision: October 2004
AV-69
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
System Description
EKS00AOY
Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to DVD player terminal 16.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to DVD player terminal 15.
Power is also supplied
●
from DVD player terminals 31 and 32
●
to video monitor terminals 11 and 12.
Ground is supplied
●
to DVD player terminal 22
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Audio signals are supplied
●
through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4
●
to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37.
Video signals are supplied
●
through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29
●
to video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Revision: October 2004
AV-70
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS00AOZ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA0801E
Revision: October 2004
AV-71
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — DVD —
EKS00AP0
WKWA2343E
Revision: October 2004
AV-72
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1188E
Revision: October 2004
AV-73
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
WKWA2344E
Revision: October 2004
AV-74
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00AP1
A
Symptom
DVD player inoperative
No sound when playing
DVD
Possible causes
Repair order
1. Power supply
Refer to AV-76, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" .
2. Ground circuit
1. Audio enable circuit
1. Check audio enable circuit between audio unit terminal
40 and DVD player terminal 9 for open or short.
2. Audio signal circuits
2. Check audio signal circuits for open or short between
DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 and audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37.
3. DVD player
4. Audio unit
3. Remove DVD player for repair.
1. Power supply
2. Video monitor ground circuit
3. Video circuits
4. Video monitor
5. DVD player
C
D
4. Remove audio unit for repair.
Video monitor is inoperative/does not operate properly
B
1. Operate DVD player and verify battery positive voltage
is present at terminals 11 and 12 of video monitor. Verify approximately 5 volts is present at terminal 10 of
video monitor.
E
2. Check video monitor ground circuits between DVD
player terminals 19 and 27 and video monitor terminals
1 and 2.
F
3. Check video circuits between DVD player terminals 23
and 24 and video monitor terminals 7 and 8.
4. Remove video monitor for repair.
G
5. Remove DVD player for repair.
DVD remote control is
inoperative/does not operate properly
1. DVD player remote control batteries
1. Replace DVD player remote control batteries.
2. DVD player remote control
2. Replace DVD player remote control.
3. Video monitor
3. Remove video monitor for repair.
Headphones inoperative
1. Headphone batteries
1. Replace headphone batteries.
2. Headphones
2. Replace headphones.
3. Rear audio remote control unit
3. Replace rear audio remote control unit.
1. Harness or connectors
1. Check harness and connectors for open or short.
2. DVD player
2. Check DVD player.
1. Harness or connectors
1. Check harness and connectors for open or short.
2. DVD player
2. Check DVD player.
1. Harness or connectors
1. Check harness and connectors for open or short.
2. DVD player
2. Check DVD player.
3. Video monitor
3. Check video monitor.
1. Harness or connectors
1. Check harness and connectors for open or short.
2. DVD player
2. Check DVD player.
3. Video monitor
3. Check video monitor.
Snowy video/poor audio
Snowy video (audio OK)
No video (audio OK)
Dim video (audio OK)
Revision: October 2004
AV-75
H
I
J
AV
L
M
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
EKS00AP2
1. CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit
Terminals
DVD player
Signal name
Fuse No.
16
Battery power
31
15
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect DVD player connector M205.
Check voltage between the DVD player and ground.
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
Connector
DVD player
OFF
ACC
ON
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
16 (Y)
15 (V)
M205
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1197E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check continuity between DVD player harness connector M206 terminal 22 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1198E
Revision: October 2004
AV-76
2005 Titan
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of DVD Player
1.
2.
3.
EKS00AP3
A
Remove center console bin. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" .
Remove the screws and remove DVD player.
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
B
C
D
WKIA1503E
Removal and Installation of Video Monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS00AP4
Remove roof console assembly. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
Disconnect the video monitor connector.
Remove the video housing screws.
Remove the video monitor and housing.
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA1502E
5.
6.
Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video
monitor.
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
J
AV
L
WKIA1219E
Revision: October 2004
AV-77
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:25915
EKS00AP5
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of
the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle
of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS
antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and
indicated on the screen with a current-location mark.
WKIA1371E
By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the
GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
SEL684V
TRAVEL DISTANCE
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation
may become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function
has been adopted. Adjustments can be made in extreme cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires.
Refer to AV-124, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode" .
TRAVEL DIRECTION
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
Type
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
GPS antenna (GPS information)
Advantage
●
Can detect the vehicle's turning angle
quite accurately.
●
Can detect the vehicle's travel direction
(North/South/East/West).
Disadvantage
●
Direction errors may accumulate when the
vehicle is driven for long distances without
stopping.
●
Correct direction cannot be detected when
the vehicle speed is low.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored in
the DVD-ROM drive.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display
must be corrected manually.
CAUTION:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVDROM.
Revision: October 2004
AV-78
SEL685V
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will
be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is
currently driven has been judged and the current-location mark
has been repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of
them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering
wheel and configuration of the road.
A
B
C
SEL686V
D
●
●
Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on
which the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map
DVD-ROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data and
the actual road pattern are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching function may find another road and position the current-location mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the
current-location mark may leap to it.
Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel
direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road
data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when
there is an excessive gap between the current vehicle position
and the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible.
E
F
G
SKIA0613E
H
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and conI
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 miles).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimenJ
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
AV
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satelSEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).
L
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions.
●
In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
M
●
There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning,
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on
the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
●
Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite
do not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves
from the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
●
Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.
Revision: October 2004
AV-79
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAVI Control Unit
●
●
The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map.
Location information is shown on liquid crystal display (display
unit).
PKIA0248E
DVD-ROM Drive
Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information can
be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc.
PKIA0249E
Map DVD-ROM
●
●
The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information.
To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive
Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used.
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)
●
●
The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle.
The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit.
BIRDVIEW™
The BIRDVIEW™ provides a detailed and easily seen display of road conditions covering the vehicle's immediate to distant area.
●
PLAN VIEW
SKIA5818E
Revision: October 2004
AV-80
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
BIRDVIEW™
A
B
C
SKIA5816E
D
Description
●
●
●
Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six vertical
grid lines indicate display depth and direction.
Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the
scale change and the view point height on the left side of the
screen.
The height of the view point increases or decreases when
“ZOOM” or “WIDE” is selected with the joystick.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SKIA5613E
AV
MAP DISPLAY
Function of each icon is as follows:
1. Azimuth indication.
2. Position marker.
–
The tip of the arrow shows the current location. The shaft of the
arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is traveling.
3. GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions).
4. Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale).
L
M
SKIA5817E
Revision: October 2004
AV-81
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH
Display with Pushed “DEST” button
●
Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON)
WKIA3137E
●
Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF)
WKIA3138E
The function of each icon is as follows:
Mode
Icon
Easy
Address Book
Description
Expert
×
Favorite place can be saved to memory.
Street Address
×
×
The destination can be searched from the address.
Point of Interest (POI)
×
×
The destination of favorite facility can be searched.
Previous Dest.
×
The previous ten destinations stored in memory are displayed.
Intersection
×
The destination can be searched from the intersection.
City
×
The destination can be searched from city name.
Map
×
The destination can be searched from the map.
Phone Number
×
The destination can be set by entering the phone number.
Home
×
Sets the home as a destination.
Help
×
Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display.
Country
×
Revision: October 2004
×
Select country (USA, CANADA)
AV-82
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “ROUTE” button
●
A
Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON)
B
C
SKIA4494E
●
D
Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF)
E
F
G
SKIA4495E
H
The function of each icon is as follows:
Mode
Icon
Easy
Description
Expert
I
Quick Stop
×
×
The selected facility is set as the destination or way point.
(Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destination has been reached.)
Where am I?
×
×
Next, current and previous street names can be displayed.
J
The following items can be selected.
Cancel Guidance
×
×
●
All Destinations
●
Way point
●
Not Cancel
AV
(Displayed only when the destination area has been set.)
L
The following items can be selected.
×
Route Info.*
●
Complete Route
●
Turn List
●
Route Simulation
M
(Displayed only when the destination area has been set.)
×
Edit Route*
Help
×
Change the destination or add the transit points of the route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and the recommended route is not followed.)
Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display.
*: When in Easy Mode, “Route Info.” and “Edit Route” are not displayed.
Revision: October 2004
AV-83
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “SETTING” button
The function of each icon is as follows:
SKIA4496E
Icon
Description
Display
Settings of display can be performed.
Vehicle Electronic Systems
Settings of vehicle electrical equipment can be performed.
System Settings
Settings of linguistic select, time adjusting and beep sound can be performed.
Navigation
Settings and adjusting of navigation can be performed.
Short Menus
Easy Mode and Expert Mode can be switched.
Guidance Volume
The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be controlled by the joystick.
Help (only easy mode)
Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display.
Display Settings
How To Perform Display Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “Display” with enter button.
SKIA5791E
Application Items
Icon
Description
Reference
page
Brightness/Contrast/Map Background
Brightness, Contrast and Map Background can be set.
AV-84
Display Off
Display sleep mode ON/OFF can be switched.
AV-84
Setting of the under section display
The setting status of A/C or AV can be shown.
AV-85
Brightness/Contrast/Map Back ground
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Select “Brightness/Contrast/Map Background”.
●
Brightness, Contrast and Background are shown at the lower part of the screen, and it can be set with the
joystick.
Display Off
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Select “Display Off”.
●
When setting is turned on (Indicator light ON), the display will be under sleep mode.
Revision: October 2004
AV-84
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting of the under section display
A
How To Perform Under Section Display Setting
1. Select “Setting of the Under Section Display”.
●
The setting status that is selected from A/C or AV is shown at the lower part of the screen.
B
Vehicle Electronic Systems
C
D
E
WKIA1378E
F
Application Items
Icon
G
Description
Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle
The driver's seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position.
Remote Unlock Driver's Door First
This option allows selection of which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation.
Keyless Remote Response — Horn
This option allows the horn chirp mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button
on the keyfob to be changed.
Keyless Remote Response — Lights
This option allows the hazard flash mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob to be changed.
Auto Re-Lock Time
This option allows the length of time before doors auto re-lock to be set.
Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights
This option allows the sensitivity of the autolights to be set.
Automatic Headlights Off Delay
This option allows the length of time before the autolights turn off to be set.
Speed Dependent Wiper
This option allows the driving speed dependent wiper function to be turned on or off.
Return All Settings Default
All settings will return to the initial conditions.
I
J
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “Vehicle Electronic Systems”.
AV
L
M
System Settings
How To Perform System Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “System Settings”.
SKIA4536E
Revision: October 2004
H
AV-85
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Application Items
Icon
Description
Reference
page
Language/Unit
Settings of language or unit can be performed.
AV-86
Clock
Settings of clock can be performed.
AV-86
Beep Setting
Settings of beep sound can be performed.
AV-86
Language Setting
How To Perform Language Setting
1. Select "Language/Unit".
●
Language setting can be switched.
●
Unit setting can be changed.
SKIA2065E
Clock Settings
How To Perform Clock Setting
1. Select “Clock”.
●
Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and tilt the joystick to the
right or left to adjust the time.
●
Turn ON and OFF daylight saving time.
●
Select the “Auto Adjust” key. The time will be reset to the GPS
time.
●
Select the “Select Time Zone” key. The [TIME ZONE] screen will
appear.
SKIA2063E
Beep Setting
How To Perform Beep Setting
1. Select “Beep Setting”.
●
When Beep Setting is on (indicator light on), a beep will sound if
the button is pushed.
NOTE:
Items in exception of Beep Setting ON/OFF.
●
An error beep.
●
An interrupted-screen beep.
SKIA4829E
Revision: October 2004
AV-86
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Navigation Setting
A
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “NAVIGATION”.
B
C
D
SKIA0551E
Application Items
E
Icon
Description
Reference
page
View
Map display mode can be switched.
AV-87
Heading
Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the
actual driving direction of the vehicle.
AV-88
Nearby Display Icons*
Icons of facilities can be displayed.
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections.
AV-88
Save Current Location*
Current vehicle location can be registered in Address Book.
AV-88
Adjust Current Location*
Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker
also can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is
not matched with the actual direction.
AV-88
Auto Re-route On/Off*
ON/OFF of Auto Re-route can be switched.
AV-89
Avoid Area Setting*
A particular area can be avoided when routing.
AV-89
Clear Memory*
Address Book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted.
AV-89
Edit Address Book*
Address Book can be edited.
AV-90
GPS Information*
The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea
level) of the present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in
which the vehicle is being driven.
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position.
AV-90
Quick Stop Customer Setting*
One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop.
AV-90
Set Average Speed for Estimated
Journey Time*
Average vehicle speed can be set to calibrate estimated journey time for the
destination.
AV-90
Tracking On/Off*
Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed.
AV-91
I
J
AV
L
M
“VIEW” MODE
Select “Birdview™” or “Plan View” icon.
● To open the map screen display with Birdview™, select “Birdview™”.
● To open the map screen display with Plan View, select “Plan
View”.
SKIA0554E
Revision: October 2004
G
H
*: Not displayed in Easy Mode.
1.
F
AV-87
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“HEADING” MODE
●
●
To display North up, select “North up”.
To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
SKIA0561E
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE
●
Select an icon to display on the map screen.
SKIA0562E
“SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE
●
The current vehicle location can be registered in “Address
Book”.
NOTE:
“Address Book” can store 50 items maximum.
SKIA0556E
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE
1.
2.
3.
Move marker to correct location.
Select "SET" and then vehicle mark will be located in current position.
Select an icon “right” or “left” to calibrate the heading direction.
(Arrow marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.)
SKIA0563E
Revision: October 2004
AV-88
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4.
Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the arrow
mark.
A
B
C
SKIA0564E
D
“AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE
●
●
To activate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “On”.
To deactivate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “Off”.
E
F
G
SKIA0558E
“AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE
●
H
Areas to avoid can be registered.
I
J
AV
SKIA2058E
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE
●
L
To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area”
and “Previous Destinations”, select “Yes”.
M
SKIA3572E
Revision: October 2004
AV-89
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE
●
Edit the items registered in Address Book.
SKIA3511E
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE
●
Latitude, longitude, altitude, astrometric state, and satellite location are displayed as GPS information.
NOTE:
Altitude is displayed only in three-dimensional status.
SKIA0555E
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE
●
Select a category for the “Quick Stop” menu.
NOTE:
This only replaces the fifth position on the "Quick Stop" menu when
"ROUTE" is pressed.
SKIA5820E
“SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE
●
●
Set the average vehicle speed to calibrate the estimated journey
time for the destination.
Set three items: “Freeway”, “Main Roads”, and “Ordinary
Roads”.
SKIA0565E
Revision: October 2004
AV-90
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“TRACKING” MODE
A
To delete the tracking marks on the map, select “Off”.
●
To leave the tracking marks on the map, select “On”.
NOTE:
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the memory.
●
B
C
SKIA0559E
GUIDANCE VOLUME
Description
D
E
Following guidance volume settings can be changed.
F
G
H
SKIA4497E
Activation/Deactivation Setting
●
I
The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guidance Volume” button.
Voice Volume Setting
●
Volume of the voice can be controlled by tilting the joystick to left/right.
J
DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON
●
●
When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following items will display on the screen.
Warning message (if there are any) →TRIP 1→TRIP 2→FUEL ECONOMY→MAINTENANCE→OFF.
Display items
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Maintenance
Revision: October 2004
Display/Setting contents
Elapsed Time
Displays driving time with a range of 0000:00:00 to
9999:59:59.
Driving Distance
[(km) or (miles)]
Displays driving distance with a range of 00000.0 to
99999.9.
Average speed
[(km/h) or (MPH)]
Displays average speed with a range of 000.0 to 999.9.
Average Fuel Economy
[(MPG) or (l/100km)]
Displays fuel economy with ignition switch ON, average
fuel economy each 30 seconds.
Distance to Empty
[(km) or (miles)]
Displays possible driving distance with remaining fuel.
Fuel Economy [(MPG)
or (l/100km)]
Displays fuel economy each approx. 100 ms.
Engine oil
Maintenance intervals of engine oil and setting of oil
change cycle.
Tire rotation
Maintenance intervals of tire and setting of tire replacement cycle.
Tire pressure
Tire pressure displayed as tire pressure information.
AV-91
Reference
page
AV
L
M
AV-92
AV-92
AV-92
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2
●
●
Elapsed time, Driving distance and Average speed are displayed as Trip 1 information or Trip 2 information.
The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by pushing
and holding “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds.
SKIA4526E
FUEL ECONOMY
●
●
Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty, Fuel Economy are
displayed as Fuel Economy information.
The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by pushing
and holding “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds.
SKIA4527E
MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire pressure are displayed as Maintenance information.
SKIA4528E
ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION
Possible to set up interval of engine oil and tire rotation by tilting joystick right and left.
SKIA4650E
Revision: October 2004
AV-92
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TIRE PRESSURE
●
●
●
●
●
A
Pressure indication in
psi on the screen indicates that the
pressure is being measured. After a few trips, the pressures for
all four tires will be displayed.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does
not correspond with the actual order of tire position.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by
the vehicle's traveling condition and the temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, the low tire pressure warning light
will come on and/or a warning is displayed on the screen.
FLAT TIRE – very low tire pressure.
B
C
SKIA4651E
D
NOTE:
●
●
In a case of FLAT TIRE pressure, interrupt screen is not shown on the display.
On the screen of TIRE PRESSURE, "FLAT TIRE Check All tire" is displayed.
E
WARNING INDICATIONS
F
Warning signal is received from BCM through CAN communication
line.
G
H
SKIA5609E
Warning indicators
Warning lamps in
instrument panel
Warning detection and cancel conditions
Detection condition
DOOR OPEN
Door
Cancel condition
Detection condition
LIFTGATE OPEN
Door
Cancel condition
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h
(3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of
any of the doors is detected.
Cases of malfunction
L
Liftgate and/or glass
hatch is open
Vehicle is stopped and both liftgate
and glass hatch lock.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS00AP6
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-93
J
AV
Door is open
Vehicle is stopped and all the
doors lock.
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h
(3 MPH) or faster] and liftgate ajar
and/or glass hatch ajar is detected.
I
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
EKS00AP7
WKIA3601E
Revision: October 2004
AV-94
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS00AP8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2345E
Revision: October 2004
AV-95
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —
EKS00AP9
WKWA2346E
Revision: October 2004
AV-96
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2347E
Revision: October 2004
AV-97
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA2348E
Revision: October 2004
AV-98
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2349E
Revision: October 2004
AV-99
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA2350E
Revision: October 2004
AV-100
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2351E
Revision: October 2004
AV-101
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA3352E
Revision: October 2004
AV-102
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS00APA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA0813E
Revision: October 2004
AV-103
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — COMM —
EKS00APB
WKWA2353E
Revision: October 2004
AV-104
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2354E
Revision: October 2004
AV-105
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA2355E
Revision: October 2004
AV-106
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit
EKS00APC
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
–
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
0V
–
+
–
1 (B)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Battery
power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
4 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
6 (O)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
2 (Y)
3 (Y)
–
B
C
D
E
Only route guide
and operation
guide are not
heard.
Press the “GUIDE/
VOICE” button.
8 (W)
Voice guide
signal
9
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
Audio noise
interference.
14
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
Video display
interference.
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
7 (B)
Output
ON
SKIA0171J
15 (B)
17
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Output
F
G
H
I
NAVI screen
looks yellowish.
J
SKIA4979E
AV
16 (BR)
14
RGB synchronizing
signal
Output
ON
Press the “MAP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
L
SKIA0164E
17
18 (R/L)
Shield
ground
–
17
RGB signal
(R: red)
–
Output
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Video display
interference.
–
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
SKIA4977E
21 (R/W)
17
RGB signal
(G: green)
Output
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
NAVI screen
looks reddish.
SKIA4978E
Revision: October 2004
AV-107
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
25 (R/L)
26 (G/R)
27 (G/W)
28 (W/R)
–
30 (B)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Illumination
signal
Ignition signal
Reverse
signal
Vehicle
speed signal
(8-pulse)
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Lighting switch in
1st position
Battery voltage
Lighting switch is
OFF
3V or less
Example of
symptom
Display unit illumination does
not change
when lighting
switch is turned
to 1st position.-
ON
ON
ON
ON
–
Battery voltage
Selector lever in R
position
Battery voltage
Selector lever not in
R position
0V
Navigation current location
mark does not
indicate the correct position.
The navigation
current-location
mark moves
strangely when
the vehicle is
moving backwards.
Navigation current location
mark does not
indicate the correct position.
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
PKIA1935E
43
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
44 (L)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
–
–
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0175E
45 (P)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
SKIA0176E
66
67
GPS signal
Revision: October 2004
Input
ON
Connector is not
connected.
AV-108
5V
Navigation system GPS correction is not
possible.
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit
EKS00APD
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
System does not
work properly.
C
+
–
1 (Y)
Ground
Battery
Power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
2 (L/W)
Ground
Power Supply (Inverter)
Output
ON
–
9V
3 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
4 (L/R)
Ground
Power Supply (Signal)
Output
ON
–
9V
5 (P)
Ground
(Inverter)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
Input
Selector lever in R
position
Battery voltage
Ground
Reverse
signal
Selector lever not in
R position
0V
Impossible to
gain direction of
vehicle.
6 (GR)
Screen is not
shown.
–
D
Screen is not
shown.
E
ON
F
G
7 (P/L)
Ground
(Signal)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
10 (O)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
H
12 (G/R)
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
ON
–
Battery voltage
Vehicle information setting is not
possible.
I
14 (R/L)
Ground
Illumination
signal
Input
OFF
Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd
Battery voltage
Lighting switch position OFF
0V
Display unit
does not change
when lighting
switch is turned
to 1st position.
J
AV
16 (W/R)
Ground
Vehicle
speed signal
(8–pulse)
Input
ON
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
Value of vehicle
speed information is not accurately displayed.
L
M
SKIA0168E
25 (L)
–
CAN-H
–
–
–
–
–
26 (P)
–
CAN-L
–
–
–
–
–
28 (V)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
Output
ON
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0175E
29
–
Revision: October 2004
Shield
ground
–
–
–
AV-109
–
–
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
–
30 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Signal
input/
output
Input/
output
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
–
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0176E
Ground
Communication signal (+)
33
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
34 (P)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Input/
output
ON
–
32 (L)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
SKIA0175E
–
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0176E
36 (B/W)
37
Display Communication
signal
(DCU-DSP)
Output
ON
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
Press the “TRIP”
button.
SKIA4364E
37
38 (L)
–
Shield
ground
37
Display Communication
signal
(DSP-DCU)
–
Input
–
ON
–
–
–
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
Press the “TRIP”
button.
SKIA4363E
39
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
40 (O/L)
Ground
Audio TX
Communication signal
Output
ON
Operate audio
volume.
–
–
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4402E
Revision: October 2004
AV-110
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
41
–
Shield
ground
–
Signal
input/
output
–
Ignition
switch
Operation
–
–
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
–
–
C
42 (W/L)
Ground
Audio RX
communication signal
Input
ON
Operate audio
volume.
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4403E
43 (W)
41
RGB synchronizing
signal
Input
ON
Press the “MAP”
button.
E
NAVI screen is
rolling.
44 (R/L)
45
RGB signal
(R: red)
Input
ON
F
G
SKIA0164E
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
D
H
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
I
SKIA4977E
45
46 (R/W)
Shield
ground
–
45
RGB signal
(G: green)
–
Input
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
–
–
NAVI screen
looks reddish.
J
AV
L
SKIA4978E
47
48 (B)
Shield
ground
–
45
RGB signal
(B: blue)
–
–
–
–
–
M
Input
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
NAVI screen
looks yellowish.
SKIA4979E
49
50 (R/L)
Shield
ground
–
47
RGB signal
(R: red)
–
Output
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
–
–
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
SKIA4980E
Revision: October 2004
AV-111
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
–
51 (B)
49
RGB area
(YS) signal
Signal
input/
output
Output
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Press the“TRIP”
button.
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
RGB screen is
not shown.
SKIA0162E
52 (R/W)
47
RGB signal
(G: green)
Output
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Screen looks
reddish.
SKIA4981E
53 (W)
49
Vertical synchronizing
(VP) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed when
showing NAVI
screen.
–
SKIA4983E
54 (B)
47
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Output
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Screen looks
yellowish.
SKIA4982E
55 (R)
49
Horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed when
showing NAVI
screen.
–
SKIA4983E
56 (G)
49
RGB synchronizing
signal
Output
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
SKIA0164E
Revision: October 2004
AV-112
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit
EKS00APE
A
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
–
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
0V
–
+
–
1 (B)
Ground
Ground
2 (L/W)
Ground
Power supply (Inverter)
Input
ON
–
9V
Screen is not
shown.
3 (L/R)
Ground
Power supply (Signal)
Input
ON
–
9V
Screen is not
shown.
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
6 (R/W)
7
RGB signal
(G: green)
–
Input
B
C
D
E
Screen looks
reddish.
F
SKIA4981E
7
8 (R)
–
Shield
ground
21
Horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal
–
Output
–
ON
–
–
–
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed when
showing NAVI
screen.
–
G
H
I
SKIA4983E
9 (B)
21
RGB area
(YS) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed when
showing NAVI
screen.
Press the “TRIP”
button.
J
AV
SKIA0162E
L
11 (B/W)
23
Display communication
signal
(DCU-DSP)
Input
ON
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
–
SKIA4364E
13 (P)
Ground
(Inverter)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
14 (P/L)
Ground
(Signal)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
17 (R/L)
7
RGB signal
(R: red)
Input
Screen looks
bluish.
SKIA4980E
Revision: October 2004
AV-113
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Condition
Item
+
18 (B)
–
7
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Signal
input/
output
Input
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Screen looks
yellowish.
SKIA4982E
19 (G)
21
RGB synchronizing
signal
Input
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
SKIA0164E
20 (W)
21
Vertical synchronizing
(VP) signal
Output
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed when
showing NAVI
screen.
–
SKIA4983E
21
22 (L)
–
Shield
ground
23
Display communication
signal
(DSP-DCU)
–
Output
–
ON
–
–
–
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
–
SKIA4363E
23
–
Revision: October 2004
Shield
ground
–
–
–
AV-114
–
–
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch
EKS00APF
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
1 (Y)
Ground
2 (V)
3 (R/L)
4 (BR)
5 (B)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Battery
power
ACC signal
Illumination
signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
OFF
–
ACC
–
Lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Input
Illumination
control signal
Input
Ground
–
OFF
ON
ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Battery voltage
Turn lighting switch
OFF.
3.0V or less
Illumination control
switch is operated
by lighting switch in
1st position.
Changes between 0 and 12V
–
0V
AV switch illumination does not
come on when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
AV switch illumination cannot be
controlled.
B
C
D
E
F
–
G
6 (V)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
H
SKIA0175E
7
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
–
I
J
8 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (-)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
AV
SKIA0176E
12 (R)
Ground
Remote control A
Input
ON
Press MODE switch
0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
0.75V
Press VOL UP
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
L
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Press POWER
switch
13 (G)
14 (L)
Ground
–
Remote control B
Remote control ground
Revision: October 2004
Input
–
ON
–
Press SEEK DOWN
switch
0.75V
Press VOL DOWN
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
–
–
AV-115
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EKS00APG
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
11
O
Ignition switch (ACC)
32
R/G
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
Combination switch output 5
ACC
ON
—
Battery voltage
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
AV-116
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
O/B
Combination switch output 2
36
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
B
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
C
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
57
Y/R
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-117
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function
EKS00APH
DESCRIPTION
Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually.
Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each
individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and
judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the
set value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system.
●
●
●
DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Mode
Description
Self-diagnosis (DCU)
Display control unit diagnosis.
●
NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive) will not be diagnosed
when no map DVD-ROM is in it.
●
Analyzes connection between the NAVI control unit and the GPS
antenna and operation of each unit.
Self-diagnosis (NAVI)
On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be
checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
Display diagnosis
On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: VehiVehicle signals
cle speed signal, light signalNOTE , ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
Auto Climate Control
A/C self-diagnosis of A/C system.
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
Display diagnosis
On NAVI C/U mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked
by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
Vehicle signals
On NAVI C/U mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed
signal, light signal, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
History of Errors
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition
switch ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the
errors occurred are also displayed.
Navigation
Navigation
Display Longitude & Latitude
Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude
will be displayed.
Speed Calibration
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring
function will automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and
tire diameter caused by tire wear or low-pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather.
Angle
adjustment
Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning
angle of the car mark on the display.
Initialize
Location
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is
transported a long distance on a trailer, etc.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
Display status of CAN communication.
NOTE:
Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown.
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)
EKS00API
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
Revision: October 2004
AV-118
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WKIA1504E
4.
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
H
I
J
SKIA4207E
5.
Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”.
● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
● A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision
screen indicates progress of the diagnosis.
AV
L
M
SKIA4208E
6.
When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation
screen will be shown.
● When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen
to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or
not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on
the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS”
screen will be shown.
● When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for
the part will not appear on the screen.
SKIA4209E
Revision: October 2004
AV-119
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
7.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
●
8.
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
WKIA1189E
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
● When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation/
adjustment” menu or refer to the service manual.”
● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
“DCU is abnormal”.
SKIA4211E
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV104, "Wiring Diagram — COMM —" .
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Screen switch
Switch color
DCU*
Red
×
×
Gray
x
DISPLAY
Audio unit
Navigation
GPS
antenna
Diagnosis No.
1
x
2
x
×
3
×
×
4
*: DCU = Display control unit
CAUTION:
●
When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-162, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" .
●
When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-160, "Screen is Not Shown" .
Self-Diagnosis Codes
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
1
Display control unit malfunction
Refer to AV-175 .
2
Display communication line between display control unit and display unit
Refer to AV-145 .
3
Audio unit power supply and ground circuit
Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit
Refer to AV-142 .
4
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit
AV communication line between display control unit and NAVI control unit
Refer to AV-142 .
Revision: October 2004
AV-120
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)
EKS00APJ
OPERATION PROCEDURE
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA1504E
4.
I
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
J
AV
L
SKIA4207E
5.
Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis (NAVI)”.
● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
● A bar graph will be shown on the screen to indicate progress
of the diagnosis.
M
SKIA4212E
Revision: October 2004
AV-121
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
●
7.
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
SKIA4214E
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
● When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “Confirmation and
Adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual.”
● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
SKIA4211E
“Center Control Unit is abnormal”.
● When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER
of NAVI was not conducted because no DVD-ROM was available.”
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select an malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV104, "Wiring Diagram — COMM —" .
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Screen switch
Diagnosis No.
Switch color
Center control unit*
Red
×
1
Gray
×
2
×
3
×
4
Yellow
×
GPS antenna
×
5
*: Center Control unit = NAVI control unit
CAUTION:
●
When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-162, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" .
●
When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-160, "Screen is Not Shown" .
Self-diagnosis codes
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
1
NAVI control unit malfunction.
Refer to
AV-174
2
No map DVD-ROM is inserted in the NAVI control unit.
Refer to
AV-148
Revision: October 2004
AV-122
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
A
When “DVD-ROM error. Please check disc.” is shown.
1. Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system.
3
2. Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage.
3. If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the map
DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
4
If “Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance with service manual” is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3.
Refer to
AV-148
B
C
Refer to
AV-148
D
GPS antenna system.
1. Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable.
5
2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector, and make sure approximately 5V is supplied from the NAVI
control unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If 5V is supplied, replace the GPS
antenna. If the connection is still malfunction after the replacement of the GPS antenna, the NAVI
control unit is malfunctioning.
Refer to
AV-149
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-123
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
EKS00APK
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
WKIA1504E
4.
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
SKIA4207E
5.
6.
7.
When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial selfdiagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of
each item will become possible.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “Auto Climate Control”
and “Navigation” will become selective.
Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
SKIA4220E
Revision: October 2004
AV-124
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
LKIA0216E
●
When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
●
G
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
H
When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-154, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All
Screens Look Bluish)" , AV-155, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV156, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" .
I
VEHICLE SIGNALS
●
J
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF
of lighting switch (normal setting).
● OFF: D (Day mode)
● ON: N (Night mode)
Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be
accurately displayed.
AV
L
LKIA0217E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Light
IGN
Reverse
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
Revision: October 2004
Condition
–
–
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
AV-125
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
●
●
●
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
If light is NG, refer to AV-140, "Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-141, "Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
NAVIGATION
1.
2.
The initial confirmation/adjustment screen will be shown, and
items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “History of Errors”
and “Navigation” will become selective.
Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
SKIA4226E
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
SKIA0362E
●
When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
●
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-151, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only
NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)" , AV-152, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)" and AV-156, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-126
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VEHICLE SIGNALS
●
A
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF
of light switch (normal setting).
● OFF: D (Day mode)
● ON: N (Night mode)
Unless mode is in above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may
not be accurately displayed.
B
C
LKIA0217E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Light
IGN
Reverse
●
●
●
E
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
●
Condition
D
F
–
G
–
H
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
I
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-138, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
If light is NG, refer to AV-140, "Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-140, "Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-141, "Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
J
HISTORY OF ERRORS
AV
L
M
SKIA0366E
DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS
The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred during the period from when the ignition switch
is turned to ON until “Self-diagnosis” is completed.
Revision: October 2004
AV-127
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in the past which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis” must be found by diagnosing the “History of Errors”.
The History of Errors displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take
note of the following points.
●
Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the
NAVI control unit has malfunctioned.
●
Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current-location mark at the time when
the error occurred. If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of
the error occurrence may be located correctly.
●
The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is 50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the
displayed number remains 50.
When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be identified because several errors are
present, record the item, number and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the History of
Errors), then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to reproduce the malfunction. Check the History of Errors
to find the items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diagnose the item.
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
Action/symptom
Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro.
Gyro sensor
disconnected
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS
substrate.
GPS disconnected
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Angular velocity cannot be detected.)
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not
performed.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
Location detection accuracy of the navigation
system will deteriorate, depending on the error
area in the memory, because GPS cannot
make correct positioning.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal
GPS substrate.
GPS transmission cable
malfunction
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal
GPS substrate.
GPS input
line connection error
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification
GPS TCX0
over
GPS TCX0
under
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively high or low temperatures.
Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning.
GPS ROM
malfunction
GPS RAM
malfunction
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Revision: October 2004
AV-128
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
A
Action/symptom
Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning.
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
GPS RTC
malfunction
●
Correct time may not be displayed.
●
After the power is turned on, the system
always takes some time until GPS positioning
becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts
positioning without re-collecting the whole satellite information when it judged the data
stored in the receiver is correct.)
●
Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control
unit and GPS antenna.
GPS antenna
disconnected
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna
is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has
decreased.
Low voltage
of GPS
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna
is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
●
Correct time of error occurrence may not be
stored in the ″History of Errors″.
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
●
The map of a particular location cannot be displayed.
●
Specific guidance information cannot be displayed.
Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty?
–
If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
–
If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth.
●
Map display is slow.
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
Guidance information display is slow.
When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the
symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration.
●
System has been affected by vibration.
2.
G
I
J
AV
NAVIGATION
1.
E
H
●
●
D
GPS receiving status remains gray.
-
Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be
read.
C
F
Malfunctioning NAVI control unit.
DVD-ROM
Malfunction
DVD-ROM
Read error
DVD-ROM
Response
Error
B
The navigation screen will be shown, and items “Display Longitude & Latitude”, “Speed Calibration”, “Angle Adjustment” and
“Initialize Location” will become selective.
Select each switch on “NAVIGATION” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
L
M
SKIA4576E
Revision: October 2004
AV-129
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display Longitude & Latitude
●
Able to confirm/adjust longitude and latitude.
SKIA4575E
Angle adjustment
●
Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope.
SKIA0364E
Speed Calibration
●
During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and
tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other
hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with
tire chain fitted on tires.
SKIA0365E
Initialize Location
●
This mode is for initializing the current location.
Revision: October 2004
AV-130
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
EKS00APL
OPERATION PROCEDURE
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA1504E
4.
5.
I
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”.
J
AV
L
SKIA4207E
6.
Display status of CAN communication.
Item
Content
M
Error counter
CAN_COMM
OK/NG
0-50
CAN_CIRC_1
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_2
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_3
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_4
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_5
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_6
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_7
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_8
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_9
OK/UNKWN
0-50
SKIA4288E
●
If the ignition is turned on and UNKWN is shown on the screen, the value of the counter will be up.
(MAX50)
Revision: October 2004
AV-131
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
●
The value of the counter does not change if the ignition changes to OFF. (MAX50)
If the counter shows the value of 50 and UNKWN is shown, the value of 50 will not be changed.
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
EKS00APM
Refer to AV-43, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-132
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS00APN
1. CHECK FUSE
A
Make sure the following fuses of the NAVI control unit are not blown.
B
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
2 (Y), 3 (Y)
Battery power
31
6 (O)
ACC power
4
Terminal (Wire color)
B151
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
D
F
Ignition switch position
G
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
H
2 (Y), 3 (Y)
B151
OFF
Ground
6 (O)
I
WKIA1372E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between NAVI control unit and fuse.
J
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
AV
Check continuity between the following NAVI control unit connector
terminals and ground.
L
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
—
B151
1 (B), 4 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
SKIA4291E
Revision: October 2004
AV-133
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit
EKS00APO
1. CHECK FUSE
Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
1 (Y)
Battery power
31
10 (O)
ACC power
4
12 (G/R)
IGN power
12
Terminal (Wire color)
M94
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
1 (Y)
M94
10 (O)
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Ground
12 (G/R)
WKIA1670E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between the following display control unit connector terminals and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
—
M94
3 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
SKIA4293E
Revision: October 2004
AV-134
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit
1.
EKS00APP
A
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-134, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair malfunctioning part.
2.
1.
2.
3.
B
C
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT
D
Disconnect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R) and ground.
E
Approx. 9V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
WKIA1227E
H
3. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M94.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2 (L/W), 4 (L/R) and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R).
I
J
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
2 (L/W)
M94
4.
Continuity
AV
Terminal
(Wire color)
2 (L/W)
M93
4 (L/R)
L
Yes
3 (L/R)
Check continuity between display unit and ground.
M
Terminals
WKIA1229E
Display unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
2 (L/W)
M93
3 (L/R)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
Revision: October 2004
AV-135
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4.
1.
2.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13 (P), 14 (P/L) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WKIA2079E
5.
1.
2.
CHECK HARNESS
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13 (P), 14 (P/L) and display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 5 (P), 7 (P/L).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA2080E
6. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows.
1.
Terminals
Terminal (Wire color)
—
Ignition
switch
Continuity
Connector
M93
1 (B)
Ground
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1228E
Revision: October 2004
AV-136
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch
EKS00APQ
1. CHECK FUSE
A
Make sure the following fuses of the AV switch are not blown.
B
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
1 (Y)
Battery power
31
2 (V)
ACC power
4
Terminal (Wire color)
M98
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
D
Disconnect AV switch connector.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
F
Ignition switch position
G
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
H
1 (Y)
M98
OFF
Ground
2 (V)
I
WKIA1767E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between AV switch and fuse.
J
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
AV
Check continuity between AV switch and ground as follows.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
—
M98
5 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WKIA1768E
Revision: October 2004
AV-137
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS00APR
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152, combination meter connector M24 and display control unit
connector M94.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 29 (W/R).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1769E
2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
SKIA4295E
3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect combination meter connector and display control unit connector.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector
B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
28 (W/R) - Ground
: Refer to AV-107, "Terminals
and Reference Value for NAVI
Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-138
SKIA4615E
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit
EKS00APS
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94, combination meter connector M24 and NAVI control unit
connector B152.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 29 (W/R).
Continuity should exist.
4.
B
C
D
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and ground.
E
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1506E
F
2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
G
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and ground.
H
Approx. 3.5V or more
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
J
SKIA4297E
AV
3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
L
Connect combination meter connector and NAVI control unit connector.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
16 (W/R) - Ground
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
M
AV-139
SKIA4616E
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS00APT
1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
Lighting switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
B152
25 (R/L)
Ground
1st or 2nd
position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and IPDM E/R.
Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit
SKIA4298E
EKS00APU
1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
Lighting switch position
(+)
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Connector
M94
14 (R/L)
Ground
1st or 2nd
position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R.
Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
SKIA4299E
EKS00APV
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
B152 terminal 26 (G/R) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control
unit and fuse.
SKIA4300E
Revision: October 2004
AV-140
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit
EKS00APW
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 12 (G/R) and ground.
C
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse.
D
E
WKIA1230E
Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS00APX
1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-102, "BACK-UP LAMP" .
G
H
2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
I
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152.
Turn ignition switch ON.
With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between
NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
F
J
AV
Selector lever position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
B152
27 (G/W)
Ground
R-position
Other than Rposition
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
L
SKIA4302E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp position relay.
Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit
EKS00APY
1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-102, "BACK-UP LAMP" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-141
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Turn ignition switch ON.
With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
Selector lever position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
M94
6 (GR)
Ground
R-position
Other than
R-position
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
SKIA4303E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and back-up lamp position relay.
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control
Unit)
EKS00APZ
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-133, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B152
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
44 (L)
M95
45 (P)
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
32 (L)
Yes
34 (P)
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
SKIA4444E
NAVI control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
44 (L)
B152
45 (P)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-142
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
A
1. Replace NAVI control unit.
2. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio
Unit)
B
C
D
EKS00AQ0
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
E
Check power supply and ground circuit for audio unit. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
F
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit.
H
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Audio unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
40 (O/L)
M95
4.
I
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
J
65 (O/L)
M45
42 (W/L)
Yes
66 (W/L)
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
AV
Terminals
WKIA1192E
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
L
40 (O/L)
M95
42 (W/L)
Ground
No
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
AV-143
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 (W/L) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
WKIA1770E
4. CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95.
Connect audio unit connector M45.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 (O/L) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
WKIA1771E
5. CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display control unit connector M95.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 40 (O/L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
40 (O/L) - Ground
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-144
SKIA4447E
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 (W/L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
42 (W/L) - Ground
B
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
C
D
SKIA4448E
E
Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display
Unit)
EKS00AQ1
1. CHECK HARNESS
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
36 (B/W)
M95
4.
H
Display unit
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
I
11 (B/W)
M93
38 (L)
Yes
22 (L)
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
J
Terminals
WKIA2019E
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
AV
—
36 (B/W)
M95
38 (L)
Ground
No
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
2. CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 (B/W) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
WKIA1377E
Revision: October 2004
AV-145
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
SKIA4453E
4. CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 36 (B/W) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
36 (B/W) - Ground
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
SKIA4452E
5. CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
38 (L) - Ground
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-146
SKIA4453E
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)
EKS00AQ2
1. CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and AV switch connector M98.
Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch.
B
C
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
AV switch
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
28 (V)
M95
4.
A
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
D
6 (V)
M98
30 (LG)
Yes
8 (LG)
E
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1597E
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
28 (V)
M95
30 (LG)
F
Ground
G
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
I
1. Replace AV switch.
2. Connect display control unit connector and AV switch connector.
J
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
AV
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-147
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CAN Communication Line Check
EKS00AQ3
1. CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-118, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" .
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-131,
"CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR" .
content
Item
3.
Error counter
Normal condition
Error (Example)
CAN_COMM
OK
NG
0-50
CAN_CIRC_1
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_2
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_3
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_4
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_5
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_6
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_7
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_8
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
UNKWN
0-50
SKIA4288E
Record each item display description (OK/NG/UKNWN) displayed on the following CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR Check Sheet.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet
Diagnosis item
Screen display
Diagnosis item
Screen display
CAN_COMM
OK
NG
CAN_CIRC_5
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_1
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_6
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_2
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_7
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_3
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_8
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_4
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
UNKWN
>> After filling in CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is Not Inserted
EKS00AQ4
1. CHECK DVD-ROM
Make sure identified DVD-ROM map is inserted.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Insert identified DVD-ROM map.
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVD-ROM Map is Malfunctioning or If
It is Impossible to Load Data from DVD-ROM Map
EKS00AQ5
1. CHECK 1: DVD-ROM
Remove inserted DVD-ROM map to check that it is identified.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace identified DVD-ROM map.
Revision: October 2004
AV-148
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK 2: DVD-ROM
A
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace DVD-ROM map.
B
3. CHECK 3: DVD-ROM
C
Insert same DVD-ROM to make sure same diagnosis result is found as last self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace DVD-ROM map.
D
If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning
E
EKS00AQ6
1. CHECK GPS ANTENNA
F
Check cable for GPS antenna for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" .
G
2. CHECK BY REPLACEMENT OF GPS ANTENNA
H
Replace with other functional GPS antenna to try self-diagnosis again.
Result of self-diagnosis; Found same result?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NO
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" .
Operating Screen for Audio and A/C is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI
Screen
I
J
EKS00AQ7
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R)
and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9 (B), 20 (W), 8 (R).
AV
L
Continuity should exist.
4.
M
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1965E
Revision: October 2004
AV-149
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 (R) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
55 (R) - 49
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
SKIA4305E
3. CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 53 (W) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
53 (W) - 49
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
WKIA1773E
4. CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL
1.
2.
Press the “TRIP” button.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 (B) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
51 (B) - 49
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
SKIA4306E
Revision: October 2004
AV-150
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)
EKS00AQ8
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
When the screen looks bluish.
B
C
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B151
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
18 (R)
M95
17
D
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
44 (R/L)
E
Yes
45
F
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4349E
Terminal (Wire color)
B151
G
18 (R)
Ground
No
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 18 (R) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 18 (R) and 17.
18 (R) - 17
J
AV
L
: Refer to AV-107, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit" .
M
OK or NG
SKIA4629E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-151
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)
EKS00AQ9
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
When the screen looks reddish.
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B151
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
21 (R/W)
M95
17
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
46 (R/W)
Yes
45
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4350E
Terminal (Wire color)
B151
21 (R/W)
Ground
No
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 21 (R/W) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 21 (R/W) and 17.
21 (R/W) - 17
: Refer to AV-107, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
SKIA4630E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-152
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish)
EKS00AQA
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
When the screen looks yellowish.
B
C
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B151
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
15 (B)
M95
17
D
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
48 (B)
E
Yes
45
F
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4351E
Terminal (Wire color)
B151
G
15 (B)
Ground
No
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 15 (B) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 15 (B) and 17.
15 (B) - 17
J
AV
L
: Refer to AV-107, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit" .
M
OK or NG
SKIA4631E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-153
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)
EKS00AQB
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
When the screen looks bluish.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
50 (R/L)
M93
47
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
17 (R/L)
Yes
7
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4353E
Terminal (Wire color)
M95
50 (R/L)
Ground
No
47
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 50 (R/L) and 47.
50 (R/L) - 47
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
SKIA4697E
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-154
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)
EKS00AQC
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
When the screen looks reddish.
B
C
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
52 (R/W)
M93
47
D
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
6 (R/W)
E
Yes
7
F
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4354E
Terminal (Wire color)
M95
G
52 (R/W)
Ground
No
47
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 52 (R/W) and 47.
52 (R/W) - 47
J
AV
L
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
SKIA4698E
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-155
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)
EKS00AQD
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
When the screen looks yellowish.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
54 (B)
M93
47
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
18 (B)
Yes
7
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4355E
Terminal (Wire color)
M95
54 (B)
Ground
No
47
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 54 (B) and 47.
54 (B) - 47
: Refer to AV-109, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
SKIA4356E
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-156
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVI Screen is Rolling
EKS00AQE
1. CHECK HARNESS
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Terminals
C
NAVI control unit
Connector
B151
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
16 (BR)
M95
14
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
D
43 (W)
Yes
41
E
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA2020E
NAVI control unit
Connector
—
Continuity
F
No
G
Terminal (Wire color)
B151
16 (BR)
Ground
14
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
2. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
I
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector M95 terminals 16 (BR) and 14 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
16 (BR) - 14
J
: Refer to AV-107, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit" .
AV
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
L
SKIA4358E
Revision: October 2004
AV-157
2005 Titan
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
56 (G)
M95
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
19 (G)
M93
49
Yes
21
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA2775E
Display control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
Terminal (Wire color)
M95
56 (G)
Ground
No
49
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
4. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminals 19
(G) and 21 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
19 (G) - 21
: Refer to AV-113, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-158
WKIA2022E
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Sound is Not Heard
EKS00AQF
1. CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING
A
While driving in the dark pink route, voice guide does not operate. (note)
NOTE:
Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction.
Is volume setting switched OFF?
YES >> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and audio unit connector M45.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and audio unit.
E
Terminals
F
NAVI control unit
Connector
Audio unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
7 (B)
B151
4.
C
D
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
B
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
G
71 (B)
M45
8 (W)
Yes
69 (W)
H
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1193E
NAVI control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
I
No
J
—
7 (B)
B151
8 (W)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
AV
3. CHECK VOICE GUIDE
1.
2.
3.
L
Connect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector
B151 terminal 7 (B) and 8 (W) with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
7 (B) - 8 (W)
: Refer to AV-107, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: October 2004
M
AV-159
SKIA4362E
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Screen is Not Shown
EKS00AQG
1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check power supply and ground circuit for display unit. Refer to AV-135, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Check for Display Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
A/C Screen is Not Shown (NAVI Screen is Shown)
EKS00AQH
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown
1.
EKS00AQI
CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown)
EKS00AQJ
1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-160
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown)
EKS00AQK
1. CHECK SPEEDOMETER
A
Confirm that speedometer is functioning.
Is speedometer functioning?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" .
B
C
2. CHECK FUEL GAUGE
Confirm that fuel gauge is functioning.
Is fuel gauge functioning?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
D
E
3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown)
EKS00AQL
1.
G
H
CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown
EKS00AQM
CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: October 2004
I
J
AV
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
1.
F
AV-161
2005 Titan
L
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)
EKS00AQN
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for AV switch. Refer to AV-137, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Check for AV Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS
AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-132, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-134, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
4. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE
Check communication line. Refer to AV-147, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit
and AV Switch)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Audio Does Not Work
EKS00AQO
Refer to AV-44, "Trouble Diagnosis" .
Navigation System Does Not Activate
EKS00AQP
1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-133, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: October 2004
AV-162
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored
EKS00AQQ
1. CHECK BATTERY POWER
A
Check NAVI control unit battery power. Refer to AV-133, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI
Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check NAVI control unit battery power system harness.
Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored
B
C
EKS00AQR
1. CHECK BATTERY POWER
D
Check display control unit battery power. Refer to AV-134, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check display control unit battery power system harness.
Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct
E
F
EKS00AQS
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-121, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. HISTORY OF ERRORS DIAGNOSIS
H
I
Was any error stored in AV-127, "HISTORY OF ERRORS" of the "CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT" mode?
YES or NO
YES >> AV-127, "DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS".
NO
>> AV-164, "Driving Test".
Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received
EKS00AQT
1. CHECK ENVIRONMENT
Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable
phone) is located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building.
OK or NG
OK
>> ● System is not malfunctioning.
The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the GPS satellite if it is shielded
by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-121, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: October 2004
G
AV-163
2005 Titan
J
AV
L
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Driving Test
EKS00AQU
1. DRIVING TEST 1
1.
Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT
LOCATION CORRECTION”.
2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark.
3. Perform the distance correction of the "CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT" mode.
Note: Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be
made.
4. Are symptoms malfunctioning to the AV-165, "Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction" after driving the vehicle?
YES or NO
YES >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. DRIVING TEST 2
Did any malfunction occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed?
●
Test pattern
Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor.
–
Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction
Disconnect GPS antenna connector (GT5) connected to the NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current location and the direction, then drive the vehicle.
–
Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching
Accurately adjust the current location and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the NAVI control
unit with ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back
in the unit, display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration.
●
Sample tests
–
Perform test pattern 1.
–
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate
tracking, plotting shall be made every several hundred meters (feet).
–
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate
the rate of change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance.
Correction = A/B
A: Distance shown on the screen
B: Actual distance
YES or NO
YES >> ● If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again.
● If any error is found in the map, please contact map data supplier. Refer to Navigation System
Owner's Manual for contact information.
● Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NO
>> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system.
●
Revision: October 2004
AV-164
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction
EKS00AQV
A
BASIC OPERATION
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
No image is shown.
Display brightness adjustment is set fully to
DARK side.
Adjust the display brightness.
No guide sound is heard.
Audio guide volume is too low or
too high.
Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX.
Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle
is driving on a dark pink route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Screen is too dark.
Motion of the image is too slow.
Temperature inside the vehicle is low.
Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear
on the screen.
Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit).
System is not malfunction.
B
C
VEHICLE MARK
E
Symptom
Cause
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™
Name of the place varies with the
screen.
Some thinning of the character data is done to
prevent the display becoming to complex. In
some cases and in some locations, the display
contents may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data
processing.
System is not malfunctioning.
Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly.
Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its
ignition switch is turned to OFF.
Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition.
Screen will not switch to nighttime
mode after the lighting switch is
turned ON.
The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH
SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function.
Perform screen dimming and select the
nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel.
Current location is not displayed.
Press “MAP” button to display the current
location.
Vehicle mark will not be shown.
Current location is not displayed.
Press “MAP” button to display the current
location.
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite
mark) on the map screen stays
gray.
Vehicle location accuracy is low.
Revision: October 2004
D
Remedy
F
G
H
I
J
AV
GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the
vehicle is in or behind a building.
Move the vehicle out to an open space.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument
panel.
Do not place anything in the center on top of
the display.
L
GPS satellites are not visible from current location.
Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle.
M
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the
map screen stays gray.
Current location is not determined.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle.
Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the deviation will be automatically adjusted.
If advancement or retard still occur, perform
the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is
always deviated to the same position.)
As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will
be released once a year.
AV-165
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Destination cannot be set.
Destination to be set is on an expressway.
Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched
when re-searching the route.
The vehicle has already passed the passing point,
or the system judged so.
To include the passing points that have been
passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be displayed.
Route searching has not been done.
Set the destination and perform route
searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF.
Turn route guide ON.
Route information is not available on the dark pink
route.
System is not malfunctioning.
After the route searching, no guide
sign will appear as the vehicle
goes near the entrance/exit to the
toll road.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
(On the display, only guide signs related to the
recommended route will be shown.)
Drive on the recommended route.
Automatic route searching is not
possible.
Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no
recommended route is available.
Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–
search the route manually. In this case, however, the whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour
search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that
of the previous search.
Performed search with every condition considered. However, the result is the same as that of
the previous search.
System is not malfunctioning.
Passing points cannot be set.
More than five passing points were set.
Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting point cannot be selected.
The current vehicle location is always set as the
starting point of a route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Some menu items cannot be
selected.
The vehicle is being driven.
Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then
operate the system.
VOICE GUIDE
Symptom
Voice guide will not operate.
Voice guide does not match the
actual road pattern.
Revision: October 2004
Cause
Remedy
Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
even when the route on the map changes direction.
System is not malfunctioning.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route.
Return to the recommended route or research the route.
Voice guide is turned OFF.
Turn voice guide ON.
Route guide is turned OFF.
Turn route guide ON.
Voice guide may vary with the direction to which
the vehicle is turned and the connection of the
road to other roads.
Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules.
AV-166
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ROUTE SEARCH
Symptom
No route is shown.
Indicated route is intermittent.
A
Cause
Remedy
No road to be searched is found around the destination.
Find wider road (orange road or wider)
nearby and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling
direction when there are separate up and
down roads.
B
Starting point and the destination are too close.
Set the destination at more distant point.
C
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/
time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination.
Turn the time-regulating search conditions
OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
search conditions OFF.
In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note) Therefore, the route to
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
D
E
When the vehicle has passed the
recommended route, it is deleted
from the screen.
A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing
point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The
data may remain undeleted in some areas.)
System is not malfunctioning.
Detouring route is recommended.
In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour
route may be recommended.
Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
route).
G
A detour route may be shown when some traffic
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area
around the starting point or the destination.
Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route
of your choice.
H
In the area where highways (gray routes) are
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route
may be detouring.
System is not malfunctioning.
Landmarks on the map do not
match the actual ones.
This can be happen due to omission or error in
the map data.
As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
released once a year. Wait until the latest
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from
the starting point, passing points,
and destination.
Starting point, passing points, and destination of
the route guide were set far from the desired
points because route searching data around
these area were not stored.
Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
this road is one of the highways (gray
routes), an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as the recommended route.
F
I
J
AV
L
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-167
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT
Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V
Revision: October 2004
AV-168
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
–: While driving
ooo: Display
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
A
B
C
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
E
ELK0193D
Straight roads
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching does not work effectively enough and
distance errors may accumulate. As a
result, the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location when the vehicle is
turned at a corner.
Road configuration
ELK0194D
Zigzag roads
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.
F
G
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
H
I
J
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern
AV
When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the
map may be matched to them by mistake
and the vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct location.
L
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel
(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
ELK0197D
Revision: October 2004
AV-169
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition) –: While driving
ooo: Display
In a parking lot
SEL709V
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be
easily returned to after rotating the vehicle
on a turntable with the ignition OFF.
Place
SEL710V
Slippery roads
On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
Slopes
When parking in sloped garages, when
travelling on banked roads, or in other
cases where the vehicle turns when tilted,
an error in the turning angle will occur, and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the
road.
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
Map data
Different road pattern
(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct road.
ELK0201D
Vehicle
Use of tire chains
Revision: October 2004
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
not correctly detected, and the vehicle
mark may deviate from the correct road.
AV-170
Drive the vehicle for a while. If
the distance still deviates,
adjust it by using the distance
adjustment function. (If the tire
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
–: While driving
ooo: Display
Just after the engine is started
Continuous driving without stopping
Precautions
for driving
Abusive driving
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
speed sensor) correction is not completed,
the vehicle can lose its direction and may
have deviated from the correct location.
Wait for a short while before
driving after starting the engine.
When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and
the current-location mark may deviate from
the correct road.
Stop and adjust the orientation.
Spinning the wheels or engaging in other
kinds of abusive driving may result in the
system being unable perform correct
detection, and may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
If the accuracy of location settings is poor,
accuracy may be reduced when the correct
road cannot be found, particularly in places
where there are many roads.
Enter in the road displayed on
the screen with an accuracy of
approx. 1mm.
Caution: Whenever possible,
use detailed map for the correction.
B
C
D
E
Position correction accuracy
How to correct location
F
G
SEL701V
Direction when location is corrected
H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be
reduced afterwards.
Perform direction correction.
I
SEL702V
J
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map
depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direcAV
tion correction.
●
When location correction has not been done
–
If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, or if the current-location mark becomes out of
place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. L
The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
●
When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been towed
–
Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for M
example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise
location can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the
current location.
●
When map-matching has been done
–
If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map-matching is done, the currentlocation mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a
location which is not on a road.
●
When GPS location correction has been done
–
If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS
measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected”
to a location which is not on a road.
Revision: October 2004
AV-171
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA
The navigation system moves the current-location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If
the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT
PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW
●
●
The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive
some distance for the function to work.
Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until some special feature is found.
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO
CORRECT LOCATION
●
●
●
The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark
may not be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done.
The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used.
GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped.
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED
The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen.
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows.
●
●
●
●
●
The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for
more distant areas.
Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Revision: October 2004
AV-172
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit
EKS00AQW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
SKIA0389E
Revision: October 2004
AV-173
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit
EKS00AQX
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Slide front seat RH fully forward.
2. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield.
WKIA1594E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect connectors.
Remove screws and remove NAVI control unit.
Remove screws and brackets from NAVI control unit.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1510E
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna
1.
2.
3.
EKS00AQY
Remove defroster grille.
Remove screws.
Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL
ASSEMBLY" .
WKIA1508E
4.
5.
Disconnect GPS antenna connector and remove GPS antenna
and feeder assembly out the top.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1509E
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch
EKS00AQZ
Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" .
Revision: October 2004
AV-174
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of AV Switch
EKS00AR0
A
Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" .
Removal and Installation of Display Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00AR1
B
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID D" .
Remove the four display unit assembly screws.
Disconnect connectors and remove display unit assembly.
Remove screws and remove display unit from brackets.
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
C
D
E
WKIA1512E
Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00AR2
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID D" .
Remove the four display unit assembly screws.
Disconnect connectors and remove display unit assembly.
Remove screws and remove display control unit from brackets.
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
WKIA1512E
J
AV
L
M
Revision: October 2004
AV-175
2005 Titan
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Revision: October 2004
AV-176
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ........................... 3
System Description .................................................. 3
BCM FUNCTION ................................................... 3
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION..... 3
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL .................... 6
BCM STATUS CONTROL ..................................... 6
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY..... 7
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM
E/R ........................................................................ 7
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................................................... 7
CAN Communication System Description ................ 8
Schematic ................................................................. 9
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 11
CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ......... 11
ITEMS OF EACH PART ...................................... 12
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 12
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULTII (Self-Diagnosis) ................................................... 13
Configuration .......................................................... 13
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 13
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE ............ 13
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE .......... 16
Removal and Installation of BCM ........................... 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSTALLATION ................................................... 19
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BCS-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS00AEY
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Revision: October 2004
BCS-2
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
●
PFP:284B2
A
EKS00AEZ
BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
B
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper
washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components.
Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM
using CAN communication.
C
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1.
2.
Description
● BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results.
● BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5)
and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
Operation description
● BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in
turn.
● If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
● At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When
voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects
voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
LIIA1323E
3.
BCM - Operation table of combination switch
● BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the following table.
Revision: October 2004
BCS-3
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
LIIA1324E
NOTE:
Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4.
Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
● When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if
OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting
switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication.
● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
Revision: October 2004
BCS-4
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA1325E
I
5.
NOTE:
Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON,
electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed.
J
Operation mode
● Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
BCS
Normal status
● When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BCS-5
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
●
When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 10 ms intervals, and receives lighting
switch input only.
SKIA4961E
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H)
connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively
reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
● With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
● Control by BCM is being operated properly.
● When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
● Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is
active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
● This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
● It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
● Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
● With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
● With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
● Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
4.
Sleep status
Revision: October 2004
BCS-6
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
CAN communication is not active.
When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
Key switch
Hazard switch
Door lock/unlock switch
Front door switch (LH, RH)
Rear door switch (LH, RH)
Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive
mode.
Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
●
●
B
C
D
E
F
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
●
A
Power door lock system. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .
Remote keyless entry system. Refer to BL-53, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" .
Power window system. Refer to GW-19, "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM" .
G
NOTE
Sunroof system. Refer to RF-10, "SUNROOF" . NOTE
●
Room lamp timer. Refer to LT-126, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" .
●
Warning chime system. Refer to DI-42, "WARNING CHIME" .
●
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to LT-75, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
LAMPS" .
NOTE:
Power supply only. No system control.
●
H
I
J
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
●
●
●
●
Panic system. Refer to BL-53, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" .
BCS
NVIS (NATS) system. Refer to BL-136, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR
USA)" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" .
L
Front wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-4, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM" .
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
System
Remote keyless entry system
Input
Keyfob
Output
●
All door locking actuator
●
Turn signal lamp (LH, RH)
M
Power door lock system
Front power door lock/unlock
switch (LH, RH)
All door locking actuator
Power supply (IGN) to power window
and sunroof
Ignition power supply
Power supply to power window and sunroof system
Power supply (BAT) to power window
and sunroof
Battery power supply
Power supply to power window and sunroof system
Panic alarm
Auto light system
Battery saver control
Headlamp
Revision: October 2004
●
Key switch
●
Keyfob
●
Optical sensor
●
Combination switch
●
Ignition switch
●
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Combination switch
BCS-7
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System
Input
Output
Tail lamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Fog lamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Turn signal lamp
Combination switch
Hazard lamp
Hazard switch
●
Turn signal lamp
●
Combination meter
●
Turn signal lamp
●
Combination meter
●
Key switch
●
Keyfob
●
Front door lock/unlock switch
(LH)
●
Front door switch LH
●
All door switch
●
Key switch
●
Front door switch LH
●
Combination switch
●
Key switch
●
Front door switch LH
Vehicle-speed-sensing intermittent
wiper
●
Combination switch
●
Combination meter
Air conditioner switch signal
Front air control
ECM
Blower fan switch signal
Front air control
ECM
Room lamp timer
Key warning chime
Light warning chime
Interior room lamp
Combination meter (warning buzzer)
Combination meter (warning buzzer)
CAN Communication System Description
IPDM E/R
EKS00AF0
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
BCS-8
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Schematic
EKS00AF1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
WIWA0812E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-9
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
WIWA0302E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-10
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00AF2
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
C
D
E
CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
2.
J
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCS
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-11
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
4.
Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
LKIA0169E
ITEMS OF EACH PART
NOTE:
CONSULT-II will only display systems the vehicle possesses.
Diagnostic test mode (Inspection by part)
System and item
CONSULT-II display
Power door lock system
DOOR LOCK
Warning chime
BUZZER
Room lamp timer
INT LAMP
Remote keyless
entry system
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF−
DIAG
RESULTS
CAN DIAG
SUPPORT
MNTR
×
DATA
MONITOR
ECU
PART
NUMBER
ACTIVE
TEST
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
MULTI REMOTE
ENT
×
×
×
Headlamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper
WIPER
×
×
Turn signal lamp
Hazard lamp
FLASHER
×
×
Blower fan switch
signal
Air conditioner
switch signal
AIR CONDITIONER
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
×
BCM
BCM
NVIS (NATS)
IMMU
Interior lamp battery
saver
BATTERY SAVER
Retained power control
RETAINED PWR
Oil pressure switch
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
×
CONFIGURATION
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
LKIA0169E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-12
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SET".
The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED"
will be displayed.
Touch "END".
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
Display Item List
Item
Description
RESET SETTING VALUE
E
Return a value set with WORK SUPPORT of each system to a default value in factory shipment.
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
EKS00AF3
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
F
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in
self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Connect to CONSULT–II, and select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
2. Select “BCM control unit ” on “SELECT WORK ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
3. Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
CONSULT-II display code
G
H
Diagnosis item
I
INITIAL DIAG
TRANSMIT DIAG
ECM
U1000
J
IPDM E/R
METER/M&A
BCS
I-KEY
Contents displayed
No malfunction>>Inspection end.
Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to “CAN System”. Refer to
LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
L
Configuration
M
EKS00AF4
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
●
READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
●
WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
●
When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
●
Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
●
If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
●
Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Revision: October 2004
BCS-13
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
1.
With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not
indicated, go to General Information Section to check CONSULT
II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II
Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
4.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
LKIA0169E
5.
Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
BCIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-14
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
6.
Touch “A60” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to
GI-46, "Model Variation" in GI section.
A
B
C
LKIA0613E
7.
D
Touch “READ CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT CONFIG ITEM”
screen.
E
F
G
LKIA0547E
8.
Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed.
Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
LKIA0504E
9.
Touch “BACK” on “READ CONFIGURATION” screen.
LKIA0395E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-15
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not
indicated, go to LAN Section to check data link connector (DLC)
circuit.
BCIA0030E
4.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
LKIA0169E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-16
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
5.
Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
6.
Touch “A60” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to
GI-46, "Model Variation" in GI section.
E
F
G
LKIA0613E
7.
Touch “WRITE CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT CONFIG
ITEM” screen.
H
I
J
LKIA0547E
8.
BCS
Touch "YES”.
For canceling, touch "NO".
L
M
LKIA0175E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-17
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
9.
Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST.
ITEM
SET VAL
KEYLESS ENTRY
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
AUTO LIGHT
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
FR FOG LAMP
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
DTRL
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
THEFT ALARM
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
DISPLAY STYLE
MODE2
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation" in GI section.
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration.
If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
11. Touch “OK” on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
LKIA0397E
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
LKIA0398E
Revision: October 2004
BCS-18
2005 Titan
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically.
Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by
comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LKIA0509E
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
H
I
J
LKIA0400E
Removal and Installation of BCM
EKS00AF5
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring
new BCM after installation. Refer to BCS-13, "Configuration" .
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove lower knee bolster. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove screw and release BCM.
4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
LEIA0068E
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
BCS
BCS-19
2005 Titan
L
M
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
NOTE:
●
When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to BCS-13, "Configuration" .
●
When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-136, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
●
When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to
WT-13, "ID Registration Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
BCS-20
2005 Titan
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for work ................................................ 4
Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis ................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 6
Work Flow ................................................................ 6
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 6
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 7
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 7
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 7
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 7
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 8
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 8
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 8
DOORS ................................................................. 8
TRUNK .................................................................. 9
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 9
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 9
SEATS ................................................................... 9
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 10
HOOD ....................................................................... 12
Fitting Adjustment .................................................. 12
CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 13
HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT ............................. 13
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly .......... 13
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ..... 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................ 15
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 16
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 16
Revision: October 2004
System Description ................................................. 17
KING CAB ........................................................... 17
CREW CAB ......................................................... 18
OUTLINE ............................................................. 18
Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 20
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (King Cab) ............. 21
Schematic (Crew Cab) ........................................... 26
Wiring Diagrams — D/LOCK — (Crew Cab) .......... 27
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ............... 31
Work Flow ............................................................... 31
CONSULT–II Function (BCM) ................................ 32
CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ......... 32
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 33
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 33
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart ....................... 34
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 34
Door Switch Check (King Cab) ............................... 35
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) .............................. 37
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) .............. 39
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) .................. 40
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) .......... 42
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) ......... 45
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) .................... 47
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH) .................... 49
Door Lock Actuator Check (Rear RH/LH) ............... 50
FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch)
Check (King Cab) ................................................... 51
FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch)
Check (Crew Cab) .................................................. 52
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ..................... 53
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 53
System Description ................................................. 54
INPUTS ............................................................... 54
OPERATED PROCEDURE ................................. 55
CAN Communication System Description .............. 58
Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 59
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (King Cab) ............ 60
Schematic (Crew Cab) ........................................... 64
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (Crew Cab) ........... 65
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ............... 68
BL-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ........ 69
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 69
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 70
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 70
CONSULT-II Application Items ............................... 71
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 71
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ................................. 73
Pre-Diagnosis Inspection ........................................ 73
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 73
Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 74
SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 74
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) .............. 76
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) ................... 78
Door Switch Check (King Cab) ............................... 79
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) .............................. 81
Keyfob Battery and Function Check ....................... 82
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check ..... 83
ACC Power Check .................................................. 85
IPDM E/R Operation Check .................................... 85
Check Hazard Function .......................................... 87
Check Horn Function .............................................. 87
Check Headlamp Function ..................................... 87
CheckFrontRoom/MapLampIlluminationFunction
... 87
ID Code Entry Procedure ....................................... 88
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II ............ 88
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II ..... 90
Keyfob Battery Replacement .................................. 91
VEHICLESECURITY(THEFTWARNING)SYSTEM... 92
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 92
System Description ................................................. 93
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 93
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 93
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM ..................................................................... 94
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION .................................................................. 94
VEHICLESECURITYSYSTEMDEACTIVATION... 94
PANIC ALARM OPERATION ............................... 94
CAN Communication System Description .............. 95
Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 96
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (King Cab) ............ 97
Schematic (Crew Cab) ......................................... 103
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Crew Cab) ......... 104
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 109
Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ...... 109
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................ 110
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION ............... 110
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 110
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM ......................111
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 112
WORK FLOW .................................................... 112
Preliminary Check ................................................ 113
Symptom Chart ..................................................... 114
Door Switch Check (King Cab) ............................. 115
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) ............................ 116
Security Indicator Lamp Check ............................. 118
FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch)
Check (King Cab) ................................................. 119
Revision: October 2004
FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch)
Check (Crew Cab) ................................................ 120
Vehicle Security Horn Alarm Check ...................... 121
Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check ............. 121
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check ........................... 121
DOOR ...................................................................... 122
Fitting Adjustment ................................................. 122
FRONT DOOR ................................................... 123
REAR DOOR ..................................................... 123
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT .................................. 123
Removal and Installation ....................................... 124
KING CAB .......................................................... 124
CREW CAB ........................................................ 125
FRONT DOOR LOCK .............................................. 127
Component Structure ............................................ 127
Removal and Installation ....................................... 127
REMOVAL .......................................................... 127
INSTALLATION .................................................. 129
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 129
DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY ................. 129
REAR DOOR LOCK ................................................ 130
Component Structure ............................................ 130
Removal and Installation ....................................... 131
REMOVAL .......................................................... 131
INSTALLATION .................................................. 133
TAIL GATE ............................................................... 134
Removal and Installation ....................................... 134
GAS STAY ......................................................... 135
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ...................................................................... 136
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.136
System Description ............................................... 137
System Composition ............................................. 137
ECM Re-communicating Function ........................ 138
Wiring Diagram — NATS — .................................. 139
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 140
CONSULT-II .......................................................... 140
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 140
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION .................................................................. 141
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.142
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
ITEM CHART ..................................................... 142
Work Flow ............................................................. 143
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................ 144
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 .......................... 144
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 .......................... 145
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM ................... 145
Diagnostic Procedure 1 ......................................... 146
Diagnostic Procedure 2 ......................................... 147
Diagnostic Procedure 3 ......................................... 148
Diagnostic Procedure 4 ......................................... 149
Diagnostic Procedure 5 ......................................... 150
Diagnostic Procedure 6 ......................................... 153
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp. .................. 154
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ............. 155
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — ............................ 155
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................ 156
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ............................. 156
BL-2
2005 Titan
CAB AND REAR BODY ......................................... 158
Body Mounting, King Cab .................................... 158
Body Mounting, Crew Cab ................................... 159
BODY REPAIR ........................................................ 160
Body Exterior Paint Color ..................................... 160
Body Component Parts ........................................ 161
UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS .............. 161
BODY COMPONENT PARTS ........................... 163
FRAME COMPONENT PARTS ......................... 167
Corrosion Protection ............................................ 170
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 170
ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX .................................. 171
UNDERCOATING ............................................. 172
Body Sealing ........................................................ 173
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 173
Body Construction ................................................ 177
BODY CONSTRUCTION .................................. 177
Body Alignment .................................................... 179
BODY CENTER MARKS .................................. 179
PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS ................ 181
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 183
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................... 184
UNDERBODY ................................................... 186
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ....................... 189
REAR BODY ..................................................... 195
Handling Precautions for Plastics ......................... 198
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS ...................... 199
Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel ....... 201
HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES ................................................ 201
Foam Repair ......................................................... 203
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS ................ 203
FILL PROCEDURES ......................................... 203
Replacement Operations ...................................... 204
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 204
HOODLEDGE ................................................... 207
FRONT PILLAR ................................................. 208
CENTER PILLAR .............................................. 211
OUTER SILL ..................................................... 213
REAR CAB PILLAR ........................................... 217
REAR PANEL .................................................... 221
REAR FLOOR REAR ........................................ 222
PICKUP BED ..................................................... 224
CRUSH HORN .................................................. 235
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-3
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS0048I
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for work
●
●
EIS0048J
After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check
their operation.
Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis
EIS0048K
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
Revision: October 2004
BL-4
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EIS0048L
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
SIIA0994E
BL
—
(J-43241)
Remote Keyless Entry
Tester
Used to test key fobs
J
K
LEL946A
L
Commercial Service Tool
EIS0048M
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
M
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Revision: October 2004
BL-5
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS0048N
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: October 2004
BL-6
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
F
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
BL
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
L
●
Revision: October 2004
BL-7
2005 Titan
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS0048O
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: October 2004
BL-8
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
A
B
C
D
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
E
F
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
G
H
BL
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
K
L
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: October 2004
BL-9
2005 Titan
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS0048P
LIWA0276E
Revision: October 2004
BL-10
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: October 2004
BL-11
2005 Titan
HOOD
HOOD
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:F5100
EIS0048Q
LIIA1606E
Revision: October 2004
BL-12
2005 Titan
HOOD
1.
Hood hinge
2.
Hood damper stay
3.
Hood lock assembly
4.
Hood assembly
5.
Front grille
6.
Headlamp
7
Front fender
A
CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
B
1.
Remove the hood lock assembly and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood clearance of hood and fender becomes 1 mm (0.04 in) lower than fitting standard dimension.
2. Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and
striker for looseness, and tighten the lock bolt to the specified torque.
3. Adjust the clearance and surface height of hood and fender according to the fitting standard dimension by
rotating right and left bumper rubbers.
CAUTION:
Adjust right/left gap between hood and each part to the following specification.
Hood and headlamp (B–B)
: Less than 2.0 mm
C
D
E
HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock center
F
(when viewed from vehicle front).
Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
G
approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx.
3 kg (29 N, 7lb).
CAUTION:
Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or
H
higher.
After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified
torque.
BL
PIIA3806E
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly
EIS0048R
J
K
L
M
LIIA1078E
1.
Support the hood latch striker with proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Body injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the hood open when removing the hood
damper stay.
2.
Remove the hinge nuts from the hood to remove the hood assembly.
CAUTION:
Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
Revision: October 2004
BL-13
2005 Titan
HOOD
Installation in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
EIS0048S
WIIA0612E
1.
Hood lock assembly
2.
Hood lock cable
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front grill. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to EI-24, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and
hoodledge.
Remove the bolts and the hood opener.
Remove the grommet on the dashboard, and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room.
CAUTION:
While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable.
Revision: October 2004
BL-14
2005 Titan
HOOD
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
A
Pull the hood lock cable through the panel hole to the engine room.
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius
100mm (3.94 in) or more.
Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and push the grommet into the panel hole securely.
Apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.
B
C
D
PIIA0173E
4.
5.
Install the cable securely to the lock.
After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood
opener operation.
E
F
G
PIIA0174E
Hood Lock Control Inspection
H
EIS0048T
CAUTION:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front
end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make
sure the hood opener returns to the original position.
BL
J
K
L
PIIA1086E
3.
M
Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply
body grease to the points shown in the figure.
PIIA0176E
Revision: October 2004
BL-15
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:24814
EIS0048U
WIIA0579E
Revision: October 2004
BL-16
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
System Description
EIS0048V
A
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70 and
B
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 3 (column shift)
●
through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
C
●
to BCM terminal 57.
With ignition key inserted, power is supplied
D
●
through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 4 (column shift)
●
to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the door is locked or unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied E
●
to CPU of main power window and door lock/unlock switch
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15 (King Cab) or 17 (Crew Cab)
F
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then main power window and door lock/unlock switch operation signal is supplied.
●
to BCM terminal 22
G
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab).
When the door is locked or unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied
H
●
to CPU of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
BL
Then power window and door lock/unlock switch RH operation signal is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 22
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16.
J
When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (King Cab) or 4 (Crew Cab)
●
through key cylinder switch terminals 1 and 5
K
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then key cylinder switch operation signal is supplied
L
●
to BCM terminal 22
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab).
When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
M
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 (King Cab) or 6 (Crew Cab)
●
through key cylinder switch terminals 6 and 5
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then key cylinder switch operation signal is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 22
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab).
KING CAB
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH through a serial link.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminals 2 and 3
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the rear door switch upper LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
Revision: October 2004
BL-17
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
through rear door switch upper LH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the rear door switch lower LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through rear door switch lower LH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through front door switch RH terminals 2 and 3
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
When the rear door switch upper RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through rear door switch upper RH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
When the rear door switch lower RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through rear door switch lower RH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
●
CREW CAB
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH through a serial link.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
through front door switch LH case ground.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through front door switch RH terminal 2
●
through front door switch RH case ground.
When the rear door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 48
●
through rear door switch LH terminal 2
●
through rear door switch LH case ground.
When the rear door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 13
●
through rear door switch RH terminal 2
●
through rear door switch RH case ground.
OUTLINE
Functions available by operating the door lock and unlock switches on driver's door and passenger's door
●
●
Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked.
Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors
are unlocked.
Functions available by operating the key cylinder switch on driver's door
●
●
●
Interlocked with the locking operation of door key cylinder, door lock actuators of all doors are locked.
When door key cylinder is unlocked, front door lock assembly LH is unlocked.
When door key cylinder is unlocked for the second time within 5 seconds after the first operation, door
lock actuators on all doors are unlocked.
Revision: October 2004
BL-18
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Key reminder door system
When door lock and unlock switch is operated to lock doors with ignition key in key cylinder and any door
open, all door lock actuators are locked and then unlocked.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-19
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Schematic (King Cab)
EIS0048W
WIWA0273E
Revision: October 2004
BL-20
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (King Cab)
EIS0048X
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0760E
Revision: October 2004
BL-21
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
WIWA0787E
Revision: October 2004
BL-22
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0788E
Revision: October 2004
BL-23
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
WIWA0300E
Revision: October 2004
BL-24
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0275E
Revision: October 2004
BL-25
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Schematic (Crew Cab)
EIS0048Y
WIWA0299E
Revision: October 2004
BL-26
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagrams — D/LOCK — (Crew Cab)
EIS0048Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0761E
Revision: October 2004
BL-27
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
WIWA0304E
Revision: October 2004
BL-28
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0786E
Revision: October 2004
BL-29
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
WIWA0789E
Revision: October 2004
BL-30
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EIS00490
A
Terminal
Wire
Color
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door switch RH (All)
12
R/L
Rear door switch lower RH (King
Cab)
B
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0 → Battery voltage
Rear door switch upper RH
(King Cab)
13
22
GR
G
C
Rear door switch RH (Crew
Cab)
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
Anti–pinch serial link
When ignition switch is ON or power
window timer operates
0 → Battery voltage
D
E
PIIA2344E
37
B/R
Key switch (insert)
Key inserted in IGN key cylinder (ON) →
Key removed from IGN key cylinder
(OFF)
Battery voltage → 0
G
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
H
Front door switch LH (All)
47
SB
Rear door switch lower LH (King
Cab)
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0 → Battery voltage
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0 → Battery voltage
—
Battery voltage
Driver door lock knob
(locked → unlocked)
0 → Battery voltage
BL
Rear door switch upper LH (King
Cab)
48
R/Y
Rear door switch LH (Crew Cab)
57
Y/R
Battery power supply
59
G
Front door lock assembly LH
(unlock)
65
V
All door lock actuator (lock)
Driver door lock knob (neutral → lock)
0 → Battery voltage
66
G/Y
Front door lock actuator RH and
rear door lock actuators LH/RH
(unlock)
Door lock and unlock switch (locked →
unlocked)
0 → Battery voltage
67
B
70
W/B
Ground
—
—
BAT power supply
—
Battery voltage
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J
K
L
M
EIS00491
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to BL-17, "System Description" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to BL-34,
"Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart" .
Does power door lock system operate normally? OK: GO TO 5, NG: GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
F
BL-31
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
CONSULT–II Function (BCM)
EIS00492
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
"DOOR LOCK"
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
BBIA0369E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “BCM”.
If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
BL-32
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
6.
Touch “DOOR LOCK”.
A
B
C
LIIA1137E
D
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item "OPERATION"
H
Content
KEY ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
CDL LOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
CDL UNLOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK-SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder.
KEY CYL UN-SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder.
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW–DR
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW–AS
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW–RR
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW–RL
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
BL
J
K
L
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
M
Content
ALL LOCK/UNLOCK
This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when
"ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched.
DR UNLOCK
This test is able to check front door lock assembly LH unlock operation.These actuators lock
when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched.
OTHER UNLOCK
This test is able to check door lock actuators (except front door lock assembly LH) unlock
operation.These actuators unlock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched.
Revision: October 2004
BL-33
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart
EIS00493
Symptom
Repair order
Key reminder door system does not operate
properly.
Refer to page
1. Door switch check
BL-35
2. Key switch (Insert) check
BL-39
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
Power door lock does not operate with door lock
and unlock switch on main power window and
door lock/unlock switch or power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH
1. Door lock/unlock switch check
BL-42
Front door lock assembly LH does not operate.
1. Door lock actuator check (Front LH)
BL-47
Specific door lock actuator does not operate.
1. Door lock actuator check (Front RH, Rear LH/
RH)
BL-49
1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check
BL-51
Power door lock does not operate with front door
key cylinder LH operation.
2. Replace BCM.
Power door lock does not operate.
BCS-19
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
BL-34
2. Door lock/unlock switch check
BL-42
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS00494
1. CHECK FUSE
Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link.
Component Parts
BCM
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
57 (BAT power supply)
15A
22
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
Location
Fuse block (J/B)
Fuse and fusible link box
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse, refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 57, 70
and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
( + )
Ground
57 (Y/R)
Ignition
switch
Voltage
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
( – )
70 (W/B)
M20
Signal name
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
LIIA1252E
BL-34
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
B
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
M20
Continuity
(+)
(-)
67 (B)
Ground
C
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
LIIA1040E
Door Switch Check (King Cab)
EIS00495
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer
to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
●
E
F
G
:ON
:ON
H
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
:OFF
:OFF
BL
J
WIIA0560E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 47 and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
Item
M19
Door
switches LH
M18
Door
switches RH
(+)
(–)
47 (SB)
Ground
12 (R/L)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
L
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
K
LIIA1174E
BL-35
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear
upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, and 47.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
1 (SB) - 47 (SB)
1 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
4.
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH),
B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear
upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal
1 and ground.
2 (SB or R/L) - Ground
1 (SB or R/L) - Ground
:Continuity should not exist
:Continuity should not exist
LIIA1175E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
Disconnect door switch.
Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Item
Terminal
Door switches
(front)
2–3
Door switches (rear
upper and lower)
1–2
Condition
Continuity
Open
No
Closed
Yes
Open
No
Closed
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0595E
Revision: October 2004
BL-36
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
EIS00496
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
●
C
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
D
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
E
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
PIIA6222E
M19
M18
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
(+)
Front door
switch LH
47 (SB)
Rear door
switch LH
48 (R/Y)
(–)
12 (R/L)
Rear door
switch RH
13 (GR)
H
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
BL
Ground
Front door
switch RH
Condition
F
G
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
B
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
J
LIIA1177E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-37
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116
(Rear RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
2 (R/Y) - 48 (R/Y)
2 (GR) - 13 (GR)
4.
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH),
B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and
ground.
2 (SB, R/L, R/Y or GR) Ground
:Continuity should not exist
LIIA1178E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
Disconnect door switch.
Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Terminal
Door switch (front
and rear)
2 – Ground
Condition
Continuity
Open
Yes
Closed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check door switch case ground condition.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
LIIA1179E
Revision: October 2004
BL-38
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift)
EIS00497
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
B
C
:ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
●
KEY ON SW
D
:OFF
E
LIIA0169E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
M18
G
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
37 (B/R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
H
BL
LIIA0567E
J
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch connector.
Check continuity between key switch terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3–4
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch.
WIIA0313E
Revision: October 2004
BL-39
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch harness connector M80 terminal
4 (B/R).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and ground.
37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R)
37 (B/R) - Ground
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should not
exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift)
WIIA0596E
EIS00498
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
●
:ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
:OFF
LIIA0169E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
M18
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
37 (B/R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
LIIA0567E
BL-40
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector.
Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3–4
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid.
D
E
LIIA1044E
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
G
3.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness
connector M27 terminal 4 (B/R).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and ground.
37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R)
37 (B/R) - Ground
H
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
BL
WIIA0597E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-41
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab)
EIS00499
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK:
CDL LOCK SW
●
:ON
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK:
CDL UNLOCK SW
:ON
PIIA6538E
Without CONSULT-II
Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/
unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after
the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
1.
2.
Connector
M18
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
22 (G)
Ground
Signal
(Reference value)
PIIA1297E
PIIA6379E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for
"REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT–II. Refer to
BL-71, "Active Test" .
When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
PIIA3080E
Revision: October 2004
BL-42
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground.
15 (B) - Ground
B
C
: Continuity should exist
D
E
LIIA0604E
4.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
11 (B) - Ground
F
: Continuity should exist
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
LIIA1140E
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-43
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 12.
22 (G) - 12 (LG/W)
: Continuity should exist
LIIA0649E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 16.
22 (G) - 16 (LG/W)
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0598E
Revision: October 2004
BL-44
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab)
EIS0049A
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK:
CDL LOCK SW
●
B
C
:ON
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK:
CDL UNLOCK SW
D
:ON
E
PIIA6538E
Without CONSULT-II
Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/
unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after
the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
1.
2.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
F
G
H
BL
Signal
(Reference value)
J
M18
22 (G)
Ground
K
PIIA1297E
PIIA6379E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
M
2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for
"REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT–II. Refer to
BL-71, "Active Test" .
When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
PIIA3080E
Revision: October 2004
L
BL-45
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground.
17 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist
LIIA0392E
4.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
11 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1140E
Revision: October 2004
BL-46
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 14.
22 (G) - 14 (LG/W)
B
: Continuity should exist
C
D
E
LIIA0394E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 16.
22 (G) - 16 (LG/W)
F
: Continuity should exist
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
BL
WIIA0598E
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH)
EIS0049B
J
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire
color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
L
Driver door lock/unlock
switch is turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
M
Driver door lock/unlock
switch is turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
(-)
59 (G)
M20
K
Ground
65 (V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-47
LIIA1046E
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly LH.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65
and front door lock assembly LH connector D14 terminals 2, 3.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
59 (G)
M20
3.
D14
65 (V)
Terminals
(wire color)
Continuity
2 (G)
Yes
3 (V)
Yes
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65
and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
59 (G)
M20
65 (V)
Continuity
WIIA0316E
No
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH. Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
BL-48
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH)
EIS0049C
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
A
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(-)
65 (V)
M20
Ground
66 (G/Y)
B
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
LIIA1048E
E
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and door lock actuator RH.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and front door lock actuator RH terminals 2, 3.
Terminal
3.
F
G
Continuity
65 (V)
3 (V)
Yes
66 (G/Y)
2 (G/Y)
Yes
H
BL
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
65 (V)
66 (G/Y)
Continuity
No
Ground
WIIA0317E
J
No
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock actuator RH. Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-49
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock Actuator Check (Rear RH/LH)
EIS0049D
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(-)
65 (V)
M20
Ground
66 (G/Y)
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
LIIA1048E
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and inoperative door lock actuator.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and rear door lock actuator connector terminals 2, 3.
Terminal
3.
Continuity
65 (V)
3 (V)
Yes
66 (G/Y)
2 (G/Y)
Yes
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
65 (V)
66 (G/Y)
Continuity
No
Ground
WIIA0318E
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door lock actuator. Refer to BL-131, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
BL-50
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab)
EIS0049E
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
A
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in
DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
KEY CYL LK-SW
B
C
: ON
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
●
KEY CYL UN-SW
D
: ON
E
LIIA0188E
F
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire
color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
(–)
6 (L)
D7
Condition
Ground
7 (R)
G
H
BL
J
LIIA1256E
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
1.
2.
L
Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
1–5
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
6–5
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
ground circuit.
● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0319E
dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-51
2005 Titan
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
EIS0049F
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in
DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
KEY CYL LK-SW
: ON
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
●
KEY CYL UN-SW
: ON
LIIA0188E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire
color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
(–)
4 (L)
D7
Condition
Ground
6 (R)
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
LIIA1273E
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
1.
2.
Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
1–5
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
6–5
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
ground circuit.
● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0319E
dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-52
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28596
A
EIS0049G
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0580E
Revision: October 2004
BL-53
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description
EIS0049H
INPUTS
Power is supplied at all times
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box).
●
to BCM terminal 57
●
through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift) or key switch (column shift) is ON (inserted), power is
supplied
●
to BCM terminal 37
●
through key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift) or key switch (column shift) terminals 3 and 4
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is ACC or ON, power is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 11
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is ON or START, power is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 38
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box).
KING CAB
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH through a serial link.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminals 2 and 3
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the rear door switch upper LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through rear door switch upper LH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the rear door switch lower LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through rear door switch lower LH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through front door switch RH terminals 2 and 3
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
When the rear door switch upper RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through rear door switch upper RH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
When the rear door switch lower RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through rear door switch lower RH terminals 1 and 2
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
CREW CAB
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH through a serial link.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
Revision: October 2004
BL-54
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
through front door switch LH case ground.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through front door switch RH terminal 2
●
through front door switch RH case ground.
When the rear door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 48
●
through rear door switch LH terminal 2
●
through rear door switch LH case ground.
When the rear door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 13
●
through rear door switch RH terminal 2
●
through rear door switch RH case ground.
Keyfob signal is inputted to BCM from the remote keyless entry receiver.
The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the
●
power door lock
●
interior lamp and step lamps
●
panic alarm
●
hazard and horn reminder
●
keyless power window down (open)
●
auto door lock operation
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
OPERATED PROCEDURE
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
When the keyfob is operated, the signal from the keyfob is sent and the remote keyless entry receiver
receives the signal and sends it to the BCM. The BCM only locks/unlocks the doors if the ID number
matches. (Remote control entry functions)
Using the keyfob, the transmitter sends radio waves to the remote keyless entry receiver, which then
sends the received waves to the BCM. Only if the ID number matches does the BCM lock/unlock the
doors. (Remote control door function)
Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder or one of the doors is opened within 1 minute after
the UNLOCK switch on the keyfob is pressed, all the doors are automatically locked. (Auto lock function)
When a door is locked or unlocked, the vehicle turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds to verify operation. (Active check function)
When the key is in the ignition key cylinder [when the key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift) or key
switch (column shift) is ON (inserted)] and one of the doors is open, the door lock function does not work
even when the door lock is operated with the keyfob.
Keyfob ID set up is available.
If a keyfob is lost, a new keyfob can be set up. A maximum of 5 IDs can be set up simultaneously.
Remote Control Entry Functions
Operation Description
●
When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the keyfob and received by the keyless
remote entry receiver.
●
The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number.
●
If the ID number matches, the BCM uses communication to send the lock/unlock signal to each door lock
actuator.
●
When the door lock actuators receive this communication, each operates to lock/unlock its door.
Remote control entry operation conditions
Revision: October 2004
BL-55
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Keyfob operation
Operation condition
Door lock operation (locking)
Door lock operation (unlocking)
●
With key removed (key switch: OFF)
●
Closing all doors (door switch: OFF)
With key removed (key switch: OFF)
Auto Lock Function
Operation Description
●
Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder, one of the doors is opened, or the keyfob is operated within 1 minute after a door lock is unlocked by keyfob operation, all the doors are automatically
locked.
The 1 minute timer count is executed by the BCM and after 1 minute, the BCM sends the lock signal to all
doors.
Lock operations are the same as for the remote control entry function.
Active Check Function
Operation Description
When a door is locked or unlocked by keyfob operation, the vehicle turn signals flash and the horn sounds to
verify operation.
●
When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the remote controller and received by the
keyless remote entry receiver.
●
The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number.
●
If the ID number matches, the BCM uses communication to send the turn signal flashing and horn signal
to the IPDM E/R.
●
The IPDM E/R flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn for each keyfob operation.
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
C mode
S mode
Keyfob operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning lamp
flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
Hazard and Horn Reminder
BCM output to IPDM E/R for horn reminder signal as DATA LINE (CAN-H line and CAN-L line).
The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode).
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
C mode
S mode
Remote controller
operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning lamp
flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode
With CONSULT-II
Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET".
Without CONSULT-II
Revision: October 2004
BL-56
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time, the
hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows:
A
B
C
D
SEL153WA
Interior Lamp Operation
When the following input signals are both supplied:
●
all door switches are in the OFF position (when all the doors are closed) and
●
interior lamp switch is in DOOR position.
Remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and (for 30 seconds) with input of UNLOCK signal from
keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to LT-129, "ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION" .
E
F
G
Panic Alarm Operation
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is removed from the key cylinder), remote keyless entry system
turns on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob.
H
Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation
When keyfob unlock switch is turned ON with ignition switch OFF, and the switch is detected to be on continu- BL
ously for 3 seconds, the driver's door and passenger's door power windows are simultaneously opened.
Power window is operated to open and the operation continues as long as the keyfob unlock switch is
pressed.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-57
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
EIS0049I
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-58
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Schematic (King Cab)
EIS0049J
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0279E
Revision: October 2004
BL-59
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (King Cab)
EIS0049K
WIWA0832E
Revision: October 2004
BL-60
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0762E
Revision: October 2004
BL-61
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
WIWA0790E
Revision: October 2004
BL-62
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0763E
Revision: October 2004
BL-63
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Schematic (Crew Cab)
EIS0049L
WIWA0283E
Revision: October 2004
BL-64
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (Crew Cab)
EIS0049M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0833E
Revision: October 2004
BL-65
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
WIWA0764E
Revision: October 2004
BL-66
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0765E
Revision: October 2004
BL-67
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
Terminal
Wire
Color
11
O
EIS0049N
Item
Ignition switch (ACC)
Condition
Ignition switch in ACC
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Front door switch RH (All)
12
R/L
Rear door switch upper RH
(King Cab)
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
Rear door switch lower RH
(King Cab)
13
GR
18
P
19
V/W
Rear door switch RH (Crew
Cab)
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
Remote keyless entry receiver
ground
—
0
Remote keyless entry receiver
(Power supply)
Ignition switch OFF
LIIA1893E
Stand-by (keyfob buttons released)
20
G/W
LIIA1894E
Remote keyless entry receiver
signal (Signal)
When remote keyless entry receiver
receives signal from keyfob (keyfob
buttons pressed)
LIIA1895E
37
B/R
Key switch
Key inserted in IGN key cylinder →
Key removed from IGN key cylinder
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
Ignition switch ON
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
Battery voltage → 0
Battery voltage
Front door switch LH (All)
47
SB
Rear door switch upper LH
(King Cab)
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
Rear door switch lower LH
(King Cab)
48
R/Y
Rear door switch LH (Crew
Cab)
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
56
R/G
Battery saver
(Interior lamp)
Battery saver does operated →
Does not operated (ON → OFF)
Battery voltage → 0
57
Y/R
Power source (BAT)
59
G
Driver door lock actuator
Revision: October 2004
—
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Unlock)
BL-68
Battery voltage
0 → Battery voltage
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Terminal
Wire
Color
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
60
G/B
Turn signal LH
When doors are locked or unlocked
using keyfob (OFF → ON) *2
0 → Battery voltage
61
G/Y
Turn signal RH
When doors are locked or unlocked
using keyfob (OFF → ON) *2
0 → Battery voltage
62
R/W
Step lamp LH and RH
63
L
Item
Room lamp
Step lamp ON
0
Step lamp OFF
Battery voltage
Room lamp ON *1
Battery voltage
Room Lamp OFF *1
65
V
66
G/Y
67
B
69
70
A
D
Door lock actuators
0 → Battery voltage
Passenger and rear doors lock
actuator
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Unlock)
0 → Battery voltage
Ground
—
0
W/R
Power window power source
—
Battery voltage
W/B
Power source (BAT)
—
Battery voltage
*1: when room lamp switch is in "DOOR" position.
●
*2: when hazard reminder is ON.
C
0
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Lock)
●
B
E
F
G
Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
EIS0049O
H
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
—
0
L
CAN-H
—
—
P
CAN-L
—
—
Terminal
Wire
Color
38
B
39
40
45
G/W
59
B
Item
Horn relay
When doors locks are operated
using keyfob (OFF → ON) *
Ground
—
BL
J
Battery voltage → 0
0
K
*: when horn reminder is ON.
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS0049P
L
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
M
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Revision: October 2004
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
BL-69
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
EIS0049Q
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
BBIA0369E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “BCM”.
If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
LIIA0194E
Revision: October 2004
BL-70
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
CONSULT-II Application Items
EIS0049R
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
Data Monitor
E
Monitored Item
Description
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
F
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
KEYLESS PANIC
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS UNLOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS LOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
CDL LOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
RKE LCK-UNLCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob.
RKE KEEP UNLK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
G
H
BL
J
Active Test
L
Test Item
Description
FLASHER
This test is able to check right and left hazard reminder operation. The right hazard lamp turns on
when “RH” on CONSULT-II screen is touched and the left hazard lamp turns on when "LH" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
POWER WINDOW DOWN
This test is able to check power window down operation. The windows are lowered when “ON” on
CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HORN
This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
DOOR LOCK
This test is able to check door lock operation. The doors lock and unlock based on the item on CONSULT-II screen touched.
Work Support
Test Item
Description
REMO CONT ID REGIST
Keyfob ID code can be registered.
REMO CONT ID ERASUR
Keyfob ID code can be erased.
REMO CONT ID CONFIR
It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode.
HORN CHIRP SET
Horn chirp function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when
"CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Revision: October 2004
K
BL-71
2005 Titan
M
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Test Item
Description
HAZARD LAMP SET
Hazard lamp function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when
"CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
MULTI ANSWER BACK SET
Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed
when “CHANG SETT” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
AUTO LOCK SET
Auto locking function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when
"CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
PANIC ALRM SET
Panic alarm operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed
when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
PW DOWN SET
Keyless power window down (open) operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation
mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Hazard and horn reminder mode
MODE 1
(C mode)
MODE 2
(S mode)
MODE 3
MODE 4
MODE 5
MODE 6
Keyfob
operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning
lamp flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
—
—
Twice
Once
Twice
—
—
Once
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Once
—
Once
—
Auto locking function mode
Auto locking function
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
5 minutes
Nothing
1 minute
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
0.5 seconds
Nothing
1.5 seconds
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
3 seconds
Nothing
5 seconds
Panic alarm operation mode
Keyfob operation
Keyless power window down operation mode
Keyfob operation
Revision: October 2004
BL-72
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EIS0049S
Check the trouble symptom and customer's requests.
Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-54, "System Description" .
Confirm system operation.
● Check that the power door lock system operates normally. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM" .
Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to BL-73, "Pre-Diagnosis Inspection" .
Refer to trouble diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-74,
"Trouble Diagnoses" .
Inspection End.
Pre-Diagnosis Inspection
A
B
C
D
EIS0049T
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
E
Confirm BCM Configuration for "KEYLESS ENTRY" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Continue Trouble Diagnosis. Refer to BL-73, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" .
NG
>> Change BCM Configuration for "KEYLESS ENTRY" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
F
G
EIS0049U
1. CHECK FUSE
H
Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link.
Component Parts
BCM
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
Location
57 (BAT power supply)
15A
22
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
Fuse and fusible link box
11 (ACC power supply)
10A
4
Fuse block (J/B)
38 (IGN power supply)
10A
59
Fuse and relay box
BL
Fuse block (J/B)
J
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse, refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-73
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connectors M18, M20 terminals
11, 38, 57, 70 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Voltage
70 (W/B)
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
57 (Y/R)
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
11 (O)
ACC power
supply
ACC
Battery
voltage
38 (W/L)
IGN power
supply
ON
Battery
voltage
( + )
( – )
M20
Ground
M18
LIIA1274E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
M20
Continuity
(+)
(-)
67 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1040E
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS0049V
SYMPTOM CHART
NOTE:
●
Always check the "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" before troubleshooting. Refer to BL-73, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" .
●
Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. Refer to BL-82, "Keyfob Battery and Function
Check" .
●
The panic alarm operation of remote keyless entry system does not activate with the ignition key inserted
in the ignition key cylinder.
●
Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob
before replacing keyfob.
Symptom
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
All functions of remote keyless entry system do not
operate.
BL-82
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Check BCM and keyless receiver.
Revision: October 2004
Reference
page
BL-74
BL-83
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Symptom
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
Reference
page
BL-82
B
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered.
2. Key switch (insert) check
BL-76, BL78
3. Door switch check
BL-79, BL81
4. ACC power check
BL-85
5. Replace BCM.
Door lock or unlock does not function.
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to
BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" )
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
BL-82
Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
2. Door switch check
3. Replace BCM.
D
E
F
BCS-19
1. Check hazard and horn reminder mode with CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed.
First check the hazard and horn reminder mode setting.
C
BCS-19
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Replace BCM.
A
G
BL-71
BL-79, BL81
BCS-19
H
BL
1. Check hazard reminder mode with CONSULT-II
Hazard reminder does not activate properly when
pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
(Horn reminder OK)
NOTE:
Hazard reminder mode can be changed.
First check the hazard reminder mode setting.
2. Check hazard function with hazard switch
3. Replace BCM.
BL-71
J
—
BCS-19
K
1. Check horn reminder mode with CONSULT-II
Horn reminder does not activate properly when
pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
(Hazard reminder OK)
NOTE:
Horn reminder mode can be changed.
First check the horn reminder mode setting.
2. Check horn function with horn switch
3. IPDM E/R operation check
4. Replace BCM.
Room lamp and step lamp operation do not activate
properly.
—
BL-85
BCS-19
BL-87
2. Step lamp operation check
LT-127
3. Door switch check
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
BL-79, BL81
BCS-19
BL-82
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Key switch (insert) check
3. Replace BCM.
Revision: October 2004
L
1. Room lamp operation check
4. Replace BCM.
Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not activate
when panic alarm button is continuously pressed.
BL-71
BL-75
BL-76, BL78
BCS-19
2005 Titan
M
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Symptom
Diagnoses/service procedure
Reference
page
1. Check auto door lock operation mode with CONSULT-II
Auto door lock operation does not activate properly.
(All other remote keyless entry functions OK.)
NOTE:
Auto door lock operation mode can be changed.
First check the auto door lock operation mode setting.
2. Replace BCM.
BL-71
BCS-19
1. Check power window down operation mode with CONSULT-II
Keyless power window down (open) operation does
not activate properly.
(All other remote keyless entry functions OK.)
NOTE:
Power window down operation mode can be changed.
First check the power window down operation mode setting.
2. Check power window function with switch.
3. Replace BCM.
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift)
BL-71
—
BCS-19
EIS0049W
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
●
:ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
:OFF
LIIA0169E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
M18
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
37 (B/R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
LIIA0567E
BL-76
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch connector.
Check continuity between key switch terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3–4
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch.
D
E
WIIA0313E
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
G
3.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch harness connector M80 terminal
4 (B/R).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and ground.
37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R)
37 (B/R) - Ground
H
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
BL
WIIA0596E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-77
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift)
EIS0049X
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
:ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
●
KEY ON SW
:OFF
LIIA0169E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
M18
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
37 (B/R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0567E
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector.
Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3–4
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid.
LIIA1044E
Revision: October 2004
BL-78
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness
connector M27 terminal 4 (B/R).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and ground.
37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R)
37 (B/R) - Ground
B
C
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
WIIA0597E
E
F
Door Switch Check (King Cab)
EIS0049Y
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
G
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer
to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
●
:ON
:ON
H
BL
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
:OFF
:OFF
J
K
PIIA6222E
L
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 47 and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
Item
M19
Door
switches LH
47 (SB)
Door
switches RH
12 (R/L)
M18
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
(–)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
M
LIIA1174E
BL-79
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear
upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, and 47.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
1 (SB) - 47 (SB)
1 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
4.
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH),
B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear
upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal
1 and ground.
2 (SB or R/L) - Ground
1 (SB or R/L) - Ground
:Continuity should not exist
:Continuity should not exist
LIIA1175E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
Disconnect door switch.
Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Terminal
Door switches
(front)
2–3
Door switches (rear
upper and lower)
1–2
Condition
Continuity
Open
No
Closed
Yes
Open
No
Closed
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0595E
Revision: October 2004
BL-80
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
EIS0049Z
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
●
C
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
D
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
E
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
PIIA6222E
M19
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
Front door
switch LH
Rear door
switch LH
M18
(+)
(–)
Condition
H
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
47 (SB)
BL
48 (R/Y)
Ground
Front door
switch RH
12 (R/L)
Rear door
switch RH
13 (GR)
F
G
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
B
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
J
LIIA1177E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-81
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116
(Rear RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
2 (R/Y) - 48 (R/Y)
2 (GR) - 13 (GR)
4.
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH),
B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and
ground.
2 (SB, R/L, R/Y or GR) Ground
:Continuity should not exist
LIIA1178E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
Disconnect door switch.
Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Terminal
Door switch (front
and rear)
2 – Ground
Condition
Continuity
Open
Yes
Closed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check door switch case ground condition.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
LIIA1179E
Keyfob Battery and Function Check
EIS004A0
1. CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY
Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage
: 2.5V - 3.0V
NOTE:
Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace battery.
SEL237W
Revision: October 2004
BL-82
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
B
When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should
be turned as follows.
Condition
Monitor item
Pushing LOCK
KEYLESS LOCK
: ON
Pushing UNLOCK
KEYLESS UNLOCK
: ON
Keep pushing UNLOCK
RKE KEEP UNLK
turns to ON 3 seconds
after UNLOCK button
is pushed.
: ON
Pushing PANIC
KEYLESS PANIC
: ON
Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK
at the same time
RKE LCK-UNLCK
: ON
C
D
PIIA6468E
E
F
Without CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function using Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> WITH CONSULT-II: Keyfob, remote keyless entry receiver and wiring harness between BCM and
remote keyless entry receiver are OK. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation H
of BCM" .
OK
>> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-74, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
BL
NG
>> WITH CONSULT-II: Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-74, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
NG
>> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-88, "ID Code Entry Procedure" .
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check
EIS0061Y
J
1. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL
K
Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 20 and ground using an oscilloscope.
Condition:
Keyfob buttons released
Keyfob buttons pressed
L
: Refer to BL-68, "Terminals and Reference Value
for BCM" .
: Refer to BL-68, "Terminals and Reference Value
for BCM" .
M
LIIA1275E
OK or NG
OK
>> Remote keyless entry receiver signal power supply, ground and signal circuits are OK. Replace
BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
BL-83
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY INSPECTION
Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 19 and ground using an oscilloscope.
19 (V/W) - Ground
: Refer to BL-68, "Terminals and Reference Value
for BCM" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0433E
3. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM)
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 18 and
ground.
18 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0434E
4. HARNESS INSPECTION BETWEEN BCM AND REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
1.
2.
Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver and BCM connectors.
Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver connector M120 terminals 1, 2, 4 and BCM connector M18 terminals 18, 19, 20.
1 (P) - 18 (P)
2 (G/W) - 20 (G/W)
4 (V/W) - 19 (V/W)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver terminals 1, 2 and 4 and ground.
1 (P) - Ground
2 (G/W) - Ground
4 (V/W) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0308E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace remote keyless entry receiver.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
BL-84
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ACC Power Check
EIS004A2
1. CHECK ACC POWER
A
With CONSULT-II
Check "ACC ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
B
Monitor Item
Condition
ACC ON SW
Ignition switch position is ACC
: ON
Ignition switch position is OFF
: OFF
C
D
E
PIIA3367E
F
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 11 and ground.
Connector
M18
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
(–)
11 (O)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ACC
Battery voltage
OFF
0
OK or NG
OK
>> ACC power circuit is OK.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short.
IPDM E/R Operation Check
G
H
BL
PIIA7002E
J
EIS004A3
1. CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE
K
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E122 terminal 45 and
ground.
L
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
E122
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(+)
(–)
45 (G/W)
Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
M
BL-85
LIIA1278E
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and horn relay.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E122 terminal 45 and horn relay connector H-1 terminal 1.
45 (G/W) - 1 (R/W)
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-74, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness
LIIA1054E
Revision: October 2004
BL-86
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Check Hazard Function
EIS004A4
1. CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
A
Does hazard indicator flash with hazard switch?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
No
>> Check “hazard indicator”. Refer to LT-75, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS" .
B
C
Check Horn Function
EIS004A5
First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of
malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM".
1. CHECK HORN FUNCTION
Does horn sound with horn switch?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Horn circuit is OK.
No
>> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-37, "HORN" .
Check Headlamp Function
D
E
F
EIS004A6
First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of
malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM".
G
1. CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
H
Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch ON?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Headlamp operation circuit is OK.
No
>> Check headlamp circuit. Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" .
Check Front Room/Map Lamp Illumination Function
BL
EIS004A7
1. CHECK MAP LAMP ILLUMINATION FUNCTION
J
When front room/map lamp switch is in DOOR position, open the front door LH or RH.
Front room/map lamp and ignition key illumination should illuminate.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> Check front room/map lamp illumination circuit. Refer to LT-151, "ILLUMINATION" .
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-87
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure
EIS004A8
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
●
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A
specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not
known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
●
When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased.
If five ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is
erased. If less than five codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, the
new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased.
●
Entry of a maximum of five ID codes is allowed. When more than five codes are entered, the oldest
ID code will be erased.
●
Even if the same ID code that is already in memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The
code is counted as an additional code.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
BBIA0336E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “BCM”.
If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
BL-88
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
6.
Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
A
B
C
LIIA0194E
D
7.
Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
8.
The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up.
“REMO CONT ID REGIST”
Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code.
NOTE:
Register the ID code when keyfob or BCM is replaced, or
when additional keyfob is required.
● “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code.
● “REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or
not.
H
●
BL
J
LIIA1147E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-89
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II
LIIA1670E
Revision: October 2004
BL-90
2005 Titan
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
NOTE:
●
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID
code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new
keyfobs must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) five times. After all ID codes are erased,
the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
●
When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five
ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If
less than five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is
added and no ID codes are erased.
●
If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code
entry” for each new keyfob.
●
Entry of maximum five ID codes is allowed. When more than five ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code
will be erased.
●
Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code
is counted as an additional code.
Keyfob Battery Replacement
EIS004A9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1514E
Revision: October 2004
BL-91
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28491
EIS004AA
WIIA0581E
Revision: October 2004
BL-92
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description
EIS004AB
A
DESCRIPTION
Operation Flow
B
C
D
E
F
G
PIIA1367E
H
Setting the vehicle security system
Initial condition
●
Ignition switch is in OFF position.
BL
Disarmed phase
●
When the vehicle is being driven or when doors are open, the vehicle security system is set in the disarmed phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle.
J
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
●
The vehicle security system turns into the "pre-armed" phase when hood and all doors are closed and
locked by electronic key. The security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds. Then, the system auto- K
matically shifts into the "armed" phase.
Canceling the set vehicle security system
L
When one of the following operations is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
●
Unlock the doors with the key or the keyfob.
Activating the alarm operation of the vehicle security system
Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
When one of the following operations is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps
for about 50 seconds.
1. Engine hood or any door is opened before unlocking door with key or keyfob.
2. Door is unlocked without using key or keyfob.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter (security indicator lamp) terminal 8 and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 57
●
through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to horn relay terminal 2
Revision: October 2004
BL-93
2005 Titan
M
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
through 20A fuse (No. 52, located in the IPDM E/R) and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R),
●
to IPDM E/R internal CPU.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse box (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through body ground E9, E15 and E24.
●
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM
The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors and hood.
To activate the vehicle security system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors and hood are closed
and the doors are locked.
When a door is open, BCM terminal 12, 13, 47 or 48 receives a ground signal from each door switch.
When front door LH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew
Cab) of main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
When front door RH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 16 of power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH or the rear power window switch LH or RH.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION
The vehicle security system is triggered by
●
opening a door
●
unlocking door without using the key or keyfob.
The vehicle security system will be triggered once the system is in armed phase,
●
when BCM receives a ground signal at terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 (door switch).
Power is supplied at all times
●
to horn relay terminal 2
●
through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in fuse and fusible link box).
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
●
from IPDM E/R terminal 45
●
to headlamp high relay and
●
to horn relay terminal 1.
The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds, but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door must be unlocked with the key or keyfob.
When the key is used to unlock a door, BCM terminal 22 receives signal
●
from terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab) of the main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
When the BCM receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob or key cylinder switch, the
vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
PANIC ALARM OPERATION
Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as
required.
When the remote keyless entry system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
●
from IPDM E/R terminal 45
●
to headlamp high relay and
●
to horn relay terminal 1.
The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 30 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob.
Revision: October 2004
BL-94
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
EIS004AC
A
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-95
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic (King Cab)
EIS004AD
WIWA0835E
Revision: October 2004
BL-96
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (King Cab)
EIS004AE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0766E
Revision: October 2004
BL-97
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
WIWA0289E
Revision: October 2004
BL-98
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0290E
Revision: October 2004
BL-99
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
WIWA0291E
Revision: October 2004
BL-100
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0767E
Revision: October 2004
BL-101
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
WIWA0798E
Revision: October 2004
BL-102
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic (Crew Cab)
EIS004AF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0836E
Revision: October 2004
BL-103
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Crew Cab)
EIS004AG
WIWA0768E
Revision: October 2004
BL-104
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0295E
Revision: October 2004
BL-105
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
WIWA0296E
Revision: October 2004
BL-106
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0769E
Revision: October 2004
BL-107
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
WIWA0793E
Revision: October 2004
BL-108
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EIS004AH
A
Terminal
Wire
Color
11
O
Item
Ignition switch (ACC)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Battery voltage
B
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
C
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
Ignition switch in ACC
Front door switch RH
12
R/L
Rear door switch upper RH
(King Cab)
Rear door switch lower RH
(King Cab)
13
GR
Rear door switch RH (Crew
Cab)
D
E
22
G
Anti–pinch serial link
When ignition switch is ON or power
window timer operates
F
PIIA2344E
Security indicator lamp
Goes off → illuminates (Every 2.4
seconds)
G/O
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
48
R/Y
Rear door switch LH (Crew
Cab)
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
G
Battery voltage → 0
23
H
Battery voltage → 0
BL
Front door switch LH
47
SB
Rear door switch upper LH
(King Cab)
Door close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0
J
Rear door switch lower LH
(King Cab)
57
Y/R
67
B
70
W/B
Power source (BAT)
—
Battery voltage
Ground
—
0
Power source (BAT)
—
Battery voltage
K
Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Terminal
Wire
Color
38
B
39
EIS004AI
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
—
0
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
45
G/W
Horn relay
When doors locks are operated
using keyfob (OFF → ON) *1
Battery voltage → 0
0V
L
Headlamp low (LH)
Lighting switch 2ND
position
OFF
52
ON
Battery voltage
0V
R/Y
Headlamp low (RH)
Lighting switch 2ND
position
OFF
54
ON
Battery voltage
0V
G
Headlamp high (LH)
Lighting switch HIGH
or PASS position
OFF
55
ON
Battery voltage
L/W *2
Y *3
0V
Headlamp high (RH)
Lighting switch HIGH
or PASS position
OFF
56
ON
Battery voltage
59
B
Item
Ground
Revision: October 2004
—
BL-109
L
M
0
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
*1: when horn reminder is ON.
*2: L/W is for USA.
*3: Y is for Canada.
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS004AJ
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
BBIA0369E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
Revision: October 2004
BL-110
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
5.
Touch “BCM”.
If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
6.
Touch “THEFT ALM” on the “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
E
F
G
LIIA0034E
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
H
BL
J
BCIA0031E
K
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM
Data Monitor
Monitored Item
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
KEYLESS UNLOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS LOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
CDL LOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
Revision: October 2004
L
Description
BL-111
M
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Active Test
Test Item
Description
THEFT IND
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HEADLAMP (HI)
This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The highbeam headlamps will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support
Test Item
Description
SECURITY ALARM SET
This mode can confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting.
THEFT ALM TRG
The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and
erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR”
on CONSULT-II screen.
Trouble Diagnosis
EIS004AK
WORK FLOW
WIIA0599E
●
●
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” Diagnosis refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .
“REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” Diagnosis refer to BL-53, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-112
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Preliminary Check
EIS004AL
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
A
Confirm BCM Configuration for "THEFT ALARM" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Change BCM Configuration for "THEFT ALARM" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
2. CHECK SYSTEM OPERATION
B
C
D
The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED
in the following flow chart.
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1057E
>> After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart. Refer to BL-114, "Symptom Chart" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-113
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Symptom Chart
EIS004AM
PROCEDURE
Diagnostic procedure
SYMPTOM
Door switch
Refer to BL-115, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" , BL-116, "Door Switch
Check (Crew Cab)" .
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Refer to BL-121, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check" .
1
Vehicle security
system cannot be
set by ····
Lock/unlock switch
Door outside key
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
Refer to BL-119, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)" , BL-120, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)" .
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
Security indicator does not turn “ON”.
Refer to BL-118, "Security Indicator Lamp Check" .
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
2
*1 Vehicle security system does
not alarm when
····
Any door is opened.
Refer to BL-115, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" , BL-116, "Door Switch
Check (Crew Cab)" .
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Refer to BL-121, "Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check" .
3
Vehicle security
alarm does not
activate.
Horn alarm
Head lamp alarm
If the above systems are “OK”, check horn system.
Refer to WW-37, "HORN" .
Refer to BL-121, "Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check" .
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
4
Vehicle security
system cannot be
canceled by ····
Door outside key
Refer to BL-119, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)" , BL-120, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)" .
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
Keyfob
Check remote keyless entry function
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
*1 : Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
Revision: October 2004
BL-114
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Door Switch Check (King Cab)
EIS004AN
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer
to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
●
C
:ON
:ON
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
D
:OFF
:OFF
E
PIIA6222E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 47 and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
Item
M19
Door
switches LH
47 (SB)
Door
switches RH
12 (R/L)
M18
(+)
(–)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
BL
J
LIIA1174E
4.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear
upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, and 47.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
1 (SB) - 47 (SB)
1 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH),
B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear
upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal
1 and ground.
2 (SB or R/L) - Ground
1 (SB or R/L) - Ground
:Continuity should not exist
:Continuity should not exist
LIIA1175E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
F
G
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
B
BL-115
2005 Titan
L
M
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
Disconnect door switch.
Check continuity between door switch terminals.
Item
Terminal
Door switches
(front)
2–3
Door switches (rear
upper and lower)
1–2
Condition
Continuity
Open
No
Closed
Yes
Open
No
Closed
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0595E
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
EIS004AO
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
●
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
PIIA6222E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
Front door
switch LH
M19
M18
Rear door
switch LH
(+)
(–)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
47 (SB)
48 (R/Y)
Ground
Front door
switch RH
12 (R/L)
Rear door
switch RH
13 (GR)
LIIA1177E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
BL-116
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
2 (R/Y) - 48 (R/Y)
2 (GR) - 13 (GR)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116
(Rear RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48.
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
:Continuity should exist
C
D
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH),
B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and
ground.
2 (SB, R/L, R/Y or GR) Ground
B
E
:Continuity should not exist
LIIA1178E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
H
Disconnect door switch harness.
Check continuity between door switch connector terminals.
Item
Door switch (front
and rear)
Terminal
2 – Ground
Condition
Continuity
Open
Yes
Closed
No
BL
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Check door switch case ground condition.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
K
LIIA1179E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-117
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Security Indicator Lamp Check
EIS004AP
1. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-II
Check "THEFT IND” in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
PIIA7005E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect BCM.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
23 and ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
M18
(+)
(-)
23 (G/O)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Security indicator lamp is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0523E
2. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
Check indicator lamp condition.
Refer to BL-97, "Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (King Cab)" , BL-104, "Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Crew
Cab)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace indicator lamp.
3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and combination meter (security indicator
lamp) harness connector M24 terminal 28.
23 (G/O) - 28 (G/O)
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between combination
meter (security indicator lamp) and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1058E
Revision: October 2004
BL-118
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab)
EIS004AQ
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
A
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in
DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
KEY CYL LK-SW
B
C
: ON
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
●
KEY CYL UN-SW
D
: ON
E
LIIA0188E
F
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
(–)
6 (L)
D7
Condition
Ground
7 (R)
G
H
BL
J
LIIA1256E
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch off.
Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
1–5
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
6–5
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
ground circuit.
● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0323E
dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock
actuator LH (key cylinder switch LH).
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-119
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
EIS004AR
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in
DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
KEY CYL LK-SW
: ON
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
●
KEY CYL UN-SW
: ON
LIIA0188E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire
color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
(–)
4 (L)
D7
Condition
Ground
6 (R)
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
LIIA0566E
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch off.
Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
1–5
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
6–5
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following.
● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
ground circuit.
● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0323E
dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock
actuator LH (key cylinder switch LH).
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
BL-120
2005 Titan
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Vehicle Security Horn Alarm Check
EIS004AS
1. CHECK HORN OPERATION
A
Check if horn sounds with horn switch.
Does horn operate?
YES >> Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and horn relay.
NO
>> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-37, "HORN" .
Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check
B
C
EIS004AT
1. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION
D
Check if headlamps operate with lighting switch.
Do headlamps come on when turning switch ON?
YES >> Headlamp alarm is OK.
NO
>> Check headlamp system. Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" .
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check
E
EIS004AU
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
F
Check if power door lock operates with door lock/unlock switch.
Do doors lock/unlock when using each door lock/unlock switch?
YES >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NO
>> Refer to BL-121, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check" .
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-121
2005 Titan
DOOR
DOOR
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:80100
EIS004AV
KING CAB
WIIA0332E
Revision: October 2004
BL-122
2005 Titan
DOOR
CREW CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
WIIA0333E
FRONT DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
K
Remove the front fender. Refer to EI-23, "Removal and Installation" .
Loosen the hinge bolts. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust.
L
REAR DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
Remove the center pillar upper garnish. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" .
Accessing from inside the vehicle, loosen the nuts. Open the rear door, and raise the rear door at rear end
to adjust.
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1.
Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
Striker Bolts
:16.6 N·m (1.7 kg–m, 12 ft–lb)
LIIA1621E
Revision: October 2004
BL-123
2005 Titan
M
DOOR
Removal and Installation
EIS004AW
KING CAB
Front Door
CAUTION:
●
When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to
protect the door and body.
●
When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
●
Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
1. Remove the front door glass and regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" .
2. Remove the door harness.
3. Remove the check link cover.
4. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar.
LIIA1503E
5.
Remove the door-side hinge nuts and bolts, and remove the
door assembly.
LIIA1504E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door
CAUTION:
●
When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to
protect the door and body.
●
When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
●
Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
1. Remove the door glass. Refer to GW-91, "SIDE WINDOW GLASS" .
2. Remove the speaker.
3. Remove the door handles and latch assembly. Refer to BL-130, "Component Structure" .
4. Remove the check link.
5. Remove the wire harness.
Revision: October 2004
BL-124
2005 Titan
DOOR
6. Remove the door assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Door hinge nuts
Check link bolt
A
: 24.5 N·m (2.5 kg–m, 18 ft–lb)
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg–m, 45 in–lb)
B
C
D
E
F
G
WIIA0334E
CREW CAB
H
CAUTION:
●
When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to
protect the door and body.
●
When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
BL
●
Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
1. Remove the door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" .
J
2. Remove the inner seal.
3. Remove the door window and regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" , GW-88, "REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
K
4. Remove the door harness.
5. Remove the check link cover.
6. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar.
L
M
LIIA1503E
Revision: October 2004
BL-125
2005 Titan
DOOR
7.
Remove the door-side hinge nuts and bolts, and the door
assembly.
LIIA1504E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
BL-126
2005 Titan
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
PFP:80502
A
EIS004AY
B
C
D
E
F
G
LIIA1331E
1.
Grommet
2.
Outside handle bracket
3.
Key cylinder rod (Driver side only)
4.
Front gasket
5.
Lock knob cable
6.
Inside handle
7.
Door lock rocker switch
8.
Screw cap
9.
Inside handle cable
10. Outside handle cable
11. Door lock assembly
12. Striker
13. Outside handle
14. Door key cylinder assembly (Driver
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (Passenger side)
15. Rear gasket
H
BL
J
Removal and Installation
EIS004AZ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front door window and front door regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR
GLASS REGULATOR" .
Remove the front door window rear glass run.
Remove the door side grommet, and the bolt (TORX T30) from
the grommet hole.
Torx bolt
K
L
5.3 N·m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
M
PIIA3553E
Revision: October 2004
BL-127
2005 Titan
FRONT DOOR LOCK
4.
While pulling the outside handle, remove the door key cylinder
assembly or escutcheon.
PIIA3554E
5.
6.
Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped).
While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward rear of vehicle to
remove.
LIIA0532E
7.
Remove the front and rear gaskets.
PIIA3557E
8.
Remove the TORX bolts (T30), and the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts
7.5 N·m (0.77 kg-m, 00 in-lb)
PIIA1090E
Revision: October 2004
BL-128
2005 Titan
FRONT DOOR LOCK
9.
While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear
of vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly.
A
B
C
PIIA3558E
D
10. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
11. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside
handle bracket.
E
F
G
PIIA5059E
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
Disassembly and Assembly
BL
EIS004B0
DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
J
K
L
M
PIIA4136E
Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder.
Revision: October 2004
BL-129
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
PFP:82502
EIS004B1
KING CAB
WIIA0335E
1.
Rear upper door lock striker
2.
Rear door handle
3.
Rear lower door lock striker
4.
Lower latch cable
5.
Rear lower door latch
6.
Rear door lock assembly
7.
Rear inside door handle
8.
Upper latch cable
9.
Rear upper door latch
Revision: October 2004
BL-130
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR LOCK
CREW CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
WIIA0336E
1.
Rear inside door handle
2.
Rear door lock knob
3.
Lock knob cable
4.
Inside handle cable
5.
Rear door lock/remote control
assembly
6.
Outside handle cable
Removal and Installation
M
EIS004B2
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to GW-88, "Rear Door Glass" .
Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from
the grommet hole.
Torx bolt
5.3 N·m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
PIIA3553E
Revision: October 2004
BL-131
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR LOCK
3.
While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle
escutcheon.
LIIA1971E
4.
While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove.
LIIA0532E
5.
Remove the front and rear gaskets.
PIIA3557E
6.
7.
Remove the inside handle screws.
Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts
6.0 N·m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb)
PIIA1090E
Revision: October 2004
BL-132
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR LOCK
8.
While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle
to remove outside handle bracket and door lock assembly.
A
B
C
PIIA3558E
D
9.
Disconnect the outside handle cable.
E
F
G
PIIA5059E
INSTALLATION
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-133
2005 Titan
TAIL GATE
TAIL GATE
Removal and Installation
PFP:93400
EIS004B3
WIIA0576E
1.
Rear gate liner cover (if equipped)
2.
Rear gate inner panel
3.
Rear gate rubber bumper
4.
Rear gate stay assembly
5.
Washer
6.
Rear gate cover
7.
Rear gate hinge assembly (RH),
body side
8.
Rear gate ring (RH)
9.
Rear gate hinge assembly (RH),
gate side
10. Rear gate
11. Rear gate handle
12. Rear gate lock cylinder
13. Rear gate hinge assembly (LH),
gate side
14. Rear gate ring (LH)
15. Rear gate hinge assembly (LH),
body side
16. Rear gate control assembly
17. Rubber bumper
18. Rear gate latch assembly (RH & LH)
19. Gas stay
20. Gas stay bracket
Revision: October 2004
BL-134
2005 Titan
TAIL GATE
GAS STAY
Removal
A
WARNING:
The gas stay is under high pressure. Remove the gas stay only with the tailgate fully closed. Injury
may result if the gas stay is removed when the tailgate is open.
1. Remove the RH rear combination lamp assembly. Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove the gas stay.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
LIIA1984E
Installation
J
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-135
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28591
EIS004B4
WIIA0582E
Revision: October 2004
BL-136
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
System Description
EIS004B5
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) has the following immobilizer functions:
●
Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose IDs have been registered into the ECM and BCM, allow the
engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS
(NATS).
NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS
(NATS).
●
All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS)
components.
●
The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
●
When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON
position.
●
NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS)
ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software.
When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically
NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs
can be carried out.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer
to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
●
When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator
Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID, it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EIS004B6
The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
●
NATS ignition key
●
NATS antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder
●
Body control module (BCM)
●
Engine control module (ECM)
●
Security indicator
NOTE:
The communication between ECM and BCM uses the CAN communication system.
BL
J
K
L
M
PIIA1121E
Revision: October 2004
BL-137
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
ECM Re-communicating Function
EIS004B7
The following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only when the
ECM has been replaced with a new one which has never been energized on-board.
(In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-II is not necessary)
NOTE:
●
When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-II
Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
●
If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work.
●
Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID.
1. Install ECM.
2. Using a registered key (*1), turn ignition switch to ON.
*1: To perform this step, use the key (except for card plate key) that has been used before performing
ECM replacement.
3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
5. Start engine.
If engine can be started, procedure is completed.
If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS and initialize control
unit.
Revision: October 2004
BL-138
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Wiring Diagram — NATS —
EIS004B8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0770E
Revision: October 2004
BL-139
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
Terminal
Wire
Color
21
G
23
Item
EIS004B9
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Just after turning ignition switch
ON: Pointer of tester should move.
NATS antenna amp.
Ignition switch (OFF → ON)
G/O
Security indicator lamp
Goes OFF → illuminates (Every 2.4
seconds)
25
BR
NATS antenna amp.
Ignition switch (OFF → ON)
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON or START)
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
57
Y/R
Power source (Fuse)
—
Battery voltage
67
B
Ground
—
0
70
W/B
Power source (Fusible link)
—
Battery voltage
CONSULT-II
Battery voltage → 0
Just after turning ignition switch
ON: Pointer of tester should move.
EIS004BA
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.
Program card
3.
: NATS (AEN02C-1)
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BBIA0369E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START”.
PBR455D
Revision: October 2004
BL-140
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
6.
Touch "OTHER"
A
B
C
LIIA0556E
D
7.
Select “NATS V.5.0”.
If “NATS V5.0” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
E
F
G
SEL027X
8.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual
NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
H
BL
J
SEL150X
K
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE
Description
L
C/U INITIALIZATION
When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all
NATS ignition keys are necessary.
[(NATS ignition key/ BCM/ ECM]
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart.
Refer to BL-142, "NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART" .
NOTE:
●
When any initialization is performed, all IDs previously registered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys
must be registered again.
●
The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE
OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen.
●
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration
procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
Revision: October 2004
BL-141
2005 Titan
M
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
PIIA1124E
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART
Detected items
[NVIS (NATS) program card screen
terms]
P No. Code
(Self-diagnostic
result of
“ENGINE”)
Malfunction is detected when.....
Reference
page
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
[P1612]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1612
Communication impossible between ECM and BCM
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
not malfunctioning.
Refer to
BL-146 .
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
[P1615]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1615
BCM can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
verification between key ID and BCM is NG.
Refer to
BL-147 .
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
[P1614]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1614
BCM cannot receive the key ID signal.
Refer to
BL-150 .
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
[P1611]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1611
The result of ID verification between BCM and ECM is
NG. System initialization is required.
Refer to
BL-148 .
When the starting operation is carried out five or more
times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS
(NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the
engine from being started.
Refer to
BL-149 .
LOCK MODE
[P1610]
DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG
Revision: October 2004
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610
—
●
Unregistered ignition key is used.
●
BCM or ECM’s malfunctioning.
All engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble
code has been detected in ECM.
Refer to
BL-143 .
BL-142
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Work Flow
EIS004BB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1152E
Revision: October 2004
BL-143
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS004BC
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1
Self-diagnosis related item
Symptom
Displayed “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
[P1612]
●
Security indicator
lighting up*
●
Engine cannot be
started
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
[P1615]
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
[P1614]
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
[P1611]
Security indicator lighting up*
Diagnostic Procedure
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 1
(BL-146 )
PROCEDURE 2
(BL-147 )
PROCEDURE 5
(BL-150 )
PROCEDURE 3
(BL-148 )
LOCK MODE
[P1610]
PROCEDURE 4
(BL-149 )
DON'T ERASE
BEFORE CHECKING
ENG DIAG
WORK FLOW
(BL-143 )
System
(Malfunctioning part or
mode)
Reference Part No. Of
Illustration On System
Diagram
In rare case, “CHAIN OF
ECM-IMMU” might be
stored during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning.
—
Open circuit in battery
voltage line of BCM circuit
C1
Open circuit in ignition
line of BCM circuit
C2
Open circuit in ground
line of BCM circuit
C3
Open or short circuit
between BCM and ECM
communication line
C4
ECM
B
BCM
A
Unregistered key
D
BCM
A
Malfunction of key ID
chip
E5
Communication line
between ANT/ AMP and
BCM:
Open circuit or short circuit of battery voltage
line or ground line
E1
E2
Open circuit in power
source line of ANT/ AMP
circuit
E3
Open circuit in ground
line of ANT/ AMP circuit
E4
NATS antenna amp.
E6
BCM
A
System initialization has
not yet been completed.
F
ECM
B
LOCK MODE
D
Engine trouble data and
NVIS (NATS) trouble
data have been detected
in ECM
—
*: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
Revision: October 2004
BL-144
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2
A
Non self-diagnosis related item
Symptom
Security indicator does not light
up*.
Diagnostic Procedure
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 6
(BL-153 )
System
(Malfunctioning part or mode)
Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram
B
Combination meter (security
indictor lamp)
—
Open circuit between Fuse and
BCM
—
BCM
A
C
*: CONSULT-II self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”.
D
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
E
F
G
H
BL
J
LIIA0557E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-145
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Diagnostic Procedure 1
EIS004BD
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “BCM” with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of “BCM”. Refer to BL-140, "CONSULT-II"
.
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU”
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key
registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
PIIA1260E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR BCM
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 and
ground.
70 (W/B) – Ground
:Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 50A fusible link (letter f , located in fuse and fusible
link box)
● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM
connector
Ref. Part No. C1
LIIA1279E
3. CHECK IGN SWITCH ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 38 and
ground.
38 (W/L) – Ground
:Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box]
● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM
connector
Ref. part No. C2
Revision: October 2004
BL-146
LIIA0527E
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BCM
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 67 and ground.
67 (B) – Ground
B
:Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness. Ref. part No. C3
C
D
LIIA1040E
E
5. REPLACE BCM
F
1.
2.
Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> BCM is malfunctioning.
No
>> ● ECM is malfunctioning.
● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
● Perform initialization or re-communicating function.
● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
● For re-communicating function, refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Diagnostic Procedure 2
G
H
BL
EIS004BE
J
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
K
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY”
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
L
M
PIIA1261E
Revision: October 2004
BL-147
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/
NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with reregistered NATS ignition key?
Yes
>> ● Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No
>> ● BCM is malfunctioning.
● Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Ref. part No. A
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
SEL297W
● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation
Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Diagnostic Procedure 3
EIS004BF
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”:
Registered ID of BCM is in discord with that of ECM.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
PIIA1262E
2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> ● Start engine. (END)
● (System initialization had not been completed. Ref.
part No. F )
No
>> ● ECM is malfunctioning.
● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Revision: October 2004
BL-148
SEL297W
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Diagnostic Procedure 4
EIS004BG
A
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
B
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed
on CONSULT-II screen.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
C
D
E
PIIA1264E
2. ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE
F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes
>> System is OK (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”). Clear all codes.
No
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
BL
3. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
J
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows the message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> System is OK.
No
>> GO TO 4.
K
L
M
SEL297W
Revision: October 2004
BL-149
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
4. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN
1.
2.
Replace BCM.
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows the message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> System is OK. (BCM is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A )
No
>> ● ECM is malfunctioning.
● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation
Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Diagnostic Procedure 5
SEL297W
EIS004BH
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
PIIA1263E
2. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION
Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to BL-154, "How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp." .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly.
3. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP
Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> ● Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
● Replace the ignition key.
Ref. part No, E5
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
No
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
BL-150
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP.
A
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal
1 and ground.
1 (W) – Ground
B
:Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
LIIA1280E
5. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 1
E
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal
2 and ground with analog tester.
2 (G) - Ground
Before inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
Voltage: Battery voltage
After inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
: Pointer of tester should move for 30
seconds, then return to battery voltage.
Just after turning ignition switch ON
: Pointer of tester should move for
approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage.
F
G
H
LIIA1281E
BL
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> ● Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to
“CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-151
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
6. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 2
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal
4 and ground with analog tester.
4 (BR) - Ground
Before inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
Voltage: Battery voltage
After inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
: Pointer of tester should move for 30
seconds, then return to battery voltage.
Just after turning ignition switch ON
: Pointer of tester should move for
approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage.
LIIA1282E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> ● Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to
“CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
7. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector.
Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. connector M21
terminal 3 and ground.
3 (B) – Ground
:Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> ● NATS antenna amp. is malfunctioning.
Ref. part No. E6
NG
>> ● Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization
with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Revision: October 2004
BL-152
LIIA1283E
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Diagnostic Procedure 6
EIS004BI
A
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP
1. CHECK FUSE
B
Check 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
NOTE:
Refer to BL-136, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
C
D
2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the combination meter (security indicator lamp) lights up.
E
Security indicator lamp should light up.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
3. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector.
Check voltage between combination meter (security indicator
lamp) connector M24 terminal 8 and ground.
8 (Y/R) – Ground
H
BL
:Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
LIIA1072E
4. CHECK BCM (NATS CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
L
Connect combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and
ground.
23 (G/O) – Ground
M
:Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> BCM is malfunctioning.
● Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Ref. part No. A
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
LIIA0523E
● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation
Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
NG
>> Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between combination meter (security indicator lamp) and BCM
(NATS control unit).
● Indicator lamp condition
Revision: October 2004
BL-153
2005 Titan
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp.
EIS004BJ
NOTE:
●
If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS)
system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS
on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN
OF IMMU-KEY”.
●
Initialization is not necessary only when NATS antenna
amp. is replaced with a new one.
SIIA1683E
Revision: October 2004
BL-154
2005 Titan
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV —
PFP:96401
A
EIS0061Z
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0759E
Revision: October 2004
BL-155
2005 Titan
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS00620
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver.
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.)
operates with original, hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at fault, not vehicle
related.
1. ILLUMINATE CHECK
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Does amber light (LED) of transmitter illuminate when any button is pressed?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
●
●
LIIA1466E
2. TRANSMITTER CHECK
Check transmitter with Tool.*
*For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
OK or NG
OK
>> Receiver or handheld transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related.
NG
>> Replace transmitter.
3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY
Does room lamp come on when driver side door is opened? Refer to LT-126, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" .
Yes or No?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the compass and thermometer assembly.
4. POWER SUPPLY CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect transmitter.
Check voltage between Homelink® universal transceiver connector R106 terminal 1 and ground.
1 (Y/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1467E
Revision: October 2004
BL-156
2005 Titan
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
5. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
A
Check continuity between Homelink® universal transceiver connector R106 terminal 2 (B) and body ground.
2 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace compass and thermometer assembly.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
LIIA2039E
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-157
2005 Titan
CAB AND REAR BODY
CAB AND REAR BODY
Body Mounting, King Cab
PFP:93020
EIS004BM
When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all
mounting).
LIIA1622E
Frame to Cab bolts
Revision: October 2004
: 87.5 N·m (8.9 kg-m, 65 ft-lb)
BL-158
2005 Titan
CAB AND REAR BODY
Body Mounting, Crew Cab
EIS004BN
When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all
mounting).
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
LIIA1623E
Frame to Cab bolts
K
: 87.5 N·m (8.9 kg-m, 65 ft-lb)
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-159
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
BODY REPAIR
Body Exterior Paint Color
PFP:60100
EIS004BO
LIIA1192E
Color code
A15
A20
B18
C10
D13
G10
K11
K12
Q10
Red
Brawn
Red
Alert
Deep
Water
Copper
Canteen
Galaxy
Smoke
Radiant
Silver
Blizzard
Paint type
M
M
M
M
M
2P
M
M
2S
Clear coat
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Body color
A15
A20
B18
C10
D13
G10
K11
K12
Q10
End
caps
Body color
A15
A20
B18
C10
D13
G10
K11
K12
Q10
Center
Chrome
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
A15
A20
B18
C10
D13
G10
K11
K12
Q10
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Black
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
KH3
XE
Body color
A15
A20
B18
C10
D13
G10
K11
K12
Q10
SE and LE
Chrome
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Description
Component
1
Outside
mirror
Black
XE
SE and LE
XE
2
3
4
5
Front
bumper
Outside
handles
Radiator grille
Rear
Bumper
SE and
LE
Chrome
XE
Black
SE and LE
Chrome
XE
Body color
SE and
LE
Center
Chrome
Grid
M: Metallic; 2S: 2-Coat Solid, 2P: 2-Coat Pearl; 3P: 3-Coat Pearl; t: New Cross Linking Clear Coat
Revision: October 2004
BL-160
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Body Component Parts
EIS004BP
A
UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1209E
Revision: October 2004
BL-161
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Rear floor
Rear seat crossmember
4th crossmember
Rear floor reinforcement assembly
Front seat mounting crossmember
Sill inner extension RH, LH)
Front floor reinforcement
Inner sill (RH, LH)
2nd crossmember extension (RH, LH)
Front floor
2nd crossmember assembly
Dash side (RH, LH)
Hoodledge assembly (RH, LH)
Harness bracket
Hoodledge front reinforcement (LH)
Battery mounting reinforcement (RH)
1st body mounting bracket (LH)
Hoodledge reinforcement (RH, LH)
Rear hoodledge reinforcement (RH, LH)
Cowl top
Cowl top extension
Upper dash assembly
Revision: October 2004
BL-162
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
KING CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0325E
Revision: October 2004
BL-163
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Side panel assembly (RH, LH)
Inner side panel assembly (RH, LH)
Rear strut assembly (RH, LH)
Inner rear strut assembly (RH, LH)
Rear gate
Tail floor bolster assembly
Rear body floor assembly
Front outer strut assembly (RH, LH)
Rear roof rail
Inner lock pillar (RH, LH)
Back panel assembly
Outer lock pillar reinforcement (RH, LH)
Body side outer (RH, LH)
Rear door assembly (RH, LH)
Front door assembly (RH, LH)
Front fender (RH, LH)
Hood
Dash side (RH, LH)
Front pillar brace (RH, LH)
Outer sill reinforcement (RH, LH)
Inner upper front pillar (RH, LH)
Inner roof side rail (RH,LH)
Roof
Upper front pillar reinforcement (RH, LH)
Front roof rail
No. 1 roof bow
Header panel
Revision: October 2004
BL-164
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CREW CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0326E
Revision: October 2004
BL-165
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Rear strut assembly (RH, LH)
Inner rear strut assembly (RH, LH)
Rear gate
Rear body floor assembly
Tail floor bolster assembly
Inner side panel assembly (RH, LH)
Side panel assembly (RH, LH)
Front outer strut assembly (RH, LH)
Rear roof rail
Inner lock pillar (RH, LH)
Back panel assembly
Outer lock pillar reinforcement (RH, LH)
Body side outer (RH, LH)
Rear door assembly (RH, LH)
Front door assembly (RH, LH)
Front fender (RH, LH)
Hood
Hoodledge rear reinforcement (RH, LH)
Front pillar brace (RH, LH)
Outer sill reinforcement (RH, LH)
Inner upper front pillar (RH, LH)
Inner roof side rail (RH,LH)
Inner center pillar (RH, LH)
Upper front pillar reinforcement (RH, LH)
Lower center pillar brace (RH, LH)
Front roof rail
Sunroof frame
No. 2 roof bow
Standard roof
Roof with sunroof opening
Header panel
Revision: October 2004
BL-166
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
FRAME COMPONENT PARTS
King Cab
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
LIIA1624E
K
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Front differential mounting bracket RH/LH
1st cab mounting bracket RH/LH
Front side member extension assembly RH/LH
1st crossmember assembly
Front upper link mounting bracket RH/LH
Panhard rod bracket reinforcement
Bound bumper bracket RH/LH
Front brake hose bracket RH/LH
Front shock absorber bracket RH/LH
Panhard rod reinforcement
4th crossmember gusset RH/LH
2nd cab mounting bracket RH/LH
3rd cab mounting reinforcement
3rd cab mounting bracket RH/LH
1st rear body mounting bracket RH/LH
Rear spring front bracket assembly RH/LH
2nd rear body mounting bracket RH/LH
Rear bound bumper bracket RH/LH
Rear bound bumper reinforcement RH/LH
Revision: October 2004
BL-167
L
M
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Rear spring rear bracket assembly RH/LH
5th rear body mounting reinforcement bracket RH/LH
9th crossmember assembly
Exhaust bracket assembly
8th crossmember assembly
Rear shock absorber bracket assembly RH/LH
Canister bracket, RH
Canister bracket, LH
7th crossmember assembly
6th crossmember assembly
5th crossmember assembly
4th crossmember assembly
3rd crossmember assembly
2nd crossmember assembly
Frame assembly
Crew Cab
LIIA1625E
1.
2.
3.
4.
Front differential mounting bracket RH/LH
1st cab mounting bracket RH/LH
Front side member extension assembly RH/LH
1st crossmember assembly
Revision: October 2004
BL-168
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Front upper link mounting bracket RH/LH
Panhard rod bracket reinforcement
Bound bumper bracket RH/LH
Front brake hose bracket RH/LH
Front shock absorber bracket RH/LH
Panhard rod reinforcement
4th crossmember gusset RH/LH
2nd cab mounting bracket RH/LH
3rd cab mounting bracket RH/LH
4th cab mounting bracket RH/LH
Rear spring front bracket assembly RH/LH
2nd rear body mounting bracket RH/LH
Rear bound bumper bracket RH/LH
Rear bound bumper reinforcement RH/LH
Rear spring rear bracket assembly RH/LH
5th rear body mounting reinforcement bracket RH/LH
9th crossmember assembly
Exhaust bracket assembly
8th crossmember assembly
Rear shock absorber bracket assembly RH/LH
Canister bracket, RH
Canister bracket, LH
7th crossmember assembly
6th crossmember assembly
5th crossmember assembly
4th crossmember assembly
3rd crossmember assembly
2nd crossmember assembly
Frame assembly
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-169
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Corrosion Protection
EIS004BQ
DESCRIPTION
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-corrosive measures.
ANTI-CORROSIVE PRECOATED STEEL (GALVANNEALED STEEL)
To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anticorrosive precoated steel sheet has been adopted replacing conventional zinc-coated steel sheet.
Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron
alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance
with cationic electrode position primer.
PIIA0093E
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that
GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory.
PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION PRIMER
A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrode position primer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are employed on all body components.
CAUTION:
Confine paint removal during welding operations to an absolute
minimum.
PIIA0095E
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built
into the vehicle at the factory.
Revision: October 2004
BL-170
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX
To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas of
the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelf
life.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1210E
Revision: October 2004
BL-171
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
UNDERCOATING
The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chipping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating which is rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.
Precautions in undercoating
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three
way catalyst which are subjected to heat).
Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts which become hot.
Do not undercoat rotating parts.
Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.
LIIA1211E
Revision: October 2004
BL-172
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Body Sealing
EIS004BR
A
DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant which has been applied to these
areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-173
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.
LIIA1303E
Revision: October 2004
BL-174
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1315E
Revision: October 2004
BL-175
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1316E
Revision: October 2004
BL-176
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Body Construction
EIS004BS
A
BODY CONSTRUCTION
King Cab
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1317E
Revision: October 2004
BL-177
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Crew Cab
LIIA1318E
Revision: October 2004
BL-178
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Body Alignment
EIS004BT
BODY CENTER MARKS
A
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-179
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
WIIA0327E
Revision: October 2004
BL-180
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS
A mark has been placed on each body panel to indicate the parts matching positions. When repairing parts
damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle structure (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-181
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
WIIA0338E
Revision: October 2004
BL-182
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
DESCRIPTION
●
●
●
●
●
●
All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.
When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge
itself to make sure there is no free play.
When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other
side is symmetrically the same value.
The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of "X", "Y"
and "Z".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
LIIA1506E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-183
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MEASUREMENT
WIIA0551E
Revision: October 2004
BL-184
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0279E
Revision: October 2004
BL-185
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
UNDERBODY
MEASUREMENT
LIIA1213E
Revision: October 2004
BL-186
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0577E
Revision: October 2004
BL-187
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
WIIA0340E
Revision: October 2004
BL-188
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
MEASUREMENT
A
Windshield Opening
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
LIIA1289E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-189
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
King Cab Door Opening
LIIA1290E
Crew Cab Door Opening
LIIA1291E
Revision: October 2004
BL-190
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Rear Window Opening
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1292E
Revision: October 2004
BL-191
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
LIIA1300E
Revision: October 2004
BL-192
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1321E
Revision: October 2004
BL-193
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1322E
Revision: October 2004
BL-194
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
REAR BODY
MEASUREMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
LIIA1295E
J
K
L
M
LIIA1296E
Revision: October 2004
BL-195
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
King Cab Bed Opening
LIIA1293E
Crew Cab Bed Opening
LIIA1294E
Revision: October 2004
BL-196
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Measurement Points
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1334E
Revision: October 2004
BL-197
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Handling Precautions for Plastics
Abbreviation
Material name
EIS004BU
Heat resisting
temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance to gasoline and
solvents
Other cautions
PE
Polyethylene
60 (140)
Gasoline and most solvents are
harmless if applied for a very
short time (wipe up quickly).
Flammable
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
80 (176)
Same as above.
Poison gas is emitted
when burned.
EPM/
EPDM
Ethylene Propylene (Diene) rubber
80 (176)
Same as above.
Flammable
TPO/
TPR
Thermoplastic Olefine/
Thermoplastic Rubber
80 (176)
Same as above.
Flammable
PP
Polypropylene
90 (194)
Same as above.
Flammable, avoid battery acid.
UP
Polyester thermoset
90 (194)
Same as above.
Flammable
PS
Polystyrene
80 (176)
Avoid solvents.
Flammable
ABS
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
resin
80 (176)
Avoid gasoline and solvents.
AES
Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene
80 (176)
Same as above.
PMMA
Polymethyl Methacrylate
85 (185)
Same as above.
AAS
Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene
85 (185)
Same as above.
AS
Acrylonitrile Styrene
85 (185)
Same as above.
EVA
Polyvinyl Ethyl Acetate
90 (194)
Same as above.
ASA
Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate
100 (222)
Same as above.
PPO/
PPE
Polyphenylene Oxide/
Polyphenylene Ether
110 (230)
Same as above.
PC
Polycarbonate
120 (248)
Same as above.
PAR
Polyacrylate
180 (356)
Same as above.
LLDPE
Lenear Low Density PE
45 (100)
Gasoline and most solvents are
harmless.
PUR
Polyurethane
90 (194)
Same as above.
TPU
Thermoplastic Urethane
110 (230)
Same as above.
PPC
Polypropylene Composite
115 (239)
Same as above.
Flammable
POM
Polyacetal
120 (248)
Same as above.
Avoid battery acid.
PBT+P
C
Polybutylene Terephthalate+Polycarbonate
120 (248)
Same as above.
Flammable
PA
Polyamide (Nylon)
140 (284)
Same as above.
Avoid immersing in water.
PBT
Polybutylene Terephthalate
140 (284)
Same as above.
FRP
Fiber Reinforced Plastics
170 (338)
Same as above.
PET
Polyethylene Terephthalate
180 (356)
Same as above.
PEI
Polyetherimide
200 (392)
Same as above.
Flammable
Flammable
Avoid battery acid.
1.
When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics
(influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them.
2.
Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics.
Revision: October 2004
BL-198
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0350E
Revision: October 2004
BL-199
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
WIIA0351E
Revision: October 2004
BL-200
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel
EIS004BV
High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.
Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:
HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES
Tensile strength
373 N/mm2
(38kg/mm2 ,54klb/sq in)
B
Nissan/Infiniti designation
SP130
Major applicable parts
●
Front inner pillar upper
●
Front pillar hinge brace
●
Outer front pillar reinforcement
●
Other reinforcements
●
Outer sill reinforcement
●
Main back pillar
C
D
2
785-981 N/mm
(80-100kg/mm2
114-142klb/sq in)
A
SP150
E
SP130 is the most commonly used HSS.
SP150 HSS is used only on parts that require much more strength.
Read the following precautions when repairing HSS:
1. Additional points to consider
● The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heating is not recommended since it may weaken the component.
When heating is unavoidable, do not heat HSS parts above
550°C (1,022°F).
Verify heating temperature with a thermometer.
(Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropriate.)
F
G
H
BL
PIIA0115E
J
●
When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any
HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may cause
deformation in adjacent portions of the body. In this case,
increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pull
the HSS panel.
K
L
M
PIIA0116E
●
When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible. Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas
due to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum margin of 50 mm (1.97in).
PIIA0117E
Revision: October 2004
BL-201
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
●
When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possible in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to
heat.
If spot welding is impossible, use M.I.G. welding. Do not use
gas (torch) welding because it is inferior in welding strength.
PIIA0144E
●
●
2.
The spot weld on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary steel panel.
Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a
low speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase
drill bit durability and facilitate the operation.
SP150 HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/
mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2 , 114 to 142 klb/sq in), used as reinforcement in the door guard beams, is too strong to repair.
When these HSS parts are damaged, the outer panels also
sustain substantial damage; therefore, the assembly parts
must be replaced.
PIIA0145E
Precautions in spot welding HSS
This work should be performed under standard working conditions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS:
● The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according
to the metal thickness.
PIIA0146E
●
The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no
gaps.
PIIA0147E
Revision: October 2004
BL-202
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
●
Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.
Unit:mm
Thickness (t)
Minimum pitch ( )
0.6 (0.024)
0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
10 (0.39) or over
12 (0.47) or over
18 (0.71) or over
20 (0.79) or over
27 (1.06) or over
31 (1.22) or over
A
B
C
PIIA0148E
D
Foam Repair
EIS004BW
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the
vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
E
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read
instructions on product for fill procedures.
F
FILL PROCEDURES
1.
–
–
–
–
Fill procedures after installation of service part.
Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
Clean area in which foam was removed.
Install service part.
Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service
part.
G
H
BL
J
K
LIIA1081E
2.
–
–
–
–
Fill procedures before installation of service part.
Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
Clean area in which foam was removed.
Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE:
Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding
flange area.
Install service part.
NOTE:
Refer to label for information on working times.
M
LIIA1082E
Revision: October 2004
BL-203
L
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Replacement Operations
EIS004BX
DESCRIPTION
This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section.
Technicians are also encouraged to read Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the original functions and quality of the vehicle can be maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) contains
additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Technicians
should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repairs.
Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures may not
apply in some regions or countries.
Revision: October 2004
BL-204
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
The symbols used in this section for cutting and welding / brazing operations are shown below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
PIIA0149E
Revision: October 2004
BL-205
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
●
Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is
at position A due to the construction of the vehicle. Refer to the
front pillar section.
PIIA0150E
●
Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating
indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer
front pillar over 60 mm above inner front pillar cut position.
PIIA0151E
●
Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this
will permit service part to be accurately cut at joint position.
PIIA0152E
●
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as follows.
Mark cutting lines.
A: Cut position of outer pillar
B: Cut position of inner pillar
Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar.
Cut outer pillar along groove of jig. (At position A)
Remove jig and cut remaining portions.
Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner.
PIIA0153E
Revision: October 2004
BL-206
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
HOODLEDGE
●
A
Work after radiator core support has been removed.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0341E
Revision: October 2004
BL-207
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
FRONT PILLAR
●
Work after rear hoodledge reinforcement has been removed.
WIIA0342E
Revision: October 2004
BL-208
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1156E
Revision: October 2004
BL-209
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
WIIA0343E
Revision: October 2004
BL-210
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CENTER PILLAR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1159E
Revision: October 2004
BL-211
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1112E
Revision: October 2004
BL-212
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
OUTER SILL
KING CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0344E
Revision: October 2004
BL-213
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1195E
Revision: October 2004
BL-214
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1196E
Revision: October 2004
BL-215
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CREW CAB
LIIA1197E
Revision: October 2004
BL-216
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
REAR CAB PILLAR
KING CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0345E
Revision: October 2004
BL-217
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1201E
Revision: October 2004
BL-218
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CREW CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0346E
Revision: October 2004
BL-219
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
WIIA0347E
Revision: October 2004
BL-220
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
REAR PANEL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1205E
Revision: October 2004
BL-221
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
REAR FLOOR REAR
KING CAB
LIIA1203E
Revision: October 2004
BL-222
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CREW CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0348E
Revision: October 2004
BL-223
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
PICKUP BED
KING CAB
WIIA0349E
Revision: October 2004
BL-224
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1223E
Revision: October 2004
BL-225
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CREW CAB
LIIA1224E
Revision: October 2004
BL-226
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1225E
Revision: October 2004
BL-227
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1215E
Revision: October 2004
BL-228
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1216E
Revision: October 2004
BL-229
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1217E
Revision: October 2004
BL-230
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1218E
Revision: October 2004
BL-231
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1219E
Revision: October 2004
BL-232
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1220E
Revision: October 2004
BL-233
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1221E
Revision: October 2004
BL-234
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
CRUSH HORN
●
A
Work after 1st crossmember has been removed.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
LIIA1083E
Portions to be welded:
A. Inner side rail crush horn, inner side rail crush horn and outer side rail crush horn.
B. Outer side rail crush horn, outer side rail crush horn and inner side rail crush horn.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-235
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Removal Notes
●
Scribe a straight line on the outer side rail crush horn and inner side rail crush horn along the hole center
as shown in the figure.
LIIA1084E
●
Cut off outer side rail crush horn and inner side rail crush horn along scribed line A. Do not cut on the hole.
●
Cut inner side rail crush horn at 45 mm backward cut position of cut line A. (along line B)
LIIA1085E
Revision: October 2004
BL-236
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA1086E
●
After removing outer panel, dress area on the inner panel surface with a sander or equivalent.
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-237
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Installation Notes
LIIA1087E
●
Scribe a straight line on the inner side rail crush horn along the hole center as shown in the figure. Cut off
inner side rail crush horn along scribed line.
LIIA1088E
●
Scribe a straight line on the outer side rail crush horn along the hole center as shown in the figure. Cut off
outer side rail crush horn along scribed line.
Revision: October 2004
BL-238
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
●
Weld part to be butt-welded and seam-welded corner to corner as shown in the figure.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
LIIA1089E
M
Revision: October 2004
BL-239
2005 Titan
BODY REPAIR
Revision: October 2004
BL-240
2005 Titan
F BRAKES
A
B
SECTION
BRAKE SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5
BRAKE PEDAL .......................................................... 6
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 6
INSPECTION ........................................................ 6
ADJUSTMENT ...................................................... 6
Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 9
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
BRAKE FLUID .......................................................... 10
On-board Inspection ............................................... 10
LEVEL CHECK ................................................... 10
Drain and Refill ....................................................... 10
Bleeding Brake System ...........................................11
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE .................................... 12
Hydraulic Circuit ..................................................... 12
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and
Brake Hose ............................................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and
Brake Hose ............................................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Inspection After Installation .................................... 14
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 15
On-board Inspection ............................................... 15
LEAK INSPECTION ............................................ 15
With ABS ................................................................ 15
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 15
Revision: October 2004
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ....................... 16
With ABLS or VDC ................................................. 16
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 17
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ....................... 17
BRAKE BOOSTER ................................................... 18
On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 18
OPERATING CHECK .......................................... 18
AIRTIGHT CHECK .............................................. 18
With ABS or BLSD .................................................. 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 19
INSTALLATION ................................................... 20
With VDC ................................................................ 20
REMOVAL ........................................................... 20
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 21
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
VACUUM LINES ....................................................... 22
Removal and Installation ........................................ 22
Inspection ............................................................... 22
VISUAL INSPECTION ......................................... 22
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION ............................. 22
FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 23
On-vehicle Inspection ............................................. 23
PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 23
Components ........................................................... 23
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad .................. 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc
Rotor ....................................................................... 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper ......... 25
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 25
CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 26
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 26
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 27
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE ................. 27
REAR DISC BRAKE ................................................. 28
On-vehicle Inspection ............................................. 28
BR-1
2005 Titan
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 28
Components ........................................................... 28
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ................... 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 29
INSTALLATION .................................................... 29
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc
Rotor ....................................................................... 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 29
Revision: October 2004
INSTALLATION ....................................................29
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper .........30
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................30
CALIPER INSPECTION .......................................30
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................31
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ...............................31
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE .................32
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......33
General Specifications ............................................33
Brake Pedal ............................................................33
Brake Booster .........................................................33
Check Valve ............................................................33
Front Disc Brake .....................................................33
Rear Disc Brake ......................................................34
BR-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EFS004O0
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
BR
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Brake System
EFS004O1
Always use recommended brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder, disc brake caliper and wheel cylinder, use clean brake fluid.
●
Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube.
●
Always check tightening torque when installing brake lines.
●
Before working, turn ignition switch to OFF and disconnect connectors for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
terminals.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing
drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" .
WARNING:
SBR686C
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe
with a dust collector.
●
Revision: October 2004
BR-3
2005 Titan
H
I
J
K
L
M
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
PFP:00002
EFS004O2
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake
piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
S-NT360
Power tool
Removing front and rear caliper assembly, tires
PBIC0190E
PBIC0191E
Revision: October 2004
BR-4
2005 Titan
Symptom
Revision: October 2004
×
×
×
Shake
×
Shimmy, Shudder
×
×
BR-5
×
×
×
×
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
DIFFERENTIAL
DRIVESHAFT
SUSPENSION
TIRES AND ROAD WHEEL
STEERING
Rotor thickness variation
Rotor rust
Rotor deflection
Rotor deformation
Rotor runout
Rotor damage
Rotor imbalance
Shims damaged
Noise
Pads - uneven wear
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
×
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-27, BR-32
BR-27, BR-32
BR-27, BR-31
BR-27, BR-31
BR-27, BR-31
BR-27, BR-31
BR-27, BR-31
BR-23, BR-28
BR-23, BR-28
BR-23, BR-28
Reference page
Pads - damaged
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
PFP:00003
EFS004O3
A
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
C
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2005 Titan
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BRAKE PEDAL
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment
PFP:46501
EFS004O4
INSPECTION
1.
2.
Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from the lower dash.
Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION:
When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in
the forwardmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal
height measurement.
WFIA0160E
Brake Pedal Specifications
Unit: mm (in)
Free height "H"
: 182.3 - 192.3 (7.18 - 7.57)
Depressed pedal height "D" [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine
running]
: More than 90.3 (3.55)
Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch and
ASCD switch "C1 " or “C2 ”
: 0.74 - 1.96 (0.029 - 0.077)
Pedal play "A"
: 3 - 11 (0.12 - 0.43)
ADJUSTMENT
1.
Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch by turning 45° counterclockwise.
Revision: October 2004
BR-6
2005 Titan
BRAKE PEDAL
2.
Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the
pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock
nut.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is
located inside the clevis.
Lock nut
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
B
: 18.5 N·m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp
switch and the ASCD switch in until threaded ends contact pedal
arm.
With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD
switch contacting the pedal arm, turn the switches 45° clockwise
to lock in place.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the gap (C) between the rubber stops and
switch ends are within specification.
Check the pedal play.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is
released.
Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when
depressing it.
Removal and Installation
C
D
E
BR
G
PFIA0436E
EFS004O5
H
Non-Adjustable Pedals
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0231E
Revision: October 2004
BR-7
2005 Titan
BRAKE PEDAL
1.
Brake pedal assembly
2.
Snap pin
3.
Clip
4.
Stop lamp switch
5.
Pedal pad
6.
Clevis pin
7.
ASCD cancel switch
Adjustable Pedals
WFIA0232E
1.
Brake pedal assembly
2.
Snap pin
3.
Clip
4.
Stop lamp switch
5.
Pedal pad
6.
Clevis pin
7.
ASCD cancel switch
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not deform the brake tube.
CAUTION:
●
Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forwardmost position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals
(adjustable type only).
●
Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
●
Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
●
Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
1. Remove the lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" .
2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch from the pedal assembly.
Revision: October 2004
BR-8
2005 Titan
BRAKE PEDAL
3.
4.
5.
On adjustable pedal assembly, disconnect the adjustable brake
pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor.
● Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to
disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as
shown.
Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster.
Remove mounting nuts and the pedal assembly.
● Temporarily install nuts by hand to support booster.
CAUTION:
● Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake
LBIA0374E
pedals must be in the forwardmost position (closest to
the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type
only).
● Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
● Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
● Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
A
B
C
D
E
BR
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check brake pedal for following items.
●
Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper
●
Clevis pin deformation
●
Crack of any welded portion
●
Brake pedal bend
G
H
I
SBR997
J
INSTALLATION
1.
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
● Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or
releasing the brake pedal.
● Check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking
when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward.
After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and
Adjustment" .
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BR-9
2005 Titan
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
On-board Inspection
PFP:KN100
EFS004O6
LEVEL CHECK
●
●
●
●
Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is within the standard
(between MAX and MIN lines).
Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking lever is
released, check brake system for fluid leakage.
LFIA0225E
Drain and Refill
EFS004O7
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
when splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
●
Before servicing, disconnect actuator connector or battery negative cable.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually
remove brake fluid.
SBR419C
3.
4.
Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill
with new brake fluid.
Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress
pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal.
Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake
fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out.
Bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
SBR995
Revision: October 2004
BR-10
2005 Titan
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
EFS004O8
CAUTION:
While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery
negative cable.
2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve.
3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out.
6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" (front disc brake), BR-28,
"Components" (rear disc brake).
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves.
A
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BR-11
2005 Titan
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Hydraulic Circuit
PFP:46210
EFS004O9
WFIA0291E
1.
Actuator
4.
Connector
2.
Master cylinder
3.
Brake booster
CAUTION:
●
All hoses and piping (tubes) must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
●
Make sure there is no interference with other parts when turning steering both clockwise and
counterclockwise.
●
The brake piping is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble
the parts. Replace applicable part with a new one, if necessary.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
●
When removing components, cover connections so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter gets
in.
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose
EFS004OA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose.
Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket.
Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from cylinder body.
Revision: October 2004
BR-12
2005 Titan
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
INSTALLATION
1.
A
Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on cylinder
body, then install the union bolt.
NOTE:
Do not reuse copper washer.
B
C
LFIA0214E
2.
3.
4.
Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket
with lock plate.
Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using
a flare nut wrench.
Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake
System" .
D
E
BR
G
LFIA0213E
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose
H
EFS004OB
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose.
Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket.
Remove brake hose from cylinder body.
I
J
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install brake hose to cylinder body.
NOTE:
Do not reuse copper washer.
K
Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket
with lock plate.
Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using
a flare nut wrench. Refer to BR-12, "Hydraulic Circuit" .
Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake
System" .
L
M
LFIA0213E
Revision: October 2004
BR-13
2005 Titan
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Inspection After Installation
EFS004OC
CAUTION:
If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the damaged part.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact
with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any damage parts.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lb) with engine running for approximately
5 seconds, check for fluid leakage from each part.
Revision: October 2004
BR-14
2005 Titan
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
On-board Inspection
PFP:46010
A
EFS004OD
LEAK INSPECTION
●
Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections.
With ABS
B
EFS004OE
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
WFIA0379E
1.
Reservoir cap
2.
Fluid level sensor
3.
Grommet
4.
Master cylinder sub-assembly
5.
Reservoir tank
6.
Seal
M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
Disconnect harness connector for fluid level sensor.
Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly.
Remove master cylinder assembly mounting nuts and master cylinder assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
CAUTION:
● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Revision: October 2004
BR-15
2005 Titan
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Adjust brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" .
●
●
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly
CAUTION:
●
Master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
●
Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary.
Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder sub-assembly body.
Assembly
CAUTION:
●
Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
●
Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. Refer
to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse grommet.
2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly.
With ABLS or VDC
EFS004OF
WFIA0378E
1.
Reservoir cap
4.
Master cylinder sub-assembly
7.
Reservoir tank
Revision: October 2004
2.
Fluid level sensor
3.
Grommet
5.
Front pressure sensor
6.
Rear pressure sensor
8.
Seal
BR-16
2005 Titan
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
A
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
Before removing brake brake master cylinder, depress the brake pedal 5-6 times with the key OFF
to deplete vacuum in the booster.
1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
2. Disconnect harness connectors for fluid level sensor and pressure sensors.
3. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly.
4. Remove master cylinder assembly mounting nuts and master cylinder assembly.
B
C
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
CAUTION:
● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
● Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Adjust brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" .
E
BR
G
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly
CAUTION:
●
Master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
●
Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary.
1. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder subassembly body.
2. Remove master cylinder pressure sensors.
H
Assembly
J
CAUTION:
●
Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
●
Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. Refer
to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse grommet.
2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly.
3. Install master cylinder pressure sensors.
Revision: October 2004
BR-17
2005 Titan
I
K
L
M
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:47200
EFS004OG
OPERATING CHECK
With engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal several times. Then with brake
pedal fully depressed, start engine and when the vacuum pressure
reaches the standard, make sure the clearance between brake pedal
and floor panel decreases.
CAUTION:
Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
BRA0037D
AIRTIGHT CHECK
Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after
applying vacuum to booster. Depress brake pedal normally to
change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Make sure distance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases.
●
Depress brake pedal while engine is running and stop engine
with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after
holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
CAUTION:
Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
●
SBR365AA
Revision: October 2004
BR-18
2005 Titan
BRAKE BOOSTER
With ABS or BLSD
EFS004OH
A
B
C
D
E
BR
WFIA0380E
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Master cylinder
3.
Gasket
4.
Brake pedal
5.
Lock nut
6.
Spacer block
7.
Brake booster
G
H
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster.
●
Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
●
Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads.
●
Attach the check valve in the correct direction.
1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder.
4. Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" .
5. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-22, "VACUUM LINES" .
6. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle.
7. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
8. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Output Rod Length Inspection
1.
2.
Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of – 66.7 kPa (–
500 mmHg, –19.69 inHg) to brake booster.
Check output rod length.
Standard dimension when
vacuum – 66.7 kPa (– 500
mmHg, – 19.69 inHg)
: 15.6 − 15.9 mm
(0.614 − 0.626 in)
SBR208E
Revision: October 2004
BR-19
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
BRAKE BOOSTER
INSTALLATION
1.
Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length B (in
the figure) satisfies the specified value.
Length “B”
: 148.5 mm (5.85 in)
2.
After adjusting “B”, temporarily tighten lock nut and install
booster assembly to the vehicle.
● Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly
and the dash panel.
3. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod.
4. Install pedal bracket mounting nuts and tighten them to the
WFIA0382E
specified torque.
5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to BR-12, "Hydraulic Circuit" .
6. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster.
7. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. Refer to BR-19, "With ABS or BLSD" .
8. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" .
9. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque.
10. Install engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
11. Install engine room cover. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" .
12. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
CAUTION:
● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
● Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
With VDC
EFS004OI
WFIA0381E
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Master cylinder
3.
4.
Brake pedal
5.
Lock nut
6.
Gasket
Spacer block
7.
Brake booster
8.
Active booster
9.
Delta stroke sensor
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster.
●
Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
●
Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads.
●
Attach the check valve in the correct direction.
Revision: October 2004
BR-20
2005 Titan
BRAKE BOOSTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation"
Remove engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder.
Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" .
Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-22, "VACUUM LINES" .
Disconnect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors from brake booster assembly.
Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle.
Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel.
2.
Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of – 66.7 kPa (–
500 mmHg, –19.69 inHg) to brake booster.
Check output rod length.
Standard dimension when
vacuum – 66.7 kPa (– 500
mmHg, – 19.69 inHg)
B
C
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Output Rod Length Inspection
1.
A
E
: 15.6 − 15.9 mm
(0.614 − 0.626 in)
BR
G
SBR208E
H
INSTALLATION
1.
Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length B (in
the figure) satisfies the specified value.
Length “B”
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
I
: 148.5 mm (5.85 in)
After adjusting “B”, temporarily tighten lock nut and install
booster assembly to the vehicle.
● Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly
and the dash panel.
Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod.
Install pedal bracket mounting nuts and tighten them to the
WFIA0382E
specified torque.
Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to BR-12, "Hydraulic Circuit" .
Connect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors to brake booster assembly.
Connect vacuum hose to brake booster.
Install master cylinder to booster assembly. Refer to BR-20, "With VDC" .
Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" .
Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque.
Install engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Install engine room cover. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
CAUTION:
● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
● Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Revision: October 2004
BR-21
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
VACUUM LINES
VACUUM LINES
Removal and Installation
PFP:41920
EFS004OJ
LFIA0216E
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
Hose clip
4.
Check valve
2.
Clamp
3.
Vacuum hose
Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip.
Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose.
Remove check valve from brake booster.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
● Insert vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 in).
● Do not use lubricating oil during assembly.
SBR225B
Inspection
EFS004OK
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection
Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster
side of check valve.
Check
valve
specification
: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3
kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds
under a vacuum of – 66.7 kPa (– 500 mmHg,
– 19.69 inHg)
LFIA0217E
Revision: October 2004
BR-22
2005 Titan
FRONT DISC BRAKE
FRONT DISC BRAKE
On-vehicle Inspection
PFP:41000
A
EFS004OL
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
●
Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection
hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary.
Standard thickness
Repair limit thickness
B
: 11.88 mm (0.468 in)
: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
C
D
BRA0010D
Components
E
EFS004OM
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0377E
1.
Upper sliding pin
4.
Torque member
5.
Piston seal
6.
Piston
7.
Inner pad
8.
Pad retainer
9.
Outer pad
10. Piston boot
2.
Sliding pin boot
11. Union bolt
3.
Torque member bolt
12. Copper washer
13. Sliding pin bolt
14. Bleed valve
15. Cylinder body
16. Cap
17. Brake hose
18. Lower sliding pin
WARNING:
Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
Revision: October 2004
BR-23
2005 Titan
FRONT DISC BRAKE
CAUTION:
●
While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
●
It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
●
Do not damage piston boot.
●
Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" .
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
EFS004ON
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove tires from vehicle using power tool.
Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
Suspend cylinder body with a wire and remove pad and shim from torque member.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Push pistons in so that pad is firmly installed and mount cylinder body to torque member.
NOTE:
Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), etc., makes it easier to push in piston.
CAUTION:
By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the
surface of reservoir tank.
Attach pad retainer to torque member.
NOTE:
Apply Molykote M-77 grease to pad ratainers where brake pads contact.
CAUTION:
When attaching pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does
not float up higher than torque member, as shown in the figure.
Install lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.
Refer to BR-23, "Components" .
Check brake for drag.
Install tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
PFIA0273E
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
EFS004OO
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires from vehicle using power tool.
Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
NOTE:
Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle.
Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
NOTE:
When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and caliper from torque member.
Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
Revision: October 2004
BR-24
2005 Titan
FRONT DISC BRAKE
2.
3.
Install sliding pin bolts if removed and tighten to specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" .
Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten the torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components"
.
CAUTION:
● When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil
off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces.
● Do not reuse caliper torque member bolts.
A
B
C
LFIA0209E
4.
Install brake hose to cylinder body, then tighten union bolt to the
specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt.
● Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union
bolt and washers.
D
E
BR
G
LFIA0214E
5.
6.
Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Attach tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
H
I
EFS004OP
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque
member.
2.
3.
Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
CAUTION:
Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
J
K
L
M
MAA0272D
4.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
SFIA1301E
Revision: October 2004
BR-25
2005 Titan
FRONT DISC BRAKE
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
●
Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Refer to
MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
●
Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
Piston
Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION:
Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots
Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present,
replace the affected part.
CAUTION:
Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal in to
groove on cylinder body. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston seal.
WFIA0210E
2.
Apply clean brake fluid to piston and piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston boot.
WFIA0211E
3.
4.
Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
Revision: October 2004
BR-26
2005 Titan
FRONT DISC BRAKE
5.
CAUTION:
Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" .
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection
A
B
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any of them is detected, replace
applicable part.
C
Runout Inspection
1.
2.
Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions.
Inspect runout using a dial gauge. (Measured at 10 mm (0.39 in)
inside the disc edge.)
Runout limit (on vehicle)
3.
4.
D
: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
NOTE:
Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL
BEARING INSPECTION" .
If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by
shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one
hole.
If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake
lathe.
E
BR
BRA0013D
G
Thickness Inspection
H
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is
either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear,
replace disc rotor.
I
Standard thickness
Repair limit thickness
Maximum uneven wear
(Measured at 8 positions)
: 26.0 mm (1.024 in)
: 24.5 mm (0.965 in)
: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
J
K
SBR020B
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE
L
Burnish brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after
replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust
brake pedal/foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
Revision: October 2004
BR-27
2005 Titan
M
REAR DISC BRAKE
REAR DISC BRAKE
On-vehicle Inspection
PFP:44000
EFS004OQ
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
●
Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection
hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary.
Standard thickness
Repair limit thickness
: 12.13 mm (0.478 in)
: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
BRA0010D
Components
EFS004OR
WFIA0293E
1.
Brake hose
2.
Copper washer
4.
Bleed valve
5.
Mounting bolt
6.
Cylinder body
7.
Piston seal
8.
Piston
9.
Piston boot
10. Knuckle slide
11. Sliding sleeve boot
13. Inner pad
14. Outer pad
3.
Cap
12. Sliding sleeve
WARNING:
Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
Revision: October 2004
BR-28
2005 Titan
REAR DISC BRAKE
CAUTION:
●
While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
●
It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a
wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
●
Do not damage piston boot.
●
Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" .
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
A
B
C
EFS004OS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
D
Remove tires from vehicle with power tool.
Remove mounting bolt from the top mount.
Swing cylinder body open, and remove pads.
E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Push piston in so that pad is firmly attached and mount cylinder body to torque member.
NOTE:
BR
Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION:
By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the G
surface of reservoir tank.
Install pads to cylinder body.
Install top mounting bolt and tighten to specification.
H
Check brake for drag.
Install tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
I
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
EFS004OT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires from vehicle with power tool.
Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
NOTE:
Do not remove union bolt unless removing the cylinder body.
Remove bolts as shown, and cylinder body.
NOTE:
Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
Remove disc rotor.
J
K
L
M
LFIA0211E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten mounting bolts to specification. Refer to BR-28, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-28, "Components" .
Revision: October 2004
BR-29
2005 Titan
REAR DISC BRAKE
4.
5.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse copper washers.
● Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Install tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
EFS004OU
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove pads from cylinder body.
Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body.
Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot.
CAUTION:
Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
BRD0041D
4.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
PFIA0269E
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
●
Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
●
Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
●
Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION:
●
Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials
are stuck to sliding surface.
●
Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the
above conditions are observed.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots
Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are,
replace them.
Revision: October 2004
BR-30
2005 Titan
REAR DISC BRAKE
ASSEMBLY
A
CAUTION:
Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove
on cylinder body. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS
AND LUBRICANTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston seal.
B
C
D
WFIA0210E
E
2.
Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston
boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston boot.
BR
G
H
WFIA0211E
3.
4.
Insert piston into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
M
: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
NOTE:
Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification before measuring runout. Refer to RAX-12, "Axle Bearing" .
If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by
shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one
hole.
If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake
lathe.
Revision: October 2004
J
L
Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions.
Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 in)
inside disk edge.]
Runout limit (on vehicle)
I
BR-31
BRA0013D
2005 Titan
REAR DISC BRAKE
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is
either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear,
replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness
: 14.0 mm (0.551 in)
Wear limit
: 12.0 mm (0.472 in)
Maximum uneven wear
: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
(measured at 8 positions)
SBR020B
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE
Burnish brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after
replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust
brake pedal/foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
Revision: October 2004
BR-32
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
A
EFS004OV
Unit: mm (in)
Front brake
Brake model
CLZ31VC
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
320 × 26 (12.60 × 1.02)
Pad Length × width × thickness
Rear brake
111.0 × 73.5 × 9.5 (4.73 × 2.894 × 0.374)
Cylinder bore diameter
51 (2.01)
Brake model
AD14VE
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Brake booster
Booster model
48 (1.89)
C215T
215 (8.46)
BR
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Recommended brake fluid
G
Brake Pedal
EFS004OW
182.3 − 192.3 mm (7.18 − 7.57 in)
Brake pedal height (from dash panel top surface)
Depressed pedal height [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb)
with engine running]
H
More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in)
Clearance between stopper rubber and the threaded end of stop
lamp switch
0.74 − 1.96 mm (0.029 − 0.077 in)
I
3 − 11 mm (0.12 − 0.43 in)
Pedal play
Brake Booster
EFS004OX
J
EFS004OY
K
15.6 − 15.9 mm (0.614 − 0.626 in)
Output rod installation standard dimension
Check Valve
Vacuum leakage
[at vacuum of – 66.7 kPa(– 500 mmHg, – 19.69 inHg)]
Within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) of vacuum for 15 seconds
L
Front Disc Brake
EFS004OZ
Brake model
Disc rotor
E
Electric brake force distribution
Diaphragm diameter
Brake pad
D
83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.299 × 0.335)
Cylinder bore diameter
Valve model
C
320 × 14 (12.60 × 0.55)
Pad Length × width × thickness
Control valve
B
CLZ31VC
Standard thickness (new)
Repair limit thickness
1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Standard thickness (new)
26.0 mm (1.024 in)
Repair limit thickness
24.5 mm (0.965 in)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
0.015mm (0.0006 in)
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
Revision: October 2004
M
11.88 mm (0.468 in)
BR-33
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Rear Disc Brake
EFS004P0
Brake model
Brake pad
Disc rotor
AD14VE
Standard thickness (new)
12.13 mm (0.478 in)
Repair limit thickness
1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Standard thickness (new)
14.0 mm (0.551 in)
Repair limit thickness
12.0 mm (0.472 in)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
Revision: October 2004
BR-34
2005 Titan
F BRAKES
A
B
SECTION
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
ABS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for Brake System .................................. 4
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ..................... 4
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ......... 4
Precautions for Brake Control .................................. 5
Precautions for CAN System ................................... 5
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 6
PREPARATION ........................................................... 7
Special Service Tool ................................................. 7
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................ 8
System Components ................................................ 8
ABS Function ........................................................... 8
EBD Function ........................................................... 8
Fail-Safe Function .................................................... 8
ABS/EBD SYSTEM ............................................... 8
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ........................................ 9
CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 10
System Description ................................................ 10
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................11
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ......................................................11
INTRODUCTION ..................................................11
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 12
CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 13
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................... 13
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 14
Schematic .............................................................. 15
Wiring Diagram — ABS — ..................................... 16
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 20
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND
BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ................................. 20
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS
AND BATTERY INSPECTION ............................ 20
ABS WARNING LAMP INSPECTION ................. 20
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ...................... 21
Revision: October 2004
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 21
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ......... 21
CONSULT-II Function (ABS) .................................. 23
CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE
... 23
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 24
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 26
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 27
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS ........................................................................ 29
Wheel Sensor System ............................................ 29
ABS Control Unit Inspection ................................... 30
Solenoid Valve System Inspection ......................... 31
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection... 32
ABS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems
Inspection ............................................................... 33
CAN Communication System Inspection ................ 34
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 35
ABS Works Frequently ........................................... 35
Unexpected Pedal Action ....................................... 36
Long Stopping Distance .......................................... 37
ABS Does Not Work ............................................... 37
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise ................ 37
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ........................................ 38
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch
Is Turned On ........................................................... 38
WHEEL SENSORS ................................................... 39
Removal and Installation ........................................ 39
REMOVAL ........................................................... 39
INSTALLATION ................................................... 39
SENSOR ROTOR ..................................................... 40
Removal and Installation ........................................ 40
FRONT ................................................................ 40
REAR .................................................................. 40
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)... 41
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41
REMOVAL ........................................................... 41
INSTALLATION ................................................... 42
BRC-1
2005 Titan
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ABLS/ABS
PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 43
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 43
Precautions for Brake System ................................ 43
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ................... 43
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ........ 43
Precautions for Brake Control ................................ 44
Precautions for CAN System .................................. 44
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 45
PREPARATION ......................................................... 46
Special Service Tool ............................................... 46
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 46
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................... 47
System Components .............................................. 47
ABS Function .......................................................... 48
EBD Function ......................................................... 48
ABLS Function ........................................................ 48
Fail-Safe Function .................................................. 48
ABS/EBD SYSTEM ............................................. 48
ABLS SYSTEM .................................................... 48
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ....................................... 49
CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................... 50
System Description ................................................. 50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 51
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 51
INTRODUCTION ................................................. 51
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 52
CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 53
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET .................... 53
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 54
Schematic ............................................................... 55
Wiring Diagram — ABLS — ................................... 56
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 60
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND
BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ................................. 60
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS
AND BATTERY INSPECTION ............................. 60
ABS WARNING LAMP AND SLIP INDICATOR
LAMP INSPECTION ............................................ 60
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ....................... 61
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard .............. 61
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ......... 61
CONSULT-II Function (ABS) .................................. 64
CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE
... 64
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 65
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 67
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS ........................................................................ 72
Wheel Sensor System Inspection ........................... 72
Engine System Inspection ...................................... 73
ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection ......................... 74
Solenoid and Change-Over Valve System Inspection .......................................................................... 74
Revision: October 2004
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection...75
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection .....................76
ABS/ABLS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection .......................................................77
Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection ..........78
Pressure Sensor System Inspection .......................78
CAN Communication System Inspection ................81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .............82
ABS Works Frequently ............................................82
Unexpected Pedal Action ........................................83
Long Stopping Distance ..........................................84
ABS Does Not Work ...............................................84
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise ................84
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................................85
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch
Is Turned On ...........................................................85
WHEEL SENSORS ...................................................86
Removal and Installation .........................................86
REMOVAL ............................................................86
INSTALLATION ....................................................86
SENSOR ROTOR ......................................................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
FRONT .................................................................87
REAR ...................................................................87
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ...88
Removal and Installation .........................................88
REMOVAL ............................................................88
INSTALLATION ....................................................89
VDC/TCS/ABS
PRECAUTIONS .........................................................90
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................90
Precautions for Brake System ................................90
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ...................90
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ........90
Precautions for Brake Control .................................91
Precautions for CAN System ..................................91
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................92
PREPARATION .........................................................93
Special Service Tool ................................................93
Commercial Service Tools ......................................93
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...........................................94
System Components ...............................................94
ABS Function ..........................................................95
EBD Function ..........................................................95
TCS Function ..........................................................95
VDC Function ..........................................................95
Fail-Safe Function ...................................................95
ABS/EBD SYSTEM ..............................................96
VDC/TCS SYSTEM .............................................96
ACTIVE BOOSTER .............................................96
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram .......................................96
CAN COMMUNICATION ...........................................97
System Description .................................................97
BRC-2
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 98
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ..................................................... 98
INTRODUCTION ................................................. 98
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 99
CLARIFY CONCERN ........................................ 100
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................. 100
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 101
Schematic ............................................................ 102
Wiring Diagram — VDC — ................................... 103
Basic Inspection ....................................................110
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND
BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ................................110
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS
AND BATTERY INSPECTION ...........................110
ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP
ANDVDCOFFINDICATORLAMPINSPECTION..110
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ..................... 111
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............ 111
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ........ 111
CONSULT-II Function (ABS) .................................115
CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE
..115
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................116
DATA MONITOR ................................................119
ACTIVE TEST ................................................... 123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS ..................................................................... 125
Wheel Sensor System Inspection ........................ 125
Engine System Inspection .................................... 126
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection ................ 127
Steering Angle Sensor System ............................ 127
Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection. 128
Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System
Inspection ............................................................. 130
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection. 131
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection .................. 132
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground
Systems Inspection .............................................. 133
Brake Fluid Level Sensor System Inspection ....... 134
Active Booster System Inspection ........................ 135
Delta Stroke Sensor System Inspection ............... 136
Revision: October 2004
Pressure Sensor System Inspection .................... 138
CAN Communication System Inspection .............. 140
Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "ST ANGLE
SEN SIGNAL" ....................................................... 141
Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "DECEL G
SEN SET" ............................................................. 141
VDC OFF Indicator lamp Does Not Illuminate ...... 141
Component Inspection .......................................... 142
VDC OFF SWITCH ........................................... 142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .......... 143
ABS Works Frequently ......................................... 143
Unexpected Pedal Action ..................................... 144
Long Stopping Distance ........................................ 145
ABS Does Not Work ............................................. 145
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise .............. 145
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...................................... 146
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch
Is Turned On ......................................................... 146
Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation ........... 147
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 148
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position ........................................................................ 148
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor ..... 148
WHEEL SENSORS ................................................. 150
Removal and Installation ...................................... 150
REMOVAL ......................................................... 150
INSTALLATION ................................................. 150
SENSOR ROTOR ................................................... 151
Removal and Installation ...................................... 151
FRONT .............................................................. 151
REAR ................................................................ 151
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY). 152
Removal and Installation ...................................... 152
REMOVAL ......................................................... 152
INSTALLATION ................................................. 153
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ................................ 154
Removal and Installation ...................................... 154
G SENSOR .............................................................. 155
Removal and Installation ...................................... 155
REMOVAL ......................................................... 155
INSTALLATION ................................................. 155
BRC-3
2005 Titan
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EFS004P8
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Brake System
EFS004P9
CAUTION:
●
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
●
If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled
without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a
defect exists.
●
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work.
●
Always torque brake lines when installing.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or
SBR686C
replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (front disc brake) or BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (rear disc brake).
WARNING:
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
EFS004PA
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1.
Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
● If YES, GO TO 2.
● If NO, GO TO 5.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-4
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis
results?
● If YES, GO TO 3.
● If NO, GO TO 4.
Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefor, erase the self-diagnosis results.
Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to BRC-10, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Precautions for Brake Control
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
B
C
EFS004PB
During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is D
normal.
Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
E
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from cus- BRC
tomer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting
diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid
leaks.
G
If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or H
error.
If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits or improper wiring.
I
Precautions for CAN System
●
A
EFS004PC
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured.
Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V.
Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable.
Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape.
Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in).
J
K
L
M
PKIA0306E
●
Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit
is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-5
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EFS004PD
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Revision: October 2004
BRC-6
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[ABS]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EFS004PE
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors
C
D
WFIA0101E
205-D002
(
—
)
Bearing splitter
E
Removing axle shaft bearing
BRC
G
ZZA0700D
Commercial Service Tools
EFS004PF
H
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
I
J
S-NT360
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-7
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Components
PFP:00000
EFS004PG
WFIA0118E
ABS Function
●
●
●
●
●
●
EFS004PH
The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during
sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding
obstacles.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and
the ABS warning lamp turns on.
The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II.
During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
EBD Function
●
●
●
●
●
EFS004PI
Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels
during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure
which results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are turned on.
The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II.
During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Fail-Safe Function
EFS004PJ
CAUTION:
If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS system.
ABS/EBD SYSTEM
In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical
malfunction with the EBD system, the brake warning lamp and the ABS warning lamp will turn on.
The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-8
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABS]
1.
2.
For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of
vehicles without ABS system.
For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same
as the condition of vehicles without ABS or EBD system.
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
EFS004PK
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
WFIA0214E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-9
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ABS]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
EFS004PL
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-10
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00000
A
EFS004PM
INTRODUCTION
The ABS system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional
problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid,
or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer
is a very good source of information on such problems, especially
intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what
symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS
equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information.
B
C
D
SEF233G
E
BRC
G
H
SEF234G
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-11
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
WORK FLOW
LFIA0197E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-12
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
CLARIFY CONCERN
●
●
●
A
A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand
what type of trouble the customer is having.
B
C
SBR339B
D
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0226E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-13
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EFS004PN
WFIA0371E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-14
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Schematic
EFS004PO
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0198E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-15
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Wiring Diagram — ABS —
EFS004PP
WFWA0199E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-16
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0200E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-17
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
WFWA0201E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-18
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0202E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-19
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Basic Inspection
EFS004PQ
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid.
Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is
leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items.
● If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified
torque and recheck for leaks.
● If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads,
replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks.
● When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and
recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly.
CAUTION:
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced
as an assembly.
Check the brake pads for excessive wear.
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION
Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make
sure the battery is sufficiently charged.
ABS WARNING LAMP INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure ABS warning lamp turns on for approximately 1 second when the ignition switch is turned ON.
If it does not, check CAN communications. If there are no errors with the CAN communication system,
check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
Make sure the lamp turns off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp
does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis.
Make sure ABS warning lamp turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp has not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-23, "CONSULT-II
Function (ABS)" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-20
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing
EFS004PR
A
ABS
warning lamp
Remarks
When the ignition switch is OFF
–
–
After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 1 second
×
–
After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 2 seconds
–
Condition
ABS malfunction
B
Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the
engine is started.
×
–
×
When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning (power supply or
ground malfunction).
X: ON
—: OFF
EFS004PS
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II
BRC
CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited.
Data monitor
Display content
Condition
N POSI SIG
P POSI SIG
GEAR
PNP switch signal ON/
OFF condition
PNP switch signal ON/
OFF condition
A/T gear position
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
Wheel speed
BATTERY VOLT
Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)
STOP LAMP SW
Stop lamp switch operation
ABS WARN LAMP
MOTOR RELAY
Revision: October 2004
D
E
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
Monitor item
C
ABS warning lamp ON
condition (Note 2)
Operation status of
motor and motor relay
Reference value in
normal operation
A/T shift position = N position
ON
A/T shift position = other than
N positions
OFF
A/T shift position P position
ON
A/T shift position = other than
P positions
OFF
1st gear
1
2nd gear
2
3rd gear
3
4th gear
4
5th gear
5
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h (MPH)]
Vehicle running (Note 1)
Almost in accordance with speedometer display
(within ±10%)
Ignition switch ON
10 to 16V
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON or running
(ABS not activated)
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS activated)
ON
BRC-21
Note: Error inspection
checklist
G
H
BRC-34, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
I
BRC-34, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
J
K
—
L
BRC-29, "Wheel Sensor
System"
BRC-33, "ABS Control
Unit Power and Ground
Systems Inspection"
—
BRC-38, "ABS Warning
Lamp Does Not Come
On When Ignition Switch
Is Turned On"
BRC-32, "Actuator Motor,
Motor Relay, and Circuit
Inspection"
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Data monitor
Monitor item
ACTUATOR RLY
Display content
Actuator relay operation status
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
Solenoid valve operation
FLUID LEV SW
ON/OFF status of
brake fluid level switch
ABS SIGNAL
EBD SIGNAL
ABS FAIL SIG
EBD FAIL SIG
Signal status
Fail signal status
Condition
Reference value in
normal operation
Vehicle stopped (Ignition
switch ON)
OFF
Vehicle stopped (Engine running)
ON
Actuator (solenoid) is active
(“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is
inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (solenoid) is
not active and actuator relay is
active (ignition switch ON).
OFF
When brake fluid level switch
ON
ON
When brake fluid level switch
OFF
OFF
ABS active
EBD active
ON
ABS not active
EBD not active
OFF
ABS fail
EBD fail
ON
ABS normal
EBD normal
OFF
Note: Error inspection
checklist
BRC-32, "Actuator Motor,
Motor Relay, and Circuit
Inspection"
BRC-31, "Solenoid Valve
System Inspection"
DI-30, "WARNING
LAMPS"
ABS system
EBD system
ABS system
EBD system
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp
ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation).
Revision: October 2004
BRC-22
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
CONSULT-II Function (ABS)
EFS004PT
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ABS diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed.
B
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
C
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
ECU PART NUMBER
D
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or
"NG".
E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
BRC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II
CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
Turn ignition switch ON.
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
4.
J
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “ABS” in the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-23
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
6.
Select the required diagnostic location from the “SELECT DIAG
MODE” screen.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
BCIA0031E
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as
follows:
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”,
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION:
If “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on
the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 1.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by
touching “PRINT”.)
● When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp.
7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
component.
8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
● When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH)
for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
10. Start the engine and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE”
in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the error memory.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
CAUTION:
If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 5.
11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and
confirm that the ABS warning lamp is off.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-24
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Display Item List
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
A
FR LH SENSOR 1
[C1104]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
RR RH SENSOR 1
[C1101]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
FR RH SENSOR 1
[C1103]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
RR LH SENSOR 1
[C1102]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
FR LH SENSOR 2
[C1108]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR RH SENSOR 2
[C1105]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
E
FR RH SENSOR 2
[C1107]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
BRC
RR LH SENSOR 2
[C1106]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too
low.
BRC-33, "ABS Control
Unit Power and Ground
Systems Inspection"
CONTROLLER FAILURE
[C1110]
Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
BRC-30, "ABS Control
Unit Inspection"
I
BRC-32, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
J
BRC-30, "ABS Control
Unit Inspection"
K
PUMP MOTOR (Note 3)
[C1111]
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor
turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor
turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground.
G-SENSOR
[C1113]
G-sensor is malfunctioning.
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
REAR IN ABS SOL
[C1190]
Circuit of rear IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line
is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
REAR OUT ABS SOL
[C1191]
Circuit of rear OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-25
B
C
D
BRC-29, "Wheel Sensor
System" (Note 1)
H
L
M
BRC-31, "Solenoid Valve
System Inspection"
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Self-diagnostic item
ACTUATOR RLY
[C1140]
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
BRC-32, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction.
●
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction
●
Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more.
BRC-34, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2)
Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power
supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check.
Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for
CAN communication line first.
Note 3. "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator
motor relay or circuit.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and the CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
CAUTION:
When “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning
on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 2.
Return to the SELECT MONITOR ITEM screen, and touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or
“SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information.
When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List
Data monitor item selection
Item
(Unit)
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
FR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
(V)
×
×
×
Voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-26
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
A
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS actuator relay signal (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
ABS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
FLUID LEV SW
(ON/OFF)
×
–
×
Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
×: Applicable
–: Not applicable
ACTIVE TEST
K
CAUTION:
●
Do not perform active test while driving.
●
Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
●
The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test.
L
Operation Procedure
M
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect the CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector and start the engine.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on the display screen.
Touch “ABS”.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-27
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
5.
6.
The SELECT TEST ITEM screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
LBR379
7.
8.
With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”.
The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test.
Solenoid Valve Operation Chart
ABS solenoid valve
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
Operation
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACTUATOR UP
ACTUATOR KEEP
FR RH SOL
FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH SOL
FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH SOL
RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH SOL
RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
REAR SOL
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
NOTE:
●
If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
●
“TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
●
After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6.
ABS Motor
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay
operates as shown in table below.
ON
OFF
ABS actuator relay
Operation
ON
ON
ABS motor relay
ON
OFF
NOTE:
●
If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal
stroke may change. This is normal.
●
“TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds
after operation starts.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-28
SFIA0593E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Wheel Sensor System
PFP:00000
A
EFS004PU
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
B
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. BRC-41, "Removal and Installation"
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
C
D
E
1.
2.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
BRC
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel G
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and H
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
I
NO
>> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" .
3. CHECK TIRES
J
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
K
4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
L
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL
BEARING INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" or FAX-5, "Removal
and Installation" .
5. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No.
Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0343E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-29
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel sensor
harness connector.
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
Front LH
Front RH
Rear LH
Rear RH
Wire color
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
Continuity
Wire color
E125 - 45
G/O
E18 - 1
G/O
E125 - 46
BR/W
E18 - 2
BR/W
E125 - 34
B/R
E117 - 1
B/R
E125 - 33
BR
E117 - 2
BR
E125 - 37
P
C11 - 2
P
E125 - 36
L
C11 - 1
L
E125 - 42
V
C10 - 2
V
E125 - 43
G/Y
C10 - 1
G/Y
Yes
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
ABS Control Unit Inspection
EFS004PW
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
CONTROLLER FAILURE
G-SENSOR
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation"
.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-30
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
Solenoid Valve System Inspection
EFS004PX
A
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
B
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
C
FR LH IN ABS SOL
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
RR RH IN ABS SOL
D
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
FR RH IN ABS SOL
E
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RR LH IN ABS SOL
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
BRC
REAR IN ABS SOL
REAR OUT ABS SOL
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
G
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
H
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-31
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
3.
1.
CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
32 (Y)
Body
ground
—
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
WFIA0195E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
16 (B)
47 (B)
Body
ground
—
—
Measured
value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection
WFIA0196E
EFS004PY
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
PUMP MOTOR
ACTUATOR RLY
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-32
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
3.
1.
CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM
A
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
1 (B/Y)
Body
ground
—
B
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
C
D
WFIA0209E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
16 (B)
47 (B)
Body
ground
—
—
E
Measured
value
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
ABS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection
BRC
G
WFIA0196E
H
I
EFS004Q0
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
J
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
K
Self-diagnosis results
BATTERY VOLTAGE
L
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
M
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-33
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
3. ABS CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and ground.
Signal name
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
harness connector E125
Power supply
Ground
1 (B/Y)
32 (Y)
16 (B)
47 (B)
Body
ground
Measured value
—
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
—
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
CAN Communication System Inspection
EFS004Q1
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check
the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
NO
>> Connector terminal is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-34
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS Works Frequently
PFP:99999
A
EFS005FE
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
B
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer toBRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
C
D
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
●
Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
●
Wheel sensors for physical damage
●
Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
●
Sensor rotor and mount for physical damage (rear only)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
E
BRC
G
3. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLES
H
Check front and rear axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or
RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
I
J
4. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" .
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" .
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-35
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
Unexpected Pedal Action
EFS005FF
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke.
Is pedal stroke excessive?
YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic
Inspection" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
SBR540A
3. CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" .
4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
●
Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
●
Wheel sensors for physical damage
●
Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector. Then retest.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-36
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
Long Stopping Distance
EFS005FG
A
1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently" .
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" .
ABS Does Not Work
B
C
D
E
EFS005FH
BRC
CAUTION:
The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
G
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation.
●
Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
NG
>> Go to BRC-38, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" .
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise
H
I
EFS005FI
NOTE:
During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
J
K
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
L
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom occur only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2. RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on?
YES
NO
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-37
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS005FJ
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSES
Check 30A fusible link h and 30A fusible link i for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link
layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing.
2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 1 (B/Y) and ground and terminal 32 (Y)
and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
WFIA0199E
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 16 (B) and ground and terminal 47 (B) and
ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
WFIA0196E
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS005FK
1. CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis?
YES >> Refer to BRC-25, "Display Item List" .
NO
>> Refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-38
2005 Titan
WHEEL SENSORS
[ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
PFP:47910
A
EFS004Q9
B
C
D
E
BRC
WFIA0374E
G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wheel sensor mounting screw.
● When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
● Do not pull on the sensor harness.
Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Before installing wheel sensors,
●
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
●
Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that
dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
●
Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-39
2005 Titan
H
I
J
K
L
M
SENSOR ROTOR
[ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:47970
EFS004QA
FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub
and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" .
REAR
Removal
1.
2.
Remove axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
NOTE:
It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number
: 205-D002 (
—
)
Installation
1.
2.
Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor
rotor is fully seated.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-40
2005 Titan
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[ABS]
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
PFP:47660
A
EFS004QB
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
WFIA0375E
K
1. To rear left
2. To rear right
3. To front left
4. To front right
5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
8. Harness connector
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION:
● To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Revision: October 2004
BRC-41
2005 Titan
M
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[ABS]
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
●
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PIPING AND
HOSE" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-42
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[ABLS/ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EFS004QC
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
E
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
BRC
harness connectors.
Precautions for Brake System
EFS004QD
CAUTION:
●
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
●
If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled
without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a
defect exists.
●
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work.
●
Always torque brake lines when installing.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or
SBR686C
replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (front disc brake) or BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (rear disc brake).
WARNING:
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
EFS004QE
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1.
Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
● If YES, GO TO 2.
● If NO, GO TO 5.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-43
2005 Titan
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[ABLS/ABS]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis
results?
● If YES, GO TO 3.
● If NO, GO TO 4.
Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefor, erase the self-diagnosis results.
Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Precautions for Brake Control
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EFS004QF
During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting
diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid
leaks.
If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or
error.
If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits or improper wiring.
Precautions for CAN System
●
●
●
●
EFS004QG
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured.
Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V.
Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable.
Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape.
Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in).
PKIA0306E
●
Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit
is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-44
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[ABLS/ABS]
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EFS004QH
A
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-45
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[ABLS/ABS]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EFS004QI
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors
WFIA0101E
205-D002
(
—
)
Bearing splitter
Removing axle shaft bearing
ZZA0700D
Commercial Service Tools
EFS004QJ
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
S-NT360
Revision: October 2004
BRC-46
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABLS/ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Components
PFP:00000
A
EFS004QK
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0301E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-47
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABLS/ABS]
ABS Function
●
●
●
●
●
●
EFS004QL
The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during
sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding
obstacles.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and
the ABS warning lamp turns on.
The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II.
During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
EBD Function
●
●
●
●
●
EFS004QM
Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels
during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure
which results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are turned on.
The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II.
During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
ABLS Function
●
●
●
EFS004QN
Active brake limited slip is a function to improve vehicle traction. Spinning of the drive wheels is detected
by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) using inputs from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel
spin occurs, the ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel which distributes the driving power to the other
drive wheel.
The SLIP indicator lamp turns on to inform the driver of ABLS operation.
During ABLS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Fail-Safe Function
EFS004QO
CAUTION:
If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/ABLS system.
ABS/EBD SYSTEM
In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical
malfunction with the EBD system, the brake warning lamp and ABS warning lamp will turn on.
The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function.
1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of
vehicles without ABS/ABLS system.
2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same
as the condition of vehicles without ABS/ABLS or EBD system.
ABLS SYSTEM
In case of an ABLS system malfunction, the ABS warning lamp will turn on and only the EBD is operative. The
condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS/ABLS system.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-48
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABLS/ABS]
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
EFS004QP
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
WFIA0302E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-49
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ABLS/ABS]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
EFS004QQ
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-50
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00000
A
EFS004QR
INTRODUCTION
The ABS/ABLS system has an electronic control unit to control major
functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and
controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of
brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS/ABLS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out
what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/
ABLS equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for
information.
B
C
D
SEF233G
E
BRC
G
H
SEF234G
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-51
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
WORK FLOW
WFIA0364E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-52
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
CLARIFY CONCERN
●
●
●
A
A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand
what type of trouble the customer is having.
B
C
SBR339B
D
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0365E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-53
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EFS004QS
WFIA0372E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-54
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Schematic
EFS004QT
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0203E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-55
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Wiring Diagram — ABLS —
EFS004QU
WFWA0204E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-56
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0205E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-57
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
WFWA0206E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-58
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0207E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-59
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Basic Inspection
EFS004QV
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid.
Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is
leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items.
● If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified
torque and recheck for leaks.
● If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads,
replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks.
● When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and
recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly.
CAUTION:
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced
as an assembly.
Check the brake pads for excessive wear.
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION
Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make
sure the battery is sufficiently charged.
ABS WARNING LAMP AND SLIP INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn on for approximately 1 second when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check CAN communications. If there are no errors with CAN communication system, check combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamps do
not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis.
Make sure ABS warning lamp turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp has not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-64, "CONSULT-II
Function (ABS)" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-60
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing
EFS004QW
A
ABS
warning lamp
SLIP
indicator lamp
Remarks
When the ignition switch is OFF
—
—
—
After the ignition switch is turned ON
for approx. 1 second
X
X
—
After the ignition switch is turned ON
for approx. 2 seconds
—
—
X
—
Condition
Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds
after the engine is started.
C
—
When the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) is malfunctioning
(power supply or ground malfunction).
ABS/ABLS malfunction
X
B
—
D
E
X: ON
—: OFF
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
EFS004QX
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II
CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited.
BRC
G
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display content
Condition
N POSI SIG
PNP switch signal ON/
OFF condition
P POSI SIG
PNP switch signal ON/
OFF condition
GEAR
A/T gear position
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
Wheel speed
ACCEL POS SIG
Open/close condition
of throttle valve (linked
with accelerator pedal).
ENGINE SPEED
BATTERY VOLT
Revision: October 2004
A/T shift position = N position
ON
A/T shift position = other than
N positions
OFF
Note: Error inspection
checklist
H
BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
I
BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
J
A/T shift position P position
ON
A/T shift position = other than
P positions
OFF
1st gear
1
2nd gear
2
3rd gear
3
4th gear
4
5th gear
5
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h (MPH)]
Vehicle running (Note 1)
Almost in accordance with speedometer display
(within ±10%)
BRC-72, "Wheel Sensor
System Inspection"
Accelerator pedal not
depressed (ignition switch is
ON)
0%
Depress accelerator pedal
(ignition switch is ON)
BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
0 to 100%
With engine stopped
0 rpm
Engine running
Almost in accordance with
tachometer display
With engine running
Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)
Reference value in
normal operation
Ignition switch ON
BRC-61
10 to 16V
K
—
L
BRC-73, "Engine System
Inspection"
BRC-77, "ABS/ABLS
Control Unit Power and
Ground Systems Inspection"
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Data monitor
Monitor item
STOP LAMP SW
ABS WARN LAMP
MOTOR RELAY
ACTUATOR RLY
SLIP LAMP
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
CV1
CV2
SV1
SV2
PRESS SENSOR
FLUID LEV SW
ABS SIGNAL
EBD SIGNAL
ABS FAIL SIG
EBD FAIL SIG
Display content
Stop lamp switch operation
ABS warning lamp ON
condition (Note 2)
Operation status of
motor and motor relay
Actuator relay operation status
SLIP indicator lamp
status (Note 3)
Solenoid valve operation
Switch-over valve status
Brake fluid pressure
detected by pressure
sensor
ON/OFF status of
brake fluid level switch
Signal status
Fail signal status
Condition
Reference value in
normal operation
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON or running
(ABS not activated)
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS activated)
ON
Vehicle stopped (Ignition
switch ON)
OFF
Vehicle stopped (Engine running)
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is
ON
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is
OFF
OFF
Actuator (solenoid) is active
(“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is
inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (solenoid) is
not active and actuator relay is
active (ignition switch ON).
OFF
Note: Error inspection
checklist
BRC-76, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
—
BRC-75, "Actuator Motor,
Motor Relay, and Circuit
Inspection"
BRC-75, "Actuator Motor,
Motor Relay, and Circuit
Inspection"
BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
BRC-74, "Solenoid and
Change-Over Valve System Inspection"
When actuator (switch-over
valve) is active (“ACTIVE
TEST” with CONSULT-II) or
actuator relay is inactive (when
in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (switch-over
valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition
switch ON).
OFF
Do not step on the Brake pedal
(When ignition switch is ON)
Approx. 0 bar
Step on the Brake pedal
(When ignition switch is ON)
-40 to 300 bar
When brake fluid level switch
ON
ON
When brake fluid level switch
OFF
OFF
ABS active
EBD active
ON
ABS not active
EBD not active
OFF
ABS fail
EBD fail
ON
ABS normal
EBD normal
OFF
—
DI-30, "WARNING
LAMPS"
ABS system
EBD system
ABS system
EBD system
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp
ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-62
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and ABLS/ABS function is not
activated.
Note 3: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when ABLS function is activated while driving.
OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and ABLS function is not activated.
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-63
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
CONSULT-II Function (ABS)
EFS004QY
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ABS diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed.
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
ECU PART NUMBER
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or
"NG".
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II
CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “ABS” in the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-64
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
6.
Select the required diagnostic location from the “SELECT DIAG
MODE” screen.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as
follows:
E
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
BRC
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be G
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”,
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION:
If “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on
the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 1.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by
touching “PRINT”.)
● When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp.
7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
component.
8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
● When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH)
for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
10. Start the engine and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE”
in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the error memory.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
CAUTION:
If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 5.
11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and
confirm that the ABS warning lamp is off.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-65
2005 Titan
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Display Item List
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
FR LH SENSOR 1
[C1104]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
RR RH SENSOR 1
[C1101]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
FR RH SENSOR 1
[C1103]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
RR LH SENSOR 1
[C1102]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
FR LH SENSOR 2
[C1108]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR RH SENSOR 2
[C1105]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
FR RH SENSOR 2
[C1107]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR LH SENSOR 2
[C1106]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
STOP LAMP SW
[C1116]
Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction.
BRC-76, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
DECEL G SEN SET
[C1160]
ABS decel sensor adjustment is incomplete.
BRC-74, "ABS/ABLS
Control Unit Inspection"
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
CV1
[C1164]
Front side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
CV2
[C1165]
Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
SV1
[C1166]
Front side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
SV2
[C1167]
Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-66
BRC-72, "Wheel Sensor
System Inspection"
(Note 1)
BRC-74, "Solenoid and
Change-Over Valve System Inspection"
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Self-diagnostic item
PUMP MOTOR (Note 3)
[C1111]
Malfunction detecting condition
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor
turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor
turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too
low.
G-SENSOR
[C1113]
G-sensor is malfunctioning.
CONTROLLER FAILURE
[C1110]
Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
●
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction
●
Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more.
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
[C1155]
Brake fluid level drops or circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is open or
shorted.
ENGIN SIGNAL 1
[C1130]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
ENGIN SIGNAL 2
[C1131]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
ENGIN SIGNAL 6
[C1136]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
Check system
A
BRC-75, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
BRC-77, "ABS/ABLS
Control Unit Power and
Ground Systems Inspection"
BRC-74, "ABS/ABLS
Control Unit Inspection"
D
E
BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2)
BRC-78, "Brake Fluid
Level Switch System
Inspection"
BRC
G
H
BRC-73, "Engine System Inspection"
I
J
ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction.
BRC-75, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
[C1142]
ABS pressure sensor circuit malfunction.
BRC-78, "Pressure Sensor System Inspection"
ABS VARIANT CODING
[C1170]
V coding is not malfunctioning.
BRC-74, "ABS/ABLS
Control Unit Inspection"
L
BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
M
Note 1: If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power
supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check.
Note 2: If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for
CAN communication line first.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
2.
C
ACTUATOR RLY
[C1140]
ABS DIFLOCK CONTROLLER
NG
[C1187]
1.
B
After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and the CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-67
2005 Titan
K
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
3.
4.
CAUTION:
When “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning
on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 2.
Return to the SELECT MONITOR ITEM screen, and touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS”, or
“SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information.
When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List
Data monitor item selection
Item
(Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
GEAR
×
×
×
Gear position judged by PNP
switch signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front
RH wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
(V)
×
×
×
Voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
N POSI SIG
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
P POSI SIG
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
ACCEL POS SIG
(%)
×
–
×
Throttle valve open/close status
judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
ENGINE SPEED
(rpm)
×
×
×
Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
SLIP LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-68
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
A
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS actuator relay signal (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
CV1
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Front side switch-over solenoid
valve (cut valve) (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
D
CV2
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Rear side switch-over solenoid
valve (cut-valve) (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
E
SV1
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Front side switch-over solenoid
valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
SV2
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Rear side switch-over solenoid
valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
TCS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
FLUID LEV SW
(ON/OFF)
×
–
×
Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
TCS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD WARN LAMP
–
–
×
Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
SLCT LVR POSI
×
×
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
R POSI SIG
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
2WD/4WD
–
–
×
It recognizes on software whether it
is 2WD and whether it is in 4WD
state.
PRESS SENSOR
×
–
×
Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed.
CRANKING SIG
–
–
×
The input state of the key SW
START position signal is displayed.
PRESS SEN 2
–
–
×
Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed.
×: Applicable
–: Not applicable
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
●
Do not perform active test while driving.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-69
2005 Titan
B
C
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
●
●
Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test.
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect the CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector and start the engine.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on the display screen.
Touch “ABS”.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
The SELECT TEST ITEM screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
LBR379
7.
8.
With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”.
The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test.
Solenoid Valve Operation Chart
ABS solenoid valve
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
Operation
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACTUATOR UP
ACTUATOR KEEP
FR RH SOL
FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH SOL
FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH SOL
RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH SOL
RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
REAR SOL
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
NOTE:
●
If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
●
“TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
●
After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-70
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABLS/ABS]
ABS Motor
A
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay
operates as shown in table below.
Operation
ON
OFF
ABS actuator relay
ON
ON
ABS motor relay
ON
OFF
NOTE:
●
If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal
stroke may change. This is normal.
●
“TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds
after operation starts.
B
C
SFIA0593E
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-71
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Wheel Sensor System Inspection
PFP:00000
EFS004QZ
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-86, "Removal and Installation" .
3. CHECK TIRES
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL
BEARING INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" or RAX-6, "Removal
and Installation" .
5. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No.
Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0343E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-72
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and the malfunctioning wheel sensor harness connector E18, E117, C10, or C11.
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
Front LH
Front RH
Rear LH
Rear RH
B
Wheel sensor
Wire color
Connector - terminal
Continuity
Wire color
E125 - 45
G/O
E18 - 1
G/O
E125 - 46
BR/W
E18 - 2
BR/W
E125 - 34
B/R
E117 - 1
B/R
E125 - 33
BR
E117 - 2
BR
E125 - 37
P
C11 - 2
P
E125 - 36
L
C11 - 1
L
E125 - 42
V
C10 - 2
V
E125 - 43
G/Y
C10 - 1
G/Y
C
D
Yes
E
BRC
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Engine System Inspection
G
H
EFS004R0
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
I
Check self-diagnosis results.
J
Self-diagnosis results
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
ENGINE SIGNAL 2
K
ENGINE SIGNAL 6
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
L
2. ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION
M
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-73
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection
EFS004R1
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
CONTROLLER FAILURE
DECEL G SEN SET
G-SENSOR
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation"
.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Solenoid and Change-Over Valve System Inspection
EFS004R2
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
FR LH IN ABS SOL
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
RR RH IN ABS SOL
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
FR RH IN ABS SOL
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RR LH IN ABS SOL
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
CV 1
CV 2
SV 1
SV 2
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-74
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
3.
1.
CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND
A
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
32 (B/Y)
Body
ground
—
B
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
C
D
WFIA0195E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
16 (B)
47 (B)
Body
ground
—
—
E
Measured
value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection
BRC
G
WFIA0196E
H
I
EFS004R3
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
J
Check self-diagnosis results.
K
Self-diagnosis results
PUMP MOTOR
L
ACTUATOR RLY
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
M
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-75
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
3.
1.
CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
1 (Y)
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
Body
ground
—
WFIA0209E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
16 (B)
47 (B)
Measured
value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
Body
ground
—
—
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection
WFIA0196E
EFS004R4
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
STOP LAMP SW
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-76
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
3. STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION
A
Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminal 41 (V) and body ground.
B
Brake pedal depressed
: Battery voltage
(approx. 12V)
Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Refer to LT-98, "STOP LAMP" .
D
WFIA0198E
ABS/ABLS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection
EFS004R5
E
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
BRC
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
H
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
I
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
J
K
3. ABS/ABLS CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
Signal name
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
harness connector E125
Power supply
Ground
1 (Y)
32 (B/Y)
16 (B)
47 (B)
Body
ground
Measured value
—
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
—
Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-77
L
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection
EFS004R6
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
1.
2.
Check the brake reservoir tank fluid level. If the level is low, add brake fluid.
Erase the self-diagnosis results and check the self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and brake fluid level switch
connector E21.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3. CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH AND THE ABS ACTUATOR
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check the continuity between the brake fluid level switch harness connector E21 and the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Brake fluid level switch harness
connector E21
Continuity
8 (P/B)
1 (P/B)
Yes
8 (P/B)
Ground
No
Ground
2 (B)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Pressure Sensor System Inspection
EFS004R7
FRONT PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-78
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
A
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front pressure sensor connector E31 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair connector.
B
C
3. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125
and front pressure sensor harness connector E31.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Front pressure sensor harness connector E31
18 (R/W)
3 (R/W)
19 (R)
1 (R)
20 (R/L)
2 (R/L)
E
Continuity
BRC
Yes
G
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125
and body ground.
H
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Body ground
Continuity
I
18 (R/W)
19 (R)
—
No
J
20 (R/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
K
4. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
D
L
Reconnect the front pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SENSOR" is normal.
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
M
Data monitor display (Approx.)
PRESS SENSOR
Positive value
0 bar
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace front pressure sensor. Refer to BR-17, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-79
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
REAR PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the rear pressure sensor connector E32 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair connector.
3. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and rear
pressure sensor connector E32.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Rear pressure sensor connector E32
21 (R/B)
1 (R/B)
22 (W/L)
3 (W/L)
23 (W/O)
2 (W/O)
Continuity
Yes
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body
ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Body ground
Continuity
—
No
21 (R/B)
22 (W/L)
23 (W/O)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-80
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABLS/ABS]
4. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
A
Reconnect the rear pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SEN 2" is normal.
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
B
Data monitor display (Approx.)
PRESS SEN 2
Positive value
0 bar
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace rear pressure sensor. Refer to BR-17, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
CAN Communication System Inspection
D
EFS004R8
E
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
BRC
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check
the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
NO
>> Connector terminal is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-81
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABLS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS Works Frequently
PFP:99999
EFS005FL
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
●
Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
●
Wheel sensors for physical damage
●
Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
●
Sensor rotor and mount for physical damage (rear only)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLES
Check front and rear axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or
RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
4. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" .
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-82
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABLS/ABS]
Unexpected Pedal Action
EFS005FM
A
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
B
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
C
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
D
Check brake pedal stroke.
Is pedal stroke excessive?
YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic
Inspection" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
E
BRC
G
SBR540A
3. CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE
H
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" .
4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
J
K
L
Check the following.
●
Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
●
Wheel sensors for physical damage
●
Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector. Then retest.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
I
BRC-83
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABLS/ABS]
Long Stopping Distance
EFS005FN
1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to BRC-82, "ABS Works Frequently" .
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" .
ABS Does Not Work
EFS005FO
CAUTION:
The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation.
Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
NG
>> Go to BRC-85, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" .
●
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise
EFS005FP
NOTE:
During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom occur only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on?
YES
NO
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-82, "ABS Works Frequently" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-84
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABLS/ABS]
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS005FQ
A
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSES
Check 30A fusible link h and 40A fusible link i for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link
layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing.
2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
B
C
D
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 1 (Y) and ground and terminal 32 (B/Y)
and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
E
BRC
G
WFIA0199E
H
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 16 (B) and ground and terminal 47 (B) and
ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
I
J
K
WFIA0196E
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
L
EFS005FR
1. CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
M
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis?
YES >> Refer to BRC-66, "Display Item List" .
NO
>> Refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-85
2005 Titan
WHEEL SENSORS
[ABLS/ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
PFP:47910
EFS004RG
WFIA0374E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wheel sensor mounting screw.
● When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
● Do not pull on the sensor harness.
Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Before installing wheel sensors,
●
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
●
Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that
dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
●
Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-86
2005 Titan
SENSOR ROTOR
[ABLS/ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:47970
A
EFS004RH
FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub
and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" .
REAR
Removal
1.
2.
C
Remove axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
NOTE:
It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number
B
: 205-D002 (
D
— )
E
Installation
1.
2.
Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor
rotor is fully seated.
BRC
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
G
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-87
2005 Titan
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[ABLS/ABS]
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
PFP:47660
EFS004RI
WFIA0375E
1. To rear left
2. To rear right
4. To front right
5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side
3. To front left
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
8. Harness connector
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION:
● To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Revision: October 2004
BRC-88
2005 Titan
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[ABLS/ABS]
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
●
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PIPING AND
HOSE" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-89
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EFS004RJ
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Brake System
EFS004RK
CAUTION:
●
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
●
If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled
without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a
defect exists.
●
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work.
●
Always torque brake lines when installing.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or
SBR686C
replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (front disc brake) or BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (rear disc brake).
WARNING:
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
EFS004RL
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1.
Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
● If YES, GO TO 2.
● If NO, GO TO 5.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-90
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis
results?
● If YES, GO TO 3.
● If NO, GO TO 4.
Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefor, erase the self-diagnosis results.
Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Precautions for Brake Control
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
B
C
EFS004RM
During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is D
normal.
Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
E
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from cus- BRC
tomer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting
diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid
leaks.
G
If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or H
error.
If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits or improper wiring.
I
If the following components are replaced with non-genuine components or modified, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on or the VDC system may not operate properly. Components
related to suspension (shock absorbers, struts, springs, bushings, etc.), tires, wheels (exclude specified
size), components related to brake system (pads, rotors, calipers, etc.), components related to engine J
(muffler, ECM, etc.), components related to body reinforcement (roll bar, tower bar, etc.).
Driving with broken or excessively worn suspension components, tires or brake system components may
cause the VDC OFF indicator lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp to turn on, and the VDC system may not K
operate properly.
When the TCS or VDC is activated by sudden acceleration or sudden turn, some noise may occur. The
noise is a result of the normal operation of the TCS and VDC.
L
When driving on roads which have extreme slopes (such as mountainous roads) or high banks (such as
sharp curves on a freeway), the VDC may not operate normally, or the VDC warning lamp and the SLIP
indicator lamp may turn on. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the M
engine.
Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. with VDC turned off may cause the yaw
rate/side G sensor to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after
restarting the engine.
Precautions for CAN System
●
A
EFS004RN
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured.
Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V.
Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-91
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
●
Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape.
Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in).
PKIA0306E
●
Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit
is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EFS004RO
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Revision: October 2004
BRC-92
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EFS004RP
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors
C
D
WFIA0101E
205-D002
(
—
)
Bearing splitter
E
Removing axle shaft bearing
BRC
G
ZZA0700D
Commercial Service Tools
EFS004RQ
H
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
I
J
S-NT360
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-93
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Components
PFP:00000
EFS004RR
WFIA0292E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-94
2005 Titan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ABS Function
●
●
●
●
●
●
EFS004RS
The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during
sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding
obstacles.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and
the ABS warning lamp turns on.
The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II.
During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
D
Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels
during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure BRC
which results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and BRAKE warning lamp are turned on.
G
The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II.
During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
H
Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
EFS004RU
Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) using inputs
from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, the drive wheel right and left brake fluid pressure
control and engine fuel cut are activated while the throttle value is restricted to reduce the engine torque
and decrease the amount of wheel spin. In addition, the throttle opening is controlled to achieve the optimum engine torque.
Depending on road condition, the vehicle may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum traction has the highest priority during TCS operation.
TCS may be activated during sudden vehicle acceleration, wide open throttle acceleration, sudden transmission shifts or when the vehicle is driven on a road with a varying surface friction coefficient.
The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of TCS operation.
VDC Function
●
C
EFS004RT
TCS Function
●
B
E
EBD Function
●
A
EFS004RV
In addition to the ABS/TCS function, the driver steering amount and brake operation amount are detected
from the steering angle sensor and pressure sensors, and the vehicle's driving status (amount of under
steering/over steering) is determined using inputs from the yaw rate sensor/side G sensor, wheel speed
sensors, etc. and this information is used to improve vehicle stability by controlling the braking and engine
torque application to the wheels.
The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of VDC operation.
During VDC operation, the vehicle body and brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may
be heard. This is normal.
The ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on when the vehicle is
subject to strong shaking or large vibration, such as when the vehicle is on a turn table or a ship while the
engine is running or on a steep slope. In this case, restart the engine on a normal road and if the ABS
warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn off, there is no problem.
Fail-Safe Function
EFS004RW
CAUTION:
If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/TCS/VDC system.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-95
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ABS/EBD SYSTEM
In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP
indicator lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the BRAKE warning lamp,
ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on.
The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function.
1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of
vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC system.
2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same
as the condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC or EBD system.
VDC/TCS SYSTEM
In case of TCS/VDC system malfunction, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp are turned on
and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without TCS/VDC system. In case of
an electrical malfunction with the TCS/VDC system, the ABS control continues to operate normally without
TCS/VDC control.
ACTIVE BOOSTER
The active brake booster consists of vacuum booster, an active booster control group and a delta stroke sensor. In case of brake booster system malfunction due to loss of vacuum the delta stroke sensor will signal the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) that a booster failure has occurred. The active booster then
applies supplemental force to the master cylinder relative to the amount of force exerted on the brake pedal.
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
EFS004RX
WFIA0187E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-96
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
A
EFS004RY
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-97
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00000
EFS004RZ
INTRODUCTION
The ABS/TCS/VDC system has an electronic control unit to control
major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors
and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of
brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS/VDC complaint. The
customer is a very good source of information on such problems,
especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer,
find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they
occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/
TCS/VDC equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for
information.
SEF233G
SEF234G
Revision: October 2004
BRC-98
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0358E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-99
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
CLARIFY CONCERN
●
●
●
A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand
what type of trouble the customer is having.
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
WFIA0097E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-100
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EFS004S0
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0373E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-101
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Schematic
EFS004S1
WFWA0208E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-102
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Wiring Diagram — VDC —
EFS004S2
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0209E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-103
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
WFWA0210E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-104
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0211E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-105
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
WFWA0212E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-106
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0213E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-107
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
WFWA0214E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-108
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0215E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-109
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Basic Inspection
EFS004S3
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid.
Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is
leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items.
● If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified
torque and recheck for leaks.
● If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads,
replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks.
● When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and
recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly.
CAUTION:
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced
as an assembly.
Check the brake pads for excessive wear.
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION
Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make
sure the battery is sufficiently charged.
ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp (when VDC OFF switch
is off), turn on for approximately 1 second when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check the
VDC OFF indicator lamp and the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-142, "VDC OFF SWITCH" . Check CAN
communications. If there are no errors with the VDC OFF switch or CAN communication system, check
combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp
does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis.
With the engine running, make sure the VDC OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when the VDC OFF
switch is turned on and off. If the indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the
VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-142, "VDC OFF SWITCH" .
Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp turn off approximately 2
seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp or VDC OFF indicator lamp
have not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-115, "CONSULT-II
Function (ABS)" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-110
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing
EFS004S4
A
ABS
warning lamp
VDC OFF
indicator lamp
SLIP
indicator lamp
Remarks
When the ignition switch is OFF
—
—
—
—
After the ignition switch is turned
ON for approx. 1 second
×
×
×
—
After the ignition switch is turned
ON for approx. 2 seconds
—
—
—
Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds
after the engine is started.
When the VDC OFF switch is
pressed (VDC function OFF)
—
×
—
—
×
×
×
—
Condition
C
D
×
×
—
When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning (power supply or ground
malfunction).
—
×
×
—
ABS/TCS/VDC malfunction
When the VDC is malfunctioning
B
E
BRC
X: ON
—: OFF
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
EFS004S5
G
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II
CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited.
Data monitor
Monitor item
N POSI SIG
P POSI SIG
GEAR
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
ACCEL POS SIG
ENGINE SPEED
Revision: October 2004
Display content
PNP switch signal ON/
OFF condition
PNP switch signal ON/
OFF condition
A/T gear position
Condition
Note: Error inspection
checklist
I
BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
J
BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
K
A/T shift position = N position
ON
A/T shift position = other than
N positions
OFF
A/T shift position P position
ON
A/T shift position = other than
P positions
OFF
1st gear
1
2nd gear
2
3rd gear
3
4th gear
4
5th gear
5
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h (MPH)]
Vehicle running (Note 1)
Almost in accordance with speedometer display
(within ±10%)
BRC-125, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection"
Accelerator pedal not
depressed (ignition switch is
ON)
0%
Depress accelerator pedal
(ignition switch is ON)
BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
0 to 100%
With engine stopped
0 rpm
Engine running
Almost in accordance with
tachometer display
Wheel speed
Open/close condition
of throttle valve (linked
with accelerator pedal).
Reference value in
normal operation
With engine running
BRC-111
H
L
—
M
BRC-126, "Engine System Inspection"
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Data monitor
Monitor item
STR ANGLE SIG
YAW RATE SEN
SIDE G SENSOR
Display content
Steering angle
detected by steering
angle sensor
Yaw rate detected by
yaw rate sensor
Transverse G detected
by side G-sensor
BATTERY VOLT
Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)
STOP LAMP SW
Stop lamp switch operation
OFF SW
VDC OFF switch
ON/OFF status
ABS WARN LAMP
ABS warning lamp ON
condition (Note 2)
MOTOR RELAY
Operation status of
motor and motor relay
ACTUATOR RLY
OFF LAMP
SLIP LAMP
Revision: October 2004
Actuator relay operation status
VDC OFF indicator
lamp status (Note 3)
SLIP indicator lamp
status (Note 4)
Condition
Reference value in
normal operation
Straight-ahead
Approx. 0 deg
Steering wheel turned
–756 to 756 deg
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 d/s
Vehicle running
–100 to 100 d/s
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 m/s2
Vehicle running
–16.7 to 16.7 m/s2
Ignition switch ON
10 to 16V
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
VDC OFF switch ON
(When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is ON)
ON
VDC OFF switch OFF
(When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is OFF)
OFF
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON or running
(ABS not activated)
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS activated)
ON
Vehicle stopped (Ignition
switch ON)
OFF
Vehicle stopped (Engine running)
ON
When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is ON
ON
When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is OFF
OFF
When SLIP indicator lamp is
ON
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is
OFF
OFF
BRC-112
Note: Error inspection
checklist
BRC-127, "Steering
Angle Sensor System"
BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
BRC-133, "ABS/TCS/
VDC Control Unit Power
and Ground Systems
Inspection"
BRC-132, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
BRC-142, "VDC OFF
SWITCH"
—
BRC-131, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
BRC-131, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Data monitor
Monitor item
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
CV1
CV2
SV1
SV2
DECEL G-SEN
PRESS SENSOR
FLUID LEV SW
VDC SIGNAL
TCS SIGNAL
ABS SIGNAL
EBD SIGNAL
VDC FAIL SIG
TCS FAIL SIG
ABS FAIL SIG
EBD FAIL SIG
Display content
Solenoid valve operation
VDC switch-over valve
status
Longitudinal acceleration detected by Decel
G-Sensor
Brake fluid pressure
detected by pressure
sensor
ON/OFF status of
brake fluid level switch
Signal status
Fail signal status
Condition
Reference value in
normal operation
Actuator (solenoid) is active
(“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is
inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (solenoid) is
not active and actuator relay is
active (ignition switch ON).
OFF
Note: Error inspection
checklist
B
C
BRC-130, "Solenoid and
VDC Change-Over Valve
System Inspection"
When actuator (switch-over
valve) is active (“ACTIVE
TEST” with CONSULT-II) or
actuator relay is inactive (when
in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (switch-over
valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition
switch ON).
OFF
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 G
Vehicle running
-1.7 to 1.7 G
Do not step on the Brake pedal
(When ignition switch is ON)
Approx. 0 bar
Step on the Brake pedal
(When ignition switch is ON)
-40 to 300 bar
When brake fluid level switch
ON
ON
When brake fluid level switch
OFF
OFF
VDC active
TCS active
ABS active
EBD active
ON
VDC not active
TCS not active
ABS not active
EBD not active
OFF
VDC fail
TCS fail
ABS fail
EBD fail
ON
VDC normal
TCS normal
ABS normal
EBD normal
OFF
BRC-113
D
E
BRC
BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
G
H
—
I
DI-30, "WARNING
LAMPS"
J
VDC system
TCS system
ABS system
EBD system
K
L
M
VDC system
TCS system
ABS system
EBD system
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp
ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not activated.
Note 3: ON/OFF timing of VDC OFF indicator lamp
ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and VDC OFF switch is ON.
OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation.) And when VDC OFF switch is
OFF.
Note 4: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and TCS/VDC function is activated while driving.
Revision: October 2004
A
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not activated.
Flashing: TCS/VDC function is active during driving
Revision: October 2004
BRC-114
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
CONSULT-II Function (ABS)
EFS004S6
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ABS diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed.
B
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
C
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
ECU PART NUMBER
D
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or
"NG".
E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
BRC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II
CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
Turn ignition switch ON.
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
4.
J
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “ABS” in the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-115
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
6.
Select the required diagnostic location from the “SELECT DIAG
MODE” screen.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
BCIA0031E
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as
follows:
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”,
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION:
If “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on
the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the System Selection screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 1.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by
touching “PRINT”.)
● When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and
VDC OFF indicator lamp.
7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
component.
8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
● When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH)
for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
10. Start the engine and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE”
in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the error memory.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
CAUTION:
If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 5.
11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and
confirm that the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp, and VDC OFF indicator lamp are off.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-116
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Display Item List
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
A
FR LH SENSOR 1
[C1104]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
RR RH SENSOR 1
[C1101]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
FR RH SENSOR 1
[C1103]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
RR LH SENSOR 1
[C1102]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power
voltage is unusual.
FR LH SENSOR 2
[C1108]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR RH SENSOR 2
[C1105]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
E
FR RH SENSOR 2
[C1107]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
BRC
RR LH SENSOR 2
[C1106]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
G
STOP LAMP SW
[C1116]
Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction.
BRC-132, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
DECEL G SEN SET
[C1160]
ABS decel sensor adjustment is incomplete.
BRC-141, "Inspection
For Self-diagnosis
Result "DECEL G SEN
SET""
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
[C1143]
Neutral position of steering angle sensor is dislocated, or steering angle sensor is malfunctioning.
BRC-127, "Steering
Angle Sensor System"
YAW RATE SENSOR
[C1145]
Yaw rate sensor has generated an error, or yaw rate sensor signal line is open or shorted.
BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
B
C
BRC-125, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection"
(Note 1)
D
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-117
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
CV1
[C1164]
Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
CV2
[C1165]
Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
SV1
[C1166]
Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is
open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
SV2
[C1167]
Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open
or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
PUMP MOTOR (Note 3)
[C1111]
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor
turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor
turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground.
Check system
BRC-130, "Solenoid and
VDC Change-Over Valve
System Inspection"
BRC-131, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too
low.
BRC-133, "ABS/TCS/
VDC Control Unit Power
and Ground Systems
Inspection"
ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
[C1144]
Neutral position correction of steering angle sensor is not finished.
BRC-141, "Inspection
For Self-diagnosis
Result "ST ANGLE SEN
SIGNAL""
ST ANG SEN COM CIR
[C1156]
CAN communication line or steering angle sensor has generated
an error.
BRC-127, "Steering
Angle Sensor System"
G-SENSOR
[C1113]
G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of G-sensor is open or
shorted.
BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
CONTROLLER FAILURE
[C1110]
Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
BRC-127, "ABS/TCS/
VDC Control Unit
Inspection"
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
Revision: October 2004
●
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction
●
Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more.
BRC-118
BRC-140, "CAN Communication System
Inspection" (Note 2)
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
Side G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of side G-sensor is
open or shorted.
BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
[C1155]
Brake fluid level drops or circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is open or
shorted.
BRC-134, "Brake Fluid
Level Sensor System
Inspection"
ENGIN SIGNAL 1
[C1130]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
C
ENGIN SIGNAL 2
[C1131]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
D
ENGIN SIGNAL 3
[C1132]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
ENGIN SIGNAL 4
[C1133]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
BRC
ENGIN SIGNAL 6
[C1136]
Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning.
G
ACTUATOR RLY
[C1140]
ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction.
BRC-131, "Actuator
Motor, Motor Relay, and
Circuit Inspection"
H
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
[C1142]
ABS pressure sensor circuit malfunction.
BRC-138, "Pressure
Sensor System Inspection"
I
VARIANT CODING
[C1170]
V coding is not malfunctioning.
BRC-127, "ABS/TCS/
VDC Control Unit
Inspection"
J
ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER SV NG
[C1178]
Active booster solenoid is malfunctioning, or signal line of active
booster servo is open or shorted.
BRC-135, "Active
Booster System Inspection"
DELTA S SEN NG
[C1179]
Delta stroke sensor malfunctioning, or signal line of delta stroke
sensor is open or shorted.
BRC-136, "Delta Stroke
Sensor System Inspection"
ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER
RESPONSE NG
[C1181]
Active booster response is malfunctioning, or signal line of active
booster response is open or shorted.
ABS BRAKE RELEASE SW NG
[C1184]
Brake release switch is malfunctioning, or signal line of brake
release switch is open or shorted.
ABS BRAKEBOOSTER DEFECT
[C1189]
Brake booster is defective or malfunctioning.
BRC-126, "Engine System Inspection"
BRC-135, "Active
Booster System Inspection"
Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power
supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check.
Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for
CAN communication line first.
Note 3: "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator
motor relay or circuit.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
A
SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
[C1146]
After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and the CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data
link connector.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-119
2005 Titan
B
E
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
2.
3.
4.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
CAUTION:
When “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning
on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the system selection screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 2.
Return to the Monitor Item Selection screen, and touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS”, or
“SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information.
When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
GEAR
×
×
×
Gear position judged by PNP
switch signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front
RH wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
(V)
×
×
×
Voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
N POSI SIG
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
P POSI SIG
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
ACCEL POS SIG
(%)
×
–
×
Throttle valve open/close status
judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
ENGINE SPEED
(rpm)
×
×
×
Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
STR ANGLE SIG
(deg)
×
–
×
Steering angle detected by steering
angle sensor is displayed.
YAW RATE SEN
(d/s)
×
×
×
Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor is displayed.
DECEL G SEN
(d/s)
×
×
×
Longitudinal acceleration detected
by decel G-sensor is displayed.
SIDE G-SENSOR
×
–
×
Transverse acceleration detected
by side G-sensor is displayed.
STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
OFF SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
VDC OFF switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
(m/s2 )
Revision: October 2004
BRC-120
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
A
SLIP LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
B
FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
OFF LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS actuator relay signal (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
CV1
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Front side switch-over solenoid
valve (cut valve) (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
CV2
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Rear side switch-over solenoid
valve (cut-valve) (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
K
SV1
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Front side switch-over solenoid
valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
L
SV2
(ON/OFF)
–
×
Rear side switch-over solenoid
valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
M
–
VDC FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
VDC fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
TCS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
FLUID LEV SW
(ON/OFF)
×
–
×
Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
TCS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-121
2005 Titan
I
J
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
VDC SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
VDC operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD WARN LAMP
–
–
×
Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
SLCT LVR POSI
×
×
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
R POSI SIG
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
4WD FAIL REQ
–
–
×
The state of 4WD controller is displayed by CAN communication signal.
2WD/4WD
–
–
×
It recognizes on software whether it
is 2WD and whether it is in 4WD
state.
BST OPER SIG
–
–
×
Active booster operation (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
PRESS SENSOR
×
–
×
Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed.
CRANKING SIG
–
–
×
The input state of the key SW
START position signal is displayed.
PRESS SEN 2
–
–
×
Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed.
×
The amount of stroke sensor movements in the active booster
detected by DELTA S SEN is displayed.
×
Release switch signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed. "ON" indicates
that the brake pedal is depressed.
"OFF" is that the brake pedal is
released.
DELTA S SEN
RELEASE SW NO
–
–
–
–
RELEASE SW NC
–
–
×
Release switch signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed. "OFF" indicates that the brake pedal is
depressed on. "ON" is that the
brake pedal is released.
OHB FAIL
–
–
×
OHB fail status is displayed.
HBA FAIL
–
–
×
HBA fail status is displayed.
OHB SIG
–
–
×
OHB operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
HBA SIG
–
–
×
HBA operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
PRES CTRL ACC
–
–
×
Pressure control state (ON/OFF) is
displayed. It is applied only to an
ICC vehicle.
PRES FAIL ACC
–
–
×
Pressure control fail state (ON/
OFF) is displayed. It is applied only
to an ICC vehicle.
STP OFF RLY
–
–
×
Stop lamp relay signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
×: Applicable
–: Not applicable
Revision: October 2004
BRC-122
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ACTIVE TEST
A
CAUTION:
●
Do not perform active test while driving.
●
Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
●
The ABS and brake (EBD) warning lamps turn on during the active test.
B
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect the CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector and start the engine.
C
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
D
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on the display screen.
Touch “ABS”.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
E
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
The test item selection screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
BRC
G
H
LBR379
7.
8.
I
With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”.
The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test.
Solenoid Valve Operation Chart
J
ABS solenoid valve
Operation
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACTUATOR UP
ACTUATOR KEEP
FR RH SOL
FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH SOL
FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH SOL
RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH SOL
RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
REAR SOL
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
NOTE:
●
If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
●
“TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
●
After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-123
2005 Titan
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ABS Motor
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay
operates as shown in table below.
Operation
ON
OFF
ABS actuator relay
ON
ON
ABS motor relay
ON
OFF
NOTE:
●
If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal
stroke may change. This is normal.
●
“TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds
after operation starts.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-124
SFIA0593E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Wheel Sensor System Inspection
PFP:00000
A
EFS004S7
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
B
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
C
D
E
1.
2.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
BRC
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel G
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and H
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
I
NO
>> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-150, "Removal and Installation" .
3. CHECK TIRES
J
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
K
4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
L
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL
BEARING INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" or RAX-6, "Removal
and Installation" .
5. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No.
Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0343E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-125
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and the malfunctioning wheel sensor harness connector E18, E117, C10, or C11.
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
Front LH
Front RH
Rear LH
Rear RH
Wire color
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
Continuity
Wire color
E125 - 45
G/O
E18 - 1
G/O
E125 - 46
BR/W
E18 - 2
BR/W
E125 - 34
B/R
E117 - 1
B/R
E125 - 33
BR
E117 - 2
BR
E125 - 37
P
C11 - 2
P
E125 - 36
L
C11 - 1
L
E125 - 42
V
C10 - 2
V
E125 - 43
G/Y
C10 - 1
G/Y
Yes
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Engine System Inspection
EFS004S8
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
ENGINE SIGNAL 2
ENGINE SIGNAL 3
ENGINE SIGNAL 4
ENGINE SIGNAL 6
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-126
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection
EFS004S9
A
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
B
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
C
CONTROLLER FAILURE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
D
Steering Angle Sensor System
E
EFS004SA
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
BRC
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
G
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
ST ANG SEN COM CIR
Is above displayed in self-diagnosis item?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
H
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
Disconnect steering angle sensor connector M47 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. Repair or replace as
necessary.
2. Reconnect connectors and repeat ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
IS "ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT" or "ST ANG SEN COM CIR" DISPLAYED?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End.
3. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Check CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect steering angle sensor
connector M47 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
connector E125.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 and steering angle sensor connector M47.
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125
11 (L)
15 (P)
Steering angle
sensor
harness connector M47
3 (L)
4 (P)
WFIA0224E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-127
K
L
M
Continuity
Yes
Yes
J
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
4. CHECK DATA MONITOR
1.
2.
Connect steering angle sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use “DATA MONITOR” to check if the status of "STR ANGLE SIG" is normal.
Steering condition
Data monitor
Straight-ahead
–3.5 deg to +3.5 deg
Turn wheel to the right by 90°
Approx. - 90deg
Turn wheel to the left by 90°
Approx. + 90deg
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable (steering angle sensor) and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" .
Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection
EFS004SB
CAUTION:
Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. when VDC function is OFF may
cause the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor system to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal
operation can be resumed after restarting the engine.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
YAW RATE SENSOR
SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
G-SENSOR
CAUTION:
If vehicle is on turn table at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indicator lamp may illuminate and CONSULT-II self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system malfunction. However, in this case there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off of turn
table or other moving surface, and start engine. Results will return to normal.
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and yaw rate/side/decel G sensor
connector M108.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-128
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3. YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR HARNESS INSPECTION
1.
2.
A
Turn off the ignition switch and disconnect yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and the yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor
harness connector M108
6 (Y/R)
3 (Y/R)
24 (P)
5 (P)
25 (G/R)
1 (G/R)
29 (G/W)
2 (G/W)
C
Continuity
D
Yes
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
BRC
G
4. YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
B
Connect the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125.
Use “DATA MONITOR” to check if the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor signals are normal.
Vehicle status
Yaw rate sensor
(Data monitor standard)
Side G sensor
(Data monitor standard)
Decel G Sensor
(Data monitor standard)
When stopped
-4 to +4 deg/s
-1.1 to +1.1 m/s
-0.11 G to +0.11 G
Right turn
Negative value
Negative value
-
Left turn
Positive value
Positive value
-
Speed up
-
-
Negative value
Speed down
-
-
Positive value
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-155, "Removal and Installation" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-129
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection
EFS004SC
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
FR LH IN ABS SOL
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
RR RH IN ABS SOL
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
FR RH IN ABS SOL
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RR LH IN ABS SOL
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
CV 1
CV 2
SV 1
SV 2
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-130
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3.
1.
CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND
A
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
32 (B/Y)
Body
ground
—
B
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
C
D
WFIA0195E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
16 (B)
47 (B)
Body
ground
—
—
E
Measured
value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection
BRC
G
WFIA0196E
H
I
EFS004SD
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
J
Check self-diagnosis results.
K
Self-diagnosis results
PUMP MOTOR
L
ACTUATOR RLY
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
M
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-131
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3.
1.
CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
1 (Y)
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
Body
ground
—
WFIA0209E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
harness connector E125
16 (B)
47 (B)
Measured
value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
Body
ground
—
—
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection
WFIA0196E
EFS004SE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
STOP LAMP SW
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-132
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3. STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION
A
Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminal 41 (R/B) and body
ground.
B
Brake pedal depressed
: Battery voltage
(approx. 12V)
Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
D
WFIA0198E
E
4. STOP LAMP RELAY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect the stop lamp relay harness connector E12.
Check the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector E125 terminal 41 (R/B) and
stop lamp relay harness connector E12 terminal 4 (R/B).
BRC
G
Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Refer to LT-98, "STOP LAMP" .
H
I
LFIA0218E
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection
EFS004SF
J
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
K
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
L
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
M
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-133
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3. ABS/TCS/VDC CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground.
Signal name
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
harness connector E125
Power supply
Body
ground
Measured value
—
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
—
Continuity should exist.
1 (Y)
32 (B/Y)
Ground
16 (B)
47 (B)
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Brake Fluid Level Sensor System Inspection
EFS004SG
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
1.
2.
Check the brake reservoir tank fluid level. If the level is low, add brake fluid.
Erase the self-diagnosis results and check the self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and brake fluid level switch
connector E21.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-134
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3. CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR AND THE ABS ACTUATOR
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check the continuity between the brake fluid level switch harness connector E21 and the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Brake fluid level switch harness
connector E21
Continuity
8 (P/B)
1 (P/B)
Yes
8 (P/B)
Ground
No
Ground
2 (B)
Yes
B
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Active Booster System Inspection
A
E
BRC
EFS004SH
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
G
1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
H
Self-diagnosis results
ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER SV NG
I
ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER RESPONSE
ABS BRAKE RELEASE SWITCH NG
ABS BRAKEBOOSTER DEFECT
J
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
K
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
L
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the active booster connector E49 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair connector.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-135
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3. ACTIVE BOOSTER CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and
active booster connector E49.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Active booster connector
E49
17 (W/R)
3 (W/R)
27 (L/B)
1 (L/B)
28 (Y/B)
5 (Y/B)
30 (LG/R)
2 (LG/R)
31 (W/G)
4 (W/G)
Continuity
Yes
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body
ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Body ground
Continuity
—
No
17 (W/R)
27 (L/B)
28 (Y/B)
30 (LG/R)
31 (W/G)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
4. ACTIVE BOOSTER SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
Reconnect the active booster and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "RELEASE SW NO" and "RELEASE SW NC" is normal.
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
Data monitor display
RELEASE SW NO
RELEASE SW NC
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace active booster. Refer to BR-19, "With ABS or BLSD" .
Delta Stroke Sensor System Inspection
EFS004SI
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
DELTA S SEN NG
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-136
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
A
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the delta stroke sensor connector E114 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair connector.
B
C
3. DELTA STROKE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and delta
stroke sensor connector E114.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Delta stroke sensor
connector E114
26 (W/V)
1 (W/V)
39 (G/B)
3 (G/B)
40 (R/Y)
5 (R/Y)
E
Continuity
BRC
Yes
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body
ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
D
G
Body ground
Continuity
H
—
No
I
26 (W/V)
39 (G/B)
40 (R/Y)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
J
4. DELTA STROKE SENSOR INSPECTION
K
1.
2.
L
Reconnect the delta stroke sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "DELTA S SEN" is normal.
Data monitor display (Approx.)
DELTA S SEN
0.00 mm (+0.6/-0.4)
1.05–1.80 mm
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace delta stroke sensor. Refer to BR-19, "With ABS or BLSD" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-137
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Pressure Sensor System Inspection
EFS004SJ
FRONT PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front pressure sensor connector E31 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair connector.
3. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125
and front pressure sensor harness connector E31.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Front pressure sensor harness connector E31
18 (LG)
3 (LG)
19 (SB)
1 (SB)
20 (R/L)
2 (R/L)
Continuity
Yes
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125
and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector
E125
Body ground
Continuity
—
No
18 (LG)
19 (SB)
20 (R/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-138
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
4. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
A
Reconnect the front pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SENSOR" is normal.
B
Data monitor display (Approx.)
PRESS SENSOR
Positive value
0 bar
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace front pressure sensor. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" .
D
REAR PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE
E
1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
BRC
Self-diagnosis results
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
G
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
H
2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
I
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the rear pressure sensor connector E32 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair connector.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-139
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and rear
pressure sensor connector E32.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Rear pressure sensor connector E32
21 (R/G)
1 (R/G)
22 (W/L)
3 (W/L)
23 (W/O)
2 (W/O)
Continuity
Yes
Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body
ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125
Body ground
Continuity
—
No
21 (R/G)
22 (W/L)
23 (W/O)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
4. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
Reconnect the rear pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SEN 2" is normal.
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
Data monitor display (Approx.)
PRESS SEN 2
Positive value
0 bar
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace rear pressure sensor. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" .
CAN Communication System Inspection
EFS004SK
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check
the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
NO
>> Connector terminal is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-140
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL"
EFS004SL
A
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
C
ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
Do self-diagnosis results indicate anything other than shown above?
YES >> Perform repair or replacement for the item indicated.
NO
>> Perform adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position. Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" . GO TO 2.
D
2. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
E
1. Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON and erase self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
Are any self-diagnosis results displayed?
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-154, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "DECEL G SEN SET"
BRC
G
EFS004SM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
H
1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Check self-diagnosis results.
I
Self-diagnosis results
DECEL G SEN SET
Do self-diagnosis results indicate anything other than shown above?
YES >> Perform repair or replacement for the item indicated.
NO
>> Perform calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor" . GO TO 2.
J
K
2. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
L
1. Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON and erase self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
Are any self-diagnosis results displayed?
YES >> Replace yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-155, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
VDC OFF Indicator lamp Does Not Illuminate
M
EFS004SN
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. CHECK VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Do the ABS warning lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp illuminate?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-141
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Component Inspection
EFS004SO
VDC OFF SWITCH
Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
1-2
: Continuity should exist when pushing the
switch.
Continuity should not exist when releasing
the switch.
PFIA0307E
Revision: October 2004
BRC-142
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS Works Frequently
PFP:99999
A
EFS005FS
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
B
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
C
D
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
●
Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
●
Wheel sensors for physical damage
●
Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
●
Sensor rotor and mount for physical damage (rear only)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
E
BRC
G
3. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLES
H
Check front and rear axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or
RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
I
J
4. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" .
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" .
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-143
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Unexpected Pedal Action
EFS005FT
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke.
Is pedal stroke excessive?
YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic
Inspection" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
SBR540A
3. CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" .
4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
●
Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
●
Wheel sensors for physical damage
●
Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector. Then retest.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-144
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Long Stopping Distance
EFS005FU
A
1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to BRC-143, "ABS Works Frequently" .
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" .
ABS Does Not Work
B
C
D
E
EFS005FV
BRC
CAUTION:
The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
G
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation.
●
Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
NG
>> Go to BRC-146, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" .
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise
H
I
EFS005FW
NOTE:
During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
J
K
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
L
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom occur only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2. RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on?
YES
NO
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-143, "ABS Works Frequently" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-145
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS005FX
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSES
Check 40A fusible link i and 30A fusible link h for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link
layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing.
2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 1 (Y) and ground and terminal 32 (B/Y)
and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
WFIA0199E
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 16 (B) and ground and terminal 47 (B) and
ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
WFIA0196E
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS005FY
1. CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis?
YES >> Refer to BRC-117, "Display Item List" .
NO
>> Refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-146
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation
EFS005FZ
A
1. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
B
C
2. ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION
D
Perform data monitor with CONSULT-II for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
E
3. ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
BRC
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
4. TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform TCM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
I
J
5. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the
terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
6. CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION
L
M
Check the CAN communication system. Refer to BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
K
BRC-147
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
PFP:00000
EFS004SX
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to
adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE:
Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine).
3. Touch “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ST ANGLE SENSOR
ADJUSTMENT” on CONSULT-II screen in this order.
BBIA0369E
4.
Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle
sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.)
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then
stop.
8. Select “DATA MONITOR”, “SELECTION FROM MENU”, and
“STR ANGLE SIG” on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
“STR ANGLE SIG” is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
WFIA0239E
EFS004SY
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be
sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE:
Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION:
● The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
● Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition
switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this
order. Refer to BRC-115, "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-148
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
4.
Touch "START".
CAUTION:
Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.)
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION:
Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then
stop.
SFIA1162E
8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and
"DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is
more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-149
2005 Titan
WHEEL SENSORS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
PFP:47910
EFS004SZ
WFIA0374E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wheel sensor mounting screw.
● When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
● Do not pull on the sensor harness.
Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Before installing wheel sensors,
●
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
●
Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that
dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
●
Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
BRC-150
2005 Titan
SENSOR ROTOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:47970
A
EFS004T0
FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub
and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" .
REAR
Removal
1.
2.
C
Remove axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
NOTE:
It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number
B
: 205-D002 (
D
— )
E
Installation
1.
2.
Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor
rotor is fully seated.
BRC
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
G
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-151
2005 Titan
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
PFP:47660
EFS004T1
WFIA0375E
1. To rear left
2. To rear right
4. To front right
5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side
3. To front left
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
8. Harness connector
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" .
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION:
● To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Revision: October 2004
BRC-152
2005 Titan
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
●
Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PIPING AND
HOSE" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following.
–
Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-11,
"Bleeding Brake System" .
–
Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position" .
–
Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor" .
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-153
2005 Titan
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:25554
EFS004T2
NOTE:
The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable.
Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
BRC-154
2005 Titan
G SENSOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:47930
A
EFS004T3
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove center console or center seat as required. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY"
or SE-91, "FRONT SEAT" .
Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown.
● The location of the sensor it the same for all models.
CAUTION:
● Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/
decel G sensor.
● Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/
decel G sensor.
B
C
D
E
WFIA0230E
INSTALLATION
BRC
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
BRC-155
2005 Titan
G SENSOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Revision: October 2004
BRC-156
2005 Titan
B ENGINE
A
CO
SECTION
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ............................................... 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .......................... 6
Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 6
COOLING SYSTEM .................................................... 8
Cooling Circuit .......................................................... 8
System Drawing ....................................................... 9
ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 10
Inspection ............................................................... 10
LEVEL CHECK ................................................... 10
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS... 10
CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP ........................... 10
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 10
Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 10
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 10
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT .........................11
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ..........................11
RADIATOR ................................................................ 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 14
Revision: October 2004
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 14
Checking Radiator .................................................. 14
ENGINE COOLING FAN ........................................... 15
Removal and Installation (Crankshaft driven type)... 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 15
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 15
Removal and Installation (Motor driven type) ......... 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
WATER PUMP .......................................................... 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 17
REMOVAL ........................................................... 17
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 18
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING ...................... 19
Removal and Installation ........................................ 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 20
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 20
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 21
Standard and Limit .................................................. 21
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) .................................................................. 21
THERMOSTAT .................................................... 21
RADIATOR .......................................................... 21
CO-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EBS00KNE
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
EBS00NIL
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
and remove the old liquid gasket sealing using Tool.
Tool number
●
●
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
Tap the seal cutter to insert it.
In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, lightly tap to slide it.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove the old liquid gasket adhering to the gasket application
surface and the mating surface using suitable tool.
● Remove the liquid gasket completely from the groove of the
liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign material.
PBIC0003E
Revision: October 2004
CO-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
3.
Attach the liquid gasket tube to the Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
A
)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Apply the liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location
with the specified dimensions.
CO
C
WBIA0567E
D
If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply the
liquid gasket to the groove.
● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the liquid gasket inside
the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be
applied outside the holes.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If the liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten after the installation.
● Wait 30 minutes or more after installation before refilling the
engine with engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
E
F
G
SEM159F
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
CO-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EBS00KNG
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
NT046
WS39930000
(
—
)
Tube pressure
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
S-NT052
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
—
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
WBIA0539E
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00KNH
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Radiator cap tester
Checking radiator and radiator cap
PBIC1982E
Revision: October 2004
CO-4
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool name
Description
Coolant system tester adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to reservoir filler
neck
A
CO
C
WBIA0408E
Coolant system tester adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to reservoir cap
D
E
WBIA0409E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
CO-5
2005 Titan
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00012
EBS00KNI
Symptom
Check items
Water pump malfunction
Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed
—
Dust contamination or
paper clogging
Damaged fins
Physical damage
Poor heat transfer
Clogged radiator cooling
tube
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Water cut valve malfunction
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.), physical damage
—
Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow
High resistance to fan rotation
Fan assembly
—
Damaged fan blades
Cooling system parts
malfunction
Damaged radiator shroud
—
—
—
Improper engine coolant
mixture ratio
—
—
—
Poor engine coolant quality
—
Engine coolant density
—
Loose clamp
Cooling hose
Water pump
Cracked hose
Poor sealing
Loose
Radiator cap
Engine coolant leaks
Poor sealing
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting
Insufficient engine coolant
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank
Overflowing reservoir tank
Revision: October 2004
CO-6
Exhaust gas leaks into
cooling system
Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket deterioration
2005 Titan
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Symptom
Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Abusive driving
Driving in low gear for
extended time
A
CO
Driving at extremely high
speed
—
Overload on engine
Installed improper size
wheels and tires
Except cooling system
parts malfunction
C
Powertrain system malfunction
—
D
Dragging brakes
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper
E
—
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille
Blocked or restricted air
flow
Blocked radiator
Mud contamination or
paper clogging
F
—
—
Blocked condenser
G
Blocked air flow
Installed large fog lamp
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
CO-7
2005 Titan
COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling Circuit
PFP:21020
EBS00KNJ
WBIA0439E
Revision: October 2004
CO-8
2005 Titan
COOLING SYSTEM
System Drawing
EBS00KNK
A
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0463E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
CO-9
2005 Titan
ENGINE COOLANT
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection
PFP:KQ100
EBS00KNL
LEVEL CHECK
●
●
Check if the engine coolant reservoir tank level is within MIN to
MAX level when engine is cool.
Adjust engine coolant level as necessary.
SMA412B
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator or reservoir.
●
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system at
the reservoir filler neck using suitable tool and Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Leakage test pressure
●
: 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm, 20 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
NOTE:
In case that engine coolant decreases, replenish cooling system
with engine coolant.
If any concerns are found, repair or replace damaged parts.
WBIA0612E
CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP
●
Check reservoir cap relief pressure using suitable tool and Tool.
Tool number
Standard
●
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
: 95 - 125 kPa (0.97 - 1.28 kg/cm2 , 14 - 18 psi)
NOTE:
Apply engine coolant to the cap seal.
Replace the reservoir cap if there is any damage in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of
the limit.
WBIA0611E
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
Inspect the radiator cap.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
●
Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
●
Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the
metal retainer.
Changing Engine Coolant
EBS00KNM
Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Revision: October 2004
CO-10
2005 Titan
ENGINE COOLANT
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
A
Refer to MA-14, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" .
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
Refer to MA-15, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" .
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
CO-11
2005 Titan
RADIATOR
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:21400
EBS00KNN
WBIA0440E
1.
Radiator
2.
Bolt
3.
Mounting rubber
4.
A/T fluid cooler hose
5.
Radiator hose (lower)
6.
Flaps
7.
Radiator shroud (upper)
8.
Radiator shroud (lower)
9.
Drain plug
10. Radiator hose (upper)
11. Reservoir tank hose
13. Reservoir tank
14. Reservoir tank cap
12. By-pass hose
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
2. Remove air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
3. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses.
● Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses from radiator.
CAUTION:
Do not allow coolant to contact drive belts.
Revision: October 2004
CO-12
2005 Titan
RADIATOR
5.
Remove the lower radiator shroud.
● Release the tabs, pull lower radiator shroud rearwards and
down to remove.
A
CO
C
WBIA0407E
D
6.
Remove the radiator shroud upper bolts and remove the radiator
shroud upper.
E
F
G
PBIC1535E
7.
H
Remove the A/C condenser bolts and brackets.
NOTE:
Lift A/C condenser up and forward to remove from radiator.
I
J
K
WBIA0395E
8.
Remove A/T oil cooler bolts and oil cooler from radiator and
position aside.
L
M
WBIA0396E
Revision: October 2004
CO-13
2005 Titan
RADIATOR
9.
Lift up and remove the radiator.
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and
radiator core when removing.
PBIC1536E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant and A/T fluid.
Checking Radiator
EBS00KNP
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
●
When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from
entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces.
3. Stop washing when dirt and debris no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8
in).
Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces until no water sprays out.
●
5.
Revision: October 2004
CO-14
2005 Titan
ENGINE COOLING FAN
ENGINE COOLING FAN
Removal and Installation (Crankshaft driven type)
PFP:21140
A
EBS00KNQ
CO
C
D
WBIA0632E
1.
Cooling fan
4.
Cooling fan pulley
2.
Fan coupling
3.
E
Fan bracket
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F
Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
Remove the lower radiator shroud. Refer to CO-12, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the cooling fan.
G
H
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Fan Coupling
Inspect fan coupling for oil leakage and bimetal conditions.
I
J
K
SLC072
L
Fan Bracket
●
●
Visually check that there is no significant looseness in the fan
bracket shaft, and that it turns smoothly by hand.
If there are any unusual concerns, replace the cooling fan pulley.
M
WBIA0418E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install cooling fan with its front mark “F” facing front of engine. Refer to CO-15, "Removal and Installation
(Crankshaft driven type)" .
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
Revision: October 2004
CO-15
2005 Titan
ENGINE COOLING FAN
●
Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no leaks of the engine coolant.
Removal and Installation (Motor driven type)
EBS00KNR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove front grille. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect harness connector from fan motor.
Remove the bolt and remove the fan grille and motor assembly.
WBIA0397E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Cooling fan is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-436, "Cooling Fan Operation" .
Revision: October 2004
CO-16
2005 Titan
WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
PFP:21020
A
EBS00KNS
CO
C
D
E
F
KBIA2543E
1.
Gasket
2.
Water pump
3.
Water pump pulley
H
CAUTION:
●
When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
●
Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole. Refer to MA-13,
"DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the water pump pulley.
Remove the water pump.
● Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION:
Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water
pump body and vane.
Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it
turns smoothly when rotated by hand.
Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary.
KBIA2552E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
G
CO-17
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
WATER PUMP
●
After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Refer to MA-14, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT"
.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Revision: October 2004
CO-18
2005 Titan
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
PFP:21200
A
EBS00KNT
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
KBIA2501E
K
1.
Heater pipe
2.
Gasket
3.
Water outlet
4.
Gasket
5.
O-ring
6.
O-ring
7.
Thermostat housing
8.
Rubber ring
9.
Thermostat
10.
Water inlet
11.
Water suction hose
12.
Water suction pipe
13.
Gasket
14.
Heater pipe
L
M
REMOVAL
Removal of Thermostat
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the engine room cover using power tools.
Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet.
Remove the water inlet and thermostat.
Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe
1.
2.
Remove the intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe.
Revision: October 2004
CO-19
2005 Titan
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Removal of Water Cut Valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
Disconnect the heater hoses.
Disconnect the water valve electrical connector.
Remove the water cut valve.
Installation of Water Cut Valve
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Check for leaks of the engine coolant using suitable tool. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
●
Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there is no leaks of the engine coolant.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
●
Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat.
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring.
The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the
valve opens and falls from the thread.
Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature.
SLC252B
Standard values:
Thermostat
Valve opening temperature
80 - 84°C (176 - 183° F)
Full-open lift amount
More than 10 mm/ 95°C (0.39 in/ 203°F)
Valve closing temperature
77°C (171°F) or lower
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Installation of Thermostat
●
●
Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each
flange part fit securely inside the rubber ring as shown.
Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards.
KBIA2502E
Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe
First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings, then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and
heater pipe into the installation holes.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Revision: October 2004
CO-20
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
PFP:00030
A
EBS00KNU
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:
Engine coolant capacity with reservoir (“MAX” level)
(US gal, Imp gal)
12.2 (3 1/4, 2 5/8)
CO
THERMOSTAT
Valve opening temperature
C
80° - 84°C (176° - 183°F)
Maximum valve lift
More than 10 mm at 95°C (0.39 in at 203°F)
Valve closing temperature
77°C (171°F) or lower
D
RADIATOR
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Reservoir cap relief pressure
Standard
E
95 - 125 (0.97- 1.28, 14 - 18)
Leakage test pressure
137 (1.4, 20)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
CO-21
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
CO-22
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
COMBINATION METERS ........................................... 5
System Description .................................................. 5
UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT ...................... 5
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 6
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 6
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE ....................... 6
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 6
VOLTAGE GAUGE ................................................ 6
TACHOMETER ..................................................... 6
FUEL GAUGE ....................................................... 6
SPEEDOMETER ................................................... 6
CAN Communication System Description ................ 7
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 7
Combination Meter ................................................... 8
CHECK .................................................................. 8
Circuit Diagram ........................................................ 9
Wiring Diagram — METER — ................................ 10
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination
Meter ...................................................................... 12
Meter/Gauge Operation and Do/Trip Meter ............ 13
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .......................... 13
HOW TO INITIATE COMBINATION METER
SELF- DIAGNOSIS MODE ................................. 13
COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS
MODE FUNCTIONS ........................................... 13
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 17
Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 17
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ........ 18
Symptom Chart ...................................................... 19
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection ............................ 19
Water Temperature Signal Inspection .................... 19
Engine Speed Signal Inspection ............................ 19
Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection ................... 20
Revision: October 2004
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection .......................... 22
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT ............................. 22
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ............................. 22
Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or
Varies ...................................................................... 24
Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position ........... 24
Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 25
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK ................ 25
Removal and Installation of Combination Meter ..... 25
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER ........................... 26
System Description ................................................. 26
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ................. 26
DIRECTION DISPLAY ......................................... 26
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS — ............................. 27
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 28
PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER... 28
INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER ..................................................................... 28
Calibration Procedure for Compass ....................... 29
CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS ...... 29
INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR
COMPASS ........................................................... 29
WARNING LAMPS .................................................... 30
Schematic ............................................................... 30
Wiring Diagram — WARN — .................................. 31
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition
Switch ON) ............................................................. 37
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil
Pressure Is Normal) ................................................ 39
A/T INDICATOR ........................................................ 40
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — ................................. 40
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ........................... 41
WARNING CHIME ..................................................... 42
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 42
System Description ................................................. 43
FUNCTION .......................................................... 43
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME ..................... 43
LIGHT WARNING CHIME ................................... 43
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ........................... 44
CAN Communication System Description .............. 44
DI-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — ................................. 45
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................ 47
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination
Meter ...................................................................... 48
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 48
Preliminary Check .................................................. 48
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 48
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 50
CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE
... 50
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 51
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 51
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ........................... 52
All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate ...................... 52
Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do
Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) ......................................................................... 53
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................. 54
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate ................ 56
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate ......... 57
REAR SONAR SYSTEM ........................................... 59
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 59
System Description ................................................. 60
FUNCTION .......................................................... 60
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH .............. 60
Revision: October 2004
DI-2
SONAR BUZZER .................................................60
REAR SONAR SENSOR .....................................61
Wiring Diagram — SONAR — ................................62
Terminals And Reference Value For Sonar Control
Unit ..........................................................................64
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................64
Pre-diagnosis Inspection .........................................65
SENSOR STATUS CHECK .................................65
Self-diagnosis Function ...........................................65
ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE .....................65
REQUESTING NUMBER OF FAULT CODES
MODE ..................................................................65
REQUESTING FAULT CODES MODE ................66
IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE...66
Preliminary Check ...................................................67
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT .............................................67
Symptom Chart .......................................................68
Component Inspection ............................................69
SONAR BUZZER .................................................69
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH ..............69
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR .........70
Removal and Installation of Rear Sonar System ...70
REAR SONAR SENSORS ...................................70
SONAR CONTROL UNIT ....................................70
2005 Titan
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTION
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EKS00ACO
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
EKS00ACP
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
●
Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
PFP:00002
EKS00ACQ
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts.
PBIC0191E
Revision: October 2004
DI-4
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
COMBINATION METERS
System Description
PFP:24814
A
EKS00ACR
UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT
●
●
●
●
●
Speedometer, odometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge, voltage meter, A/T temperature
gauge, and water temperature gauge are controlled by the unified meter control unit, which is built into the
combination meter.
Warning indicators are controlled by signals drawn from the CAN communication system, and components connected directly to the combination meter.
Digital meter is adopted for odometer/trip meters*, as well as the A/T position indicator display.
*The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected.
Odometer/trip meters and A/T indicator segments can be checked in diagnosis mode.
Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode.
Illumination control
B
C
D
E
The unified meter control unit outputs the speedometer, odometer/trip meters, tachometer, engine oil pressure
gauge, voltage meter, A/T indicator, A/T oil temperature gauge, fuel and temperature gauge lighting when the
ignition switch is turned on. When the headlamp (combination) switch is turned on, the illumination control
switch can be used to adjust the brightness of the combination meter illumination and the odometer/trip meters
and meter illumination. When the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position, the combination
meter dial lighting will remain off for 0.7 seconds. For additional combination meter illumination control information, refer to LT-151, "System Description" .
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-5
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 8.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No.14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 24.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No.4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through combination meter terminal 22
●
to oil pressure sensor terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 21
●
through oil pressure sensor terminal 3.
The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor
●
through oil pressure sensor terminal 2
●
to combination meter terminal 20.
NOTE:
This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. Use the oil level gauge to check the oil level.
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature.
TCM provides a A/T oil temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
VOLTAGE GAUGE
The voltage gauge indicates the battery/charging system voltage.
The voltage gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 15.
●
through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2
●
through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5
●
from combination meter terminal 16.
SPEEDOMETER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN
communication lines.
Revision: October 2004
DI-6
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
CAN Communication System Description
EKS00ACS
A
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EKS00ACT
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA3520E
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-7
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Combination Meter
EKS00ACU
CHECK
WKIA3521E
Revision: October 2004
DI-8
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Circuit Diagram
EKS00ACV
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2379E
Revision: October 2004
DI-9
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Wiring Diagram — METER —
EKS00ACW
WKWA2380E
Revision: October 2004
DI-10
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2381E
Revision: October 2004
DI-11
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
1
O
Condition
EKS00ACX
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
Ignition switch ACC or
ON
ACC
—
Battery voltage
Battery power supply
Item
8
Y/R
OFF
—
Battery voltage
11
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
12
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
15
Y/L
Fuel level sensor signal
—
—
Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor
Unit Inspection" .
16
B/P
Fuel level sensor and oil
pressure sensor ground
ON
—
Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor
Unit Inspection" .
17
B
Ground
—
—
18
BR
Illumination control switch
—
20
Y
Oil pressure sensor signal
ON
—
0 - 5V
22
GR/L
Oil pressure sensor
power supply
ON
—
5V
24
O/L
Ignition switch ON or
START
ON
—
Battery voltage
Revision: October 2004
Lighting switch ON
DI-12
0V
Refer to LT-152, "ILLUMINATION
OPERATION BY LIGHTING
SWITCH" .
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Meter/Gauge Operation and Do/Trip Meter
EKS00ACY
A
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
The following items can be checked during Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode.
●
Gauge sweep and present gauge values.
●
Illuminates all odometer, fuel, and engine temperature segments.
●
Illuminates all micro controlled lamps/LEDs regardless of switch configuration.
●
Displays estimated present battery voltage.
●
Displays seat belt buckle switch LH status.
B
C
HOW TO INITIATE COMBINATION METER SELF- DIAGNOSIS MODE
NOTE:
Once entered, Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode will function with the ignition switch in ON or START.
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode will exit upon turning the ignition switch to OFF or ACC.
To initiate Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode, refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON, while holding the odometer/trip meter switch for 5 - 8 seconds.
NOTE:
If the diagnosis function is activated the odometer/trip meter will display tESt.
D
E
F
COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE FUNCTIONS
To interpret Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode functions, refer to the following table.
G
Event
Odometer/trip meter A/B
switch held from 5 to 8
seconds (or until
released)
Odometer Display
Description of Test/Data
tESt
Notes:
Return to normal operation of all lamps/LEDs and
displays hex ROM rev. If
a ROM checksum fault
exists, display alternates
between "r XXXX" and
"FAIL".
I
Odometer/trip meter A/B
switch engaged and
released = next test
requested
rXXXX, FAIL
Next test requested
nrXXXX
Displays hex ROM rev as
stored in NVM.
GAGE
Performs sweep of all
gauges, then displays
present gauge values.
Performs checksum tests
on ROM and EE.
Gauges sweep within 10 seconds
Next test requested
(All segments illuminated)
Lights all odometer/trip
meter, fuel, and engine
temperature display segments.
Initiating self-diagnosis mode
complete
Next test requested
bulb
Illuminates all micro-controlled lamps/LEDs
regardless of SW configuration.
Next test requested
EE XX, FAIL
Hex EE level. If EE
checksum fault exists,
display alternates
between "EE XX" and
"FAIL".
Next test requested
dtXXXX
Hex coding of final manufacturing test date.
Next test requested
Revision: October 2004
H
Initiating self-diagnosis mode
DI-13
J
DI
L
M
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Event
Odometer Display
Description of Test/Data
Notes:
Next test requested
Sc1XX
Displays 8-bit software
configuration value in Hex
format.
Bit Coding
7-3 = reserved for future use
2 = TCS/VDC 0 = not present
1 = present
1 = Shift type 0 = Column shift
1 = Floor shift
0 = ICC
0 = not present
1 = present
Next test requested
Sc2XX
Displays 8-bit software
configuration value in Hex
format.
Bit coding
7-0 = Reserved for future use
Next test requested
EprXX
Displays 8-bit software
configuration value in Hex
format.
Bit Coding
7-2 = reserved for future use
1 = A/T Oil Temp (gauge)
0 = not present
1 = present
1 = Odo Units 0 = kilometers
1 = miles
Next test requested
1nFXX
Displays 8-bit market info
value in Hex format.
$31 = USA
$2A = Canada
Next test requested
cYLXX
Displays 8-bit engine configuration value in Hex
format.
$08 = 8 cylinder
$06 = 6 cylinder
Next test requested
FFXXXX
Displays 16-bit fuel flow
constant "Q" in tenths of
cc/min in Hex format.
$0000 - $FFFF
Next test requested
tF
Displays 16-bit tire factor
"A" in hundredths in Hex
format.
$0000 - $FFFF
Next test requested
ot1XX
Displays oil pressure telltale "on" threshold in A/D
counts in Hex format.
$00 - $FF
Next test requested
ot0XX
Displays oil pressure telltale "off" threshold in A/D
counts in Hex format.
$00 - $FF
XXXXX
Raw uncompensated
english speed value in
hundredths of MPH.
Speedometer indicates
present speed.
Will display "-----" if message is
not received. Will display
"99999" if data received is
invalid
Next test requested
XXXXX
Raw uncompensated
metric speed value in
hundredths of KPH.
Speedometer indicates
present speed.
Will display "-----" if message is
not received. Will display
"99999" if data received is
invalid
Next test requested
tXXXX
Tachometer value in
RPM. Tachometer indicates present RPM.
Will display "-----" if message is
not received.
F1 XXXX
Present ratioed fuel level
A/D input 1 in decimal format. Fuel gauge indicates
present filtered level.
000-009 = Short circuit
010-254 = Normal range
255 = Open circuit
--- = Missing 5 seconds
XXXC
Last temperature gauge
input value in degrees C.
Temperature gauge indicates present filtered temperature.
Will display "---"C if message is
not received.
Will display "999" if data
received is invalid.
Next test requested
Next test requested
Next test requested
Revision: October 2004
DI-14
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Event
Odometer Display
Description of Test/Data
Notes:
A
Next test requested
BAtXX.X
Estimated present battery voltage.
Next test requested
rES -X
Seat belt buckle switch
LH status.
Next test requested
PA -XX
Hex value port A.
Next test requested
Pb -XX
Hex value port B.
Next test requested
PE -XX
Hex value port E.
Next test requested
PL -XX
Hex value port L.
Next test requested
P6 -XX
Hex value port K.
Next test requested
Pn -XX
Hex value port M.
Next test requested
PP -XX
Hex value port P.
Next test requested
PS -XX
Hex value port S.
Next test requested
Pt -XX
Hex value port T.
Next test requested
Pu -XX
Hex value port U.
Next test requested
P4 -XX
Hex value port V.
Next test requested
Puu -XX
Hex value port W.
Next test requested
A01XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A02XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A03XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A04XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A05XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A06XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A07XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A08XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A09XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A10XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A11XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A12XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A13XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A14XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
A15XXX
A/D port A/D value (nonratioed).
0-255
Next test requested
PA0-XX
Hex value representing
state of A/D ports 0-7.
Next test requested
PA1-XX
Hex value representing
state of A/D ports 0-7.
Revision: October 2004
DI-15
1= Buckled
0 = Unbuckled
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Event
Odometer Display
Description of Test/Data
Notes:
Next test requested
Thr-XXX
Decimal value of thermistor A/D reading.
0-255
Next test requested
D-HI
Meter/LCD Illumination.
Full daytime brightness all
LCD segments active
Next test requested
N-HI
Meter/LCD Illumination.
Full nighttime brightness all
LCD segments active
Next test requested
N-LO
Meter/LCD Illumination.
Min. nighttime brightness all
LCD segments active
Next test requested
GAGE
Revision: October 2004
Return to beginning of selfdiagnosis.
DI-16
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00ACZ
A
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-17, "Diagnosis Flow" .
According to the symptom chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom.
Does the meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2.
Inspection End.
Diagnosis Flow
B
EKS00AD0
C
1. CHECK WARNING INDICATOR ILLUMINATION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure warning indicators (such as malfunction indicator lamp and oil pressure low/coolant temperature high warning indicator) illuminate.
Do warning indicators illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check ignition power supply system of combination meter. Refer to DI-18, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Inspection" .
D
E
F
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION OF COMBINATION METER
Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-13, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
Does self-diagnosis function operate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit. Refer to DI-18, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Inspection" .
3. CHECK ODOMETER OPERATION
G
H
I
Check segment display status of odometer.
Is the display normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
J
DI
L
WKIA1531E
4. CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT
M
Check indication of each meter/gauge in self-diagnosis mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to DI-19, "Symptom Chart" .
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
WKIA1532E
Revision: October 2004
DI-17
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
EKS00AD1
1. CHECK FUSES
Check for blown combination meter fuses.
Unit
Power source
Combination meter
Fuse No.
Battery
19
Ignition switch ON or START
14
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
Refer to DI-10, "Wiring Diagram — METER —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
1 (O)
M24
8 (Y/R)
Ground
24 (O/L)
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
WKIA1815E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the harness for open between combination meter and fuse.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M24
17 (B)
Ground
Continuity
Yes
WKIA1526E
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
DI-18
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Symptom Chart
EKS00AD2
A
Trouble phenomenon
Possible cause
Improper tachometer indication.
Refer to DI-19, "Engine Speed Signal Inspection" .
Improper water temperature gauge indication.
Refer to DI-19, "Water Temperature Signal Inspection" .
Improper speedometer or odometer.
Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" .
Improper engine oil pressure gauge indication.
Refer to DI-20, "Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection" .
Improper A/T oil temperature gauge indication.
Refer to AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
Improper voltage meter indication.
Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
B
C
D
Improper fuel gauge indication.
Fuel warning lamp indication is irregular.
Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
More than one gauge does not give proper indication.
Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION
METER" .
Improper A/T position indication.
Refer to DI-40, "A/T INDICATOR" .
Illumination control does not operate properly.
Refer to LT-151, "ILLUMINATION" .
E
F
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection
EKS00AD3
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
G
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
Self-diagnostic result content
No malfunction detected>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
Malfunction detected>>Perform the "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
H
Water Temperature Signal Inspection
I
EKS00AD4
1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Self-diagnostic result content
No malfunction detected>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
Malfunction detected>>Perform "Diagnostic procedure" for displayed DTC.
Engine Speed Signal Inspection
J
DI
EKS00AD5
1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
L
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Self-diagnostic result content
No malfunction detected>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
Malfunction detected>>Perform "Diagnostic procedure" for displayed DTC.
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-19
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection
EKS00AD6
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
M24
20 (Y)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
When ignition switch is in ON
position. (Engine stopped.)
Yes
Engine running. (Idle speed)
Yes
WKIA1833E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect oil pressure sensor connector F4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground.
Voltage
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
WKIA1834E
3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination connector M24.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and oil pressure
sensor harness connector F4 terminal 1 (GR/L).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1835E
Revision: October 2004
DI-20
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
A
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and oil pressure
sensor harness connector F4 terminal 2 (Y).
B
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground.
C
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
D
E
WKIA1836E
5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
F
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4
terminal 3 (B/P).
G
Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace oil pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
I
WKIA1837E
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-21
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection
EKS00AD7
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction.
●
Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank shifts and the indication may
fluctuate.
●
If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the indication will update slowly.
●
If the vehicle is tilted when the ignition switch is turned ON, fuel in the tank may flow to one direction
resulting in a change of reading.
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP
Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstances, the fuel level in the tank varies, and the warning lamp
ON timing may be changed.
1. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals (meter-side, and harness-side)
for poor connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace terminals or connectors.
2. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 15 (Y/L) and ground.
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
WKIA1816E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector M24.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 15 (Y/L) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector C5 terminal 2 (Y/L).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector C5 terminal 2 (Y/L) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
WKIA1838E
DI-22
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
4. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
A
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector C5 terminal 5 (B/P).
B
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector C5 terminal 5 (B/P) and ground.
C
Continuity should not exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2071E
E
5. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation" .
F
G
6. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION
Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and determine whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the
internal components in the fuel tank.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Install the fuel level sensor unit properly.
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-23
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or Varies
EKS00AD8
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION
Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or just before or just after stopping.
Does the indication value vary only during driving or just before or just after stopping?
YES >> The fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal.
NO
>> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, Refer to DI-22, "Fuel
Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position
EKS00AD9
1. CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO FULL-POSITION
Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to full-position?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH POSITION
Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON?
YES or NO
YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time for the
pointer to move to full-position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. OBSERVE VEHICLE POSITION
Is the vehicle parked on an incline?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO EMPTY-POSITION
During driving, does the fuel gauge move gradually toward empty-position?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
NO
>> Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and determine whether the float arm interferes or binds
with any of the internal components in the fuel tank.
Revision: October 2004
DI-24
2005 Titan
COMBINATION METERS
Electrical Components Inspection
EKS00ADA
A
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK
For removal, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation" .
Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump
B
Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminals 2 and 5.
Terminals
2
5
Float position
mm (in)
Resistance
value Ω
(Approx.)
C
D
*1
Empty
25.86 (1.02)
81.66
*2
Full
254.6 (10.02)
6.98
*1 and *2: When float rod is in contact with stopper.
E
LKIA0402E
Removal and Installation of Combination Meter
EKS00ADB
F
Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-25
2005 Titan
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
System Description
PFP:24835
EKS00D78
This unit displays the following items:
●
Earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle.
●
Outside air temperature.
●
Caution for frozen road surfaces.
WKIA1817E
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The outside temperature will be displayed
in “°F”.
●
Selecting the indication range
Push the mode switch to change from °F → °C → OFF → °F.
●
The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only
when one of the following conditions is present.
–
The temperature detected by the ambient sensor is lower than the indicated temperature on the thermometer.
–
The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (13 MPH).
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat during low-speed driving.)
–
The ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position for more than 2 hours. (The engine is cold.)
DIRECTION DISPLAY
Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The direction will be displayed.
Revision: October 2004
DI-26
2005 Titan
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —
EKS00D79
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2382E
Revision: October 2004
DI-27
2005 Titan
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Trouble Diagnoses
EKS00D7A
PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER
1. COOL DOWN CHECK
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Cool down the ambient sensor with water or ice.
Does the indicated temperature drop?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> The system is malfunctioning. Refer to DI-28, "INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER"
.
2. WARM UP CHECK
1. Leave the vehicle for 10 minutes.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, disconnect and reconnect the ambient sensor connector.
Does the indicated temperature rise?
YES >> The system is OK.
NO
>> The system is malfunctioning. Refer to DI-28, "INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER"
.
NOTE:
The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when
one of the following conditions is present.
●
The temperature detected by the ambient sensor is lower than the indicated temperature on the thermometer.
●
The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (13 MPH).
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat during low-speed driving.)
●
The ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position for more than 2 hours. (The engine is cold.)
INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Symptom
No display at all
Possible causes
Repair order
1. 10A fuse
1. Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Turn the ignition switch ON and verify that battery positive voltage is at terminal 2 of compass and thermometer.
2. Ground circuit
3. Compass and thermometer
2. Check ground circuit for compass and thermometer.
3. Replace compass and thermometer.
Forward direction indication slips off the mark
or incorrect
1. In manual correction mode (Bar and
display vanish)
1. Drive the vehicle and turn at an angle of 90°.
Compass reading
remains unchanged
1. Vehicle speed signal is not entered
Displays wrong temperature when ambient
temperature is between
−40°C (−40°F) and
55°C (130°F) (See
NOTE above)
1. Check operation
1. Perform preliminary check shown above.
2. Ambient sensor circuit
2. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor 2 and
compass and thermometer.
2. Perform the zone variation change.
2. Zone variation change is not done
2. Compass and thermometer
1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 29 and compass and thermometer terminal 8.
2. Replace compass and thermometer.
3. Vehicle speed signal is not entered
4. Ambient sensor 2
5. Compass and thermometer
3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 29 and compass and thermometer terminal 8.
4. Replace ambient sensor 2.
5. Replace compass and thermometer.
Displays SC or OC
1. Ambient sensor circuit
2. Ambient sensor 2
1. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor 2 and
compass and thermometer.
3. Compass and thermometer
2. Replace ambient sensor 2.
3. Replace compass and thermometer.
Revision: October 2004
DI-28
2005 Titan
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Calibration Procedure for Compass
EKS00D7B
The difference between magnetic North and geographical North can sometimes be great enough to cause
false compass readings. In order for the compass to operate accurately in a particular zone, it must be calibrated using the following procedure.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA3604E
J
CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS
The direction display is equipped with automatic correction function.
If the direction is not shown correctly, carry out initial correction.
DI
L
M
WKIA1817E
INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS
1.
Pushing the Mode switch for about 10 seconds will enter the initial correction mode. The compass display
will begin to flash.
2. Turn the vehicle slowly in an open, safe place. The initial correction is completed in approximately three
turns.
NOTE:
In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed, the initial correction may start automatically.
Revision: October 2004
DI-29
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
PFP:24814
EKS00ADG
WKWA2383E
Revision: October 2004
DI-30
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —
EKS00ADH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2384E
Revision: October 2004
DI-31
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
WKWA2385E
Revision: October 2004
DI-32
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2386E
Revision: October 2004
DI-33
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
WKWA2369E
Revision: October 2004
DI-34
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2388E
Revision: October 2004
DI-35
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
4WD Models
WKWA2389E
Revision: October 2004
DI-36
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)
EKS00D7C
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground.
B
Terminals
C
(+)
Connector
M24
Condition
Terminal
(Wire color)
20 (Y)
Voltage (V)
(–)
D
Ground
When ignition switch is in ON
position. (Engine stopped)
Yes
Engine running. (Idle speed)
Yes
WKIA1833E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
F
2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and oil pressure
sensor connector F4.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 3 (B/P).
H
I
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
J
WKIA1837E
DI
3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect oil pressure sensor connector F4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground.
Voltage
L
M
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
WKIA1834E
Revision: October 2004
DI-37
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector M24.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and oil pressure
sensor harness connector F4 terminal 1 (GR/L).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1835E
5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and oil pressure
sensor harness connector F4 terminal 2 (Y).
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1836E
6. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace oil pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2685E
Revision: October 2004
DI-38
2005 Titan
WARNING LAMPS
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)
EKS00D7D
A
NOTE:
For oil pressure inspection, refer to LU-7, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
1. CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE OPERATION
B
Observe operation of engine oil pressure gauge.
Does engine oil pressure gauge function properly?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NO
>> Go to DI-20, "Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-39
2005 Titan
A/T INDICATOR
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —
PFP:24814
EKS00ADI
WKWA2390E
Revision: October 2004
DI-40
2005 Titan
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
EKS00ADJ
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF COMBINATION METER
A
Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-13, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
B
C
2. CHECK TCM
Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Refer to DI-13, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-41
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:24814
EKS00ADK
WKIA3605E
Revision: October 2004
DI-42
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
System Description
EKS00ADL
A
FUNCTION
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 3 (console shift).
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
NOTE:
When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same
time, the priorities for each chime are the following.
1. Light warning chime
2. Ignition key warning chime
3. Seat belt warning chime
B
C
D
E
F
G
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME
With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the H
warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
●
through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 4 (console shift)
I
●
to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
J
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew cab).
BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN DI
communication lines. When the combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when headlamp battery saver
control operates (5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.]
Signal is supplied
●
from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10
●
to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36.
NOTE:
BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING
FUNCTION" .
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2.
●
through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew cab).
Front door switch LH is case grounded.
BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
Revision: October 2004
DI-43
2005 Titan
L
M
WARNING CHIME
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened),
warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
Ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 27
●
through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1.
Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19.
The combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication
line.
BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication
line, and sends seat belt warning signal to the combination meter via CAN communication line. When the
combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the
(6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS00ADM
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
DI-44
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —
EKS00ADN
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2391E
Revision: October 2004
DI-45
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
WKWA1131E
Revision: October 2004
DI-46
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EKS00ADO
A
Terminal
No.
2
Condition
Wire
color
SB
Item
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
Measurement method
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
B
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
C
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
D
E
F
SKIA5292E
G
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
H
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
I
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
6
V
Combination switch input 1
J
SKIA5292E
DI
●
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
L
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
DI-47
2005 Titan
M
WARNING CHIME
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
O/B
36
R/W
Condition
Item
Ignition
switch
Measurement method
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
Combination switch output 2
Combination switch output 1
●
Light switch and wiper switch
OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
ON
SKIA5292E
Key is removed
0
Key is inserted
Battery voltage
37
B/R
Key switch signal
OFF
38
W/L
Ignition switch ON or START
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
47
SB
67
B
70
W/B
Front door switch LH signal
OFF
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
5
Ground
ON
—
0
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
11
L
12
P
27
O/B
Condition
EKS00ADP
Ignition
switch
Measurement method
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
CAN-H
—
—
—
CAN-L
—
—
—
Seat belt buckle switch LH
ON
Item
Unfastened (ON)
0
Fastened (OFF)
Battery voltage
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS00ADQ
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-43, "System Description" .
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-48, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If not, go to 3.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EKS00ADR
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown BCM fuse or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse or fusible link No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START
59
Refer to DI-45, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: October 2004
DI-48
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM connectors M18 and M20.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
70 (W/B)
M18
38 (W/L)
B
OFF
ON
C
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
D
0V
Battery voltage
(–)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
WKIA1840E
E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
67 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
I
LIIA0915E
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-49
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00ADS
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM
diagnostic test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to the data link connector, and turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “BCM” is not
indicated, go to BCS-11, "CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
DI-50
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
4.
Touch “BUZZER” in “BCM”.
A
B
C
SKIA5788E
D
5.
Select “DATA MONITOR” or “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
H
Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch “ALL SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors main items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors items.
4.
5.
6.
I
J
If “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch the item you desire to monitor. If “ALL SIGNALS” is
DI
selected, all control items are monitored.
Touch “START”.
During monitoring, touching “RECORD” can start recording the monitored item status.
L
Display Item List
Monitored item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).
LIGHT SW 1ST
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.
BUCKLE SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt buckle switch LH.
M
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation.
During the operation check, touching “OFF” deactivates the operation.
Revision: October 2004
DI-51
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
Display Item List
Test item
Malfunction is detected when···
LIGHT WARN ALM
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
IGN KEY WARN ALM
This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2 seconds
after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEAT BELT WARN TEST
This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds for 2
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch “BCM” on "SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
Display Item List
Monitored Item
CAN communication
CONSULT-II display
CAN communication [U1000]
Description
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
NOTE:
If "CAN communication [U1000]" is displayed, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System". Refer to
LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate
EKS00ADT
1. CHECK BCM CHIME OPERATION
Select "BUZZER" on CONSULT-II, and perform "LIGHT WARN
ALM", "IGN KEY WARN ALM", OR "SEAT BELT WARN TEST"
active test.
Does chime sound?
YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NO
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
SKIA6331E
Revision: October 2004
DI-52
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)
EKS00ADU
A
1. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
B
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II.
2. With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "DOOR SW-DR"
changes with the status of front door LH.
When front door LH is
opened
When front door LH is
closed
C
: DOOR SW-DR ON
D
: DOOR SW-DR OFF
E
LKIA0335E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47
(SB) and ground.
When front door LH is
opened
When front door LH is
closed
G
: Approx. 0V
H
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
WKIA1515E
J
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M19 and front door switch LH connector B8.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal
47 (SB) and front door switch LH harness connector B8 terminal
2 (SB).
DI
L
Continuity should exist.
4.
M
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal
47 (SB) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
WKIA1516E
DI-53
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
CREW CAB MODELS
Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B8 terminal 2 and exposed metal of switch while pushing and releasing
switch.
WKIA2023E
KING CAB MODELS
Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B8 terminal 2 and terminal 3 of switch while pushing and releasing switch.
When front door switch
LH is released
When front door switch
LH is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not
exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace the front door switch LH.
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate
WKIA2804E
EKS00ADV
1. CHECK FUSE
Check if the key switch fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Refer to DI-45, "Wiring Diagram
— CHIME —" .
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse. Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position.
Does warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Go to DI-52, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" or DI-53, "Key Warning Chime and Light
Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)" .
Revision: October 2004
DI-54
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
3. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "KEY ON SW"
changes when the key is inserted/removed from the ignition key cylinder.
When key is inserted in ignition
key cylinder
When key is removed from
ignition key cylinder
B
: KEY ON SW ON
C
: KEY ON SW OFF
D
SKIA1960E
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/
R) and ground.
When key is inserted in ignition
key cylinder
When key is removed from
ignition key cylinder
F
: Approx. 12V
: Approx. 0V
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
H
LKIA0255E
4. CHECK KEY SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector (floor shift) or key switch connector (column shift). J
Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M27 (floor shift) or key switch harness connector M80 (column shift) terminals 3 and 4.
DI
When key is inserted in ignition : Continuity should
key cylinder
exist
L
When key is removed from
: Continuity should
ignition key cylinder
not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace the key switch and key lock solenoid connector
(floor shift) or key switch connector (column shift).
Revision: October 2004
DI-55
M
WKIA1830E
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
5. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M80 (floor shift) or key switch harness connector M27 (column shift) terminal 4 (B/R).
Continuity should exist.
3.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1841E
6. CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between key switch and key lock solenoid harness
connector M80 (floor shift) or key switch harness connector M27
(column shift) terminal 3 (Y/R) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between fuse and key
switch and key lock solenoid connector (floor shift) or
key switch connector (column shift).
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate
WKIA1842E
EKS00ADW
1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
Check key warning chime and seat belt warning chime functions.
Do key warning chime and seat belt warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to DI-52, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" .
2. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "BCM".
2. With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "LIGHT SW 1ST"
status changes when the lighting switch is moved from ON (1st
position) to OFF.
Lighting switch ON (1st position)
Lighting switch OFF
: LIGHT SW 1ST ON
: LIGHT SW 1ST OFF
Without CONSULT-II
Check combination switch. Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch
Reading Function" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" .
Revision: October 2004
DI-56
WKIA1877E
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate
EKS00ADX
1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
A
1.
With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position.
2. Return lighting switch to OFF position, and insert key into ignition.
Does warning chime sound for both steps?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to DI-52, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" .
2. CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP OPERATION
B
C
D
Turn ignition switch ON. Buckle and unbuckle the driver seat belt while watching seat belt warning lamp.
When seat belt is fastened
When seat belt is unfastened
: Warning lamp OFF
: Warning lamp ON
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
F
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
G
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 27 (O/B) and ground.
When seat belt is fastened
When seat belt is unfastened
: Approx. 12V
: Approx. 0V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
WKIA1843E
DI
4. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
L
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector.
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness
connector B12 terminals 1 and 2.
When seat belt is fastened
When seat belt is unfastened
M
: Continuity should
exist
: Continuity should
not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH.
WKIA1522E
Revision: October 2004
DI-57
2005 Titan
WARNING CHIME
5. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 27 (O/B) and seat belt buckle switch LH harness
connector B12 terminal 1 (O/B).
Continuity should exist.
3.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 27 (O/B) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1831E
6. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1844E
Revision: October 2004
DI-58
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28532
A
EKS00ADY
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKIA3522E
Revision: October 2004
DI-59
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
System Description
EKS00ADZ
FUNCTION
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 12 , located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to sonar control unit terminal 8, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to back-up lamp relay terminals 1 and 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to sonar control unit terminal 6
●
through body grounds B7 and B19.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, and the transmission gear selector lever in the R position, power is supplied
●
to sonar control unit terminal 5
●
from back-up lamp relay terminal 5.
With power and ground supplied, transmission gear selector lever in R position, and the rear sonar system
OFF switch ON, the rear sonar system will detect obstacles within 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) of the rear sonar sensors.
The vehicle operator is notified of obstacles by varied rate of tone from the sonar buzzer depending on distance of obstacle being sensed.
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
With power and ground supplied to the sonar control unit, transmission gear selector lever in R position, the
sonar system can be disabled and the sonar buzzer silenced by momentarily pressing the rear sonar system
OFF switch. The rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp will be illuminated in the rear sonar system OFF
switch.
To disable the rear sonar system, ground is supplied
●
to sonar control unit terminal 13
●
through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 1
●
through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 2
●
from body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
To light the rear sonar system OFF indicator, power is supplied
●
to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 5
●
from sonar control unit terminal 4.
Ground is supplied
●
to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 6
●
from body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
The rear sonar system and buzzer will be disabled and the rear sonar system OFF indicator will be illuminated
until the ignition switch is turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the rear sonar system will be enabled.
Depressing the rear sonar system OFF switch momentarily will enable the rear sonar system also. Enabling
the rear sonar system will cause the rear sonar system OFF indicator to go out.
SONAR BUZZER
With the power supplied to the sonar control unit and the transmission gear selector lever in R position, a stationary object that is at least 7.0 cm (2.8 in.) wide and 1.0 m (39.0 in.) tall and that is closer than 1.8 meters
(5.9 ft.) will be detected by the rear sonar sensors, causing the sonar buzzer to sound a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the rate of the tone will increase. When the object is less than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from
the rear bumper, the tone will sound continuously.
Power is supplied
●
to sonar buzzer terminal +
●
from sonar control unit terminal 7.
Ground is supplied
●
to sonar buzzer terminal ●
from sonar control unit terminal 3.
Revision: October 2004
DI-60
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
REAR SONAR SENSOR
With power and ground supplied to the rear sonar sensors, the sonar sensors transmit a 38.4 kHz ultrasonic
signal. This signal is reflected back to the sensor by objects large enough and close enough to be detected.
The rear sonar sensors measure the time from the transmitted signal to the time the signal is reflected back
and sends this information to the sonar control unit.
Power is supplied
●
to each rear sonar sensor terminal 1
●
from sonar control unit terminal 16.
Ground is supplied
●
to each rear sonar sensor terminal 3
●
from sonar control unit terminal 15.
Signal is supplied
●
to sonar control unit terminals 9, 10, 11 and 12.
●
from each rear sonar sensor terminal 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: October 2004
DI-61
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — SONAR —
EKS00AE0
WKWA2392E
Revision: October 2004
DI-62
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA2474E
Revision: October 2004
DI-63
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Terminals And Reference Value For Sonar Control Unit
EKS00AE1
CONDITION
TERMINAL
(COLOR)
ITEM
IGNITION
SWITCH
OPERATION
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
—
0 - 12 (variable)
3 (R)
Sonar buzzer return
ON
4 (BR/Y)
Rear sonar system
OFF indicator output
ON
5 (G/W)
Reverse signal
ON
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
Transmission gear
selector lever
R position
Battery voltage
Transmission gear
selector lever
Not R position
0
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
6 (B)
Sonar control unit
ground
—
—
0
7 (L)
Sonar buzzer drive
signal
ON
—
Battery voltage
8 (G/R)
Sonar control unit
power
ON
—
Battery voltage
9 (GR)
10 (P)
11 (O)
12 (LG)
Rear sonar sensor
signal - RH outer
Rear sonar sensor
signal - LH outer
Rear sonar sensor
signal - LH inner
Rear sonar sensor
signal - RH inner
ON
ON
ON
ON
13 (LG)
Rear sonar system
OFF switch signal
ON
15 (Y)
Rear sonar sensor
ground
ON
16 (LG/B)
Rear sonar sensor
power
ON
●
Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
●
Transmission gear selector lever in R
position
●
Distant or no obstacles
●
Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
●
Transmission gear selector lever in R
position
●
Distant or no obstacles
●
Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
●
Transmission gear selector lever in R
position
●
Distant or no obstacles
●
Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
●
Transmission gear selector lever in R
position
●
Distant or no obstacles
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
—
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
EKS00AE2
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-60, "System Description" .
Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to DI-65, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection" .
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-65, "Self-diagnosis Function" .
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-67, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to DI-68, "Symptom Chart" .
Clear fault codes. Refer to DI-66, "IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE" .
Does the rear sonar system operate properly? If so, go to 9. If not, go to 3.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
DI-64
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Pre-diagnosis Inspection
EKS00AE3
A
SENSOR STATUS CHECK
Check that the rear sonar sensors are properly aligned (bumper is not misaligned, no deformation in sensor mounting area.
●
Check that snow, mud, or other foreign objects are not adhering to the rear sonar sensors.
●
Check that there is no deformation, scratches, or other damage to the rear sonar sensors.
●
Check that water has not accumulated in the rear sonar sensors.
CAUTION:
Use water, cotton swab, or other soft material for cleaning the sensors.
1. Check that there are no obstacles within each rear sonar sensor's detection range.
●
B
C
D
Detection range
Rear sonar sensors
2.
3.
Approx. 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) maximum
Check that there are no nearby ultrasound sources (such as the sounds of vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes).
Check that the vehicle is on a level surface.
Self-diagnosis Function
3.
G
H
ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE
2.
F
EKS00AE4
There are four modes of self-diagnosis; entering diagnostics, requesting number of fault codes, requesting
fault codes, and idling or clearing fault codes. These steps must be followed in order. Self-diagnosis can be
manually exited by turning the ignition OFF, or selecting reverse gear. Self-diagnosis will exit unless a fault
code request occurs before a message is repeated five times without acknowledgement.
1.
E
Turn ignition switch ON. Rear sonar system OFF switch indicator lamp illuminates for three seconds and then turns off.
Immediately push rear sonar system OFF switch ten times
within five seconds.
The sonar buzzer will sound once and the rear sonar system
OFF indicator will flash once.
I
J
DI
LKIA0389E
L
REQUESTING NUMBER OF FAULT CODES MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
While in diagnostic mode, push rear sonar system OFF switch
once.
The sonar buzzer will sound once.
Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash once and sonar
buzzer will sound once for each fault code detected.
There will be a four second pause.
The number of fault codes will repeat five times then pause.
NOTE:
Self-diagnosis will exit unless requesting fault codes occurs
before five repeats ends.
Revision: October 2004
DI-65
M
LKIA0388E
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
REQUESTING FAULT CODES MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
While in "requesting number of fault codes" mode, push rear
sonar system OFF switch once.
The sonar buzzer will sound once.
Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will
sound the first digit of the fault code followed by a one second
pause.
Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will
sound the second digit of the fault code followed by a four second pause.
The fault codes will repeat five times then pause.
LKIA0390E
NOTE:
Requesting fault codes will exit unless the fault code is acknowledged before five repeats ends.
The fault code is acknowledged by pushing the rear sonar system OFF switch once (the sonar buzzer
may sound). When all fault codes have been indicated, idle mode will be entered. See the following table
for fault code identification.
Fault Code
Malfunction
Page Reference
11
Rear sonar sensor LH
outer
12
Rear sonar sensor LH
inner
13
Rear sonar sensor RH
inner
14
Rear sonar sensor RH
outer
21
Sonar buzzer
DI-69, "SONAR BUZZER"
22
Rear sonar system OFF
indicator
DI-70, "REAR SONAR
SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR"
23
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
DI-69, "REAR SONAR
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH"
Sonar control unit
Replace sonar control
unit. Refer to DI-70,
"SONAR CONTROL
UNIT" .
24
Check harness for open
or short. If NG repair or
replace harness. If OK
replace sensor. Refer to
DI-70, "REAR SONAR
SENSORS" .
IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE
NOTE:
While in idle mode, self-diagnosis will automatically exit if no activity occurs for thirty seconds.
1. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds
to reset time-out counter.
2. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds
to clear codes.
LKIA0391E
Revision: October 2004
DI-66
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Preliminary Check
EKS00AE5
A
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES
B
Check for blown rear sonar system fuses.
Unit
Power Source
Fuse
Sonar control unit
ON or START
12
C
Refer to DI-62, "Wiring Diagram — SONAR —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect sonar control unit connector.
Check voltage between sonar control unit connector B56 terminal 8 (G/R) and ground.
Terminals
D
F
Ignition switch position
G
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(-)
B56
8 (G/R)
Ground
ON or START
H
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between sonar control unit and
fuse.
I
WKIA1145E
J
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between sonar control unit B56 terminal 6 and
ground.
DI
L
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
B56
6 (B)
Ground
Continuity
M
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check harness ground circuit.
Revision: October 2004
WKIA1146E
DI-67
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Symptom Chart
EKS00AE6
Symptom
Repair order
1. Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer to
DI-69, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH" .
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator
lamp does not light and the buzzer does not sound.
2. Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit.
3. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system
OFF switch and sonar control unit.
4. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
1. Check rear sonar system OFF indicator for malfunction. Refer
to DI-70, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR" .
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator
lamp does not light but buzzer sounds.
2. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system
OFF indicator and sonar control unit.
3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
1. Check sonar buzzer. Refer to DI-69, "SONAR BUZZER" .
2. Check harness and connections between sonar buzzer and
sonar control unit.
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar
buzzer does not sound but indicator lamp illuminates.
3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
When rear sonar system OFF switch is ON, the rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp lights up and the sonar buzzer sounds
intermittently (for about 4 seconds).
1. Check harness between rear sonar sensors and sonar control
unit for an open condition.
2. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction.
3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
1. Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer to
DI-69, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH" .
The rear sonar system operates with the rear sonar system OFF
switch OFF.
2. Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit.
3. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system
OFF switch and sonar control unit.
4. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
1. Check for PNP switch failure. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
When the transmission gear selector lever is in the R position
and the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar system
does not operate.
2. Check harness and connections between sonar control unit
and PNP/reverse lamp circuits.
3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
Revision: October 2004
DI-68
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Symptom
Repair order
1. Check for adhesion of snow, mud, or other foreign objects to
rear sonar sensors; dew condensation; etc. Refer to DI-65,
"Pre-diagnosis Inspection" .
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator
lamp lights up and buzzer sounds although there is no obstacle
within the detection range.
A
2. Check that the rear sonar sensors are properly aligned
(bumper is not misaligned, no deformation in sensor mounting
area
B
3. Check harness and connections between rear sonar sensors
and sonar control unit.
C
4. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction.
5. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
D
1. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction.
The rear sonar sensors do not operate according to the distance
between each sensor and the obstacle. (There is a large error in
the obstacle detection distance.
2. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" .
E
3. Check for adhesion of snow, mud, or other foreign objects to
rear sonar sensors; dew condensation; etc. Refer to DI-65,
"Pre-diagnosis Inspection" .
F
4. Check that the rear sonar sensors are properly aligned
(bumper is not misaligned, no deformation in sensor mounting
area.
Component Inspection
G
EKS00AE7
SONAR BUZZER
1.
2.
Disconnect the sonar buzzer connector.
Check continuity between buzzer connector M117 terminal (+)
and terminal (-)
(+) - (-)
H
I
: Continuity should exist
J
WKIA1534E
DI
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch M116. Check the continuity between following terminals.
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
Terminal to be inspected
Continuity
M
ON
OFF
L
Yes
1-2
No
WKIA1540E
Revision: October 2004
DI-69
2005 Titan
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR
Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch connector M116, and
apply battery voltage (approx. 12V) to terminal 5. Check the rear
sonar system OFF indicator operation when terminal 6 is connected
to battery ground.
Terminal to be
inspected
Condition
Operation
5
Approx. 12V
6
Ground
Rear sonar
system OFF
indicator lights
Rear sonar system OFF switch
WKIA1541E
Removal and Installation of Rear Sonar System
EKS00AE8
REAR SONAR SENSORS
Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation" .
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear seat back. Refer to SE-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear finisher to gain access to sonar control unit. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" .
Disconnect electrical connector, remove the bolts, then remove sonar control unit. Refer to DI-59, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
DI-70
2005 Titan
B ENGINE
A
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 8
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 8
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 12
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 16
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 16
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
A/T .......................................................................... 16
Precaution .............................................................. 16
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 19
PREPARATION ......................................................... 20
Special Service Tools ............................................. 20
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 22
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 23
System Diagram ..................................................... 23
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 24
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 26
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Speed) .................................................................... 27
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 28
Input/Output Signal Chart ....................................... 28
System Description ................................................ 28
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 29
System Description ................................................ 29
Component Description .......................................... 30
CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 31
System Description ................................................ 31
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 32
Description ............................................................. 32
Component Inspection ........................................... 35
Removal and Installation ........................................ 36
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 37
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY
(ORVR) ...................................................................... 39
System Description ................................................ 39
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 40
Component Inspection ........................................... 43
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 45
Revision: October 2004
Description .............................................................. 45
Component Inspection ............................................ 45
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ........................................................................ 47
Description .............................................................. 47
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 48
Introduction ............................................................. 48
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 48
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 49
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 63
OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 65
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 71
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 71
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 76
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ................................. 78
VIN Registration ..................................................... 89
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 89
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 89
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 90
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 94
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 94
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 100
Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 102
Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 103
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 107
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 113
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 114
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 116
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 116
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 124
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 136
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 138
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 143
Description ............................................................ 143
Testing Condition .................................................. 143
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 143
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144
EC-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 153
Description ............................................................ 153
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 153
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 154
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 154
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 155
Ground Inspection ................................................ 159
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 160
Description ............................................................ 160
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 160
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 160
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 161
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 162
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 163
Description ............................................................ 163
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 163
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 163
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 164
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 165
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 168
Component Inspection .......................................... 170
Removal and Installation ...................................... 170
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 171
Component Description ........................................ 171
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 171
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 171
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 172
Overall Function Check ........................................ 173
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 174
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 175
Component Inspection .......................................... 178
Removal and Installation ...................................... 179
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 180
Component Description ........................................ 180
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 180
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 180
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 181
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 182
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 183
Component Inspection .......................................... 186
Removal and Installation ...................................... 187
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 188
Component Description ........................................ 188
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 188
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 189
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190
Component Inspection .......................................... 191
Removal and Installation ...................................... 191
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 192
Component Description ........................................ 192
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 192
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 193
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 194
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 195
Revision: October 2004
Component Inspection .......................................... 196
Removal and Installation ....................................... 197
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 198
Component Description ........................................ 198
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.198
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 198
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 199
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 200
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 201
Component Inspection .......................................... 204
Removal and Installation ....................................... 204
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 205
Component Description ........................................ 205
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 205
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 206
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 206
Component Inspection .......................................... 207
Removal and Installation ....................................... 207
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 208
Component Description ........................................ 208
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 208
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 209
Component Inspection .......................................... 210
Removal and Installation ....................................... 210
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 211
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 211
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 211
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 211
Component Inspection .......................................... 211
Removal and Installation ....................................... 212
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 213
Component Description ........................................ 213
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.213
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 213
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 214
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 215
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 218
Component Inspection .......................................... 220
Removal and Installation ....................................... 221
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 222
Component Description ........................................ 222
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.222
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 222
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 223
Overall Function Check ......................................... 223
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 225
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 228
Component Inspection .......................................... 231
Removal and Installation ....................................... 232
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION .............................................................. 233
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 233
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 233
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 235
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 237
EC-2
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION .............................................................. 242
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 242
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 242
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 244
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 246
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 250
Component Description ........................................ 250
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 250
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 250
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 252
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 253
Component Inspection ......................................... 255
Removal and Installation ...................................... 255
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 256
Component Description ........................................ 256
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 256
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 256
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 257
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 258
Component Inspection ......................................... 260
Removal and Installation ...................................... 260
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 261
Component Description ........................................ 261
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 261
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 261
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 262
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 263
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264
Component Inspection ......................................... 267
Removal and Installation ...................................... 267
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 268
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 268
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 268
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 269
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................. 276
Component Description ........................................ 276
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 276
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 276
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 277
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 278
Component Inspection ......................................... 280
Removal and Installation ...................................... 280
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 281
Component Description ........................................ 281
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 281
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 281
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 281
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 283
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 284
Component Inspection ......................................... 287
Removal and Installation ...................................... 287
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 288
Component Description ........................................ 288
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 288
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 288
Revision: October 2004
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 290
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 291
Component Inspection .......................................... 294
Removal and Installation ...................................... 294
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ........................................................................ 295
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 295
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 295
Overall Function Check ........................................ 296
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 297
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 301
System Description ............................................... 301
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 301
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 301
Overall Function Check ........................................ 302
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 303
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 306
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 306
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 308
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 314
Description ............................................................ 314
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 314
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 315
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 315
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 316
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 318
Component Inspection .......................................... 319
Removal and Installation ...................................... 320
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ..................................................................... 321
Component Description ........................................ 321
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 321
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 321
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 322
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 323
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 324
Component Inspection .......................................... 326
DTCP0451EVAP CONTROLSYSTEMPRESSURE
SENSOR ................................................................. 328
Component Description ........................................ 328
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 328
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 328
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 329
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 329
Component Inspection .......................................... 330
DTCP0452EVAP CONTROLSYSTEMPRESSURE
SENSOR ................................................................. 331
Component Description ........................................ 331
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 331
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 331
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 332
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 333
EC-3
2005 Titan
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 334
Component Inspection .......................................... 336
DTCP0453EVAPCONTROLSYSTEMPRESSURE
SENSOR .................................................................. 337
Component Description ........................................ 337
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 337
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 337
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 338
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 339
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 340
Component Inspection .......................................... 344
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 345
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 345
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 346
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 347
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 353
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 353
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 354
Overall Function Check ........................................ 355
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 356
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 362
Component Description ........................................ 362
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 362
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 362
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 363
Removal and Installation ...................................... 363
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 364
Component Description ........................................ 364
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 364
Overall Function Check ........................................ 364
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 365
Removal and Installation ...................................... 365
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT ........................................................................ 366
Component Description ........................................ 366
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 366
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 366
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 367
Removal and Installation ...................................... 367
DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 368
Description ............................................................ 368
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 368
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 368
Overall Function Check ........................................ 368
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 369
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 370
Description ............................................................ 370
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 370
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 370
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 371
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 372
Description ............................................................ 372
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 372
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 372
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 373
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 374
Component Description ........................................ 374
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Revision: October 2004
.374
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 374
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 374
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 375
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 376
Component Inspection .......................................... 378
Removal and Installation ....................................... 378
DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 379
Component Description ........................................ 379
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 379
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 379
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 380
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1
HEATER ................................................................... 382
Description ............................................................ 382
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.382
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 383
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 386
Component Inspection .......................................... 388
Removal and Installation ....................................... 388
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 389
Component Description ........................................ 389
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 389
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 389
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 390
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 391
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR ............................................................. 393
Component Description ........................................ 393
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 393
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 393
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 394
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION .............................................................. 395
Description ............................................................ 395
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 395
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 395
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 396
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 397
Component Inspection .......................................... 400
Removal and Installation ....................................... 400
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY ..................................................................... 401
Component Description ........................................ 401
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.401
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 401
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 401
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 403
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 404
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 406
Component Description ........................................ 406
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 406
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 406
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 407
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 408
EC-4
2005 Titan
Component Inspection ......................................... 409
Removal and Installation ...................................... 410
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ......................................411
Component Description .........................................411
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
..411
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................411
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 412
Overall Function Check ........................................ 412
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 414
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 417
Component Inspection ......................................... 420
Removal and Installation ...................................... 421
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ..................................... 422
Component Description ........................................ 422
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 422
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 422
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 423
Overall Function Check ........................................ 423
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 425
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 428
Component Inspection ......................................... 431
Removal and Installation ...................................... 432
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .... 433
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 433
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ......................... 434
Description ........................................................... 434
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 434
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 434
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 434
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 435
Description ........................................................... 435
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 435
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 435
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 435
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 436
Description ........................................................... 436
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 436
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 437
Overall Function Check ........................................ 437
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 439
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 441
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 444
Component Inspection ......................................... 445
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 446
Component Description ........................................ 446
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 446
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 446
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 447
Removal and Installation ...................................... 447
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 448
Component Description ........................................ 448
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 448
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 448
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 449
Removal and Installation ...................................... 449
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 450
Revision: October 2004
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 450
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 450
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 451
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 452
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 455
Component Description ........................................ 455
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 455
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 455
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 455
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 457
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 460
Removal and Installation ...................................... 463
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 464
Component Description ........................................ 464
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 464
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 464
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 464
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 466
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 469
Removal and Installation ...................................... 472
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 473
Component Description ........................................ 473
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 473
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 473
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 475
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 478
Removal and Installation ...................................... 482
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 483
Component Description ........................................ 483
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 483
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 483
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 483
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 485
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 488
Removal and Installation ...................................... 492
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 493
Component Description ........................................ 493
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 493
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 493
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 493
Overall Function Check ........................................ 494
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 496
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 499
Removal and Installation ...................................... 502
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 503
Component Description ........................................ 503
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 503
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 503
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 509
Removal and Installation ...................................... 514
EC-5
2005 Titan
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 515
Component Description ........................................ 515
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 515
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 515
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 516
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 518
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 521
Removal and Installation ...................................... 526
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 527
Description ............................................................ 527
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 527
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 528
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 528
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 529
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 531
Component Inspection .......................................... 534
Removal and Installation ...................................... 534
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ..................................................................... 535
Component Description ........................................ 535
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 535
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 535
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 536
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 537
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 538
Component Inspection .......................................... 539
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 541
Component Description ........................................ 541
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 541
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 541
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 542
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 543
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 544
Component Inspection .......................................... 547
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 548
Component Description ........................................ 548
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 548
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 548
DTC confirmation Procedure ................................ 549
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 550
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 551
Component Inspection .......................................... 555
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 556
Component Description ........................................ 556
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 556
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 556
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 557
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 558
Component Description ........................................ 558
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 558
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 558
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 558
Revision: October 2004
Overall Function Check ......................................... 559
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 560
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 561
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 563
Description ............................................................ 563
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.563
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 563
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 563
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 564
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 565
Component Inspection .......................................... 567
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 568
Component Description ........................................ 568
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.568
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 568
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 569
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 570
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 571
Component Inspection .......................................... 573
Removal and Installation ....................................... 573
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 574
Component Description ........................................ 574
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.574
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 574
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 575
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 576
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 577
Component Inspection .......................................... 580
Removal and Installation ....................................... 580
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 581
Component Description ........................................ 581
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.581
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 581
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 582
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 583
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 584
Component Inspection .......................................... 587
Removal and Installation ....................................... 587
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 588
Component Description ........................................ 588
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
.588
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 588
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 589
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 590
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 591
Component Inspection .......................................... 595
Removal and Installation ....................................... 595
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 596
Component Description ........................................ 596
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 597
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 602
Component Inspection .......................................... 606
Removal and Installation ....................................... 607
INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 608
EC-6
2005 Titan
Component Description ........................................ 608
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 608
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 609
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 610
Component Inspection ......................................... 613
Removal and Installation ...................................... 613
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 614
Description ........................................................... 614
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 614
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 615
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 616
Component Inspection ......................................... 619
Removal and Installation ...................................... 619
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 620
Component Description ........................................ 620
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 621
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 622
Removal and Installation ...................................... 624
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 625
Description ........................................................... 625
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 625
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 625
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 626
Component Description ........................................ 626
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 626
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 627
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 628
Component Inspection .......................................... 632
ASCD INDICATOR .................................................. 633
Component Description ........................................ 633
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
. 633
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 634
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 635
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ...................... 636
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 636
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 638
Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 638
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 638
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 638
Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 638
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 638
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 638
A/F Sensor 1 Heater ............................................. 638
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 638
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 638
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 638
Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 638
Injector .................................................................. 639
Fuel Pump ............................................................ 639
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-7
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index
PFP:00024
UBS00KU8
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
U1000
1000*4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-160
U1001
1001*
4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-160
P0000
0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0037
0037
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-163
P0038
0038
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-163
P0057
0057
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-163
P0058
0058
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-163
P0101
0101
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-171
P0102
0102
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-180
P0103
0103
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-180
P0112
0112
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-188
P0113
0113
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-188
P0117
0117
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-192
P0118
0118
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-192
P0122
0122
TP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-198
P0123
0123
TP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-198
P0125
0125
ECT SENSOR
EC-205
P0127
0127
IAT SENSOR
EC-208
P0128
0128
THERMSTAT FNCTN
EC-211
P0138
0138
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-213
P0139
0139
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-222
P0158
0158
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-213
P0159
0159
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-222
P0171
0171
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
EC-233
—
P0172
0172
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
EC-242
P0174
0174
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
EC-233
P0175
0175
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
EC-242
P0181
0181
FTT SENSOR
EC-250
P0182
0182
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-256
P0183
0183
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-256
P0222
0222
TP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-261
P0223
0223
TP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-261
P0300
0300
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
EC-268
P0301
0301
CYL 1 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0302
0302
CYL 2 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0303
0303
CYL 3 MISFIRE
EC-268
Revision: October 2004
EC-8
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P0304
0304
CYL 4 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0305
0305
CYL 5 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0306
0306
CYL 6 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0307
0307
CYL 7 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0308
0308
CYL 8 MISFIRE
EC-268
P0327
0327
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-276
P0328
0328
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-276
P0332
0332
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2
EC-276
P0333
0333
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2
EC-276
P0335
0335
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-281
P0340
0340
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-288
P0420
0420
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
EC-295
P0430
0430
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
EC-295
P0441
0441
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
EC-301
P0442
0442
EVAP SMALL LEAK
EC-306
P0444
0444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-314
P0445
0445
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-314
P0447
0447
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-321
P0451
0451
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-328
P0452
0452
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-331
P0453
0453
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-337
P0455
0455
EVAP GROSS LEAK
EC-345
P0456
0456
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
EC-353
P0460
0460
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
EC-362
P0461
0461
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-364
P0462
0462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-366
P0463
0463
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-366
P0500
0500
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5
EC-368
P0506
0506
ISC SYSTEM
EC-370
P0507
0507
ISC SYSTEM
EC-372
P0550
0550
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
EC-374
P0605
0605
ECM
EC-379
P0700
0700
TCM
AT-104
P0705
0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-105
P0710
0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-127
5
P0720
0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*
AT-109
P0740
0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-116
P0744
0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-118
P0745
0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-120
P1031
1031
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-382
P1032
1032
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-382
P1051
1051
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
EC-382
Revision: October 2004
EC-9
2005 Titan
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P1052
1052
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
EC-382
P1065
1065
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
EC-389
P1121
1121
ETC ACTR
EC-393
P1122
1122
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
EC-395
P1124
1124
ETC MOT PWR
EC-401
P1126
1126
ETC MOT PWR
EC-401
P1128
1128
ETC MOT
EC-406
P1146
1146
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-411
P1147
1147
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-422
P1148
1148
CLOSED LOOP-B1
EC-433
P1166
1166
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-411
P1167
1167
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-422
P1168
1168
CLOSED LOOP-B2
EC-433
P1211
1211
TCS C/U FUNCTN
EC-434
P1212
1212
TCS/CIRC
EC-435
P1217
1217
ENG OVER TEMP
EC-436
P1225
1225
CTP LEARNING
EC-446
P1226
1226
CTP LEARNING
EC-448
P1229
1229
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
EC-450
P1271
1271
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-455
P1272
1272
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-464
P1273
1273
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-473
P1274
1274
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-483
P1276
1276
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-493
P1278
1278
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-503
P1279
1279
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-515
P1281
1281
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-455
P1282
1282
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-464
P1283
1283
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-473
P1284
1284
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-483
P1286
1286
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-493
P1288
1288
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-503
P1289
1289
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-515
P1444
1444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-527
P1446
1446
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-535
P1564
1564
ASCD SW
EC-541
P1572
1572
ASCD BRAKE SW
EC-548
6
P1574
1574
ASCD VHL SPD SEN*
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
NATS MALFUNCTION
BL-136
P1706
1706
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
EC-558
P1716
1716
TURBINE REV S/CIRC
AT-132
P1730
1730
A/T INTERLOCK
AT-136
Revision: October 2004
EC-10
EC-556
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P1752
1752
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-141
P1754
1754
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN
AT-143
P1757
1757
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-145
P1759
1759
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT
AT-147
P1762
1762
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-149
P1764
1764
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN
AT-151
P1767
1767
HLR/C SOL/CIRC
AT-153
P1769
1769
HLR/C SOL FNCTN
AT-155
P1772
1772
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-157
P1774
1774
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT
AT-159
P1805
1805
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
EC-563
P2122
2122
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-568
P2123
2123
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-568
P2127
2127
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-574
P2128
2128
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-574
P2135
2135
TP SENSOR
EC-581
P2138
2138
APP SENSOR
EC-588
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*6: 2WD models
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-11
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index
UBS00KU9
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Reference page
ECM*3
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1271
1271
EC-455
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1272
1272
EC-464
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1273
1273
EC-473
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1274
1274
EC-483
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1276
1276
EC-493
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1278
1278
EC-503
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1279
1279
EC-515
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1281
1281
EC-455
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1282
1282
EC-464
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1283
1283
EC-473
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1284
1284
EC-483
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1286
1286
EC-493
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1288
1288
EC-503
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1289
1289
EC-515
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1031
1031
EC-382
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1032
1032
EC-382
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1051
1051
EC-382
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1052
1052
EC-382
A/T INTERLOCK
P1730
1730
AT-136
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
AT-118
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
EC-568
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
EC-568
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
EC-574
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
EC-574
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
EC-588
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
EC-548
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
EC-541
ASCD VHL SPD SEN*6
P1574
1574
EC-556
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
AT-127
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
EC-563
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*4
EC-160
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*4
EC-160
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
EC-281
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
EC-433
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
EC-433
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
EC-288
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
EC-446
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
EC-448
Revision: October 2004
EC-12
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Reference page
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
EC-268
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
EC-268
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
EC-268
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
EC-268
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
EC-268
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
EC-268
CYL 7 MISFIRE
P0307
0307
EC-268
CYL 8 MISFIRE
P0308
0308
EC-268
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC
P1762
1762
AT-149
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN
P1764
1764
AT-151
ECM
P0605
0605
EC-379
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
P1065
1065
EC-389
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
EC-192
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
EC-192
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
EC-205
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
EC-436
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
EC-393
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
EC-395
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
EC-406
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
EC-401
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
EC-401
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
EC-345
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
EC-301
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
EC-306
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
EC-328
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
EC-331
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
EC-337
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
EC-353
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC
P1757
1757
AT-145
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT
P1759
1759
AT-147
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
EC-256
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
EC-256
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
EC-250
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
EC-362
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
EC-364
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
EC-366
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
EC-366
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
EC-233
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
EC-233
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
EC-242
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
EC-242
HLR/C SOL/CIRC
P1767
1767
AT-153
Revision: October 2004
EC-13
A
ECM*3
2005 Titan
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Reference page
ECM*3
HLR/C SOL FNCTN
P1769
1769
AT-155
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
EC-213
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
EC-222
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
EC-411
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
EC-422
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
EC-213
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
EC-222
HO2S2 (B2)
P1166
1166
EC-411
HO2S2 (B2)
P1167
1167
EC-422
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
EC-163
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC
P1752
1752
AT-141
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN
P1754
1754
AT-143
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
EC-188
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
EC-188
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
EC-208
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
EC-370
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
EC-372
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
EC-276
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
EC-276
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2
P0332
0332
EC-276
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2
P0333
0333
EC-276
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
AT-120
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC
P1772
1772
AT-157
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT
P1774
1774
AT-159
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
EC-171
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
EC-180
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
EC-180
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
EC-268
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
BL-136
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
EC-558
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
AT-105
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
EC-314
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
EC-314
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
EC-527
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
EC-374
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
EC-450
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
0740
AT-116
Revision: October 2004
EC-14
2005 Titan
INDEX FOR DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Reference page
A
ECM*3
TCM
P0700
0700
AT-104
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
EC-434
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
EC-435
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
EC-211
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
EC-261
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
EC-261
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
EC-198
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
EC-198
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
EC-581
TURBINE REV S/CIRC
P1716
1716
AT-132
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
EC-295
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
0430
EC-295
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5
P0720
0720
AT-109
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5
P0500
0500
EC-368
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
EC-321
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
EC-535
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*6: 2WD models
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-15
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
UBS00EMF
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T
UBS00EMG
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-69, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" .
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution
●
●
●
●
UBS00EMH
Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
Revision: October 2004
EC-16
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
Do not disassemble ECM.
If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
Diagnostic trouble codes
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
Freeze frame data
1st trip freeze frame data
System readiness test (SRT) codes
Test values
When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
A
EC
C
PBIB1164E
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0387E
I
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
PBIB0090E
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded
operation of ICs, etc.
Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-116, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
.
Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seriMEF040D
ous incidents.
Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Revision: October 2004
EC-17
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
●
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SEF217U
●
●
When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF348N
●
B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown
in the figure.
PBIB1144E
Revision: October 2004
EC-18
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
A
EC
C
BBIA0402E
D
●
●
●
Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily.
Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
E
F
G
SEF709Y
●
–
–
–
–
When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location.
Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller.
Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
H
I
J
K
SEF708Y
UBS00EMI
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: October 2004
EC-19
L
M
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
UBS00EMJ
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
KV10117100
(J-36471-A)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
S-NT379
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
S-NT636
(J-44626)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
LEM054
(J-44321)
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
Checking fuel pressure
LEC642
(J-44321-6)
Fuel pressure adapter
Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector type fuel lines.
LBIA0376E
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine
room.
PBIC0198E
Revision: October 2004
EC-20
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
A
Description
KV109E0010
(J-46209)
Break-out box
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
EC
C
S-NT825
KV109E0080
(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
D
E
S-NT826
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant
F
G
H
WBIA0539E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-21
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
UBS00EMK
Description
Leak detector
i.e.: (J-41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
S-NT703
EVAP service port
adapter
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter
i.e.: (MLR-8382)
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
S-NT815
Socket wrench
Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
i.e.: (J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant
i.e.: (PermatexTM
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
S-NT779
Revision: October 2004
EC-22
2005 Titan
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
PFP:23710
A
UBS00KUA
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2635E
Revision: October 2004
EC-23
2005 Titan
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
UBS00KUB
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Engine speed*3
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking condition
Battery
Battery voltage*3
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)*2
VDC/TCS operation command
Air conditioner switch*2
Air conditioner operation
Wheel sensor*2
Vehicle speed
Fuel injection
& mixture ratio
control
Fuel injector
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.
●
During warm-up
●
When starting the engine
●
During acceleration
●
Hot-engine operation
●
When selector lever is changed from N to D
●
High-load, high-speed operation
●
During deceleration
●
During high engine speed operation
Revision: October 2004
EC-24
2005 Titan
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A
EC
C
SEF503YB
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-455, "DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture
ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
D
E
F
G
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
●
Deceleration and acceleration
●
High-load, high-speed operation
●
Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
●
Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
●
High engine coolant temperature
●
During warm-up
●
After shifting from N to D
●
When starting the engine
H
I
J
K
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
Revision: October 2004
EC-25
2005 Titan
L
M
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
PBIB0122E
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all eight cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The eight injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speed.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
UBS00KUC
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Wheel sensor*1
Vehicle speed
Ignition timing
control
Power transistor
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
●
At starting
●
During warm-up
●
At idle
●
At low battery voltage
Revision: October 2004
EC-26
2005 Titan
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed A
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. EC
●
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed)
UBS00KUD
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Neutral position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Wheel sensor*
Vehicle speed
ECM function
Actuator
C
D
Fuel cut control
Fuel injector
E
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed over is 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-24, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-27
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
Air conditioner switch*
1
PFP:23710
UBS00KUE
Input Signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Air conditioner ON signal
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
2
Battery
Battery voltage*
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Wheel sensor*1
Vehicle speed
Air conditioner
cut control
Air conditioner relay
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
System Description
UBS00KUF
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
●
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
●
When cranking the engine.
●
At high engine speeds.
●
When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
●
When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
●
When engine speed is excessively low.
●
When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Revision: October 2004
EC-28
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
PFP:18930
A
UBS00KUG
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
ASCD brake switch
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
EC
Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch
ASCD steering switch operation
C
ASCD vehicle speed control
Park/Neutral position (PNP)
switch
Gear position
Wheel sensor*
Vehicle speed
TCM*
Powertrain revolution
Electric throttle control
actuator
D
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
E
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
F
G
H
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
I
ACCEL OPERATION
J
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
K
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
●
CANCEL switch is pressed
●
More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
●
Brake pedal is depressed
●
Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position
●
Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
●
VDC system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
●
Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
●
Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
Revision: October 2004
EC-29
2005 Titan
L
M
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch
is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
●
Brake pedal is released
●
A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions
●
Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description
UBS00KUH
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-541 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-548 , and EC-626 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-548 , EC-563 and EC-626 .
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-393 , EC-395 , EC-401 and EC-406 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-633 .
Revision: October 2004
EC-30
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UBS00KUI
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-31
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description
PFP:14950
UBS00KUJ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
Revision: October 2004
EC-32
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2053E
Revision: October 2004
EC-33
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
BBIA0444E
Revision: October 2004
EC-34
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Component Inspection
UBS00KUK
A
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
EC
C
D
PBIB1212E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1.
E
Wipe clean valve housing.
F
G
H
SEF445Y
2.
Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
I
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 ,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
2
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
J
K
SEF943S
L
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-314 and EC-527 .
M
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-250 and EC-256 .
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-321 and EC-535 .
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-328 , EC-331 and EC-337 .
Revision: October 2004
EC-35
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
BBIA0366E
Removal and Installation
UBS00KUL
EVAP CANISTER
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
BBIA0349E
: N-·m (kg-m, in-lb)
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
BBIA0350E
Revision: October 2004
EC-36
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
UBS00KUM
A
CAUTION:
●
Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
●
Do not start engine.
●
Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
●
EC
C
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
D
E
F
G
PEF838U
6.
7.
Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
H
I
J
K
PEF917U
L
8.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
M
SEF200U
Revision: October 2004
EC-37
2005 Titan
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
BBIA0366E
2.
Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA
3.
Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP
system.
4.
To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
BBIA0443E
5.
6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-38
2005 Titan
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
System Description
PFP:00032
A
UBS00KUN
EC
C
D
E
F
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
●
Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
●
Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
●
Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
–
Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
–
Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
–
Disconnect battery ground cable.
●
Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
●
Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
●
Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
●
After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
●
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
Revision: October 2004
EC-39
2005 Titan
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00KUO
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
BBIA0351E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
Revision: October 2004
EC-40
2005 Titan
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
A
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
C
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
D
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
E
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
F
G
H
BBIA0351E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
I
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
L
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
M
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace filler neck tube.
Revision: October 2004
EC-41
2005 Titan
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube.
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
SEF665U
Revision: October 2004
EC-42
2005 Titan
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Component Inspection
UBS00KUP
A
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" .
EC
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
C
side to a fuel container.
Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
D
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
E
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
F
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
G
H
I
J
K
BBIA0401E
L
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" .
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel gauge retainer.
Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Revision: October 2004
EC-43
2005 Titan
M
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
d.
Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0401E
Revision: October 2004
EC-44
2005 Titan
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
PFP:11810
A
UBS00KUQ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB0062E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection
UBS00KUR
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
Revision: October 2004
EC-45
2005 Titan
M
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1.
2.
Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
Revision: October 2004
EC-46
2005 Titan
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Description
●
●
●
PFP:25386
A
UBS00KUS
If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in
the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
EC
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-136, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SysC
tem-NATS)" .
Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
D
mode with CONSULT-II.
When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
SEF543X
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
E
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual, IVIS/NVIS.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-47
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
PFP:00028
UBS00KUT
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data
Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code
Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits
Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID
Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC
1st trip DTC
Freeze
Frame data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code
SRT status
Test value
CONSULT-II
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
GST
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
ECM
×
×*
—
—
—
×
—
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-102,
"Fail-safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic
UBS00KUU
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable
MIL
DTC
1st trip
Items
—: Not applicable
1st trip DTC
2nd trip
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
—
—
—
×
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
—
—
—
×
—
×
×
—
Blinking
Lighting
up
Blinking
Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0308 is being detected
×
—
—
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0308 is being detected
—
—
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-49, "EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .)
—
Except above
—
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Revision: October 2004
EC-48
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
UBS00KUV
C
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL
Reference page
D
E
ECM*3
U1000
1000*5
—
—
1
×
EC-160
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*
5
—
—
2
—
EC-160
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
—
—
Flashing*7
EC-64
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
×
×
2
×
EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
×
×
2
×
EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
×
×
2
×
EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
×
×
2
×
EC-163
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
—
—
2
×
EC-171
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
—
—
1
×
EC-180
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
—
—
1
×
EC-180
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
—
—
2
×
EC-188
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
—
—
2
×
EC-188
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
—
—
1
×
EC-192
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
—
—
1
×
EC-192
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
—
—
1
×
EC-198
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
—
—
1
×
EC-198
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
—
—
1
×
EC-205
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
—
—
2
×
EC-208
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
—
—
2
×
EC-211
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
—
×
2
×
EC-213
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
×
×
2
×
EC-222
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
—
×
2
×
EC-213
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
×
×
2
×
EC-222
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
—
—
2
×
EC-233
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
—
—
2
×
EC-242
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
—
—
2
×
EC-233
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
—
—
2
×
EC-242
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
—
—
2
×
EC-250
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
—
—
2
×
EC-256
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
—
—
2
×
EC-256
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
—
—
1
×
EC-261
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
—
—
1
×
EC-261
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Revision: October 2004
EC
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
A
EC-49
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL
Reference page
ECM*3
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 7 MISFIRE
P0307
0307
—
—
2
×
EC-268
CYL 8 MISFIRE
P0308
0308
—
—
2
×
EC-268
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
—
—
2
—
EC-276
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
—
—
2
—
EC-276
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2
P0332
0332
—
—
2
—
EC-276
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2
P0333
0333
—
—
2
—
EC-276
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
—
—
2
×
EC-281
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
—
—
2
×
EC-288
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
×
×
2
×
EC-295
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
0430
×
×
2
×
EC-295
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
×
×
2
×
EC-301
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
×
×
2
×
EC-306
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
—
—
2
×
EC-314
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
—
—
2
×
EC-314
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
—
—
2
×
EC-321
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
—
—
2
×
EC-328
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
—
—
2
×
EC-331
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
—
—
2
×
EC-337
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
—
—
2
×
EC-345
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
×*4
×
2
×
EC-353
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
—
—
2
×
EC-362
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
—
—
2
×
EC-364
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
—
—
2
×
EC-366
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
—
—
2
×
EC-366
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6
P0500
0500
—
—
2
×
EC-368
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
—
—
2
×
EC-370
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
—
—
2
×
EC-372
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
—
—
2
—
EC-374
ECM
P0605
0605
—
—
1 or 2
× or —
EC-379
TCM
P0700
0700
—
—
1
×
AT-104
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
—
—
2
×
AT-105
P0710
0710
—
—
2
×
AT-127
VHCL SPD SEN/CIR AT*
P0720
0720
—
—
1
×
AT-109
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
0740
—
—
2
×
AT-116
A/T TCC S/U FNCTN
P0744
0744
—
—
2
×
AT-118
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
—
—
2
×
AT-120
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
6
Revision: October 2004
EC-50
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL
Reference page
A
EC
ECM*3
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1031
1031
×
×
2
×
EC-382
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1032
1032
×
×
2
×
EC-382
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1051
1051
×
×
2
×
EC-382
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1052
1052
×
×
2
×
EC-382
ECM BACK UP/CIRC
P1065
1065
—
—
2
×
EC-389
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
—
—
1
×
EC-393
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
—
—
1
×
EC-395
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
—
—
1
×
EC-401
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
—
—
1
×
EC-401
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
—
—
1
×
EC-406
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
×
×
2
×
EC-411
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
×
×
2
×
EC-422
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
—
—
1
×
EC-433
HO2S2 (B2)
P1166
1166
×
×
2
×
EC-411
HO2S2 (B2)
P1167
1167
×
×
2
×
EC-422
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
—
—
1
×
EC-433
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
—
—
2
—
EC-434
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
—
—
2
—
EC-435
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
—
—
1
×
EC-436
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
—
—
2
—
EC-446
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
—
—
2
—
EC-448
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
—
—
1
×
EC-450
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1271
1271
—
×
2
×
EC-455
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1272
1272
—
×
2
×
EC-464
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1273
1273
—
×
2
×
EC-473
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1274
1274
—
×
2
×
EC-483
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1276
1276
—
×
2
×
EC-493
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1278
1278
×
×
2
×
EC-503
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1279
1279
×
×
2
×
EC-515
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1281
1281
—
×
2
×
EC-455
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1282
1282
—
×
2
×
EC-464
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1283
1283
—
×
2
×
EC-473
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1284
1284
—
×
2
×
EC-483
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1286
1286
—
×
2
×
EC-493
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1288
1288
×
×
2
×
EC-503
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1289
1289
×
×
2
×
EC-515
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
—
—
2
×
EC-527
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
—
—
2
×
EC-535
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
—
—
1
—
EC-541
P1572
1572
—
—
1
—
EC-548
P1574
1574
—
—
1
—
EC-556
ASCD BRAKE SW
ASCD VHL SPD SEN*
8
Revision: October 2004
EC-51
2005 Titan
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL
Reference page
ECM*3
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 P1615
1610 - 1615
—
—
2
—
BL-136
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
—
—
2
×
EC-558
TURBINE REV S/CIRC
P1716
1716
—
—
2
×
AT-132
A/T INTERLOCK
P1730
1730
—
—
1
×
AT-136
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC
P1752
1752
—
—
1
×
AT-141
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN
P1754
1754
—
—
1
×
AT-143
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC
P1757
1757
—
—
1
×
AT-145
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT
P1759
1759
—
—
1
×
AT-147
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC
P1762
1762
—
—
1
×
AT-149
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN
P1764
1764
—
—
1
×
AT-151
HLR/C SOL/CIRC
P1767
1767
—
—
1
×
AT-153
HLR/C SOL FNCTN
P1769
1769
—
—
1
×
AT-155
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC
P1772
1772
—
—
1
×
AT-157
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT
P1774
1774
—
—
1
×
AT-159
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
—
—
2
—
EC-563
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
—
—
1
×
EC-568
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
—
—
1
×
EC-568
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
—
—
1
×
EC-574
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
—
—
1
×
EC-574
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
—
—
1
×
EC-581
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
—
—
1
×
EC-588
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status" .
*8: 2WD models
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-49, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
EC-52
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the A
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-95, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC ConfirEC
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
C
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
●
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●
Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
M
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-127, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Revision: October 2004
EC-53
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Priority
1
Items
Freeze frame data
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0308
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2
3
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indication)
Performance
Priority*
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
Corresponding
DTC No.
CATALYST
2
Three way catalyst function
P0420, P0430
EVAP SYSTEM
2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
1
EVAP control system
P0442
2
EVAP control system
P0456
2
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
P1278, P1288
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
P1279, P1289
HO2S
Revision: October 2004
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1146, P1166
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1147, P1167
EC-54
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indication)
Performance
Priority*
HO2S HTR
2
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
Corresponding
DTC No.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
P1031, P1032,
P1051, P1052
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037, P0038,
P0057, P0058
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
A
EC
C
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result
All OK
Case 1
Case 2
NG exists
Case 3
E
Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON →
Diagnosis
← ON →
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
P0402
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
OFF
OFF
← ON →
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
— (1)
P0402
— (0)
— (0)
OK (1)
— (1)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK
OK
—
—
P0402
—
—
—
—
P1402
NG
—
NG
NG
(Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC
—
1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
●
The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
●
The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
●
When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
●
If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
Revision: October 2004
D
EC-55
2005 Titan
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
PBIB2320E
*1
EC-53, "How to Read DTC and 1st
Trip DTC"
Revision: October 2004
*2
EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status"
EC-56
*3
EC-57, "How to Set SRT Code"
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF935Z
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2317E
L
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-54, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
Revision: October 2004
EC-57
2005 Titan
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Driving Pattern
PBIB2314E
Revision: October 2004
EC-58
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc.
A
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
EC
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
●
Sea level
C
●
Flat road
●
Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
●
Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
D
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
E
●
The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
●
The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
●
The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
G
Pattern 2:
●
When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
H
Pattern 3:
●
Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
●
Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed
I
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
J
●
The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steadystate driving.
●
If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again.
K
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
PBIB2244E
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
L
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
●
M
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Revision: October 2004
EC-59
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen.
Test value (GST display)
Item
Self-diagnostic test item
DTC
Test limit
Conversion
01H
Max.
1/128
02H
81H
Min.
1
P0430
03H
02H
Max.
1/128
P0430
04H
82H
Min.
1
EVAP control system (Small leak)
P0442
05H
03H
Max.
1/128 mm2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
06H
83H
Min.
20 mV
EVAP control system (Very small leak)
P0456
07H
03H
Max.
1/128 mm2
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1)
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)
EVAP
SYSTEM
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1)
HO2S
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
Revision: October 2004
TID
CID
P0420
01H
P0420
P1271
41H
8EH
Min.
5mV
P1272
42H
0EH
Max.
5mV
P1273
43H
0EH
Max.
0.002
P1274
44H
8EH
Min.
0.002
P1278
45H
8EH
Min.
0.002
P1276
46H
0EH
Max.
5mV
P1276
47H
8EH
Min.
5mV
P1279
48H
8EH
Min.
0.002
P1281
4CH
8FH
Min.
5mV
P1282
4DH
0FH
Max.
5mV
P1283
4EH
0FH
Max.
0.002
P1284
4FH
8FH
Min.
0.002
P1288
50H
8FH
Min.
0.002
P1286
51H
0FH
Max.
5mV
P1286
52H
8FH
Min.
5mV
P1289
53H
8FH
Min.
0.002
P0138
1CH
06H
Max.
10mV
P0139
19H
86H
Min.
10mV/500 ms
P1147
1AH
86H
Min.
10 mV
P1146
1BH
06H
Max.
10 mV
P0158
24H
07H
Max.
10mV
P0159
21H
87H
Min.
10 mV/500 ms
P1167
22H
87H
Min.
10 mV
P1166
23H
07H
Max.
10 mV
EC-60
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Item
Self-diagnostic test item
DTC
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
HO2S
HEATER
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)
Test value (GST display)
Test limit
Conversion
10H
Max.
5 mV
90H
Min.
5 mV
TID
CID
P1032
57H
P1031
58H
P1052
59H
11H
Max.
5 mV
P1051
5AH
91H
Min.
5 mV
P0038
2DH
0AH
Max.
20 mV
P0037
2EH
8AH
Min.
20 mV
P0058
2FH
0BH
Max.
20 mV
P0057
30H
8BH
Min.
20 mV
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
A
EC
C
D
E
WITH CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-61
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
SCIA5671E
WITH GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
●
If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
●
The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
–
Diagnostic trouble codes
–
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
–
Freeze frame data
–
1st trip freeze frame data
–
System readiness test (SRT) codes
Revision: October 2004
EC-62
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
–
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
UBS00KUW
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-636, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
A
EC
C
D
E
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
F
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function
Mode I
Ignition switch in
ON position
BULB CHECK
Explanation of Function
G
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running
Mode II
Ignition switch in
ON position
H
I
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
●
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
●
One trip detection diagnoses
J
K
L
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
M
Engine stopped
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Revision: October 2004
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-63
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
MIL Flashing Without DTC
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-57, "How to Display
SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
●
It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●
It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
●
Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status" .
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
3.
Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-636, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL
Condition
ON
When the malfunction is detected.
OFF
No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
Revision: October 2004
EC-64
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL A
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
EC
read a code.
C
D
E
F
G
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
H
I
J
K
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC64, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
●
If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
●
Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
L
OBD System Operation Chart
M
UBS00KUX
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
●
●
●
●
●
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-48, "Two Trip Detection
Logic"
The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.
The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
Revision: October 2004
EC-65
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
SUMMARY CHART
Items
MIL (goes off)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
80 (pattern C)
80 (pattern C)
40 (pattern A)
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern B)
*1, *2
*1, *2
1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-68, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS
FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-70, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE
”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Revision: October 2004
EC-66
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C)
without the same malfunction. (The
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared at
the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
Revision: October 2004
EC-67
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●
The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●
The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
●
The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
●
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
●
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
●
The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
●
The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
●
The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
●
The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Revision: October 2004
EC-68
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A)
without the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
Revision: October 2004
EC-69
2005 Titan
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
AEC574
●
●
●
The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●
The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●
The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
●
The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
Revision: October 2004
EC-70
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection
PFP:00018
A
UBS00KUY
1. INSPECTION START
1.
2.
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Headlamp switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF976U
5.
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-71
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
1.
2.
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-72
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
EC
C
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
E
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
G
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)"
.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
K
L
M
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
J
EC-73
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" .
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
BBIA0379E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
Revision: October 2004
EC-74
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
A
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" .
EC
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
C
D
BBIA0379E
E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
F
G
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)"
.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
●
I
J
K
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END
Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END
No
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-75
2005 Titan
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
UBS00KUZ
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1.
Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
BBIA0377E
2.
Check ignition timing.
BBIA0379E
Method B
1.
Remove ignition coil No.1.
BBIA0360E
Revision: October 2004
EC-76
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
2.
Connect ignition coil No.1 and spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.
A
EC
C
BBIA0378E
D
E
F
G
SEF011V
3.
Check ignition timing.
H
I
J
BBIA0379E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-77
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
UBS00KV0
PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
● Battery
● Ignition system
● Engine oil and coolant levels
● Fuses
● ECM harness connector
● Vacuum hoses
● Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
● Fuel pressure
● Engine compression
● Throttle valve
● Evaporative emission system
On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.
Checks should be carried out while selector lever is in P or N position.
When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger.
Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Revision: October 2004
EC-78
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
OVERALL SEQUENCE
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2086E
Revision: October 2004
EC-79
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. INSPECTION START
1.
2.
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Head lamp switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5.
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-80
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
2.
A
With CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no load,
then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
EC
C
D
E
PBIA8513J
3.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
F
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
G
H
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1
minute.
3. Check idle speed.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
J
K
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
M
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-81
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)"
.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-82
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
A
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" .
EC
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (With GST)>>GO TO 20.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
C
D
BBIA0379E
E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
F
>> GO TO 12.
G
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
H
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
I
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
J
K
L
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
M
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
Revision: October 2004
EC-83
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" .
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
BBIA0379E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)"
.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-84
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position.
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 21.
1.
2.
3.
EC
C
D
E
F
20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
G
With GST
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position.
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 21.
1.
2.
3.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-85
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to EC-457, "Wiring Diagram" .
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2. GO TO 4.
22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 23.
23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 24.
24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-86
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
25. CHECK CO%
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DOWN”
and “Qd”.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
C
D
Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly.
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG
>> GO TO 27.
SEF172Y
F
26. CHECK CO%
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
Check CO%.
Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly.
After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature
sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG
>> GO TO 27.
G
H
I
J
7.
K
SEF982UA
L
M
27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
>> GO TO 31.
28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Replace A/F sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29.
With GST>>GO TO 30.
Revision: October 2004
EC-87
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position.
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 31.
1.
2.
3.
30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With GST
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position.
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 31.
1.
2.
3.
31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-92, "Fuel Pressure Check" .
●
Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-171, "DTC
P0101 MAF SENSOR" and EC-180, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
●
Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
●
Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" and EC-205, "DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 33.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 32.
Revision: October 2004
EC-88
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
A
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
EC
>> GO TO 4.
C
33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
D
E
>> GO TO 4.
VIN Registration
UBS00KV1
DESCRIPTION
F
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
G
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
H
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.
J
K
L
PBIB2242E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
UBS00KV2
DESCRIPTION
M
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
UBS00KV3
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
Revision: October 2004
EC-89
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning
UBS00KV4
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
●
Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
●
Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
●
Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
●
Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
●
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
●
Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is start the headlamp will not be illuminated.
●
Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
●
Vehicle speed: Stopped
●
Transmission: Warmed-up
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T”
system indicates less than 0.9V.
For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
Revision: October 2004
EC-90
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
6.
Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF454Y
D
7.
8.
Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
E
F
G
MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
●
It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●
It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
Revision: October 2004
EC-91
2005 Titan
H
I
J
K
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check
UBS00KV5
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0380E
Revision: October 2004
EC-92
2005 Titan
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
A
CAUTION:
●
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
●
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
EC
quick connector o-ring maintains sealability.
●
Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.
●
Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in C
manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres- D
sure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
E
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
F
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep fuel hose connections clean.
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure
G
Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure.
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
H
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for
I
fuel leakage.
6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
BBIA0390E
J
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel
connection every 3 minutes.
At idling:
K
Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
8.
9.
If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-93
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
PFP:00004
UBS00KV6
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-95, "WORK FLOW" .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-99, "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
Revision: October 2004
EC-94
SEF234G
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2267E
Revision: October 2004
EC-95
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Detailed Flow
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-98, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1.
Check DTC*1 .
2.
Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
–
Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
–
Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
.)
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
–
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-96
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A
1
1
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-100, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
C
NOTE:
●
Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
●
Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC ConfirmaE
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No
>> Check according to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
F
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
G
Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
H
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
I
With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Are they within the SP value?
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> GO TO 8.
J
K
L
SEF601Z
M
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: October 2004
EC-97
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-116, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-138, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK
>> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC)" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC58, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
●
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
●
Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.
Revision: October 2004
EC-98
SEF907L
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MTBL0017
Revision: October 2004
EC-99
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
UBS00KV7
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Priority
1
Detected items (DTC)
●
U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
●
P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
●
P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
●
P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
●
P0128 Thermostat function
●
P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
●
P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●
P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
●
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
●
P0605 ECM
●
P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●
P1229 Sensor power supply
●
P1610 - P1615 NATS
●
P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●
P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
Revision: October 2004
EC-100
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Priority
2
3
Detected items (DTC)
A
●
P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
●
P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
●
P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
●
P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve
●
P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
●
P0700 P0710 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1716 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769
P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves
●
P1031 P1032 P1051 P1052 A/F sensor 1 heater
●
P1065 ECM power supply
●
P1122 Electric throttle control function
●
P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
●
P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
●
P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 P1281 P1282 P1283 P1284 P1286 P1288 P1289 A/F sensor 1
●
P1805 Brake switch
●
P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
●
P0300 - P0308 Misfire
●
P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
●
P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system
●
P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
●
P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
●
P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
●
P1211 TCS control unit
●
P1212 TCS communication line
●
P1564 ASCD steering switch
●
P1572 ASCD brake switch
●
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-101
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-safe Chart
UBS00KV8
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102
P0103
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0117
P0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or START
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or START
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135
Throttle position sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121
Electric throttle control
actuator
(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
●
P1122
Electric throttle control
function
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124
P1126
Throttle control motor relay
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128
Throttle control motor
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229
Sensor power supply
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Accelerator pedal position
sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Revision: October 2004
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-102
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart
UBS00KV9
A
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
1
1
2
3
2
Fuel pressure regulator system
3
3
4
4
4
Injector circuit
1
1
2
3
2
Evaporative emission system
3
3
4
4
4
Air
Positive crankcase ventilation system
3
3
4
4
4
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
Ignition
Electric throttle control actuator
1
1
2
3
3
Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
3
3
1
1
Ignition circuit
1
1
2
2
2
3
Main power supply and ground circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Fuel pump circuit
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
Fuel
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
ENGINE STALL
AA
Warranty symptom code
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
4
2
EC
3
4
EC-608
4
4
EC-32
4
4
4
1
1
1
EC-71
2
EC-393,
EC-395 ,
EC-401 ,
EC-406
2
1
1
1
1
EC-71
2
2
2
2
2
EC-596
3
3
3
3
3
EC-154
2
2
2
2
2
Knock sensor circuit
2
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
Revision: October 2004
2
2
2
EC-455,
EC-464 ,
EC-473 ,
EC-483 ,
EC-493 ,
EC-503 ,
EC-515
EC-198,
EC-261 ,
EC-446 ,
EC-448 ,
EC-581
2
EC-515,
EC-568 ,
EC-574 ,
EC-588
1
3
EC-276
EC-281
EC-103
H
I
J
K
L
EC-192,
EC-205
3
Throttle position sensor circuit
2
2
EC-171,
EC-180
3
2
G
EC-45
2
3
3
EC-614
2
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
F
2
1
D
E
EC-92
1
1
Reference page
4
2
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit
2
C
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
3
2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
Vehicle speed signal circuit
2
Power steering pressure sensor circuit
2
ECM
2
2
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit
EC-288
3
3
3
3
3
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
3
3
3
3
2
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Electrical load signal circuit
Air conditioner circuit
EC-368
EC-374
3
3
3
3
EC-379,
EC-389
3
EC-558
4
EC-620
3
2
2
Reference page
3
3
4
3
3
3
EC-625
3
3
3
2
MTC-28
EC-434,
EC-435
or BRC98
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
Revision: October 2004
EC-104
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
A
Fuel
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
EC
Fuel tank
Fuel piping
5
5
5
5
5
5
F
G
—
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
—
Air duct
EM-14
Air cleaner
EM-14
Electric throttle control actuator
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Battery
1
1
1
1
EM-15
1
1
Generator circuit
SC-17
3
Signal plate
6
EM-76
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch
4
AT-105
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
3
EM-60
Cylinder block
Piston
4
Piston ring
Connecting rod
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
EM-76
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve
mechanism
Timing chain
EM-35
Camshaft
Intake valve
EM-44
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
Exhaust valve
Revision: October 2004
5
EC-105
L
SC-10
1
Cylinder head
5
K
SC-4
Starter circuit
Cylinder head gasket
I
J
5
EM-15
1
H
EM-14
5
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
Engine
E
—
5
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric
throttle control actuator)
Cranking
D
FL-3
Valve deposit
Air
Reference
page
FL-10
5
Vapor lock
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane)
C
EM-60
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5
5
5
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
5
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
5
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
Exhaust
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
5
5
5
Reference
page
EM-19, EX3
Three way catalyst
Lubrication
Cooling
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EM-22, LU13 , LU-10 ,
LU-11
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
LU-7
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-12
Thermostat
5
CO-19
Water pump
Water gallery
CO-17
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
CO-8
Cooling fan
5
CO-15
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant
5
CO-10
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
1
1
BL-136
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
Revision: October 2004
EC-106
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
UBS00KVA
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0452E
Revision: October 2004
EC-107
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0381E
Revision: October 2004
EC-108
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0382E
Revision: October 2004
EC-109
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0440E
Revision: October 2004
EC-110
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0384E
Revision: October 2004
EC-111
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB2637E
Revision: October 2004
EC-112
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing
UBS00KVB
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2052E
Refer to EC-23, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.
Revision: October 2004
EC-113
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram
UBS00KVC
BBWA1720E
Revision: October 2004
EC-114
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1721E
Revision: October 2004
EC-115
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
UBS00KVD
MBIB0045E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
UBS00KVE
PREPARATION
1.
2.
ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery.
Remove ECM harness connector.
BBIA0386E
3.
4.
When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with
levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
BBIA0387E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
1
WIRE
COLOR
B
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Body ground
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
2
O/B
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
Revision: October 2004
EC-116
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
L
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
A
EC
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
L/W
Throttle control motor (Close)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
C
D
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
L/B
Throttle control motor (Open)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
F
PBIB1105E
G
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–
6
GR
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
H
0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
[Engine is running]
●
12
R
●
Steering wheel: Being turned
[Engine is running]
●
J
0.5 - 4.5V
K
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
[Engine is running]
Power steering pressure sensor
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Steering wheel: Not being turned
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0.4 - 0.8V
L
Approximately 10V
M
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
13
O
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB1042E
Revision: October 2004
EC-117
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
1.0 - 4.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
14
Y
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB1040E
15
W
Knock sensor (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●
16
35
Idle speed
BR/R
BR/G
56
LG/B
75
P/B
Approximately 2.5V
Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
21
22
23
44
O/L
BR
GR/W
O
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 7
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
24
BR/W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
Revision: October 2004
EC-118
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–
25
O/G
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
EC
0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
C
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
[Engine is running]
●
32
L
EVAP control system pressure sensor
34
R/B
Intake air temperature sensor
36
W
Knock sensor (bank 2)
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.
F
Approximately 2.5V
G
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
40
41
42
63
Y/G
P
L
G
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
Injector No. 8
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
H
I
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
SEC984C
J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
L
SEC985C
M
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
45
L/Y
●
Idle speed
●
Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
SEC990C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
SEC991C
Revision: October 2004
EC-119
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
47
Y
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
48
SB
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
R/Y
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
B
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
51
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Mass air flow sensor
1.0 - 1.3V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
1.7 - 2.1V
[Engine is running]
55
R
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
–
57
58
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
L/P
GR/G
76
G/L
77
BR/B
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
L/R
GR/R
O/W
Y/R
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
[Engine is running]
46
60
61
62
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Ignition signal No. 7
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0 - 0.3V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
SEC987C
Revision: October 2004
EC-120
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
[Engine is running]
66
R
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC
Approximately 0V
C
Approximately 5V
D
Less than 4.75V
E
[Engine is running]
67
68
B
Sensor ground
W/L
Sensor power supply
(PSP sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
W
Throttle position sensor 2
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
F
More than 0.36V
G
[Engine is running]
70
73
B/W
Y/B
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
(Compressor: Operates.)
[Engine is running]
1.0 - 4.0V
H
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
engine coolant temperature.
I
[Engine is running]
74
L
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
–
J
0 - Approximately 1.0V
K
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
L
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
65
79
80
81
G/R
V/W
W/R
W/G
Ignition signal No. 8
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
M
0 - 0.3V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
SEC987C
Revision: October 2004
EC-121
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
82
B/R
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
83
85
G/W
G/W
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
Data link connector
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected
Approximately 0V
Approximately 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
86
P
CAN communication line
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V
Output voltage varies with the
communication status
90
L
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
94
L
CAN communication line
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
G/R
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
99
G/Y
ASCD steering switch
MAIN switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/W
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
102
GR/R
PNP switch
O
Selector lever: P or N
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
104
Except the above gear position
2.0 - 2.5V
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
Revision: October 2004
0.25 - 0.50V
EC-122
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
107
BR/W
V/R
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Engine is running]
●
BR/W
ASCD brake switch
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
109
L/W
Brake pedal: Fully released
C
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with fuel
tank temperature.
D
Approximately 0V
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Ignition switch
●
W/B
4.2 - 4.8V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
111
EC
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
108
0.5 - 1.0V
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
G
0 - 1.5V
H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
0 - 1.5V
J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
Body ground
L
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
113
GR
Fuel pump relay
For 1 second after turning ignition switch
ON
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON
[Engine is running]
115
116
B
B/W
ECM ground
117
L/Y
EVAP canister vent control
valve
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
BR
BR
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
121
W
Power supply for ECM (Buckup)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
●
Idle speed
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: October 2004
EC-123
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)
UBS00KVF
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC)
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test
This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number
ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
●
Diagnostic trouble codes
●
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
●
Freeze frame data
●
1st trip freeze frame data
●
System readiness test (SRT) codes
●
Test values
Revision: October 2004
EC-124
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
A
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
INPUT
OUTPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
ACTIVE
TEST
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
×
×
×
×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
×
×
×
×
Mass air flow sensor
×
×
×
Engine coolant temperature sensor
×
×
×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
×
×
×
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2
×
×
×
×
×
Wheel sensor
×
×
×
Accelerator pedal position sensor
×
×
×
Throttle position sensor
×
×
×
Fuel tank temperature sensor
×
×
×
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
×
×
×
Intake air temperature sensor
×
×
×
Knock sensor
×
Refrigerant pressure sensor
×
×
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor
signal)
×
×
Air conditioner switch
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch
×
×
×
Power steering pressure sensor
×
×
×
Battery voltage
×
×
Load signal
×
×
D
×
×
G
H
J
K
L
×
×
×
ASCD steering switch
×
×
×
ASCD brake switch
×
×
×
Fuel injector
×
×
×
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Throttle control motor relay
×
Throttle control motor
×
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
×
Air conditioner relay
×
M
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Cooling fan relay
×
×
×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
×
×
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Calculated load value
Revision: October 2004
E
F
Fuel level sensor
EVAP canister vent control valve
C
I
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Fuel pump relay
EC
EC-125
×
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME
DATA" .
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near
the hood opener handle.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
6.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
BCIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
EC-126
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
A
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
●
FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN
●
THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT
●
THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT.
When clearing the coefficient of
self-learning control value
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
●
IGN SW ON
●
ENGINE NOT RUNNING
●
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
●
NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
●
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
●
WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
C
D
E
F
G
FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
●
EC
H
I
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
J
VIN REGISTRATION
●
IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM
When registering VIN in ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*
●
IDLE CONDITION
When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*
●
IDLE CONDITION
When adjusting target ignition timing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
K
L
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-49, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
Description
●
The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
●
“Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
One mode in the following is displayed.
“Mode2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“Mode3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
“Mode4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“Mode5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
●
The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
[°C] or [°F]
●
The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
FUEL SYS-B1
FUEL SYS-B2
Revision: October 2004
EC-127
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Freeze frame data
item*
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
Description
●
“Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
●
“Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
●
The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
●
The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
ABSOL TH-P/S
[%]
●
The throttle valve opening at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
●
The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
●
The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
*: The item is the same as that of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
×: Applicable
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
ENG SPEED [rpm]
×
×
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
×
×
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
×
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
×
●
The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
●
Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board correction.
●
The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
×
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F]
×
×
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V]
×
×
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V]
×
HO2S2 (B1) [V]
×
HO2S2 (B2) [V]
×
Revision: October 2004
Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
●
The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the
engine coolant temperature sensor) is
displayed.
●
The A/F signal computed from the input
signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
●
The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 2 is displayed.
EC-128
Remarks
●
Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
drops below the idle rpm.
●
If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
●
This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
●
When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the
ECM is displayed.
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
×
MAIN
SIGNALS
●
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
×
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
×
×
BATTERY VOLT
[V]
×
×
ACCEL SEN 1 [V]
×
×
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]
×
THRTL SEN 1 [V]
×
THRTL SEN 2 [V]
×
FUEL T/TMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
Description
×
Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
small.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.
●
The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed.
●
The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
●
The accelerator pedal position sensor
signal voltage is displayed.
●
The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed.
●
The fuel temperature (determined by the
signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed.
●
The intake air temperature (determined
by the signal voltage of the intake air
temperature sensor) is indicated.
×
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
×
EVAP SYS PRES
[V]
×
●
The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE
[V]
×
●
The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.
●
Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
computed by the ECM according to the
signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
×
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
×
×
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF]
×
×
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF]
×
×
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
×
×
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
●
●
×
●
[ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (determined by the signal
voltage of the power steering pressure
sensor signal) is indicated.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON: Lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Lighting switch is OFF.
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
×
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
heater fan switch signal.
Revision: October 2004
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
C
D
E
●
●
ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ECM terminal voltage signal.
F
THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ECM terminal voltage signal.
G
H
I
J
●
After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.
EC-129
K
L
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
×
EC
Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal.
●
×
A
Remarks
M
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item
[Unit]
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
×
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec]
×
Description
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
stop lamp switch signal.
●
Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according
to the input signals.
●
Indicates the ignition timing computed
by ECM according to the input signals.
●
“Calculated load value” indicates the
value of the current air flow divided by
peak air flow.
●
Indicates the mass air flow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the mass air flow sensor.
●
Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value
computed by the ECM according to the
input signals.
●
The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
●
The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to
the input signals) is indicated.
●
Indicates the fuel pump relay control
condition determined by ECM according
to the input signals.
●
The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
●
Indicates the throttle control motor relay
control condition determined by the
ECM according to the input signals.
●
The control condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
input signals) is indicated.
HI: High speed operation
OFF: Stop
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
ECM according to the input signals.
●
Indicates the engine speed computed
from the turbine revolution sensor signal.
●
Indicates the vehicle speed computed
from the revolution sensor signal.
●
Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not
been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has
already been performed successfully.
INJ PULSE-B2
[msec]
IGN TIMING
[BTDC]
×
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
PURG VOL C/V
[%]
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
×
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
×
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
THRTL RELAY
[ON/OFF]
COOLING FAN
[HI/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
×
×
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
I/P PULLY SPD
[rpm]
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h] or [MPH]
IDL A/V LEARN
[YET/CMPLT]
Revision: October 2004
EC-130
Remarks
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [mile]
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
[%]
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
[%]
AC PRESS SEN
[V]
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
SET VHCL SPD
[km/h] or [mph]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
●
A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals.
●
The current flow to the heater becomes
larger as the value increases.
●
The signal voltage from the refrigerant
pressure sensor is displayed.
D
●
The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed.
E
●
The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
MAIN SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
switch signal.
CANCEL SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
COAST switch signal.
BRAKE SW1
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
ASCD brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
lamp switch signal.
●
Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
VHCL SPD CUT
[NON/CUT]
●
LO SPEED CUT
[NON/CUT]
AT OD MONITOR
[ON/OFF]
AT OD CANCEL
[ON/OFF]
CRUISE LAMP
[ON/OFF]
SET LAMP
[ON/OFF]
Revision: October 2004
A
Remarks
EC
C
F
G
H
I
J
K
Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
according to the input signal from the
TCM.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
cancel signal sent from the TCM.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
according to the input signals.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
lamp determined by the ECM according
to the input signals.
EC-131
L
M
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
Monitored item
[Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
Remarks
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec],
[Hz] or [%]
●
DUTY-HI
Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse
width measured by the probe.
●
Only # is displayed if item is unable to
be measured.
●
Figures with #s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
DUTY-LOW
PLS WIDTH-HI
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
Monitored item
[Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
ENG SPEED [rpm]
×
×
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
×
×
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
Description
●
Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
●
The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor specification is displayed.
●
Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board correction.
×
●
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
×
The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
Remarks
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
●
This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
●
FUEL INJECTION
IGNITION TIMING
POWER BALANCE
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II.
JUDGEMENT
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
●
Harness and connectors
●
Fuel injector
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Timing light: Set
●
Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Compression
●
A/C switch: OFF
●
Fuel injector
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
Power transistor
●
Cut off each injector signal one at
a time using CONSULT-II.
●
Spark plug
●
Ignition coil
Revision: October 2004
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
Engine runs rough or dies.
EC-132
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TEST ITEM
COOLING FAN*
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
PURG VOL
CONT/V
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
VENT CONTROL/V
CONDITION
JUDGEMENT
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
Turn the cooling fan HI and OFF
using CONSULT-II.
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●
Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.
●
Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
●
Change the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
opening percent using CONSULT-II.
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
Cooling fan moves and stops.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Cooling fan motor
●
IPDM E/R
●
Harness and connectors
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
Fuel injector
●
Harness and connectors
●
Fuel pump relay
A
EC
C
D
E
Engine speed changes according to
the opening percent.
●
Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●
Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF
with the CONSULT-II and listen
to operating sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
F
G
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
H
I
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
J
For details, refer to EC-54, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
K
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode
EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM
A/F SEN1
Test item
Condition
PURG FLOW P0441
EC-301
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
EC-306
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456*
EC-353
PURG VOL CN/V P1444
EC-527
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276
EC-493
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286
EC-493
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289
HO2S2
Reference page
EC-503, EC-515
EC-515, EC-515
HO2S2 (B1) P0139
EC-222
HO2S2 (B1) P1146
EC-411
HO2S2 (B1) P1147
EC-411
HO2S2 (B2) P0159
EC-222
HO2S2 (B2) P1166
EC-411
HO2S2 (B2) P1167
EC-422
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to A60 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
Revision: October 2004
EC-133
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown in the figure, and the data after the
malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
SEF705Y
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
Revision: October 2004
EC-134
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operation
1.
2.
A
“AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
EC
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
D
“MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for furE
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB0197E
Revision: October 2004
EC-135
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function
UBS00KVG
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Service $01
READINESS TESTS
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
Service $02
(FREEZE DATA)
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
Service $03
DTCs
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes:
Service $04
CLEAR DIAG INFO
●
Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
●
Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
●
Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
●
Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
●
Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
●
Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
Service $06
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
Service $07
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the EVAP canister vent control
valve can be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
Service $08
Service $09
—
(CALIBRATION ID)
Revision: October 2004
●
Low ambient temperature
●
Low battery voltage
●
Engine running
●
Ignition switch OFF
●
Low fuel temperature
●
Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
EC-136
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
EC
C
D
BBIA0369E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
E
F
G
SEF398S
5.
Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
H
I
J
K
SEF416S
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-137
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
UBS00KVH
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED
●
Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1
See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL
See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1
A/F ALPHA-B2
See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
COOLAN TEMP/S
●
Engine: After warming up
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
11 - 14V
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Selector lever: D
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
EVAP SYS PRES
●
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL
●
Ignition switch: ON → START → ON
OFF → ON → OFF
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
VHCL SPEED SE
BATTERY VOLT
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2*
CLSD THL POS
AIR COND SIG
P/N POSI SW
PW/ST SIGNAL
●
●
●
●
●
LOAD SIGNAL
●
IGNITION SW
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Ignition switch: ON
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Ignition switch: ON
More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5 V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
LEAN ←→ RICH
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor: Operates.)
ON
Shift lever: P or N
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
Steering wheel: Not being turned
(Forward direction)
OFF
Steering wheel: Being turned
ON
Lighting switch: In 2nd position
ON
Lighting switch: OFF.
OFF
Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON
Revision: October 2004
ON
ON → OFF → ON
EC-138
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MONITOR ITEM
HEATER FAN SW
BRAKE SW
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
IGN TIMING
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
PURG VOL C/V
AIR COND RLY
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
SPECIFICATION
Heater fan: Not operating
OFF
Heater fan: Operating
ON
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Idle
2.0 - 2.8 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
Idle
10° - 20° BTDC
2,000 rpm
25° - 45° BTDC
Idle
14% - 33%
2,500 rpm
12% - 25%
Idle
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s
D
E
F
G
H
Idle
(Accelerator pedal: Not depressed
even slightly, after engine starting.)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor: Operates)
ON
I
J
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●
Engine running or cranking
●
Except above conditions
OFF
VENT CONT/V
●
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
THRTL RELAY
●
Ignition switch: ON
ON
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
COOLING FAN
EC
C
●
FUEL PUMP RLY
A
ON
Engine coolant temperature: 99°C
(210°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature: 100°C
(212°F) or more
HI
K
L
M
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
–
Engine: After warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
●
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
●
Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
TRVL AFTER MIL
●
Ignition switch: ON
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
●
Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
I/P PULLY SPD
VEHICLE SPEED
Revision: October 2004
ON
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has
turned ON.
EC-139
0 - 65,535 km
(0 - 40,723 mile)
0 - 100%
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
●
Engine: Idle
●
Air conditioner switch: ON
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
SET VHCL SPD
●
Engine: Running
ASCD: Operating.
The preset vehicle speed is
displayed.
MAIN SW
Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed
ON
●
MAIN switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Released
OFF
AC PRESS SEN
VHCL SPEED SE
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
BRAKE SW1
BRAKE SW2
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
●
●
●
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 0V
1.0 - 4.0V
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
●
Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
ON → OFF
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD: Operating
ON
●
Vehicle speed: Between 40 km/h
(25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH)
ASCD: Not operating
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
Revision: October 2004
EC-140
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00KVI
A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
C
D
E
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2445E
Revision: October 2004
EC-141
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB2099E
Revision: October 2004
EC-142
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
PFP:00031
A
UBS00KVJ
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
●
B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
●
A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
E
●
MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
●
UBS00KVK
Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
F
2
●
Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
●
Transmission: Warmed-up*1
●
●
G
Electrical load: Not applied*2
●
Engine speed: Idle
*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
H
Inspection Procedure
J
●
UBS00KVL
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
M
SEF601Z
Revision: October 2004
EC-143
I
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00KVM
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2268E
Revision: October 2004
EC-144
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2548E
Revision: October 2004
EC-145
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
3.
Start engine.
Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-143, "Testing Condition" .
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within
the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1
minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
PBIB2369E
2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19.
PBIB2332E
3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
PBIB2332E
4. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-146
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1.
2.
A
Stop the engine.
Change engine oil.
EC
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C
dition.
>> INSPECTION END
D
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-92, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE
CHECK" . GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
1.
–
–
–
2.
Check the following.
Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
Clogged fuel filter
Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-92, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
F
H
I
J
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
K
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1.
2.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
Revision: October 2004
EC-147
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
Check the following.
Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .)
Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .)
Intake air leakage
Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-60, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
●
For DTC P1271, P1281, refer to EC-455, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1272, P1282, refer to EC-464, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1273, P1283, refer to EC-473, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1274, P1284, refer to EC-483, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1276, P1286, refer to EC-493, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1278, P1288, refer to EC-504, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1279, P1289, refer to EC-516, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 15.
Revision: October 2004
EC-148
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
A
Stop the engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
EC
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
C
1.
2.
D
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
E
F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
G
H
I
PBIB2332E
18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
–
–
2.
–
–
–
J
Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
Engine oil level is too high
Engine oil viscosity
Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
Noise from engine
Noise from transmission, etc.
Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
Valve clearance malfunction
Intake valve timing control function malfunction
Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
K
L
M
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
Crushed air ducts
●
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
●
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
●
Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
●
Revision: October 2004
EC-149
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-180, "DTC
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
2. GO TO 29.
NG
>> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
24. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> GO TO 29.
Revision: October 2004
EC-150
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
A
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Crushed air ducts
●
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
●
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
●
Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 27.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
EC
C
D
26. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
E
F
G
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30.
H
I
J
PBIB2370E
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
K
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
●
Looseness of oil filler cap
●
Disconnection of oil level gauge
●
Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
●
Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
●
Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
●
Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
●
Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-151
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-152
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
PFP:00006
A
UBS00KVN
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
C
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow
2
3 or 4
Situation
D
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5
(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10
The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure
E
UBS00KVO
F
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
G
H
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
J
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
K
Perform GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-24, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace connector.
Revision: October 2004
EC-153
2005 Titan
L
M
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
PFP:24110
UBS00ENP
BBWA1670E
Revision: October 2004
EC-154
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
1
EC
WIRE
COLOR
B
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
109
L/W
Ignition switch
Idle speed
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
B
B/W
ECM ground
119
120
BR
BR
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
115
116
C
Body ground
0V
●
W/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
111
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
D
E
0 - 1.5V
F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
G
Body ground
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H
UBS00ENQ
1. INSPECTION START
I
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
L
M
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-155
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F32, E2
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB2063E
Revision: October 2004
EC-156
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
EC
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
11.
C
D
PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1.
2.
E
F
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
G
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
H
I
PBIB1191E
J
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
L
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 7.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-157
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
12. CHECK 20A FUSE
Check 20A fuse (No. 53, located in IPDM E/R).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace 20A fuse.
13. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F32, E2
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-158
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Ground Inspection
UBS00ENR
A
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti- EC
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
C
●
Remove the ground bolt or screw.
●
Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
D
●
Clean as required to assure good contact.
●
Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
●
Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
●
If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the E
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
F
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" .
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB1870E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-159
2005 Titan
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:23710
UBS00ENS
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
U1000*1
1000*1
U1001*2
DTC detecting condition
●
CAN communication
line
1001*2
UBS00ENT
●
ECM cannot communicate to other control
units.
ECM cannot communicate for more than the
specified time.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
UBS00ENU
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-162, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-160
2005 Titan
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ENV
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1671E
Revision: October 2004
EC-161
2005 Titan
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ENW
Go to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-162
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS00ENX
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
ECM function
Actuator
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control
EC
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
C
D
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600
OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
F
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ENY
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
–
Engine: After warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
●
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
I
ON
OFF
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0037
0037
(Bank 1)
P0057
0057
(Bank 2)
P0038
0038
(Bank 1)
P0058
0058
(Bank 2)
H
SPECIFICATION
UBS00ENZ
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control circuit low
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
Possible cause
●
K
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
●
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is shorted.)
●
Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
L
M
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control circuit high
Revision: October 2004
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater.)
EC-163
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EO0
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-164
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EO1
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1672E
Revision: October 2004
EC-165
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–
6
GR
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
[Engine is running]
●
Revision: October 2004
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
EC-166
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1673E
Revision: October 2004
EC-167
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–
25
O/G
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
[Engine is running]
●
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EO2
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-168
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0435E
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB0112E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair harness or connectors.
L
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0037, P0038
6
2
1
P0057, P0058
25
2
2
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-169
2005 Titan
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Refer to EC-170, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EO3
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1.
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No.
Resistance
2 and 3
5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
4 and 1, 2, 3
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF249Y
Removal and Installation
UBS00EO4
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-170
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22680
A
UBS00EO5
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
EC
C
D
BBIA0355E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EO6
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
Idle
14% - 33%
2,500 rpm
12% - 25%
Idle
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s
G
H
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS00EO7
J
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
A)
P0101
0101
F
SPECIFICATION
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition.
Mass air flow sensor circuit
range/performance problem
B)
Revision: October 2004
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving condition.
EC-171
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
●
Intake air temperature sensor
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Intake air leaks
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
●
Intake air temperature sensor
2005 Titan
K
L
M
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EO8
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
SEF243Y
Revision: October 2004
EC-172
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
7.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1
More than 3V
THRTL SEN 2
More than 3V
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8.
A
EC
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Overall Function Check
C
PBIB0199E
D
UBS00EO9
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
E
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select Service $01 with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
If NG, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
G
H
I
SEF534P
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-173
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EOA
BBWA1674E
Revision: October 2004
EC-174
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
1.0 - 1.3V
D
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,500 rpm.
1.7 - 2.1V
E
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
BR
BR
A
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
F
0 - 1.5V
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EOB
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A
>> GO TO 3.
B
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
L
Check the following for connection.
●
Air duct
●
Vacuum hoses
●
Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
Revision: October 2004
EC-175
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0368E
3.
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●
Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-176
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
E
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-191, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
I
J
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
K
L
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
M
Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-177
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EOC
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.7 - 2.1
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.7 - 2.1
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
Revision: October 2004
EC-178
2005 Titan
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation
A
EC
UBS00EOD
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
C
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-179
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22680
UBS00EOE
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
BBIA0355E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EOF
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
Idle
14% - 33%
2,500 rpm
12% - 25%
Idle
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EOG
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0102
0102
P0103
0103
Trouble diagnosis name
Mass air flow sensor circuit
low input
Mass air flow sensor circuit
high input
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Intake air leaks
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Mass air flow sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Revision: October 2004
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
EC-180
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EOH
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
D
E
F
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
G
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II
H
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
K
SEF058Y
L
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-181
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EOI
BBWA1674E
Revision: October 2004
EC-182
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
1.0 - 1.3V
D
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,500 rpm.
1.7 - 2.1V
E
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
BR
BR
A
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
F
0 - 1.5V
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EOJ
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
K
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
L
Check the following for connection.
●
Air duct
●
Vacuum hoses
●
Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
Revision: October 2004
EC-183
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0368E
3.
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●
Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-184
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
E
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-186, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
I
J
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-185
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EOK
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.7 - 2.1
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.7 - 2.1
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
Revision: October 2004
EC-186
2005 Titan
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation
A
EC
UBS00EOL
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
C
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-187
2005 Titan
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00EOM
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
BBIA0355E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
25 (77)
3.32
1.94 - 2.06
80 (176)
1.23
0.295 - 0.349
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS00EON
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0112
0112
Intake air temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113
0113
Intake air temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EOO
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-188
2005 Titan
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EOP
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA0879E
Revision: October 2004
EC-189
2005 Titan
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EOQ
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0368E
3.
Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB1169E
Revision: October 2004
EC-190
2005 Titan
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
E
Refer to EC-191, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
I
Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and
6 under the following conditions.
J
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.94 - 2.06
K
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
L
BBIA0355E
M
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00EOS
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-191
2005 Titan
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00EOT
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
Engine coolant temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage* V
–10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
Resistance
kΩ
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EOU
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC
No.
Trouble Diagnosis Name
P0117
0117
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0118
0118
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Condition
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
START
80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Except as shown above
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.
Revision: October 2004
EC-192
2005 Titan
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EOV
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-195, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-193
2005 Titan
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EOW
BBWA1676E
Revision: October 2004
EC-194
2005 Titan
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EOX
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0354E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
G
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
H
I
J
K
BBIA0370E
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0080E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING RART
Check the following.
●
Harness connector F26, F101
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-195
2005 Titan
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
4. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connector F26, F101
●
Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-196, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EOY
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
Revision: October 2004
EC-196
2005 Titan
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
A
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
EC
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
C
SEF012P
D
Removal and Installation
UBS00EOZ
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EM-60, "CYLINDER HEAD" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-197
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00EP0
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EP1
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2*
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Selector lever: D
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EP2
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0122
0122
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0123
0123
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-198
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EP3
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-199
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EP4
BBWA1677E
Revision: October 2004
EC-200
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
EC
WIRE
COLOR
Y
A
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
B
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
D
More than 0.36V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
F
[Engine is running]
66
R
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
W
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
H
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
I
More than 0.36V
J
Approximately 5V
UBS00EP5
K
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-201
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
PBIB1480E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2065E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2
EC-200
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-590
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-202
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
H
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
K
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-204, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
L
M
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
E
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-203
2005 Titan
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EP6
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON
Set selector lever to D position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
PBIB1530E
UBS00EP7
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-204
2005 Titan
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
A
UBS00EP8
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC
P0118. Refer to EC-192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
C
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
D
E
SEF594K
F
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V
–10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
Resistance
kΩ
G
H
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
I
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EP9
K
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0125
0125
Trouble diagnosis name
Insufficient engine coolant
temperature for closed loop
fuel control
Revision: October 2004
J
DTC detecting condition
●
Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
practical, even when some time has passed
after starting the engine.
●
Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
EC-205
Possible cause
L
●
Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
Thermostat
2005 Titan
M
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EPA
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-206, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EPB
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-207, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-206
2005 Titan
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
A
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" .
C
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
4.
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-194, "Wiring Diagram" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
Component Inspection
UBS00EPC
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
F
G
H
PBIB2005E
I
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
J
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
K
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
L
SEF012P
M
Removal and Installation
UBS00EPD
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-207
2005 Titan
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00EPE
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
BBIA0355E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
25 (77)
3.32
1.9 - 2.1
80 (176)
1.23
0.31 - 0.37
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0127
0127
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake air temperature
too high
UBS00EPF
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Intake air temperature sensor
UBS00EPG
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
a.
Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: October 2004
EC-208
2005 Titan
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the engine coolant temperature.
If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-209, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
SEF189Y
D
WITH GST
E
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EPH
F
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0354E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
M
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-189, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-209
2005 Titan
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EPI
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.94 - 2.06
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
BBIA0355E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00EPJ
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-210
2005 Titan
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:21200
A
UBS00EPK
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
EC
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
DTC No.
P0128
0128
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
The engine coolant temperature does not
reach to specified temperature even though
the engine has run long enough.
Thermostat function
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
C
●
Thermostat
●
Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
D
UBS00EPL
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
●
For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . Use only a
genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE
E
F
G
H
I
J
80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-211, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1.
K
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EPM
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-211, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Component Inspection
M
UBS00EPN
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
Revision: October 2004
EC-211
L
2005 Titan
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00EPO
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-212
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS00EPP
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
EC
C
D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EPQ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
F
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
G
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EPR
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
H
I
J
K
PBIB1848E
L
DTC No.
P0138
0138
(Bank 1)
P0158
0158
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
M
Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit high voltage
Revision: October 2004
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
EC-213
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EPS
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-214
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EPT
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-215
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
R
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
Revision: October 2004
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-216
Approximately 0V
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1679E
Revision: October 2004
EC-217
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
L
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00EPU
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-218
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0435E
2.
3.
E
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
55
1
1
P0158
74
1
2
J
K
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
L
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
55
1
1
P0158
74
1
2
M
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-219
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check HO2S2 harness connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-220, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EPV
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
SEF174Y
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
Revision: October 2004
EC-220
2005 Titan
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A
EC
C
PBIB2636E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
D
E
F
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB2054E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS00EPW
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-221
2005 Titan
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS00EPX
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EPY
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EPZ
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
DTC No.
P0139
0139
(Bank 1)
P0159
0159
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit slow response
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
It takes more time for the sensor to respond
between rich and lean than the specified time.
EC-222
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EQ0
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2374E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-228, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00EQ1
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: October 2004
EC-223
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If NG, go to EC-228, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-224
PBIB2054E
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EQ2
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-225
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
R
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
Revision: October 2004
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-226
Approximately 0V
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1679E
Revision: October 2004
EC-227
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
L
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00EQ3
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-228
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
BBIA0368E
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-233, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-229
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0435E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0139
55
1
1
P0159
74
1
2
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0139
55
1
1
P0159
74
1
2
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-230
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
A
Refer to EC-231, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
EC
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
C
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EQ4
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
F
G
H
SEF174Y
I
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
J
K
L
PBIB1672E
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
M
PBIB2636E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Revision: October 2004
EC-231
2005 Titan
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB2054E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS00EQ5
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-232
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16600
A
UBS00KVP
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu- EC
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
C
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
A/F sensor 1
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM function
Fuel injection control
P0174
0174
(Bank 2)
Fuel injection system too
lean
●
Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●
The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
Fuel injector
D
DTC detecting condition
P0171
0171
(Bank 1)
Actuator
Possible cause
●
Intake air leaks
●
A/F sensor 1
●
Fuel injector
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
Lack of fuel
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
Incorrect PCV hose connection
DTC Confirmation Procedure
E
F
G
UBS00KVQ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
SEF968Y
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
Revision: October 2004
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
EC-233
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
7.
8.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
BBIA0368E
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
Revision: October 2004
EC-234
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
UBS00KVR
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1680E
Revision: October 2004
EC-235
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
BANK 2
BBWA1681E
Revision: October 2004
EC-236
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00KVS
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
A
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
G
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-237
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-238
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
A
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
EC
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
C
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
●
Fuel lines
●
Fuel filter for clogging
E
F
>> Repair or replace.
G
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Install all removed parts.
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec:
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec:
H
I
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec:
97.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec:
J
K
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-239
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTORS, refer to EC608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
PBIB1986E
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2.
Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.
Revision: October 2004
EC-240
PBIB1926E
2005 Titan
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-241
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16600
UBS00KVT
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
A/F sensor 1
DTC No.
P0172
0172
(Bank 1)
P0175
0175
(Bank 2)
Input signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel injection system too
rich
ECM function
Actuator
Fuel injection control
DTC detecting condition
Fuel injector
Possible cause
●
A/F sensor 1
●
Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●
Fuel injector
●
The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00KVU
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
SEF968Y
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
7.
8.
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
Revision: October 2004
EC-242
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
If engine starts, go to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
A
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
C
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
D
Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
E
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
BBIA0368E
to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
F
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
G
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
H
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
I
J
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
K
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-243
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
UBS00KVV
BANK 1
BBWA1680E
Revision: October 2004
EC-244
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1681E
Revision: October 2004
EC-245
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00KVW
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: October 2004
EC-246
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0376E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
E
G
H
I
J
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
K
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
L
M
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-247
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
>> Repair or replace.
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec:
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec:
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-248
2005 Titan
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0133E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Listen to each injector operating sound.
F
Clicking noise should be heard.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTORS, refer to EC608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
H
I
PBIB1986E
8. CHECK INJECTOR
J
Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
1.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-249
2005 Titan
K
L
M
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00EQE
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0442E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0181
0181
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit range/
performance
UBS00EQF
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
UBS00EQG
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to EC-253, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-253, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-250
SEF174Y
2005 Titan
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-251
2005 Titan
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EQH
BBWA1682E
Revision: October 2004
EC-252
2005 Titan
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EQI
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
A
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
EC
C
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
D
E
F
G
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
H
I
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
J
K
L
BBIA0442E
3.
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E
Revision: October 2004
EC-253
2005 Titan
M
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connector.
5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and combination
meter terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E152, M31
●
Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit fuel pump”.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-254
2005 Titan
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EQJ
A
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove fuel level sensor unit.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 3 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
EC
C
D
SEF476YA
E
Removal and Installation
UBS00EQK
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-255
2005 Titan
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00EQL
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0442E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS00EQM
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0182
0182
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0183
0183
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EQN
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-256
2005 Titan
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EQO
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1682E
Revision: October 2004
EC-257
2005 Titan
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EQP
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0442E
3.
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E
Revision: October 2004
EC-258
2005 Titan
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
EC
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and combination
meter terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
F
G
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E152, M31
●
Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
H
I
J
7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-260, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit fuel pump”.
K
L
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-259
2005 Titan
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EQQ
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove fuel level sensor unit.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 3 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
SEF476YA
Removal and Installation
UBS00EQR
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-260
2005 Titan
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00EQS
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EQT
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2*
CONDITION
F
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Selector lever: D
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EQU
H
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0222
0222
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
1 is sent to ECM.
P0223
0223
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
I
●
Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
J
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
L
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-261
2005 Titan
M
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EQV
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-262
2005 Titan
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EQW
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1683E
Revision: October 2004
EC-263
2005 Titan
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
Y
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
B
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
66
R
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
W
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
More than 0.36V
Approximately 5V
UBS00EQX
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-264
2005 Titan
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0371E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2065E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
M
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2
EC-263
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-590
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-265
2005 Titan
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-267, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-266
2005 Titan
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EQY
A
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set selector lever to D position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1530E
F
G
UBS00EQZ
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
H
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-267
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ER0
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input signal to ECM
Engine speed
ECM function
On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0300
0300
Multiple cylinder misfire
detected
Multiple cylinder misfire.
P0301
0301
No.1 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
P0302
0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire
detected
P0303
0303
No. 3 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
P0304
0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 4 cylinder misfires.
P0305
0305
No. 5 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 5 cylinder misfires.
P0306
0306
No. 6 cylinder misfire
detected
P0307
0307
No. 7 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 7 cylinder misfires.
P0308
0308
No. 8 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 8 cylinder misfires.
No. 2 cylinder misfires.
No. 6 cylinder misfires.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Improper spark plug
●
Insufficient compression
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
The injector circuit is open or shorted
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leak
●
The ignition signal circuit is open or
shorted
●
Lack of fuel
●
Signal plate
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Incorrect PCV hose connection
UBS00ER1
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
Revision: October 2004
EC-268
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
A
Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-269, "Diagnostic Procedure"
C
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performD
ing the following procedure is advised.
PBIB0164E
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
E
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
F
G
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
H
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
I
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed
Time
J
Around 1,000 rpm
Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm
Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm
Approximately 3.5 minutes
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
L
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00KVX
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
M
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace it.
Revision: October 2004
EC-269
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
BBIA0374E
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 7.
4. CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-608,
"INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
PBIB1986E
Revision: October 2004
EC-270
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
A
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0380E
F
G
H
I
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
Revision: October 2004
K
L
M
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
2.
3.
J
EC-271
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
7. CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK
PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-60, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
Standard:
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each
cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
10. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
Install all removed parts.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
Revision: October 2004
EC-272
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
●
Fuel lines
●
Fuel filter for clogging
EC
C
>> Repair or replace.
12. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
D
Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
Items
E
Specifications
Target idle speed
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-273
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1.
Revision: October 2004
EC-274
2005 Titan
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
15. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
A
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec:
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec:
EC
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec:
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec:
C
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
E
16. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
F
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
G
17. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
H
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
I
J
>> GO TO 18.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-275
2005 Titan
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Component Description
PFP:22060
UBS00ER3
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine
knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
PBIB0021E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ER4
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.
DTC No.
P0327
0327
(bank 1)
Trouble diagnosis name
Knock sensor circuit low
input
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
P0332
0332
(bank 2)
P0328
0328
(bank 1)
Knock sensor circuit high
input
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Knock sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
P0333
0333
(bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ER5
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-278, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-276
2005 Titan
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ER6
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1684E
Revision: October 2004
EC-277
2005 Titan
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
15
36
WIRE
COLOR
W
W
ITEM
Knock sensor (bank 1)
Knock sensor (bank 2)
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ER7
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor (bank1) terminal 1, ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor
(bank 2) terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0021E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F26, F101
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EC-280, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace knock sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-278
2005 Titan
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
A
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
E
F
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
H
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
I
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
J
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F26, F101
●
Harness connectors F14, E5
●
Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground
K
L
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-279
2005 Titan
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Component Inspection
UBS00ER8
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF227W
Removal and Installation
UBS00ER9
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-76, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-280
2005 Titan
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
PFP:23731
A
UBS00ERA
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
F
G
H
PBIB2448E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ERB
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0335
0335
Trouble diagnosis name
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS) circuit
UBS00ERC
DTC detecting condition
●
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
●
The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
while the engine is running.
●
J
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
L
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
Signal plate
UBS00ERD
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
Revision: October 2004
EC-281
K
2005 Titan
M
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-284, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-282
2005 Titan
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ERE
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1685E
Revision: October 2004
EC-283
2005 Titan
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
1.0 - 2.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
13
O
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
PBIB1042E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ERF
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-284
2005 Titan
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0367E
3.
E
Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
SEF481Y
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F32, E2
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F32, E2
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-285
2005 Titan
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-287, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace the signal plate.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-286
2005 Titan
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Inspection
UBS00ERG
A
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0563E
5.
F
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
G
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
H
I
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
UBS00ERH
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
J
Refer to AT-265, "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY" .
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-287
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
PFP:23731
UBS00ERI
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of
exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The
camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB0562E
PBIB2448E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P0340
0340
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
UBS00ERJ
The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●
Camshaft (Exhaust)
●
The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
during engine running.
●
Starter motor (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
●
The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.
●
Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10,
"STARTING SYSTEM" .)
●
Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ERK
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: October 2004
EC-288
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-291, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-291, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
A
EC
C
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-289
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ERL
BBWA1686E
Revision: October 2004
EC-290
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 4.0V
D
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
14
Y
E
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB1040E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ERM
I
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position.
J
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
K
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
L
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-291
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0372E
3.
Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F32, E2
●
Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F32, E2
●
Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-292
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
D
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
E
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
F
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-293
2005 Titan
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Inspection
UBS00ERN
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3(+) - 1 (-)
2 (+) - 1 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
UBS00ERO
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-44, "CAMSHAFT" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-294
2005 Titan
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:20905
A
UBS00ERP
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel sensor
(A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
EC
C
D
PBIB2055E
E
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
P0420
0420
(Bank 1)
P0430
0430
(Bank 2)
DTC detecting condition
●
Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
●
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly.
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.
Possible cause
●
Three way catalyst (manifold)
●
Exhaust tube
●
Intake air leaks
●
Fuel injector
●
Fuel injector leaks
●
Spark plug
●
Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure
F
G
H
UBS00ERQ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
J
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
Revision: October 2004
I
EC-295
K
L
M
SEF189Y
2005 Titan
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
8.
Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB1784E
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
PBIB1785E
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-297, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check
UBS00ERR
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Open engine hood.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals ECM terminals 55
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 74 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and
ground.
Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-297, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB2056E
Revision: October 2004
EC-296
2005 Titan
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ERS
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
A
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
EC
C
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
D
E
F
G
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
I
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
J
K
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
Items
L
Specifications
Target idle speed
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-297
2005 Titan
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
5. CHECK INJECTORS
1.
2.
Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42,
44, 63 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-609, "Wiring Diagram"
.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Perform EC-610, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1527E
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
BBIA0380E
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
●
Revision: October 2004
EC-298
2005 Titan
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and EC
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
D
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG
E
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
F
G
SEF156I
H
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.
I
J
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK
PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
10. CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Reconnect all injector harness connector disconnected.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
Revision: October 2004
EC-299
K
L
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.
Revision: October 2004
EC-300
2005 Titan
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:14950
A
UBS00ERT
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ERU
I
J
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
DTC No.
P0441
0441
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
incorrect purge flow
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between
intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
K
Possible cause
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●
Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
●
Blocked rubber tube
●
Cracked EVAP canister
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
●
Blocked purge port
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
UBS00ERV
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
Revision: October 2004
EC-301
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
Selector lever
Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE
32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED
500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 12.0 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S
70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
PBIB0826E
7.
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC303, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check
UBS00ERW
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch
ON
Headlamp switch
ON
Rear window defogger switch
ON
Engine speed
Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position
Any position other than P, N or R
PBIB1109E
8.
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
Revision: October 2004
EC-302
2005 Titan
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9.
If NG, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ERX
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister.
C
D
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V
Should exist.
0%
Should not exist.
F
G
H
Vacuum
100%
E
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
PBIB1678E
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
Start engine and let it idle.
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.
6.
Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-303
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1.
2.
Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Revision: October 2004
EC-304
2005 Titan
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
A
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
EC
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
C
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
D
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-332, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , P0453 EC338, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
F
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
G
H
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
I
Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
J
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
K
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace it.
L
M
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
E
EC-305
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
UBS00ERY
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0442
0442
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(negative pressure)
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
control system does not operate properly.
EC-306
Possible cause
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ERZ
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●
Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
C
D
E
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB0829E
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
6.
M
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-307
L
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
3.
4.
5.
–
–
Stop vehicle.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ES0
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: October 2004
EC-308
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
A
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
EC
C
D
BBIA0366E
E
F
G
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
H
I
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
J
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
K
L
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
M
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: October 2004
EC-309
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0443E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
●
SEF200U
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-36, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
Revision: October 2004
EC-310
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
A
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
EC
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
C
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
1.
D
BBIA0351E
E
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
F
G
H
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
J
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
K
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PBIB1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-311
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-113, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
Revision: October 2004
EC-312
2005 Titan
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
A
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
C
CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
21.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
D
E
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
F
Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
G
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
H
Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
I
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-313
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
PFP:14920
Description
UBS00ES1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor*2
Vehicle speed
ECM function
Actuator
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB2057E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ES2
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
Revision: October 2004
SPECIFICATION
Idle
(Accelerator pedal: Not depressed
even slightly, after starting engine)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-314
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ES3
A
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
P0444
0444
P0445
0445
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
open
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
shorted
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
An excessively high voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EC
C
D
UBS00ES4
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
E
F
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-318, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
G
H
I
J
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-315
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ES5
BBWA1687E
Revision: October 2004
EC-316
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
45
L/Y
●
Idle speed
●
Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after starting engine.
D
E
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
PBIB0050E
F
11 - 14V
[Engine is running]
●
G
Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0051E
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
BR
BR
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.5V
H
I
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
K
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-317
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ES6
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0366E
4.
Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB2245E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
●
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-318
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
A
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
1.
2.
3.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1678E
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
F
Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
G
H
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ES7
J
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
K
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
L
M
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
PBIB2059E
Revision: October 2004
EC-319
2005 Titan
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Removal and Installation
UBS00ES8
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-320
2005 Titan
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14935
A
UBS00ES9
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
Control System” diagnosis.
EC
C
D
PBIB1263E
E
F
G
H
BBIA0443E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ESA
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0447
0447
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open
J
OFF
UBS00ESB
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
through EVAP canister vent control valve.
K
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-321
2005 Titan
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ESC
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-324, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-322
2005 Titan
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ESD
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1688E
Revision: October 2004
EC-323
2005 Titan
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
WIRE
COLOR
L/Y
ITEM
EVAP canister vent control
valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00ESE
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1679E
Revision: October 2004
EC-324
2005 Titan
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0443E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
PBIB0152E
I
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E41, C1
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
L
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-325
2005 Titan
M
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E41, C1
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ESF
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
PBIB1033E
5.
6.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Revision: October 2004
EC-326
PBIB1679E
2005 Titan
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
7.
8.
Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 6 again.
A
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1033E
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
F
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
G
H
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
PBIB1034E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-327
2005 Titan
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22365
UBS00ESG
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0443E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ESH
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ESI
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No.
P0451
0451
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system pressure
sensor performance
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects a sloshing signal from the
EVAP control system pressure sensor
EC-328
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2005 Titan
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ESJ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
C
D
E
SEF194Y
F
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
G
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ESK
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
I
J
K
L
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-329
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
BBIA0443E
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-333, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ESL
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
●
4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-330
PBIB1173E
2005 Titan
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25085
A
UBS00ESM
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0443E
F
G
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ESN
J
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
K
UBS00ESO
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No.
P0452
0452
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system pressure
sensor low input
Revision: October 2004
I
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
EC-331
Possible cause
L
M
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2005 Titan
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ESP
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
PBIB1110E
Revision: October 2004
EC-332
2005 Titan
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ESQ
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1689E
Revision: October 2004
EC-333
2005 Titan
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
L
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
SB
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00ESR
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
BBIA0443E
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
Revision: October 2004
EC-334
2005 Titan
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
D
SEF079U
E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
F
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
H
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
J
K
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
L
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
M
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
I
EC-335
2005 Titan
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-336, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ESS
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
●
4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-336
PBIB1173E
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25085
A
UBS00EST
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0443E
F
G
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ESU
J
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ESV
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No.
P0453
0453
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system pressure
sensor high input
Revision: October 2004
I
DTC detecting condition
An excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
EC-337
Possible cause
L
M
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP canister
●
Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ESW
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
PBIB1110E
Revision: October 2004
EC-338
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ESX
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1689E
Revision: October 2004
EC-339
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
L
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
SB
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00ESY
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
BBIA0443E
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
Revision: October 2004
EC-340
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
D
SEF079U
E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
F
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
H
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
J
K
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
L
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
M
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
I
EC-341
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors C1, E41
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent or kinked.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-344, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-342
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
A
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
EC
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 13.
C
No
>> GO TO 15.
1.
D
BBIA0351E
E
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
F
G
H
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
I
●
J
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-343
2005 Titan
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00ESZ
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
●
4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-344
PBIB1173E
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
A
UBS00ET0
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0455
0455
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
gross leak detected
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a very large leak
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control
system does not operate properly.
Possible cause
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve
is missing or damaged.
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Revision: October 2004
EC-345
H
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ET1
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
●
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●
Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
PBIB0829E
7.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-347, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442 EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C
Revision: October 2004
EC-346
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH GST
A
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
5. Select Service $07 with GST.
● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-347, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
EC
C
D
UBS00ET2
E
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
F
G
H
SEF915U
I
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
J
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
K
L
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
M
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: October 2004
EC-347
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-36, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0366E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.
Revision: October 2004
EC-348
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
1.
2.
●
EC
C
D
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
E
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
G
H
SEF200U
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-349
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0443E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
●
SEF200U
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
PBIB1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-350
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
EC
C
Vacuum should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
E
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-113, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
F
G
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
H
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
I
J
K
L
PBIB1678E
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
M
Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
Revision: October 2004
EC-351
2005 Titan
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 20.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-352
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
A
UBS00ET3
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
C
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
D
E
F
G
H
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0456
0456
Trouble diagnosis name
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (negative
pressure check)
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
J
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
K
●
EVAP system has a very small leak.
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP system does not operate properly.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
●
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
EC-353
I
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ET4
NOTE:
●
If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
●
After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
●
If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour.
–
Fuel filler cap is removed.
–
Fuel is refilled or drained.
–
EVAP component parts is/are removed.
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
PBIB0837E
5.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Revision: October 2004
EC-354
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Overall Function Check
UBS00ET5
A
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
EC
CAUTION:
●
Do not use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
●
Do not start engine.
C
●
Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
D
E
F
BBIA0366E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Set the pressure pump and a hose.
Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect GST and select Service $08.
Using Service $08, control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to next step.
Disconnect GST.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.
Revision: October 2004
EC-355
G
H
I
J
SEF462UI
K
L
M
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ET6
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: October 2004
EC-356
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
A
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
EC
C
D
BBIA0366E
E
F
G
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
H
I
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
J
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
K
L
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
M
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: October 2004
EC-357
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0443E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
●
SEF200U
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-36, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
Revision: October 2004
EC-358
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
A
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
EC
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
C
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
1.
D
BBIA0351E
E
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
F
G
H
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
J
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
K
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PBIB1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-359
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-113, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
Revision: October 2004
EC-360
2005 Titan
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
A
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
C
CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
21.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
D
E
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
F
Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
G
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
H
Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
I
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-361
2005 Titan
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
UBS00ET7
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0402E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ET8
NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected.
DTC No.
P0460
0460
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
noise
DTC detecting condition
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
UBS00ET9
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-363, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-362
2005 Titan
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ETA
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
A
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
EC
C
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00ETB
E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-363
2005 Titan
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
UBS00ETC
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0402E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ETD
NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
DTC No.
P0461
0461
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
range/performance
DTC detecting condition
The output signal of the fuel level sensor
does not change within the specified range
even though the vehicle has been driven a
long distance.
Overall Function Check
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
UBS00ETE
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-10,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
Revision: October 2004
EC-364
2005 Titan
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII.
Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
If NG, go to EC-365, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
SEF195Y
D
WITH GST
E
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10. If NG, go to EC-365, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ETF
F
G
H
I
J
1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
K
L
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00ETG
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-365
2005 Titan
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
PFP:25060
UBS00ETH
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0402E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ETI
NOTE:
If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0462
0462
Fuel level sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
P0463
0463
Fuel level sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
UBS00ETJ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure"
SEF195Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-366
2005 Titan
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ETK
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
A
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
EC
C
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00ETL
E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-367
2005 Titan
DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS
Description
PFP:32702
UBS00ETM
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0500
0500
Trouble diagnosis name
Vehicle speed sensor
UBS00ETN
DTC detecting condition
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from
vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
even when vehicle is being driven.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
shorted)
●
Wheel sensor
●
Combination meter
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
UBS00ETO
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-369, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 1,600 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 6.9 msec
Selector lever
Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
6.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-369, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Overall Function Check
SEF196Y
UBS00ETP
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
Lift up drive wheels.
Revision: October 2004
EC-368
2005 Titan
DTC P0500 VSS
2.
3.
4.
Start engine.
A
Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-369, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ETQ
1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
C
Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-98, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
D
E
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-369
2005 Titan
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23781
UBS00ETR
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0506
0506
UBS00ETS
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system
RPM lower than expected
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is less than the target idle
speed by 100 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
●
Intake air leak
UBS00ETT
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-638,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-370
2005 Titan
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ETU
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
A
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
EC
C
2. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
D
E
F
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-371
2005 Titan
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23781
UBS00ETV
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0507
0507
UBS00ETW
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system
RPM higher than expected
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is more than the target idle
speed by 200 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
●
Intake air leak
●
PCV system
UBS00ETX
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-638,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-373, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-372
2005 Titan
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ETY
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION
A
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
EC
C
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
D
E
3. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
G
H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-373
2005 Titan
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:49763
UBS00ETZ
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
BBIA0365E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EU0
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel: Not being turned
(Forward direction)
OFF
Steering wheel: Being turned
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EU1
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No.
P0550
0550
Trouble diagnosis name
Power steering pressure
sensor circuit
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Power steering pressure sensor
UBS00EU2
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-376, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-374
2005 Titan
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EU3
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1690E
Revision: October 2004
EC-375
2005 Titan
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
12
R
Power steering pressure
sensor
●
Steering wheel: Being turned.
[Engine is running]
●
Steering wheel: Not being turned.
DATA (DC Voltage)
0.5 - 4.5V
0.4 - 0.8V
[Engine is running]
67
68
B
W/L
Sensor ground
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
Approximately 5V
UBS00EU4
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-376
2005 Titan
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0365E
3.
Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connectors.
G
PBIB0188E
H
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
K
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
M
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace PSP sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-377
2005 Titan
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EU5
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and let it idle.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition
Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned
0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned
0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
Removal and Installation
UBS00EU6
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-378
2005 Titan
DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
PFP:23710
A
UBS00EU7
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
EC
C
D
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EU8
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0605
0605
Trouble diagnosis name
Engine control module
DTC detecting condition
A)
ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
B)
ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
C)
ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
F
Possible cause
●
ECM
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
●
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx.
5 degrees) by the return spring.
●
ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
Malfunction A
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EU9
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
K
L
M
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
I
EC-379
2005 Titan
DTC P0605 ECM
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EUA
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-379, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
With GST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $04 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-379, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
Revision: October 2004
EC-380
2005 Titan
DTC P0605 ECM
2. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
C
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-381
2005 Titan
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
PFP:22693
UBS00EUB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
ECM function
Actuator
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EUC
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
0 - 100%
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1031
1031
(Bank 1)
P1051
1051
(Bank 2)
P1032
1032
(Bank 1)
P1052
1052
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 heater control circuit
low
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 heater control circuit
high
UBS00EUD
DTC detecting condition
The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal
range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater.)
The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal
range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
A/F sensor 1 heater
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
shorted.)
●
A/F sensor 1 heater
UBS00EUE
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure"
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-382
2005 Titan
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EUF
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1691E
Revision: October 2004
EC-383
2005 Titan
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
2
O/B
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: October 2004
EC-384
2005 Titan
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1692E
Revision: October 2004
EC-385
2005 Titan
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
24
BR/W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EUG
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-386
2005 Titan
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0376E
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: October 2004
EC-387
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
7. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EUH
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation
UBS00EUI
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-388
2005 Titan
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
PFP:23710
A
UBS00EUJ
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
EC
C
D
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1065
1065
UBS00EUK
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM power supply circuit
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.]
●
ECM
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
properly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
G
UBS00EUL
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F
H
I
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-391, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
J
K
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-389
2005 Titan
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EUM
BBWA1693E
Revision: October 2004
EC-390
2005 Titan
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
121
EC
WIRE
COLOR
W
A
ITEM
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
UBS00EUN
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
D
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
G
H
MBIB0026E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
IPDM E/R connector E121
●
20A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-391
2005 Titan
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-389, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
With GST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $04 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-389, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-392
2005 Titan
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00EUO
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
C
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EUP
D
This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1121
1121
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
actuator
DTC detecting condition
A)
Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction.
B)
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
not in specified range.
C)
ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
Possible cause
E
●
Electric throttle control actuator
F
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EUQ
NOTE:
●
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
K
L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
Shift selector lever to P position.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
Shift selector lever to P position.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-394, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-393
2005 Titan
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
Shift selector lever to N, P position.
Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-394, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EUR
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0364E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-394
2005 Titan
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00EUS
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC
P1126. Refer to EC-393, "DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" or EC-401, "DTC
P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
C
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EUT
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
E
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
P1122
1122
Electric throttle control
performance problem
Electric throttle control function does not operate properly.
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or
shorted)
F
Electric throttle control actuator
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EUU
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine
is running.
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-395
2005 Titan
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EUV
BBWA1694E
Revision: October 2004
EC-396
2005 Titan
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
L
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
L/W
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
E
PBIB1104E
F
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
L/B
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
G
H
PBIB1105E
104
O
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
I
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
J
UBS00EUW
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
L
M
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-397
2005 Titan
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace 20A fuse.
Revision: October 2004
EC-398
2005 Titan
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
D
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
6
ECM terminal
K
L
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
M
PBIB1480E
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: October 2004
I
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
H
EC-399
2005 Titan
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
10. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0364E
11. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-400, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
13. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EUX
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
PBIB2066E
Removal and Installation
UBS00EUY
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-400
2005 Titan
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00EUZ
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EV0
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL RELAY
CONDITION
●
D
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EV1
E
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1124
1124
P1126
1126
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
relay circuit short
Throttle control motor
relay circuit open
DTC detecting condition
ECM detect the throttle control motor
relay is stuck ON.
ECM detects a voltage of power source
for throttle control motor is excessively
low.
F
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted)
●
Throttle control motor relay
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is open)
●
Throttle control motor relay
G
H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
I
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EV2
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
M
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-404, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
K
L
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
1.
2.
3.
J
EC-401
2005 Titan
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-404, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-402
2005 Titan
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EV3
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1695E
Revision: October 2004
EC-403
2005 Titan
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
104
WIRE
COLOR
L
O
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EV4
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace 20A fuse.
Revision: October 2004
EC-404
2005 Titan
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
A
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
EC
C
D
MBIB0028E
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
H
I
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-405
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00EV5
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EV6
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1128
1128
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
circuit short
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects short in both circuits between
ECM and throttle control motor.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EV7
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-406
2005 Titan
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EV8
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1696E
Revision: October 2004
EC-407
2005 Titan
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
L/W
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
L/B
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EV9
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-408
2005 Titan
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
ECM terminal
5
6
EC
C
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
D
BBIA0371E
E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
G
Refer to EC-409, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
I
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
J
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
K
1.
2.
3.
L
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EVA
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
PBIB2066E
Revision: October 2004
EC-409
2005 Titan
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Removal and Installation
UBS00EVB
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-410
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS00EVC
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
EC
C
D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EVD
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
F
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
G
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EVE
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is
sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
H
I
J
K
PBIB2376E
L
DTC No.
P1146
1146
(Bank 1)
P1166
1166
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 minimum voltage
monitoring
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
EC-411
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EVF
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
PBIB2372E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-417, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
UBS00EVG
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: October 2004
EC-412
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If NG, go to EC-417, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
PBIB2054E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-413
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EVH
BANK 1
BBWA1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-414
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
R
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
D
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
E
[Engine is running]
78
A
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-415
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
BANK 2
BBWA1679E
Revision: October 2004
EC-416
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
L
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
D
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
E
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
F
UBS00EVI
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
H
I
J
K
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-417
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
BBIA0368E
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-418
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0435E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
G
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
I
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1146
55
1
1
P1166
74
1
2
K
Continuity should exist.
2.
L
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
M
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1146
55
1
1
P1166
74
1
2
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-419
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-420, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EVJ
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
SEF174Y
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2636E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Revision: October 2004
EC-420
2005 Titan
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
A
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
C
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
D
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this
E
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
F
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB2054E
G
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
H
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
I
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS00EVK
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
J
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-421
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS00EVL
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EVM
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EVN
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuelcut.
PBIB1154E
DTC No.
P1147
1147
(Bank 1)
P1167
1167
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 maximum voltage
monitoring
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
EC-422
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EVO
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2373E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-428, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00EVP
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: October 2004
EC-423
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this
procedure.
If NG, go to EC-428, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-424
PBIB2054E
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EVQ
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1678E
Revision: October 2004
EC-425
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
R
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
Revision: October 2004
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-426
Approximately 0V
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1679E
Revision: October 2004
EC-427
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
L
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B/W
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00EVR
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-428
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
BBIA0368E
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-429
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0435E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.
1.
CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1147
55
1
1
P1167
74
1
2
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1147
55
1
1
P1167
74
1
2
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-430
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
A
Refer to EC-431, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
EC
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
C
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EVS
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
F
G
H
SEF174Y
I
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
J
K
L
PBIB1672E
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
M
PBIB2636E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Revision: October 2004
EC-431
2005 Titan
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB2054E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS00EVT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-432
2005 Titan
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:22690
A
UBS00EVU
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1148
1148
(Bank 1)
P1168
1168
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed loop control
function
DTC detecting condition
The closed loop control function for bank 1
does not operate even when vehicle is driving
in the specified condition.
The closed loop control function for bank 2
does not operate even when vehicle is driving
in the specified condition.
EC
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
open or shorted.]
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-433
2005 Titan
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
PFP:47850
UBS00EVV
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EVW
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1211
1211
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS control unit
DTC detecting condition
ECM receives a malfunction information from
“ABS actuator electric unit (control unit)”
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
●
TCS related parts
UBS00EVX
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-434, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EVY
Go to BRC-98, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-434
2005 Titan
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:47850
A
UBS00EVZ
NOTE:
If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit C
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EW0
D
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P1212
1212
TCS communication
line
ECM can not receive the information
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” continuously.
E
Possible cause
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
●
Dead (Weak) battery
F
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EW1
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-435, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
I
J
K
L
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
M
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EW2
Go to BRC-98, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-435
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
PFP:00000
UBS00EW3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Cooling Fan Control
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Wheel sensor*2
Vehicle speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
ECM function
Cooling fan
control
Actuator
IPDM E/R
(Cooling fan relay)
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 2-step control [HI/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
PBIB2060E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EW4
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
COOLING FAN
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Revision: October 2004
SPECIFICATION
Engine coolant temperature: 99°C
(210°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature: 100°C
(212°F) or more
HI
EC-436
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EW5
A
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
EC
indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
●
P1217
1217
Engine over temperature (Overheat)
Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat).
Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat).
Possible cause
C
●
Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Cooling fan
●
IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
●
Radiator hose
Radiator
●
Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method.
●
●
Radiator cap
●
Engine coolant is not within the specified
range.
●
Water pump
●
Thermostat
D
E
F
For more information, refer to EC-444,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-10, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check
G
H
I
UBS00EW6
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
J
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-441,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-441,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
M
SEF621W
Revision: October 2004
EC-437
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
4.
5.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
If the results are NG, go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF646X
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-441,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-441,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
SEF621W
Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
If NG, go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF882V
Revision: October 2004
EC-438
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EW7
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1697E
Revision: October 2004
EC-439
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
BBWA1698E
Revision: October 2004
EC-440
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EW8
1. INSPECTION START
A
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
EC
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-443, "PROCEDURE A" .)
D
1.
2.
E
F
G
SEF646X
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION
H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
2. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-443, "PROCEDURE A" .)
I
J
K
L
M
SEF882V
Revision: October 2004
EC-441
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump
5.
PBIC1528E
CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief
pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace radiator cap.
SLC755A
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1.
2.
Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
Valve lift:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
More than 10.0 mm/95°C
(0.394 in/203°F)
3.
Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace thermostat
SLC343
7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-196, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-442
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
A
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-444, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
C
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 22 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
PBIB2067E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
●
40A fusible link
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
K
Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1
and IPDM E/R terminal 24, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and
body ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
L
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
M
BBIA0363E
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
Refer to EC-445, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace cooling fan motor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-443
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connectors.
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Engine
Step
OFF
1
Inspection item
●
Blocked radiator
●
Blocked condenser
●
Blocked radiator grille
●
Blocked bumper
2
●
3
4
UBS00EW9
Equipment
Standard
Reference page
●
Visual
No blocking
Coolant mixture
●
Coolant tester
50 - 50% coolant mixture
MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS"
●
Coolant level
●
Visual
Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck
CO-10, "Changing
Engine Coolant"
●
Radiator cap
●
Pressure tester
59 - 98 kPa
CO-10, "CHECKING
RESERVOIR CAP"
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
—
ON*2
5
●
Coolant leaks
●
Visual
No leaks
CO-10, "CHECKING
COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS"
ON*2
6
●
Thermostat
●
Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot
CO-19, "THERMOSTAT
AND WATER PIPING"
ON*1
7
●
Cooling fan
●
CONSULT-II
Operating
See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-436,
"DTC P1217 ENGINE
OVER TEMPERATURE"
).
OFF
8
●
Combustion gas leak
●
Color checker chemical
tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative
—
ON*3
9
●
Coolant temperature
gauge
●
Visual
Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
●
Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
●
Visual
No overflow during driving
and idling
CO-10, "Changing
Engine Coolant"
OFF*4
10
●
Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radiator
●
Visual
Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
CO-10, "Changing
Engine Coolant"
OFF
11
●
Cylinder head
●
Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)
EM-66, "Inspection After
Disassembly"
12
●
Cylinder block and pistons
●
Visual
No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
EM-92, "Inspection After
Disassembly"
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-444
2005 Titan
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Component Inspection
UBS00EWA
A
COOLING FAN MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
EC
C
D
SEF888V
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-445
2005 Titan
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00EWB
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EWC
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1225
1225
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed throttle position learning
performance problem
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position learning value is
excessively low.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
UBS00EWD
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-447, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-446
2005 Titan
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EWE
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
A
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0364E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00EWF
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
I
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-447
2005 Titan
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00EWG
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EWH
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1226
1226
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position learning
performance problem
Closed throttle position learning is not performed
successfully, repeatedly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
UBS00EWI
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-449, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-448
2005 Titan
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EWJ
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
A
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0364E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00EWK
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
I
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-449
2005 Titan
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16119
UBS00EWL
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1229
1229
Trouble diagnosis name
Sensor power supply circuit
short
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
●
Power steering pressure sensor
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
ECM detects a voltage of power source
for sensor is excessively low or high.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EWM
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-452, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-450
2005 Titan
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EWN
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1699E
Revision: October 2004
EC-451
2005 Titan
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
48
SB
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system
pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
R/Y
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
68
W/L
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
90
L
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EWO
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-452
2005 Titan
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0361E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2070E
H
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
I
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
48
EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3
EC-333
49
Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
EC-621
68
Power steering pressure sensor terminal 1
EC-375
90
APP sensor terminal 7
EC-451
J
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
M
Check the following.
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-336, "Component Inspection" .)
●
Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .)
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-79, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning components.
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-453
2005 Titan
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal position assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-454
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00EWP
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EWQ
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EWR
K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No.
P1271
1271
(Bank 1)
P1281
1281
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit no activity detected
●
L
Possible Cause
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EWS
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
EC-455
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
SEF581Z
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
Gear position
Suitable position
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●
7.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-456
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EWT
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-457
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
BR/R
[Engine is running]
BR/G
56
LG/B
75
P/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
Revision: October 2004
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EC-458
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-459
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
[Engine is running]
GR/G
76
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EWU
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-460
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0376E
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-461
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-462
2005 Titan
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
Removal and Installation
UBS00EWV
A
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-463
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00EWW
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EWX
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EWY
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No.
P1272
1272
(Bank 1)
P1282
1282
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit no activity detected
DTC detecting condition
●
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EWZ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
EC-464
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-469, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF581Z
D
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
Gear position
Suitable position
E
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-469, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●
7.
F
G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-465
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EX0
BANK 1
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-466
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
BR/G
LG/B
75
P/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
BR/R
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
D
Approximately 2.3V
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-467
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-468
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
GR/G
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EX1
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-469
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0376E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
●
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-470
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-471
2005 Titan
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
Removal and Installation
UBS00EX2
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-472
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00EX3
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EX4
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
J
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EX5
K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be
shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No.
P1273
1273
(Bank 1)
P1283
1283
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
lean shift monitoring
DTC detecting condition
●
The output voltage computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side
for a specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
Possible Cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
UBS00EX6
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
EC-473
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-478, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF968Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
11. Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-478, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-474
BBIA0368E
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EX7
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-475
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
BR/R
[Engine is running]
BR/G
56
LG/B
75
P/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
Revision: October 2004
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EC-476
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-477
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
[Engine is running]
GR/G
76
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
●
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EX8
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
BBIA0375E
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-478
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
BBIA0368E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0174. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-479
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1683E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-480
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: October 2004
EC-481
2005 Titan
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
9. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00EX9
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-482
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00EXA
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EXB
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EXC
K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be
shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No.
P1274
1274
(Bank 1)
P1284
1244
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
rich shift monitoring
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side
for a specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
Possible Cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
UBS00EXD
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
EC-483
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-488, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF968Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
11. Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-488, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-484
PBIB1077E
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EXE
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-485
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
BR/R
[Engine is running]
BR/G
56
LG/B
75
P/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
Revision: October 2004
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EC-486
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-487
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
[Engine is running]
GR/G
76
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EXF
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
BBIA0375E
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-488
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
BBIA0368E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172 or P0175. Refer to EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-489
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E
3.
Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1683E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-490
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: October 2004
EC-491
2005 Titan
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
10. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00EXG
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-492
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00EXH
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EXI
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EXJ
K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No.
P1276
1276
(Bank 1)
P1286
1286
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit high voltage
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V.
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EXK
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
Revision: October 2004
EC-493
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
4.
5.
6.
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
ENG SPEED
850 - 3,200 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 8.0 msec
Selector lever
D position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from
step 2.
SEF576Z
7.
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
SEF577Z
8.
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF578Z
Overall Function Check
UBS00EXL
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
Set 5th position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
Revision: October 2004
EC-494
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
8.
9.
Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
Make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-495
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EXM
BANK 1
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-496
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
BR/G
LG/B
75
P/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
BR/R
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
D
Approximately 2.3V
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-497
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-498
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
GR/G
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EXN
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-499
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0376E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
●
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-500
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-501
2005 Titan
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
Removal and Installation
UBS00EXO
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-502
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00EXP
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EXQ
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
J
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EXR
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P1278
1278
(Bank 1)
P1288
1288
(Bank 2)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow response
Revision: October 2004
●
The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
signal takes more than the specified time.
EC-503
K
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
PCV
●
Mass air flow sensor
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EXS
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
PBIB0756E
7.
a.
b.
8.
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select Service $01 with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
Revision: October 2004
EC-504
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
Intake air leaks
A
● Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
EC
● Fuel injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
● PCV valve
C
● Mass air flow sensor
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
E
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
F
●
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-505
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EXT
BANK 1
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-506
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
16
BR/R
35
BR/G
56
LG/B
75
P/B
ITEM
CONDITION
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
A
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
D
Approximately 2.3V
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-507
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-508
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
GR/G
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
●
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EXU
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
L
M
BBIA0375E
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-509
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: October 2004
EC-510
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
BBIA0368E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-233, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 6.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-511
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-512
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-513
2005 Titan
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
11. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-45, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00EXV
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-514
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00EXW
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EXX
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EXY
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P1279
1279
(Bank 1)
●
P1289
1289
(Bank 2)
Revision: October 2004
●
The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
signal takes more than the specified time.
EC-515
L
Possible Cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow response
K
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
PCV
●
Mass air flow sensor
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EXZ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
PBIB0756E
7.
a.
b.
8.
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select Service $01 with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
Revision: October 2004
EC-516
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
Intake air leaks
A
● Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
EC
● Fuel injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
● PCV valve
C
● Mass air flow sensor
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
E
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
F
●
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-517
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EY0
BANK 1
BBWA1700E
Revision: October 2004
EC-518
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
BR/G
LG/B
75
P/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
BR/R
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
D
Approximately 2.3V
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-519
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
BBWA1701E
Revision: October 2004
EC-520
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
GR/G
G/L
77
BR/B
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
L/P
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EY1
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
L
M
BBIA0375E
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-521
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: October 2004
EC-522
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
BBIA0368E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-233, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 6.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-523
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-524
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-525
2005 Titan
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
11. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-45, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00EY2
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-526
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920
Description
A
UBS00EY3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
2
ECM function
EC
Actuator
C
D
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
E
F
Vehicle speed
Wheel sensor*
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
G
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
H
I
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
J
K
L
PBIB2057E
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EY4
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
Revision: October 2004
SPECIFICATION
Idle
(Accelerator pedal: Not depressed
even slightly, after starting engine)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-527
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1444
1444
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid
valve
UBS00EY5
DTC detecting condition
The canister purge flow is detected during the
specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
completely closed.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
(The valve is stuck open.)
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP canister
●
Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
UBS00EY6
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
PBIB0839E
6.
7.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC531, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-531, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-528
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EY7
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1687E
Revision: October 2004
EC-529
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
45
L/Y
●
Idle speed
●
Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after starting engine
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
PBIB0050E
11 - 14V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine).
PBIB0051E
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
BR
BR
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: October 2004
EC-530
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EY8
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
A
CUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0366E
4.
F
Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
PBIB2245E
I
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E119
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
J
K
L
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-531
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-534, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
Revision: October 2004
EC-532
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
A
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
EC
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
C
No
>> GO TO 13.
1.
D
BBIA0351E
E
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
F
G
H
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
I
●
J
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-533
2005 Titan
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Inspection
UBS00EY9
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
PBIB2059E
Removal and Installation
UBS00EYA
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-534
2005 Titan
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14935
A
UBS00EYB
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
EC
C
D
PBIB1263E
E
F
G
H
BBIA0443E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EYC
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
J
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EYD
K
DTC No.
P1446
1446
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve close
Revision: October 2004
DTC detecting condition
EVAP canister vent control valve remains
closed under specified driving conditions.
EC-535
Possible cause
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●
Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
2005 Titan
L
M
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EYE
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
7.
a.
b.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
Repeat next procedures 3 times.
Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-538, "Diagnostic Procedure"
SEF058Y
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
Repeat next procedure 20 times.
Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
8.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-538, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
4.
5.
a.
b.
6.
PBIB0972E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-536
2005 Titan
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EYF
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1688E
Revision: October 2004
EC-537
2005 Titan
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
WIRE
COLOR
L/Y
ITEM
EVAP canister vent control
valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00EYG
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
BBIA0443E
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 6.
BBIA0351E
Revision: October 2004
EC-538
2005 Titan
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
A
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb).
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
C
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
E
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
F
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
G
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
H
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
I
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
J
K
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EYH
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
PBIB1033E
Revision: October 2004
EC-539
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
5.
6.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7.
8.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 6 again.
PBIB1679E
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
Revision: October 2004
EC-540
PBIB1034E
2005 Titan
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25551
A
UBS00KVY
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB2638E
Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00KVZ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAIN SW
●
CANCEL SW
●
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
CONDITION
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: Pressed
ON
MAIN switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
H
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
I
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00KW0
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-379, "DTC P0605 ECM".
DTC No.
P1564
1564
G
Trouble Diagnosis Name
ASCD steering switch
Revision: October 2004
DTC Detecting Condition
●
An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM.
●
ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD
steering switch is out of the specified range.
●
ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is
stuck ON.
EC-541
K
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
ASCD steering switch
●
Combination switch (spiral
cable)
●
ECM
2005 Titan
M
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00KW1
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-544, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-542
2005 Titan
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
UBS00KW2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1702E
Revision: October 2004
EC-543
2005 Titan
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
99
G/Y
ASCD steering switch
MAIN switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CANCEL switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
RESUME/ACCELERATTTE switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
SET/COAST switch: ON
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
UBS00KW3
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-544
2005 Titan
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
C
1.
2.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
Monitor item
MAIN SW
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACC SW
Condition
Indication
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
D
E
SEC006D
SET/COAST switch
SET SW
G
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
SET/COAST switch
Condition
Voltage [V]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 1
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 3
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 2
Released
Approx. 4
H
I
J
PBIB0311E
M
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
15 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
EC-545
BBIA0362E
2005 Titan
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Combination switch (spiral cable)
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Combination switch (spiral cable)
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace ASCD steering switch. Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel
Audio Control Switches" .
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-546
2005 Titan
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Inspection
UBS00KW4
A
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1.
2.
Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector M102.
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
SET/COAST switch
Condition
EC
Resistance [Ω]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 250
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 1,480
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 660
Released
Approx. 4,000
C
D
PBIB1673E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-547
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25320
UBS00KW5
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
BBIA0373E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00KW6
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
BRAKE SW 1
(ASCD brake switch)
●
BRAKE SW 2
(Stop lamp switch)
●
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00KW7
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-379, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
●
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC No.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
DTC Detecting Condition
A)
P1572
1572
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent
to ECM at the same time.
ASCD brake switch
B)
Revision: October 2004
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to
ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving
EC-548
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
●
Harness or connectors
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
●
Stop lamp switch
●
ASCD brake switch
●
Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
●
Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
●
ECM
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC confirmation Procedure
UBS00KW8
A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights
up.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
F
G
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
5.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-551, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
H
PBIB2386E
I
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
J
Driving location
Depress the brake pedal for more than
five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
K
6.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-551, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
L
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-549
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
UBS00KW9
BBWA1873E
Revision: October 2004
EC-550
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/W
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
108
BR/W
A
ASCD brake switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
Approximately 0V
UBS00KWA
F
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
G
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION
H
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
I
J
K
SEC011D
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal: Fully released
L
M
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-551
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
PBIB1537E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: October 2004
EC-552
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0373E
E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
PBIB0857E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-555, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
Revision: October 2004
EC-553
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0373E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
WBIA0545E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M60
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-555, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
Revision: October 2004
EC-554
2005 Titan
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00KWB
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
D
Continuity
E
Should exist.
Should not exist.
F
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
G
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
H
I
Continuity
Should not exist.
J
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
K
WBIA0546E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-555
2005 Titan
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:31036
UBS00F1S
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00F1T
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500.
Refer to EC-368, "DTC P0500 VSS".
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-379, "DTC P0605 ECM".
DTC No.
P1574
1574
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
ASCD vehicle speed
sensor
DTC Detecting Condition
ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified range.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●
Combination meter
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
●
Wheel sensor
●
TCM
●
ECM
UBS00F1U
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
If DTC is detected, go to EC-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-556
2005 Titan
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00F1V
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
A
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
EC
C
2. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-98, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
D
E
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
F
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-557
2005 Titan
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:32006
UBS00EYW
When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
TCM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
Then the TCM sends the PNP switch signal to the ECM via combination meter.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EYX
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
P/N POSI SW
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Selector lever: P or N
ON
Selector lever: Except above
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1706
1706
Trouble diagnosis name
Park/neutral position
switch
UBS00EYY
DTC detecting condition
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
circuit is open or shorted.]
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
●
Combination meter
●
TCM
UBS00EYZ
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever)
Known-good signal
N or P position
ON
Except the above position
OFF
If NG, go to EC-561, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
SEF212Y
3.
4.
5.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 1,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 2.0 msec
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
6.
SEF213Y
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-561, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-558
2005 Titan
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Overall Function Check
UBS00EZ0
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
Condition (Gear position)
Except the above position
3.
EC
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
P or N position
A
C
Voltage V (Known good data)
Approx. 0
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
If NG, go to EC-561, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
E
MBIB0043E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-559
2005 Titan
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EZ1
BBWA1704E
Revision: October 2004
EC-560
2005 Titan
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
102
GR/R
A
PNP switch
Selector lever: P or N
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Except the above gear position
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure
D
UBS00EZ2
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
E
Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
G
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
H
I
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 39.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
K
L
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
M
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F14, E5
●
Harness connectors E152, M31
●
Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
J
EC-561
2005 Titan
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 40.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
1.
2.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 8 and A/T assembly terminal 9.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
9. REPLACE COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-562
2005 Titan
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS00EZ3
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EZ4
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW
C
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EZ5
E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1805
1805
Trouble diagnosis name
Brake switch
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Stop lamp switch
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an
extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
F
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition
Driving condition
When engine is idling
Normal
When accelerating
Poor acceleration
DTC Confirmation Procedure
I
J
UBS00EZ6
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Turn ignition switch ON.
Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-565, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-563
2005 Titan
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EZ7
BBWA1723E
Revision: October 2004
EC-564
2005 Titan
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/W
A
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
UBS00EZ8
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal
Stop lamp
Fully released
Not illuminated
Depressed
Illuminated
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
I
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
J
K
L
BBIA0373E
2.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
M
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WBIA0545E
Revision: October 2004
EC-565
2005 Titan
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M60
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-566
2005 Titan
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection
UBS00EZ9
A
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0373E
2.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Conditions
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
3.
E
Continuity
F
Should not exist.
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.
G
WBIA0546E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-567
2005 Titan
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
UBS00EZA
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EZB
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EZC
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P2122
2122
DTC No.
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
P2123
2123
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-568
2005 Titan
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EZD
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-569
2005 Titan
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EZE
BBWA1706E
Revision: October 2004
EC-570
2005 Titan
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
82
B/R
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 0V
D
[Engine is running]
83
G/W
A
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
E
90
L
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
G/R
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.50V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
H
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
BR/W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
I
4.2 - 4.8V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00EZF
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
K
L
M
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-571
2005 Titan
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0361E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB2070E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-573, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-572
2005 Titan
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
D
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
E
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00EZG
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
F
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
G
H
I
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
J
K
UBS00EZH
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
L
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-573
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
UBS00EZI
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EZJ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EZK
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P2127
2127
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the APP
sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
P2128
2128
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the APP
sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-574
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EZL
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-577, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-575
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EZM
BBWA1707E
Revision: October 2004
EC-576
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
Y
Sensor power supply
(TP sensor)
B/R
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
C
Approximately 0V
D
Approximately 0V
E
F
[Engine is running]
82
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
83
G/W
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
90
L
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
G/R
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.50V
H
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
BR/W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
4.2 - 4.8V
K
UBS00EZN
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-577
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0361E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2069E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2
EC-583
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-576
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-587, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-578
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
A
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
G
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
H
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
I
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
9. CHECK APP SENSOR
K
Refer to EC-580, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
L
10. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
M
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-579
2005 Titan
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EZO
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
UBS00EZP
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-580
2005 Titan
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00EZQ
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EZR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2*
CONDITION
F
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Selector lever: D
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00EZS
H
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P2135
2135
Throttle position sensor
circuit range/performance
problem
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
and TP sensor 2.
I
Possible cause
Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J
K
L
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-581
2005 Titan
M
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00EZT
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-584, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: October 2004
EC-582
2005 Titan
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00EZU
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1708E
Revision: October 2004
EC-583
2005 Titan
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
Y
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
B
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
66
R
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
W
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Selector lever: D
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
More than 0.36V
Approximately 5V
UBS00EZV
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-584
2005 Titan
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0371E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2065E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
M
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2
EC-583
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-590
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
EC-585
2005 Titan
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-587, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-586
2005 Titan
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00EZW
A
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set selector lever to D position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1530E
F
G
UBS00EZX
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
H
Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-587
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
UBS00EZY
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00EZZ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
CLSD THL POS
CONDITION
●
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00F00
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No.
P2138
2138
Trouble diagnosis name
Accelerator pedal position
sensor circuit range/performance problem
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
and APP sensor 2.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: October 2004
EC-588
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00F01
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-591, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-589
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00F02
BBWA1709E
Revision: October 2004
EC-590
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
Y
Sensor power supply
(TP sensor)
B/R
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
C
Approximately 0V
D
Approximately 0V
E
F
[Engine is running]
82
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
83
G/W
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
90
L
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
G/R
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.50V
H
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
BR/W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine: Stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
4.2 - 4.8V
K
UBS00F03
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-591
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0361E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB2070E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB2069E
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-592
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
A
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2
EC-583
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-590
EC
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
D
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
E
F
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
G
H
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
I
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1, ECM terminal 83 and
APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
M
9. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-593
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
10. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: October 2004
EC-594
2005 Titan
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Inspection
UBS00F04
A
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
EC
C
D
E
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
F
UBS00F05
G
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-595
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
PFP:22448
UBS00F06
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
BBIA0359E
Revision: October 2004
EC-596
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
UBS00F07
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1710E
Revision: October 2004
EC-597
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
BR
BR
Power supply for ECM
Revision: October 2004
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
EC-598
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1711E
Revision: October 2004
EC-599
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
46
60
61
62
L/R
GR/R
O/W
Y/R
Ignition signal No. 7
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.2V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
PBIB0044E
0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0045E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: October 2004
EC-600
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1712E
Revision: October 2004
EC-601
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
65
79
80
81
G/R
V/W
W/R
W/G
Ignition signal No. 8
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.2V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
PBIB0044E
0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0045E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00F08
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
Revision: October 2004
EC-602
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
Without CONSULT-II
Let engine idle.
Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62,
65, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB2094E
PBIB0044E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
G
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
H
I
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Go to EC-154, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
J
K
MBIB0034E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-603
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0358E
4.
Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E119.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 4 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to EC-154, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-604
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
D
9. CHECK CONDENSER
E
Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace condenser.
F
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
H
I
J
K
BBIA0359E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
L
Voltage: Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-605
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62, 65, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal
1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00KWC
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2
Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
4.
5.
6.
If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Revision: October 2004
EC-606
PBIB0847E
2005 Titan
IGNITION SIGNAL
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
A
EC
C
BBIA0380E
D
E
F
G
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER
1.
2.
3.
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance
H
L
Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
M
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation
UBS00F0A
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-607
2005 Titan
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
PFP:16600
UBS00F0B
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00F0C
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
B/FUEL SCHDL
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Selector lever: P or N
●
No load
Revision: October 2004
Idle
2.0 - 2.8 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
EC-608
2005 Titan
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
UBS00F0D
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1713E
Revision: October 2004
EC-609
2005 Titan
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
21
22
23
40
41
42
44
63
O/L
BR
GR/W
Y/G
P
L
O
G
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
Injector No. 7
Injector No. 8
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
PBIB0042E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB0043E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00F0E
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-610
2005 Titan
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
F
G
H
I
PBIB1986E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-611
2005 Titan
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect injector harness connector.
BBIA0374E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E2, F32
●
IPDM E/R connector E119
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42, 44, 63.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-612
2005 Titan
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
6. CHECK INJECTOR
A
Refer to EC-610, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace injector.
EC
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
C
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00F0F
INJECTOR
1.
2.
E
Disconnect injector harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
F
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
G
H
PBIB1727E
I
Removal and Installation
UBS00F0G
INJECTOR
Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-613
2005 Titan
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:17042
UBS00F0H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Battery
Battery voltage*
ECM Function
Actuator
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump relay
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition
Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking
Operates.
When engine is stopped
Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above
Stops.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
BBIA0402E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00F0I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
FUEL PUMP RLY
CONDITION
●
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●
Engine running or cranking
●
Except above conditions
Revision: October 2004
SPECIFICATION
ON
OFF
EC-614
2005 Titan
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
UBS00F0J
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1714E
Revision: October 2004
EC-615
2005 Titan
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
113
GR
Fuel pump relay
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON.
Diagnostic Procedure
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00F0K
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
BBIA0357E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E
Revision: October 2004
EC-616
2005 Titan
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
C
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
D
E
PBIB2084E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
G
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
I
J
K
L
BBIA0388E
5.
Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
M
Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
Revision: October 2004
EC-617
2005 Titan
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
6. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace fuse.
7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 13 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-619, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 13 and
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
Revision: October 2004
EC-618
BBIA0442E
2005 Titan
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E41, C1
●
Harness for open or short between fuel pump and IPDM E/R
●
Harness for open or short between fuel pump and ground
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK FUEL PUMP
D
Refer to EC-619, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
E
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection
H
UBS00F0L
FUEL PUMP
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 1 and 3.
I
J
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
K
L
SEC918C
CONDENSER
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance
Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation
UBS00F0M
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-619
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:92136
UBS00F0N
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
BBIA0356E
SEF099XA
Revision: October 2004
EC-620
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00F0O
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1715E
Revision: October 2004
EC-621
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
49
R/Y
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
70
B/W
Refrigerant pressure sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
(Compressor: Operates.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1.0 - 4.0V
UBS00F0P
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1188E
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
3.
Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: October 2004
EC-622
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0356E
3.
E
Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
PBIB0188E
H
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
J
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: October 2004
EC-623
2005 Titan
K
L
M
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E5, F14
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00F0Q
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to MTC-120, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
Revision: October 2004
EC-624
2005 Titan
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
PFP:25350
A
UBS00F0R
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line
from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00F0S
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
LOAD SIGNAL
C
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Lighting switch: In 2nd position
ON
Lighting switch: OFF
OFF
Diagnostic Procedure
D
UBS00F0T
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
E
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions.
Condition
Indication
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position
ON
Lighting switch: OFF
OFF
G
H
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
PBIB0103E
2. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
J
Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" , or LT-32, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-625
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25320
UBS00KWD
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
BBIA0087E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00KWE
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
BRAKE SW 1
(ASCD brake switch)
●
BRAKE SW 2
(Stop lamp switch)
●
Revision: October 2004
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
EC-626
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
UBS00KWF
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1724E
Revision: October 2004
EC-627
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/WL
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
108
BR/W
ASCD brake switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
UBS00KWG
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW 1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
EC-628
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW 2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
EC
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
C
D
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
E
F
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
G
Battery voltage
H
I
PBIB1537E
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-629
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0373E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-632, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
Revision: October 2004
EC-630
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0373E
E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
G
H
WBIA0545E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M31, E152
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M60
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-632, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
Revision: October 2004
EC-631
2005 Titan
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00KWH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed.
Continuity
Should exist.
Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed.
Continuity
Should not exist.
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
WBIA0546E
Revision: October 2004
EC-632
2005 Titan
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
PFP:24814
A
UBS00F0Z
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
EC
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
C
●
CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
●
SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of
ASCD setting.
D
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00F10
E
Specification data are reference value.
MONITOR ITEM
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
CONDITION
●
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st
time → at the 2nd time
SPECIFICATION
F
ON → OFF
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
MAIN switch: ON
●
ASCD: Operating
ON
●
When vehicle speed is
between 40 km/h (25 MPH)
and 144 km/h (89 MPH)
●
ASCD: Not operating
OFF
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-633
2005 Titan
ASCD INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram
UBS00F11
BBWA1717E
Revision: October 2004
EC-634
2005 Titan
ASCD INDICATOR
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00F12
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st
time → at the 2nd time
MAIN switch: ON
●
ASCD: Operating
ON
When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
●
ASCD: Not operating
OFF
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
●
EC
ON → OFF
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .
3.
F
G
H
CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Go to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
I
J
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-635
2005 Titan
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
Wiring Diagram
PFP:24814
UBS00F13
BBWA1718E
Revision: October 2004
EC-636
2005 Titan
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1719E
Revision: October 2004
EC-637
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
PFP:00030
UBS00F1F
Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
UBS00F1G
Target idle speed
No-load* (in P or N position)
650±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON
In P or N position
700 rpm or more
Ignition timing
In P or N position
15° ± 5° BTDC
*: Under the following conditions:
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Electric load: OFF (Lights and heater fan)
●
Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value
UBS00F1H
Condition
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle
14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0
Mass Air Flow Sensor
UBS00F1I
Supply voltage
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle
1.0 - 1.3V*
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec at idle*
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
UBS00F1J
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.94 - 2.06
80 (176)
0.298 - 0.349
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
UBS00F1K
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
UBS00F1L
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
2.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
UBS00F1M
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
5.0 - 7.0Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
UBS00F1N
Refer to EC-287, "Component Inspection" .
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
UBS00F1O
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection" .
Throttle Control Motor
UBS00F1P
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Revision: October 2004
Approximately 1 - 15Ω
EC-638
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Injector
UBS00F1Q
A
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump
UBS00F1R
EC
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
0.2 - 5.0Ω
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EC-639
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
EC-640
2005 Titan
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Service Notice .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ............................................... 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9
CLIP AND FASTENER ..............................................11
Clip and Fastener ....................................................11
FRONT BUMPER ..................................................... 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
STEEL BUMPER ................................................ 14
PLASTIC BUMPER ............................................. 16
REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 18
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
FRONT GRILLE ........................................................ 20
Removal and Installation ........................................ 20
COWL TOP ............................................................... 21
Removal and Installation ........................................ 21
Revision: October 2004
FRONT FENDER ...................................................... 23
Removal and Installation ........................................ 23
FENDER PROTECTOR ............................................ 24
Removal and Installation ........................................ 24
FRONT ................................................................ 24
RUNNING BOARDS ................................................. 25
Removal and Installation ........................................ 25
MUDGUARD ............................................................. 27
Removal and Installation ........................................ 27
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ..................................... 28
Removal and Installation ........................................ 28
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................. 29
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................... 29
SIDE GUARD MOLDING .......................................... 30
Removal and Installation ........................................ 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
DOOR FINISHER ...................................................... 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32
FRONT DOOR .................................................... 32
REAR DOOR - CREW CAB ................................ 33
REAR DOOR - KING CAB .................................. 34
BODY SIDE TRIM ..................................................... 36
Removal and Installation ........................................ 36
KING CAB ........................................................... 36
CREW CAB ......................................................... 37
LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER ......................... 38
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER ................ 38
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER ................. 38
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER ................................. 38
KICKING PLATES ............................................... 38
DOOR PARTING SEALS .................................... 38
REAR .................................................................. 39
FLOOR TRIM ............................................................ 41
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41
HEADLINING ............................................................ 43
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43
BED RAILS AND TRIM ............................................. 47
Removal and Installation ........................................ 47
EI-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
TAIL GATE FINISHER .............................................. 49
Removal and Installation ........................................ 49
Revision: October 2004
STORAGE BOX .........................................................50
Removal and Installation .........................................50
EI-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
A
EIS004E7
When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding on the vehicle body to prevent
scratches.
Handle trim, molding, instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to soil
or damage them.
Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts.
When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts.
When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, members, etc.), be sure to take rust prevention measures.
B
C
D
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS004E8
E
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front F
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
G
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per- H
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air EI
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connecJ
tors.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EIS004E9
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
SBT839
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit
Repairing the cause of noise
SBT840
Commercial Service Tools
EIS004EA
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Revision: October 2004
EI-4
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS004EB
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to EI-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
EI
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
J
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
K
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: October 2004
EI-5
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to EI-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
●
Revision: October 2004
EI-6
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS004EC
F
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
H
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
EI
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
J
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
L
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
M
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: October 2004
EI-7
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: October 2004
EI-8
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS004ED
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIWA0276E
Revision: October 2004
EI-9
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT844
Revision: October 2004
EI-10
2005 Titan
CLIP AND FASTENER
CLIP AND FASTENER
Clip and Fastener
PFP:76906
A
EIS004EE
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
SIIA0315E
Revision: October 2004
EI-11
2005 Titan
CLIP AND FASTENER
SIIA0316E
Revision: October 2004
EI-12
2005 Titan
CLIP AND FASTENER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
SIIA0317E
Revision: October 2004
EI-13
2005 Titan
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
PFP:F2022
EIS004EF
STEEL BUMPER
WIIA0255E
1.
2.
3.
1.
Front bumper side bracket RH
2.
Front bumper stay RH
3.
Front bumper side finisher RH
4.
Front bumper assembly
5.
Front valance
6.
Lower intake grille
7.
Fog lamp opening finisher (if
equipped)
8.
Skid plate
9.
Access cover
10. Fog lamp assembly (if equipped)
11. Front bumper side finisher LH
12. Front bumper stay LH
13. Front bumper side bracket LH
14. Front bumper bracket LH
15. Front bumper bracket RH
Remove lower intake grille.
Remove radiator grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" .
Remove front valance.
Revision: October 2004
EI-14
2005 Titan
FRONT BUMPER
4. Remove engine underside cover.
5. Remove strut braces LH and RH.
6. Disconnect fog lamp harnesses, if equipped.
7. Remove front bumper RH and LH side finishers.
8. Remove front bumper assembly.
9. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH.
10. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-15
2005 Titan
FRONT BUMPER
PLASTIC BUMPER
LIIA1250E
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
Front bumper side bracket RH
2.
Front bumper stay RH
3.
Front bumper bracket RH
4.
Retainer bracket
5.
Energy absorber
6.
Fastener
7.
Plastic fascia assembly
8.
Skid plate
9.
Access cover
10. Fog lamp opening finisher (if
equipped)
11. Fog lamp assembly (if equipped)
12. Plastic clip
13. Front bumper bracket LH
14. Front bumper stay LH
15. Front bumper side bracket LH
Remove radiator grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" .
Remove skid plate.
Disconnect fog lamp harnesses, if equipped.
Remove screws and fasteners and remove plastic fascia assembly.
● Remove fog lamp assembly, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly.
Revision: October 2004
EI-16
2005 Titan
FRONT BUMPER
Remove fog lamp opening finisher, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly.
5. Remove clips and remove energy absorber from retainer bracket.
6. Remove retainer bracket.
7. Remove front bumper side brackets LH and RH.
8. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH.
9. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-17
2005 Titan
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
PFP:H5022
EIS004EG
LIIA1165E
1.
Rear bumper reinforcement
4.
License lamp harness
7.
Carriage bolt
10. License lamp
2.
Sonar sensor harness
3.
Sonar sensor
5.
Upper step pad
6.
License lamp clip
8.
Rear chrome bumper
9.
Sonar sensor retainer
11. License lamp washer
12. Lower step pad
13. Tow hitch (if equipped)
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the tow hitch to service the rear bumper.
1. Disconnect harness from tow hitch, if equipped.
2. Remove bolts on each side of tow hitch and remove tow hitch, if equipped.
3. Disconnect sonar sensor harness connector, if equipped.
Revision: October 2004
EI-18
2005 Titan
REAR BUMPER
Disconnect sonar sensors from retainers.
4. Disconnect license lamp harness.
5. Remove clips from license lamps and remove lamps.
6. Release clips and remove upper step pads.
7. Remove rear chrome bumper.
8. Disconnect harness clips from black steel bumper.
9. Remove rear bumper reinforcement.
10. Remove sonar sensor retainers from rear chrome bumper, if equipped.
11. Remove sonar sensors and harness from rear chrome bumper, if equipped.
● Disconnect sonar sensors from harness.
12. Remove license lamp harness from rear chrome bumper.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Apply sealant to clips securing upper step pad during installation.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-19
2005 Titan
FRONT GRILLE
FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
PFP:62310
EIS004EH
LIIA0996E
1.
Plastic clip
2.
Plastic clip
3.
Grommet
4.
Front bumper filler panel RH
5.
Front grille
6.
Front bumper filler panel LH
1. Release plastic clips and remove front grille.
2. Remove LH and RH front bumper filler panels.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-20
2005 Titan
COWL TOP
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
PFP:66100
A
EIS004EI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
LIIA1288E
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grommet
2.
Plastic clip
3.
Cowl top RH
4.
Cowl top seal
5.
Drain tube
6.
Cowl top extension bracket RH
7.
Cowl top extension
8.
Cowl top extension bracket LH
9.
Cowl top LH
Remove right and left wiper arms. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms,
Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" .
Remove cowl top seal.
● Release plastics clips on cowl top seal which go through cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension.
Remove cowl top covers LH and RH.
● Release plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge.
● Disconnect washer tubes from washer nozzles.
Remove cowl top extension brackets LH and RH.
● Disconnect wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH.
● Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of wiper motor and connecting rod
assembly.
Revision: October 2004
EI-21
2005 Titan
M
COWL TOP
5.
Remove wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper
Motor and Linkage" .
6. Disconnect windshield washer tube. Refer to WW-33, "Washer Tube Layout" .
7. Remove A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to MTC-112, "REFRIGERANT
LINES" .
8. Remove drain tube from each side of cowl top extension.
9. Remove cowl top extension.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-22
2005 Titan
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
Removal and Installation
PFP:63100
A
EIS004EJ
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
WIIA0302E
1. Remove the front mudguards (if equipped). Refer toEI-27, "MUDGUARD" .
2. Remove headlamps. Refer to LT-31, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-24, "FENDER PROTECTOR" .
4. Remove hood stay. Refer to BL-12, "HOOD" .
5. Remove front fender.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-23
2005 Titan
FENDER PROTECTOR
FENDER PROTECTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:63840
EIS004EK
FRONT
LIIA1008E
1.
Fender protector LH
2.
Pushpin
4.
Screw
5.
Grommet
3.
Plastic clip
1. Remove front mudguard. Refer to EI-27, "MUDGUARD" .
2. Remove screws.
3. Remove plastic clips.
4. Remove pushpins.
5. Remove front fender protector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-24
2005 Titan
RUNNING BOARDS
RUNNING BOARDS
Removal and Installation
PFP:96110
A
EIS004EL
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIIA1171E
Revision: October 2004
EI-25
2005 Titan
RUNNING BOARDS
1.
Running board bracket
2.
Weld stud
3.
End cap
4.
End cap reinforcement
5.
Plastic clip
6.
Step pad
7.
Running board
1.
2.
Remove bolts and remove running board from running board brackets.
Remove screw and remove end cap.
● Remove reinforcement from end cap.
3. Release clips and remove step pad from running board.
4. Remove nuts and bolts and remove running board brackets.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-26
2005 Titan
MUDGUARD
MUDGUARD
Removal and Installation
PFP:63854
A
EIS004EM
B
C
D
E
F
G
LIIA1631E
NOTE:
Crew Cab shown King Cab similar.
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-27
2005 Titan
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:82820
EIS004EN
WIIA0256E
Revision: October 2004
EI-28
2005 Titan
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
1.
Front door outside molding LH
2.
Screw
3.
Hole cover
4.
Front door LH
5.
Rear door outside molding LH
6.
Rear door-Crew cab
A
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Open window fully.
Remove door mirror. Refer to GW-121, "DOOR MIRROR" .
Remove molding.
● Remove hole cover and remove screw.
● Lift molding from rear side.
● Disconnect clips from flange.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
E
1.
2.
Open window fully.
Remove molding.
● Remove hole cover and remove screw.
● Lift molding from rear side.
● Disconnect clips from flange.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-29
2005 Titan
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:76840
EIS004EO
LIIA1172E
Revision: October 2004
EI-30
2005 Titan
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints.
●
Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape.
1. Heat molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun.
2. Raise end of molding and cut away tape to remove molding. Remove all traces of tape.
A
INSTALLATION
C
On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200, C-100 or equivalent.
●
The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape.
●
To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new doublefaced tape to the molding.
1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface.
2. Heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F).
3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface.
● Align the locating pin into the hole in the outer door.
● Continue aligning the pins into their corresponding holes in the outer door during installation.
4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface.
● Apply even pressure along molding to insure proper wet out.
CAUTION:
To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation.
B
●
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-31
2005 Titan
DOOR FINISHER
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
PFP:80900
EIS004EP
FRONT DOOR
LIIA1036E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
Power window switch assembly (if
equipped)
2.
Armrest
3.
Front door finisher LH
4.
Pull handle cover
5.
Pull handle escutcheon
6.
Cap
7.
Door lock knob
8.
Step lamp
9.
Seat memory switch (if equipped)
Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped).
● Disconnect harness connectors.
Remove pull handle cover.
● Remove screws behind pull handle cover.
Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw.
Remove pull handle escutcheon.
● Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
Remove armrest.
● Remove screw behind armrest.
Remove memory seat switch (if equipped).
Revision: October 2004
EI-32
2005 Titan
DOOR FINISHER
Disconnect harness connector.
7. Remove step lamp.
● Disconnect harness connector.
8. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Refer to
BL-127, "FRONT DOOR LOCK" .
9. Remove door lock knob.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
REAR DOOR - CREW CAB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIIA1038E
1.
2.
3.
1.
Power window switch assembly (if
equipped)
2.
Armrest
3.
Rear door finisher LH
4.
Pull handle cover
5.
Cap
6.
Pull handle escutcheon
7.
Door lock knob
8.
Step lamp
9.
Rear door tweeter
Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped).
● Disconnect harness connector.
Remove pull handle cover.
● Remove screws behind pull handle cover.
Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw.
Revision: October 2004
EI-33
2005 Titan
DOOR FINISHER
4.
Remove pull handle escutcheon.
● Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove armrest.
● Remove screws behind armrest.
6. Remove step lamp.
● Disconnect harness connector.
7. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Refer to
BL-130, "REAR DOOR LOCK" .
● Disconnect speaker connector.
8. Remove door lock knob.
9. Remove rear door tweeter. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter" .
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR - KING CAB
LIIA1173E
1.
1.
Rear door LH
4.
Seat belt retractor cover
2.
Rear door finisher
3.
Armrest
Remove upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to SB-8, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat
Belt" .
Revision: October 2004
EI-34
2005 Titan
DOOR FINISHER
2. Release clips and remove seat belt retractor cover.
3. Remove armrest.
4. Remove screws behind armrest.
5. Release clips and remove rear door finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-35
2005 Titan
BODY SIDE TRIM
BODY SIDE TRIM
Removal and Installation
PFP:76913
EIS004EQ
KING CAB
CAUTION:
●
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
●
When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
finisher.
LIIA1629E
1.
Door welt
2.
Rear door parting seal
4.
Front kicking plate
5.
Lower dash side finisher
6.
Front door parting seal
7.
Front pillar assist grip
8.
Front pillar finisher
9.
Rear body side welt
Revision: October 2004
EI-36
3.
Rear kicking plate
2005 Titan
BODY SIDE TRIM
CREW CAB
CAUTION:
●
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
●
When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
finisher.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIIA1605E
1.
Center pillar upper finisher
2.
Center pillar assist grip
4.
7.
Rear door parting seal
5.
Front kicking plate
8.
11.
10. Front door welt
Revision: October 2004
3.
Rear door welt
Rear kicking plate
6.
Center pillar lower finisher
Lower dash side finisher
9.
Front door parting seal
Front pillar assist grip
12.
Front pillar finisher
EI-37
2005 Titan
BODY SIDE TRIM
LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove push pin from lower dash side finisher.
2. Remove front kicking plate. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" .
3. Remove lower dash side finisher and front kicking plate together.
4. Remove lower dash side finisher from front kicking plate.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER
Removal and Installation
1.
Remove seat belt lower anchor. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
● On RH side, disconnect seat belt tension sensor.
2. Remove front and rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" .
3. Remove center pillar lower finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER
Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove front and rear door welts.
Remove front and rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" .
Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to EI-38, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER" .
Remove seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat
Belt" .
5. Remove assist grip.
6. Remove center pillar upper finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove assist grip.
2. Remove front pillar finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
KICKING PLATES
Removal and Installation
Release clips and remove front and/or rear kicking plates.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
DOOR PARTING SEALS
Removal and Installation
1. Open front and/or rear doors fully.
2. Release clips and remove parting seals.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-38
2005 Titan
BODY SIDE TRIM
REAR
CAUTION:
●
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
WIIA0594E
Revision: October 2004
EI-39
2005 Titan
BODY SIDE TRIM
1.
Drafter duct (Crew Cab)
2.
Drafter duct cover (Crew Cab)
3.
Rear upper finisher RH
4.
Rear panel (Crew Cab)
5.
Rear lower finisher RH
6.
Push pin
7.
Nut
8.
Center anchor bracket cover
9.
Drafter duct cover (King Cab)
10. Drafter duct (King Cab)
11. Rear lower finisher LH
12. Plastic clip
13. Metal clip
14. Rear panel (King Cab)
15. Rear upper finisher LH
16. Rear panel upper finisher
1. Remove rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" .
2. Remove rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" .
3. Remove seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to SB-8, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" .
4. Remove seatback latch strikers. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" .
5. Remove rear lower finishers LH/RH.
6. Remove rear upper finishers LH/RH.
7. Remove center anchor bracket cover, if equipped.
8. Remove rear panel upper finisher and rear panel.
9. Remover drafter duct cover and drafter duct.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-40
2005 Titan
FLOOR TRIM
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
PFP:74902
A
EIS004ER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIIA1184E
1.
2.
1.
Push pin
4.
Crew Cab carpet
2.
King Cab carpet
3.
Floor mat hook
Remove front seats. Refer to SE-91, "FRONT SEAT" .
Remove rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" .
Revision: October 2004
EI-41
2005 Titan
FLOOR TRIM
3. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-3, "SEAT BELTS" .
4. Remove lower body side trim. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
5. Remove center console, if equipped. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
6. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet.
7. Remove carpet.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-42
2005 Titan
HEADLINING
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
PFP:73910
A
EIS004ES
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
WIIA0354E
Revision: October 2004
EI-43
2005 Titan
HEADLINING
1.
Headlining (without sunroof)
2.
Sunvisor holder
3.
Sunvisor assembly standard LH
4.
Sunvisor assembly standard RH
5.
Assist grip bracket
6.
Headlining (with sunroof)
7.
Dual sun visor assembly LH
8.
Front roof console
9.
Extended sun visor assembly LH
10.
Extended sun visor assembly RH
11.
Dual sun visor assembly RH
12. Rear storage bin or DVD display
13.
Rear roof console
14. Rear roof console finisher
15. Lamp assembly
16.
Rear audio control assembly (if
equipped)
17. Rear roof console bracket
18. Assist grip
19.
Room lamp
20. CHMSL access cover
Revision: October 2004
EI-44
2005 Titan
HEADLINING
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
WIIA0355E
1.
Headlining (standard)
2.
Sunvisor assembly standard LH
3.
4.
Headlining (optional)
5.
Dual sun visor assembly LH
6.
Extended sun visor assembly LH
7.
Extended sun visor assembly RH
8.
Sunvisor holder
9.
Dual sun visor assembly RH
Revision: October 2004
EI-45
Sunvisor assembly standard RH
2005 Titan
HEADLINING
10.
Assist grip
11.
13.
Center roof console
14. Plastic clip
CHMSL access cover
16.
Room lamp
12. Striker cover
15. Coat hook
CAUTION:
Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance.
1. Remove body side trim. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
2. Remove rear trim. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
3. Remove sun visor assemblies.
4. Remove sun visor holders.
5. Remove front roof console (if equipped).
● Disconnect harnesses.
6. Remove rear roof console (if equipped).
● Disconnect harnesses.
7. Remove center roof console (if equipped).
● Disconnect harnesses.
8. Remove assist grips.
9. Remove striker covers (if equipped).
10. Remove room lamp.
11. Remove headlining.
● Disconnect harnesses.
12. Remove rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped).
● Disconnect harness.
13. Remove lamp assemblies from roof console.
● Disconnect harnesses.
14. Remove rear roof console bracket (if equipped).
15. Remove center roof console front bracket (if equipped).
16. Remove assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped).
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-46
2005 Titan
BED RAILS AND TRIM
BED RAILS AND TRIM
Removal and Installation
PFP:84999
A
EIS004ET
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIIA1239E
Revision: October 2004
EI-47
2005 Titan
BED RAILS AND TRIM
1.
Header top trim
4.
Tiedown cleat
7.
Bed side front tiedown rail LH
2.
Header tiedown rail
3.
Rope hook
5.
Floor rail cover LH
6.
Floor rail LH
8.
Top side rail trim LH
9.
Bed side rear tiedown rail LH
10. Floor rail RH
11. Floor rail cover RH
13. Top side rail trim RH
14. Bed side front tiedown rail RH
12. Bed side rear tiedown rail RH
1. Remove floor rail covers.
2. Remove tiedown cleats.
3. Remove floor rails LH/RH.
4. Remove bed side front and rear tiedown rails LH/RH.
5. Remove rope hooks.
6. Remove header tiedown rail.
7. Release clips and remove header top trim.
8. Release clips and remove top side rail trim LH/RH.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-48
2005 Titan
TAIL GATE FINISHER
TAIL GATE FINISHER
Removal and Installation
PFP:93486
A
EIS004EU
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIIA1238E
1.
Tailgate protector (if equipped)
4.
Tailgate
2.
Tailgate cover plate
3.
Tailgate top protector
1. Release clips and remove tailgate top protector.
2. Remove screws and remove tailgate protector (if equipped) and tailgate cover plate.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EI-49
2005 Titan
STORAGE BOX
STORAGE BOX
Removal and Installation
PFP:97002
EIS004EV
WIIA0352E
1.
Surround assembly
Front outer bracket
3.
Storage box
4.
Door stay assembly
5.
Bulb seal
6.
Outer seal
7.
Key cylinder lid assembly
8.
Key cylinder
9.
Storage box door
10. Key cylinder retainer
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
11. Latch assembly
12. Inner door cover
13. Striker
14. Door seal
15. Shelf bin
16. Shelf bin mat
17. Rear outer bracket
18. Back stop
Remove rear mudguard (if equipped). Refer to EI-27, "MUDGUARD" .
Remove bolts, release clips and remove storage box assembly.
Remove shelf bin and mat from storage box.
Remove storage box door from hinge.
Revision: October 2004
EI-50
2005 Titan
STORAGE BOX
Remove door stay assembly.
5. Remove inner door cover.
6. Remove nuts and remove latch assembly from door.
● Remove key cylinder.
7. Remove outer seal and key cylinder lid assembly from door.
8. Remove bulb seal and door seal from storage box.
9. Remove storage box from surround assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EI-51
2005 Titan
STORAGE BOX
Revision: October 2004
EI-52
2005 Titan
B ENGINE
A
EM
SECTION
ENGINE MECHANICAL
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant ...................... 3
Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping .............. 3
Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ............. 3
Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ......................................................................... 3
Precautions for Assembly and Installation ............... 3
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................... 3
Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 4
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 4
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Special Service Tools ............................................... 5
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 9
NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise ..................... 9
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause
of the Symptom. ..................................................... 10
ENGINE ROOM COVER ...........................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
DRIVE BELTS ........................................................... 12
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 12
Tension Adjustment ................................................ 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
DRIVE BELT ....................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley ............. 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................... 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 14
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER ................... 14
Revision: October 2004
INTAKE MANIFOLD ................................................. 15
Removal and Installation ........................................ 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 18
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST .......................................................................... 19
Removal and Installation ........................................ 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ................................. 22
Removal and Installation ........................................ 22
REMOVAL ........................................................... 22
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 23
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 25
IGNITION COIL ......................................................... 26
Removal and Installation ........................................ 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) ............. 27
Removal and Installation ........................................ 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ........................ 29
Removal and Installation ........................................ 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 29
INSTALLATION ................................................... 30
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 31
ROCKER COVER ..................................................... 33
Removal and Installation ........................................ 33
REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION ................................................... 34
EM-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TIMING CHAIN .......................................................... 35
Removal and Installation ........................................ 35
REMOVAL ........................................................... 36
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 38
INSTALLATION .................................................... 39
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 43
CAMSHAFT ............................................................... 44
Removal and Installation ........................................ 44
REMOVAL ........................................................... 44
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 47
INSTALLATION .................................................... 49
Valve Clearance ...................................................... 52
INSPECTION ....................................................... 52
ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 54
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 56
OIL SEAL .................................................................. 57
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal ............. 57
REMOVAL ........................................................... 57
INSTALLATION .................................................... 57
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ............. 58
REMOVAL ........................................................... 58
INSTALLATION .................................................... 58
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal .............. 58
REMOVAL ........................................................... 58
INSTALLATION .................................................... 59
CYLINDER HEAD ..................................................... 60
On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 60
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ......... 60
Removal and Installation ........................................ 61
REMOVAL ........................................................... 61
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 62
INSTALLATION .................................................... 62
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 63
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 64
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 64
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 65
Inspection After Disassembly ................................. 66
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ........................ 66
VALVE DIMENSIONS .......................................... 67
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE .............................. 67
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ......................... 67
VALVE SEAT CONTACT ..................................... 69
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ........................... 70
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ......................... 71
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE
SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................... 71
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ................................................ 72
Removal and Installation ........................................ 72
REMOVAL ........................................................... 72
INSTALLATION .................................................... 75
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 75
Revision: October 2004
CYLINDER BLOCK ...................................................76
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................76
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................77
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................80
How to Select Piston and Bearing ..........................85
DESCRIPTION ....................................................85
HOW TO SELECT PISTON .................................85
HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING .......................................................................86
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING ....................88
Inspection After Disassembly ..................................92
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY ..................................92
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ...........92
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ...........92
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE .....................93
PISTON RING END GAP ....................................93
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION .......94
CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ........94
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ...........................................94
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ......................95
MAIN BEARING HOUSING INSIDE DIAMETER...96
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE ...96
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER ...............97
CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER ..........................98
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT .................................................................98
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ....................................98
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE ...................................................................98
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE .....................99
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING .............. 100
CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD
BEARING ........................................................... 100
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT DIAMETER ........... 100
CONNECTING ROD BOLT DIAMETER ............ 101
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 102
Standard and Limit ................................................ 102
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 102
DRIVE BELTS .................................................... 102
EXHAUST MANIFOLD ...................................... 102
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ......... 103
CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 105
CYLINDER BLOCK ............................................ 107
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN ...... 108
CONNECTING ROD .......................................... 109
CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 110
MAIN BEARING ................................................. 112
EM-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant
PFP:00001
A
EBS00KLZ
Drain engine coolant when engine is cooled.
Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping
●
●
●
Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
Release fuel pressure before disconnecting and disassembly.
After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage.
Precautions for Removal and Disassembly
●
●
●
●
●
EM
EBS00KM0
C
EBS00KM1
When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely,
avoid forceful or uninstructed operations.
Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.
Cover openings of engine system with tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly.
When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally
opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be
used where noted in the step.
Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement
EBS00KM2
Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and
replace if necessary.
Precautions for Assembly and Installation
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
EBS00KM4
For final tightening of the following engine parts use Tool:
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
Cylinder head bolts
Main bearing cap bolts
Connecting rod cap bolts
Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angle
tightening)
Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and lightly coated with engine oil.
Revision: October 2004
EM-3
E
F
G
H
EBS00KM3
Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.
When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the
ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, do exactly as specified.
Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check engine oil or engine coolant passages for
any restriction and blockage.
Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust.
Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well.
Release air within route when refilling after draining engine coolant.
Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine
stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections.
After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check engine coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust
systems for leakage.
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening
D
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
EBS00KM5
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
and remove the old liquid gasket sealing using Tool.
Tool number
●
●
: KV1011100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
Tap the seal cutter to insert it.
In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, lightly tap to slide it.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove the old liquid gasket adhering to the gasket application
surface and the mating surface using suitable tool.
● Remove the liquid gasket completely from the groove of the
liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign material.
PBIC0003E
3.
Attach the liquid gasket tube to the Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Apply the liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location
with the specified dimensions.
WBIA0567E
If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply the
liquid gasket to the groove.
● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the liquid gasket inside
the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be
applied outside the holes.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If the liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten after the installation.
● Wait 30 minutes or more after installation before refilling the
engine with engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
Revision: October 2004
EM-4
SEM159F
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EBS00KM6
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
EM
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
C
D
S-NT046
—
(J-44626)
Air fuel sensor Socket
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio A/F sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
E
F
LBIA0444E
EG15050500
(J-45402)
Compression gauge adapter
G
Inspecting compression pressure
H
I
ZZA1225D
KV10116200
(J-26336-A)
Valve spring compressor
1. KV10115900
(J-26336-20)
Attachment
2. KV10109220
(
—
)
Adapter
Disassembling valve mechanism
Part (1) is a component of KV10116200
26336-A), but part (2) is not.
(J-
J
K
PBIC1650E
KV10112100
(BT-8653-A)
Angle wrench
Tightening bolts for cylinder head, main bearing cap and connecting rod cap
L
M
S-NT014
KV10107902
(J-38959)
Valve oil seal puller
Removing valve oil seal
S-NT011
Revision: October 2004
EM-5
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10115600
(J-38958)
Valve oil seal drift
Installing valve oil seal
Use side A.
a: 20 (0.79) dia.
d: 8 (0.31) dia.
b: 13 (0.51) dia.
e: 10.7 (0.421) dia.
c: 10.3 (0.406) dia.
f: 5 (0.20) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT603
EM03470000
(J-8037)
Piston ring compressor
Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore
S-NT044
ST16610001
(J-23907)
Pilot bushing puller
Removing crankshaft pilot bushing
S-NT045
WS39930000
(
—
)
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
S-NT052
—
(J-45476)
Ring gear stopper
Removing and installing crankshaft pulley
PBIC1655E
16441 6N210
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG:
Part No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
—
(J-46535)
Drive belt tension releaser
Releasing drive belt tension
WBIA0536E
Revision: October 2004
EM-6
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00KM7
A
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
EM
C
PBIC0190E
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plug
D
E
F
S-NT047
(J-24239-01)
Cylinder head bolt wrench
Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt,
and use with angle wrench [SST:
KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)]
a: 13 (0.51) dia.
b: 12 (0.47)
c: 10 (0.39)
Unit: mm (in)
G
H
NT583
Valve seat cutter set
Finishing valve seat dimensions
I
J
S-NT048
Pulley puller
Removing crankshaft pulley
K
L
ZZA0010D
Piston ring expander
Removing and installing piston ring
S-NT030
Valve guide drift
Removing and installing valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia.
b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
S-NT015
Revision: October 2004
EM-7
2005 Titan
M
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Valve guide reamer
1: Reaming valve guide hole
2: Reaming hole for oversize valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
d1 : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
d2 : 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia.
S-NT016
Front oil seal drift
Installing front oil seal
ZZA0012D
Rear oil seal drift
Installing rear oil seal
ZZA0025D
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new A/F sensor and heated
oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant
shown below.)
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) (0.71 in) for zirconia heated oxygen sensor
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) (0.55 in) for titania heated oxygen sensor
Lubricating A/F sensors and heated oxygen
sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads
AEM489
Revision: October 2004
EM-8
2005 Titan
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise
PFP:00003
A
EBS00KM8
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
KBIA2503E
Revision: October 2004
EM-9
2005 Titan
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom.
EBS00KM9
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.
2. Confirm the type of noise.
3. Specify the operating condition of engine.
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Operating condition of engine
Location of
noise
Top of
engine
Rocker
cover
Cylinder
head
Type of
noise
Before
warmup
After
warmup
When
starting
When
idling
When
racing
While
driving
Source of
noise
Ticking or
clicking
C
A
—
A
B
—
Tappet noise
Valve clearance
EM-52
Rattle
C
A
—
A
B
C
Camshaft
bearing noise
Camshaft journal clearance
Camshaft runout
EM-47
EM-47
—
Piston pin
noise
Piston and piston pin
clearance
Connecting rod bushing clearance
EM-93
EM-95
A
Piston slap
noise
Piston-to-bore clearance
Piston ring side clearance
Piston ring end gap
Connecting rod bend
and torsion
EM-97
EM-93
EM-93
EM-94
Connecting rod bushing oil clearance (Small
end)
Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end)
EM-95
EM-94
Slap or
knock
Crankshaft
pulley
Cylinder
block (Side
of engine)
Oil pan
Front of
engine
Chain case
cover
Front cover
Front of
engine
Slap or
rap
—
A
A
—
—
—
B
B
B
B
Check item
Reference page
Knock
A
B
C
B
B
B
Connecting
rod bearing
noise
Knock
A
B
—
A
B
C
Main bearing
noise
Main bearing oil clearance
Crankshaft runout
EM-99
EM-98
Timing chain cracks
and wear
Timing chain tensioner
operation
EM-38
EM-35
Tapping
or ticking
A
A
—
B
B
B
Timing chain
and chain
tensioner
noise
Squeaking or
fizzing
A
B
—
B
—
C
Drive belts
(Sticking or
slipping)
Drive belts deflection
Creaking
A
B
A
B
A
B
Drive belts
(Slipping)
Idler pulley bearing
operation
Squall
Creaking
A
B
—
B
A
B
Water pump
noise
Water pump operation
A: Closely related
B: Related
Revision: October 2004
C: Sometimes related
EM-12
CO-17
—: Not related
EM-10
2005 Titan
ENGINE ROOM COVER
ENGINE ROOM COVER
Removal and Installation
PFP:14049
A
EBS00KMA
REMOVAL
●
Remove the engine cover bolts and cover.
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch cover when installing or removing.
EM
C
D
E
WBIA0528E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-11
2005 Titan
DRIVE BELTS
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
PFP:02117
EBS00KMB
LBIA0391E
1.
Drive belt
2.
Power steering oil pump pulley
3.
Generator pulley
4.
Crankshaft pulley
5.
A/C compressor
6.
Idler pulley
7.
Cooling fan pulley
8.
Water pump pulley
9.
Drive belt tensioner
WARNING:
Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and
Installation" .
2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range
″A″ (between three line notches).
NOTE:
● Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be as shown.
● The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner.
3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks.
4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt.
Tension Adjustment
EBS00KMC
Belt tensioning is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by auto tensioner.
Removal and Installation
EBS00KMD
DRIVE BELT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
Install Tool on auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of
arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown.
Tool number
3.
:
—
(J-46535)
CAUTION:
Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur
if the holding tool accidentally comes off.
Remove the drive belt.
WBIA0537E
Revision: October 2004
EM-12
2005 Titan
DRIVE BELTS
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys.
EM
●
Rotate crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys.
●
Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using indicator notch on the auto tensioner.
Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" .
C
Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley
EBS00KME
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0607E
1.
Auto tensioner
2.
Idler pulley
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELT" .
Remove auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool.
K
INSTALLATION
L
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-13
2005 Titan
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
PFP:16500
EBS00KMF
LBIA0394E
1.
Air cleaner case (upper)
4.
Air duct and resonator assembly
2.
Air cleaner filter
3.
Air cleaner case (lower)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect harness connector from air cleaner case (upper).
Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case.
● Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
1.
2.
3.
Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper).
Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-14
2005 Titan
INTAKE MANIFOLD
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal and Installation
PFP:14003
A
EBS00KMG
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
KBIA2461E
J
1.
Intake manifold
2.
PCV hose
3.
Gasket
4.
Electric throttle control actuator
5.
Water hose
6.
Water hose
7.
PCV hose
8.
EVAP hose
9.
EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve
10.
Bracket
11.
Gasket
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Partially drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect the fuel tube quick connector on the engine side.
LBIA0395E
Revision: October 2004
EM-15
2005 Titan
K
L
M
INTAKE MANIFOLD
●
Perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector
using Tool.
Tool number
a.
: 16441 6N210 (J-45488)
Remove quick connector cap (engine side only).
SBIA0354E
b.
With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool
onto fuel tube.
c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes
no further. Hold the Tool in that position.
CAUTION:
Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector.
Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further.
d. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube.
CAUTION:
● Pull quick connector holding "A" position in illustration.
WBIA0604E
● Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick
connector may be damaged.
● Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
● Avoid fire and sparks.
● Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
6. Remove or disconnect harnesses, brackets, vacuum hose, vacuum gallery and PCV hose and tube from
intake manifold.
7. Remove electric throttle control actuator by loosening bolts diagonally.
CAUTION:
● Handle carefully to avoid any damage to the electric throttle control actuator.
● Do not disassemble.
8. Remove fuel injectors and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Loosen bolts in reverse order shown using power tool.
10. Remove the intake manifold.
CAUTION:
Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
KBIA2462E
Revision: October 2004
EM-16
2005 Titan
INTAKE MANIFOLD
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown.
EM
C
D
KBIA2462E
●
●
●
●
Install the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve connector with it facing front of engine.
Tighten the electronic throttle control actuator bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps.
After installation perform procedure in EM-18, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" .
Install water hose so that its overlap width for connection is between 27 mm (1.06 in) and 32 mm (1.26 in)
(target: 27 mm 1.06 in).
E
F
G
Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube
Install quick connector as follows. (The steps are the same for quick connectors on both engine side and vehicle side except for the quick connector cap.)
1. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around tube and quick connector, and they are not
damaged.
2. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube from tip end to the spool end.
3. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube.
● Insert until the paint mark for engagement identification
(white) goes completely inside quick connector so that you
cannot see it from the straight side of the connected part. Use
a mirror to check this where it is not possible to view directly
from the straight side, such as quick connector on vehicle
side.
H
I
J
K
L
PBIC0017E
Insert fuel tube into quick connector until top spool is completely inside quick connector, and 2nd level spool exposes
right below quick connector on engine side.
CAUTION:
● Hold "A" position in illustration when inserting fuel
tube into quick connector.
● Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to O-ring inside quick connector.
● Insert until you hear a "click" sound and actually feel
the engagement.
KBIA0272E
● To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar
sound, be sure to perform the next step.
Pull quick connector by hand holding "A" position. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that
it does not come out from fuel tube.
NOTE:
Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb).
●
4.
Revision: October 2004
EM-17
2005 Titan
M
INTAKE MANIFOLD
5.
6.
7.
Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint (on engine
side only).
Install fuel hose and tube to hose clamps.
Refill engine coolant. Refer to MA-14, "REFILLING ENGINE
COOLANT" .
SBIA0354E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
–
–
●
●
After installing fuel tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps.
Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at the connections.
Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-89,
"Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-18
2005 Titan
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
PFP:14004
A
EBS00KMH
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0466E
J
1. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
2. Exhaust manifold cover (bank 2)
3. Exhaust manifold (bank 2)
4. Gaskets
5. Exhaust manifold (bank 1)
6. Exhaust manifold cover (bank 1)
7. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1)
K
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
3. Remove engine undercover using power tool.
4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. Refer to CO-12, "REMOVAL" .
5. Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-12, "Removal" .
6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (right bank, left bank).
● Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensors.
a. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
b. Remove harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp.
Revision: October 2004
EM-19
2005 Titan
L
M
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
c.
Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right
exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(J-44626)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
● Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a
new one.
Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
Remove exhaust manifold (left bank) following the steps below.
Remove exhaust front tube using power tool. Refer to EX-4,
"REMOVAL" .
Remove the exhaust manifold cover.
Loosen nuts in reverse order of illustration using power tool.
Remove exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove left
exhaust manifold
Remove exhaust manifold (right bank) following the steps below.
Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" .
Remove oil level gauge guide. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the exhaust manifold cover.
Loosen nuts in reverse order of illustration using power tool.
Remove exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove right exhaust manifold.
●
7.
8.
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
WBIA0630E
KBIA2464E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
●
Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface
using suitable tools.
Flatness limit
●
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
KBIA2504E
Revision: October 2004
EM-20
2005 Titan
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular
up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward
the exhaust manifold side.
EM
C
D
KBIA2553E
●
E
Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in numerical order shown.
Then recheck the torque of the nuts.
F
G
KBIA2464E
●
Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and apply
anti-seize lubricant.
Tool number
H
I
: ( — ) J-43879-12
: ( — ) J-43897-18
CAUTION:
● Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-21
2005 Titan
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Removal and Installation
PFP:11110
EBS00KMI
KBIA2465E
1.
Oil pan (Upper)
2.
O-ring
3.
O-ring
4.
O-ring
5.
O-ring (with collar)
6.
Oil level gauge guide
7.
Oil level gauge
8.
O-ring
9.
Connector bolt
10.
Oil filter
11. Oil cooler
12. Relief valve
13.
Oil pressure sensor
14. Gasket
15. Drain plug
16.
Oil pan (Lower)
17. Oil strainer
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot.
1. Remove the engine. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" .
2. Remove oil pan (lower) using the following steps.
a. Remove oil pan (lower) bolts in reverse order shown using
power tool.
KBIA2466E
Revision: October 2004
EM-22
2005 Titan
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
b.
Remove the oil pan (lower) using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Do not damage mating surface.
EM
C
WBIA0566E
3.
4.
a.
Remove oil strainer from oil pan (upper).
Remove oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
Remove oil pan (upper) bolts in reverse order shown.
D
E
F
G
H
KBIA2467E
b.
Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at
the points shown, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage mating surface.
I
J
K
KBIA2468E
5.
Remove O-rings from oil pump and front cover.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
M
KBIA2469E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean the oil strainer.
Revision: October 2004
EM-23
L
2005 Titan
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
INSTALLATION
1.
a.
Install oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole
shown by .
KBIA2470E
b.
Install new O-rings to oil pump and front cover side.
KBIA2469E
c.
Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
M6 × 30 mm (1.18 in)
M8 × 25 mm (0.98in)
M8 × 45 mm (1.77 in)
M8 × 123 mm (4.84in)
d.
: No. 15, 16
: No. 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13
: No. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14
: No. 9, 12
Install rear plate cover.
PBIC2553E
2.
3.
a.
Install oil strainer to upper oil pan (upper).
Install oil pan (lower).
Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
KBIA2471E
Revision: October 2004
EM-24
2005 Titan
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
b.
Tighten oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown.
A
EM
C
PBIC2595E
D
4.
5.
Install oil pan drain plug.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
● Do not fill the engine oil for at least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed.
E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check engine oil level and add engine oil if necessary. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" .
Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil.
Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check engine oil level again.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-25
2005 Titan
IGNITION COIL
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation
PFP:22448
EBS00KMJ
KBIA2505E
1.
Ignition coil
2.
Spark plug
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect harness connector from ignition coil.
Remove ignition coil.
CAUTION:
Do not shock ignition coil.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-26
2005 Titan
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Removal and Installation
PFP:22401
A
EBS00KMK
EM
C
D
E
F
G
KBIA2505E
1.
Ignition coil
2.
Spark plug
REMOVAL
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "REMOVAL" .
Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
J
K
L
SEM294A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
M
The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
●
Frequent engine starts
●
Low ambient temperatures
The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
●
Extended highway driving
●
Frequent high engine revolution
Make
Model
NGK
Standard model
FFV model
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
PLFR5A-11D
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
PLFR4A-11D
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
PLFR6A-11D
Revision: October 2004
EM-27
2005 Titan
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Gap (Nominal)
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
CAUTION:
●
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
●
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
●
If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may
be used.
Cleaner air pressure:
Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi)
Cleaning time:
Less than 20 seconds
SMA773C
●
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between
change intervals.
SMA806CA
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-28
2005 Titan
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
PFP:16600
A
EBS00KML
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
KBIA2472E
1.
Fuel tube (right bank)
2.
Cap
3.
Fuel damper
4.
O-ring
5.
O-ring (Standard model: Blue)
(FFV model: Black)
6.
Fuel injector
7.
Clip
8.
O-ring (Standard model: Brown)
(FFV model: Green)
9.
O-ring
10. Fuel hose assembly
L
11. Fuel tube (left bank)
M
CAUTION:
Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors.
Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (right bank and left bank).
CAUTION:
● While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining.
● Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose.
Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly.
Revision: October 2004
K
EM-29
2005 Titan
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
7.
a.
b.
Remove fuel injector from fuel tube.
Spread open to remove clip.
Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out.
CAUTION:
● Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel
tube.
● Do not damage injector nozzles during removal.
● Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
● Do not disassemble fuel injectors.
KBIA2506E
8.
Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube.
INSTALLATION
1.
a.
b.
c.
Install fuel damper to each fuel tube.
Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the cap of fuel tube.
CAUTION:
● Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
● Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
● Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
● Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
● When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with
tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch
O-ring.
Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel damper.
NOTE:
Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part.
Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube.
CAUTION:
● Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
● Do not pressure-fit with excessive force.
Reference value
d.
2.
KBIA2473E
:130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb)
Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns.
● After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube.
Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below.
CAUTION:
● Upper and lower O-ring are different.
Standard model
Fuel tube side
Nozzle side
Revision: October 2004
: Blue
: Brown
FFV model
Fuel tube side
Nozzle side
EM-30
: Black
: Green
2005 Titan
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
A
● Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
● Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
● Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
EM
● When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it
quickly into fuel tube.
C
● Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
Install fuel injector to fuel tube.
Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector.
D
● Insert clip so that lug “A” of fuel injector matches notch “A” of
the clip.
CAUTION:
E
● Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
● Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If
interference occurs, replace O-ring.
F
Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
● Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
● Insert fuel injector so that lug “B” of fuel tube matches notch
G
“B” of the clip.
● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip.
H
Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel
injector does not rotate or come off.
● Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with
I
cutouts of clips after installation.
●
3.
a.
b.
c.
KBIA2507E
4.
Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
● Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting bolts “a” to “b” in illustration and in two steps.
1st step
2nd step
J
K
L
: 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
: 24.5 N·m (2.5 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
M
KBIA2474E
5.
6.
Install fuel hose assembly.
● Refer to precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring.
● Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent O-ring
from being damaged.
● Tighten bolts evenly in several steps.
● Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections using the following steps.
Revision: October 2004
EM-31
2005 Titan
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
1.
2.
Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for
leaks at connections.
Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking on hidden points.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot.
Revision: October 2004
EM-32
fuel
2005 Titan
ROCKER COVER
ROCKER COVER
Removal and Installation
PFP:13264
A
EBS00KMM
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
KBIA2508E
J
1.
Rocker cover (left bank)
2.
PCV control valve
3.
O-ring
4.
Rocker cover gasket (left bank)
5.
Rocker cover (right bank)
6.
PCV control valve
7.
O-ring
8.
Oil filler cap
9.
Rocker cover gasket (right bank)
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" .
Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" (for left bank only).
Move harness on upper rocker cover and its peripheral aside.
Remove electric throttle control actuator, loosening bolts diagonally (for left bank only).
Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "REMOVAL" .
Remove PCV hose from PCV control valve.
Loosen bolts in reverse order shown using power tool.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the rocker cover by the oil filler neck (right
bank).
L
M
KBIA2509E
Revision: October 2004
EM-33
2005 Titan
ROCKER COVER
INSTALLATION
1.
a.
b.
Apply liquid gasket to joint part of cylinder head and camshaft
bracket following the steps below.
NOTE:
Illustration shows an example of left bank side (zoomed in
shows No.1 camshaft bracket).
Refer to illustration “a” to apply liquid gasket to joint part of No.1
camshaft bracket and cylinder head.
Refer to illustration “b” to apply liquid gasket 90° to illustration
“a”.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
KBIA2510E
2.
Install the rocker cover.
● Make sure the new rocker cover gasket is installed in the groove of the rocker cover.
●
Tighten the bolts in two steps in the numerical order shown.
1st step
2nd step
3.
4.
: 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 18 in-lb)
: 8.3 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not hold the rocker cover by the oil filler neck (right
bank).
Install the PCV hose.
NOTE:
● Remove foreign materials from inside the hose using compressed air.
● The inserted length is within 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in) [Target: 25 mm (0.98 in)].
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-34
KBIA2509E
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
TIMING CHAIN
Removal and Installation
PFP:13028
A
EBS00KMN
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
KBIA2511E
Revision: October 2004
EM-35
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
1.
Camshaft sprocket (left bank EXH)
2.
Camshaft sprocket (left bank INT)
4.
Camshaft sprocket (right bank EXH)
5.
Front cover
6.
Chain case cover (right bank)
7.
Chain case cover (left bank)
8.
Crankshaft pulley bolt
9.
Crankshaft pulley
11.
Front oil seal
12.
Oil pump drive spacer
10. Chain tensioner cover
3.
Camshaft sprocket (right bank INT)
13. Oil pump assembly
14.
Crankshaft sprocket
15.
Bracket
16. O-ring
17.
Timing chain tension guide (right
bank)
18.
Timing chain slack guide (right bank)
19. Timing chain (right bank)
20.
Timing chain (left bank)
21.
Chain tensioner (right bank)
22. Timing chain slack guide (left bank)
23.
Timing chain tension guide (left
bank)
24.
Chain tensioner (left bank)
NOTE:
●
To remove timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the left bank. The procedure for removing parts on the right bank is omitted because it is the same as that for removal on the left bank.
●
To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the right bank. The procedure for installing
parts on the left bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the right bank.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
a.
b.
Remove engine assembly from vehicle. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the following components and related parts:
● Drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. Refer to EM-13, "REMOVAL" .
● Thermostat housing and water hose. Refer to CO-19, "Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet
and Heater Pipe" .
● Power steering oil pump bracket. Refer to PS-27, "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" .
● Oil pan (lower), (upper) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" .
● Ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" .
● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-33, "ROCKER COVER" .
Remove chain case cover (right bank) and (left bank).
Loosen and remove bolts in the reverse of order shown.
Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Do not damage mating surfaces.
KBIA2475E
4.
a.
Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification
notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator on front cover.
KBIA2476E
Revision: October 2004
EM-36
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
b.
At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of
No. 1 cylinder (top front on left bank) point outside.
● If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
A
EM
C
KBIA0400J
D
5.
a.
Remove crankshaft pulley.
Loosen the bolts using suitable tool.
E
F
G
PBIC0053E
b.
Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft.
● Remove the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool. Set the
bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front
surface.
NOTE:
The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61
mm (2.40 in).
H
I
J
KBIA2477E
6.
a.
b.
Remove front cover.
Loosen and remove bolts in the reverse of order shown.
Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number
7.
8.
L
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
M
CAUTION:
Do not damage mating surfaces.
Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage front cover.
KBIA2478E
Remove oil pump drive spacer.
● Hold and remove flat space of oil pump drive spacer by pulling it forward.
KBIA2512E
Revision: October 2004
K
EM-37
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
9. Remove oil pump. Refer to LU-13, "Removal and Installation" .
10. Remove the chain tensioner on the left bank using the following steps.
NOTE:
To remove the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the left bank. The procedure for
removing parts on the right bank is omitted because it is the same as that for the left bank.
a. Squeeze the return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push
the plunger into the tensioner body.
b. Secure the plunger using stopper pin.
● Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04
in) in diameter.
c. Remove the bolts and chain tensioner.
WARNING:
Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when (squeezing)
return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may
cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when
KBIA2479E
removing.
NOTE:
Stop the plunger in the fully extended position by using the
return-proof clip 1 if the stopper pin is removed.
● Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing
the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using stopper pin 3.
●
KBIA2483E
11. Remove chain tension guide and slack guide.
12. Remove timing chain and crankshaft sprocket.
13. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove the
camshaft sprocket.
CAUTION:
To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not
turn crankshaft or camshaft when timing chain is disconnected.
14. Repeat the same procedure to remove the right timing chain and
associated parts.
KBIA2513E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace
chain if necessary.
●
In the same way as for left bank, inspect timing chain and associated parts on right bank.
PBIC0282E
Revision: October 2004
EM-38
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
INSTALLATION
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
KBIA2514E
NOTE:
●
The above figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that of the
corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
●
To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on right bank. The procedure for installing
parts on left bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on right bank.
1. Make sure the crankshaft key and dowel pin of each camshaft
are facing in the direction as shown.
I
J
K
L
M
SBIA0356E
2.
Install camshaft sprockets.
● Install intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket by selectively
using the groove of dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.)
● Lock the hexagonal part of camshaft in the same way as for
removal, and tighten bolts.
KBIA2480E
Revision: October 2004
EM-39
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
3.
Install crankshaft sprockets for both banks.
● Install each crankshaft sprocket so that its flange side (the
larger diameter side without teeth) faces in the direction as
shown.
NOTE:
The same parts are used but facing directions are different.
KBIA2515E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install the timing chains and associated parts.
● Align the mating mark on each sprocket and the timing chain for installation.
CAUTION:
● Before installing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of mating mark on timing chain and each sprocket. After the mating marks are aligned, keep them aligned by holding them by hand.
● Install the slack guides and tension guides onto the correct side by checking the identification mark on
the surface.
● Install the chain tensioner with the plunger locked in with the stopper pin.
CAUTION:
● Before and after the installation of the chain tensioner, make sure that the mating mark on the
timing chain is not out of alignment.
● After installing the chain tensioner, remove the stopper pin to release the tensioner. Make
sure the tensioner is released.
● To avoid chain-link skipping of the timing chain, do not move crankshaft or camshafts until
the front cover is installed.
In the same way as for right bank, install timing chain and associated parts on left side.
Install oil pump.
Install the oil pump drive spacer as follows:
● Install so that the front mark on the front edge of the oil pump
drive spacer faces the front of the engine.
● Insert the oil pump drive spacer according to the directions of
the crankshaft key and the two flat surfaces of the oil pump
inner rotor.
● If the positional relationship does not allow the insertion,
rotate the oil pump inner rotor to allow the oil pump drive
spacer to be inserted.
KBIA2490E
8.
Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the
oil seal.
PBIC0059E
Revision: October 2004
EM-40
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
9.
Install chain tensioner cover.
● Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants"
.
A
EM
C
KBIA2547E
D
10. Install front cover as follows:
a. Install new O-ring on cylinder block.
E
F
G
KBIA2516E
b.
c.
Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Check again that the timing mating mark on timing chain and
that on each sprocket are aligned. Then install front cover.
H
I
J
KBIA2517E
d.
e.
Install bolts in the numerical order shown.
After tightening, re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto
surface mating with oil pan.
M6 × 50 mm (1.97 in)
M6 × 80 mm (3.15 in)
M6 × 20 mm (0.79 in)
L
M
: No. 1, 20, 25, 26, 27
: No. 4, 5, 7
: Except the above
KBIA2478E
11. Install chain case cover (right bank and left bank) as follows:
a. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION:
The start and end of the application of the liquid gasket
should be crossed at a position that cannot be seen after
attaching the chain case cover.
KBIA2481E
Revision: October 2004
EM-41
K
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
b.
Install bolts in the numerical order shown.
KBIA2475E
12. Install the crankshaft pulley.
● Install the key of the crankshaft.
● Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
CAUTION:
Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
13. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
● Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt.
● Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange.
Corresponding to the selected notch, put a mating mark (such
as paint) on the crankshaft pulley.
Crankshaft pulley bolt torque
Step 1
: 93.1 N·m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb)
Step 2
: additional 90° (angle tightening)
14. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when
viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference.
15. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-42
KBIA2519E
2005 Titan
TIMING CHAIN
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspection for Leaks
A
The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks.
●
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
EM
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
●
Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
–
Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
C
leakage at connection points.
–
Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
●
Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
D
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
E
hydraulic pressure rises.
●
Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
F
●
Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
●
After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
specified level, if necessary.
G
Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluid*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
Fuel
H
I
* Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-43
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
PFP:13001
EBS00KMO
WBIA0469E
* Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
1.
Cylinder head (right bank)
2.
Camshaft bracket (No. 2, 3, 4, 5)
3.
Valve lifter
4.
Camshaft bracket (No. 1)
5.
Seal washer
6.
Camshaft (right bank EXH)
7.
Camshaft (right bank INT)
8.
Camshaft (left bank INT)
9.
Camshaft (left bank EXH)
10.
Camshaft sprocket (right bank EXH)
11.
Camshaft sprocket (right bank INT)
12.
Camshaft sprocket (left bank INT)
13.
Camshaft sprocket (left bank EXH)
14. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
15.
O-ring
16.
Cylinder head (left bank)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove rocker cover (right bank) and (left bank). Refer to EM-33, "ROCKER COVER" .
Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Remove chain case cover (right bank) and (left bank). Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Paint matching marks on the timing chain links aligning with
camshaft sprocket matching marks.
KBIA2488E
Revision: October 2004
EM-44
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
5.
a.
b.
c.
Remove the chain tensioner on the left bank using the following steps.
A
WARNING:
Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding
plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
EM
Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the
plunger into the tensioner body.
Secure plunger using stopper pin.
C
● Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04
in) in diameter.
Remove the bolts and the chain tensioner.
D
KBIA2479E
NOTE:
Stop plunger in the fully extended position using return-proof clip
1 if stopper pin is removed.
●
Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the
return-proof clip 1. Secure it using stopper pin 3.
●
E
F
G
H
KBIA2483E
6.
Remove the right chain tensioner cover from the front cover
using Tool.
Tool number
I
J
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Do not damage mating surfaces.
K
L
KBIA2521E
M
7.
a.
b.
Remove chain tensioner on right bank using the following steps.
WARNING:
Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding
plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the
plunger into the tensioner body.
Secure plunger using stopper pin.
● Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04
in) in diameter.
KBIA2479E
Revision: October 2004
EM-45
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
c.
Remove the bolts and the right bank chain tensioner.
NOTE:
If it is difficult to push plunger on right bank chain tensioner,
remove the plunger under extended condition.
KBIA2484E
8.
Loosen camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove camshaft
sprockets.
CAUTION:
To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not
turn crankshaft or camshaft with timing chain disconnected.
KBIA2485E
9.
Remove front cover bolts.
KBIA2486E
10. Remove bolts in the reverse of order shown to remove camshaft
brackets.
● Remove No. 1 camshaft bracket.
NOTE:
The bottom and front surface of bracket will be stuck because
of liquid gasket.
11. Remove camshaft.
12. Remove valve lifters if necessary.
● Correctly identify location where each part is removed from.
Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up.
KBIA2522E
Revision: October 2004
EM-46
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Runout
1.
2.
3.
A
Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and
No. 5 journals of camshaft.
Set dial gauge vertically to No. 3 journal.
Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft
runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading).
Camshaft runout
●
EM
C
: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft.
D
EMK0641D
Camshaft Cam Height
●
E
Measure camshaft cam height.
Standard cam height
(intake & exhaust)
Cam wear limit
(intake & exhaust)
●
: 44.465 - 44.655 mm
(1.7506 - 1.7581 in)
: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
F
G
If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft.
H
PBIC0039E
Camshaft Journal Clearance
I
Camshaft Journal Diameter
●
Measure diameter of camshaft journal.
Standard diameter
: 25.953 - 25.970 mm
(1.0218 - 1.0224 in)
J
K
L
PBIC0040E
Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter
●
Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque.
●
Measure the inner diameter of the camshaft bracket.
Standard
M
: 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in)
Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance
(Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket inner diameter) – (camshaft
journal diameter)
Standard
●
: 0.030 - 0.068 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 in)
If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both
camshaft and cylinder head.
PBIC1645E
NOTE:
The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. Replace the
whole cylinder head as an assembly.
Revision: October 2004
EM-47
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
Camshaft End Play
●
Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the
camshaft. Measure the end play when the camshaft is moved
forward/backward (in direction to axis).
Standard
●
●
: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in)
If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again.
If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head.
PBIC0042E
●
–
Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified
value.
Dimension ″A″ for camshaft No. 1 journal
Standard
–
Dimension ″B″ for cylinder head No. 1 journal
Standard
●
: 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008-1.2027 in)
: 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953-1.1963 in)
If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head.
KBIA2426J
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
1.
2.
3.
Install camshaft in cylinder head.
Install camshaft sprocket to camshaft.
Measure camshaft sprocket runout.
Runout
●
: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket.
KBIA0181J
Valve Lifter
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks.
●
If any damage is found, replace valve lifter.
●
Select the thickness of the head so that valve clearance is within
the standard when replacing. Refer to EM-52, "Valve Clearance"
.
KBIA0182E
Revision: October 2004
EM-48
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
Valve Lifter Clearance
A
Valve Lifter Diameter
●
Measure diameter of valve lifter.
Standard
: 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 in)
EM
C
D
JEM798G
Valve Lifter Hole Diameter
Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder
head, using suitable tool.
E
●
Standard
F
: 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 in)
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance
(Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) – (valve lifter
diameter)
Standard
●
G
: 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 in)
If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each
specification of the valve lifter diameter and hole diameter,
replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head.
H
PBIC0043E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
I
Install valve lifters if removed.
● Install removed parts in their original locations.
Install camshafts. Refer to the table below for identification of
right and left bank, and intake and exhaust.
Bank
RH
LH
INT EXH
Identification
paint (front)
Identification
paint (rear)
Identification
rib
INT
White
—
Yes.
EXH
—
Light blue
Yes.
INT
White
—
No.
EXH
—
Light blue
No.
J
K
L
KBIA2523E
●
Install so that dowel pin at the front of camshaft face is in the
direction shown.
KBIA2524E
Revision: October 2004
EM-49
2005 Titan
M
CAMSHAFT
3.
Install camshaft brackets.
● Install by referring to installation location mark on upper surface.
● Install so that installation location mark can be correctly read
when viewed from the intake manifold side.
KBIA2525E
●
–
Install No. 1 camshaft bracket using the following procedure:
Apply liquid gasket to No. 1 camshaft bracket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION:
● After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking from part “A” and “B” (both on right
and left sides).
● Remove completely any excess of liquid gasket inside
bracket.
PBIC0035E
–
Apply liquid gasket to the back side of front cover as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
KBIA2487E
Revision: October 2004
EM-50
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
–
Position No. 1 camshaft bracket close to mounting position,
and then install it to prevent from touching liquid gasket
applied to each surface.
A
EM
C
SBIA0259E
D
–
Temporarily tighten front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as
shown.
E
F
G
KBIA2486E
4.
Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows:
H
Camshaft bracket bolts
Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8)
: 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 3 (all bolts)
: 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Step 4 (all bolts)
: 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb)
I
J
CAUTION:
After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe
off excessive liquid gasket from the parts listed below.
● Mating surface of rocker cover
● Mating surface of front cover
K
L
M
KBIA2522E
a.
Tighten front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown to the specified torque.
Front cover bolts
: 11.0 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8ft - lb)
KBIA2486E
Revision: October 2004
EM-51
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
5.
a.
Install the camshaft sprockets using the following procedure:
Install the camshaft sprockets aligning them with the matching
marks painted on the timing chain when removed. Align the
camshaft sprocket key groove with the dowel pin on the camshaft front edge at the same time. Then temporarily tighten
bolts.
KBIA2482E
Install the intake and exhaust side camshaft sprockets by
selectively using the groove of the dowel pin according to the
bank. (Common part used for both banks.)
Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for
removal, and tighten the bolts.
Check again that the timing mating mark on the timing chain and
on each sprocket are aligned.
●
b.
c.
KBIA2480E
6.
a.
Install the chain tensioner using the following procedure:
NOTE:
Left bank is shown.
Install the chain tensioner.
● Compress the plunger and hold it using a stopper pin when
installing.
● Loosen the slack guide side timing chain by rotating the camshaft hexagonal part if mounting space is small.
Chain tensioner bolts
: 6.9 N·m (0.70 kg-m, 61 in-lb)
KBIA2479E
b.
c.
Remove the stopper pin and release the plunger, and then apply
tension to the timing chain.
Install the chain tensioner cover onto the front cover (RH bank).
● Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants"
.
Tensioner cover bolts
7.
8.
: 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb)
Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to EM-103, "Valve
Clearance" .
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
Valve Clearance
KBIA2547E
EBS00KMP
INSPECTION
NOTE:
Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts,
or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or
noise).
1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine.
2. Remove engine cover, battery cover and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" , SC-9,
"REMOVAL" and EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-52
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
3.
4.
Remove right bank and left bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to EM-33, "Removal and Installation" .
A
Turn crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when
viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator.
EM
C
D
KBIA2476E
5.
At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses
of No. 1 cylinder (top front on left bank) face outside.
● If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
E
F
G
KBIA0400J
6.
Measure valve clearances at locations marked “×” as shown in
the table below (locations indicated with black arrow).
NOTE:
Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
● No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
Measuring position (RH bank)
No. 1 cylinder at TDC
No. 4 CYL
No. 6 CYL
Measuring position (LH bank)
I
J
No. 8 CYL
×
EXH
INT
No. 1 cylinder at TDC
No. 2 CYL
H
×
×
No. 1 CYL
No. 3 CYL
INT
×
EXH
×
K
No. 5 CYL
No. 7 CYL
×
L
×
M
KBIA2526E
Revision: October 2004
EM-53
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
●
Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
Valve clearance standard:
Hot*
Intake
: 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
: 0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in)
Cold
Intake
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust
: 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
7.
8.
KBIA0185E
CAUTION:
If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed
up engine are still within specifications.
Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No.
3 cylinder compression TDC.
Measure valve clearances at the locations marked “×” as shown
in the table below (locations indicated with white arrow).
● No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
Measuring position (RH bank)
No. 2 CYL
No. 8 CYL
×
INT
Measuring position (LH bank)
No. 3 cylinder at TDC
No. 6 CYL
×
EXH
No. 3 cylinder at TDC
No. 4 CYL
No. 1 CYL
No. 3 CYL
INT
×
EXH
×
No. 5 CYL
No. 7 CYL
×
×
KBIA2526E
9.
Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No.
3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake
and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder and the exhaust
valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder.
KBIA2548E
10. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary, Refer to EM-54, "ADJUSTMENT" :
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
●
Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
Revision: October 2004
EM-54
2005 Titan
CAMSHAFT
●
1.
2.
3.
The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
A
Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
EM
Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using
suitable tool.
C
D
KBIA0057E
4.
Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
● Valve lifter thickness calculation:
Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2)
t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter
C1 = Measured valve clearance
C2= Standard valve clearance:
F
G
Intake
: 0.36 mm (0.0142 in)*
Exhaust : 0.37 mm (0.0146 in)*
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
●
●
H
I
Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp
marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder).
Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness.
Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to
8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
(when manufactured at factory). Refer to EM-104, "Available
Valve Lifter" .
J
K
KBIA0119E
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install the selected valve lifter.
Install camshaft.
Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns.
Make sure valve clearances for cold engine are within specifications by referring to the specified values.
After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine.
Make sure the values are within specifications.
Valve clearance standard:
Hot*
Intake
: 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
: 0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in)
Cold
Intake
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust
: 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Revision: October 2004
E
EM-55
2005 Titan
L
M
CAMSHAFT
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspection for Leaks
The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks.
●
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
●
Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
–
Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points.
–
Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
●
Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
hydraulic pressure rises.
●
Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
●
Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
●
After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluid*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
Fuel
* Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
Revision: October 2004
EM-56
2005 Titan
OIL SEAL
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal
PFP:00100
A
EBS00KMQ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-44, "REMOVAL" .
EM
Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-44, "REMOVAL" .
● Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them
up.
C
Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent the valve from dropping into the cylinder.
Remove the valve collet using Tools.
D
Tool number
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
E
: KV10109220 ( — )
CAUTION:
Do not damage the valve lifter holes.
Remove valve spring retainer and valve spring.
CAUTION:
Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring.
F
WBIA0578E
G
Remove the valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
H
I
J
WBIA0478E
INSTALLATION
●
Tool number
●
●
K
Install the valve oil seal using Tool.
: KV10115600 (J-38958)
L
Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip.
Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H".
M
Height "H" (Without valve spring seat installed)
Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
WBIA0490E
Revision: October 2004
EM-57
2005 Titan
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
EBS00KMR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the engine. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" .
Remove crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage front cover and oil pump drive spacer.
SBIA0359E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new front oil seal.
Install the front oil seal.
● Install the front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as
shown.
SEM715A
Press-fit until the height of the front oil seal is level with the
mounting surface using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage front timing chain case and crankshaft.
● Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil
seal.
●
PBIC2931E
3.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
EBS00KMS
REMOVAL
1.
a.
Remove transmission assembly. Refer to AT-265, "REMOVAL" (4X2 models) or AT-268, "REMOVAL"
(4X4 models).
Remove drive plate.
● Holding crankshaft pulley bolt, lock crankshaft to remove drive plate bolts.
● Remove the bolts diagonally.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage the drive plate. Especially, avoid deforming and damaging the signal plate
teeth (circumference position).
● Place the drive plate with the signal plate surface facing other than downward.
● Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate.
Revision: October 2004
EM-58
2005 Titan
OIL SEAL
b.
2.
Remove engine rear plate.
Remove the rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage crankshaft and oil seal retainer surface.
A
EM
C
WBIA0437E
D
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new rear oil seal.
Install the rear oil seal.
● Install the rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as
shown.
E
F
G
H
SEM715A
●
●
I
Press-fit the rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage the crankshaft or cylinder block.
● Press-fit the oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or
tilting.
● Do not touch grease applied onto the oil seal lip.
● Do not damage or scratch the outer circumference of
the rear oil seal.
Tap until flattened with the front edge of the oil seal retainer.
J
K
L
WBIA0438E
3.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-59
M
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:11041
EBS00KMT
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine.
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
CAUTION:
Leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7.
Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-27, "REMOVAL" .
Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II).
Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number
6.
: EG15050500 (J-45402)
With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition
switch to “START” for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform
these steps to check each cylinder.
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) /rpm
Standard
1,520 (15.5, 220) / 200
7.
8.
9.
Minimum
1,324 (13.5, 192) / 200
Deference limit
between cylinders
98 (1.0, 14) / 300
WBIA0605E
CAUTION:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed.
● If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the
engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
● If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
● If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug
hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
– If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check
the piston rings and replace if necessary.
– If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be
malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
● If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains
low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders
may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
Install the components in the reverse order of removal.
Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly.
Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-31, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-60
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal and Installation
EBS00KMU
A
EM
C
D
E
F
KBIA2528E
1.
Harness bracket
2.
Engine coolant temperature sensor
3.
Washer
4.
Cylinder head gasket (left bank)
5.
Cylinder head (right bank)
6.
Cylinder head bolt
7.
Cylinder head gasket (right bank)
8.
Cylinder head (left bank)
G
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove engine assembly from vehicle. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the following components and related parts:
● Auto tensioner of drive belts and idler pulley. Refer to EM-13, "REMOVAL" .
● Thermostat housing and hose. Refer to CO-19, "Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and
Heater Pipe" .
● Oil pan and oil strainer. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" .
● Fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
● Intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" .
● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-33, "ROCKER COVER" .
Remove crankshaft pulley, front cover, oil pump, and timing chain. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Remove camshaft sprockets and camshafts. Refer to EM-44, "CAMSHAFT" .
Remove cylinder head bolts in reverse of order shown.
PBIC0068E
Revision: October 2004
EM-61
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
CYLINDER HEAD
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Cylinder Head Bolts Diameter
●
Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening
method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2
exceeds the limit, replace the bolt with a new one.
Limit (d1 - d2)
●
: 0.18 mm (0.0071 in)
If reduction of diameter appears in a position other than d2, use
it as d2 point.
KBIA0189E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
a.
Install cylinder head gasket.
Install the cylinder head. Follow the steps below to tighten the
bolts in the numerical order shown.
CAUTION:
● If cylinder head bolts are re-used, check their diameters
before installation. Refer to EM-62, "Cylinder Head Bolts
Diameter" .
Apply engine oil to threads and seating surface of the bolts.
Step a
Step b
Step c
b.
: 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb)
:Loosen in the reverse order of tightening.
: 44.1 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)
PBIC0068E
Measure the tightening angle using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
CAUTION:
Measure the tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure
visually.
Step d
Step e
: 60° clockwise
: 60° clockwise
WBIA0603E
3.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
EM-62
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspection for Leaks
A
The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks.
●
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
EM
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
–
Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
C
leakage at connection points.
–
Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
●
Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
D
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
E
hydraulic pressure rises.
●
Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
F
●
Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
●
After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
specified level, if necessary.
G
Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluid*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
Fuel
H
I
* Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-63
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
Disassembly and Assembly
EBS00KMV
KBIA2529E
1.
Spark plug
2.
Valve lifter
3.
Valve collet
4.
Valve spring retainer
5.
Valve spring
6.
Valve spring seat
7.
Valve oil seal
8.
Valve guide
9.
Valve seat
10.
Valve (INT)
11.
Valve (EXH)
12.
Cylinder head (left bank)
13.
Spark plug tube
14. Cylinder head (right bank)
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove spark plug. Refer to EM-27, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the valve lifter.
● Identify the installation positions, and store them without mixing them up.
Remove the valve collet using Tool.
Tool number
4.
5.
6.
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
: KV10109220 ( — )
CAUTION:
When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring
seat.
Inspect the valve guide clearance. Refer to EM-67, "Valve Guide
Clearance" .
Push the valve stem to the combustion chamber side, and remove the valve.
● Identify the installation positions, and store them without mixing them up.
Revision: October 2004
EM-64
WBIA0578E
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
7.
Remove the valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
EM
C
WBIA0478E
8. Replace the valve seat if necessary. Refer to EM-70, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
9. Replace the valve guide if necessary. Refer to EM-70, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
10. Remove the spark plug tube, as necessary.
● Remove the spark plug tube out of the cylinder head using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage the cylinder head.
● Do not remove the spark plug tube unless absolutely necessary. Once removed, the spark
plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused.
Install the valve guide if necessary. Refer to EM-67, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" .
Install the valve seat if necessary. Refer to EM-70, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
Install the valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
●
●
E
F
G
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
D
H
: KV10115600 (J-38958)
Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal
lip.
Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H".
I
J
Height "H" (Without valve spring seat installed)
Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
K
WBIA0490E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install valves.
Install valve spring seats.
Install valve springs.
● Install narrow pitch (Paint mark side) to cylinder head side.
Install valve spring retainers.
L
M
SEM085D
Revision: October 2004
EM-65
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
8.
Install the valve collet using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
: KV10109220 ( — )
CAUTION:
When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
WBIA0578E
9.
Install valve lifters.
● Install removed parts in there same locations.
● If installing new lifters, select the correct size lifter for proper valve clearance. Refer to EM-52, "Valve
Clearance" .
10. Install the spark plug tube if necessary, following the procedure below.
a. Remove any old liquid gasket adhering to the cylinder-head spark plug tube hole.
b. Apply liquid gasket to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in) from the edge of the spark plug tube
press-fit side.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
c. Press-fit the spark plug tube to the specified height “H” using
suitable tool.
Standard press-fit height “H”
:38.4 - 39.4 mm
(1.512 - 1.551 in)
CAUTION:
● When press-fitting, take care not to deform the spark plug
tube.
● After press-fitting, wipe off any liquid gasket protruding
onto the cylinder-head upper face.
11. Install spark plugs.
Inspection After Disassembly
KBIA1248E
EBS00KMW
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
1.
2.
Remove any oil, scale, gasket, sealant and carbon deposits from the cylinder head surface.
CAUTION:
Do not allow any debris to enter the oil or coolant passages.
Measure the bottom surface of the cylinder head for distortion in
six directions as shown, using suitable tools.
Standard
Limit
●
: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
: 0.1mm (0.004 in)
If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the cylinder head.
PBIC0075E
Revision: October 2004
EM-66
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
VALVE DIMENSIONS
●
●
A
Check the dimensions of each valve. Refer to EM-67, "VALVE
DIMENSIONS" .
If dimensions are out of the standard, replace valve.
EM
C
SEM188A
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
Valve Stem Diameter
D
E
Measure diameter of valve stem using suitable tool.
Standard
Intake
Exhaust
F
: 5.965 - 5.980 mm (0.2348 - 0.2354 in)
: 5.955 - 5.970 mm (0.2344 - 0.2350 in)
G
H
SEM938C
Valve Guide Inside Diameter
I
Measure inside diameter of valve guide using suitable tool.
Standard
Intake and
Exhaust
: 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in)
J
Valve Guide Clearance
●
K
(Valve guide clearance) = (Valve guide inside diameter) – (Valve stem diameter).
Valve guide clearance:
Standard
Intake
: 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in)
Exhaust : 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 - 0.0025 in)
Limit
Intake
: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Exhaust : 0.09 mm (0.0035 in)
●
L
M
If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace valve and/or valve guide. When the valve guide must be
replaced, refer to EM-67, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" .
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized (0.2 mm, 0.008 in) valve guide.
Revision: October 2004
EM-67
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
1.
To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C
(230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
SEM008A
2.
Remove the valve guide using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned.
SEM931C
3.
Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable tool.
Valve guide hole diameter:
Standard
Intake and exhaust : 9.975 - 9.996 mm (0.3927 0.3935 in)
Oversize (service)
Intake and exhaust : 10.175 - 10.196 mm
(0.4006 - 0.4014 in)
SEM932C
4.
Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in
heated oil.
SEM008A
5.
Press valve guide from camshaft side to dimensions as shown.
Revision: October 2004
EM-68
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
CAUTION:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned.
A
EM
C
KBIA2530E
6.
D
Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable tool.
Valve guide hole diameter:
Intake and exhaust : 6.000 - 6.018 mm
(0.2362 - 0.2369 in)
E
F
G
SEM932C
H
VALVE SEAT CONTACT
●
●
●
●
After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves
are within specifications, perform this procedure.
Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of
valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the surface.
Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference.
If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has NG conditions even after the re-check,
replace valve seat.
I
J
K
SBIA0322E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-69
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT
When valve seat is removed, replace with oversized (0.5 mm, 0.020 in) valve seat.
1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess
in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this.
2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat.
Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] (Service):
Intake
: 38.500 - 38.516 mm (1.5157 - 1.5164 in)
Exhaust
: 32.700 - 32.716 mm (1.2874 - 1.2880 in)
●
●
Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.
SEM795A
3.
Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in
heated oil.
SEM008A
4.
5.
Cool the valve seats well with dry ice. Force fit the valve seat into the cylinder head.
CAUTION:
● Avoid directly touching cold valve seats.
● Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned.
Finish the seat to the specified dimensions using suitable tool.
Refer to EM-106, "Valve Seat" .
CAUTION:
When using valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle
with both hands. Then, press on the contacting surface all
around the circumference to cut in a single drive. Improper
pressure on with the cutter or cutting many different times
may result in stage valve seat.
SEM934C
6.
Grind to obtain the dimensions indicated as shown.
● Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting.
KBIA2531E
Revision: October 2004
EM-70
2005 Titan
CYLINDER HEAD
A
EM
C
KBIA2544E
7.
D
Check again for normal contact. Refer to EM-69, "VALVE SEAT CONTACT" .
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
●
Limit
●
E
Set try square along the side of valve spring and rotate the
spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face
of spring and try square.
F
: Less than 2.2 mm (0.087 in)
If measurement is not within specifications, replace the valve
spring.
G
H
PBIC0080E
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD
●
Check the valve spring pressure at the specified spring height.
I
Standard:
Intake and exhaust
Free height:
Installation height:
Installation load:
J
50.58 mm (1.9913 in)
37.0 mm (1.457 in)
165.8 - 187.0 N (16.9 19.1 kg, 37- 42 lb)
Height during valve open: 28.2 mm (1.110 in)
Load with valve open:
314.8 - 355.0 N (32.1 36.2 kg, 71 - 80 lb)
●
K
SEM113
If measurement is not within specifications, replace the valve spring.
Revision: October 2004
EM-71
L
M
2005 Titan
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:10001
EBS00KMX
LBIA0397E
1.
Rear engine mounting insulator 4x4
2.
Rear engine mounting insulator 4x2
3.
LH engine mounting bracket
4.
LH heat shield plate
5.
LH engine mounting insulator
6.
RH engine mounting bracket
7.
RH heat shield plate
8.
RH engine mounting insulator
WARNING:
●
Situate vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
●
Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
●
For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts described in
PARTS CATALOG.
CAUTION:
●
Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations.
●
Do not start working until exhaust system and engine coolant are cooled sufficiently.
●
If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, refer to the applicable sections.
●
Always use the support point specified for lifting.
●
Use either 2-point lift type or separate type lift. If board-on type is used for unavoidable reasons,
support at the rear axle jacking point with transmission jack or similar tool before starting work, in
preparation for the backward shift of center of gravity.
●
For supporting points for lifting and jacking point at rear axle, refer to GI-40, "Garage Jack and
Safety Stand" .
REMOVAL
Preparation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Partially drain A/T fluid. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the engine hood. Refer to BL-13, "Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-72
2005 Titan
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
5.
6.
Remove the cowl extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove engine room cover using power tools.
A
EM
C
WBIA0528E
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Remove the air duct and air cleaner case assembly EM-14, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect vacuum hose between vehicle and engine and set it aside.
Remove the radiator assembly and hoses. Refer to CO-12, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the drive belts. Refer to EM-12, "Removal" .
Remove the fan blade. Refer to CO-15, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect the engine room harness from the fuse box and set it aside.
Disconnect the ECM.
Disconnect the engine room harness from the engine side and set it aside.
Disconnect the engine harness grounds.
Disconnect the power steering reservoir tank from engine and move it aside.
Disconnect power steering oil pump from engine. Move it aside and secure it using suitable wire or rope.
Refer to PS-27, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the A/C compressor bolts and set the compressor aside. Refer to MTC-115, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect brake booster vacuum line.
Disconnect EVAP line.
Disconnect the fuel hose at the engine side connection. Refer to EM-29, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect the heater hoses at cowl, and install plugs to avoid leakage of engine coolant.
Remove the A/T oil level indicator and indicator tube upper bolts.
Remove front final drive assembly (4x4 only). Refer to FFD-12, "REMOVAL" .
Remove exhaust manifolds. Refer to EM-19, "REMOVAL" .
Install engine slingers into left bank cylinder head and right bank
cylinder head.
Engine slinger torque:
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
45.0 N·m (4.6 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)
27. Remove the A/T. Refer to AT-265, "Removal and Installation
(4x2)" or AT-268, "Removal and Installation (4x4)" .
28. Lift using a hoist and secure the engine in position.
29. Remove engine assembly from vehicle, avoid interference with
vehicle body.
CAUTION:
PBIC1556E
● Before and during this lifting, always check if any harnesses are left connected.
30. Remove the parts that may restrict installation of engine to engine stand.
NOTE:
This procedure is described assuming that you use an engine stand mounting to the surface to which the
transmission mounts.
a. Remove drive plate.
● Holding crankshaft pulley bolt, lock crankshaft to remove drive plate bolts.
● Loosen bolts diagonally.
Revision: October 2004
D
EM-73
2005 Titan
M
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage drive plate. Especially avoid
deforming and damaging of signal plate teeth (circumference position).
● Place the drive plate with signal plate surface facing
other than downward.
● Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate.
KBIA2491E
CAUTION:
Use an engine stand that has a load capacity [approximately 240kg (529 lb) or more] large enough
for supporting the engine weight.
● If the load capacity of the stand is not adequate, remove the following parts beforehand to
reduce the potential risk of overturning the stand.
– Remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "REMOVAL" .
– Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" .
– Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "REMOVAL" .
– Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-33, "REMOVAL" .
– Other removable brackets.
CAUTION:
Before removing the hanging chains, make sure the engine stand is stable and there is no risk of
overturning.
31. Remove alternator. Refer to SC-26, "REMOVAL" .
32. Remove engine mounting insulator and bracket using power tool.
Revision: October 2004
EM-74
2005 Titan
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly
EM
during re-assembly.
●
Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drivetrain components.
C
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspection for Leaks
The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks.
●
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
●
Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
–
Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points.
–
Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
●
Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
hydraulic pressure rises.
●
Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
●
Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
●
After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
specified level, if necessary.
D
E
F
G
H
I
Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluid*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
Fuel
J
K
L
* Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-75
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
CYLINDER BLOCK
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:11010
EBS00KMY
WBIA0471E
Revision: October 2004
EM-76
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
* Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
1.
Knock sensor sub-harness
2.
Knock sensor
3.
Cylinder block
4.
Main bearing
5.
Top ring
6.
Second ring
7.
Oil ring
8.
Crankshaft key
9.
Piston
10.
Connecting rod
11.
Snap ring
12.
Piston pin
13.
Connecting rod bearing
14.
Connecting rod bearing cap
15.
Main bearing cap
16.
Thrust bearing
17.
Main bearing
18.
Crankshaft
19.
Pilot converter
20.
Thrust bearing
21.
Side bolt
22.
Drive plate
23.
Reinforcement plate
24.
Rear oil seal retainer
25.
Rear oil seal
26.
Transmission
27.
O-ring
28.
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
29.
Gasket
30.
Cylinder block heater
31.
Connector cap
A
EM
C
D
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Explained here is how to disassemble with engine stand supporting transmission surface. When using different type of engine stand, note steps may be different.
1. Remove engine assembly and mount engine to stand. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" .
CAUTION:
Before removing the hanging chains, make sure engine stand is stable and there is no risk of overturning.
2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
3. Drain engine coolant by removing the cylinder block drain plugs
“A”, “B”, “C” and “D” as shown.
E
F
G
H
I
J
WBIA0419E
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
b.
Remove the following components and associated parts (the parts referred to in step 1 are not included
here).
● Oil pan and oil strainer. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" .
● Crankshaft pulley, front cover and timing chain. Refer to EM-36, "REMOVAL" .
● Camshaft. Refer to EM-44, "REMOVAL" .
● Cylinder head. Refer to EM-61, "REMOVAL" .
Remove knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the sensor, avoiding shocks.
Check connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" .
Remove the piston and connecting rod assembly as follows.
Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center.
Remove the connecting rod cap.
Revision: October 2004
EM-77
2005 Titan
K
L
M
CYLINDER BLOCK
c.
Push the piston and connecting rod assembly out to the cylinder
head side using suitable tool.
PBIC0086E
8.
Remove the connecting rod bearings.
CAUTION:
When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order.
9. Check piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-93, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" .
10. Remove the piston rings from the piston using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage piston.
● Do not damage piston rings by expanding them excessively.
PBIC0087E
11. Remove piston from connecting rod as follows.
a. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
PBIC0260E
b.
Heat piston to 60° to 70°C (140° to 158°F) using suitable tool.
PBIC0261E
Revision: October 2004
EM-78
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
c.
Push out piston pin using suitable tool.
A
EM
C
PBIC0262E
D
12. Separate and remove rear oil seal retainer from cylinder block.
CAUTION:
Do not damage mating surface.
13. Remove the rear oil seal from the rear oil seal retainer.
14. Measure the crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CRANKSHAFT END PLAY" .
15. Remove the main bearing caps as follows:
● Loosen bolts in several different steps.
a. Loosen the side bolts (M10) starting from 30 to 21 to remove.
b. Loosen the main bearing cap sub bolts (M9) starting from 20 to
11 to remove.
c. Loosen the main bearing cap bolts (M12) starting from 10 to 1 to
remove.
E
F
G
H
PBIC0090E
d.
Remove the main bearing cap.
● Insert bolts (2) into bolt holes, and then remove main bearing
cap by lifting up and shaking forward and backward.
I
J
K
L
KBIA2492E
M
16. Remove the crankshaft.
17. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and main bearing caps.
● When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order.
18. Remove the pilot converter using Tool if necessary.
Tool number
: ST16610001 (J-23907)
PBIC0092E
Revision: October 2004
EM-79
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Fully air-blow the coolant and oil passages in the cylinder block, the cylinder bore, and the crankcase to
remove any foreign material.
CAUTION:
Use goggles to protect your eyes.
Install each plug to the cylinder block. (Only screw-type plugs
are shown.)
● Apply liquid gasket.
Use Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
● Replace the copper washers with new ones.
● Tighten each plug as specified below.
Part
Washer
Tightening torque
A
Yes
53.9 N·m (5.5 kg-m, 40 ft-lb)
B
No
19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 15 ft-lb)
C
Yes
62.7 N·m (6.4 kg-m, 46 ft-lb)
D
Yes
62.7 N·m (6.4 kg-m, 46 ft-lb)
WBIA0419E
3.
a.
b.
Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings.
Remove dust, dirt, and oil on the bearing mating surfaces of the
cylinder block and the main bearing caps.
Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 journal housing on the cylinder block and main bearing caps
● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside).
● Install the thrust bearings with a protrusion in the center on
the main bearing caps.
PBIC0093E
c.
Install main bearings paying attention to the direction.
● Install the one with oil holes onto the cylinder block and the
one without oil holes onto the main bearing cap.
● Before installing bearings, apply engine oil to bearing surface
(inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly
clean it.
● When installing, align the bearing stopper to the notch.
● Ensure the oil holes on the cylinder block and those on the
corresponding bearing are aligned.
PBIC0094E
4.
5.
Install the pilot converter to the crankshaft using suitable tool.
Install the crankshaft to the cylinder block.
● While turning the crankshaft by hand, make sure it turns
smoothly.
EMP0569D
Revision: October 2004
EM-80
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
6.
Install the main bearing caps.
● Align the identification number to the journal position to install.
● Install it with front mark (indicated by the arrow) facing front of
engine.
● Tap the caps lightly to seat them in the installation position.
A
EM
C
KBIA2533E
D
7.
a.
Follow the steps below to tighten each main bearing cap bolt.
Apply engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts, and
tighten all bolts temporarily.
Main bearing cap bolts
in order of 1 to 10
Main bearing cap sub
bolts in order of 11 to 20
E
: 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft.-lb)
F
: 29.4 N·m (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft-lb)
G
PBIC0090E
b.
Measure tightening angle using Tool.
Tool number
H
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
CAUTION:
Measure tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually.
Main bearing cap bolts in
order of 1 to 10
Main bearing cap sub
bolts in order of 11 to 20
Side bolts in order of 21 to
30
I
: 40°
J
: 30°
WBIA0597E
: 49 N·m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb)
Rotate crankshaft by hand after bolts are tightened. Check if it rotates smoothly.
Check crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CRANKSHAFT END PLAY" .
Rotate crankshaft by hands after bolts are tightened. Check if it rotates smoothly.
Check the crankshaft side clearance.
Install rear oil seal to rear oil seal retainer.
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch outer circumference of oil seal.
● Install new rear oil seal in the direction shown.
●
L
●
●
●
8.
M
SEM715A
Revision: October 2004
EM-81
K
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
●
●
Tap until flattened with the front edge of the rear oil seal
retainer using suitable tool.
Fit the rear oil seal until it is level with the rear end surface of
rear oil seal retainer.
PBIC0097E
9.
Install rear oil seal retainer.
● Apply liquid gasket thoroughly to rear oil seal retainer as
shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
● Apply new engine oil on lips of rear oil seal. Do not touch.
SBIA0391E
10. Install the piston to the connecting rod.
a. Install the snap ring to the grooves of the piston rear side.
● Insert it fully into the groove to install.
b. Install the piston to the connecting rod.
● Heat piston until piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excess force [approx. 60° to 70 C° (140°
to 158 °F)]. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and the connecting rod.
● Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the
oil holes and cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown.
c. Install the snap ring to the grooves of the piston front side.
● Insert it fully into the groove to install.
● After installing, make sure connecting rod moves smoothly.
KBIA2534E
11. Install piston rings.
CAUTION:
Do not damage piston.
● Position each ring with the gap as shown, referring to the piston front mark.
● Install the second ring with the stamped surface facing
upward.
Stamped mark
Second ring
: 2N
PBIC0100E
Revision: October 2004
EM-82
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and
connecting rod cap.
● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil
to the bearing surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back
surface, but thoroughly clean it.
● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing stopper protrusion with the cutout of the connecting rod to install.
● Check that the oil holes on the connecting rod and those on
the corresponding bearing are aligned.
A
EM
C
PBIC0266E
D
13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft
using Tool.
Tool number
●
●
●
●
: EM03470000 (J-8037)
E
Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting
rod to be installed onto bottom dead center.
Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and
crankshaft pin.
Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install.
WBIA0626E
Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting
rod big end.
F
G
H
I
14. Install the connecting rod cap.
● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting
rod with those on the cylinder cap to install.
J
K
L
KBIA2536E
15. Tighten connecting rod bolts using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
Connecting rod bolts
Step 1
Step 2
●
●
●
: 19.6 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
: 90° clockwise
Apply engine oil to threads and seats of connecting rod bolts.
After tightening bolts, make sure the crankshaft rotates
smoothly.
Check connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" .
Revision: October 2004
M
EM-83
WBIA0627E
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
16. Install knock sensor.
CAUTION:
If knock sensor is dropped, replace it with a new one.
● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder
block mating surface and the back surface of knock sensor.
● Install it with its connector facing the center of the cylinder
block side.
● Do not tighten knock sensor bolts while holding connector.
● Make sure knock sensor does not interfere with other parts.
KBIA2493E
●
Position the sub-harness as shown before installing intake
manifold.
KBIA2549E
17. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
18. Remove engine assembly from engine stand.
19. Install drive plate.
● Align dowel pin of crankshaft rear end with pin holes of each
parts to install.
KBIA2494E
●
●
Install drive plate, reinforcement plate and pilot converter (if
not installed in step 4) as shown.
Face chamfered or rounded edge side to crankshaft.
KBIA2537E
Revision: October 2004
EM-84
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
How to Select Piston and Bearing
EBS00KMZ
A
DESCRIPTION
Connecting points
Between cylinder block to
crankshaft
Connecting parts
Selection items
Main bearing grade (bearing
thickness)
Main bearing
Selection methods
Determined by match of cylinder block bearing housing
grade (Housing inside diameter) and crankshaft journal
grade (journal outside diameter)
Between crankshaft to connecting rod
Connecting rod bearing
Connecting rod bearing grade
(bearing thickness)
Connecting rod bearing grade
= crankshaft pin grade (pin
diameter). No grade exists for
inside diameter of connecting
rod large end.
Between cylinder block to piston
Piston and piston pin assembly.
The piston is available together
with piston pin as an assembly.
Piston grade (piston diameter)
Piston grade = cylinder bore
grade (diameter of bore)
*Between piston to connecting
rod
—
—
C
D
E
F
—
*For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod.
(Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference.
●
The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition.
This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
●
For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the
measurement with the values of each selection table.
●
For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the
selective fitting parts, refer to the text.
HOW TO SELECT PISTON
Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used:
●
EM
G
H
I
J
Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of cylinder
block, and select the piston of the same grade.
K
L
M
KBIA2495E
KBIA2496E
When Cylinder Block is Reused
1.
Measure the cylinder block bore diameter.
Revision: October 2004
EM-85
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
2.
Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the “Cylinder bore diameter” of the piston selection table. Use oversized piston if clearance of standard grade piston is outside the
specified value.
Piston Selection Table
Unit: mm (in)
Grade number (Mark)
1
2
3
Cylinder bore diameter
98.000-98.010 (3.8583-3.8587)
98.010-98.020 (3.8587-3.8590)
93.020-98.030 (3.8590-3.8594)
Piston diameter
97.980-97.990 (3.8575-3.8579)
97.990-98.000 (3.8579-3.8583)
98.000-98.010 (3.8583-3.8587)
CAUTION:
Oversize must be used in all cylinders when using oversized parts.
Piston oversize (Service)
: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
NOTE:
●
The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.
●
The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts,
no grades can be selected (Only 0 grade is available.).
●
Hone cylinder to obtain specified clearance between piston and cylinder bore when using an oversized
piston. Be sure to use the same oversized piston rings.
HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING
When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used
1.
Apply the big end inside diameter grade stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the “Connecting Rod Bearing
Selection Table”.
KBIA2536E
2.
3.
4.
Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front
side to the column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table”.
Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”.
Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing
Grade Table" to select.
PBIC0110E
When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused
1.
2.
3.
Measure dimensions of the big end inside diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft
pin individually.
Apply the measured dimension to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”.
The following steps are the same as in “When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used”. Refer to
.EM-86, "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-86
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
A
EM
C
D
E
F
KBIA2538E
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table.
Grade number
G
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Identification color (mark)
0
1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592)
Black
1
1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593)
Brown
2
1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594)
Green
3
1.509 - 1.512 (0.0594 - 0.0595)
Yellow
H
I
Undersize Bearings Usage Guide
●
●
When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use undersize (US) bearings.
When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with bearing installed, and grind the
crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
Bearing undersize table
J
K
Unit: mm (in)
Undersize
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
1.627 - 1.635 (0.0641 - 0.0644)
L
CAUTION:
In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep
the fillet R (All crankshaft pins).
Fillet R
M
: 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
PBIC0111E
Revision: October 2004
EM-87
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used
1.
Apply main bearing housing grade on bottom face of cylinder
block to row in "Main Bearings Selection Table".
KBIA2495E
2.
Apply journal diameter grade on crankshaft front to column in
"Main Bearings Selection Table".
PBIC0110E
3.
4.
Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Main Bearings Selection Table".
CAUTION:
● Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection
lists for each part.
● No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not confuse them.
Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select.
NOTE:
● Grade list applies to all journals.
● Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower.
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused
1.
2.
3.
Measure inside diameter of cylinder block main bearings housing and outside diameter of crankshaft journal.
Apply measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table".
The following steps are same as in “When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used”. Refer to EM-88
.
Revision: October 2004
EM-88
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal)
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0608E
Revision: October 2004
EM-89
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal)
WBIA0609E
Revision: October 2004
EM-90
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals)
Unit: mm (in)
Grade number
UPR/LWR
Thickness
Identification color
0
—
2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979)
Black
1
—
2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980)
Brown
2
—
2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981)
Green
3
—
2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982)
Yellow
4
—
2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983)
Blue
5
—
2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985)
Pink
6
—
2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986)
Purple
7
—
2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987)
White
8
—
2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988)
Red
UPR
2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979)
Black
LWR
2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980)
Brown
UPR
2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980)
Brown
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
78
LWR
2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981)
Green
UPR
2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981)
Green
LWR
2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982)
Yellow
UPR
2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982)
Yellow
LWR
2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983)
Blue
UPR
2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983)
Blue
LWR
2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985)
Pink
UPR
2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985)
Pink
LWR
2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986)
Purple
UPR
2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986)
Purple
LWR
2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987)
White
UPR
2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987)
White
LWR
2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988)
Red
A
Remarks
EM
Grade is the same for upper
and lower bearings.
C
D
E
F
G
Grade and color are different
for upper and lower bearings.
H
I
J
K
Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide
●
●
Use undersize (US) bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification.
When using undersize (US) bearing, measure inside diameter of bearing installed and grind journal until
oil clearance falls within specification.
Bearing undersize table
Unit: mm (in)
Undersize
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
2.618 - 2.626 (0.1031 - 0.1034)
CAUTION:
Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in
order to use undersized bearing (All journals).
Fillet R
: 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
PBIC0111E
Revision: October 2004
EM-91
2005 Titan
L
M
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection After Disassembly
EBS00KN0
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY
●
Move the crankshaft fully forward and backward and measure
the clearance between the thrust bearings and crankshaft arm
using suitable tool.
Standard
Limit
●
: 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in)
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the thrust
bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the repair limit,
replace crankshaft also.
PBIC0114E
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE
●
Measure side clearance between the connecting rod and crankshaft arm using suitable tool.
Standard
Limit
●
: 0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 in)
: 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the connecting rod bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the repair
limit, replace the crankshaft also.
PBIC0115E
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
Piston Pin Hole Diameter
●
Measure diameter of piston pin hole using suitable tool.
Standard
: 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in)
PBIC0116E
Piston Pin Diameter
●
Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool.
Standard
: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
PBIC0117E
Revision: October 2004
EM-92
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Piston and Piston Pin Clearance
A
(Piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) – (Piston pin
diameter)
Standard
●
●
●
●
: 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in)
If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both of piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each part.
Refer to piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin
assembly. Refer to EM-85, "HOW TO SELECT PISTON" .
Refer to connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod. Refer to EM-86, "HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING
ROD BEARING" .
NOTE:
The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston
pin) grade are provided only for the parts installed at the plant.
For service parts, no grades can be selected. (Only 0 grade is
available.)
Refer to EM-95, "Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small
End)" for the values for each grade at the plant.
EM
C
KBIA2496E
D
E
F
G
KBIA2536E
H
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
●
Measure side clearance of the piston ring and piston ring groove
using suitable tool.
Standard:
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Limit:
Top ring
2nd ring
●
I
: 0.035 - 0.085 mm (0.0014 - 0.0033 in)
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
: 0.015 - 0.050 mm (0.0006 - 0.0020 in)
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
J
K
SEM024AA
If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly.
M
PISTON RING END GAP
●
●
L
Check if diameter of cylinder bore is within specification. Refer
to EM-97, "Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance" .
Insert piston ring into the middle of cylinder using piston, and
measure gap.
Standard:
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Limit:
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Revision: October 2004
: 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in)
: 0.25 - 0.40 mm (0.0098 - 0.0157 in)
: 0.20 - 0.60 mm (0.0079 - 0.0236 in)
PBIC0118E
: 0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
: 0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
: 0.96 mm (0.0378 in)
EM-93
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
●
If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring.
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
●
Check connecting rod alignment using suitable tool.
Limit:
Bend
: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length
Torsion
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length
SEM003F
●
If measurement exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod
assembly.
SEM038F
CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END)
●
Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing
installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified
torque, measure the connecting rod large end inside diameter.
Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" .
Standard
●
: 57.000 - 57.013 mm (2.2441 - 2.2446 in)
If measurement exceeds the standard, replace the connecting
rod.
PBIC1641E
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)
Connecting Rod Inside Diameter (Small End)
●
Measure inside diameter of bushing using suitable tool.
Standard
: 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 - 0.8664 in)
PBIC0120E
Revision: October 2004
EM-94
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Piston Pin Diameter
●
A
Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool.
Standard
: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
EM
C
PBIC0117E
D
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)
(Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Piston pin diameter)
Standard
●
●
E
: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in)
F
If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly.
If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the Table
for Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding
to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used.
Refer to EM-85, "HOW TO SELECT PISTON" .
G
KBIA2536E
Factory installed parts grading:
●
Only grade 0 is available.
H
I
Unit: mm (in)
Grade
0
Connecting rod bushing inside diameter
22.000 - 22.006
(0.8661 - 0.8664)
Piston pin diameter
21.989 - 21.995
(0.8657 - 0.8659)
Piston pin hole diameter
21.993 - 21.999
(0.8659 - 0.8661)
J
K
KBIA2496E
L
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION
●
●
Remove any oil, scale, gasket, sealant and carbon deposits from the cylinder block surface.
CAUTION:
Do not allow any debris to enter the oil or coolant passages.
Measure block upper face for distortion in six directions as
shown.
Standard
Limit
●
M
: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If measurement exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block.
SEM123C
Revision: October 2004
EM-95
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
MAIN BEARING HOUSING INSIDE DIAMETER
●
●
Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed,
and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-80,
"ASSEMBLY" .
Measure the inside diameter of the main bearing housing.
Standard
●
: 68.944 - 68.968 mm (2.7143 - 2.7153 in)
If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly.
NOTE:
These components must be replaced as a single unit, because
they were processed together.
PBIC1643E
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
Cylinder Bore Diameter
●
Measure the cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper at six
different points on each cylinder (″X″ and ″Y″ directions at ″A″,
″B″ and ″C″).
NOTE:
When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at
"B" position.
PBIC0123E
Standard diameter:
98.000 - 98.030 mm (3.8583 - 3.8594 in)
Wear limit:
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
Out-of-round (Difference between ″X″ and ″Y″):
Limit: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Taper limit (Difference between ″A″ and ″C″):
Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
PBIC0124E
●
●
If measured value exceeds the repair limit, or if there are
scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone or bore the inner wall.
An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston, hone the cylinder so that the clearance
between the piston and cylinder satisfies the standard.
Piston oversize Grade No. 0 (Service)
●
: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston rings.
Piston Skirt Diameter
●
Measure piston skirt diameter using suitable tool.
Standard
: 97. 980 - 98. 010 mm (3.8575 - 3.8587 in)
PBIC0125E
Revision: October 2004
EM-96
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
●
Measure point “H”
Distance from the top
A
: 39 mm (1.54 in)
EM
C
KBIA2545E
Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance
●
Calculate by diameter of piston skirt and cylinder bore diameter (direction X, position B).
(Clearance) = (Cylinder bore diameter) – (piston skirt diameter)
Standard
Limit
●
D
E
: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in)
: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
F
If calculation exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly.
Reboring Cylinder Bore
1.
Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”.
G
Rebored size calculation: D = A +B - C
where,
D: Bored diameter
A: Piston diameter as measured
B: Piston - to - bore clearance (standard value)
C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
2.
3.
4.
5.
H
I
Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted
in final assembly.
Cut cylinder bores.
NOTE:
● When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
● Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at one time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at
a time.
Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance.
Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.
NOTE:
Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
●
Measure diameter of crankshaft journals.
Standard
●
: 63.940 - 63.964 mm (2.5173 - 2.5183 in)
If measurement is out of standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use the undersize bearing. Refer to EM-99, "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-97
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
CYLINDER BLOCK
CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER
●
Measure diameter of crankshaft pin using suitable tool.
Standard
●
: 53.956 - 53.974 mm (2.1243 - 2.1250 in)
If measurement is out of standard, measure the connecting rod
bearing oil clearance. Then use the undersize bearing. Refer to
EM-98, "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" .
PBIC0127E
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT
●
●
●
Measure dimensions at four different points as shown on each
journal and pin.
Out-of-roundness is indicated by the difference in dimension
between ″X″ and ″Y″ at ″A″ and ″B″.
Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between ″A″
and ″B″ at ″X″ and ″Y″.
Limit
Out-of-round (Difference between ″X″ and ″Y″)
: 0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
Taper (Difference between ″A″ and ″B″)
: 0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
●
●
PBIC1685E
If measured value exceeds the standard, correct or replace crankshaft.
If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected journal or pin. Then select the main bearing or connecting rod bearing. Refer to EM-99, "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" or EM-98, "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" .
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
●
●
●
●
Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on
both ends of the crankshaft.
Measure at No. 3 journal using suitable tool.
While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer.
Half of the movement shows the runout.
Limit
●
: Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
If measurement exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft.
PBIC0129E
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method of Measurement
●
Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the cap. Tighten the connecting rod bolt to
the specified torque. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: October 2004
EM-98
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
Measure the inside diameter of connecting rod bearing.
(Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod bearing) –
(Crankshaft pin diameter)
Standard
Limit
●
A
: 0.020 - 0.039 mm (0.0008 - 0.0015 in)
: 0.055 mm (0.0022 in)
EM
If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized bearing. Refer to EM-88, "HOW
TO SELECT MAIN BEARING" .
C
PBIC1642E
D
Method of Using Plastigage
●
●
●
●
Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and surfaces of each
bearing completely.
Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and
place it in the crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and
connecting rod bearing cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts
to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed.
Remove the connecting rod bearing cap and bearings. Measure
KBIA2550E
the plastigage width using the scale on the plastigage bag.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that described in
“Method of Measurement”.
Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing
cap. Measure the main bearing inside diameter with the bearing
cap bolt tightened to the specified torque. Refer to EM-80,
"ASSEMBLY" .
(Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of main bearing) – (Crankshaft journal diameter)
Standard:
No. 1 and 5 journals
: 0.001 - 0.011 mm (0.00004 - 0.0004 in)
No. 2, 3 and 4 journals
: 0.007 - 0.017 mm (0.0003 - 0.0007 in)
Limit:
No.1 and 5 journals
: 0.021 mm (0.0008 in)
No. 2, 3 and 4 journals
: 0.027 mm (0.0011 in)
●
G
H
J
K
L
PBIC1644E
If the measured value exceeds the repair limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing inside
diameter and crankshaft journal diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Refer to EM-88 .
Revision: October 2004
F
I
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method of Measurement
●
E
EM-99
2005 Titan
M
CYLINDER BLOCK
Method of Using Plastigage
●
●
●
●
Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and surfaces of
each bearing completely.
Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and
place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing
cap, and tighten the main bearing bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed.
Remove bearing cap and bearings. Measure plastigage width
using the scale on the plastigage bag.
KBIA2551E
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that described in
“Method of Measurement”.
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING
●
When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
Standard
●
: There must be crush height
If the standard is not met, replace main bearings.
SEM502G
CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING
●
When the connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being
tightened to the specified torque with connecting rod bearings
installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-80,
"ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure.
Standard
●
: There must be crush height.
If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings.
PBIC1646E
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT DIAMETER
●
●
●
●
Check for bolts (M9 and M12) installed from lower side using the
following procedure.
NOTE:
● Side bolt (M10) is outside the target.
● Figure shows M12 bolt.
Measure bolt diameter ″d1″ from tip of the bolt to dimension "a".
Measure bolt diameter ″d2″ from the dimension between tip of
the bolt and dimension ″b″ as base station to dimension ″c″.
NOTE:
If a narrower part in the threads is determined by visual check,
measure ″d2″ at that point.
Calculate the difference between ″d1″ and ″d2″.
Revision: October 2004
EM-100
KBIA2497E
2005 Titan
CYLINDER BLOCK
M9 bolt
Dimension “a”
Dimension “b”
Dimension “c”
Limit
A
: 9 mm (0.35 in)
: 15 mm (0.59 in)
: 20 mm (0.79 in)
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
EM
M12 bolt
Dimension “a”
Dimension “b”
Dimension “c”
Limit
●
C
: 12 mm (0.47 in)
: 55 mm (2.17 in)
: 20 mm (0.79 in)
: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
D
Replace applicable bolts if outside the limit.
E
CONNECTING ROD BOLT DIAMETER
●
●
Measure diameter ″d″ at position shown.
When “d” is out of specifications (when it becomes thinner),
replace bolt with a new one.
Limit
F
: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) or less.
G
H
SBIA0286E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-101
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
PFP:00030
EBS00KN1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
V-8
3
cm (cu in)
5,552 (338.80)
mm (in)
98 x 92 (3.86 x 3.62)
Bore and stroke
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Compression
Number of piston rings
2
Oil
1
Number of main bearings
5
Compression ratio
9.8
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/rpm
Standard
1,520 (15.5, 220)/200
Minimum
1,324 (13.5, 192)/200
Differential limit between cylinders
98 (1.0, 14)/300
Cylinder number
SEM957C
Valve timing
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
232
230
2
48
3
49
DRIVE BELTS
Tension of drive belts
Auto adjustment by auto tensioner
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Surface distortion
Revision: October 2004
Limit
Exhaust manifold
EM-102
0.3 (0.012)
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
Unit: mm (in)
Items
A
Standard
Camshaft runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.02 (0.0008)
EM
C
D
E
SEM671
Camshaft cam height “A”
44.465 - 44.655 (1.7506 - 1.7581)
Intake & Exhaust
Cam wear limit
0.02 (0.0008)
Outside diameter of camshaft journal
25.953 - 25.970 (1.0218 - 1.0224)
Camshaft bracket inside diameter
26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244)
Camshaft journal clearance
0.030 - 0.068 (0.0012 - 0.0027)
Camshaft end play
0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074)
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*]
F
G
H
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
*: Total indicator reading
Valve Lifter
I
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Standard
Valve lifter diameter
33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381)
Valve lifter hole diameter
34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392)
Clearance between lifter and lifter guide
J
0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015)
K
Valve Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Hot*
Cold
Intake
0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013)
Exhaust
0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017)
0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015)
L
M
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Revision: October 2004
EM-103
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Available Valve Lifter
Unit: mm (in)
Identification (stamped) Mark
Thickness
SEM758G
Revision: October 2004
N788
7.88 (0.3102)
N790
7.90 (0.3110)
N792
7.92 (0.3118)
N794
7.94 (0.3126)
N796
7.96 (0.3134)
N798
7.98 (0.3142)
N800
8.00 (0.3150)
N802
8.02 (03.157)
N804
8.04 (0.3165)
N806
8.06 (0.3173)
N808
8.08 (0.3181)
N810
8.10 (0.3189)
N812
8.12 (0.3197)
N814
8.14 (0.3205)
N816
8.16 (0.3213)
N818
8.18 (0.3220)
N820
8.20 (0.3228)
N822
8.22 (0.3236)
N824
8.24 (0.3244)
N826
8.26 (0.3252)
N828
8.28 (0.3260)
N830
8.30 (0.3268)
N832
8.32 (0.3276)
N834
8.34 (0.3283)
N836
8.36 (0.3291)
EM-104
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
CYLINDER HEAD
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Head surface distortion
Standard
Limit
0.03 (0.0012)
0.1 (0.004)
Nominal cylinder head height “H”
A
EM
126.3 (4.97)
C
D
E
KBIA2554E
F
Valve Dimensions
Unit: mm (in)
G
H
I
J
SEM188
Standard model
Valve head diameter “D”
Valve length “L”
Valve stem diameter “d”
FFV model
Intake
37.0 - 37.3 (1.457 - 1.469)
Exhaust
31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240)
K
Intake
96.21- 96.71 (3.7878 - 3.8075)
Exhaust
93.74 - 94.24 (3.6905 - 3.7102)
Intake
5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354)
Exhaust
5.955 - 5.970 (0.2344 - 0.2350)
L
M
Intake
Valve seat angle “α”
Intake
Valve margin “T”
Revision: October 2004
45°15′ - 45°45′
Exhaust
1.1 (0.043)
Exhaust
0.6 (0.024)
1.3 (0.051)
EM-105
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Valve Guide
Unit: mm (in)
KBIA2555E
Items
Outside diameter
Valve guide
Inside diameter (Finished size)
Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter
Standard
Oversize [0.2 (0.008)] (service)
10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950)
10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029)
6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369)
—
9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935)
10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014)
Interference fit of valve guide
0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Items
Stem to guide clearance
Projection length “L”
Standard
Limit
Intake
0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021)
0.08 (0.0031)
Exhaust
0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025)
0.09 (0.0035)
Intake
12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504)
Exhaust
12.5 - 12.9 (0.492 - 0.508)
Valve Seat
Unit: mm (in)
KBIA2541E
Items
Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D)
Valve seat interference fit
Valve seat diameter (d)
Standard
Oversize [0.5 (0.020)] (Service)
Intake
38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967)
38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164)
Exhaust
32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683)
32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880)
Intake
0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044)
Exhaust
0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038)
Intake
38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005)
38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202)
Exhaust
32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715)
32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912)
Valve Spring
Free height
Pressure
mm (in)
N (kg, lb) at height mm (in)
Out-of-square
50.58 (1.9913)
Installation
165.8 - 187.0 (16.9 - 19.1, 37 - 42) at 37.0 (1.457)
Valve open
314.8 - 355.0 (32.1 - 36.2, 71 - 80) at 28.2 (1.110)
mm (in)
Revision: October 2004
Less than 2.2 (0.087)
EM-106
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
D
PBIC0123E
Surface flatness
Standard
0.03 (0.0012)
LImit
Main bearing housing inside diameter
Cylinder bore diameter
Standard
Standard
68.944 - 68.968 (2.7143 - 2.7153)
Grade No. 1
98.000 - 98.010 (3.8583 - 3.8587)
Grade No. 2
98.010 - 98.020 (3.8587 - 3.8590)
Grade No. 3
98.020 - 98.030 (3.8590 - 3.8594)
Wear limit
Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y)
G
0.015 (0.0006)
Limit
H
0.010 (0.0004)
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
Main journal inside diameter grade (Without bearing)
Revision: October 2004
F
0.20 (0.0079)
Taper (Difference between A and C)
Difference in bore diameter between cylinders
E
0.1 (0.004)
Standard
EM-107
68.944 - 68.945 (2.7143 - 2.7144)
68.945 - 68.946 (2.7144 - 2.7144)
68.946 - 68.947 (2.7144 - 2.7144)
68.947 - 68.948 (2.7144 - 2.7145)
68.948 - 68.949 (2.7145 - 2.7145)
68.949 - 68.950 (2.7145 - 2.7146)
68.950 - 68.951 (2.7146 - 2.7146)
68.951 - 68.952 (2.7146 - 2.7146)
68.952 - 68.953 (2.7146 - 2.7147)
68.953 - 68.954 (2.7147 - 2.7147)
68.954 - 68.955 (2.7147 - 2.7148)
68.955 - 68.956 (2.7148 - 2.7148)
68.956 - 68.957 (2.7148 - 2.7148)
68.957 - 68.958 (2.7148 - 2.7149)
68.958 - 68.959 (2.7149 - 2.7149)
68.959 - 68.960 (2.7149 - 2.7150)
68.960 - 68.961 (2.7150 - 2.7150)
68.961 - 68.962 (2.7150 - 2.7150)
68.962 - 68.963 (2.7150 - 2.7151)
68.963 - 68.964 (2.7151 - 2.7151)
68.964 - 68.965 (2.7151 - 2.7152)
68.965 - 68.966 (2.7152 - 2.7152)
68.966 - 68.967 (2.7152 - 2.7152)
68.967 - 68.968 (2.7152 - 2.7153)
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN
Available Piston
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0188E
Items
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Standard
Limit
Grade No. 1
97.980 - 97.990 (3.8575 - 3.8579)
—
Grade No. 2
97.990 - 98.000 (3.8579 - 3.8583)
—
Grade No. 3
98.000 - 98.010 (3.8583 - 3.8587)
—
Grade No. 0
(Service)
98.180 - 98.210 (3.8653 - 3.8665)
0.20 (0.0079)
39 (1.54)
—
“H” dimension
Piston pin hole diameter
Grade No. 0
Piston to cylinder bore clearance
21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661)
0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012)
—
0.08 (0.0031)
Piston Ring
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Side clearance
End gap
Standard
Limit
Top
0.035 - 0.085 (0.0014 - 0.0033)
0.11 (0.0043)
2nd
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
0.10 (0.0039)
Oil ring
0.015 - 0.050 (0.0006 - 0.0020)
—
Top
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
0.56 (0.0220)
2nd
0.25 - 0.40 (0.0098 - 0.0157)
0.52 (0.0205)
Oil ring
0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236)
0.96 (0.0378)
Piston Pin
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Piston pin diameter
Standard
Grade No. 0
21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659)
Piston to piston pin clearance
0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002)
Connecting rod bushing oil clearance
0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007)
Revision: October 2004
EM-108
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
CONNECTING ROD
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Standard
Limit
154.45 - 154.55 (6.08 - 6.08)
—
Bend [per 100 (3.94)]
—
0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)]
—
0.30 (0.0118)
22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664)
—
57.000 - 57.013 (2.2441 - 2.2446)
—
0.20 - 0.40 (0.0079 - 0.0157)
0.40 (0.0157)
Center distance
Connecting rod bushing inside diameter*
(small end)
Grade No. 0
Connecting rod big end inside diameter (without bearing)
Side clearance
Connecting rod bearing housing
Grade No. 0
Grade No. 1
Grade No. 2
Grade No. 3
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 5
Grade No. 6
Grade No. 7
Grade No. 8
Grade No. 9
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
A
EM
C
57.000 - 57.001 (2.2441 - 2.2441)
57.001 - 57.002 (2.2441 - 2.2442)
57.002 - 57.003 (2.2442 - 2.2442)
57.003 - 57.004 (2.2442 - 2.2443)
57.004 - 57.005 (2.2443 - 2.2443)
57.005 - 57.006 (2.2443 - 2.2443)
57.006 - 57.007 (2.2443 - 2.2444)
57.007 - 57.008 (2.2444 - 2.2444)
57.008 - 57.009 (2.2444 - 2.2444)
57.009 - 57.010 (2.2444 - 2.2445)
57.010 - 57.011 (2.2445 - 2.2445)
57.011 - 57.012 (2.2445 - 2.2446)
57.012 - 57.013 (2.2446 - 2.2446)
D
E
F
G
*: After installing in connecting rod
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-109
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
CRANKSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC1686E
SEM645
Main journal dia. “Dm” grade (No. 1 and 5)
Main journal dia. “Dm” grade (No. 2, 3 and 4)
Revision: October 2004
Standard
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 1
Grade No. 2
Grade No. 3
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 5
Grade No. 6
Grade No. 7
Grade No. 9
63.963 - 63.964 (2.5182 - 2.5183)
63.962 - 63.963 (2.5182 - 2.5182)
63.961 - 63.962 (2.5181 - 2.5182)
63.960 - 63.961 (2.5181 - 2.5181)
63.959 - 63.960 (2.5181 - 2.5181)
63.958 - 63.959 (2.5180 - 2.5181)
63.957 - 63.958 (2.5180 - 2.5180)
63.956 - 63.957 (2.5179 - 2.5180)
63.955 - 63.956 (2.5179 - 2.5179)
63.954 - 63.955 (2.5179 - 2.5179)
63.953 - 63.954 (2.5178 - 2.5179)
63.952 - 63.953 (2.5178 - 2.5178)
63.951 - 63.952 (2.5178 - 2.5178)
63.950 - 63.951 (2.5177 - 2.5178)
63.949 - 63.950 (2.5177 - 2.5177)
63.948 - 63.949 (2.5176 - 2.5177)
63.947 - 63.948 (2.5176 - 2.5176)
63.946 - 63.947 (2.5176 - 2.5176)
63.945 - 63.946 (2.5175 - 2.5176)
63.944 - 63.945 (2.5175 - 2.5175)
63.943 - 63.944 (2.5174 - 2.5175)
63.942 - 63.943 (2.5174 - 2.5174)
63.941 - 63.942 (2.5174 - 2.5174)
63.940 - 63.941 (2.5173 - 2.5174)
Standard
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 1
Grade No. 2
63.963 - 63.964 (2.5182 - 2.5183)
63.962 - 63.963 (2.5182 - 2.5182)
63.961 - 63.962 (2.5181 - 2.5182)
63.960 - 63.961 (2.5181 - 2.5181)
63.959 - 63.960 (2.5181 - 2.5181)
63.958 - 63.959 (2.5180 - 2.5181)
63.957 - 63.958 (2.5180 - 2.5180)
63.956 - 63.957 (2.5179 - 2.5180)
63.955 - 63.956 (2.5179 - 2.5179)
63.954 - 63.955 (2.5179 - 2.5179)
63.953 - 63.954 (2.5178 - 2.5179)
63.952 - 63.953 (2.5178 - 2.5178)
63.951 - 63.952 (2.5178 - 2.5178)
63.950 - 63.951 (2.5177 - 2.5178)
63.949 - 63.950 (2.5177 - 2.5177)
63.948 - 63.949 (2.5176 - 2.5177)
63.947 - 63.948 (2.5176 - 2.5176)
63.946 - 63.947 (2.5176 - 2.5176)
63.945 - 63.946 (2.5175 - 2.5176)
63.944 - 63.945 (2.5175 - 2.5175)
63.943 - 63.944 (2.5174 - 2.5175)
63.942 - 63.943 (2.5174 - 2.5174)
63.941 - 63.942 (2.5174 - 2.5174)
63.940 - 63.941 (2.5173 - 2.5174)
EM-110
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Pin journal dia. “Dp”
Standard
Grade No. 0
53.968 - 53.974 (2.1247 - 2.1250)
Grade No. 1
53.962 - 53.968 (2.1245 - 2.1247)
Grade No. 2
53.956 - 53.962 (2.1243 - 2.1245)
Center distance “r”
45.96 - 46.04 (1.8094 - 1.8126)
Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y)
Taper (Difference between A and B)
EM
0.002 (0.0001)
Limit
Runout [TIR*]
Crankshaft end play
A
0.002 (0.0001)
Less than 0.05 (0.002)
Standard
Limit
C
0.10 - 0.26 (0.0039 - 0.0102)
0.30 (0.0118)
D
*: Total indicator reading
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-111
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
MAIN BEARING
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0189E
Grade number
UPR/LWR
Thickness
Identification color
0
—
2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979)
Black
1
—
2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980)
Brown
2
—
2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981)
Green
3
—
2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982)
Yellow
4
—
2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983)
Blue
5
—
2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985)
Pink
6
—
2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986)
Purple
7
—
2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987)
White
8
—
2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988)
Red
UPR
2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979)
Black
LWR
2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980)
Brown
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
78
UPR
2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980)
Brown
LWR
2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981)
Green
UPR
2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981)
Green
LWR
2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982)
Yellow
UPR
2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982)
Yellow
LWR
2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983)
Blue
UPR
2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983)
Blue
LWR
2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985)
Pink
UPR
2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985)
Pink
LWR
2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986)
Purple
UPR
2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986)
Purple
LWR
2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987)
White
UPR
2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987)
White
LWR
2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988)
Red
Remarks
Grade is the same for upper
and lower bearings
Grade is different for upper
and lower bearings.
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Undersize
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
2.618 - 2.626 (0.1031 - 0.1034)
Revision: October 2004
EM-112
Main journal diameter
Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Main Bearing Oil Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Main bearing oil clearance
Standard
Limit
No.1 and 5
0.001 - 0.011 (0.00004 - 0.0004)
0.021 (0.0008)
No.2, 3 and 4
0.007 - 0.017 (0.0003 - 0.0007)
0.027 (0.0011)
A
EM
Connecting Rod Bearing
Grade number
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Identification color (mark)
0
1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592)
Black
1
1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593)
Brown
2
1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594)
Green
3
1.509 - 1.512 (0.0594 - 0.0595)
Yellow
C
D
E
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Undersize
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
1.627 - 1.635 (0.0641 - 0.0644)
Crank pin journal diameter “Dp”
Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
F
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Items
Connecting rod bearing oil clearance
Standard
Limit
0.020 - 0.039 (0.0008 - 0.0015)
0.055 (0.0022)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EM-113
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
EM-114
2005 Titan
B ENGINE
A
EX
SECTION
EXHAUST SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Special Service Tool ................................................. 2
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
EXHAUST SYSTEM ................................................... 3
Checking Exhaust System ........................................ 3
Removal and Installation .......................................... 3
REMOVAL ............................................................. 4
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 4
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .................. 4
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
EX-1
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EBS00L3L
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors:
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
S-NT636
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00L3M
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new heated oxygen sensor
(Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below):
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm, 0.71 in) dia. for zirconia oxygen sensor
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm, 0.47 in) dia. for titania oxygen sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads
AEM489
Power tool
Loosening nuts and bolts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
EX-2
2005 Titan
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Checking Exhaust System
PFP:20100
A
EBS00L3N
Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage or deterioration.
●
If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
EX
C
D
SMA211A
Removal and Installation
E
EBS00L3O
Exhaust System
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0541E
1.
Tailpipe hanger bracket
2.
Tailpipe
3.
Gasket
4.
Main muffler
5.
Right front exhaust tube
6.
Ring gasket
7.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
8.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
9.
Left front exhaust tube
10. Center exhaust tube
11. Muffler hanger bracket front
12. Muffler hanger bracket rear
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
●
Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the
engine stops.
●
Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
Revision: October 2004
EX-3
2005 Titan
EXHAUST SYSTEM
REMOVAL
Remove exhaust system components using power tool.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
●
Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using Tool.
Tool number
A
: — (J-43897-18)
B
: — (J-43897-12)
●
●
●
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new one.
Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on
the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them.
Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side. Check
each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
Revision: October 2004
EX-4
2005 Titan
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
A
B
SECTION
FRONT AXLE
C
FAX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
WHEEL HUB .............................................................. 5
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 5
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ......................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
REMOVAL ............................................................. 5
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 6
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 6
DRIVE SHAFT ............................................................. 7
Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .................. 9
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 10
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 13
Wheel Bearing ........................................................ 13
Drive Shaft .............................................................. 13
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FAX-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
PFP:00001
EDS001Q6
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing the wheel hub and drive shafts.
●
Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
●
Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
●
Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the component parts.
●
Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean
cover must be placed over parts.
●
Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
●
Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with a suitable solvent which shall be
removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Revision: October 2004
FAX-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS001Q7
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST29020001
(J-24319-01)
Gear arm puller
B
Removing ball joint for steering knuckle
a: 34 mm (1.34 in)
b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in)
C
FAX
NT694
E
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001Q8
Tool name
Description
Power tools
Removing bolts and nuts
F
G
PBIC0190E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FAX-3
2005 Titan
Symptom
AXLE
Revision: October 2004
FAX-7
Improper installation, looseness
×
×
Shake
×
FAX-4
Noise
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BRAKES
STEERING
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Refer to AXLE in this chart.
ROAD WHEEL
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart.
DRIVE SHAFT
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
TIRES
×
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
DIFFERENTIAL
×
SUSPENSION
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
AXLE
FAX-5
Wheel bearing damage
—
FAX-9
Imbalance
Noise, Vibration
Parts interference
FAX-9
DRIVE SHAFT
Joint sliding resistance
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
FAX-7
Reference page
Excessive joint angle
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EDS001Q9
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×: Applicable
2005 Titan
WHEEL HUB
WHEEL HUB
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
PFP:43202
A
EDS001QA
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear,
damage) are normal.
B
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
●
Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there
is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play limit
●
C
: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or
other irregular conditions. If there are any irregular conditions,
replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
FAX
E
SMA571A
F
Removal and Installation
EDS001QB
G
H
I
J
K
L
WDIA0043E
1.
Disc rotor
2.
Wheel hub and bearing assembly
4.
Splash guard
5.
Steering knuckle
3.
Wheel stud
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
For 4X4 models, remove engine undercover using power tool.
Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition
brake caliper aside with wire. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
NOTE:
Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Revision: October 2004
FAX-5
2005 Titan
WHEEL HUB
4.
Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing
assembly, then remove disc rotor.
WDIA0044E
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For 4X4 models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. Refer to FAX7, "Removal and Installation" .
For 4X4 models, remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and
Installation" .
Remove ABS sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" .
● Inspect the ABS sensor O-ring, replace the ABS sensor assembly if damaged.
● Clean the ABS sensor hole and mounting surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop
rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
● Apply a coat of suitable grease to the ABS sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION:
Do not pull on the ABS sensor harness.
Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly,
position the disc rotor according to alignment mark.
(When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-27, "DISC
ROTOR INSPECTION" .)
●
When installing wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
WDIA0044E
Revision: October 2004
FAX-6
2005 Titan
DRIVE SHAFT
DRIVE SHAFT
Removal and Installation
PFP:39100
A
EDS001QC
B
C
FAX
WDIA0041E
1.
Cotter pin
2.
Drive shaft nut
3.
E
Drive shaft
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove engine under cover using power tool.
Remove ABS sensor harness from mount on knuckle.
CAUTION:
Do not pull on ABS sensor harness.
Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with
wire. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
NOTE:
Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Remove coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to FSU-9, "Removal and Installation" .
Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using
Tool.
● Support lower link with jack.
Tool number
7.
8.
9.
●
●
Remove cotter pin, then remove drive shaft nut.
Remove drive shaft mounting bolts from front final drive.
Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
CAUTION:
● When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive
angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint.
H
I
J
K
L
LEIA0095E
M
Move joint up, down, left, right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness.
Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage.
If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and
repair or replace as necessary.
RAA0030D
Revision: October 2004
G
: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
F
FAX-7
2005 Titan
DRIVE SHAFT
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Tighten wheel nuts to specification. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001QD
WDIA0054E
1. Sliding joint housing
2. Snap ring
3. Ball cage, steel ball, inner race assembly
4. Stopper ring
5. Boot band
6. Boot
7. Drive shaft
8. Circlip
9. Joint sub-assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side
1.
2.
3.
Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the vise and the
drive shaft.
Remove the boot bands.
Remove the stopper ring with a flat-bladed screwdriver as
shown, and pull the housing off.
SRA249A
Revision: October 2004
FAX-8
2005 Titan
DRIVE SHAFT
4.
Remove the snap ring, then remove the ball cage, steel ball,
inner race assembly from the drive shaft.
A
B
C
SFA514A
FAX
5.
6.
Remove the boot from the drive shaft.
Remove any old grease on the housing using paper towels.
E
Wheel Side
1.
2.
3.
Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the vise and the
drive shaft.
Remove the boot bands, then remove the boot from the joint sub-assembly.
Screw a suitable drive shaft puller 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into
the threaded part of the joint sub-assembly. Pull the joint subassembly off of the drive shaft as shown.
NOTE:
Align the sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove the joint
sub-assembly by pulling directly.
CAUTION:
● If the joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more attempts, replace the drive shaft and joint subassembly as a set.
F
G
H
I
J
SDIA0606E
4.
5.
6.
Remove the boot from the drive shaft.
Remove the circlip from the drive shaft.
While rotating the ball cage, remove any old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper towels.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Drive Shaft
●
L
Replace the drive shaft if there is any runout, cracking, or other damage.
M
Joint Sub-assembly
●
●
●
Check for any rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.
Clean any foreign material from inside the joint sub-assembly.
Check for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures.
CAUTION:
If any defective conditions are found in the joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire
joint sub-assembly.
Sliding Joint Side Housing
●
●
●
Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear on the ball rolling surface.
Check for any damage to the drive shaft screws.
Check for any deformation of the boot installation components.
Ball Cage
●
K
Check the sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures.
Revision: October 2004
FAX-9
2005 Titan
DRIVE SHAFT
Steel Ball
●
Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear.
Inner Race
●
●
Check the ball sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures.
Check for any damage to the serrated part.
CAUTION:
If any defective conditions are found, install a new housing, ball cage, steel ball, and inner race as
a set.
ASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side
1.
Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the
boot band and boot to drive shaft.
NOTE:
Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for
assembly.
SFA800
2.
Remove the tape wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft.
3.
Install the ball cage, steel ball, and inner race assembly on the
drive shaft, and secure them tightly using the snap ring.
NOTE:
Discard the old snap ring and use a new one for assembly.
SDIA1125E
4.
Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or
equivalent, onto the housing (indicated by * marks), and install it
onto shaft. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
Grease capacity
: 130 − 150 g (4.58 − 5.29 oz)
RAC0678D
5.
6.
Install the stopper ring onto the housing.
After installation, pull on the shaft to check engagement between the sliding joint and the stopper ring.
Revision: October 2004
FAX-10
2005 Titan
DRIVE SHAFT
7.
8.
Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by * marks)
as shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by *
marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove
all grease from surfaces.
Check that the boot installation length “L” is the length indicated
below. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver or similar tool into smaller side
of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length “L ”
: 145 mm (5.71 in)
A
B
C
WDIA0045E
FAX
CAUTION:
●
The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified value.
●
Do not to touch the tip of the screwdriver to the inside of the boot.
9. Secure the big and small ends of the boot with the new boot
bands as shown.
NOTE:
Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly.
E
F
G
H
SFA395
10. After installing the sliding joint housing to the drive shaft, rotate the boot to check that the boot is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned correctly, reposition the boot and secure the boot using a new
boot band.
Wheel Side
1.
I
J
Insert the Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint
sub-assembly serration hole until the grease begins to ooze
from the ball groove and serration hole. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . After inserting the
grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off the grease that has oozed
out.
K
L
M
SDIA1127E
2.
3.
Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the
boot band and boot onto the shaft. Do not damage the boot.
NOTE:
Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for
assembly.
Remove the protective tape wound around the serrated part of
the drive shaft.
SFA800
Revision: October 2004
FAX-11
2005 Titan
DRIVE SHAFT
4.
5.
Attach the circlip to the drive shaft. The circlip must fit securely
into the drive shaft groove. Attach the nut to the joint sub-assembly.
Use a soft hammer to press-fit the circlip.
NOTE:
Discard the old circlip and use a new one for assembly.
Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or
equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly and the large end of the
boot. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Grease capacity
6.
7.
: 145 − 165 g (5.11 − 5.82 oz)
Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by the *
marks) as shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated
by the * marks) of the drive shaft and joint sub-assembly,
the boot may come off. Remove all grease from the drive
shaft surfaces.
Check that the boot installation length “L” is the specified length.
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver or similar tool into the smaller side of
the boot. Bleed the air from the boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length “L”
RAC0049D
WDIA0046E
: 168.4 mm (6.63 in)
CAUTION:
The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified length.
● Do not contact inside surface of boot with the tip of the screwdriver.
Secure the big and small ends of the boot using new boot bands
as shown.
NOTE:
Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly.
●
8.
SFA395
9.
After installing the joint sub-assembly to the drive shaft, rotate the boot to check that it is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned correctly, reposition the boot and secure the boot using a new boot
band.
Revision: October 2004
FAX-12
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing
Axial end play
PFP:00030
A
EDS001QE
0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
B
Drive Shaft
EDS001QF
C
FAX
E
WDIA0055E
Drive shaft joint type
Final drive side
Rzeppa
Wheel side
Rzeppa
Nissan Genuine Grease or
equivalent
Quality
Grease
Capacity
Boot length
Final drive side
130 - 150 g (4.58 - 5.29 oz)
Wheel side
145 - 165 g (5.11 - 5.82 oz)
Final drive side "L1"
F
G
H
145 mm (5.71 in)
Wheel side "L2 "
168.4 mm (6.63 in)
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FAX-13
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
FAX-14
2005 Titan
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
A
B
SECTION
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
C
FFD
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 6
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 7
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 7
FRONT OIL SEAL ...................................................... 8
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
SIDE OIL SEALS ...................................................... 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
REAR COVER GASKET ...........................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY .......................... 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Components ........................................................... 14
M205 2-PINION ................................................... 14
Pre-Inspection ........................................................ 15
Revision: October 2004
TOTAL PRELOAD ............................................... 15
DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH... 15
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT ....................... 15
TOOTH CONTACT .............................................. 15
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 16
REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR AND DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 16
REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY ........ 18
DIFFERENTIAL CASE DISASSEMBLY .............. 20
INSPECTION ...................................................... 21
ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ......... 22
Adjustment of Drive Gear and Drive Pinion Assembly ........................................................................... 24
DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER
SELECTION ........................................................ 24
PINION GEAR HEIGHT ...................................... 25
TOOTH CONTACT .............................................. 26
INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY... 27
INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 32
General Specifications ............................................ 32
Side Gear Adjustment ............................................ 32
Total Preload Adjustment ........................................ 32
Drive Pinion Height Adjustment .............................. 33
FFD-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
PFP:00001
EDS001OA
CAUTION:
●
Before starting diagnosis of the vehicle, understand symptoms well. Perform correct and systematic operations.
●
Check for the correct installation status prior removal or disassembly. When matching marks are
required, be sure they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to.
●
Carry out an overhaul in a clean work place, Using a dust proof room is recommended.
●
Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the
exterior the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly.
●
Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and abnormal wear. If a
malfunction is detected, replace it with a new one.
●
Normally replace lock pins, oil seals, and bearings with new ones every times they are removed.
●
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, observe it.
●
Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow them dry.
●
Be careful not to damage the sliding surfaces and mating surface.
●
When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil, and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces.
●
Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components.
●
Avoid using cotton gloves or a shop cloth to prevent entering of lint.
●
During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and new differential gear oil, Vaseline,
or multi-purpose grease, as specified for each vehicle, when necessary.
Revision: October 2004
FFD-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS002GR
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
ST35271000
( — )
Drift
Installing drive pinion front bearing outer
race.
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
C
ZZA0702D
KV38100500
(J-25273)
Drift
FFD
E
Installing front oil seal.
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
F
G
ZZA0811D
ST30021000
( – )
Puller
●
Removing side bearing inner race.
●
Removing drive pinion rear bearing inner
race.
H
I
ZZA0700D
KV38100300
(J-25523)
Drift
Installing side bearing inner race.
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
c: 32mm (1.26 in) dia.
J
K
ZZA1046D
ST30901000
( – )
Drift
Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race.
A: 79mm (3.11 in) dia.
B: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
C: 35.2 mm (1.39 in) dia.
L
M
SDIA0217J
KV40104810
( – )
Drift
Installing drive pinion front bearing outer
race.
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
b: 55 mm (2.17 in) dia.
ZZA1003D
KV38102200
( — )
Drift
Installing front oil seal.
a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.
b: 55.3 mm (2.18 in) dia.
NT660
Revision: October 2004
FFD-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST33081000
( – )
Adapter
Removing and installing side bearing inner
race.
a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia.
b: 33.5 mm (1.32 in) dia.
ZZA1000D
KV38108300
(J-44195)
Companion flange wrench
Removing and installing drive pinion nut.
NT771
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge
1. GG91030000
(J-25765)
Torque wrench
2. HT62940000
( – )
Socket adapter (1/2″)
3. HT62900000
( – )
Socket adapter (3/8″)
Inspecting drive pinion bearing preload and
total preload
NT124
—
(8144)
Pinion block
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2599E
—
(6740)
Cone
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2601E
—
(6741)
Screw
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2602E
—
(6739)
Pinion height lock
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2603E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-4
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
TBD
Arbor disc
Adjusting pinion gear height
A
B
C
SDIA2605E
—
(D-115-2)
Scooter block
Adjusting pinion gear height
FFD
E
SDIA2604E
—
(D-115-3)
Arbor
F
Adjusting pinion gear height
G
H
SDIA2606E
—
(C-4040)
Installer
Installing drive pinion rear bearing inner race.
I
J
SDIA2607E
KV40105230
( – )
Drift
Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race.
a: 92 mm(3.62 in) dia.
b: 85.5 mm (3.37 in) dia.
K
L
ZZA0898D
—
(SP8P)
Slide hammer
●
Removing front oil seal
●
Removing side oil seal
●
Removing drive pinion front bearing outer
race
●
Removing drive pinion rear bearing outer
race
M
LDIA0133E
—
(C-4171)
Handle
LDIA0134E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-5
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(D-103)
Remover
Removing drive pinion front bearing outer
race
LDIA0135E
—
(C-4307)
Remover
Removing drive pinion rear bearing outer
race
LDIA0135E
Commercial Service Tools
EDS002GS
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-6
2005 Titan
×
FFD-15
×
Tooth surfaces worn
FFD-21
×
Incorrect backlash
FFD-15
×
Companion flange excessive runout
FFD-15
×
Improper gear oil
×
Propeller shaft
MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil"
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
Road wheel
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
Drive shaft
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
Brakes
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
Steering
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PFP:00003
Tires
EDS001OD
×
2005 Titan
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" and FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Axle and suspension
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
×
Improper gear contact
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Noise
FFD-7
FFD-21
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Reference page
Differential
Possible cause and suspected parts
Symptom
×: Applicable
Revision: October 2004
Rough gear tooth
A
B
C
FFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:38189
EDS002GT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "REMOVAL" .
Separate the RH and LH drive shafts from the front final drive. Refer to FAX-7, "REMOVAL" .
Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool.
Tool number
4.
NOTE:
Record the preload measurement.
Loosen drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange
using Tool.
Tool number
5.
: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
: KV38108300 (J44195)
Remove companion flange using a suitable puller.
BDIA0001E
6.
Place a small hole in seal case, using a suitable punch or drill.
LDIA0129E
7.
Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal.
Tool number
: SP8P
LDIA0130E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-8
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
INSTALLATION
1.
A
Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of front oil
seal. Press front oil seal into gear carrier using suitable tool.
B
C
BDIA0003E
2.
Install companion flange and a new drive pinion nut. Tighten
drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange using Tool
until there is no end play.
Tool number
3.
E
: KV38108300 (J44195)
F
Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal
resistance using Tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
G
NOTE:
● Drive pinion bearing preload should equal the measurement
BDIA0001E
taken during removal plus an additional 0.56 N·m (0.06 Kg-m,
5 in-lb).
● If drive pinion bearing preload is low, tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 N·m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb) increments
until drive pinion preload is met.
CAUTION:
Never loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion bearing preload. Do not exceed specified preload. If preload torque is exceed a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If maximum
torque is reached prior to reaching the required preload, the collapsible spacer may have been
damaged. Replace the collapsible spacer.
Drive pinion nut
4.
5.
FFD
: 298 - 678 N·m (31 - 69Kg-m, 220 - 500 ft-lb)
H
I
J
K
Attach the RH and LH drive shafts. Refer to FAX-8, "INSTALLATION" .
Install the front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "INSTALLATION" .
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FFD-9
2005 Titan
SIDE OIL SEALS
SIDE OIL SEALS
Removal and Installation
PFP:33142
EDS002GU
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove front final drive. Refer to FFD-12, "REMOVAL" .
Remove differential side shaft and side flange using suitable
tool.
BDIA0006E
3.
Place a small hole in seal case, using suitable punch or drill.
LDIA0129E
4.
Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal.
Tool number
5.
: SP8P
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LDIA0130E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-10
2005 Titan
REAR COVER GASKET
REAR COVER GASKET
Removal and Installation
PFP:38320
A
EDS002GV
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove front final drive. Refer to FFD-12, "REMOVAL" .
Drain gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" .
Remove rear cover.
B
C
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply 3.2mm (0.126 in) bead of sealant to the rear cover.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV sealant or equivalent. Refer to. GI45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
FFD
E
F
BDIA0004E
2.
3.
4.
Install rear cover and tighten rear cover bolts in the order as
shown FFD-14, "Components" .
Fill final drive with recommended gear oil. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Install front final drive. Refer to FFD-13, "INSTALLATION" .
G
H
I
BDIA0005E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FFD-11
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:38500
EDS002GW
BDIA0007E
1.
Gear carrier assembly
2.
Front crosemember
3.
Skid plate (if equipped)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "REMOVAL" .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft.
Separate LH and RH drive shafts from front final drive. Refer to FAX-7, "REMOVAL" .
Remove front cross member.
Disconnect the vent hose.
Revision: October 2004
FFD-12
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
5.
Support the front final drive with suitable jack and remove the
front final drive bolts. Carefully remove front final drive.
A
B
C
BDIA0008E
FFD
INSTALLATION
1.
Install front final drive assembly.
Front final drive bolts
2.
3.
4.
5.
: 182.5 N·m (19 Kg-m, 135 ft-lb)
E
Connect the vent hose.
Install the front cross member.
Install LH and RH drive shaft. Refer to FAX-8, "INSTALLATION"
.
Install front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "INSTALLATION" .
F
G
BDIA0008E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FFD-13
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Components
EDS002GX
M205 2-PINION
SDIA2219E
1.
Side bearing adjust nut
2.
Side bearing
3.
Side gear thrust washer
4.
Side gear
5.
Lock pin
6.
Pinion mate thrust washer
7.
Pinion mate gear
8.
Pinion mate shaft
9.
Drive pinion
10. Drive pinion height adjusting washer 11. Drive pinion rear bearing
12. Collapsible spacer
13. Breather tube
15. Dust shield
14. Differential side flange
16. Circular clip
17. Side oil seal
18. Drive pinion front bearing
19. Front oil seal
20. Companion flange
21. Drive pinion nut
22. Drain plug
23. Differential side shaft
24. Axle shaft bearing
25. Extension tube
26. O-ring
27. Gear carrier
28. Plate
29. Differential case
30. Drive gear
31. Side bearing cap
32. Filler plug
33. Rear cover
Revision: October 2004
FFD-14
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
34. Bushing
37
35. Bearing
36
Screw
A
Dowel pin
Pre-Inspection
EDS002GY
B
Before disassembling the front final drive, drain off oil from final drive assembly and remove the rear cover.
Then perform the following inspection.
TOTAL PRELOAD
1.
2.
C
Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing
rollers.
Check total preload using Tool.
Tool number
Total preload
(with oil seal)
FFD
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
E
: 2.98 - 4.76 N·m (0.31 - 0.48 Kg-m,
27 - 42 in-lb)
F
SDIA2220E
DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH
G
Check drive gear to drive pinion backlash using a dial gauge at several points.
Drive gear to drive pinion backlash:
0.13 - 0.18 mm(0.0051 - 0.0071 in)
H
I
J
SDIA2221E
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT
1.
2.
Fit a dial gauge onto the companion flange face (inner side of
the propeller shaft bolt holes).
Rotate the companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
L
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
Fit a test indicator to the inner side of the companion flange
(socket diameter).
Rotate the companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
5.
K
M
: 0.13 mm (0.0051 in)
SDIA0569E
If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure
below to adjust.
Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion gear by 90° step,
and search for the point where the runout is the minimum.
If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace the companion
flange.
If the runout value still outside of the limit after the companion flange has been replaced, check pinion
bearing and drive pinion assembly.
TOOTH CONTACT
Check tooth contact. Refer to FFD-15, "TOOTH CONTACT" .
Revision: October 2004
FFD-15
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS002GZ
REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR AND DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY
1.
Remove differential side shaft with a soft hammer.
SDIA2223E
2.
Remove differential side flange with a soft hammer.
SDIA2224E
3.
Remove extension tube and O-ring.
SDIA2226E
4.
Place a small hole in seal case, using suitable punch or drill.
LDIA0129E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-16
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
5.
Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal.
Tool number
:
—
A
(SP8P)
B
C
LDIA0130E
6.
FFD
Remove rear cover from gear carrier.
E
F
G
LDIA0128E
7.
For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on one side bearing cap.
NOTE:
Bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching
marks are used to replace them in their original positions.
H
I
J
SDIA2228E
8.
K
Remove side bearing caps.
L
M
SDIA2229E
9.
Remove side bearing adjust nuts.
SDIA2230E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-17
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
10. Keep the side bearing outer races together with inner race. Do
not mix them up.
SPD919
REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Put matching marks on companion flange and drive pinion with
paint.
Loosen drive pinion nut using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38108300 (J-44195)
SDIA2232E
3.
Remove companion flange using a suitable puller.
SDIA2233E
4.
5.
Remove drive pinion (together with rear bearing inner race, collapsible spacer.)
Remove pinion front bearing inner race.
SDIA2234E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-18
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
6.
Place a small hole in case, using suitable punch or drill.
A
B
C
LDIA0129E
FFD
7.
Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal.
Tool number
:
—
(SP8P)
E
F
G
LDIA0130E
8.
Turn nose of gear carrier down. Remove drive pinion front bearing outer race using Tool. Locate driver on back edge of outer
race, then drive outer race out.
CAUTION:
Do not nick gear carrier.
Tool number
H
I
A: — (C-4171)
B: — (D-103)
J
LDIA0131E
9.
Turn nose of gear carrier up. Remove drive pinion rear bearing
outer race using Tool. Locate driver on back edge of outer race,
then drive outer race out.
CAUTION:
Do not nick gear carrier.
Tool number
A:
B:
L
— (C-4171)
— (C-4307)
M
LDIA0132E
10. Remove drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion
height adjusting washer using Tool.
Tool number
: ST30021000 ( —
)
SDIA2236E
Revision: October 2004
K
FFD-19
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
DIFFERENTIAL CASE DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove side bearing inner race.
To prevent damage to bearing, engage puller jaws in groove.
Tool number A
Tool number B
: ST33081000 (
: ST30021000 (
—
—
)
)
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the side bearing and drive gear,
place copper plates between these parts and vise.
● It is not necessary to remove side bearing except it is
replaced.
●
SDIA2237E
●
Be careful not to confuse left-hand and right-hand parts.
Keep bearing and bearing race for each side together.
SPD022
2.
3.
Loosen drive gear bolts in a crisscross fashion.
Tap drive gear off the differential case with a soft hammer.
● Tap evenly all around to keep the drive gear from bending.
SDIA2238E
4.
Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin using suitable punch from
drive gear side.
SPD025
Revision: October 2004
FFD-20
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
5.
Remove the pinion mate shaft.
A
B
C
SDIA0031J
FFD
6.
Turn the pinion mate gear, then remove the pinion mate gear,
pinion mate thrust washer, side gear and side gear thrust
washer from the differential case.
E
F
G
SDIA0032J
7.
H
Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion
mate gears, pinion mate shaft and thrust washers.
I
J
K
SDIA0187J
INSPECTION
●
Clean up the disassemble parts. Then, inspect if the parts are wear or damaged. If so, follow the measures below.
Content
Measures
●
If the gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine the cause and
adjust, repair, or replace as necessary.
●
If the gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction)
noticeably, replace with new gears.
●
If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or
unusual noise from the bearing, replace with new bearing assembly (as a
new set).
●
Replace with a new one if found any cracks or damage on the surface of
the tooth.
●
Replace with a new one if found any worn or chipped mark on the contact
sides of the thrust washer.
●
Replace with a new one if found that it is chipped (by friction), damaged, or
unusual worn.
●
Oil seals must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled.
Drive gear and drive pinion
Bearing
Side gear thrust washer and pinion mate thrust washer
Side gear and pinion mate thrust washer
Oil seal
Revision: October 2004
L
FFD-21
2005 Titan
M
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Content
Differential case
Measures
●
Replace with a new one if found any wear or cracks on the contact sides of
the differential case.
●
Replace with a new one if found any chipped marks (about 0.10 mm,
0.0039 in) or other damage on the contact sides of the lips of the companion flange.
Companion flange
ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE
Thrust Washer Selection
1.
2.
Apply gear oil to contact surfaces of each gear, thrust washers
and differential case.
Install the removed thrust washer or same thickness washer to
side gear.
SDIA0193J
3.
Install the side gears, thrust washers, pinion mate gears and
thrust washers into differential case.
SDIA2025E
4.
Install pinion mate shaft to differential case so that it meets lock
pin holes.
SDIA0195J
5.
Adjust clearance between rear face of side gear and thrust
washer by selecting side gear thrust washer. Refer to FFD-32,
"Side Gear Adjustment" .
Use two feeler gauges to prevent leaning of side gear as showing figure.
Clearance between side gear thrust washer and
differential case
: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) or less
SPD828
Revision: October 2004
FFD-22
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
6.
Make sure lock pin is flush with case, using a suitable punch.
A
B
C
SPD030
FFD
7.
8.
Apply gear oil to gear tooth surfaces and thrust surfaces and
check to see they turn properly.
Install differential case assembly on drive gear.
● Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern, lightly tapping bolt head
with a hammer.
E
F
G
SPD322
9.
H
Place differential case on drive gear. Tighten bolts in a crisscross fashion.
I
J
K
SDIA2239E
10. Press-fit side bearing inner race on differential case using Tools.
Tool number A
Tool number B
L
: KV38100300 (J-25523)
: ST33081000 ( — )
M
SDIA2240E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-23
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Adjustment of Drive Gear and Drive Pinion Assembly
EDS002H0
DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER SELECTION
●
Drive gear and pinions are supplied in matched sets only.
Matching numbers on both pinion and drive gear are etched for
verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers
of each pinion gear and drive gear before proceeding with
assembly.
SDIA2241E
●
●
●
The mounting distance from the centerline of the drive gear to the back face of the pinion gear for the
Model 205 axle assembly is 103.5 mm (4.0748 inches).
On the button end of each pinion, there is etched a plus (+) number, a minus (-) number, or a zero (0),
which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This dimension is controlled by a
selective shim between the inner pinion bearing race and pinion gear.
For example: If a pinion is etched m+8 (+3), it would require 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) less shim than a pinion
etched “0”. This means decreasing shim thickness; increases the mounting distance of the pinion to 103.6
mm (4.0778 inches). If a pinion is etched m+8 (-3), it would require adding 0.08mm (0.003 inch) more to
the shim than would be required if the pinion were etched “0”. By adding 0.08 mm (0.003 inch), the mounting distance of the pinion was decreased to 103.4 mm (4.0718 inches) which is just what m-8 (a-3) etching indicated.
To change the pinion adjustment, use different shims which come in different thickness.
Use the following tables as a guide for selecting the correct shim thickness to add or subtract from the old
shim.
NEW PINION MARKING (ENGLISH 0.000)
OLD PINION
MARKING
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+4
+0.008
+0.007
+0.006
+0.005
+0.004
+0.003
+0.002
+0.001
0
+3
+0.007
+0.006
+0.005
+0.004
+0.003
+0.002
+0.001
0
-0.001
+2
+0.006
+0.005
+0.004
+0.003
+0.002
+0.001
0
-0.001
-0.002
+1
+0.005
+0.004
+0.003
+0.002
+0.001
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
0
+0.004
+0.003
+0.002
+0.001
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
-1
+0.003
+0.002
+0.001
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
-0.005
-2
+0.002
+0.001
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
-0.005
-0.006
-3
+0.001
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
-0.005
-0.006
-0.007
-4
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
-0.005
-0.006
-0.007
-0.008
NEW PINION MARKING (METRIC 0.00)
OLD PINION
MARKING
-10
-8
-5
-3
0
+3
+5
+8
+10
+10
+0.20
+0.18
+0.15
+0.13
+0.10
+0.08
+0.05
+0.02
0
+8
+0.18
+0.15
+0.13
+0.10
+0.08
+0.05
+0.02
0
-0.02
+5
+0.15
+0.13
+0.10
+0.08
+0.05
+0.02
0
-0.02
-0.05
+3
+0.13
+0.10
+0.08
+0.05
+0.02
0
-0.02
-0.05
-0.08
0
+0.10
+0.08
+0.05
+0.02
0
-0.02
-0.05
-0.08
-0.10
-3
+0.08
+0.05
+0.02
0
-0.02
-0.05
-0.08
-0.10
-0.13
-5
+0.05
+0.02
0
-0.02
-0.05
-0.08
-0.10
-0.13
-0.15
-8
+0.02
0
-0.02
-0.05
-0.08
-0.10
-0.13
-0.15
-0.18
-10
0
-0.02
-0.05
-0.08
-0.10
-0.13
-0.15
-0.18
-0.20
Revision: October 2004
FFD-24
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
PINION GEAR HEIGHT
1.
2.
A
Make sure all parts are clean and that the bearings are well
lubricated.
Assemble the pinion gear bearings into the differential shim
selector tool.
Tool number A
Tool number B
Tool number C
:
:
:
—
—
—
B
(8144)
(6740)
(6741)
C
SDIA2242E
3.
Install pinion bearing inner race and pinion height adjusting
washer to gear carrier using Tool as shown.
FFD
E
F
G
SDIA2243E
H
4.
Turn the assembly several times to seat the bearings.
I
J
K
SDIA2244E
5.
L
Measure the turning torque.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Turning torque
specification
: 2.98 - 4.76 N·m (0.31 - 0.48 Kg-m,
27 - 42 in-lb)
M
SDIA2245E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-25
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
6.
Tighten side-bearing cap to the specified torque installing Tools
as shown in the figure.
Tool number A
Tool number B
Tool number C
Tool number D
:
:
:
:
—
—
—
—
(6739)
(D-115-2)
TBD
(D-115-3)
SDIA2246E
7.
Put scooter block on pinion height block. Make sure that dial
gauge is level adjusting pressure with a hand. Dial gauge indicates “0”.
SDIA2247E
8.
9.
Slide dial gauge along arbor. Record the maximum.
Adjust pinion height adjusting washer so that the maximum will be “0”.
TOOTH CONTACT
Checking gear tooth contact pattern is necessary to verify correct relationship between drive gear and drive
pinion.
Hypoid gears which are not positioned in proper arrangement may be noisy and/or have a short life. Check
gear tooth contact pattern to obtain the best contact for low noise and long life.
1. Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth.
2. Lightly apply a mixture of powdered ferric oxide and oil or the
equivalent. Apply it to 3 or 4 teeth of drive gear drive side.
SDIA2248E
3.
Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate the drive gear
in both directions.
SDIA2249E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-26
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
A
B
C
FFD
E
F
SDIA1796E
INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY
1.
G
Press-fit rear bearing outer race with Tools.
Tool number A
Tool number B
: ST30901000 ( — )
: KV40105230 ( — )
H
I
SDIA2251E
2.
J
Press-fit front bearing outer race with Tools.
Tool number A
Tool number B
K
: ST35271000 ( — )
: KV40104810 ( — )
L
M
SDIA2252E
3.
4.
Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to FFD-33,
"Drive Pinion Height Adjustment" .
Install drive pinion adjusting washer in drive pinion, and press-fit
pinion rear bearing inner race in it, using a press and Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(C - 4040)
SDIA2253E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-27
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
5.
Place pinion front bearing inner race in gear carrier.
SDIA2254E
6.
Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.
Install front oil seal, using Tools.
Tool number A
Tool number B
: KV38100500 (J-25273)
: KV38102200 ( — )
SDIA2264E
7.
Place collapsible spacer, drive pinion height adjusting washer
and drive pinion in gear carrier.
SDIA2255E
8.
Insert companion flange onto drive pinion. Tap the companion
flange with a soft hammer until fully seated.
SDIA2266E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-28
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
9.
Tighten pinion nut until total preload is within specification.
● The threaded portion of drive pinion and pinion nut should be
free from oil or grease.
Tool number
A
: KV38108300 (J-44195)
B
C
PDIA0182E
FFD
10. Tighten the pinion nut by very small degrees until the specified
preload is achieved. When checking the preload, turn the drive
pinion in both directions several times to set the bearing rollers.
Tool number
E
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Pinion bearing preload:
2.3 - 3.4 N·m (24 - 34 Kg-cm, 21 - 30 in-lb)
This procedure will have to be repeated if:
Maximum preload is achieved before the minimum pinion nut
torque is reached.
●
Minimum preload is not achieved before maximum pinion nut torque is reached.
F
G
●
SDIA2220E
H
INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Install side bearing adjust nut into gear carrier.
Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier.
I
J
K
SPD919
3.
L
Align mark on bearing cap with that on gear carrier and install
bearing cap on gear carrier.
● Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of
side bearing adjusters.
M
SDIA2258E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-29
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
4.
Tighten each side bearing adjust nuts alternately turning drive
gear.
SDIA2265E
5.
Measure backlash of drive gear and drive pinion using a dial
gauge.
Drive gear to drive pinion back lash
:0.13 - 0.18mm (0.0051 - 0.0071 in)
SDIA2221E
6.
7.
Use each adjust nut to adjust backlash.
In case of lots of backlash, loosen adjust nut A and tighten
adjust nut B. In case of less backlash, loosen adjust nut B and
tighten adjust nut A.
SDIA2262E
8.
After adjusting backlash, fix adjuster with screws and tighten
cap bolt to the specified torque. Refer to FFD-14, "Components"
.
SDIA2263E
Revision: October 2004
FFD-30
2005 Titan
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
9.
Check total preload with tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
A
Total preload
(With oil seal)
: 2.98 - 4.76 N·m (0.31 - 0.48 Kg-m,
27 - 42 in-lb)
B
C
SDIA2220E
FFD
10. Check tooth contact. Refer to FFD-26, "TOOTH CONTACT" .
11. Install rear cover. Apply liquid sealant to rear cover side and
install gear carrier.
12. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil
seal.Install side oil seal.
E
F
G
SDIA2267E
H
13. Install O-ring and extension tube.
14. Install sides haft and side flange.
I
J
K
SDIA2226E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FFD-31
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
EDS001OM
Engine
VK56E
Vehicle grade
All
M205
Front final drive
2-pinion
Gear ratio
2.937
3.357
Number of teeth (Drive gear/drive pinion)
47/16
47/14
Oil capacity (Approx.)
1.6 (3-3/8 , 2-7/8)
(US pt, lmp pt)
Side Gear Adjustment
EDS001ON
Side gear to pinion mate gear backlash (Clearance between side gear
thrust washer and differential case) mm (in)
Available side
gear thrust
washers
less than 0.20 (0.0079) or less
Thickness mm (in)
Package part number*
0.76 (0.030)
0.79 (0.031)
0.81 (0.032)
0.84 (0.033)
0.87 (0.034)
38424 8S111
0.89 (0.035)
0.91 (0.036)
0.94 (0.037)
0.97 (0.038)
0.99 (0.039)
38424 8S112
Total Preload Adjustment
Total preload N·m (Kg-m, in-lb)
EDS001OO
Gear ratio 2.937 Type
Gear ratio 3.357 type
3.09 - 4.87 (0.32 - 0.49, 28 - 43)
2.98 - 4.76 (0.31 - 0.48, 27 - 42)
Drive gear to drive pinion backlash mm (in)
Revision: October 2004
0.13 - 0.18 (0.0051 - 0.0071)
FFD-32
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Drive Pinion Height Adjustment
EDS001OP
A
Available
drive pinion
height adjusting washers
Thickness mm (in)
Package part number*
1.22 (0.048)
1.24 (0.049)
1.27 (0.050)
1.30 (0.051)
1.32 (0.052)
38154 8S111
B
C
1.35 (0.053)
1.37 (0.054)
1.40 (0.055)
1.42 (0.056)
1.45 (0.057)
38154 8S112
1.47 (0.058)
1.50 (0.059)
1.52 (0.060)
1.55 (0.061)
1.57 (0.062)
38154 8S113
FFD
E
F
1.60 (0.063)
1.63 (0.064)
1.65 (0.065)
1.68 (0.066)
1.70 (0.067)
38154 8S114
1.73 (0.068)
1.75 (0.069)
1.78 (0.070)
1.80 (0.071)
1.83 (0.072)
38154 8S115
G
H
*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FFD-33
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
FFD-34
2005 Titan
B ENGINE
A
FL
SECTION
FUEL SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Special Service Tools ............................................... 2
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 2
FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................... 3
Checking Fuel Lines ................................................. 3
General Precautions ................................................ 3
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
REMOVAL ............................................................. 6
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................. 8
FUEL TANK .............................................................. 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 14
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 15
Standard and Limit .................................................. 15
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FL-1
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EBS00L3E
The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-46536)
Fuel tank lock ring tool
Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring
LBIA0398E
Commercial Service Tool
EBS00L3F
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
FL-2
2005 Titan
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
Checking Fuel Lines
PFP:17503
A
EBS00L3G
Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
FL
C
D
SMA803A
E
General Precautions
EBS00L3H
WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following.
●
Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop.
●
Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
●
Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
–
Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in
safe area.
–
Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
–
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
●
Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones.
●
Do not kink or twist hoses when they are being installed.
●
Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp
end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end.
Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber
hose clamps.
Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MMA104A
Revision: October 2004
FL-3
2005 Titan
FUEL SYSTEM
●
●
–
–
●
●
●
After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure
the quick connectors are secure.
Ensure that the connector and resin tube do not contact
any adjacent parts.
After installing tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at
connections in the following steps.
Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch
ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections.
Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at
connections.
Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement.
If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to
EC-32, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" .
For servicing “On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery
(ORVR)” parts, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING
VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
PBIC1268E
Revision: October 2004
FL-4
2005 Titan
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:17042
A
EBS00L3I
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LBIA0420E
1.
Fuel line pump protector
2.
Lock ring
3.
Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly
4.
Fuel tank
5.
Fuel tank protector
6.
Fuel tank protector clips
7.
Fuel tank straps
8.
Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly O-ring
9.
Fuel filler hose
11.
Fuel filler hose grommet
12. Fuel filler cap
10. Fuel filler pipe
13. Fuel tank shield
Revision: October 2004
FL-5
2005 Titan
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Follow the “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" .
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates
more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel
from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as
shown, or less.
● If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure
to drain the fuel to the specified level.
a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into
the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel
from fuel filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
WBIA0390E
c.
Remove the fuel filler pipe shield.
LBIA0437E
d.
e.
Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler
hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
● As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as
shown, or less, when approximately 14 liters (3 3/4 US gal, 3
1/8 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank when it is
full.
LBIA0386E
3.
4.
5.
Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector.
Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister.
LBIA0405E
Revision: October 2004
FL-6
2005 Titan
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
6.
Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump
assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
A
FL
C
LBIA0406E
D
Disconnect the quick connector as follows:
● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
tube.
● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
E
F
G
SFE562A
H
CAUTION:
● The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs
are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
● Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
● Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from
getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
● Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or
the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer
is replaced.
● When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is
replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white
colored retainer).
I
J
K
L
M
PBIC1268E
Revision: October 2004
FL-7
2005 Titan
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
●
To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage
and contamination from foreign materials, cover the
quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as
shown.
PBIC0163E
7.
8.
Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank
with a suitable lift jack.
Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from
the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly.
LBIA0387E
9.
Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number
:
—
(J-46536)
10. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly O-ring.
CAUTION:
● Do not bend the float arm during removal.
● Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
LBIA0407E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
●
Connect the quick connector as follows:
–
Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
–
Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard.
–
After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows:
–
Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.
–
Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs
are securely connected.
PBIC1653E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for
leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system.
Revision: October 2004
FL-8
2005 Titan
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
2.
Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe
and hose connections.
A
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FL-9
2005 Titan
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
Removal and Installation
PFP:17202
EBS00L3J
LBIA0420E
1.
Fuel line pump protector
2.
Lock ring
3.
Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly
4.
Fuel tank
5.
Fuel tank protector
6.
Fuel tank protector clips
7.
Fuel tank straps
8.
Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly O-ring
9.
Fuel filler hose
11.
Fuel filler hose grommet
12. Fuel filler cap
10. Fuel filler pipe
13. Fuel tank shield
Revision: October 2004
FL-10
2005 Titan
FUEL TANK
REMOVAL
A
WARNING:
Follow the “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" .
FL
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates
more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel
from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as
C
shown, or less.
● If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure
to drain the fuel to the specified level.
D
a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into
the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel
from fuel filler pipe.
E
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
WBIA0390E
c.
Remove the fuel filler pipe shield.
F
G
H
LBIA0437E
d.
e.
Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler
hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
I
J
K
L
LBIA0386E
3.
4.
5.
M
Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector.
Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister.
LBIA0405E
Revision: October 2004
FL-11
2005 Titan
FUEL TANK
6.
Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump
assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose.
LBIA0406E
Disconnect the quick connector as follows:
● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
tube.
● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
SFE562A
CAUTION:
● The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs
are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary.
● Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
● Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from
getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
● Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or
the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer
is replaced.
● When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is
replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white
colored retainer).
PBIC1268E
Revision: October 2004
FL-12
2005 Titan
FUEL TANK
●
To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage
and contamination from foreign materials, cover the
quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as
shown.
A
FL
C
PBIC0163E
D
7.
8.
Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool.
Remove the three clips and remove the fuel tank protector at the
front of the fuel tank as necessary to transfer to the new fuel
tank.
E
F
G
LBIA0388E
H
9. Disconnect fuel filler hose at the fuel tank side.
10. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank
with a suitable lift jack.
11. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from
the vehicle.
I
J
K
LBIA0387E
L
12. If necessary, remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number
:
—
(J-46536)
M
13. If necessary, remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly. Discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly O-ring.
CAUTION:
● Do not bend the float arm during removal.
● Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
LBIA0407E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
●
Connect the quick connector as follows:
–
Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
–
Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard.
Revision: October 2004
FL-13
2005 Titan
FUEL TANK
–
–
–
After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows:
Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.
Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs
are securely connected.
PBIC1653E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose connections for
leaks while applying fuel pressure.
Start the engine and rev it above idle, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and
hose connections.
Revision: October 2004
FL-14
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
Fuel tank capacity
PFP:00030
A
EBS00L3K
105.8
(28 US gal, 23 1/4 Imp gal)
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FL-15
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
FL-16
2005 Titan
E SUSPENSION
A
B
SECTION
FRONT SUSPENSION
C
D
FSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 5
Components ............................................................. 5
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................. 6
Front Suspension Parts ............................................ 6
Front Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6
CAMBER AND CASTER ....................................... 7
TOE-IN .................................................................. 7
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ................. 9
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 9
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 9
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................. 9
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 10
STABILIZER BAR ......................................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
Revision: October 2004
UPPER LINK ............................................................. 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
LOWER LINK ............................................................ 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT... 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
Inspection ............................................................... 14
SWINGING FORCE ............................................ 14
TURNING FORCE ............................................... 14
VERTICAL END PLAY ........................................ 15
KNUCKLE ................................................................. 16
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 16
Removal and Installation ........................................ 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 18
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 19
General Specifications (Front) ................................ 19
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ................................ 19
Ball Joint ................................................................. 20
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) ............................... 20
FSU-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
EES001C9
When installing the rubber bushings, the final tightening must be done under unladen condition and with
the tires on level ground. Oil will shorten the life of the rubber bushings, so wipe off any spilled oil immediately.
Unladen condition means the fuel tank, engine coolant and lubricants are at the full specification. The
spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in their designated positions.
After installing suspension components, check the wheel alignment.
Lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new lock nuts for installation. New lock nuts are pre-oiled, do not
apply any additional lubrication.
Revision: October 2004
FSU-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EES001CA
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST29020001
(J-24319-01)
Gear arm puller
B
Removing ball joint for steering knuckle
a: 34 mm (1.34 in)
b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in)
C
D
NT694
HT72520000
(J-25730-A)
Ball joint remover
FSU
Removing tie-rod outer end
a: 33 mm (1.30 in)
b: 50 mm (1.97 in)
r: 11.5 mm (0.453 in)
F
NT546
G
Commercial Service Tools
EES001CB
Tool name
Description
Attachment wheel alignment
Measure wheel alignment
a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
d: 56 mm (2.20 in)
e: 12 mm (0.47 in)
H
I
J
NT148
Spring compressor
Removing and installing coil spring
K
L
NT717
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
M
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
FSU-3
2005 Titan
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
Revision: October 2004
×
FSU-4
×
×
×
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
STEERING
×
AXLE
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
DRIVE SHAFT
×
FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
DIFFERENTIAL
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
FSU-11
×
Stabilizer bar fatigue
Shake
FSU-6
×
Incorrect wheel alignment
×
FSU-5
×
Suspension looseness
FSU-5
Parts interference
×
FSU-9
FSU-5
Bushing or mounting deterioration
Noise
Spring fatigue
FSU-9
Shock absorber deformation,
damage or deflection
Possible Cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
FSU-5
Reference page
Improper installation, looseness
Symptom
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EES001CC
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. Repair or replace parts as necessary.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
x: Applicable
2005 Titan
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Components
PFP:54010
A
EES001CD
B
C
D
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WEIA0083E
1.
Washer
2.
Spacer
3.
Shock absorber mounting insulator
4.
Shock absorber bushing
5.
Upper seat
6.
Coil spring
7.
Dust cover
8.
Shock absorber
9.
Upper link
10. Steering knuckle
11. Cotter pin
12. Drive shaft
13. Lower link
14. Cam bolt
15. Jounce bumper
16. Cam washer
17. Stabilizer bar
18. Stabilizer bar bushing
19. Stabilizer bar mounting bracket
20. Connecting rod
Revision: October 2004
FSU-5
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Front Suspension Parts
PFP:00000
EES001CE
Check front suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear and
other damage.
●
Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play.
If looseness is noted, inspect wheel bearing end play, then
check ball joint end play. Refer to FSU-14, "Inspection" .
●
Make sure that the cotter pin is inserted (4x4).
●
Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Suspension component torque
: Refer to FSU-5,
"Components" .
SMA525A
●
●
Check shock absorber for oil leakage and other damage.
Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint
dust cover for cracks and other damage.
SFA392B
Front Wheel Alignment
EES001CF
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING:
Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE:
If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts before
making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. “Unladen conditions”
means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in
their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear.
3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to WT-4, "Inspection" .
4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" .
5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage.
6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage.
7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage.
8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to FSU-20, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)" .
● For air leveling vehicles, verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ± 10 mm (0
± 0.39 in) as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
FSU-6
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
CAMBER AND CASTER
1.
A
Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels
with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to
specification.
Camber
B
: Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment"
.
C
SRA096A
2.
If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using
the adjusting bolts in the lower links.
CAUTION:
After adjusting the camber then check the toe-in.
NOTE:
Camber changes about 3' (0.11°) minutes with each graduation
of one adjusting bolt. Refer to table below for examples of lower
link adjusting bolt effect on camber and caster.
D
FSU
F
G
WEIA0079E
H
Rear adjusting
bolt
1 In
1 Out
1 In
1 Out
0
0
1 In
1 Out
Front adjusting
bolt
1 Out
1 In
1 In
1 Out
1 In
1 Out
0
0
Camber
Degree minute
(Decimal degree)
0 (0)
0 (0)
7' (0.11°)
-7' (-0.11°)
3' (0.11°)
-3' (-0.11°)
3' (0.11°)
-3' (-0.11°)
J
Caster
Degree minute
(Decimal degree)
-14' (-0.11°)
14' (0.11°)
0 (0)
0 (0)
7' (0.11°)
-7' (-0.11°)
-7' (-0.11°)
7' (0.11°)
K
3.
I
Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
L
TOE-IN
WARNING:
●
Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
●
Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires
at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are
measuring points.
M
AFA050
Revision: October 2004
FSU-7
2005 Titan
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4.
5.
6.
Measure the distance “A” on the rear side of the front tires as
shown.
Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180°
degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION:
If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2
turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never
push the vehicle backward.
Measure the distance “B” on the front side of the front tires at the
same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as “A” – “B”.
SFA234AC
Total toe-in
7.
a.
b.
: Refer to FSU-19, "Wheel Alignment
(Unladen*1)" .
Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tierods.
Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts.
Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length “L”
c.
: Refer to PS-35, "Steering Outer
Socket and Inner Socket" .
Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Lock nut
: Refer to PS-18, "Disassembly and
Assembly" .
SFA486A
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE:
Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead
position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level.
Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH
and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right
and left, measure the turning angle.
Wheel turning angle
(full turn)
●
–
–
–
: Refer to FSU-19, "Wheel
Alignment (Unladen*1)" .
Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering
angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts
are worn or damaged.
Steering gear
Steering column
Front suspension components
If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones.
Revision: October 2004
FSU-8
SFA439BA
2005 Titan
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
PFP:56210
A
EES001CG
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove the shock absorber lower bolt using power tool.
Remove the three shock absorber upper mounting nuts using
power tool.
Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly.
● Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for
removal.
B
C
D
FSU
LEIA0093E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
The step in the shock absorber assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle.
●
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
●
When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
Disassembly and Assembly
G
EES001CH
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
H
Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing)
the piston rod lock nut as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time.
Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the
shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand.
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are
firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must
be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the
spring.
I
J
K
SSU002
Remove the piston rod lock nut.
● Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly.
L
M
SSU003
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly
●
●
●
Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
Check shock absorber for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts
Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and
replace if necessary.
Revision: October 2004
FSU-9
2005 Titan
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Coil Spring
●
●
Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Check the free spring height.
Front spring free height
4x2 : 334.5 ± 3 mm (13.2 ± 0.1 in)
4x4 : 355.5 ± 3 mm (14.0 ± 0.1 in)
ASSEMBLY
1.
When installing coil spring on shock absorber, it must be positioned as shown.
SFA508A
2.
3.
Install upper spring seat as shown in line with lower absorber
shock mount and step in lower seat.
● The step in the shock absorber assembly lower seat faces
outside of vehicle.
Tighten the shock absorber rod lock nut to specification. Refer to
FSU-5, "Components" .
● Use a new shock absorber rod lock nut for assembly.
WEIA0058E
Revision: October 2004
FSU-10
2005 Titan
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER BAR
Removal and Installation
PFP:54611
A
EES001CI
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine under cover using power tool.
Remove stabilizer bar mounting bracket bolts and connecting
rod nuts using power tool, as shown.
Remove bushings from stabilizer bar.
B
C
D
FSU
LEIA0094E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
F
Check stabilizer bar for twist and deformation. Replace if necessary.
Check rubber bushing for cracks, wear and deterioration. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
G
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FSU-11
2005 Titan
UPPER LINK
UPPER LINK
Removal and Installation
PFP:54524
EES001CJ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint.
Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using
Tool.
● Support lower link with jack.
Tool number
4.
: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
Remove fender protector.
LEIA0095E
5.
Remove upper link mounting bolts and nuts.
LEIA0096E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Upper Link
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Upper Link Ball Joint
Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
●
When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
●
After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Front
Wheel Alignment" .
Revision: October 2004
FSU-12
2005 Titan
LOWER LINK
LOWER LINK
Removal and Installation
PFP:55020
A
EES001CK
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove lower shock absorber bolt.
Remove stabilizer bar connecting rod lower nut using power tool, then separate connecting rod from lower
link. Refer to FSU-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove drive shaft, if equipped. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then
separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle.
B
C
D
FSU
F
LEIA0097E
6.
G
Remove lower link adjusting bolts and nuts, then the lower link.
H
I
J
WEIA0079E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lower Link
K
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Lower Link Bushing
L
Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
●
When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
●
After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Front
Wheel Alignment" .
Revision: October 2004
FSU-13
2005 Titan
M
UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT
UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT
Removal and Installation
PFP:40110
EES001CL
The ball joints are part of the upper and lower links. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation" (upper link),
FSU-13, "Removal and Installation" (lower link).
Inspection
●
●
●
●
EES001CM
Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the following
exists:
Ball joint stud is worn.
Ball joint is hard to swing.
Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
SWINGING FORCE
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball
joint is properly broken in.
1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool.
● Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown.
● Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown.
WEIA0076E
2.
Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification.
Swinging force “A”
Upper ball joint
: 8.1–103.2 N (0.8–10.5 kg-f,
1.8–23.2 lb-f)
Lower ball joint
: 11.4–145.5 N (1.1–14.8 kg-f,
2.5–32.7 lb-f)
SFA858A
TURNING FORCE
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball
joint is properly broken in.
Turning torque “B”
: 0.5 - 6.4 N·m (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m,
4 - 57 in-lb)
SFA858A
Revision: October 2004
FSU-14
2005 Titan
UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT
VERTICAL END PLAY
A
Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball
joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play “C”
B
: 0 mm (0 in)
C
D
SFA858A
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
FSU-15
2005 Titan
KNUCKLE
KNUCKLE
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
PFP:40014
EES001CN
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear,
damage) are within specifications. Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint" .
Removal and Installation
EES001CO
WDIA0043E
1.
Disc rotor
2.
Wheel hub and bearing assembly
4.
Splash guard
5.
Steering knuckle
3.
Wheel stud
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool.
Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with
wire. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
NOTE:
Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing
assembly, then remove disc rotor.
WDIA0044E
4.
5.
6.
Remove ABS sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not pull on ABS sensor harness.
On 4X4 models remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool.
Revision: October 2004
FSU-16
2005 Titan
KNUCKLE
7.
Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using
Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from
coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut.
A
B
C
SGIA0488E
D
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
On 4X4 models, remove drive shaft. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
Support lower link using a suitable jack.
Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint.
Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number
FSU
F
: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
G
H
LEIA0095E
14. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool. Then
remove steering knuckle from lower link ball joint.
I
J
K
L
LEIA0097E
M
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
●
Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to FSU-14, "Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
FSU-17
2005 Titan
KNUCKLE
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Refer to FSU-5, "Components" for tightening torques.
●
When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly,
align the marks.
(When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-27, "DISC
ROTOR INSPECTION" .)
●
When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
WDIA0044E
Revision: October 2004
FSU-18
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications (Front)
Suspension type
PFP:00030
A
EES001CP
Independent double wishbone coil over shock
Shock absorber type
B
Double-acting hydraulic
Stabilizer
Standard equipment
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
EES001CQ
Drive type
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
4x2
4x4
Minimum
-0° 52′ (-0.87°)
-0° 19′ (-0.32°)
Nominal
-0° 7′ (-0.12°)
0° 26′ (0.43°)
Maximum
0° 38′ (0.63°)
1° 11′ (1.18°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
2° 31′ (2.52°)
1° 37′ (1.62°)
Nominal
3° 16′ (3.27°)
2° 22′ (2.37°)
Maximum
4° 1′ (4.02°)
3° 7′ (3.12°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
13° 33′ (13.55°)
13°0′ (13.00°)
Cross camber
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Cross caster
Kingpin inclination (Reference only)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
C
D
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
SFA234AC
Minimum
1.8 mm (0.07 in)
1.8 mm (0.07 in)
Nominal
2.8 mm (0.11 in)
2.8 mm (0.11 in)
Maximum
3.8 mm (0.15 in)
3.8 mm (0.15 in)
Minimum
0° 3′ (0.05°)
0° 3′ (0.05°)
Nominal
0° 5′ (0.08°)
0° 5′ (0.08°)
Maximum
0° 7′ (0.12°)
0° 7′ (0.12°)
Inside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
34° 30′ – 38° 30′ *2
(34.50° – 38.50°)
34° 56′ – 38° 56′ *4
(34.93° – 38.93°)
Outside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
30° 58′ – 34° 58′ *3
(30.97° – 34.97°)
31° 01′ – 35° 01′ *5
(31.02° – 35.02°)
Distance (A − B)
Total toe-in
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Wheel turning angle (full
turn)
*1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: Target value 37° 30′ (37.50°)
*3: Target value 33° 58′ (33.97°)
*4: Target value 37° 56′ (37.93°)
*5: Target value 34° 01′ (34.02°)
Revision: October 2004
FSU-19
2005 Titan
K
L
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Ball Joint
EES001CR
SFA858A
WEIA0076E
Swinging force “A”
Upper ball joint
8.1 – 103.2 N (0.8 – 10.5 kg-f, 1.8 – 23.2 lb-f) *1
Lower ball joint
11.4 – 145.5 N (1.1 – 14.8 kg-f, 2.5 – 32.7 lb-f) *2
Turning torque “B”
0.5 - 6.4 N·m (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 in-lb)
Vertical end play “C”
0 mm (0 in)
*1 Measure at cotter pin hole
*2 Measure at groove
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)
EES001CS
Unit: mm (in)
LEIA0085E
Drive type
4X2
Body
Front wheelarch height
(Hf)
Rear wheelarch height
(Hr)
4X4
King Cab
Crew Cab
King Cab
Crew Cab
265/70R18
913 (35.9)
916 (36.1)
952 (37.5) *2
955 (37.6) *2
285/70R17
914 (36.0)
917 (36.1)
953 (37.5) *2
956 (37.6) *2
245/75R17
904 (35.6)
907 (35.7)
941 (37.0)
944 (37.2)
265/70R18
955 (37.6)
956 (37.6)
995 (39.2) *2
996 (39.2) *2
285/70R17
956 (37.6)
957 (37.7)
996 (39.2) *2
997 (39.3) *2
245/75R17
946 (37.2)
947 (37.3)
984 (38.7)
985 (38.8)
*1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: Includes when equipped with tow package.
Revision: October 2004
FSU-20
2005 Titan
QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
Edition: October 2004
Revision: October 2004
Publication No. SM5E-1A60U0
A GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
General Information
B ENGINE
EM
Engine Mechanical
LU
Engine Lubrication System
CO
Engine Cooling System
EC
Engine Control System
FL
Fuel System
EX
Exhaust System
ACC
Accelerator Control System
TRANSMISSION/
TRANSAXLE
AT
Automatic Transmission
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
TF
Transfer
PR
Propeller Shaft
FFD
Front Final Drive
RFD
Rear Final Drive
FAX
Front Axle
RAX
Rear Axle
FSU
Front Suspension
RSU
Rear Suspension
WT
Road Wheels & Tires
BR
Brake System
PB
Parking Brake System
BRC
Brake Control System
C
E SUSPENSION
F BRAKES
G STEERING
PS
Power Steering System
H RESTRAINTS
SB
Seat Belts
SRS
I
BODY
J AIR CONDITIONER
K ELECTRICAL
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
BL
Body, Lock & Security System
GW
Glasses, Window System & Mirrors
RF
Roof
EI
Exterior & Interior
IP
Instrument Panel
SE
Seat
AP
Adjustable Pedal
MTC
Manual Air Conditioner
SC
Starting & Charging System
LT
Lighting System
DI
Driver Information System
WW
Wiper, Washer & Horn
BCS
Body Control System
LAN
LAN System
AV
ACS
Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System
Auto Cruise Control System
PG
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
L MAINTENANCE
MA
Maintenance
M INDEX
IDX
Alphabetical Index
© 2004 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of Nissan North America, Inc., Gardena, California.
-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the
2005 NISSAN TITAN.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information
at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of
the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a
manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician
and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service
procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal
safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service
method selected.
-2
PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER!
Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals.
Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals.
Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to:
Nissan North America, Inc.
Technical Service Information
39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200
Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331
FAX: (248) 488-3910
SERVICE MANUAL:
Model:
Year:
PUBLICATION NO. (Please photocopy back cover):
VEHICLE INFORMATION VIN:
Production Date:
Please describe any issues or problems in detail:
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
Page number(s)
Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
If no, what page number(s)?
Please describe the issue or problem in detail:
Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Please comment:
What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or
repairing customer vehicles?
DATE:
DEALER:
CITY:
YOUR NAME:
DEALER NO.:
STATE/PROV./COUNTRY:
POSITION:
ADDRESS:
ZIP/POSTAL CODE:
QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN
2005
QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN
Engine Tune-Up Data
PFP:00000
ELS000YK
Engine Specifications
Cylinder arrangement
V-8
Displacement
5,552
Bore and stroke
cm3
(338.80 in3 )
98 x 92 mm (3.86 x 3.62 in)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Compression
Number of piston rings
2
Oil
1
Number of main bearings
5
Compression ratio
9.8:1
Compression pressure
Standard
1,520 kPa (15.5 kg/cm2 , 220 psi) / 200 rpm
Minimum
1,324 kPa (13.5 kg/cm2 , 192 psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between cylinders
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi) / 300 rpm
Cylinder number
SEM957C
Valve timing
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
232°
230°
2°
48°
3°
49°
Drive Belt Deflection and Tension
Tension of drive belts
Auto adjustment by auto tensioner
Make
Model
NGK
Standard model
FFV model
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
PLFR5A-11D
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
PLFR4A-11D
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
PLFR6A-11D
Gap (nominal)
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN
2005
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1 )
ELS0012F
Drive type
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
4x2
4x4
Minimum
-0° 52′ (-0.87°)
-0° 19′ (-0.32°)
Nominal
-0° 7′ (-0.12°)
0° 26′ (0.43°)
Maximum
0° 38′ (0.63°)
1° 11′ (1.18°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
2° 31′ (2.52°)
1° 37′ (1.62°)
Nominal
3° 16′ (3.27°)
2° 22′ (2.37°)
Maximum
4° 1′ (4.02°)
3° 7′ (3.12°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
13° 33′ (13.55°)
13°0′ (13.00°)
Minimum
1.8 mm (0.07 in)
1.8 mm (0.07 in)
Nominal
2.8 mm (0.11 in)
2.8 mm (0.11 in)
Maximum
3.8 mm (0.15 in)
3.8 mm (0.15 in)
Minimum
0° 3′ (0.05°)
0° 3′ (0.05°)
Nominal
0° 5′ (0.08°)
0° 5′ (0.08°)
Maximum
0° 7′ (0.12°)
Cross camber
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Cross caster
Kingpin inclination (Reference only)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
SFA234AC
Distance (A − B)
Total toe-in
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Wheel turning angle (full
turn)
0° 7′ (0.12°)
Inside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
34° 30′ – 38° 30′ *
(34.50° – 38.50°)
2
34° 56′ – 38° 56′ *4
(34.93° – 38.93°)
Outside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
30° 58′ – 34° 58′ *3
(30.97° – 34.97°)
31° 01′ – 35° 01′ *5
(31.02° – 35.02°)
*1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: Target value 37° 30′ (37.50°)
*3: Target value 33° 58′ (33.97°)
*4: Target value 37° 56′ (37.93°)
*5: Target value 34° 01′ (34.02°)
Brake
ELS000ZT
Unit: mm (in)
Front brake
Brake model
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Pad Length × width × thickness
Rear brake
320 × 26 (12.60 × 1.02)
111.0 × 73.5 × 9.5 (4.73 × 2.894 × 0.374)
Cylinder bore diameter
51 (2.01)
Brake model
AD14VE
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Pad Length × width × thickness
Cylinder bore diameter
Control valve
CLZ31VC
Valve model
320 × 14 (12.60 × 0.55)
83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.299 × 0.335)
48 (1.89)
Electric brake force distribution
QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN
2005
Brake booster
Booster model
C215T
Diaphragm diameter
215 (8.46)
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent
DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Recommended brake fluid
Disc Brake - Repair Limits
ELS000ZU
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Brake Pad
Disc rotor
CLZ31VC (Front)
AD14VE (Rear)
Repair limit thickness
1.0 (0.039)
1.0 (0.039)
Repair limit thickness
24.5 (0.965)
12.0 (0.472)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
0.015 (0.0006)
0.015 (0.0006)
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.04 (0.0016)
0.05 (0.0020)
Brake Pedal
ELS000ZV
Unit: mm (in)
182.3 − 192.3 (7.18 − 7.57)
Brake pedal height (from dash panel top surface)
Depressed pedal height [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running]
More than 90.3 (3.55)
0.74 − 1.96 (0.029 − 0.077)
Clearance between stopper rubber and the threaded end of stop lamp switch
3 − 11 (0.12 − 0.43)
Pedal play
Parking Drum Brake
ELS00111
Unit: mm (in)
Type
Drum
3.79 ± 0.21 (0.149 ± 0.008)
Standard thickness (new)
Brake lining
Wear limit thickness
0.5 (0.020)
205 ± 0.13 (8.07 ± 0.01)
Standard inner diameter (new)
Drum inner diameter (disc)
Wear limit of inner diameter
205.7 (8.10)
Refill Capacities
ELS000YO
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Metric
US measure
Imp measure
105.8
28 gal
23 1/4 gal
With oil filter change
6.2
6 1/2 qt
5 1/2 qt
Without oil filter change
5.9
6 1/4 qt
5 1/4 qt
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
7.6
8 qt
6 3/4 qt
Cooling system with reservoir at MAX level
12.2
3 1/4 gal
2 5/8 gal
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
10.6
11 1/4 qt
9 3/8 qt
Rear final drive oil
2.01
4 1/4 pt
3 1/2 pt
Transfer fluid
2.0
2 1/8 qt
1 3/4 qt
Front final drive oil
1.6
3 3/8 pt
2 7/8 pt
Power steering fluid (PSF)
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
Windshield washer fluid
4.5
1 1/4 gal
1 gal
1.54 ± 0.11 lb
1.54 ± 0.11 lb
6.8 fl oz
7.0 fl oz
Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricants
0.70 ± 0.05 kg
200 m
A GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
B
SECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Description ............................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
General Precautions ................................................ 3
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst ......................... 5
Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline
Recommended) ........................................................ 5
Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or
Engine Control System ............................................ 5
Precautions for Hoses .............................................. 5
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 5
HOSE CLAMPING ................................................ 6
Precautions for Engine Oils ...................................... 6
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ............. 6
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ................................................................... 7
Precautions for Air Conditioning ............................... 7
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................... 8
Description ............................................................... 8
Terms ....................................................................... 8
Units ......................................................................... 8
Contents ................................................................... 8
Components ............................................................. 8
SYMBOLS ............................................................. 9
How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses ............................ 9
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 10
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................11
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR
NUMBER INDICATION ........................................11
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES ............................... 13
How to Read Wiring Diagrams ............................... 14
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS ................................... 14
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - ......... 16
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 17
Abbreviations ......................................................... 22
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCI-
Revision: October 2004
DENT ......................................................................... 24
How to Check Terminal ........................................... 24
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT ............ 24
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS ...................... 24
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical
Incident ................................................................... 27
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 27
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS ........................ 27
CIRCUIT INSPECTION ....................................... 30
Control Units and Electrical Parts ........................... 35
PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 35
SMJ INSTALLATION ........................................... 36
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM .......................... 37
Description .............................................................. 37
Function and System Application ........................... 37
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement ............ 37
Checking Equipment .............................................. 37
CONSULT-II Start Procedure .................................. 38
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ... 38
INSPECTION PROCEDURE .............................. 38
LIFTING POINT ......................................................... 40
Pantograph Jack ..................................................... 40
Garage Jack and Safety Stand ............................... 40
2-Pole Lift ............................................................... 41
TOW TRUCK TOWING ............................................. 42
Tow Truck Towing ................................................... 42
4X2 MODEL ........................................................ 42
4X4 MODEL ........................................................ 43
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 43
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ... 44
Tightening Torque Table ......................................... 44
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS ............................................................... 45
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants... 45
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ............................ 46
Model Variation ....................................................... 46
Identification Number .............................................. 48
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
ARRANGEMENT ................................................ 48
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER ................................ 49
GI-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TRANSFER SERIAL NUMBER ........................... 49
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ........... 49
Dimensions ............................................................. 50
Wheels & Tires ....................................................... 50
Revision: October 2004
TERMINOLOGY ........................................................51
SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................51
GI-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Description
PFP:00001
GI
EAS001D1
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
B
EAS001D2
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
General Precautions
●
●
Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without
proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any
inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be
sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After
jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety
stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working
on the vehicle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop
them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
GI-3
L
M
SGI231
Revision: October 2004
D
EAS001D3
SGI285
●
C
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.
SEF289H
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
To prevent serious burns:
Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in
an appropriate manner.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
SGI233
prior to inspection or assembly.
Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new
ones.
Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.
Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs.
When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leaks.
PBIC0190E
●
Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.
SGI234
Revision: October 2004
GI-4
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness GI
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections.
B
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst
EAS001D4
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To
prevent this, follow the instructions.
●
Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
●
When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when
necessary.
●
Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to
the catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three
way catalyst.
Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended)
EAS001D5
C
D
E
F
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91).
G
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel
other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could
also affect the warranty coverage validity.
Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System
●
●
●
EAS001D6
I
Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for
the multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to
injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air
flow sensor.
J
K
SGI787
Precautions for Hoses
M
To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose
with tapered tool or screwdriver.
SMA019D
Revision: October 2004
L
EAS001D7
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
●
H
GI-5
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure of hose insertion length and clamp orientation. (If tube is equipped with hose
stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against
hose stopper.)
SMA020D
HOSE CLAMPING
●
If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original
position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is
a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber
hose at that position.
SMA021D
●
●
Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
After installing leaf spring clamps, apply force to them in the
direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around.
SMA022D
Precautions for Engine Oils
EAS001D8
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
Revision: October 2004
GI-6
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
GI
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal
facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources.
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Precautions for Air Conditioning
B
C
EAS001D9
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" for specific instructions.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-7
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Description
PFP:00008
EAS001DA
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”.
Terms
●
EAS001DB
The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal
injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information.
Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment.
Units
●
EAS001DC
The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit),
and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
“Example”
Outer Socket Lock Nut
: 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
Contents
EAS001DD
●
ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and
page you are searching for.
●
A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g.
) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find
the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab.
THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks
of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations.
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.
●
●
●
●
Components
●
EAS001DE
THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (See the following) and contain tightening torques,
lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the
appropriate PARTS CATALOG .
Revision: October 2004
GI-8
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration
is used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
SAIA0399E
SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
J
DESCRIPTION
Tightening torque
The tightening torque specifications of bolts and nuts may be presented as either a range or a standard tightening
torque.
K
Should be lubricated with grease. Unless otherwise indicated, use recommended multi-purpose grease.
L
Should be lubricated with oil.
Sealing point
M
Checking point
Always replace after every disassembly.
Apply petroleum jelly.
P
Apply ATF.
Select with proper thickness.
Adjustment is required.
How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses
EAS001DF
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the
“Work Flow”.
Revision: October 2004
GI-9
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and harness connectors.
Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in EL
section for identification of harness connectors.
When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure
that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were.
DESCRIPTION
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the
“Work Flow”.
2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG
section for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure
that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were.
Revision: October 2004
GI-10
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SAIA0256E
1.
2.
Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group.
The meaning of are as follows:
K
L
a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V
b. Voltage
: Approximately 0V → Less than 1V
3.
4.
Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem,
familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below.
Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown
in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Revision: October 2004
GI-11
2005 Titan
M
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
●
●
●
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness
wire color.
Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
AGI070
Revision: October 2004
GI-12
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SGI144A
I
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
Symbol
Symbol explanation
Symbol
Check after disconnecting the connector to be measured.
Symbol explanation
J
Procedure with Generic Scan Tool
(GST, OBD-II scan tool)
K
Check after connecting the connector
to be measured.
Procedure without CONSULT-II or
GST
L
Insert key into ignition switch.
A/C switch is OFF.
M
Revision: October 2004
Remove key from ignition switch.
A/C switch is ON.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
REC switch is ON.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
REC switch is OFF.
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
DEF switch is ON.
GI-13
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Symbol
Symbol explanation
Symbol
Symbol explanation
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC
position.
VENT switch is ON.
Turn ignition switch from ACC to OFF
position.
Fan switch is ON. (At any position
except for OFF position)
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON
position.
Fan switch is OFF.
Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF
position.
Apply positive voltage from battery
with fuse directly to components.
Do not start engine, or check with
engine stopped.
Drive vehicle.
Start engine, or check with engine running.
Disconnect battery negative cable.
Apply parking brake.
Depress brake pedal.
Release parking brake.
Release brake pedal.
Check after engine is warmed up sufficiently.
Depress accelerator pedal.
Voltage should be measured with a
voltmeter.
Release accelerator pedal.
Circuit resistance should be measured
with an ohmmeter.
Pin terminal check for SMJ type ECM
and TCM connectors.
For details regarding the terminal
arrangement, refer to PG-72,
"ELECTRICAL UNITS" .
Current should be measured with an
ammeter.
Procedure with CONSULT-II
Procedure without CONSULT-II
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
EAS001KK
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
Revision: October 2004
GI-14
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
●
●
●
Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed
by a single line and followed by the direction mark.
Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed
by a double line and followed by the direction mark.
Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
SAIA0257E
●
Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
H
I
J
K
L
M
SGI363
Revision: October 2004
GI-15
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL ●
For detail, refer to following “DESCRIPTION”.
SGI091A
Revision: October 2004
GI-16
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Optional Splice
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SGI942
I
DESCRIPTION
Number
1
2
Item
Power condition
Fusible link
3
Fusible link/fuse location
4
Fuse
5
6
Current rating
Connectors
J
Description
●
This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated).
●
The double line shows that this is a fusible link.
●
The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
●
This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.
●
The single line shows that this is a fuse.
●
The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
●
This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.
●
This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male.
●
The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors.
●
Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION).
7
Optional splice
●
The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
8
Splice
●
The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle.
9
Page crossing
●
This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page.
●
The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page.
10
Common connector
●
The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector.
11
Option abbreviation
●
This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application.
12
Relay
●
This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY.
13
Connectors
●
This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut.
Revision: October 2004
GI-17
2005 Titan
K
L
M
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Number
Item
Description
●
14
Wire color
This shows a code for the color of the wire.
BR = Brown
OR or O = Orange
P = Pink
PU or V (Violet) = Purple
GY or GR = Gray
SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
L = Blue
Y = Yellow
LG = Light Green
When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown
below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
15
Option description
16
Switch
17
Assembly parts
18
Cell code
19
●
This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
●
This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
●
Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly.
●
This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page
number.
●
Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically
downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow.
●
A double arrow “
cuit operation.
●
This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and
system).
Current flow arrow
” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on cir-
20
System branch
●
This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code.
21
Page crossing
●
The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages.
22
Shielded line
●
The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
23
Component box in
wave line
●
This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by
wave line) within the system.
24
Component name
●
This shows the name of a component.
●
This shows the connector number.
●
The letter shows which harness the connector is located in.
●
Example: M : main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main
Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in
locating connectors.
●
The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the
grounded connector.
●
This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to
"Ground Distribution" in PG section.
●
This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page.
●
Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component.
●
This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes,
Number 14 of this chart.
●
This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section.
The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out.
●
This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors
(J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details.
25
Connector number
26
Ground (GND)
27
Ground (GND)
28
Connector views
29
Common component
30
Connector color
31
Fusible link and fuse
box
32
Reference area
Revision: October 2004
GI-18
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Harness Indication
●
●
GI
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness
(connector) wire color.
Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
B
C
D
E
F
G
AGI070
H
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
I
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition.
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
●
ignition switch is “OFF”,
●
doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
●
pedals are not depressed, and
●
parking brake is released.
J
K
L
M
SGI860
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
Revision: October 2004
GI-19
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
●
●
A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable
line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for
DTC” is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with
the on board diagnostic system.
A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in
which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board
diagnostic system.
SGI862-B
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
●
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Revision: October 2004
GI-20
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
●
The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SGI875
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-21
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the
end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram,
these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
SGI092A
Abbreviations
EAS001DH
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
A/C
Air Conditioner
A/T
Automatic Transaxle/Transmission
ATF
Automatic Transmission Fluid
D1
Drive range 1st gear
D2
Drive range 2nd gear
Revision: October 2004
GI-22
2005 Titan
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
D3
Drive range 3rd gear
D4
Drive range 4th gear
FR, RR
Front, Rear
LH, RH
Left-Hand, Right-Hand
GI
B
M/T
Manual Transaxle/Transmission
OD
Overdrive
P/S
Power Steering
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
SDS
Service Data and Specifications
SST
Special Service Tools
2WD
2-Wheel Drive
22
2nd range 2nd gear
21
2nd range 1st gear
12
1st range 2nd gear
11
1st range 1st gear
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-23
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
PFP:00000
EAS001DI
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors
and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/
INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (NISSAN)
(J38751-95INF)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (INFINITI)
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD and terminal repair
kit
(J42992-2000UPD)
OBD-II Connector Kit Update
Description
WAIA0004E
WAIA0005E
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during
circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator
clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
●
If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector,
remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
●
Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage
to the seal between wire and connector may result.
SGI841
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
●
There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each
terminal with the “T” pin through the notch.
Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal
into female terminal.
SEL265V
Revision: October 2004
GI-24
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
●
Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make
contact space for probing.
GI
B
C
SEL266V
D
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin.
Do not bend terminal.
E
F
G
SEL267V
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
H
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.
I
J
K
L
SEL270V
3.
While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male
terminal into the female terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with
your hands.
M
SEL271V
Revision: October 2004
GI-25
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
4.
While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not.
SEL272V
●
If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
SEL273V
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
●
Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing,
the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
●
The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the
rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
SEL275V
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is
installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector.
An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
SEL330V
Revision: October 2004
GI-26
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
EAS001DJ
GI
WORK FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
SGI838
STEP
DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
STEP 1
STEP 2
WHAT
Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).
WHEN
Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
WHERE
Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
HOW
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
H
I
J
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.
K
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
STEP 3
G
●
Power Supply Routing
●
System Operation Descriptions
●
Applicable Service Manual Sections
●
Check for any Service Bulletins
L
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
STEP 4
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness
Layouts.
STEP 5
Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
STEP 6
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
●
Vehicle vibration
●
Heat sensitive
Revision: October 2004
GI-27
2005 Titan
M
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Freezing
●
Water intrusion
●
Electrical load
●
Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the
problem.
●
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
SGI839
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
●
Connectors not fully seated.
●
Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
●
Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
●
Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
●
Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
Revision: October 2004
GI-28
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or GI
pinching.
Heat Sensitive
B
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs
while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
C
D
SGI842
E
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing
somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside
overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of
those electrical components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
replace the component.
F
G
H
SGI843
I
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
J
K
L
SGI844
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog
lamps) turned on.
SGI845
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.
Revision: October 2004
GI-29
2005 Titan
M
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN
A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
There are two types of shorts.
SHORT
●
SHORT CIRCUIT
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
change.
●
SHORT TO GROUND
When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
NOTE:
Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal.
Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
SGI846-A
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start
with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
●
Disconnect the battery negative cable.
●
Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
●
Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
●
Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an
over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
●
Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
●
Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or
infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
Revision: October 2004
GI-30
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
●
Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
●
With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
●
Close SW1 and probe at relay.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
●
Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
●
GI
B
C
D
Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit
E
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
F
G
H
SGI847-A
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
●
Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
●
Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the
fuse.
●
Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known
good ground.
●
With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
●
Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good
ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
●
Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and
a known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
●
Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse
terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground).
●
With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
●
With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check
for voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
●
Revision: October 2004
GI-31
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
●
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
●
Remove the ground bolt or screw.
●
Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
●
Clean as required to assure good contact.
●
Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
●
Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
●
If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
SGI853
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will
give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire
is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked
up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
●
Undersized wiring (single strand example)
●
Corrosion on switch contacts
●
Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD
Revision: October 2004
GI-32
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
GI
●
Operate the circuit.
●
The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.
B
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
●
C
D
E
F
G
SGI974
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in
“Computer Controlled Systems”).
Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire
gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
H
I
J
K
L
M
SAIA0258E
Revision: October 2004
GI-33
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Control Unit Circuit Test
System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.
MGI034A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Pin
No.
1
Item
Switch
2
Lamp
Voltage
value [V]
Condition
In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] *
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
*:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
MGI035A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Pin
No.
Item
1
Lamp
2
Switch
Condition
Voltage
value [V]
In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] *
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 5
Approx. 5
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
*:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does
not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp.
Revision: October 2004
GI-34
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Control Units and Electrical Parts
EAS001DK
GI
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
●
●
●
Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and
functions of the component parts.
Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
B
C
D
SAIA0251E
●
E
Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent
or damaged, and then correctly connect it.
When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
F
G
H
SAIA0252E
●
For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the
direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then
remove the connector.
I
J
K
SAIA0253E
●
For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to
the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push
the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
M
SAIA0254E
Revision: October 2004
GI-35
L
2005 Titan
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or
hitting it.
Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to
rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it.
If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in
the vehicle.
Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the
upper and lower covers.
SAIA0255E
When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit
from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use
the specified check adapter.
SEF348N
SMJ INSTALLATION
To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange “fulltight” mark appears and
then retighten to specified torque as required.
SMJ
:3 - 5 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged.
CEL969
Revision: October 2004
GI-36
2005 Titan
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
●
●
PFP:00000
GI
EAS001DL
CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the
vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various
kinds of diagnostic tests.
Refer to “CONSULT Operator's Manual” for more information.
Function and System Application
EAS001DM
B
C
Function
Engine
A/T
Air bag
ABS
ABS
(Including
VDC)
Air
Pressure
Monitor
Work support
This mode enables a technician to
adjust some devices faster and more
accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II.
x
—
—
—
x
x
DTC work
support
Select the operating condition to
confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes.
—
x
—
—
—
—
Self-diagnostic
results
Self-diagnostic results can be read
and erased quickly.
x
x
x
x
x
x
Trouble diagnostic record
Current self-diagnostic results and
all trouble diagnostic records previously stored can be read.
—
—
x
—
—
—
ECU discriminated No.
Classification number of a replacement ECU can be read to prevent an
incorrect ECU from being installed.
—
—
x
—
—
—
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECU (ECM)
can be read.
x
x
—
x
x
x
I
Data monitor
(Spec.)
The specified values will be displayed when an OK/NG judgment is
difficult for the DATA MONITOR
items by Bar Chart and Line Graph.
x
—
—
—
—
—
J
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart
from the ECUs and also shifts some
parameters in a specified range.
x
—
—
x
x
—
K
SRT & DTC
confirmation
The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the self-diagnosis
status/result can be confirmed.
x
x*
—
—
—
—
L
ECU (ECM)
part number
ECU (ECM) part number can be
read.
x
x
—
x
x
x
Diagnostic test
mode
E
F
G
x: Applicable
*: For VG33E and VG33ER engine
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
EAS001DN
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following:
WARNING:
Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Checking Equipment
EAS001DO
When ordering the below equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
Revision: October 2004
D
GI-37
2005 Titan
H
M
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Tool name
Description
NISSAN CONSULT-II
1 CONSULT-II unit (Tester internal
soft: Resident Version 3.3.0) and accessories
2 Program card AED04C and
AEN02C-1 (for NATS)
3 CAN converter
For details, refer to Consult-II Operation Manual.
LAIA0038E
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
EAS001DP
NOTE:
Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
PAIA0070E
2.
3.
If necessary, turn on the ignition switch.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” or “System Shortcut”
(eg: Engine) on the screen.
BCIA0029E
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
EAS001DQ
LAIA0028E
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.
Revision: October 2004
GI-38
2005 Titan
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Symptom
CONSULT-II cannot access
any system.
CONSULT-II cannot access
individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.)
Check item
GI
●
CONSULT-II DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4)
●
CONSULT-II DLC cable
●
CONSULT-II program card (Check the appropriate CONSULT-II program card for the system.
Refer to "Checking Equipment".)
●
Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.)
●
Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-II DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system.)
NOTE:
The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A
short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-39
2005 Titan
LIFTING POINT
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
PFP:00000
EAS001DR
WARNING:
●
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
●
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
WAIA0041E
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
EAS001DS
CAUTION:
Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is
flat.
WAIA0042E
Revision: October 2004
GI-40
2005 Titan
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
EAS001DT
WARNING:
●
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
●
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WAIA0043E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-41
2005 Titan
TOW TRUCK TOWING
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
PFP:00000
EAS001DU
WARNING:
●
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
●
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
●
All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
●
It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
●
Always attach safety chains before towing.
●
When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order.
If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
●
Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear
(i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
AGI077
4X2 MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission
equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
●
When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the
ignition key to the OFF position and move the transmission
shift lever to the neutral position. On automatic transmission models, to move the selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to OFF position and secure the
steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or
similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK
position. This will result in damage to the steering lock
mechanism.
●
When towing manual transmission models with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use a towing dollies):
Always release the parking brake and move the transmission shift lever to the neutral position.
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Speed
Distance
: Below 95 km/h (60 MPH)
: Less than 800 km (500 miles)
SGI976
Revision: October 2004
GI-42
2005 Titan
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Towing Point
GI
B
C
D
E
F
WAIA0045E
CAUTION:
Never tow the vehicle using only the towing points. To avoid damaging the vehicle body, use proper
towing equipment when towing.
G
4X4 MODEL
H
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission
equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
●
When towing with the front wheels on the ground or rear
wheels on the ground (If you do not use towing dollies):
Set the free-running hubs to the free position and move the
transfer case shift lever into the “2H” position.
●
When towing with the front on the ground: Turn the ignition
key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a
straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never
place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result
in damage to the steering lock mechanism.
●
When towing manual transmission models with the rear
wheels on the ground always release the parking brake and
move the transmission shift lever to the neutral position.
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Speed
Distance
I
J
K
L
M
: Below 95 km/h (60 MPH)
: Less than 800 km (500 miles)
SGI973
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
●
●
●
●
EAS001DV
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or
recovery.
Revision: October 2004
GI-43
2005 Titan
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
Tightening Torque Table
Grade
4T
Bolt size
M6
6.0
M8
8.0
M10
M12
7T
10.0
12.0
EAS001DW
Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Pitch
mm
Hexagon head bolt
N·m
kg-m
Hexagon flange bolt
ft-lb
in-lb
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
1.0
5.1
0.52
3.8
45.1
6.1
0.62
4.5
53.8
1.25
13
1.3
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
1.0
13
1.3
9
—
16
1.6
12
—
1.5
25
2.5
18
—
29
3.0
22
—
1.25
25
2.6
19
—
30
3.1
22
—
1.75
42
4.3
31
—
51
5.2
38
—
1.25
46
4.7
34
—
56
5.7
41
—
M14
14.0
1.5
74
7.5
54
—
88
9.0
65
—
M6
6.0
1.0
8.4
0.86
6.2
74.6
10
1.0
7
87
M8
8.0
1.25
21
2.1
15
—
25
2.5
18
—
1.0
22
2.2
16
—
26
2.7
20
—
1.5
41
4.2
30
—
48
4.9
35
—
M10
M12
9T
Bolt diameter *
mm
PFP:00000
10.0
12.0
1.25
43
4.4
32
—
51
5.2
38
—
1.75
71
7.2
52
—
84
8.6
62
—
1.25
77
7.9
57
—
92
9.4
68
—
M14
14.0
1.5
127
13.0
94
—
147
15.0
108
—
M6
6.0
1.0
12
1.2
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
M8
8.0
1.25
29
3.0
22
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.0
31
3.2
23
—
37
3.8
27
—
1.5
59
6.0
43
—
70
7.1
51
—
M10
M12
M14
10.0
12.0
14.0
1.25
62
6.3
46
—
74
7.5
54
—
1.75
98
10.0
72
—
118
12.0
87
—
1.25
108
11.0
80
—
137
14.0
101
—
1.5
177
18.0
130
—
206
21.0
152
—
*: Nominal diameter
1. Special parts are excluded.
2. This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head.
MGI044A
Revision: October 2004
GI-44
2005 Titan
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants
PFP:00000
GI
EAS001DX
Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.
Product Description
1
2
3
Purpose
B
C
999MP-AM000P
99998-50505
Permatex 81844
Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
For metal-to-metal flange
sealing.
Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015
inch) gap and provide
instant sealing for most
powertrain applications.
999MP-AM001P
99998-50503
Permatex 51813 and
51817
High Performance
Thread Sealant
Provides instant sealing on
any threaded straight or
parallel threaded fitting.
(Thread sealant only, no
locking ability.)
999MP-AM002P
999MP-AM002P
Permatex 56521
99998-50506
(Ultra Grey)
Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond
1207,1215, 1216,
1217F and 1217G;
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007
Medium Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Blue)
Revision: October 2004
F
Do not use on plastic.
999MP-AM003P
(Ultra Grey)
Silicone RTV
High Temperature,
High Strength Thread
Locking Sealant (Red)
D
E
Threadlocker
Threadlocker (service tool
removable)
G
H
I
Gasket Maker for Maxima/
Quest 5-speed automatic
transmission
(RE5F22A)
6
Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos.
Used to permanently
remount rear view mirrors
to windows.
Gasket Maker
5
Nissan Canada Part
No. (Canada)
Rear View Mirror
Adhesive
●
4
Nissan North America
Part No. (USA)
–
–
Three Bond 1281B
or exact equivalent
in its quality
J
999MP-AM004P
999MP-AM005P
GI-45
999MP-AM004P
Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
1307N, 1335,
1335B, 1363B,
1377C, 1386B, D&E
and 1388
999MP-AM005P
Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240,
24283 and 09178;
Three Bond 1322,
1322N, 1324 D&N,
1333D, 1361C,
1364D, 1370C and
1374
2005 Titan
K
L
M
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Model Variation
PFP:00010
EAS001DY
WAIA0039E
Revision: October 2004
GI-46
2005 Titan
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
4x2 Model
Body
Engine
Transmission
Destination
50-State
King Cab
VK56DE
RE5R05A (5A/T)
Canada
50-State
Crew Cab
VK56DE
RE5R05A (5A/T)
Canada
GI
Grade
Model
XE
BPKELRK-EUN
SE
BPKELTK-EUN
LE
BPKELVK-EUN
XE
BPKELRK-ENN
SE
BPKELTK-ENN
LE
BPKELVK-ENN
XE
CPKELRK-EUN
SE
CPKELTK-EUN
LE
CPKELVK-EUN
XE
CPKELRK-ENN
SE
CPKELTK-ENN
LE
CPKELVK-ENN
B
C
D
E
F
4x4 Model
Body
Engine
Transmission
Destination
50-State
King Cab
VK56DE
RE5R05A (5A/T)
Canada
50-State
Crew Cab
VK56DE
RE5R05A (5A/T)
Canada
Grade
Model
XE
BPKMLRK-EUN
SE
BPKMLTK-EUN
LE
BPKMLVK-EUN
XE
BPKMLRK-ENN
SE
BPKMLTK-ENN
LE
BPKMLVK-ENN
XE
CPKMLRK-EUN
SE
CPKMLTK-EUN
LE
CPKMLVK-EUN
XE
CPKMLRK-ENN
SE
CPKMLTK-ENN
LE
CPKMLVK-ENN
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-47
2005 Titan
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Identification Number
EAS001DZ
LAIA0047E
1.
Emission control information label
2.
Vacuum hose diagram
4.
FMVSS certification label
5.
Vehicle identification number plate
3.
Tire placard
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT
WAIA0077E
Revision: October 2004
GI-48
2005 Titan
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
GI
B
C
LAIA0044E
D
TRANSFER SERIAL NUMBER
E
F
G
AGI108
H
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
I
J
PAIA0054E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GI-49
2005 Titan
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Dimensions
EAS001E0
Unit: mm (in)
Drive type
4x2
4x4
Overall length
5695 (224.2)
Overall width
2001 (78.8)
Overall height *1
1905.1 (75.0)
1945.8 (76.6)
Overall height *2
1907.0 (75.1)
1948.0 (76.7)
Front tread width
Rear tread width
17 inch tire with
offroad package
1715 (67.5)
18 inch tire
1725 (67.9)
17 inch tire with
steel wheels
1735 (68.3)
17 inch tire with
offroad package
1715 (67.5)
18 inch tire
1725 (67.9)
17 inch tire with
steel wheels
1735 (68.3)
Wheelbase
3550 (139.8)
Minimum Running Ground Clearance (at front suspension)*1
Minimum Running Ground Clearance (at front suspension)*2
With standard
undercover
247.2 (9.73)
286.1 (11.26)
With offroad skid
plate
242.2 (9.54)
281.1 (11.1)
With oil pan skid
plate
—
286.4 (11.28)
With standard
undercover
251.5 (9.9)
291.5 (11.48)
With offroad skid
plate
246.5 (9.7)
286.4 (11.28)
With oil pan skid
plate
—
291.3 (11.46)
*1: King Cab
*2: Crew Cab
Wheels & Tires
Drive Type
EAS001E1
Grade
Road wheel
Tire
Spare tire size
XE
17X7.5J Steel
P245/75R17
P245/75R17
SE
18X8J Alloy (5-spoke)
P265/70R18
P265/70R18
LE
18X8J Alloy (6-spoke)
P265/70R18
P265/70R18
17X7.5J Steel
P245/75R17
P245/75R17
17x7.5J Alloy (7-spoke)
P285/70R17 A/T
P285/70R17 A/T
18X8J Alloy (5-spoke)
P265/70R18
P265/70R18
17x7.5J Alloy (7-spoke)
P285/70R17 A/T
P285/70R17 A/T
18X8J Alloy (6-spoke)
P265/70R18
P265/70R18
17x7.5J Alloy (7-spoke)
P285/70R17 A/T
P285/70R17 A/T
4x2
XE
4x4
SE
LE
Revision: October 2004
GI-50
2005 Titan
TERMINOLOGY
TERMINOLOGY
SAE J1930 Terminology List
PFP:00011
GI
EAS001E2
All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new
terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart.
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
C
Air cleaner
ACL
Air cleaner
Barometric pressure
BARO
***
Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD
BAROS-BCDD
BCDD
Camshaft position
CMP
***
Camshaft position sensor
CMPS
Crank angle sensor
Canister
***
Canister
Carburetor
CARB
Carburetor
Charge air cooler
CAC
Intercooler
Closed loop
CL
Closed loop
Closed throttle position switch
CTP switch
Idle switch
Clutch pedal position switch
CPP switch
Clutch switch
Continuous fuel injection system
CFI system
***
Continuous trap oxidizer system
CTOX system
***
Crankshaft position
CKP
***
Crankshaft position sensor
CKPS
***
Data link connector
DLC
***
Data link connector for CONSULT-II
DLC for CONSULT-II
Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-II
Diagnostic test mode
DTM
Diagnostic mode
Diagnostic test mode selector
DTM selector
Diagnostic mode selector
Diagnostic test mode I
DTM I
Mode I
Diagnostic test mode II
DTM II
Mode II
Diagnostic trouble code
DTC
Malfunction code
Direct fuel injection system
DFI system
***
Distributor ignition system
DI system
Ignition timing control
Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater
EFE-mixture heater
Mixture heater
Early fuel evaporation system
EFE system
Mixture heater control
Electrically erasable programmable read
only memory
EEPROM
***
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Electronic ignition system
EI system
Ignition timing control
Engine control
EC
***
Engine control module
ECM
ECCS control unit
Engine coolant temperature
ECT
Engine temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ECTS
Engine temperature sensor
Engine modification
EM
***
Engine speed
RPM
Engine speed
Erasable programmable read only memory
EPROM
***
Evaporative emission canister
EVAP canister
Canister
Evaporative emission system
EVAP system
Canister control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation valve
EGR valve
EGR valve
Revision: October 2004
B
GI-51
2005 Titan
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT
valve
EGRC-BPT valve
BPT valve
Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid
valve
EGRC-solenoid valve
EGR control solenoid valve
EGRT sensor
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
Flash electrically erasable programmable
read only memory
FEEPROM
***
Flash erasable programmable read only
memory
FEPROM
***
Flexible fuel sensor
FFS
***
Flexible fuel system
FF system
***
Fuel pressure regulator
***
Pressure regulator
Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid
valve
***
PRVR control solenoid valve
Fuel trim
FT
***
Heated Oxygen sensor
HO2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Idle air control system
IAC system
Idle speed control
Idle air control valve-air regulator
IACV-air regulator
Air regulator
Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control
valve
IACV-AAC valve
Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve
Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
FICD solenoid valve
Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve
IACV-idle up control solenoid valve
Idle up control solenoid valve
Idle speed control-FI pot
ISC-FI pot
FI pot
Idle speed control system
ISC system
***
Ignition control
IC
***
Ignition control module
ICM
***
Indirect fuel injection system
IFI system
***
Intake air
IA
Air
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor
EGR temperature sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
IAT sensor
Air temperature sensor
Knock
***
Detonation
Knock sensor
KS
Detonation sensor
Malfunction indicator lamp
MIL
Check engine light
Manifold absolute pressure
MAP
***
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
MAPS
***
Manifold differential pressure
MDP
***
Manifold differential pressure sensor
MDPS
***
Manifold surface temperature
MST
***
Manifold surface temperature sensor
MSTS
***
Manifold vacuum zone
MVZ
***
Manifold vacuum zone sensor
MVZS
***
Mass air flow sensor
MAFS
Air flow meter
Mixture control solenoid valve
MC solenoid valve
Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve
Multiport fuel injection System
MFI system
Fuel injection control
Revision: October 2004
GI-52
2005 Titan
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Nonvolatile random access memory
NVRAM
***
On board diagnostic system
OBD system
Self-diagnosis
Open loop
OL
Open loop
Oxidation catalyst
OC
Catalyst
Oxidation catalytic converter system
OC system
***
Oxygen sensor
O2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Park position switch
***
Park switch
Park/neutral position switch
PNP switch
Park/neutral switch
Inhibitor switch
Neutral position switch
Periodic trap oxidizer system
PTOX system
***
Positive crankcase ventilation
PCV
Positive crankcase ventilation
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
PCV valve
PCV valve
Powertrain control module
PCM
***
Programmable read only memory
PROM
***
Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve
PAIRC solenoid valve
AIV control solenoid valve
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
Pulsed secondary air injection system
PAIR system
Air induction valve (AIV) control
Pulsed secondary air injection valve
PAIR valve
Air induction valve
Random access memory
RAM
***
Read only memory
ROM
***
Scan tool
ST
***
Secondary air injection pump
AIR pump
***
Secondary air injection system
AIR system
***
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
SFI system
Sequential fuel injection
Service reminder indicator
SRI
***
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
***
Simultaneous fuel injection
Smoke puff limiter system
SPL system
***
Supercharger
SC
***
Supercharger bypass
SCB
***
System readiness test
SRT
***
Thermal vacuum valve
TVV
Thermal vacuum valve
Three way catalyst
TWC
Catalyst
Three way catalytic converter system
TWC system
***
Three way + oxidation catalyst
TWC + OC
Catalyst
Three way + oxidation catalytic converter
system
TWC + OC system
***
Throttle body
TB
Throttle chamber
SPI body
Throttle body fuel injection system
TBI system
Fuel injection control
Throttle position
TP
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
TPS
Throttle sensor
Throttle position switch
TP switch
Throttle switch
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
TCC solenoid valve
Lock-up cancel solenoid
Lock-up solenoid
Revision: October 2004
GI-53
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Titan
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Transmission control module
TCM
A/T control unit
Turbocharger
TC
Turbocharger
Vehicle speed sensor
VSS
Vehicle speed sensor
Volume air flow sensor
VAFS
Air flow meter
Warm up oxidation catalyst
WU-OC
Catalyst
Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system
WU-OC system
***
Warm up three way catalyst
WU-TWC
Catalyst
Warm up three way catalytic converter system
WU-TWC system
***
Wide open throttle position switch
WOTP switch
Full switch
***: Not applicable
Revision: October 2004
GI-54
2005 Titan
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Handling for Adhesive and Primer ........................... 3
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9
WINDSHIELD GLASS ...............................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING ............... 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS... 13
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR ..... 15
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION ...................... 17
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS ...................................................... 18
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM .................................... 19
Revision: October 2004
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 19
System Description ................................................. 20
KING CAB ........................................................... 20
CREW CAB ......................................................... 20
KING CAB ........................................................... 20
CREW CAB ......................................................... 20
MANUAL OPERATION ........................................ 21
AUTO OPERATION ............................................. 23
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK ....................... 23
POWER WINDOW LOCK ................................... 24
RETAINED POWER OPERATION ...................... 24
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM ........................................ 24
POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE FRONT
DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH) ............................................................. 24
CAN Communication System Description .............. 24
Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 25
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (King Cab) ........... 26
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (King Cab) ....... 31
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window
and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (King Cab) ........ 31
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (King Cab)... 33
Schematic (Crew Cab) ........................................... 34
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Crew Cab) ......... 35
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Crew Cab) ...... 43
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window
and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (Crew Cab) ....... 44
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Crew Cab)... 45
Work Flow ............................................................... 46
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 46
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE .......... 46
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 47
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 47
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 47
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (King Cab) ..... 48
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (Crew Cab) ... 49
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 50
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
GW-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Power Supply and GroundCircuit Check (King Cab)... 51
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) ........................................................................ 52
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 53
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check ........ 55
Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check ................. 55
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) ..... 56
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) ... 58
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH ....................... 59
Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) ........... 61
Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) .......... 63
Encoder Circuit Check Front RH ............................ 65
Door Switch Check ................................................. 67
FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch)
Check (King Cab) ................................................... 69
FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch)
Check (Crew Cab) .................................................. 71
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH
(King Cab) .............................................................. 73
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH
(Crew Cab) ............................................................. 76
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) ........................................................................ 78
Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) ........................................................................ 80
Rear Power Drop Glass Circuit Check ................... 81
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check ............... 82
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check .......... 83
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............. 85
Removal and Installation ........................................ 85
FRONT DOOR GLASS ....................................... 85
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ................ 86
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION ...................... 86
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............... 88
Rear Door Glass ..................................................... 88
REMOVAL ........................................................... 88
INSTALLATION .................................................... 88
FITTING INSPECTION ........................................ 88
Rear Door Glass Regulator .................................... 90
REMOVAL ........................................................... 90
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 90
INSTALLATION .................................................... 90
SIDE WINDOW GLASS ............................................ 91
Removal ................................................................. 91
Installation ............................................................... 91
Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass ...... 92
Revision: October 2004
INSIDE MIRROR .......................................................93
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — .................................93
Removal and Installation .........................................94
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ..................................95
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location...95
System Description .................................................96
CAN Communication System Description ..............97
Schematic ...............................................................98
Wiring Diagram — DEF — ......................................99
Terminal and Reference Values for BCM .............. 102
Terminal and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 102
Work Flow ............................................................. 102
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................ 103
CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE
.103
DATA MONITOR ................................................ 104
ACTIVE TEST .................................................... 104
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart ...................... 104
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check .... 106
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check ....... 107
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check .................. 108
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check
(Without Automatic Drive Positioner) .................... 110
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check
(With Automatic Drive Positioner) ......................... 112
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (Without
Automatic Drive Positioner) .................................. 114
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) .......................................... 115
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (Without
Automatic Drive Positioner) .................................. 116
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) .......................................... 117
Rear Window Defogger Signal Check .................. 118
Filament Check ..................................................... 118
Filament Repair ..................................................... 119
REPAIR EQUIPMENT ....................................... 119
REPAIRING PROCEDURE ............................... 119
DOOR MIRROR ....................................................... 121
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — ............................ 121
Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — .............................. 122
Door Mirror Assembly ........................................... 124
STANDARD MIRROR ........................................ 124
TRAILER TOW MIRROR ................................... 125
Door Mirror Glass .................................................. 125
REMOVAL .......................................................... 125
INSTALLATION .................................................. 126
GW-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EIS004BY
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Handling for Adhesive and Primer
●
●
●
●
●
●
B
C
D
E
F
G
EIS004BZ
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after
H
the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder.
GW
Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is
found, do not use it.
If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with
J
soap.
When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual.
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution
EIS004C0
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
Revision: October 2004
GW-3
K
L
M
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EIS004C1
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit
Repairing the cause of noise
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tool
EIS004C2
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
(
—
)
Suction Lifter
Holding door glass
LIIA1991E
Revision: October 2004
GW-4
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS004C3
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
GW
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
J
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
K
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: October 2004
GW-5
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
●
Revision: October 2004
GW-6
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS004C4
F
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
H
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
GW
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
J
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
L
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
M
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: October 2004
GW-7
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: October 2004
GW-8
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS004C5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0276E
Revision: October 2004
GW-9
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT844
Revision: October 2004
GW-10
2005 Titan
WINDSHIELD GLASS
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Removal and Installation
PFP:72712
A
EIS004C6
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0652E
G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front pillar garnish. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
H
Remove inside mirror. Refer to GW-94, "Removal and Installation" .
Partially remove the headlining (front edge). Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
GW
Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
●
Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
J
●
If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
K
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
●
When the windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
L
●
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
●
Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
M
PIIA0186E
INSTALLATION
●
●
Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
Revision: October 2004
GW-11
2005 Titan
WINDSHIELD GLASS
The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
●
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
●
Install parts removed.
WARNING:
●
Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
●
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
●
Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
●
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
●
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
●
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
●
Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
●
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
●
LIIA1115E
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: October 2004
GW-12
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:79712
A
EIS004C7
FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIIA1243E
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rear pillar finishers. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
Revision: October 2004
GW-13
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
3.
Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an
inflatable pump bag.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety
glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
●
When the rear window glass is to be reused, do not use a
cutting knife or power cutting tool.
●
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
●
Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may
develop into cracks.
SBF034B
Installation
Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
●
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
●
The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
●
Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
●
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
●
Install parts removed.
WARNING:
●
Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
●
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
●
Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
●
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the rear window in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
●
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
●
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
●
Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
●
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
●
Revision: October 2004
GW-14
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Remove the rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" .
Remove the headliner. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
Remove the back panel finisher. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
Remove the sealing screen.
Lower the window and remove the rear window glass bolts.
B
C
D
E
LIIA1826E
6.
7.
8.
Raise the window and hold it in place with tape.
Disconnect the rear window defogger harness connector.
Remove the rear window glass assembly.
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIIA1828E
9.
Disconnect the rear window motor wiring harness connector.
Revision: October 2004
GW-15
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
10. Remove the bolts and the regulator and motor assembly.
LIIA1827E
Installation
1.
Position the regulator and motor assembly and install the bolts.
Regulator and motor
assembly
2.
7.5 N·m (0.76 Kg-m, 66 in-lb)
Connect the rear window motor wiring harness connector.
LIIA1827E
3.
Install the rear window.
● While installing the rear window, make sure that the bottom clips are engaged on the back panel, then
rotate the glass into position.
– If reusing the existing window assembly, clean the opening and assembly, then apply new butyl to the
window assembly.
– If installing a new window, clean the opening and remove the plastic liner from the butyl on the new window assembly.
Revision: October 2004
GW-16
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA1829E
Rear window assembly
nuts
4.
5.
GW
3.0 N·m (0.31 Kg-m, 27 in-lb)
Connect the rear window defogger.
Lower the window and install the rear window glass bolts.
Rear window glass bolts
J
6.0 N·m (0.61 Kg-m, 53 in-lb)
K
L
M
LIIA1826E
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install the sealing screen.
Install the back panel finisher. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
Install the headliner. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
Install the rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" .
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following operations are performed the limit switch must be reset.
●
Motor operation when not installed in the vehicle.
●
Removal and installation of the regulator.
●
Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
●
Removal and installation of the glass.
Revision: October 2004
GW-17
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
●
Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to
the bottom.
3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to
the original position, if not pull the switch using suitable tool.
4. Raise the glass to the top position
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the
top position.
SIIA0347E
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between butyl adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward.
To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then butyl adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: October 2004
GW-18
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:25401
A
EIS004C8
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIIA1985E
Revision: October 2004
GW-19
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
System Description
EIS004C9
KING CAB
Power is supplied at all times
●
from 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through BCM terminal 69
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1
●
to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 10.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38
●
through BCM terminal 68
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10.
CREW CAB
Power is supplied at all times
●
from 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through BCM terminal 69
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 19
●
to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 10
●
to circuit breaker-2 terminal 2
●
through circuit breaker-2 terminal 1
●
to rear power drop glass up and down relays terminal 5.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38
●
through BCM terminal 68
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10
●
to rear power window switches LH and RH terminal 1
●
to rear power drop glass up and down relays terminal 1.
KING CAB
With ignition switch in ON or START position,
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15
●
to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
CREW CAB
With ignition switch in ON or START position,
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17
●
to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
●
to rear power drop glass up and down relays terminal 4
●
to rear power drop glass switch terminal 3
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Revision: October 2004
GW-20
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
MANUAL OPERATION
Front Driver Side Door
A
WINDOW UP
When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the up position,
power is supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8
●
to front power window motor LH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11
●
to front power window motor LH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11
●
to front power window motor LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8
●
to front power window motor LH terminal 2.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
B
C
D
E
F
G
Front Passenger Side Door
H
POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the up position, power is supplied
GW
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8
●
to front power window motor RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
J
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9
●
to front power window motor RH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
K
WINDOW DOWN
When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9
L
●
to front power window motor RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8
M
●
to front power window motor RH terminal 2.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
King Cab
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION
Signal is sent
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12
●
to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16.
The operation of power window after receiving the signal is the same as operating the power window with
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Crew Cab
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION
Signal is sent
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14
●
to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16.
The operation of power window after receiving the signal is the same as operating the power window with
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Revision: October 2004
GW-21
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Rear Door (Crew Cab LH or RH)
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OR RH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the rear power window switch LH or RH is pressed in the up position, power is supplied
●
through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 5
●
to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 4
●
to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the rear power window switch LH or RH is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
●
through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 4
●
to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 5
●
to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 2.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the up position, power is
supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1
●
to rear power window switch LH terminal 2
●
through rear power window switch LH terminal 5
●
to rear power window motor LH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3
●
to rear power window switch LH terminal 3
●
through rear power window switch LH terminal 4
●
to rear power window motor LH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the up position, power is
supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5
●
to rear power window switch RH terminal 3
●
through rear power window switch RH terminal 5
●
to rear power window motor RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7
●
to rear power window motor RH terminal 2
●
through rear power window switch RH terminal 4
●
to rear power window motor RH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the down position, power is
supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3
●
to rear power window switch LH terminal 3
●
through rear power window switch LH terminal 4
●
to rear power window motor LH terminal 1.
Revision: October 2004
GW-22
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Ground is supplied
A
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1
●
to rear power window switch LH terminal 2
●
through rear power window switch LH terminal 5
B
●
to rear power window motor LH terminal 2.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the down position, power is
C
supplied
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7
●
to rear power window switch RH terminal 2
D
●
through rear power window switch RH terminal 4
●
to rear power window motor RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
E
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5
●
to rear power window switch RH terminal 3
F
●
through rear power window switch RH terminal 5
●
to rear power window motor RH terminal 2.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
G
REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP
When the rear power drop glass switch is pressed in the up position, ground is supplied
●
to rear power drop glass up relay terminal 2.
H
Then, rear power drop glass up relay is energized. Power is supplied
●
through rear power drop glass up relay terminal 3
●
to rear power drop glass motor terminal 1.
GW
Ground is supplied
●
to rear power drop glass down relay terminal 4
●
through rear power drop glass down relay terminal 3
J
●
to rear power drop glass motor terminal 4.
Then, the motor raises the glass until the switch is released.
REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN
K
When the rear power drop glass switch is pressed in the DOWN position, ground is supplied
●
to rear power drop glass down relay terminal 2.
Then, rear power drop glass down relay is energized. Power is supplied
L
●
through rear power drop glass down relay terminal 3
●
to rear power drop glass motor terminal 4.
M
Ground is supplied
●
to rear power drop glass up relay terminal 4
●
through rear power drop glass up relay terminal 3
●
to rear power drop glass motor terminal 1.
Then, the motor lowers the glass until the switch is released.
AUTO OPERATION
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the window without holding the window
switch in the down or up position.
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, and BCM
transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link.
The signal is transmitted from BCM to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH
●
Keyless power window down signal.
Revision: October 2004
GW-23
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
The signal is transmitted from main power window and door lock/unlock switch to power window and door
lock/unlock switch RH
●
Front door window RH operation signal.
●
Power window control by key cylinder switch signal.
●
Power window lock signal.
●
Retained power operation signal.
POWER WINDOW LOCK
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for front door window LH.
When in the lock position, the power window lock signal is transmitted to power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH by power window serial link. This prevents the front power window motor RH from operating.
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position from ON or START position.
Power is supplied for 45 seconds
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10
●
from BCM terminal 68.
When power and ground are supplied, the BCM continues to be energized, and the power window can be
operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the front LH or front RH door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to GW-46, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" .
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH monitor
the power window motor operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for front LH and front
RH power window by the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window motor LH and RH.
When main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
detects interruption during the following close operation,
●
automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position
●
automatic close operation during retained power operation
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH controls
each front power window motor for open and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm (5.91 in).
POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH)
When ignition switch is OFF, front power window LH and RH can be opened or closed by turning the front door
key cylinder LH to the UNLOCK/LOCK position for more than 3 seconds.
●
Front power windows can be opened as the door key cylinder is kept fully turned to the UNLOCK position.
●
Front power windows can be closed as the door key cylinder is kept fully turned to the LOCK position.
●
While performing open/close operation for the windows, power window is stopped when the door key cylinder is placed in the NEUTRAL position.
●
When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening operation is performed, the power
window opening stops.
CAN Communication System Description
EIS004CA
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
GW-24
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Schematic (King Cab)
EIS004CB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0610E
Revision: October 2004
GW-25
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (King Cab)
EIS004CC
WIWA0611E
Revision: October 2004
GW-26
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0612E
Revision: October 2004
GW-27
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0613E
Revision: October 2004
GW-28
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0614E
Revision: October 2004
GW-29
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0615E
Revision: October 2004
GW-30
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch (King Cab)
EIS004CD
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
—
Battery voltage
Terminal
Wire Color
1
W/R
Battery power supply
5
BR
Encoder power supply
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
Key position
(Neutral → Locked)
5→0
5→0
6
L
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) lock signal
7
R
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) unlock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Unlocked)
8
G/R
Front power window motor LH UP
signal
When power window motor is
operated UP
Driver side door window is
between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position (ON)
9
10
O
W/L
Limit switch signal
RAP signal
Driver side door window is
between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position
(OFF)
C
D
Battery voltage
E
0
F
5
G
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF
0
When front door LH or RH open
or power window timer operates
0
G/W
Front power window motor LH
DOWN signal
When power window motor is
operated DOWN
12
LG/W
Power window serial link
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
B
10
When ignition switch ON
11
A
H
GW
Battery voltage
J
K
L
PIIA2344J
M
When power window motor operates
13
G/Y
Encoder pulse signal
14
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
—
0
15
B
Ground
—
0
OCC3383D
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
RH (King Cab)
EIS004CE
Terminal
Wire Color
3
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
4
G/R
Encoder power supply
Revision: October 2004
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
—
0
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
GW-31
10
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
8
L
Front power window motor RH UP
signal
When power window motor is
operated UP
Battery voltage
9
G
Front power window motor RH
DOWN signal
When power window motor is
operated DOWN
Battery voltage
10
W/R
11
B
12
G/Y
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Ground
—
0
Encoder pulse signal
When power window motor operates
OCC3383D
15
16
G/W
LG/W
Limit switch signal
Power window serial link
Passenger side door window is
between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position (ON)
0
Passenger side door window is
between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position
(OFF)
5
When ignition switch is ON or
power window timer operating
PIIA2344J
Revision: October 2004
GW-32
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (King Cab)
EIS004CF
A
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
11
O
Ignition switch (ACC or ON)
12
R/L
Front door switch RH signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
B
Ignition switch
(ACC or ON position)
Battery voltage
ON (Open)
Battery voltage
OFF (Close)
C
0
D
22
G
Power window serial link
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
E
PIIA2344J
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON or START)
47
SB
Front door switch LH signal
67
B
68
W/L
Ignition switch
(ON or START position)
Battery voltage
ON (Open)
Battery voltage
OFF (Close)
Ground
RAP signal
0
—
F
G
0
When ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF
0
When front door LH or RH is
open or power window timer
operates
0
H
GW
J
69
W/R
Power window power supply
—
Battery voltage
70
W/B
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-33
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Schematic (Crew Cab)
EIS004CG
WIWA0616E
Revision: October 2004
GW-34
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Crew Cab)
EIS004CH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0617E
Revision: October 2004
GW-35
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0618E
Revision: October 2004
GW-36
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0619E
Revision: October 2004
GW-37
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0620E
Revision: October 2004
GW-38
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0621E
Revision: October 2004
GW-39
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0622E
Revision: October 2004
GW-40
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0623E
Revision: October 2004
GW-41
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
LIWA0529E
Revision: October 2004
GW-42
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch (Crew Cab)
EIS004CI
Terminal
1
2
Wire Color
R/Y
Item
Rear power window LH
UP signal
Condition
When rear LH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
UP
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
3
R/B
Rear power window LH
DOWN signal
When rear LH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
DOWN
4
L
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) lock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Locked)
5
L
Rear power window RH
UP signal
When rear RH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
UP
6
R
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) unlock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Unlocked)
7
R
Rear power window RH
DOWN signal
8
G/R
Front power window motor LH UP
signal
9
10
O
W/L
Limit switch signal
RAP signal
—
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
B
Battery voltage
C
0
D
Battery voltage
5→0
E
Battery voltage
F
5→0
G
When rear RH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
DOWN
Battery voltage
H
When power window motor is
operated UP
Battery voltage
Driver side door window is
between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position (ON)
0
Driver side door window is
between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position
(OFF)
5
K
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF
0
When front door LH or RH open
or power window timer operates
0
G/W
Front power window motor LH
DOWN signal
When power window motor is
operated DOWN
13
G/Y
Encoder pulse signal
When power window motor operates
L
M
Battery voltage
OCC3383D
GW-43
GW
J
When ignition switch ON
11
Revision: October 2004
A
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal
Wire Color
14
LG/W
Item
Power window serial link
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
PIIA2344J
15
BR
17
B
19
W/R
Encoder power supply
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
10
Ground
—
0
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
RH (Crew Cab)
EIS004CJ
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
—
0
Terminal
Wire Color
3
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
4
G/R
Encoder power supply
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
10
8
L
Front power window motor RH UP
signal
When power window motor is
operated UP
Battery voltage
9
G
Front power window motor RH
DOWN signal
When power window motor is
operated DOWN
Battery voltage
10
W/R
11
B
12
G/Y
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Ground
—
0
Encoder pulse signal
When power window motor operates
OCC3383D
15
16
G/W
LG/W
Limit switch signal
Power window serial link
Passenger side door window is
between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position (ON)
0
Passenger side door window is
between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position
(OFF)
5
When ignition switch is ON or
power window timer operating
PIIA2344J
Revision: October 2004
GW-44
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Crew Cab)
EIS004CK
A
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
11
O
Ignition switch (ACC or ON)
12
R/L
Front door switch RH signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
B
Ignition switch
(ACC or ON position)
Battery voltage
ON (Open)
Battery voltage
OFF (Close)
C
0
D
22
G
Power window serial link
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
E
PIIA2344J
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON or START)
47
SB
Front door switch LH signal
67
B
68
W/L
Ignition switch
(ON or START position)
Battery voltage
ON (Open)
Battery voltage
OFF (Close)
Ground
RAP signal
0
—
F
G
0
When ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF
0
When front door LH or RH is
open or power window timer
operates
0
H
GW
J
69
W/R
Power window power supply
—
Battery voltage
70
W/B
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-45
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EIS004CL
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-20, "System Description" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction.
Refer to GW-48, "Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (King Cab)" , GW-49, "Trouble Diagnoses Symptom
Chart (Crew Cab)" .
Does power window system operate normally? Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS004CM
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
BBIA0369E
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
Revision: October 2004
GW-46
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4.
Touch “BCM”.
If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
5.
Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
E
F
G
LIIA0163E
6.
Select diagnosis mode.
“WORK SUPPORT”, "DATA MONITOR" and “ACTIVE TEST”
are available.
H
GW
J
BCIA0031E
K
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM (body control module) to power window
system and power sunroof system (if equipped). Those systems can be operated when turning on
“RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF.
RETAINED PWR
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in OFF position. “RETAINED
PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is ON. Then
turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if
“RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF.
WORK SUPPORT
Work item
RETAINED PWR
Description
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power
supply period between three steps
●
MODE1 (45 sec.) / MODE2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.).
DATA MONITOR
Work item
IGN ON SW
Revision: October 2004
Description
Indicates (ON / OFF) condition of ignition switch
GW-47
2005 Titan
L
M
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates (ON / OFF) condition of front door switch driver side
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates (ON / OFF) condition of front door switch passenger side
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (King Cab)
●
EIS004CN
Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Symptom
None of the power windows can be operated using any switch
Front power window LH alone does not operate
Front power window RH alone does not operate
Repair order
Refer to page
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
GW-50
2. Main power window and door lock/unlock
power supply and ground circuit check
GW-51
3. Power window serial link check
GW-73
4. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
1. Front power window motor LH circuit check
GW-55
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
EI-32
1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH power supply and ground circuit check
GW-53
2. Power window serial link check
GW-73
3. Front power window motor RH circuit check
GW-55
4. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (LH)
●
A foreign material adheres to window glass
or glass run rubber.
●
Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
●
Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
—
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-86
3. Limit switch circuit check LH
GW-56
4. Encoder circuit check LH
GW-61
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (RH)
Power window retained power operation does not operate properly
Does not operate by front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch)
Power window lock switch does not function
Revision: October 2004
●
A foreign material adheres to window glass
or glass run rubber.
●
Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
●
Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
—
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-86
3. Limit switch circuit check RH
GW-59
4. Encoder circuit check RH
GW-65
1. Check the retained power operation mode
setting.
GW-47
2. Door switch check
GW-67
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check
GW-69
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
1. Power window lock switch circuit check
GW-48
EI-32
GW-73
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (Crew Cab)
●
EIS004CO
A
Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Symptom
None of the power windows can be operated using any switch
Front power window LH alone does not operate
Front power window RH alone does not operate
Repair order
Refer to page
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
GW-50
2. Main power window and door lock/unlock
power supply and ground circuit check
GW-51
3. Power window serial link check
GW-76
4. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
1. Front power window motor LH circuit check
GW-55
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
EI-32
1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH power supply and ground circuit check
GW-53
2. Power window serial link check
GW-76
3. Front power window motor RH circuit check
GW-55
4. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
Rear power window LH alone does not operate
1. Rear power window motor LH circuit check
GW-78
Rear power window RH alone does not operate
1. Rear power window motor RH circuit check
GW-80
B
C
D
E
F
G
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
●
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (Front LH)
A foreign material adheres to window glass
or glass run rubber.
●
Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
●
Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
—
H
GW
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-86
3. Limit switch circuit check LH
GW-58
4. Encoder circuit check LH
GW-63
J
—
K
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-86
L
3. Limit switch circuit check RH
GW-59
4. Encoder circuit check RH
GW-65
1. Check the retained power operation mode
setting.
GW-47
2. Door switch check
GW-67
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-19
1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check
GW-71
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (Front RH)
Power window retained power operation does not operate properly
Does not operate by front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch)
●
A foreign material adheres to window glass
or glass run rubber.
●
Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
●
Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
EI-32
Power window lock switch does not function
1. Power window lock switch circuit check
GW-76
Rear power drop glass does not operate
1. Rear power drop glass circuit check
GW-81
Rear power drop glass does not open
1. Rear power drop glass DOWN relay check
GW-83
Rear power drop glass does not close
1. Rear power drop glass UP relay check
GW-82
Revision: October 2004
GW-49
2005 Titan
M
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS004CP
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check 50A fusible link (letter f located in the fuse and fusible link box).
Check 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Check 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box).
NOTE:
Refer to GW-19, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer toPG3, "PRECAUTIONS"
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18, M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground.
11 (O) - Ground
38 (W/L) - Ground
70 (W/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0504E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground.
67 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
GW-50
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check (King Cab)
EIS004CQ
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 10
and ground.
1 (W/R) - Ground
10 (W/L) - Ground
B
C
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
E
LIIA0603E
F
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and
ground.
15 (B) - Ground
G
H
: Continuity should exist.
GW
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit are OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
LIIA0604E
3. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
M
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 10.
68 (W/L) - 10 (W/L)
69 (W/R) - 1 (W/R)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0505E
Revision: October 2004
GW-51
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
LIIA0917E
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
EIS004CR
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 10, D8
terminal 19 and ground.
10 (W/L) - Ground
19 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LIIA0307E
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and
ground.
17 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit are OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1253E
Revision: October 2004
GW-52
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 10 and D8 terminal 19.
68 (W/L) - 10 (W/L)
69 (W/R) - 19 (W/R)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
A
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
WIIA0506E
4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
F
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
G
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
GW
J
LIIA0917E
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check
K
EIS004CS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 10 and
ground.
10 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LIIA1257E
Revision: October 2004
GW-53
2005 Titan
M
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and
ground.
11 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit are OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1258E
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 10.
69 (W/R) - 10 (W/R)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0507E
4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and ground.
69 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0508E
Revision: October 2004
GW-54
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
EIS004CT
1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
8 (G/R)
D7
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
UP
Battery voltage
DOWN
0
UP
0
DOWN
Battery voltage
(-)
Ground
11 (G/W)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
C
D
E
LIIA0317E
F
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11
and front power window motor LH connector D9 terminals 1, 2.
8 (G/R) - 2 (G/R)
11 (G/W) - 1 (G/W)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
GW
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
LIIA1260E
Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check
EIS004CU
L
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
9 (G)
D105
Ground
8 (L)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
UP
0
DOWN
Battery voltage
UP
Battery voltage
DOWN
0
(-)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
Revision: October 2004
GW-55
LIIA1261E
2005 Titan
M
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminals 8, 9
and front power window motor RH connector D104 terminals 1, 2.
8 (L) - 2 (L)
9 (G) - 1 (G)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1262E
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab)
EIS004CV
1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and
ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
D7
(+)
9 (O)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Driver side door window is
between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
Driver side door window is
between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF)
5
(-)
Ground
LIIA0339E
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and ground.
5 (O) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WIIA0509E
Revision: October 2004
GW-56
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (W/B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
D
LIIA0923E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14.
6 (W/B) - 14 (W/B)
: Continuity should exist.
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
GW
WIIA0510E
J
5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9.
5 (O) - 9 (O)
: Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
LIIA0925E
Revision: October 2004
GW-57
K
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
EIS004CW
1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
D7
9 (O)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Driver side door window is
between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
Driver side door window is
between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF)
5
(-)
Ground
LIIA0339E
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and ground.
5 (O) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WIIA0509E
3. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (W/B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LIIA0923E
Revision: October 2004
GW-58
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
A
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 2.
6 (W/B) - 2 (W/B)
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
E
WIIA0511E
5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
F
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9.
5 (O) - 9 (O)
G
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
GW
J
LIIA0925E
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH
EIS004CX
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 15 and
ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
D105
15 (G/W)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Passenger side door window
is between fully-open and
just before fully-closed position (ON)
0
Passenger side door window
is between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF)
5
(-)
Ground
GW-59
L
M
LIIA1263E
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
K
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 5 and ground.
5 (G/W) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WIIA0509E
3. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (W/B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LIIA0923E
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 3.
6 (W/B) - 3 (W/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0512E
Revision: October 2004
GW-60
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
A
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 15 and
front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 5.
15 (G/W) - 5 (G/W)
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
E
LIIA1265E
Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab)
EIS004CY
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (BR) - Ground
F
G
H
: Approx. 10V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
GW
J
K
WIIA0513E
2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 5.
4 (BR) - 5 (BR)
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA1160E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
GW-61
2005 Titan
M
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (W/B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LIIA0923E
4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14.
6 (W/B) - 14 (W/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0510E
5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground with
oscilloscope.
Connector
D7
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
(-)
13 (G/Y)
Ground
Condition
Signal
Opening
OCC3383D
LIIA0364E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
GW-62
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 3 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 13.
3 (G/Y) - 13 (G/Y)
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
LIIA0937E
F
Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
EIS004CZ
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (BR) - Ground
H
: Approx. 10V
GW
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
WIIA0513E
2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15.
4 (BR) - 15 (BR)
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA0936E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
GW-63
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND
1.
2.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (W/B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LIIA0923E
4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 2.
6 (W/B) - 2 (W/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0511E
5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground with
oscilloscope.
Connector
D7
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
(-)
13 (G/Y)
Ground
Condition
Signal
Opening
OCC3383D
LIIA0364E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
GW-64
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 3 and main power window
and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 13.
3 (G/Y) - 13 (G/Y)
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
LIIA0937E
F
Encoder Circuit Check Front RH
EIS004D0
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (G/R) - Ground
H
: Approx. 10V
GW
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
WIIA0513E
2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 4 and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 4.
4 (G/R) - 4 (G/R)
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA1266E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
GW-65
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (W/B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LIIA0923E
4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 3.
6 (W/B) - 3 (W/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0512E
5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect front power window motor RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector and ground with
oscilloscope.
Connector
D105
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
(-)
12 (G/Y)
Ground
Condition
Signal
Opening
OCC3383D
LIIA1267E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: October 2004
GW-66
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 3 and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 12.
3 (G/Y) - 12 (G/Y)
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-85,
"FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
LIIA1268E
F
Door Switch Check
EIS004D1
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check front door switches (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Monitor item
G
H
Condition
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
OPEN
: ON
CLOSE
: OFF
OPEN
: ON
CLOSE
: OFF
GW
J
K
PIIA2464E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
M
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
Connector
Front RH
M19
(+)
(–)
12 (R/L)
Ground
Front LH
M20
L
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
OPEN
0
CLOSE
Battery voltage
OPEN
0
CLOSE
Battery voltage
47 (SB)
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switches are OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
WIIA0515E
GW-67
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door switch LH or RH and BCM.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M19 terminal 47 (LH) or connector M18 terminal 12 (LH).
Front door switch LH
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
Front door switch RH
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH)
or B108 (RH) terminal 2 and ground.
2 (SB or R/L) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0947E
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check continuity between each front door switch terminal 2 and body ground part of front door switch.
Terminal
2
Body ground part
of front door
switch
Door switch
Continuity
Pushed
No
Released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning front door switch.
LIIA0948E
Revision: October 2004
GW-68
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab)
EIS004D2
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) INPUT SIGNAL
●
A
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY
CYL LK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR
LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA
MONITOR" .
B
C
“KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted
in door key cylinder is turned to lock.
D
E
LIIA0047E
●
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY
CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR
LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA
MONITOR" .
F
“KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted
in door key cylinder was turned to unlock.
G
H
LIIA0050E
GW
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
6 (L)
D7
Ground
7 (R)
Key position
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral / Lock
5
Lock
0
Neutral / Unlock
5
Unlock
0
(–)
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
GW-69
J
K
L
M
LIIA1161E
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6.
7 (R) - 6 (R)
6 (L) - 1 (L)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1602E
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and
ground.
5 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0516E
4. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5.
Terminals
6
5
1
Key position
Continuity
Neutral / Lock
No
Unlock
Yes
Neutral / Unlock
No
Lock
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
GW-70
WIIA0517E
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
EIS004D3
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) INPUT SIGNAL
●
A
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY
CYL LK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR
LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA
MONITOR" .
B
C
“KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted
in door key cylinder is turned to lock.
D
E
LIIA0047E
●
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY
CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR
LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA
MONITOR" .
F
“KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted
in door key cylinder was turned to unlock.
G
H
LIIA0050E
GW
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
6 (R)
D7
Ground
4 (L)
Key position
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral / Lock
5
Lock
0
Neutral / Unlock
5
Unlock
0
(–)
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
GW-71
J
K
L
M
LIIA1269E
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6.
6 (R) - 6 (R)
4 (L) - 1 (L)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1571E
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and
ground.
5 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0516E
4. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5.
Terminals
6
5
1
Key position
Continuity
Neutral / Lock
No
Unlock
Yes
Neutral / Unlock
No
Lock
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
GW-72
WIIA0517E
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (King Cab)
EIS004D4
1. CHECK SERIAL LINK OUTPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK
CDL LOCK SW
●
B
C
: ON
When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK
CDL UNLOCK SW
: ON
D
E
PIIA6538E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch, and make sure the driver side and passenger side doors are closed.
2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope when door lock and unlock
switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be
detected during 10 second just after door lock and unlock switch
(front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
F
G
H
GW
Signal
(–)
J
M18
22 (G)
Ground
PIIA6379E
K
PIIA2344E
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
M
GW-73
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-71, "Active Test" .
When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, the driver side
and passenger side windows should lower.
PIIA3080E
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and
ground.
15 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA0604E
4.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and
ground.
11 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1270E
Revision: October 2004
GW-74
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 12.
22 (G) - 12 (LG/W)
B
: Continuity should exist.
C
D
E
WIIA0518E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 16.
22 (G) - 16 (LG/W)
F
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
H
GW
WIIA0519E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-75
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (Crew Cab)
EIS004D5
1. CHECK SERIAL LINK OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK
CDL LOCK SW
●
: ON
When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK
CDL UNLOCK SW
: ON
PIIA6538E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch, and make sure the driver side and passenger side doors are closed.
2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope when door lock and unlock
switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be
detected during 10 second just after door lock and unlock switch
(front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
Connector
M18
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
22 (G)
Ground
Signal
PIIA6379E
PIIA2344E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
GW-76
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
A
Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-71, "Active Test" .
B
When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, the driver side
and passenger side windows should lower.
C
D
PIIA3080E
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
F
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and
ground.
17 (B) - Ground
E
H
GW
: Continuity should exist.
J
K
LIIA0392E
4.
L
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and
ground.
11 (B) - Ground
M
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1270E
Revision: October 2004
GW-77
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 14.
22 (G) - 14 (LG/W)
: Continuity should exist.
WIIA0518E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 16.
22 (G) - 16 (LG/W)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0519E
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
EIS004D6
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window motor LH connector D204 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
(+)
(-)
2 (L)
D204
Ground
1 (G)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
UP
Battery voltage
DOWN
0
UP
0
DOWN
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power window motor LH. Refer to GW-88,
"Rear Door Glass" .
NG
>> GO TO 2
Revision: October 2004
GW-78
LIIA0323E
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch LH.
Check continuity between rear power window switch LH connector D203 terminals 4, 5 and rear power
window motor LH connector D204 terminals 1, 2.
4 (G) - 1 (G)
5 (L) - 2 (L)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
WIIA0520E
F
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect rear power window switch LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window switch LH connector D203 terminal 1 and ground.
1 (W/L) - Ground
G
: Battery voltage
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
GW
J
LIIA0325E
K
4. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 3
and connector D8 terminal 17.
1 (R/Y) – 17 (B)
3 (R/B) – 17 (B)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
LIIA0949E
Revision: October 2004
GW-79
2005 Titan
L
M
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
EIS004D7
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window motor RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window motor RH connector D304 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
2 (BR)
D304
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
UP
Battery voltage
DOWN
0
UP
0
DOWN
Battery voltage
(-)
Ground
1 (Y/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power window motor RH. Refer to GW-88,
"Rear Door Glass" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0323E
2. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch RH.
Check continuity between rear power window switch RH connector D303 terminals 4, 5 and rear power
window motor RH connector D304 terminals 1, 2.
4 (Y/B) - 1 (Y/B)
5 (BR) - 2 (BR)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0520E
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect rear power window switch RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window switch RH connector D303 terminal 1 and ground.
1 (W/L) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0325E
Revision: October 2004
GW-80
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 5, 7
and connector D8 terminal 17.
5 (L) - 17 (B)
7 (R) - 17 (B)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
D
E
WIIA0521E
F
Rear Power Drop Glass Circuit Check
EIS00590
1. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS SWITCH OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power drop glass switch.
Check continuity between rear power drop glass switch terminals 1, 3 and 5.
H
Terminal
Connector
Condition
Continuity
3
Rear power drop glass
switch is pressed UP.
Yes
3
Rear power drop glass
switch is pressed
DOWN.
Yes
(+)
(–)
1
5
M156
GW
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace rear power drop glass switch.
K
LIIA1840E
2. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
L
Check continuity between rear power drop glass switch connector M156 terminal 3 and ground.
3 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1841E
Revision: October 2004
GW-81
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear power drop glass motor.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power drop glass motor connector B80 terminals 1, 4 and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
(+)
(–)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Up
Battery voltage
Down
0
Up
0
Down
Battery voltage
1 (L/Y)
B80
Ground
4 (B/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power drop glass motor. Refer to GW-15,
"REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check
LIIA1842E
EIS00591
1. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power drop glass up relay.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power drop glass up relay connector and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
(+)
1 (W/L)
M154
5 (L/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1843E
2. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY
Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay terminals 3 and 4, 3 and 5.
Terminal
3
3
4
5
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
No
No current supply
Yes
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace rear power drop glass up relay.
Revision: October 2004
GW-82
WIIA0291E
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between rear power drop glass up relay connector
M154 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (B) - Ground
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
LIIA1844E
4. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
E
Disconnect rear power drop glass switch.
Check continuity between rear power drop glass up relay connector M154 terminal 2 and rear power drop glass switch connector M156 terminal 1.
2 (G) - 1 (G)
F
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power drop glass switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
LIIA1845E
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
EIS00592
1. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power drop glass down relay.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power drop glass down relay connector and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
(+)
GW
K
L
1 (W/L)
M155
5 (L/B)
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1843E
Revision: October 2004
GW-83
2005 Titan
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN RELAY
Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay terminals 3 and 4, 3 and 5.
Terminal
3
3
4
5
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
No
No current supply
Yes
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace rear power drop glass down relay.
WIIA0291E
3. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay connector M155 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1844E
4. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN RELAY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect rear power drop glass switch.
Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay
connector M155 terminal 2 and rear power drop glass switch
connector M156 terminal 5.
2 (L/W) - 5 (L/W)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power drop glass switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0522E
Revision: October 2004
GW-84
2005 Titan
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:80300
A
EIS00622
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
LIIA0959E
J
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" .
Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt.
Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Remove the inside seal.
Remove the glass bolts.
6.
While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and
pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
: 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
GW-85
L
M
LIIA1687E
Glass bolts
K
2005 Titan
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Fitting Inspection
●
●
Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts,
guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" .
Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt.
Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Remove the inside seal.
Remove the glass bolts.
Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool.
Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly.
Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly
Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
●
Wire wear
●
Regulator deformation
●
Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body
grease.
LIIA0670E
Installation
1.
2.
3.
Install the regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" .
Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly.
Align the glass and install the glass bolts.
Glass bolts
4.
5.
: 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Reset the limit switch. Refer to GW-86, "Setting of Limit Switch" .
Install front door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" .
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
●
Removal and installation of the regulator.
●
Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
●
Removal and installation of the glass.
●
Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
Revision: October 2004
GW-86
2005 Titan
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
1.
2.
Raise the glass to the top position.
While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to
the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to
the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool.
4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the
top position.
A
B
C
SIIA0347E
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-87
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
PFP:82300
EIS004DA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" .
Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Remove the inside seal.
Remove the glass run from the partition glass.
Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to
remove the sash.
Remove the glass bolts and the glass.
Remove the partition glass from the panel.
SIIA0290E
INSTALLATION
LIIA0960E
1.
2.
3.
Install the partition glass in the panel.
Install the partition sash.
Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass
the bolts to the specified torque.
Glass bolts
4.
5.
: 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Install the inside seal.
Install the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" .
FITTING INSPECTION
●
Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
Revision: October 2004
GW-88
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
●
Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt,
guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-89
2005 Titan
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass Regulator
EIS0062K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" .
Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen.
Remove the inside seal.
Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
SIIA0290E
5.
6.
Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the
panel.
Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly.
SIIA0291E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
●
Gear wear
●
Regulator deformation
●
Spring damage
●
Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
GW-90
2005 Titan
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Removal
PFP:83300
A
EIS004DB
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Rear Door - King Cab" .
If the window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an
inflatable pump bag.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety
glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
●
When the side window glass is to be reused, do not use a
cutting knife or power cutting tool.
●
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
●
Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may
develop into cracks.
B
C
D
E
SBF034B
F
Installation
EIS00596
G
H
GW
J
K
L
LIIA1244E
Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
●
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
●
Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
●
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
●
Install removed parts.
WARNING:
●
Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
●
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
●
Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
●
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the glass in case of an accident.
●
Revision: October 2004
GW-91
2005 Titan
M
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
CAUTION:
●
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
●
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
●
Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
●
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass
EIS00597
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward.
To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: October 2004
GW-92
2005 Titan
INSIDE MIRROR
INSIDE MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR —
PFP:96321
A
EIS004DC
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0628E
Revision: October 2004
GW-93
2005 Titan
INSIDE MIRROR
Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.
EIS004DD
Remove connector cover.
Slide the mirror upward to remove.
Disconnect the connector.
LIIA0277E
1.
Inside mirror
2.
Inside mirror finisher
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
GW-94
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:25350
A
EIS0059S
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIIA1986E
Revision: October 2004
GW-95
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description
EIS0059T
The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM (body control module) and IPDM E/R (intelligent
power distribution module engine room).
The rear window defogger operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 15A fuse (Nos. 46 and 47, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to rear window defogger relay (located in the IPDM E/R), and
●
through 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R) (with heated mirrors)
●
to heated mirror relay (located in the IPDM E/R) (with heated mirrors), and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch turned to ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through ignition switch
●
to rear window defogger relay (located in the IPDM E/R), and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to front air control terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
to front air control terminal 1
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
When front air control (rear window defogger switch) is turned to ON, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 9
●
through front air control terminal 11
●
through front air control terminal 1
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then rear window defogger switch is illuminated.
Then BCM recognizes that rear window defogger switch is turned to ON.
Then it sends rear window defogger switch signals to IPDM E/R and display control unit (with navigation) or
display unit (without navigation) via CAN communication (CAN-H, CAN-L).
When display control unit (with navigation) or display unit (without navigation) receives rear window defogger
switch signals, and is displayed on the screen.
When IPDM E/R receives rear window defogger switch signals, ground is supplied
●
to rear window defogger relay (located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Then, rear window defogger relay is energized.
With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
If the rear power drop glass is lowered while the rear window defogger is ON, the rear window defogger will
turn OFF. The rear window defogger will turn ON when the rear power drop glass is raised to the closed position if the rear window defogger switch is ON.
When rear window defogger relay is turned to ON, (with door mirror defogger), power is supplied
●
through heated mirror relay (located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 23
●
to door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 10 (with automatic drive positioner), terminal 4 (without
automatic drive positioner).
Door mirror defogger (LH and RH) is grounded through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window and door
mirror defogger filaments heat and defog the mirror.
Revision: October 2004
GW-96
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CAN Communication System Description
EIS0059U
A
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-97
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Schematic
EIS0059V
WIWA0624E
Revision: October 2004
GW-98
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF —
EIS0059W
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0625E
Revision: October 2004
GW-99
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
WIWA0626E
Revision: October 2004
GW-100
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0627E
Revision: October 2004
GW-101
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Terminal and Reference Values for BCM
Terminal
Wire color
9
Y/B
Item
EIS0059X
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch signal
When rear window defogger switch is pressed.
0
When rear window defogger switch is OFF.
5
Ignition switch ON or START
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
38
W/L
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
Ground
—
0
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
67
B
70
W/B
Battery voltage
Terminal and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
Terminal
Wire color
23
GR/W
Item
Heated mirror relay output
signal
Condition
4.
5.
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
When rear window defogger switch is ON.
Battery voltage
When rear window defogger switch is OFF.
0
38
B
Ground (Power)
—
0
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
59
B
Ground (Signal)
—
0
60
B
Rear window defogger output
signal
When rear window defogger switch is ON.
Battery voltage
When rear window defogger switch is OFF.
0
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
EIS0059Y
EIS0059Z
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-96, "System Description" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-104,
"Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart" .
Does rear window defogger operate normally? YES: GO TO 5, NO: GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
GW-102
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS005A0
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
C
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
D
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
E
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
F
G
H
GW
BBIA0369E
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “BCM”.
If “BCM” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
GW-103
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
6.
Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”.
LIIA0153E
7.
Select diagnosis mode, “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST”.
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Monitor item “Operation”
Content
REAR DEF SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “Press (ON)/others (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger
switch.
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “IGN (ON)/OFF” status determined with the ignition switch signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Display Item List
Test item
Content
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Gives a drive signal to the rear window defogger to activate it.
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart
●
EIS005A1
Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Symptom
Diagnoses / Service procedure
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
2. IPDM E/R auto active test check
Rear window defogger and door mirror defoggers do not
operate. (With heated mirrors)
4. Rear window defogger circuit check
GW-108
2. IPDM E/R auto active test check
PG-28
GW-106
PG-22
3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check
GW-107
4. Rear window defogger circuit check
GW-108
5. Filament check
GW-118
6. Replace IPDM E/R
PG-28
1. Rear window defogger circuit check
GW-108
2. Filament check
GW-118
3. Replace IPDM E/R
Revision: October 2004
PG-22
GW-107
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
Rear window defogger does not operate but both of door
mirror defoggers operate. (With heated mirrors)
GW-106
3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check
5. Replace IPDM E/R
Rear window defogger does not operate.
(Without heated mirrors)
Refer to page
GW-104
PG-28
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Symptom
Both door mirror defoggers do not operate but rear window
defogger operates. (With heated mirrors)
Door mirror LH defogger does not operate.
Diagnoses / Service procedure
1. Door mirror defogger power supply circuit check
2. Replace IPDM E/R
1. Door mirror LH defogger circuit check
Refer to page
GW-110,
GW-112
PG-28
GW-114,
GW-115
Door mirror RH defogger does not operate.
1. Door mirror RH defogger circuit check
GW-116,
GW-117
Rear window defogger switch does not light, and rear window defogger is not shown on the display, but rear window
defogger operates.
1. Rear window defogger switch circuit check
GW-107
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
GW-105
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS005A2
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check 10A fuse (No.59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
Check 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
NOTE:
Refer to GW-106, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
●
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18, M20 terminals 38, 70
and ground.
70 (W/B) - Ground
38 (W/L) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0914E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground.
67 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> BCM power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
GW-106
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check
EIS005A3
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION
A
With CONSULT-II
Check (“REAR DEF SW”, “IGN ON SW”) in DATA MONITOR mode
with CONSULT-II.
B
When rear window defogger switch is turned to ON
REAR DEF SW
: ON
When ignition switch is turned to ON
IGN ON SW
: ON
C
D
PIIA2373E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
M18
(+)
9 (Y/B)
Ground
F
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch is pressed.
0
Rear window defogger
switch is OFF.
5
(–)
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear window defogger switch check is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
G
H
GW
WIIA0523E
J
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and front air control.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and front air control connector M49 terminal 11.
9 (Y/B) - 11 (Y/B)
4.
E
K
L
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and
ground
9 (Y/B) - Ground
M
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2035E
Revision: October 2004
GW-107
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and
ground.
9 (Y/B) - Ground
: Approx. 5
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0523E
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check
EIS005A4
1. CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses for IPDM E/R are blown.
COMPONENT PARTS
AMPERE
FUSE NO.
15A
46
15A
47
IPDM E/R
NOTE:
Refer to GW-95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse, refer to GW95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E124 terminal 60 and ground.
60 (B) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WIIA0525E
Revision: October 2004
GW-108
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
2 (B/W) - 60 (B/W)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and rear window defogger cut-off relay.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E124 terminal 60 and rear window defogger cut-off relay
connector M152 terminal 2.
: Continuity should exist.
C
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E124 terminal
60 and rear window defogger cut-off relay connector M152 terminal 3.
3 (B/W) - 60 (B/W)
B
D
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
LIIA1987E
F
4. INSPECTION OF REAR POWER WINDOW DEFOGGER CUT-OFF RELAY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear window defogger cut-off relay.
Check continuity between rear window defogger cut-off relay
terminals 3 and 5.
Condition
G
H
Continuity
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger cut-out relay.
GW
SEF145X
5. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CUT-OFF RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
K
Place rear power drop glass in the closed (UP) position.
Check continuity between rear window defogger cut-off relay connector M152 terminal 1 and ground.
1 (W/R) - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
M
LIIA1988E
Revision: October 2004
J
GW-109
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
6. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS MOTOR (DEF CUT-OFF SWITCH)
1.
2.
Disconnect rear power drop glass motor (def cut-off switch).
Check continuity between rear power drop glass motor (def cut-off switch) terminals 2 and 3.
Rear power drop
glass position
Terminal
2
3
Continuity
Closed (UP)
Yes
Open (DOWN)
more than 18 mm
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace rear power drop glass motor (def cut-off
switch). Refer to GW-15, "REAR WINDOW GLASS
AND REGULATOR" .
LIIA1989E
7. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear window defogger.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger connector B77 terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
B77
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch ON.
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF.
0
(–)
1 (W/L)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1847E
8. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear window defogger ground.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear window defogger connector B78 terminal 2 and ground.
2 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check filament. Refer to GW-118, "Filament Check" .
● If filament is OK.
Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
● If filament is NG.
Repair filament.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1848E
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive
Positioner)
EIS005A6
1. CHECK FUSE
Check if the following fuse for IPDM E/R is blown.
COMPONENT PARTS
AMPERE
FUSE NO.
IPDM E/R
15A
43
Revision: October 2004
GW-110
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
NOTE:
Refer to GW-95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to GW95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
B
C
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector and ground.
Connector
E120
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
23 (GR/W)
(–)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
D
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
F
WIIA0526E
G
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and door mirror LH or RH.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E120 terminal 23 and door mirror connector D4 (LH) or
GW
D107 (RH) terminal 4.
23 (GR/W) - 4 (GR/W)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
L
WIIA0527E
4. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
M
Check continuity between each door mirror connector D4 (LH) or D107 (RH) terminal 6 and ground.
6 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0970E
Revision: October 2004
GW-111
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
5. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 4 and 6.
4-6
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to
GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" .
WIIA0528E
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner)
EIS005A7
1. CHECK FUSE
Check if the following fuse for IPDM E/R is blown.
COMPONENT PARTS
AMPERE
FUSE NO.
IPDM E/R
15A
43
NOTE:
Refer to GW-95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to GW95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
E120
23 (GR/W)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Ground
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
Revision: October 2004
GW-112
WIIA0526E
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and door mirror LH or RH.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E120 terminal 23 and door mirror connector D4 (LH) or
D107 (RH) terminal 10.
23 (GR/W) - 10 (GR/W)
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
WIIA0529E
F
4. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between each door mirror connector D4 (LH) or D107 (RH) terminal 11 and ground.
11 (B) - Ground
G
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
GW
J
WIIA0530E
5. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
K
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 10 and 11.
10 - 11
: Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH.
M
WIIA0531E
Revision: October 2004
GW-113
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner)
EIS005A8
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
D4
(+)
4 (GR/W)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0532E
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D4 terminal
6 and ground.
6 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0970E
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 4 and 6.
4-6
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to
GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" .
WIIA0528E
Revision: October 2004
GW-114
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner)
EIS005A9
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
D4
10
(GR/W)
C
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Ground
B
D
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
LIIA1456E
F
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D4 terminal
11 and ground.
11 (B) - Ground
H
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
GW
J
LIIA1458E
K
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check continuity between door mirror terminals 10 and 11.
10 - 11
L
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror
Assembly" .
M
WIIA0531E
Revision: October 2004
GW-115
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner)
EIS005AA
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
D107
(+)
4 (GR/W)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
(–)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0532E
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D107 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0970E
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 4 and 6.
4-6
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror
Assembly" .
WIIA0528E
Revision: October 2004
GW-116
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner)
EIS005AB
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
D107
10 (GR/W)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
(–)
Ground
B
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
LIIA1456E
F
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D107 terminal 11 and ground.
11 (B) - Ground
H
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
GW
J
LIIA1458E
K
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
L
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 10 and 11.
10 - 11
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror
Assembly" .
M
WIIA0531E
Revision: October 2004
GW-117
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Rear Window Defogger Signal Check
EIS005AC
1. CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LINE
AV communication line check is executed. Refer to BCS-8, "CAN Communication System Description" .
Is rear window defogger displayed on the display?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace display control unit.
2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
CAN communication line check is executed. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> In addition, it is necessary to check CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
Filament Check
1.
EIS005AD
When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe.Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.
SEL122R
2.
Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
SEL263
Revision: October 2004
GW-118
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
3.
4.
If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery
voltage.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SEL265
Filament Repair
EIS005AE
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
●
●
●
●
●
●
H
Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent)
Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
Drawing pen
Heat gun
Alcohol
Cloth
GW
J
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
K
L
M
PIIA0215E
4.
After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
Revision: October 2004
GW-119
2005 Titan
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
5.
Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area
for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
SEL013D
Revision: October 2004
GW-120
2005 Titan
DOOR MIRROR
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —
PFP:96301
A
EIS004DE
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
WIWA0629E
Revision: October 2004
GW-121
2005 Titan
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR —
EIS004DF
WIWA0630E
Revision: October 2004
GW-122
2005 Titan
DOOR MIRROR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0530E
Revision: October 2004
GW-123
2005 Titan
DOOR MIRROR
Door Mirror Assembly
EIS004DG
STANDARD MIRROR
LIIA1570E
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the mirror bodies.
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" .
2. Disconnect the mirror electrical connector.
3. Remove the door mirror assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
GW-124
2005 Titan
DOOR MIRROR
TRAILER TOW MIRROR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA1619E
GW
Removal
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the mirror bodies.
1. Remove the front door sash cover. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter" .
2. Remove the door mirror harness connector.
3. Remove the door mirror mounting nuts, and remove the door mirror assembly.
J
K
Installation
L
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Door Mirror Glass
EIS004DH
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Set mirror assembly mirror glass upward.
Apply protective tape to mirror housing.
Insert a screwdriver at notch and gently pry mirror glass and
holder from mirror holder bracket.
Disconnect two electrical connectors from mirror glass and
holder.
LIIA1591E
Revision: October 2004
GW-125
2005 Titan
DOOR MIRROR
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set mirror holder bracket and mirror glass and holder in the horizontal position.
Connect two electrical connectors to the back of the mirror
holder.
Align mirror glass and holder with mirror holder bracket and
push mirror glass and holder onto mirror holder bracket.
Rotate mirror to ensure proper installation.
LIIA1592E
Revision: October 2004
GW-126
2005 Titan
M
INDEX
A
SECTION
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
IDX
IDX-1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Numerics
4LO switch .........................................................
4WD shift switch ................................................
4WD system description ....................................
4WD system diagram ........................................
TF-42
TF-45
TF-15
TF-18
A
A/C air flow ..................................................... MTC-25
A/C compressor clutch removal and installation . MTC116
A/C compressor mounting ............................ MTC-115
A/C compressor precaution .............................. MTC-9
A/C compressor special service tool ............... MTC-12
A/C control operation (auto A/C) ..................... MTC-24
A/C diagnostic work flow (auto A/C) ............... MTC-89
A/C evaporator .............................................. MTC-122
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system identification .... MTC-6
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ....... MTC-4
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure .......
MTC-112
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service tools .. MTC-12
A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution ...
MTC-9
A/C lubricant (R134a) ..................................... MTC-20
A/C lubrication oil ............................................ MTC-20
A/C operational check ..................................... MTC-47
A/C self-diagnoses (auto A/C) ......... MTC-45, MTC-89
A/C service data specification ....................... MTC-127
A/C trouble diagnoses (auto A/C) ................... MTC-28
A/C, A - Wiring diagram .................................. MTC-37
A/T fluid checking ...................... AT-12, AT-52, MA-21
A/T fluid replacement ............................. AT-12, MA-23
A/T fluid temperature sensor ........................... AT-127
A/T IND - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-40
A/T indicator ........................................................ DI-40
A/T self-diagnoses ............................................. AT-87
A/T shift lock system ........................................ AT-239
A/T trouble diagnoses ........................................ AT-43
A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN ............................ AT-98
A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTS .......................... AT-128
A/T Wiring diagram AT - MAIN ........................ AT-174
A/T Wiring diagram AT - MMSW ..................... AT-162
A/T Wiring diagram AT - NONDTC .................. AT-183
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PNP/SW ................... AT-106
A/T Wiring diagram AT - STSIG ...................... AT-101
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSS A/T ................... AT-111
ABS - Wiring diagram ...... BRC-16, BRC-56, BRC-103
ABS (anti-lock brake system) BRC-8, BRC-47, BRC-94
Accelerator control system ............................... ACC-2
Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor . EC-568, EC574, EC-588
Accelerator pedal released position learning ..... EC-89
AF1B1-Wiring diagram EC-457, EC-466, EC-475, EC485, EC-496, EC-506, EC-518
AF1B2-Wiring diagram EC-459, EC-468, EC-477, EC487, EC-498, EC-508, EC-520
AF1HB1-Wiring diagram .................................. EC-383
AF1HB2-Wiring diagram ................................. EC-385
Aiming adjustment .................................. LT-29, LT-73
Air bag ............................................................... SRS-3
Air bag disposal .............................................. SRS-60
Air bag precautions .............................................. AP-2
Air cleaner and air duct ..................................... EM-14
Air cleaner filter replacement ............................ MA-16
Air conditioner cut control ................................. EC-28
Air flow meter - See Mass air flow sensor EC-171, EC180
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 .. EC-455, EC-464, EC-473, EC483, EC-493, EC-503, EC-515
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 heater ........................... EC-382
Air mix. door motor .......................................... MTC-56
Angular tightening application ............................. EM-3
APPS1 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-570
APPS2 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-576
APPS3 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-590
ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-550
ASC/SW - Wiring diagram .............................. EC-543
ASCBOF - Wiring diagram .............................. EC-627
ASCD ................................................................ EC-29
ASCD (automatic speed control device) ........... ACS-2
ASCD brake switch ........................... EC-548, EC-626
ASCD indicator lamp ....................................... EC-633
ASCD steering switch ..................................... EC-541
ASCIND - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-634
ATP switch ......................................................... TF-64
AUDIO - Wiring diagram .................................... AV-14
AUT/DP - Wiring diagram .................................. SE-19
Auto air conditioner - Wiring diagram .............. MTC-37
Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror ........................ GW-93
Autolamp ............................................................ LT-46
Automatic amplifier ......................................... MTC-49
Automatic drive positioner .................................. SE-11
Automatic transmission number .......................... GI-49
AV and NAVI control unit ................................... AV-80
AV communication line .................................... AV-104
B
Back door trim ..................................................... EI-32
Back sonar .......................................................... DI-59
BACK/L - Wiring diagram ................................. LT-102
Back-up lamp ................................................... LT-102
Ball joint (front) ................................................ FSU-14
Basic inspection ................................................ EC-71
Battery ................................................................. SC-4
Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester SC-6, SC-12,
SC-19
BCM (Body control module) .............................. BCS-3
Block heater ...................................................... EM-76
Blower motor .................................... MTC-67, MTC-97
Body alignment ................................................ BL-179
Body component parts ..................................... BL-161
Body construction ............................................ BL-177
Body exterior paint color .................................. BL-160
Body mounting ................................... BL-158, BL-159
Body repair ....................................................... BL-160
IDX-2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Body sealing ..................................................... BL-173
Brake booster .................................................... BR-18
Brake fluid level ................................................. MA-30
Brake hydraulic line ........................................... BR-12
Brake inspection ................................................ MA-30
Brake lines and cables inspection ..................... MA-30
Brake master cylinder ....................................... BR-15
Brake switch ........................ EC-548, EC-563, EC-626
BRK/SW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-564
Bulb specifications ........................................... LT-167
Bumper, front ...................................................... EI-14
Bumper, rear ....................................................... EI-18
C
Camshaft ........................................................... EM-44
Camshaft inspection .......................................... EM-47
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ................ EC-288
CAN - Wiring diagram EC-161, LAN-26, LAN-54, LAN82, LAN-112, LAN-145, LAN-174, LAN-208, LAN-237,
LAN-269, LAN-303, LAN-335, LAN-371, LAN-410
CAN (Controller Area Network) . WT-9, BRC-10, BRC50, BRC-97, SE-16, LAN-24, LAN-52, LAN-80, LAN110, LAN-143, LAN-172, LAN-206, LAN-235, LAN-267,
LAN-301, LAN-333, LAN-369, LAN-408
CAN communication ... EC-31, EC-160, AT-97, TF-19,
TF-64, RFD-45, RFD-71, WT-9, BRC-10, BRC-50, BRC97, SE-16, LAN-24, LAN-52, LAN-80, LAN-110, LAN143, LAN-172, LAN-206, LAN-235, LAN-267, LAN-301,
LAN-333, LAN-369, LAN-408
Canister-See EVAP canister ............................. EC-35
CHARGE - Wiring diagram ............................... SC-18
Charging system ............................................... SC-17
Chassis and body maintenance ........................ MA-20
Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 1 ........ MA-8
Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 2 ...... MA-10
CHIME - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-45
Circuit breaker ................................................... PG-68
Closed loop control ........................................... EC-25
Closed loop control (Bank 1) ........................... EC-433
Closed loop control (Bank 2) ........................... EC-433
Coil spring (front) ............................................... FSU-9
Collision diagnosis .......................................... SRS-67
Combination lamp, front, removal and installation . LT31
Combination lamp, rear, removal and installation .. LT118
Combination meter ................................................ DI-5
Combination switch ............................................ LT-92
COMBSW - Wiring diagram ............................... LT-92
COMM - Wiring diagram ................................. AV-104
COMPAS - Wiring diagram ................................. DI-27
Compass ............................................................. DI-26
Component Location (auto A/C) ..................... MTC-34
Compressor clutch removal and installation MTC-116
Compressor mounting .................................. MTC-115
Compressor precaution .................................... MTC-9
Compressor special service tool .................... MTC-12
Condenser .................................................... MTC-120
Connecting rod .................................................. EM-94
Connecting rod bearing clearance ..................... EM-94
Connecting rod bushing clearance .................... EM-94
Console box - See Instrument panel ................... IP-10
CONSULT for VDC .......... BRC-23, BRC-64, BRC-115
CONSULT-áU for engine ................................. EC-124
Control units (terminal arrangement) ................. PG-72
Control valve (A/T) ............................................. AT-37
Controller Area Network (CAN) . WT-9, BRC-10, BRC50, BRC-97, SE-16, LAN-24, LAN-52, LAN-80, LAN110, LAN-143, LAN-172, LAN-206, LAN-235, LAN-267,
LAN-301, LAN-333, LAN-369, LAN-408
Converter housing installation ............ AT-267, AT-270
COOL/F - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-439
Coolant mixture ratio ......................................... MA-12
Coolant replacement ......................................... MA-13
Cooling circuit (engine) ........................................ CO-8
Cooling fan ........................................................ CO-15
Cooling fan control ........................................... EC-436
Cooling fan motor ............................................ EC-445
Cooling unit (A/C evaporator) ...... MTC-100, MTC-122
Corrosion protection ......................................... BL-170
Crankcase ventilation system - See Positive crankcase
ventilation .......................................................... EC-45
Crankshaft ......................................................... EM-77
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ................... EC-281
Crash zone sensor .......................................... SRS-55
Cylinder block .................................................... EM-76
Cylinder block boring ......................................... EM-97
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
D
J
Data link connector for Consult ......... EC-126, EC-137
Daytime light system .......................................... LT-32
Daytime running light - See Daytime light system .. LT32
DEF - Wiring diagram ....................................... GW-99
Diagnosis sensor unit ...................................... SRS-58
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD system . EC-8,
EC-52
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart
EC-100
Differential gear oil replacement ........................ MA-27
DIFLOC - Wiring diagram ................................ RFD-48
Dimensions ......................................................... GI-50
Direct clutch solenoid valve ................ AT-149, AT-151
Display and amp.assembly ............................. MTC-49
Display Control Unit ......................................... AV-175
Dome light - See Interior lamp .......................... LT-126
Door glass .......................................... GW-85, GW-88
Door lock .......................................................... BL-127
Door mirror lamp ............................................... LT-126
Door trim .............................................................. EI-32
Door, front ........................................... BL-123, GW-85
Door, rear ........................................... BL-123, GW-88
Drive belt ........................................................... EM-12
Drive chain (Transfer) ......................................... TF-88
Driver air bag ................................................... SRS-44
DTC work support ............................................ EC-133
IDX-3
K
L
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
DTRL - Wiring diagram ....................................... LT-36
Duct and grilles ............................................. MTC-109
DVD Player ........................................................ AV-77
E
ECM input/output signal ..................... EC-116, EC-138
ECM power supply ............................. EC-154, EC-389
ECM relay ........................................................ EC-154
ECM/PW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-390
ECTS - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-194
Electric sunroof .................................................. RF-10
Electric throttle control actuator ......... EC-393, EC-395
Electrical load signal circuit .............................. EC-625
Electronic ignition (EI) system ........................... EC-26
Engine control circuit diagram ......................... EC-114
Engine control component parts location ......... EC-107
Engine control module (ECM) .......................... EC-379
Engine coolant .................................................. CO-10
Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) ... EC-192,
EC-205
Engine fail-safe system .................................... EC-102
Engine oil ............................................................. LU-7
Engine oil filter replacement ............................. MA-17
Engine oil precautions .......................................... GI-6
Engine oil replacement ..................................... MA-17
Engine removal ................................................. EM-72
Engine room cover ............................................ EM-11
Engine serial number .......................................... GI-49
ETC1 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-396
ETC2 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-403
ETC3 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-407
EVAP canister .................................................... EC-35
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ....
EC-314, EC-527
EVAP canister vent control valve ....... EC-321, EC-535
EVAP control system (small leak) diagnosis .. EC-306,
EC-345, EC-353
EVAP control system pressure sensor .... EC-328, EC331, EC-337
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring diagnosis
EC-301
EVAP vapor lines inspection ............................. MA-19
Evaporative emission (EVAP) system ............... EC-32
Evaporator .................................................... MTC-122
Exhaust manifold .............................................. EM-19
Exhaust system ................................................... EX-3
Exhaust system inspection .................................. EX-3
Expansion valve ............................................ MTC-123
F
F/FOG - Wiring diagram ..................................... LT-66
F/PUMP - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-615
Final drive removal and installation . FFD-12, RFD-14,
RFD-82
Flow charts ......................................................... GI-27
Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) ........................ AT-127
Fluids ................................................................ MA-11
Fluorescent leak detector .............................. MTC-123
Fog lamp, front ................................................... LT-64
Foot lamp ......................................................... LT-127
Freeze frame data ............................... EC-53, EC-127
Front brake solenoid valve ................. AT-145, AT-147
Front bumper ...................................................... EI-14
Front case (Transfer) ......................................... TF-88
Front combination lamp removal and installation LT-31
Front door ............................. BL-123, BL-127, GW-85
Front Door Trim ................................................... EI-32
Front drive shaft (Transfer) ................... TF-88, TF-108
Front fog lamp .................................................... LT-64
Front passenger air bag .................................. SRS-49
Front seat ........................................................... SE-91
Front seat belt ...................................................... SB-3
Front seat belt pre-tensioner ............... SRS-3, SRS-57
Front side air bag ............................................ SRS-52
Front washer ...................................................... WW-4
Front wiper ......................................................... WW-4
FTTS - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-252, EC-257
Fuel cut control (at no load high engine speed) EC-27
Fuel filter replacement ......................................... FL-5
Fuel gauge ............................................................ DI-5
Fuel injection system (Bank 1) .......... EC-233, EC-242
Fuel injection system (Bank 2) .......... EC-233, EC-242
Fuel injector and fuel tube ................................. EM-29
Fuel level sensor ................. EC-362, EC-364, EC-366
Fuel line inspection .............................................. FL-3
Fuel precautions ................................................... GI-5
Fuel pressure check .......................................... EC-92
Fuel pressure release ....................................... EC-92
Fuel pump ....................................................... EC-614
Fuel pump and gauge .......................................... FL-5
Fuel system .......................................................... FL-3
Fuel tank ............................................................ FL-10
Fuel tank temperature sensor ........... EC-250, EC-256
Fuel tank vacuum relief valve ........................... EC-35
FUELB1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-235, EC-244
FUELB2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-236, EC-245
Fuse ...................................................... PG-68, PG-78
Fuse block ......................................................... PG-77
Fusible link ............................................ PG-68, PG-78
G
Garage jack and safety stand ............................. GI-40
Gauges ................................................................. DI-5
Generator .......................................................... SC-17
Generic scan tool (GST) ................................. EC-136
Glass ........................ GW-11, GW-13, GW-85, GW-88
Glove box lamp ................................................ LT-152
GPS antenna ..................................................... AV-79
Grease .............................................................. MA-11
Ground distribution ............................................ PG-29
H
Handling precautions for plastics ..................... BL-198
Harness connector ............................................ PG-69
IDX-4
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Harness layout .................................................. PG-38
Hazard warning lamp ......................................... LT-75
Headlamp removal and installation .................... LT-31
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) .... EC-213, EC-222,
EC-411, EC-422
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) .... EC-213, EC-222,
EC-411, EC-422
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) ........ EC-163
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) ........ EC-163
Heated seat ....................................................... SE-88
Heater and cooling unit (Heater core) MTC-100, MTC102
Heater unit (heater core) ............. MTC-100, MTC-102
Height (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-50
HFC134a (R134a) system identification .......... MTC-6
HFC134a (R134a) system precaution .............. MTC-4
HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure MTC-112
HFC134a (R134a) system service tools ........ MTC-12
HFC134a system service equipment precaution MTC-9
High & low reverse clutch solenoid valve . AT-153, AT155
Horn ................................................................ WW-37
HORN - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-37
How to erase DTC for OBD system .................. EC-61
HSEAT - Wiring diagram ................................... SE-89
I
I/MIRR - Wiring diagram ................................... GW-93
IATS - Wiring diagram ..................................... EC-189
Identification plate .............................................. GI-48
Idle air volume learning ..................................... EC-90
Idle mixture ratio ................................................ EC-78
Idle speed .............................................. EC-71, EC-76
Idle speed control (ISC) .................... EC-370, EC-372
Ignition coil .......................................... EM-26, EC-596
Ignition control system .................................... EC-596
Ignition key hole illumination ............................ LT-126
Ignition timing ........................................ EC-71, EC-76
IGNSYS - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-597
ILL - Wiring diagram ......................................... LT-157
Illumination ....................................................... LT-151
INJECT - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-609
Injector ............................................................ EC-608
Input clutch solenoid valve ................. AT-141, AT-143
Instrument panel ................................................. IP-10
Instrument panel speaker .................................. AV-66
INT/L - Wiring diagram ................................... GW-122
Intake air temperature sensor ........... EC-188, EC-208
Intake door control linkage adjustment MTC-61, MTC64
Intake door motor .......................... MTC-60, MTC-105
Intake manifold .................................................. EM-15
Intake sensor ................................... MTC-92, MTC-96
Interior ................................................................. EI-36
Interior lamp ..................................................... LT-126
Interior lamp on-off control ............................... LT-127
Internal gear (Transfer) ...................................... TF-88
IPDM (Intelligent power distribution module engine
room) ................................................................. PG-16
A
J
Jacking points ..................................................... GI-40
Junction box (J/B) .............................................. PG-77
B
K
C
Key illumination ................................................ LT-127
Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system
BL-53
Knock sensor (KS) ........................................... EC-276
KS - Wiring diagram ........................................ EC-277
D
L
E
Leaf spring (rear) .............................................. RSU-8
Length (Dimensions) .......................................... GI-50
License lamp .................................................... LT-104
Lifting points ....................................................... GI-41
Line pressure solenoid valve ........................... AT-120
Line pressure test (A/T) ..................................... AT-53
Location of electrical units ................................. PG-65
Low coast brake solenoid valve .......... AT-157, AT-159
Low tire pressure warning system ...................... WT-7
Low tire pressure warning system - trouble diagnoses
WT-10
Low tire pressure warning system - Wiring diagram .....
WT-10
Lubricant (R134a) A/C .................................... MTC-20
Lubricants .......................................................... MA-11
Lubrication circuit (engine) .................................. LU-5
Lubrication oil A/C .......................................... MTC-20
Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood latches ....... MA-33
F
G
H
I
J
K
M
MAFS - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-174, EC-182
Magnet clutch ................................ MTC-74, MTC-116
MAIN - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-154
Mainshaft (Transfer) ........................................... TF-88
Maintenance (engine)Schedule 1 ........................ MA-7
Maintenance (engine)Schedule 2 ........................ MA-9
Major overhaul (Final drive) .............. RFD-15, RFD-83
Major overhaul (Transfer) ................................... TF-88
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ....................... EC-63
Map lamp .......................................................... LT-127
Mass air flow sensor (MAFS) ............ EC-171, EC-180
Meter .................................................................... DI-5
METER - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-10
MIL data link connectors circuit ....................... EC-636
MIL/DL - Wiring diagram .................................. EC-636
MIRROR - Wiring diagram .............................. GW-121
Misfire .............................................................. EC-268
Mode door control linkage adjustment ............ MTC-53
Mode door motor ........................... MTC-52, MTC-106
Model variation ................................................... GI-46
Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system .................. EC-24
IDX-5
L
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Multiport fuel injection precautions ....................... GI-5
Multi-remote control system ............................... BL-53
N
NATS - Wiring diagram .................................... BL-139
NAVI - Wiring diagram ....................................... AV-96
NAVI Control Unit ............................................ AV-174
NVH troubleshooting (AX) ................................. FAX-4
NVH troubleshooting (EM) .................................. EM-9
NVH troubleshooting (Final drive) ....... RFD-8, RFD-41
NVH troubleshooting (Propeller shaft) ................. PR-3
NVH troubleshooting (ST) .................................... PS-5
NVH troubleshooting (Transfer) ......................... TF-11
NVH troubleshooting (WT)NVH troubleshooting (WT) .
WT-3
O
O2H2B1 - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-165
O2H2B2 - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-167
O2S2B1 - Wiring diagram .. EC-215, EC-225, EC-414,
EC-425
O2S2B2 - Wiring diagram .. EC-217, EC-227, EC-416,
EC-427
Oil cooler (engine) ............................................. LU-11
Oil filter ............................................................... LU-10
Oil pan (engine) ................................................ EM-22
Oil pressure (engine) ........................................... LU-7
Oil pressure relief valve (engine) ......................... LU-5
Oil pump (engine) .............................................. LU-13
Oil seal replacement (engine) ........................... EM-57
Oil seal replacement (front of final drive) ........... FFD-8
Oil seal replacement (side of final drive) .......... FFD-10
On board diagnostic system .............................. EC-48
ORVR (On-board Refueling Vapor Recovery) ... EC-39
Overheat .......................................................... EC-436
P
P/SCKT - Wiring diagram ................................ WW-35
Pantograph jack .................................................. GI-40
Park/Neutral position switch ............................ EC-558
Park/neutral position switch (A/T) .................... AT-105
Parking brake control ........................................... PB-4
PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) ................. EC-45
Personal lamp ................................................... LT-127
PGC/V - Wiring diagram .................... EC-316, EC-529
PHASE - Wiring diagram ................... EC-288, EC-290
Piston pin inspection ......................................... EM-92
Piston ring inspection ........................................ EM-93
Piston to bore clearance ................................... EM-97
Planetary carrier (Transfer) ................... TF-88, TF-104
PNP/SW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-560
POS - Wiring diagram ...................................... EC-283
POWER - Wiring diagram .................................... PG-6
Power seat ......................................................... SE-84
Power steering fluid level .................................. MA-31
Power steering gear ........................................... PS-16
Power steering oil pump .................................... PS-27
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor ........... EC-374
Power steering system bleeding .......................... PS-6
Power supply routing .......................................... PG-4
Power window .................................................. GW-19
PRE/SE - Wiring diagram ................. EC-333, EC-339
Precautions (General) ........................................... GI-3
Precautions in repairing high strength steel ..... BL-201
Pressure switch 1 ............................... AT-147, AT-166
Pressure switch 2 ............................................. AT-159
Pressure switch 3 ............................... AT-143, AT-168
Pressure switch 5 ............................... AT-151, AT-170
Pressure switch 6 ............................... AT-155, AT-172
Pressure test (A/T) ............................................. AT-53
Propeller shaft ........................................... PR-4, PR-8
Propeller shaft inspection .................................. MA-26
Propeller shaft on vehicle service ....................... PR-8
Propeller shaft vibration ............................ PR-4, PR-8
PS/SEN - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-375
R
Radiator ............................................................ CO-12
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit ....................... AV-67
Rear bumper ....................................................... EI-18
Rear case (Transfer) .......................................... TF-88
Rear combination lamp removal and installation ... LT118
Rear door ............................................ BL-123, GW-88
Rear seat ......................................................... SE-100
Rear seat belt ....................................................... SB-8
Rear window .................................................... GW-13
Rear window defogger ..................................... GW-95
Refrigerant connection precaution .................... MTC-6
Refrigerant discharging evacuating charging MTC-112
Refrigerant general precaution ......................... MTC-5
Refrigerant lines .......... MTC-112, MTC-119, MTC-120
Refrigerant pressure sensor .. EC-620, MTC-79, MTC120
Remote keyless entry system ............................ BL-53
Removal and installation (A/T) ........... AT-265, AT-268
Removal and installation (Transfer) ................... TF-87
Revolution sensor (A/T) ................................... AT-109
Road wheel size .................................................. GI-50
Rocker cover ..................................................... EM-33
Room lamp ....................................................... LT-126
Room lamp - See Interior lamp ........................ LT-126
ROOM/L - Wiring diagram ............................... LT-134
RP/SEN - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-621
S
SAE J1979 - Servise $01 - 09 ........................... EC-48
SEAT - Wiring diagram .......................... SE-84, SE-85
Seat belt inspection ............................... SB-10, MA-34
Seat belt pre-tensioner .................................... SRS-57
Seat belt pre-tensioner disposal ..................... SRS-60
Seat belt, front ...................................................... SB-3
Seat belt, rear ...................................................... SB-8
IDX-6
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Seat, front .......................................................... SE-91
Seat, rear ........................................................ SE-100
Self-diagnosis (Transfer) .................................... TF-33
SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-451
Shift control (Transfer) ......................... TF-88, TF-110
Shift lock system .............................................. AT-239
Shock absorber (front) ...................................... FSU-9
Shock absorber (rear) ....................................... RSU-7
Side air bag ..................................................... SRS-52
Side air bag (satellite) sensor .......................... SRS-56
Side curtain air bag ......................................... SRS-53
Side trim .............................................................. EI-36
SMJ (super multiple junction) ............................ PG-75
SONAR - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-62
Spare tire size .................................................... GI-50
Spark plug ......................................................... EM-27
Spark plug replacement .................................... MA-18
Specification value .......................................... EC-143
Speedometer ......................................................... DI-5
Spiral cable ..................................................... SRS-46
SROOF - Wiring diagram .................................. RF-13
SRS - See Supplemental Restraint System ...... SRS-6
SRS - Wiring diagram ..................................... SRS-13
SRS Trouble diagnoses .................................... SRS-9
Stabilizer bar (front) ......................................... FSU-11
Stall test (A/T) .................................................... AT-52
Standardized relay ............................................ PG-73
START - Wiring diagram ................................... SC-11
Starter ............................................................... SC-10
Starting system ................................................. SC-10
Steering gear, linkage and transfer gear inspection .....
MA-31
Steering linkage ................................................ PS-16
Steering wheel and column ................................. PS-7
Step lamp ......................................................... LT-127
Stop lamp ........................................................... LT-98
Stop lamp switch ................. EC-548, EC-563, EC-626
STOP/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-99
Strut (front) ........................................................ FSU-9
Sun gear (Transfer) ............................................ TF-88
Sun roof, electric ............................................... RF-10
Sunroof .............................................................. RF-23
Supplemental Restraint System ........................ SRS-6
Supplemental restraint system - Wiring diagram . SRS13
Symbols and abbreviations ....................... GI-9, GI-22
Symptom matrix chart ..................................... EC-103
System readiness test (SRT) code ................... EC-54
T
Tachometer ........................................................... DI-5
Tail lamp ........................................................... LT-104
TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-106
TCM circuit diagram ........................................... AT-51
TCM inspection table ......................................... AT-84
TCS - Wiring diagram ....... BRC-15, BRC-16, BRC-56,
BRC-103
TCS (traction control system) BRC-8, BRC-47, BRC-94
TCS component parts and connector location BRC-14,
BRC-54, BRC-101
TCS wheel sensors ......... BRC-14, BRC-54, BRC-101
Thermometer ...................................................... DI-26
Three way catalyst ............................................. EM-19
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) .............. EC-295
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) .............. EC-295
Three way catalyst precautions ............................ GI-5
Throttle control motor ...................................... EC-406
Throttle control motor relay .............................. EC-401
Throttle position sensor (TPS) ... EC-198, EC-261, EC446, EC-448, EC-581
Throttle valve closed position learning .............. EC-89
Tie-rod ............................................................... PS-16
Timing chain ...................................................... EM-35
Tire rotation ....................................................... MA-30
Tire size .............................................................. GI-50
Torque converter installation AT-266, AT-267, AT-269,
AT-270
Torque convertor clutch solenoid valve .... AT-116, AT118
Tow truck towing ................................................. GI-42
Towing point ....................................................... GI-43
TPS1 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-263
TPS2 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-200
TPS3 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-583
Traction control system - Wiring diagram ...... BRC-15,
BRC-56, BRC-103
Transfer case ...................................................... TF-88
Transfer control device ....................................... TF-60
Transfer control unit inspection table .................. TF-27
Transfer oil replacement .................................... MA-24
Transfer serial number ....................................... GI-49
Transmission serial number ............................... GI-49
TRANSMT - Wiring diagram ............................. BL-155
Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions) .............................. GI-50
Trim ..................................................................... EI-36
Trouble diagnoses ................................................ GI-9
Turbine revolution sensor ................................ AT-132
TURN - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-78
Turn signal lamp ................................................. LT-75
Two trip detection logic ...................................... EC-48
Two-pole lift ........................................................ GI-41
V
Vacuum hose (brake system) ............................ BR-22
Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) ........... EC-113
Valve clearance ................................................. EM-52
Valve guide ........................................................ EM-67
Vanity mirror lamp ............................................ LT-126
VDC (vehicle dynamics control) BRC-8, BRC-47, BRC94
VDC -Wiring diagram ....... BRC-16, BRC-56, BRC-103
Vehicle identification number .............................. GI-48
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .......... GI-43
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) ............................ EC-368
VENT/V - Wiring diagram .................. EC-323, EC-537
Video Monitor .................................................... AV-77
IDX-7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
VIN registration .................................................. EC-89
Viscosity number (SAE) .................................... MA-12
W
Wait detection switch ......................................... TF-49
WARN - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-31
Warning chime .................................................... DI-42
Warning lamps .................................................... DI-30
Washer, front ..................................................... WW-4
Water pump ...................................................... CO-17
Water temperature gauge ..................................... DI-5
Wheel alignment (front) ..................................... FSU-6
Wheel bearing (front) ......................................... FAX-5
Wheel size .......................................................... GI-50
Wheelbase (Dimensions) .................................... GI-50
Width (Dimensions) ............................................ GI-50
WINDOW - Wiring diagram ................. GW-26, GW-35
Window, door ...................................... GW-85, GW-88
Window, rear ..................................................... GW-13
Windshield ........................................................ GW-11
WIPER - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-11
Wiper, front ........................................................ WW-4
Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list .......................... PG-63
Wiring diagram (Transfer) .................................. TF-23
Wiring diagrams .................................................. GI-14
WT-T/WARN - Wiring diagram ......................... WT-10
IDX-8
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
INSTRUMENT PANEL
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ......................... 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................ 10
CLUSTER LID C ................................................. 12
CLUSTER LID D ................................................. 12
LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH ..................... 13
COMBINATION METER ...................................... 13
A/T FINISHER ..................................................... 13
LOWER INSTRUMENTPANELRH AND GLOVE
BOX ..................................................................... 14
CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 15
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 16
CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 16
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
IP-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS004EW
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors.
Revision: October 2004
IP-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EIS004EX
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
E
F
SBT839
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
IP
SBT840
Commercial Service Tools
EIS004EY
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
J
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
K
Locating the noise
L
M
SIIA0995E
( — )
Power Tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0191E
Revision: October 2004
IP-3
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS004EZ
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: October 2004
IP-4
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
F
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
IP
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
L
●
Revision: October 2004
IP-5
2005 Titan
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS004F0
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: October 2004
IP-6
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
A
B
C
D
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
E
F
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
G
H
IP
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
K
L
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: October 2004
IP-7
2005 Titan
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS004F1
LIWA0276E
Revision: October 2004
IP-8
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: October 2004
IP-9
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:68200
EIS004F2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
WIIA0590E
Revision: October 2004
IP-10
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
1.
Display unit bracket RH/LH
2.
Steering member assembly
3.
Lower knee protector
4.
Defroster grille
5.
Speaker grille RH/LH
6.
Instrument panel and pad assembly
7.
Deck pocket mat RH/LH
8.
Side ventilator assembly RH/LH
9.
Meter cover
10. Combination meter
11.
Switch assembly
12.
Cluster lid A
13. Lower instrument panel LH
14.
Upper steering column cover
15.
Lower steering column cover
16. Audio display switch assembly
17.
Front air control
18.
Cluster lid C
19. Cluster lid D
20.
Audio unit
21.
Radio Bracket RH/LH
22. Center ventilator assembly RH/LH
23.
Display assembly
24.
Glove box
25. Glove box lid striker
26.
Fuse block cover
27.
Lower instrument panel RH
28. Glove box damper
29.
Instrument stay RH/LH
30.
Instrument side bracket
31. Key cylinder escutcheon
32.
Lower instrument panel RH
A
B
C
D
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E
Remove the center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" .
Remove the steering column. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
F
Remove defroster grille and disconnect the optical sensor harness.
Remove side ventilator assembly LH.
Remove the LH assist grip and windshield garnish.
G
Remove side ventilator assembly RH.
Remove the RH assist grip and windshield garnish.
Remove instrument panel.
H
● Disconnect harnesses to instrument panel speakers LH and RH and remove speakers.
● Disconnect GPS antenna.
IP
● Disconnect all remaining harnesses.
● Remove the passenger air bag module. Refer to SRS-49, "FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE" .
Installation
J
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
IP-11
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
CLUSTER LID C
LIIA0951E
1.
2.
Pull cluster lid C towards rear of vehicle to release clips.
Disconnect electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CLUSTER LID D
LIIA1603E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove A/T finisher. Refer to IP-13, "A/T FINISHER" .
Remove lower instrument panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" .
Remove lower instrument panel RH. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE
BOX" .
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" .
Remove cluster lid D.
● Pull the lid toward the rear of the vehicle to release the clips.
● Disconnect the electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
IP-12
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH
A
Remove screws using power tool, and remove lower instrument
panel LH.
●
Pull to disconnect clips.
●
Disconnect harnesses.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
C
LIIA1327E
D
COMBINATION METER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" .
Remove the meter cover.
Remove cluster lid A.
Remove screws using power tool and remove the combination
meter assembly.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
H
LIIA0941E
IP
A/T FINISHER
1.
2.
3.
Remove the shift knob.
Remove the console mask.
Pull up to release clips and remove the A/T finisher.
● Disconnect harnesses.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
LIIA1335E
M
Revision: October 2004
IP-13
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX
WIIA0301E
1.
Glove box damper
2.
Glove box housing
3.
Clips
4.
Rubber stoppers
5.
Glove box pins
6.
Glove box
7.
Glove box striker
8.
Fuse block cover
9.
Glove box assembly
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the instrument lower cover RH.
Remove screws using power tool, release clips and remove
glove box and housing as an assembly.
Remove damper clip from glove box.
Remove glove box pins and glove box.
Using power tool, remove screws and glove box striker.
Remove fuse block cover.
Remove screws and glove box damper.
LLIA0072E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
IP-14
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
CENTER CONSOLE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA1598E
Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND
GLOVE BOX" .
2. Remove the A/T shifter. Refer to AT-236, "Control Device Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove screws from center console.
● Disconnect electrical harnesses.
4. Move front seats forward and remove the center console assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
IP
1.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
IP-15
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS004F3
CENTER CONSOLE
WIIA0329E
Revision: October 2004
IP-16
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
1.
Console lid assembly
2.
A/T finisher
3.
Tray
4.
Storage compartment
5.
Storage compartment mask
6.
Console reinforcement assembly
7.
Console front bracket
8.
Upper side finisher LH
9.
Instrument lower cover LH
10.
Console cover LH
11.
Rear console duct
12.
Power point assembly
13.
Rear cup holder assembly
14. Rear finisher assembly
15.
Console rear bracket
16.
Heat duct
17. Rear upper finisher
18.
Console bin mat
19.
Console bin
20. Console cover RH
21.
Instrument lower cover RH
22.
Upper side finisher RH
23. A/T transmission control
24.
Mask
25.
Cup holder insert
A
B
C
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" .
Remove tray and mat from console bin.
Remove latch from console lid.
Remove hinge from console lid. Remove console lid.
● Remove console lid mat.
5. Remove console bin.
● Disconnect electrical harness from DVD player, if equipped.
● Remove hinge from console bin.
6. Remove rear upper finisher.
7. Remove rear cup holder assembly.
8. Remove upper side finishers LH/RH.
9. Remove screws on each side, disconnect clips and remove console covers LH/RH.
10. Remove rear finisher assembly.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
11. Remove power point assembly.
12. Remove mask and storage compartment.
13. Remove console front bracket.
14. Remove heat duct and console rear duct.
15. Remove console rear bracket.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
D
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
IP-17
2005 Titan
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Revision: October 2004
IP-18
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
LAN SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
CAN
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 5
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 5
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ..................... 5
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ......... 5
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 5
CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 5
Precautions For Harness Repair .............................. 6
CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 6
CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 7
System Description .................................................. 7
CAN Communication Unit ........................................ 7
TYPE 1 .................................................................. 9
TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4 ......................................11
TYPE 5/TYPE 6 .................................................. 14
TYPE 7/TYPE 8/TYPE 9/TYPE 10/TYPE 11/
TYPE 12 .............................................................. 17
TYPE 13 .............................................................. 21
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) ........................................... 24
System Description ................................................ 24
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 24
Schematic .............................................................. 25
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ......................................... 26
Work Flow .............................................................. 29
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 30
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 32
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector ..................................................................... 43
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R ............................................................... 44
ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 45
TCM Circuit Check ................................................. 46
Combination Meter Circuit Check .......................... 46
BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 47
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 47
Front Air Control Circuit Check .............................. 48
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ..................................................................... 48
Revision: October 2004
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 49
CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 50
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check .................. 50
Component Inspection ............................................ 51
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................... 51
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) ........................................... 52
System Description ................................................. 52
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 52
Schematic ............................................................... 53
Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 54
Work Flow ............................................................... 57
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 58
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 60
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector ...................................................................... 71
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R ................................................................ 72
ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 73
TCM Circuit Check ................................................. 74
Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 74
BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 75
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 75
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................... 76
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ..................................................................... 76
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 77
CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 78
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check .................. 78
Component Inspection ............................................ 79
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................... 79
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) ........................................... 80
System Description ................................................. 80
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 80
Schematic ............................................................... 81
Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 82
Work Flow ............................................................... 85
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 86
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 88
LAN-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 101
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................. 102
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 103
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 104
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 104
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 105
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 105
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 106
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 106
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 107
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 107
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 108
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 108
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 109
Component Inspection .......................................... 109
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 109
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) ......................................... 110
System Description ............................................... 110
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location. 110
Schematic ..............................................................111
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 112
Work Flow ............................................................. 115
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 117
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 119
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 133
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................. 134
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 135
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 136
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 136
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 137
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 137
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 138
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 138
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 139
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 139
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 140
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 140
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 141
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 141
Component Inspection .......................................... 142
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 142
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) ......................................... 143
System Description ............................................... 143
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location. 143
Schematic ............................................................. 144
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 145
Work Flow ............................................................. 148
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 149
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 151
Revision: October 2004
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 163
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 164
ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 165
TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 166
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 166
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 167
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 167
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check .................... 168
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 168
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check .................................................................... 169
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 169
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 170
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 171
Component Inspection .......................................... 171
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 171
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) .......................................... 172
System Description ............................................... 172
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.172
Schematic ............................................................. 173
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 174
Work Flow ............................................................. 177
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 179
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 181
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit .................................................................. 196
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................. 197
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 198
ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 199
TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 199
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check .................. 200
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 200
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 201
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 201
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 202
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check .................... 202
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 203
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check .................................................................... 203
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 204
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 204
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 205
Component Inspection .......................................... 205
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 205
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) .......................................... 206
System Description ............................................... 206
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.206
Schematic ............................................................. 207
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 208
Work Flow ............................................................. 211
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 212
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 214
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Con-
LAN-2
2005 Titan
nector ................................................................... 226
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R ............................................................. 227
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 228
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 229
Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................ 229
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 230
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 230
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................ 231
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 231
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 232
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 232
CAN Communication Circuit Check ..................... 233
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 234
Component Inspection ......................................... 234
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 234
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) ......................................... 235
System Description .............................................. 235
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 235
Schematic ............................................................ 236
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ....................................... 237
Work Flow ............................................................ 240
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 241
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 243
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 257
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................ 258
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R ............................................................. 259
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 260
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 260
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 261
Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................ 261
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 262
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 262
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................ 263
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 263
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 264
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 264
CAN Communication Circuit Check ..................... 265
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 265
Component Inspection ......................................... 266
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 266
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) ......................................... 267
System Description .............................................. 267
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 267
Schematic ............................................................ 268
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ....................................... 269
Work Flow ............................................................ 272
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 274
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 276
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 291
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Revision: October 2004
Data Link Connector ............................................. 292
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 293
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 294
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 294
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 295
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 295
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ....................... 296
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 296
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 297
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 297
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 298
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 298
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 299
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 299
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 300
Component Inspection .......................................... 300
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 300
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) ....................................... 301
System Description ............................................... 301
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 301
Schematic ............................................................. 302
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 303
Work Flow ............................................................. 306
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 307
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 309
Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock
Control Unit ........................................................... 323
Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control
Unit and Data Link Connector .............................. 324
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 325
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 326
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 326
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check ......... 327
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 327
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 328
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 328
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 329
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 329
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 330
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 330
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 331
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 331
Component Inspection .......................................... 332
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 332
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) ....................................... 333
System Description ............................................... 333
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 333
Schematic ............................................................. 334
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 335
Work Flow ............................................................. 338
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 339
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 342
Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock
LAN-3
2005 Titan
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Control Unit ........................................................... 358
Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control
Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit ......................... 359
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................. 360
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 360
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 361
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 362
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check .......... 362
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 363
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 363
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 364
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 364
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 365
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 365
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 366
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 366
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 367
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 368
Component Inspection .......................................... 368
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 368
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) ....................................... 369
System Description ............................................... 369
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location. 369
Schematic ............................................................. 370
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 371
Work Flow ............................................................. 374
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 376
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 379
Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock
Control Unit ........................................................... 396
Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control
Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit ......................... 397
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................. 398
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 398
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 399
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 400
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check .......... 400
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 401
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 401
Revision: October 2004
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 402
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 402
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 403
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 403
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 404
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check .................................................................... 404
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 405
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 406
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 406
Component Inspection .......................................... 407
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 407
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) ........................................ 408
System Description ............................................... 408
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.408
Schematic ............................................................. 409
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 410
Work Flow ............................................................. 413
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 414
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 416
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit .................................................................. 431
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and
Data Link Connector ............................................. 432
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
IPDM E/R .............................................................. 433
ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 434
TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 434
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check .................. 435
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 435
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 436
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 436
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check .................... 437
Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 437
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 438
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check .................................................................... 438
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 439
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 439
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 440
Component Inspection .......................................... 440
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 440
LAN-4
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
UKS001AE
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
–
2.
–
–
3.
4.
5.
UKS001AG
CAN SYSTEM
●
●
E
F
G
H
Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
If YES, GO TO 2.
J
If NO, GO TO 5.
Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis
results?
LAN
If YES, GO TO 3.
If NO, GO TO 4.
L
Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results.
M
Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN Communication Unit" .
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
●
D
I
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
–
C
UKS001AF
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1.
B
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement terminals.
Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less.
Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect negative battery terminal before checking the circuit.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-5
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]
Precautions For Harness Repair
UKS001AH
CAN SYSTEM
●
Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted
line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E
●
Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts.
(The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics
of twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-6
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001AI
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
Body type
D
Truck
Axle
2WD
4WD
Engine
A/T
ABS
ABLS
VDC
ABLS
VDC
×
Electronic locking rear differential
×
Automatic drive positioner
Navigation system
CAN system trouble diagnosis
E
VK56DE
Transmission
CAN system type
C
UKS001AJ
Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table.
Brake control
B
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
LAN24
LAN52
LAN80
LAN110
LAN143
LAN172
LAN206
LAN235
LAN267
LAN301
LAN333
LAN369
LAN408
F
G
H
×: Applicable
I
NOTE:
Confirming the presence of the following items helps to identify CAN system type.
●
Models with 4WD
J
LAN
L
BKIA0151E
M
●
Models with ABLS
BKIA0166E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-7
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
●
Models with VDC
BKIA0168E
●
Models with electronic locking rear differential
BKIA0167E
●
Models with automatic drive positioner
BKIA0150E
●
Models with navigation system
BKIA0152E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-8
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE 1
System diagram
●
A
Type 1
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB0573E
G
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
ECM
TCM
Combination meter
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Engine status signal
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
A/T self-diagnosis signal
R
T
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Battery voltage signal
T
R
Signals
Front air
control
I
R
R
J
R
LAN
L
T
Stop lamp switch signal
H
IPDM E/R
R
R
Ignition switch signal
Fuel consumption monitor signal
BCM
ABS actuator and
electric
unit (control unit)
R
R
T
T
M
R
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
A/C compressor request signal
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
T
R
T
R
Low beam request signal
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
R
T
Front fog light request signal
Revision: October 2004
R
T
R
High beam request signal
High beam status signal
R
R
Position light request signal
Low beam status signal
R
T
LAN-9
R
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Combination meter
BCM
Day time running light request signal
T
Rear window defogger request signal
T
Rear window defogger status signal
R
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
Front air
control
ABS actuator and
electric
unit (control unit)
IPDM E/R
R
R
R
T
R
T
T
R
Sleep wake up signal
R
T
R
Door switch signal
R
T
R
Turn indicator signal
R
T
Buzzer output signal
R
T
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
R
Front wiper request signal
T
R
Front wiper stop position signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
R
T
Brake warning lamp signal
R
T
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request
T
R
A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator lamp signal
T
R
Tire pressure signal
R
1st position switch signal*1
R
T
*1
R
T
Manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Not manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift up signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift down signal*2
R
T
Tow mode switch signal
R
T
A/T fluid temperature sensor signal
T
R
4th position switch signal
Seat belt buckle switch signal
T
T
R
*1: Floor shift model only.
*2: Column shift model only.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-10
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4
System diagram
●
A
Type 2
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB0573E
●
Type 3
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB0574E
●
Type 4
M
SKIB0575E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-11
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
T
R
Engine status signal
T
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
Display
control
unit
R
R
BCM
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
A/T self-diagnosis signal
R
T
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Battery voltage signal
T
R
R
T
Ignition switch signal
R
T
T
R
R
R
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
T
R
R
T
R
T
A/C switch/indicator signal
Cooling fan speed request signal
R
R
T
R
R
Low beam request signal
R
T
R
T
R
R
T
High beam request signal
High beam status signal
R
T
T
Position light request signal
Low beam status signal
R
T
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
R
Fuel consumption monitor signal
A/C compressor request signal
R
R
R
Stop lamp switch signal
R
IPDM
E/R
R
Key switch signal
P range signal
Front
air control
ABS
actuator and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
R
T
R
R
T
Front fog light request signal
T
R
Day time running light request signal
T
R
Rear window defogger request signal
T
Rear window defogger status signal
R
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
R
T
Sleep wake up signal
R
R
Door switch signal
R
R
Turn indicator signal
R
R
T
R
R
T
R
Key fob door unlock signal
R
T
LAN-12
R
T
T
Revision: October 2004
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
Key fob ID signal
Buzzer output signal
R
T
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
Fuel level sensor signal
TCM
Driver
seat
control
unit
R
Combination
meter
Display
control
unit
BCM
Front
air control
ABS
actuator and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
A
IPDM
E/R
B
T
Fuel level low warning signal
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
C
R
D
Front wiper request signal
T
R
Front wiper stop position signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
R
T
Brake warning lamp signal
R
T
SLIP indicator lamp signal
R
T
System setting signal
R
T
T
R
Distance to empty signal
T
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request
T
R
F
G
H
R
I
A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator lamp signal
T
R
Tire pressure signal
R
Tire pressure data signal
1st position switch signal*1
R
T
*1
4th position switch signal
R
T
Manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Not manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift up signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift down signal*2
R
T
Tow mode switch signal
R
T
A/T fluid temperature sensor signal
T
R
Seat belt buckle switch signal
T
J
T
R
T
LAN
L
M
R
*1: Floor shift model only.
*2: Column shift model only.
Revision: October 2004
E
LAN-13
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE 5/TYPE 6
System diagram
●
Type 5
●
Type 6
SKIB0576E
SKIB0578E
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
T
R
Engine status signal
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
A/T self-diagnosis signal
R
T
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Combination
meter
Display
control
unit
R
R
BCM
R
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Revision: October 2004
Driver
seat
control
unit
Steering
angle
sensor
Front
air
control
ABS
actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
R
R
IPDM
E/R
R
R
R
LAN-14
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
Battery voltage signal
ECM
T
TCM
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
Display
control
unit
BCM
T
Ignition switch signal
R
T
P range signal
T
Stop lamp switch signal
R
D
R
T
T
R
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
A/C compressor request signal
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
E
R
F
T
R
T
A/C switch/indicator signal
R
R
T
H
R
R
Low beam request signal
R
T
R
T
R
R
R
T
R
R
T
R
Day time running light request signal
T
R
Rear window defogger request signall
T
Rear window defogger status signal
R
R
R
T
Sleep wake up signal
R
R
Door switch signal
R
R
R
Turn indicator signal
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T
T
R
T
T
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
R
Front wiper request signal
T
R
Front wiper stop position signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Revision: October 2004
LAN-15
L
T
T
R
Fuel level low warning signal
T
R
R
LAN
R
T
Key fob door unlock signal
R
R
R
Key fob ID signal
Fuel level sensor signal
J
T
Front fog light request signal
Buzzer output signal
I
T
High beam request signal
R
G
R
T
T
Position light request signal
Vehicle speed signal
B
R
R
Fuel consumption monitor signal
High beam status signal
IPDM
E/R
C
R
Low beam status signal
Front
air
control
A
R
Key switch signal
Cooling fan speed request signal
Steering
angle
sensor
ABS
actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
2005 Titan
M
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
Display
control
unit
Horn chirp signal
BCM
Steering
angle
sensor
Front
air
control
ABS
actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
T
Steering angle sensor signal
R
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
R
T
VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
R
T
SLIP indicator lamp signal
R
T
Brake warning lamp signal
R
T
System setting signal
Distance to empty signal
R
T
T
R
T
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request
T
R
A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator lamp signal
T
R
Tire pressure signal
T
R
1st position switch signal*1
R
T
4th position switch signal*1
R
T
Manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Not manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift up signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift down signal*2
R
T
Tow mode switch signal
R
T
A/T fluid temperature sensor signal
T
R
Seat belt buckle switch signal
R
R
Tire pressure data signal
T
IPDM
E/R
T
R
*1: Floor shift model only.
*2: Column shift model only.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-16
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE 7/TYPE 8/TYPE 9/TYPE 10/TYPE 11/TYPE 12
System diagram
●
A
Type 7
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB0579E
●
Type 8
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB0580E
●
Type 9
M
SKIB0581E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-17
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
●
Type 10
SKIB0582E
●
Type 11
●
Type 12
SKIB0583E
SKIB0584E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-18
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
A/T self-diagnosis signal
ECM
R
TCM
Differential
lock
control
unit
Driver
seat
control
unit
Display
control
unit
BCM
Front
air
control
Transfer
control
unit
T
T
Ignition switch signal
R
T
T
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
Engine status signal
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
H
R
R
R
R
I
R
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
A/C compressor request signal
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
R
J
T
R
T
A/C switch/indicator signal
R
R
T
L
R
R
Low beam request signal
R
T
R
T
R
R
T
High beam request signal
R
T
R
R
T
Front fog light request signal
T
R
Day time running light request signal
T
R
Rear window defogger request signal
T
Rear window defogger status signal
R
R
R
R
R
T
Sleep wake up signal
R
R
Door switch signal
R
R
Key fob ID signal
R
Revision: October 2004
R
LAN-19
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
LAN
R
T
T
Position light request signal
Vehicle speed signal
F
G
Fuel consumption monitor signal
High beam status signal
E
R
R
T
Low beam status signal
T
R
R
Cooling fan speed request signal
C
T
Key switch signal
P range signal
IPDM
E/R
D
R
Battery voltage signal
A
B
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
Combination
meter
ABS
actuator
and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
2005 Titan
M
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Differential
lock
control
unit
Key fob door unlock signal
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
Display
control
unit
R
Buzzer output signal
Transfer
control
unit
IPDM
E/R
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
Fuel level low warning signal
BCM
Front
air
control
ABS
actuator
and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
T
T
R
Front wiper request signal
T
R
Front wiper stop position signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
R
T
SLIP indicator lamp signal
R
T
Brake warning lamp signal
R
T
R
System setting signal
T
T
Distance to empty signal
R
T
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request
T
R
A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator lamp signal
T
R
Tire pressure signal
R
R
Tire pressure data signal
T
R
*1
R
T
4th position switch signal*1
R
T
Manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Not manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift up signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift down signal
R
T
Tow mode switch signal
R
T
A/T fluid temperature sensor signal
T
R
1st position switch signal
R
*2
4WD shift switch signal
R
T
R
Seat belt buckle switch signal
T
T
R
Differential lock switch signal
T
R
Differential lock indicator signal
T
R
*1: Floor shift model only.
*2: Column shift model only.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-20
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE 13
System diagram
●
A
Type 13
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB0586E
G
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
A/T self-diagnosis signal
ECM
TCM
R
T
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
R
BCM
Steering
angle
sensor
Front
air
control
R
T
R
T
Ignition switch signal
R
T
T
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
Engine status signal
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
Fuel consumption monitor signal
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
A/C compressor request signal
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
I
J
LAN
T
L
R
R
R
M
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
T
R
R
Position light request signal
Revision: October 2004
IPDM
E/R
R
Key switch signal
P range signal
H
T
Stop lamp switch signal
Battery voltage signal
Transfer
control
unit
ABS
actuator and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
R
LAN-21
T
R
R
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
Low beam request signal
Low beam status signal
BCM
Steering
angle
sensor
Front
air
control
Transfer
control
unit
ABS
actuator and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
T
IPDM
E/R
R
R
T
High beam request signal
T
R
Front fog light request signal
T
R
Day time running light request signal
T
R
Rear window defogger request signal
T
Rear window defogger status signal
R
High beam status signal
R
R
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
T
R
Sleep wake up signal
R
R
T
R
Door switch signal
R
R
T
R
Key fob ID signal
R
T
Key fob door unlock signal
R
T
Buzzer output signal
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
Fuel level low warning signal
R
T
T
Front wiper request signal
T
R
Front wiper stop position signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
Steering angle sensor signal
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
R
T
VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
R
T
SLIP indicator lamp signal
R
T
Brake warning lamp signal
R
T
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request
T
R
A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator lamp signal
T
R
Tire pressure signal
R
*1
1st position switch signal
R
T
4th position switch signal*1
R
T
Manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Not manual mode switch signal*2
R
T
Revision: October 2004
LAN-22
R
T
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Driver
seat
control
unit
Combination
meter
Manual mode shift up signal*2
R
T
Manual mode shift down signal*2
R
T
Tow mode switch signal
R
T
A/T fluid temperature sensor signal
T
R
4WD shift switch signal
BCM
Steering
angle
sensor
Front
air
control
Transfer
control
unit
ABS
actuator and
electric
unit
(control
unit)
A
IPDM
E/R
T
T
C
D
R
Seat belt buckle switch signal
B
E
R
*1: Floor shift model only.
*2: Column shift model only.
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-23
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS001AK
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS001AL
BKIA0128E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-24
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001AM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0130E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-25
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001AN
BKWA0425E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-26
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0426E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-27
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
BKWA0427E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-28
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001AO
When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R”
displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and
“IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-30, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN30, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-32, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-29
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
PKIB6627E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-30
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6628E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-31
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-43, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
PKIB6629E
PKIA9478E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-32
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-44, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6630E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9479E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-33
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-45, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6631E
PKIA9480E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-34
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-46, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6632E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9481E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-35
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-46, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIB6633E
PKIA9482E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-36
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-47, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6634E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9483E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-37
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-47, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIB6635E
PKIA9484E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-38
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-48, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6636E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIB6764E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-39
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-48, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIB6637E
PKIA9485E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-40
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-49, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6638E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9486E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-41
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-50, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIB6639E
Case 12
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-50, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6640E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-42
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-50, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6641E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001AP
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E34
–
Harness connector B40
–
Harness connector B69
LAN
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
L
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-43
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E34.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E34 terminals 24 (L), 23 (P).
12 (L) - 24 (L)
11 (P) - 23 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9591E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B40 terminals 24
(L), 23 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
24 (L) - 51J (L)
23 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6833E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-29, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001AQ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-44
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA6835E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-29, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA8140E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001AR
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
L
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-45
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001AS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001AT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-46
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
C
D
PKIA6837E
E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001AU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
LAN
L
SKIA6869E
M
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001AV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-47
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-29, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KM
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
PKIA8136E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001AX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-48
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
C
D
SKIA6872E
E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001AY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
LAN
L
PKIA8141E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-49
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001AZ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-51, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001B0
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-50
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Component Inspection
UKS001B1
A
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
B
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
C
108 - 132
D
LKIA0037E
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-51
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS003AO
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS003AP
BKIA0128E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-52
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS003AQ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0130E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-53
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS003AR
BKWA0535E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-54
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0536E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-55
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
BKWA0537E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-56
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS003AS
When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R”
displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and
“IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-58, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN58, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-60, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-57
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
SKIB2703E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-58
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6628E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-59
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-71, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
SKIB2704E
PKIA9478E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-60
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-72, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2705E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9479E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-61
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-73, "ECM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2706E
PKIA9480E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-62
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-74, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2707E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9481E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-63
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-74, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
SKIB2708E
PKIA9482E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-64
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-75, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2709E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9483E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-65
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-75, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
SKIB2710E
PKIA9484E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-66
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-76, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6774E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIB6764E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-67
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-76, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
SKIB2711E
PKIA9485E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-68
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-77, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2712E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9486E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-69
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-78, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
SKIB2713E
Case 12
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-78, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
SKIB2714E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-70
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-78, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2715E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS003AT
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E34
–
Harness connector B40
–
Harness connector B69
LAN
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
L
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-71
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E34.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E34 terminals 24 (L), 23 (P).
12 (L) - 24 (L)
11 (P) - 23 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9591E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B40 terminals 24
(L), 23 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
24 (L) - 51J (L)
23 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6833E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-57, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS003AU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-72
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA6835E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-57, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA8140E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS003AV
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
L
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-73
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS003AW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS003AX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-74
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
C
D
PKIA6837E
E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS003AY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
LAN
L
SKIA6869E
M
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS003AZ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-75
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-57, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KN
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
PKIA8136E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS003B0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-76
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
C
D
SKIA6872E
E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS003B1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
LAN
L
PKIA8141E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-77
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS003B2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-79, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS003B3
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-78
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Component Inspection
UKS003B4
A
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
B
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
C
108 - 132
D
LKIA0037E
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-79
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS003A5
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS003A6
BKIA0129E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-80
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS003A7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0132E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-81
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS003A8
BKWA0428E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-82
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0429E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-83
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
BKWA0430E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-84
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS003A9
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”,
“HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-86, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN86, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-88, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-85
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
SKIB2716E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-86
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6658E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-87
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-101, "Circuit Check Between TCM
and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
SKIB2717E
PKIA9487E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-88
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-102, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2718E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9488E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-89
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-103, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
SKIB2719E
PKIA9489E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-90
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-104, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2720E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9490E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-91
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-104, "TCM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2721E
PKIA9491E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-92
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-105, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2722E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9492E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-93
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-105, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
SKIB2723E
PKIA9493E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-94
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2724E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9494E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-95
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
SKIB2725E
PKIA9495E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-96
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6775E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIB6765E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-97
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
SKIB2726E
PKIA9496E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-98
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 12
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2727E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9497E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-99
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
SKIB2728E
Case 14
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-109, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
SKIB2729E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-100
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 15
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-109, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2730E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit
UKS003AA
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-101
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
2 (L) - 15 (L)
1 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-85, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9743E
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS003AB
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-102
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-85, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS003AC
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-85, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-103
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS003AD
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS003AE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-104
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS003AF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
H
I
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS003AG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-105
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
BCM Circuit Check
UKS003AH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS003AI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-85, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-106
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KO
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
G
H
PKIA8136E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS003AJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-107
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS003AK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
PKIA8141E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS003AL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Driver seat control unit
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-108
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
E
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
F
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-109, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS003AM
I
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
J
Component Inspection
UKS003AN
LAN
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
L
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
M
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-109
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS0039K
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS0039L
BKIA0130E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-110
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS0039M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0134E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-111
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS0039N
BKWA0431E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-112
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0432E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-113
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
BKWA0433E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-114
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS0039O
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”,
“HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-117, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN117, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line
Check" .
Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-117,
"CHECK SHEET" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-115
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
8.
9.
Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-117, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control
unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-119, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-116
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
SKIB2731E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-117
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
PKIB6658E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-118
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
A
Case 1
B
Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-133, "Circuit Check Between TCM
and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
C
D
E
F
G
SKIB2732E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9498E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-119
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-134, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
SKIB2733E
PKIA9499E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-120
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-135, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2734E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9500E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-121
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-136, "ECM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2735E
PKIA9501E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-122
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-136, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2736E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9502E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-123
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-137, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
SKIB2737E
PKIA9503E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-124
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-137, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2738E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9504E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-125
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-138, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
SKIB2739E
PKIA9505E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-126
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-138, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2740E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9506E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-127
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-139, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
SKIB2742E
PKIA9507E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-128
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 11
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-139, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2743E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9508E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-129
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-140, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
SKIB2744E
PKIA9509E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-130
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 13
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-140, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2745E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9510E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-131
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-141, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
SKIB2746E
Case 15
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-141, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
SKIB2747E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-132
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-141, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2748E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit
UKS0039P
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-133
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
2 (L) - 15 (L)
1 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-115, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9743E
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS0039Q
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-134
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-115, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS0039R
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-115, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-135
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS0039S
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS0039T
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-136
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0039U
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
H
I
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS0039V
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-137
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0039W
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between display control unit and data
link connector.
SKIA6884E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS0039X
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-138
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS0039Y
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-115, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
F
G
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
H
UKS0039Z
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and J
harness side).
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
PKIA8136E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-139
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS003A0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS003A1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
PKIA8141E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-140
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS003A2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Driver seat control unit
–
Combination meter
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
C
D
E
F
G
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
H
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
I
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
J
LAN
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
L
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-142, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS003A3
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-141
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Component Inspection
UKS003A4
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-142
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS00392
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
B
C
UKS00393
D
E
F
G
H
I
BKIA0131E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-143
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS00394
BKWA0136E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-144
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS00395
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0434E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-145
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
BKWA0435E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-146
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0436E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-147
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS00396
When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R”
displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and
“IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
4.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-149, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN149, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-151, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
PKIA8343E
5.
6.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-148
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6642E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-149
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
PKIB6658E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-150
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
Case 1
B
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-163, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
C
D
E
F
G
PKIB6643E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9251E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-151
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-164, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
PKIB6644E
PKIA9252E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-152
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 3
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-165, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6645E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9253E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-153
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-166, "TCM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6646E
PKIA9254E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-154
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-166, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6647E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9255E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-155
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-167, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6648E
PKIA9256E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-156
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-167, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6649E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9257E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-157
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-168, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check" .
PKIB6650E
PKIA9258E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-158
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-168, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6651E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIB6766E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-159
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-169, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIB6652E
PKIA9259E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-160
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 11
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-169, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6653E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9260E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-161
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-170, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIB6654E
Case 13
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-171, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6655E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-162
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-171, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6656E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS00397
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
–
Harness connector B69
LAN
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
L
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-163
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P).
2 (L) - 51J (L)
1 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7671E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-148, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS00398
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-164
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA6835E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-148, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA8140E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS00399
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
L
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-165
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS0039A
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS0039B
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-166
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
C
D
PKIA6837E
E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS0039C
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
LAN
L
SKIA6869E
M
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS0039D
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-167
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-148, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check
UKS0039E
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M47 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace steering angle sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and data
link connector.
PKIA6838E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KP
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-168
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
C
D
PKIA8136E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
E
UKS0039F
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
LAN
L
SKIA6872E
M
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS0039G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-169
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
PKIA8141E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS0039H
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Steering angle sensor
–
Front air control
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-170
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
B
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-171, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS0039I
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Component Inspection
UKS0039J
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
E
F
G
H
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
I
108 - 132
J
LKIA0037E
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-171
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS001F1
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS001F2
BKIA0133E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-172
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001F3
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-173
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001F4
BKWA0440E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-174
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0441E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-175
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
BKWA0442E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-176
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001F5
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”,
“HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-179, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN179, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line
Check" .
Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-179,
"CHECK SHEET" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-177
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
8.
9.
Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-179, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control
unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-181, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-178
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6657E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-179
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
PKIA9139E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-180
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
A
Case 1
B
Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-196, "Circuit Check Between TCM
and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
C
D
E
F
G
PKIB6659E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9273E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-181
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-197, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
PKIB6660E
PKIA9274E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-182
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-198, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6661E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9275E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-183
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-199, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6662E
PKIA9276E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-184
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-199, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6663E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9277E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-185
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-200, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6664E
PKIA9278E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-186
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-200, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6665E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9279E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-187
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-201, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6666E
PKIA9280E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-188
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-201, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6667E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9281E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-189
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIB6668E
PKIA9282E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-190
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 11
A
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6669E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9283E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-191
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
PKIB6670E
PKIA9284E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-192
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6671E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9285E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-193
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIB6672E
PKIA9286E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-194
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 15
A
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6673E
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-205, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIB6674E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-195
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 17
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-205, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6675E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit
UKS0023H
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-196
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA7668E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
2 (L) - 15 (L)
1 (P) - 14 (P)
F
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-177, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
I
PKIA9743E
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS0023I
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
L
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
M
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-197
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-177, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS0023J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-177, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-198
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS0023K
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
F
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
H
I
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS0023L
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-199
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001FB
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS0023M
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-200
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0023N
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between display control unit and data
link connector.
G
H
SKIA6884E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS0023O
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-201
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS0023P
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-177, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check
UKS0023Q
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M47 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace steering angle sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and data
link connector.
PKIA6838E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-202
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS0023R
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
G
H
PKIA8136E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS0023S
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-203
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS0023T
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
PKIA8141E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS0023U
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Driver seat control unit
–
Combination meter
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Steering angle sensor
–
Front air control
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-204
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
E
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
F
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-205, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS0023V
I
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
J
Component Inspection
UKS0023W
LAN
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
L
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
M
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-205
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS001FN
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS001FO
BKIA0134E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-206
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001FP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0142E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-207
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001FQ
BKWA0443E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-208
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0444E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-209
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
BKWA0445E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-210
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001FR
When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/
4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE
AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-212, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN212, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-214, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-211
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
SKIB2749E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-212
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6772E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-213
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-226, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
SKIB2750E
PKIA9511E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-214
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-227, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2751E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9512E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-215
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-228, "ECM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2752E
PKIA9513E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-216
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2753E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9514E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-217
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
SKIB2754E
PKIA9515E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-218
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2755E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9516E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-219
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
SKIB2756E
PKIA9517E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-220
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6776E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIB6767E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-221
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
SKIB2757E
PKIA9518E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-222
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2758E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9519E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-223
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
SKIB2759E
PKIA9520E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-224
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 12
A
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-233, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2760E
Case 13
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-234, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB2761E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-225
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-234, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
SKIB2762E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001FS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-226
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA7668E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P).
2 (L) - 51J (L)
1 (P) - 52J (P)
F
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
I
PKIA7671E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
J
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-211, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
M
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001FT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-227
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-211, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001FU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-228
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
B
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
C
D
PKIA0816E
E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001FV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
LAN
L
SKIA6866E
M
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001FW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-229
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001FX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001FY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-230
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-211, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KQ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
I
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
LAN
L
PKIA8136E
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001G0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-231
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001G1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001G2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-232
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
B
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
C
D
PKIA8141E
E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001G3
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, discon- G
nection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
H
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
I
–
Front air control
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
J
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
LAN
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
L
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
M
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-233
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-234, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001G4
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Component Inspection
UKS001G5
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-234
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001G6
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
B
C
UKS001G7
D
E
F
G
H
I
BKIA0135E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-235
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001G8
BKWA0144E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-236
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001G9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0446E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-237
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
BKWA0447E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-238
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0448E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-239
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001GA
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”,
“HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
4.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-241, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN241, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-243, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
PKIA8343E
5.
6.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-240
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
SKIB2765E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-241
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
PKIB6773E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-242
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
Case 1
B
Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-257, "Circuit Check Between TCM
and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
C
D
E
F
G
SKIB2766E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9521E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-243
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-258, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
SKIB2767E
PKIA9522E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-244
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-259, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2768E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9523E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-245
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-260, "ECM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2769E
PKIA9524E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-246
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-260, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2770E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9525E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-247
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-261, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
SKIB2771E
PKIA9526E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-248
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-261, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2773E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9527E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-249
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-262, "BCM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2774E
PKIA9528E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-250
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-262, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2775E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9529E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-251
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-263, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
PKIB6777E
PKIB6768E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-252
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 11
A
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-263, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2776E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9530E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-253
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-264, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
SKIB2777E
PKIA9531E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-254
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 13
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-264, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2778E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9532E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-255
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-265, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
SKIB2779E
Case 15
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-265, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
SKIB2780E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-256
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-265, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2781E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit
UKS001GB
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-257
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
2 (L) - 15 (L)
1 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-240, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9743E
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS001GC
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-258
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-240, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001GD
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-240, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-259
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001GE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001GF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-260
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001GG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
H
I
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001GH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-261
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001GI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001GJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-240, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-262
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KR
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
G
H
PKIA8136E
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001GL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-263
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001GM
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001GN
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
PKIA8141E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-264
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001GO
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Driver seat control unit
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
C
D
E
F
G
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
H
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
I
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
J
LAN
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
L
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-266, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001GP
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-265
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Component Inspection
UKS001GQ
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-266
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001GR
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
B
C
UKS001GS
D
E
F
G
H
I
BKIA0136E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-267
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001GT
BKWA0146E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-268
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001GU
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0449E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-269
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
BKWA0450E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-270
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0451E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-271
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001GV
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”,
“HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
4.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-274, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN274, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line
Check" .
Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-274,
"CHECK SHEET" .
PKIA8343E
5.
6.
7.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-272
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
8.
9.
Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-274, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control
unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-276, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-273
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
SKIB2782E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-274
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6773E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-275
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-291, "Circuit Check Between TCM
and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
SKIB2783E
PKIA9533E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-276
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-292, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2784E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9534E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-277
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-293, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
SKIB2785E
PKIA9535E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-278
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-294, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2786E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9536E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-279
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-294, "TCM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2787E
PKIA9537E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-280
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-295, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2788E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9538E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-281
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-295, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
SKIB2789E
PKIA9539E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-282
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-296, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2790E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9540E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-283
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-296, "BCM Circuit Check" .
SKIB2791E
PKIA9541E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-284
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-297, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2792E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9542E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-285
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-297, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
SKIB2794E
PKIA9543E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-286
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 12
A
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-298, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2795E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9544E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-287
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-298, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
SKIB2796E
PKIA9545E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-288
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 14
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-299, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2797E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9546E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-289
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 15
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-299, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
SKIB2798E
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-300, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
SKIB2799E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-290
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 17
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-300, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB2800E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit
UKS001GW
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-291
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
2 (L) - 15 (L)
1 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-272, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9743E
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS001GX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-292
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-272, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001GY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-272, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-293
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001GZ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001H0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-294
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001H1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
H
I
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001H2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-295
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001H3
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between display control unit and data
link connector.
SKIA6884E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001H4
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-296
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001H5
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-272, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
F
G
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
H
UKS0020E
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and J
harness side).
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
PKIA8136E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-297
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001H8
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001H9
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-298
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001HA
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
G
H
PKIA8141E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001HB
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
LAN
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Driver seat control unit
L
–
Combination meter
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
M
–
Front air control
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-299
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-300, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001HC
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Component Inspection
UKS001HD
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-300
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001HE
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
B
C
UKS001HF
D
E
F
G
H
I
BKIA0137E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-301
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001HG
BKWA0148E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-302
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001HH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0452E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-303
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
BKWA0453E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-304
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0454E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-305
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001HI
When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL
MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
4.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-307, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN307, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-309, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
PKIA8343E
5.
6.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-306
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6676E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-307
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
PKIB6677E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-308
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
Case 1
B
Check harness between TCM and differential lock control unit. Refer to LAN-323, "Circuit Check Between
TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit" .
C
D
E
F
G
PKIB6678E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9547E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-309
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between differential lock control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-324, "Circuit Check
Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
PKIB6679E
PKIA9548E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-310
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-325, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6680E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9549E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-311
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-326, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6681E
PKIA9550E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-312
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-326, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6682E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9551E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-313
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check differential lock control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-327, "Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6683E
PKIA9552E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-314
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-327, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6684E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9553E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-315
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-328, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6685E
PKIA9554E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-316
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-328, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6686E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9555E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-317
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-329, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
PKIB6687E
PKIB6769E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-318
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 11
A
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-329, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6688E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9556E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-319
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-330, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIB6689E
PKIA9557E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-320
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 13
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-330, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6690E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9558E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-321
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-331, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIB6691E
Case 15
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-331, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6692E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-322
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-331, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6693E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit
UKS0020I
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-323
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and differential lock control unit harness connector B77
terminals 5 (L), 4 (P).
2 (L) - 5 (L)
1 (P) - 4 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-306, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9746E
Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS001HJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector B69
terminals 51J (L), 52J (P).
5 (L) - 51J (L)
4 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9747E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-324
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-306, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001HK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-306, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-325
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001HL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001HM
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-326
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0020J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection
(control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector.
Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 5 (L) and 4 (P).
5 (L) - 4 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace differential lock control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between differential lock control unit and
harness connector B75.
G
H
PKIA9748E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001HN
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-327
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001HO
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001HP
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-306, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-328
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
G
H
PKIA8136E
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001HR
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-329
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001HS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001HT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
PKIA8141E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-330
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001HU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Differential lock control unit
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
C
D
E
F
G
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
H
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
I
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
J
LAN
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
L
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-332, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001HV
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-331
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Component Inspection
UKS001HW
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-332
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001HX
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
B
C
UKS001HY
D
E
F
G
H
I
BKIA0138E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-333
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001HZ
BKWA0152E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-334
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001I0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0455E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-335
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
BKWA0456E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-336
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0457E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-337
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001I1
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”,
“BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE
POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
4.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-339, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN339, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-342, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
PKIA8343E
5.
6.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-338
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6694E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-339
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
PKIB6695E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-340
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6696E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-341
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and differential lock control unit. Refer to LAN-358, "Circuit Check Between
TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit" .
PKIB6697E
PKIA9559E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-342
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between differential lock control unit and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-359, "Circuit
Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6698E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9560E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-343
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-360, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
PKIB6699E
PKIA9561E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-344
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-360, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6700E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9562E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-345
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-361, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6701E
PKIA9563E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-346
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-362, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6702E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9564E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-347
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check differential lock control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-362, "Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6703E
PKIA9565E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-348
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-363, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6704E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9566E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-349
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-363, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIB6705E
PKIA9567E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-350
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-364, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6706E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9568E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-351
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-364, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIB6707E
PKIA9569E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-352
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 12
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-365, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6708E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIB6770E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-353
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-365, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6709E
PKIA9570E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-354
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-366, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6710E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9571E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-355
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 15
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-366, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIB6711E
PKIA9572E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-356
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 16
A
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-367, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6712E
Case 17
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-368, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIB6713E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-357
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Case 18
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-368, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6714E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit
UKS0020K
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-358
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA7668E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and differential lock control unit harness connector B77
terminals 5 (L), 4 (P).
2 (L) - 5 (L)
1 (P) - 4 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-338, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA9746E
Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control
Unit
UKS001I2
J
1. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
LAN
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector and harness connector B37.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector B37
terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
5 (L) - 15 (L)
4 (P) - 14 (P)
L
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-338, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9749E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-359
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS001I3
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-338, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001I4
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-360
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA6835E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-338, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA8140E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001I5
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
L
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-361
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001I6
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0020L
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection
(control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-362
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector.
Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 5 (L) and 4 (P).
5 (L) - 4 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace differential lock control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between differential lock control unit and
harness connector B75.
C
D
PKIA9748E
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
E
UKS001I7
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
I
LAN
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
M
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001I8
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
G
J
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
LAN-363
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001I9
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001IA
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-364
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-338, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
I
J
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
LAN
L
PKIA8136E
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001IC
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-365
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001ID
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001IE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-366
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
B
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
C
D
PKIA8141E
E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001IF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, discon- G
nection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
H
–
Differential lock control unit
–
Driver seat control unit
I
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Front air control
J
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
L
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
M
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-367
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-368, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001IG
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Component Inspection
UKS001IH
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-368
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001II
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
B
C
UKS001IJ
D
E
F
G
H
I
BKIA0139E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-369
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001IK
BKWA0156E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-370
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001IL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0458E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-371
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
BKWA0459E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-372
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0460E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-373
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS001IM
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”,
“BCM”, “HAVC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE
POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
4.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-376, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN376, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line
Check" .
Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-376,
"CHECK SHEET" .
PKIA8343E
5.
6.
7.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-374
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
8.
9.
Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-376, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control
unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-379, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-375
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
PKIB6725E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-376
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6695E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-377
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
PKIB6696E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-378
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit,
replace the control unit.
A
Case 1
B
Check harness between TCM and differential lock control unit. Refer to LAN-396, "Circuit Check Between
TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
PKIB6726E
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9573E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-379
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between differential lock control unit and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-397, "Circuit
Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
PKIB6727E
PKIA9574E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-380
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-398, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
PKIB6728E
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9575E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-381
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-398, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
PKIB6729E
PKIA9576E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-382
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-399, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6730E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9577E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-383
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-400, "TCM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6731E
PKIA9578E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-384
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check differential lock control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-400, "Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6732E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9579E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-385
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-401, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6733E
PKIA9580E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-386
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-401, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6734E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9581E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-387
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-402, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6735E
PKIA9582E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-388
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 11
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-402, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6736E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9583E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-389
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-403, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIB6737E
PKIA9584E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-390
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 13
A
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-403, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6738E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9585E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-391
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 14
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-404, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIB6739E
PKIA9586E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-392
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 15
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-404, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
PKIB6740E
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9587E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-393
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-405, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIB6741E
PKIA9588E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-394
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 17
A
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-406, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6742E
G
Case 18
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-406, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6743E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-395
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Case 19
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-406, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6744E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit
UKS0020F
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-396
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA7668E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and differential lock control unit harness connector B77
terminals 5 (L), 4 (P).
2 (L) - 5 (L)
1 (P) - 4 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-374, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA9746E
Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control
Unit
UKS001IN
J
1. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
LAN
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector and harness connector B37.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector B37
terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
5 (L) - 15 (L)
4 (P) - 14 (P)
L
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-374, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9749E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-397
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS001IO
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-374, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS001IP
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-398
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
PKIA6835E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-374, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
PKIA8140E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001IQ
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
L
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-399
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001IR
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0020G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection
(control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-400
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect differential lock control unit connector.
Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 5 (L) and 4 (P).
5 (L) - 4 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace differential lock control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between differential lock control unit and
harness connector B75.
C
D
PKIA9748E
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
E
UKS001IS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
I
LAN
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
M
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001IT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
G
J
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
LAN-401
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001IU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between display control unit and data
link connector.
SKIA6884E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001IV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-402
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
C
D
SKIA6869E
E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001IW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
F
G
H
I
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-374, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
LAN
L
PKIA2077E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS0020H
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-403
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
PKIA8136E
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001IZ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001J0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-404
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
C
D
SKIA6872E
E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001J1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
LAN
L
PKIA8141E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-405
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001J2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Differential lock control unit
–
Driver seat control unit
–
Combination meter
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Front air control
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-407, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001J3
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-406
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12)
[CAN]
Component Inspection
UKS001J4
A
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
B
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
C
108 - 132
D
LKIA0037E
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-407
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
System Description
PFP:23710
UKS0038H
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
UKS0038I
BKIA0141E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-408
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS0038J
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0164E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-409
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS0038K
BKWA0464E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-410
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0465E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-411
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
BKWA0466E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-412
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
UKS0038L
When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”.
A
B
C
D
PKIA2093E
2.
Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”,
“ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
E
F
G
H
PKIA8260E
3.
Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”,
“HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II.
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA8343E
4.
5.
6.
Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-414, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a
check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN414, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-416, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
Revision: October 2004
LAN-413
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
PKIB6745E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-414
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIB6773E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-415
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control
unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-431, "Circuit Check Between TCM
and Driver Seat Control Unit" .
PKIB6746E
PKIA9298E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-416
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-432, "Circuit Check
Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6747E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9299E
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-417
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-433, "Circuit Check Between Data
Link Connector and IPDM E/R" .
PKIB6748E
PKIA9300E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-418
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-434, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6749E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9301E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-419
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-434, "TCM Circuit Check" .
PKIB6750E
PKIA9302E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-420
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-435, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6751E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9303E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-421
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-435, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIB6752E
PKIA9304E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-422
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-436, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6753E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9305E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-423
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-436, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIB6754E
PKIA9306E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-424
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-437, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6756E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9307E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-425
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-437, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" .
PKIB6755E
PKIB6771E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-426
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 12
A
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-438, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6757E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9308E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-427
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 13
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-438, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIB6758E
PKIA9309E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-428
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 14
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-439, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6759E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9310E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LAN-429
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 15
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-439, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIB6760E
Case 16
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-440, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIB6761E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-430
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Case 17
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-440, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIB6762E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit
UKS0038M
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
I
harness side).
–
Harness connector F33
–
Harness connector E19
J
–
Harness connector E50
–
Harness connector B75
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33.
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P).
3 (L) - 12 (L)
8 (P) - 11 (P)
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA6831E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-431
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector E50.
Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12
(L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P).
12 (L) - 2 (L)
11 (P) - 1 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA7668E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37.
Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2
(L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P).
2 (L) - 15 (L)
1 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-413, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9743E
Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector
UKS0038N
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector B69
–
Harness connector M40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69.
Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J
(P).
15 (L) - 51J (L)
14 (P) - 52J (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA9744E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-432
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L),
52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
51J (L) - 6 (L)
52J (P) - 14 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-413, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
D
PKIA6834E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R
UKS0038O
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M31
–
Harness connector E152
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect harness connector M31.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G
(P).
6 (L) - 31G (L)
14 (P) - 42G (P)
LAN
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
PKIA6835E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals
31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P).
31G (L) - 39 (L)
42G (P) - 40 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-413, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA8140E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-433
2005 Titan
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS0038P
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector E19
–
Harness connector F33
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly.
PKIA0816E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS0038Q
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9
terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P).
3 (L) - 8 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/T assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness
connector F33.
SKIA6866E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-434
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0038R
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and
harness side).
–
Driver seat control unit connector
–
Harness connector P1
–
Harness connector B37
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P).
3 (L) - 19 (P)
F
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69.
H
I
PKIA6842E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS0038S
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P).
11 (L) - 12 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and data
link connector.
PKIA6837E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-435
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
BCM Circuit Check
UKS0038T
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector.
SKIA6869E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS0038U
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-413, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
PKIA2077E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-436
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check
UKS0038V
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M47 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace steering angle sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and data
link connector.
G
H
PKIA6838E
Front Air Control Circuit Check
UKS003KU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P).
34 (L) - 35 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair harness between front air control and data link
connector.
PKIA8136E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-437
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS0038W
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control
unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P).
1 (L) - 2 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152.
PKIA9745E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS0038X
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P).
11 (L) - 15 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E152.
SKIA6872E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-438
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS0038Y
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 108 - 132 Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152.
G
H
PKIA8141E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS0038Z
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
LAN
–
ECM
–
A/T assembly
–
Driver seat control unit
L
–
Combination meter
–
BCM
–
Steering angle sensor
M
–
Front air control
–
Transfer control unit
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
LAN-439
2005 Titan
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check
continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14
(P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2077E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-440, "ECM/
IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
PKIA2079E
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS00390
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Component Inspection
UKS00391
ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
●
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
39 - 40
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
LKIA0037E
Revision: October 2004
LAN-440
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
LIGHTING SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
General precautions for service operations ............. 4
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4
HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ............................................ 5
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 5
System Description .................................................. 5
OUTLINE ............................................................... 5
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL .............................. 6
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................... 7
VEHICLESECURITYSYSTEM(PANICALARM)..... 7
CAN Communication System Description ................ 7
Schematic ................................................................ 8
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — ................................. 9
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 13
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ..... 14
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 14
Preliminary Check .................................................. 15
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 15
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 17
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 17
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 18
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 18
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 19
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS .......................... 19
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 20
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 20
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 21
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 21
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ..... 22
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....... 24
High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate ... 25
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 25
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ...... 27
Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF ................................ 28
Aiming Adjustment ................................................. 29
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM ........................... 29
Revision: October 2004
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 30
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM... 30
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM... 30
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP ........... 30
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP ........................... 30
Removal and Installation ........................................ 31
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 31
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT
SYSTEM - .................................................................. 32
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 32
System Description ................................................. 33
OUTLINE ............................................................. 33
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION ........................... 33
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION... 33
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................. 33
CAN Communication System Description .............. 34
Schematic ............................................................... 35
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — ................................... 36
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 40
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 41
Preliminary Check .................................................. 41
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 41
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 41
INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT .................................................................... 42
CONSULT-II Functions ........................................... 43
Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly
(Normal Headlamps Operate Properly) .................. 43
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 45
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 45
Removal and Installation ........................................ 45
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 45
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM ............................................. 46
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 46
System Description ................................................. 47
OUTLINE ............................................................. 47
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION... 47
LT-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL... 47
DELAY TIMER FUNCTION ................................. 47
CAN Communication System Description .............. 47
Major Components and Functions .......................... 47
Schematic ............................................................... 48
Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L — ................................ 49
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 52
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 53
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 54
Preliminary Check .................................................. 54
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS ....................... 54
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 54
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 54
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 56
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 56
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 57
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 57
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 58
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ........................... 58
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) .......................... 59
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 59
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 60
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 60
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 61
Lighting Switch Inspection ...................................... 61
Optical Sensor System Inspection .......................... 62
Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor ............ 63
REMOVAL ........................................................... 63
INSTALLATION .................................................... 63
FRONT FOG LAMP .................................................. 64
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 64
System Description ................................................. 64
OUTLINE ............................................................. 64
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION... 65
EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL... 65
CAN Communication System Description .............. 65
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — .................................. 66
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 68
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 69
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 69
Preliminary Check .................................................. 70
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 70
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 70
CONSULT-II Functions ........................................... 71
Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 71
Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ... 72
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 73
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 74
Removal and Installation ........................................ 74
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS... 75
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 75
System Description ................................................. 75
OUTLINE ............................................................. 75
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION ............................... 75
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION ............................. 76
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................... 76
Revision: October 2004
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADINGFUNCTION...77
CAN Communication System Description ..............77
Wiring Diagram — TURN — ...................................78
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ..............80
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................81
Preliminary Check ...................................................82
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .....................................................................82
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................83
CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................83
DATA MONITOR ..................................................84
ACTIVE TEST ......................................................84
Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ......................85
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate .............86
Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn
Signal Lamps Operate ............................................87
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate .......88
Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp) ..........89
Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp) ..........89
Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp...89
Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...89
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ................90
Removal and Installation .........................................90
REMOVAL ............................................................90
INSTALLATION ....................................................90
HAZARD SWITCH .....................................................91
Removal and Installation .........................................91
REMOVAL ............................................................91
INSTALLATION ....................................................91
COMBINATION SWITCH ..........................................92
Wiring Diagram — COMBSW — ............................92
Combination Switch Reading Function ...................93
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................93
CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................93
DATA MONITOR ..................................................94
Combination Switch Inspection ...............................95
Removal and Installation .........................................97
Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................97
STOP LAMP ..............................................................98
System Description .................................................98
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — ................................99
High-Mounted Stop Lamp ..................................... 101
BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................... 101
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ....................... 101
Stop Lamp ............................................................. 101
BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................... 101
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ....................... 101
BACK-UP LAMP ..................................................... 102
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — .............................. 102
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 103
Removal and Installation ....................................... 103
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS .... 104
ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.104
System Description ............................................... 104
OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH ............... 105
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADINGFUNCTION.105
EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL.105
CAN Communication System Description ............ 105
Schematic ............................................................. 106
LT-2
2005 Titan
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — ................................ 107
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............110
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R .... 111
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ............... 111
Preliminary Check .................................................112
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ...................................................................112
CONSULT-II Functions ..........................................113
Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not
Illuminate ...............................................................113
Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn
OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) ............................116
Front Parking Lamp ...............................................117
BULB REPLACEMENT ......................................117
Tail Lamp ...............................................................117
BULB REPLACEMENT ......................................117
REAR COMBINATION LAMP .................................118
Bulb Replacement .................................................118
Removal and Installation .......................................118
...........................................................................118
TRAILER TOW ........................................................119
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..119
System Description ...............................................119
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION .................. 120
TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP
OPERATION ..................................................... 120
TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION ................ 120
TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION ........ 120
Schematic ............................................................ 122
Wiring Diagram — T/TOW — ............................... 123
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP ........................................ 126
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 126
System Description .............................................. 127
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND .................... 127
SWITCH OPERATION ...................................... 128
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION .................. 129
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL. 129
Schematic ............................................................. 131
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — .................................. 134
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............ 142
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis .............. 143
Preliminary Check ................................................ 143
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ........................................... 143
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ............................... 144
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................. 144
WORK SUPPORT ............................................. 145
DATA MONITOR ............................................... 145
ACTIVE TEST ................................................... 146
Front Room/Map LampAssembly Control Does Not
Operate ................................................................. 146
Personal Lamp 2nd Row Control Does Not Operate
(Room/Map Lamps Operate) ................................ 148
All Step/Foot/Puddle Lamps Do Not Operate ....... 149
All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate ............. 150
ILLUMINATION ....................................................... 151
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 151
System Description ............................................... 151
ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING
SWITCH ............................................................ 152
EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL. 153
CAN Communication System Description ............ 153
Schematic ............................................................. 154
Wiring Diagram — ILL — ...................................... 157
Removal and Installation of Illumination Control
Switch ................................................................... 166
REMOVAL ......................................................... 166
INSTALLATION ................................................. 166
BULB SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 167
Headlamp ............................................................. 167
Exterior Lamp ....................................................... 167
Interior Lamp/Illumination ..................................... 167
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-3
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS00A8S
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
General precautions for service operations
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EKS00A8T
Never work with wet hands.
Turn the lighting switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector.
When checking the headlamp on/off operation, check it on vehicle and with the power connected to the
vehicle-side connector.
Do not touch the headlamp bulb glass surface with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it. Do not
touch the headlamp bulb just after the headlamp is turned off, because it is very hot.
When the bulb has burned out, wrap it in a thick vinyl bag and discard. Do not break the bulb.
Leaving the bulb removed from the headlamp housing for a long period of time can deteriorate the performance of the lens and reflector (dirt, clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner or gasoline) to clean lamps and to remove old sealant.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00A8U
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section.
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution in PG section.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section.
●
Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section.
Revision: October 2004
LT-4
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26010
A
EKS00A8V
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKIA3579E
System Description
EKS00A8W
Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2ND position, the BCM (body control module) receives input
requesting the headlamps (and tail lamps) illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent
power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing
unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high and headlamp low relay coils. When energized, these relays
direct power to the respective headlamps, which then illuminate.
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
Revision: October 2004
LT-5
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
●
Low Beam Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This
input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 54
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 1, and
●
through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 52
●
to front combination lamp LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator.
The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through 10A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 56
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 2, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 35, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 55
●
to front combination lamp LH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 3
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), and the ignition switch is turned
from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps
are turned off.
Revision: October 2004
LT-6
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
A
Refer to LT-47, "System Description" for auto light operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (PANIC ALARM)
The vehicle security system (panic alarm) will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to BL-57,
"Panic Alarm Operation" .
CAN Communication System Description
B
EKS00A8X
C
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-7
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Schematic
EKS00A8Y
WKWA2393E
Revision: October 2004
LT-8
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —
EKS00A8Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2394E
Revision: October 2004
LT-9
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
WKWA2395E
Revision: October 2004
LT-10
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1475E
Revision: October 2004
LT-11
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
WKWA2396E
Revision: October 2004
LT-12
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00A90
A
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
B
C
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
D
SKIA5291E
E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
F
SKIA5292E
G
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
H
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
I
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5292E
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
L
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
LT-13
LT
2005 Titan
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
O/B
Combination switch output 2
36
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS00A91
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
38
B
39
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ground
ON
—
0V
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
52
L
Headlamp low (LH)
ON
54
55
R/Y
G
56
L/W
59
B
Signal name
Headlamp low (RH)
Headlamp high (LH)
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
ON
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0V
ON
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Headlamp high (RH)
ON
Ground
ON
—
0V
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS00A92
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-5, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-15, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the headlamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
LT-14
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Preliminary Check
EKS00A93
A
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
B
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START position
59
C
34
D
35
IPDM E/R
Battery
40
41
E
53
Refer to LT-9, "Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
F
G
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
I
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
M20
70 (W/B)
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
J
LT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
L
M
WKIA1436E
Revision: October 2004
LT-15
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
LT-16
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00A94
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
E
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
2.
J
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
LT
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-17
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
LKIA0169E
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
Display Item List
Item
Description
CONSULT-II
Factory setting
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed
in this mode. Selects exterior lamp battery saver control
mode between ON/OFF.
ON
×
BATTERY SAVER SET
OFF
—
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
All signals
Monitors all the signals.
Selection from menu
Selects and monitors individual signal.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
Revision: October 2004
LT-18
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Monitor item
Contents
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position:
ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the passenger door as judged from the passenger door switch signal. (Door
is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (RH) signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (LH) signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Not used.
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
CARGO LAMP SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of cargo lamp switch.
OPTICAL SENSOR
[0 - 5V]
B
C
D
E
F
G
Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical
sensor signal.
H
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
I
J
Display Item List
Test item
TAIL LAMP
HEAD LAMP
Description
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF.
FR FOG LAMP
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CARGO LAMP
Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CORNERING LAMP
LT
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
L
Not used.
M
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
Display Item List
Monitored item
CAN communication
CAN communication system
Revision: October 2004
CONSULT-II display
Description
CAN communication [U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
CAN communication system 1 to 6
[U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN system.
LT-19
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
EKS00A95
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-20
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG
MODE" screen.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
All items will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitor the predetermined item.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select any item for monitoring.
E
F
G
Touch "START".
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
H
I
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Display or
unit
TAIL&CLR REQ
Headlamp low beam
request
Item name
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
Headlamp high beam
request
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
Daytime lights request
DTRL REQ
ON/OFF
×
–
×
Signal status input from BCM
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
Parking, license plate
and tail lamps request
Front fog lamps request
LT
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch "START".
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Revision: October 2004
J
LT-21
2005 Titan
L
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Test item
CONSULT-II screen display
Tail lamp relay output
TAIL LAMP
Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output
LAMPS
Front fog lamp relay (FOG)
output
Cornering lamp relay (RH,
LH) output
Description
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at
your option.
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation
(OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Head lamp high beam repeats ON-OFF
every 1 second).
Allows fog lamp relay (FOG) to operate by switching operation ONOFF at your option.
CORNERING LAMP
Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching operation
ON-OFF at your option.
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
EKS00A96
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "HI BEAM SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of
lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
HIGH position
: HI BEAM SW ON
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
SKIA4193E
2. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure headlamp high beam operates.
Headlamp high beam should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WKIA1438E
3. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "HL LO REQ" and "HL HI REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in HIGH position.
When lighting switch is in
HIGH position
: HL LO REQ ON
: HL HI REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: October 2004
LT-22
SKIA5775E
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When headlamp high beam is operating, check voltage between
front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector and
ground.
B
C
D
WKIA1439E
E
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
2 (L/W)
LH
E11
2 (G)
Voltage
F
Ground
Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
56 (L/W) - 2 (L/W)
4.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123
terminal 56 (L/W) and front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 2 (L/W).
J
: Continuity should exist.
LT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123
terminal 55 (G) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 2 (G).
WKIA1440E
55 (G) - 2 (G)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
Check continuity between front combination lamp RH harness
connector E107 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 (B) - Ground
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front combination lamp LH harness
connector E11 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or
poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
L
: Continuity should exist.
LT-23
WKIA1441E
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
EKS00A97
1. BULB INSPECTION
Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM" .
2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect inoperative headlamp connector.
Turn the high beam headlamps ON.
Check voltage between inoperative headlamp terminal and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
2 (L/W)
LH
E11
2 (G)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WKIA3610E
3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
Turn the high beam headlamps OFF.
Check continuity between inoperative headlamp connector and
ground.
Terminals
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
3 (B)
LH
E11
3 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground.
Revision: October 2004
LT-24
WKIA1441E
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative headlamp connector.
Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM
E/R and harness connector terminals of inoperative headlamp.
B
Terminals
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
56 (L/W)
E123
55 (G)
Headlamp
Connector
RH
LH
E107
E11
C
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
2 (L/W)
D
Yes
2 (G)
WKIA1440E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Check for short and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary.
High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate
G
Inspect CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
H
EKS00A99
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
: HEAD LAMP SW 1 ON
: HEAD LAMP SW 2 ON
LT
L
SKIA4194E
2. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST
2.
3.
4.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure headlamp low beam operates.
Headlamp low beam should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
WKIA1438E
LT-25
I
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
1.
F
EKS00A98
1. BULB INSPECTION
When lighting switch is in
2ND position
E
2005 Titan
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
3. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "HL LO REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in
2ND position.
When lighting switch is in
2ND position
: HL LO REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
SKIA5780E
4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When headlamp low beam is operating, check voltage between
front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Voltage
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
1 (R/Y)
LH
E11
1 (L)
Ground
Battery voltage
WKIA1442E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123
terminal 54 (R/Y) and front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 1 (R/Y).
54 (R/Y) - 1 (R/Y)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123
terminal 52 (L) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 1 (L).
WKIA1443E
52 (L) - 1 (L)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LT-26
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
4 (B) - Ground
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front combination lamp RH harness
connector E107 terminal 4 (B) and ground.
B
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front combination lamp LH harness
connector E11 terminal 4 (B) and ground.
4 (B) - Ground
C
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or
poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
D
WKIA1444E
E
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
EKS00A9A
1. BULB INSPECTION
F
Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM" .
G
2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Disconnect inoperative headlamp connector.
Turn the low beam headlamps ON.
Check voltage between inoperative headlamp connector terminal and ground.
J
Terminals
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
(+)
Connector
LT
Terminal
RH
E107
1 (R/Y)
LH
E11
1 (L)
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WKIA3611E
M
3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
Turn the low beam headlamps OFF.
Check continuity between inoperative headlamp connector terminal and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
4 (B)
LH
E11
4 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp and IPDM E/R connector. Repair as
necessary.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground.
Revision: October 2004
LT-27
WKIA1444E
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM
E/R and harness connector terminals of inoperative headlamp.
Terminals
IPDM E/R
Connector
E123
Terminal
(Wire color)
Front combination lamp
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
54 (R/Y)
RH
E107
1 (R/Y)
52 (L)
LH
E11
1 (L)
Yes
WKIA1443E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair
as necessary.
Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF
EKS00A9B
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
OFF position
: HEAD LAMP SW 1 OFF
: HEAD LAMP SW 2 OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SKIA5200E
2. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH
Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace switch. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation" .
3. CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN BCM AND IPDM E/R
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II and perform self-diagnosis for BCM.
Display of self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>>Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication
Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" .
SKIA1039E
Revision: October 2004
LT-28
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Aiming Adjustment
EKS00A9C
A
B
C
D
E
F
WKIA1398E
G
For details, refer to the regulations in your state.
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following.
1. Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
2. Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
3. Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full.
4. Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
H
I
J
NOTE:
Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen.
1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-29
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
WKIA3613E
If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming.
Use the aiming chart shown in the figure.
●
Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart.
Adjust headlamps accordingly.
Bulb Replacement
EKS00A9D
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
NOTE:
Reach through wheel opening for access.
1. Turn headlamp switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM
1. Turn headlamp switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP
NOTE:
Reach through wheel opening for access.
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it.
2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP
NOTE:
Reach through wheel opening for access.
Revision: October 2004
LT-30
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it.
2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness.
Removal and Installation
A
B
EKS00A9E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Remove the grille. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front bumper filler panel.
Disconnect the connector.
Remove the 4 headlamp mounting bolts.
D
E
F
WKIA1399E
G
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
: 6.0 N·m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb)
H
Disassembly and Assembly
EKS00A9F
I
J
LT
L
M
WKIA1400E
1. Headlamp bulb (High beam)
2. Wiring harness assembly
3. Headlamp assembly
4. Side marker lamp bulb
5. Parking/turn signal lamp bulb
6. Headlamp bulb (Low beam)
Revision: October 2004
LT-31
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26010
EKS00A9G
WKIA3580E
Revision: October 2004
LT-32
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM System Description
EKS00A9H
Daytime light system turns on daytime light lamps while driving. Daytime light lamps are not turned on if
engine is activated with parking brake on. Take off parking brake to turn on daytime light lamps. The lamps
turn off when lighting switch is in the 2ND position or AUTO position (Headlamp is "ON") and when lighting
switch is in the PASSING position. (Daytime light lamps are not turned off only by parking brake itself.)
A parking brake signal and engine run or stop signal are sent to BCM (body control module) by CAN communication line.
A
B
C
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 8, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located inthe IPDM E/R)
●
to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to daytime light relay terminals 2 and 5.
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 24, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION
With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, the IPDM
LT
E/R receives input requesting the daytime lights illuminate. This input is communicated across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the daytime light relay coil.
When energized, this relay directs power
L
●
through daytime light relay terminal 3
●
through front combination lamp LH terminal 3
●
through front combination lamp LH terminal 2
M
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 55
●
through 10A fuse (No. 35, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through 10A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 56
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 3
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the daytime lights illuminate. The high beam headlamps are now wired in
series and illuminate at a reduced intensity.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
For auto light operation, refer to LT-47, "System Description" in AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM.
Revision: October 2004
LT-33
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description
EKS00A9I
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
LT-34
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Schematic
EKS00A9J
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2397E
Revision: October 2004
LT-35
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — DTRL —
EKS00A9K
WKWA2398E
Revision: October 2004
LT-36
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2442E
Revision: October 2004
LT-37
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
WKWA2400E
Revision: October 2004
LT-38
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2401E
Revision: October 2004
LT-39
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00A9L
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
LT-40
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
O/B
Combination switch output 2
36
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
B
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
C
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
E
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D
EKS00A9M
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-33, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-41, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the headlamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
F
G
H
EKS00A9N
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
I
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
J
Confirm BCM configuration for "DTRL" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
LT
OK
>> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-41, "INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "DTRL" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION
L
PROCEDURE" .
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
M
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Daytime light relay
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START position
59
Battery
45
Refer to LT-36, "Wiring Diagram — DTRL —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: October 2004
LT-41
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
M20
70 (W/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between BCM and
fuse.
WKIA1436E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
LIIA0915E
INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. CHECK BRAKE INDICATOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Apply parking brake.
Release parking brake.
Brake indicator in combination meter should illuminate
when parking brake is applied and turn OFF when
released.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
LT-42
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
2. CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect parking brake switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between parking brake switch harness connector
M11 terminal + (G) and ground.
+ (G) - Ground
B
: Battery voltage should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace parking brake switch.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
WKIA1673E
3. CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 23 (G) and parking brake switch harness connector M11 terminal + (G).
+ (G) - 23 (G)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
WKIA1445E
I
CONSULT-II Functions
EKS00A9O
Refer to LT-17, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Refer to LT-20, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
J
Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly (Normal Headlamps Operate
Properly)
EKS00A9P
1. CHECK DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Remove daytime light relay.
Check voltage between daytime light relay harness connector
E103 terminals 2 (G), 5 (G) and ground.
2 (G), 5 (G) - Ground
L
: Battery voltage should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1446E
Revision: October 2004
LT-43
LT
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
2. CHECK DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY
1.
2.
Apply battery voltage to daytime light relay terminal 2 and
ground terminal 1.
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5.
3-5
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace daytime light relay.
WKIA1447E
3. CHECK DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front combination lamp LH connector.
Check continuity between daytime light relay connector E103
terminal 3 (Y/G) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 3 (Y/G).
3 (Y/G) - 3 (Y/G)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1448E
4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect daytime light relay and front combination lamp LH connector.
Start engine and release parking brake. Headlamp switch OFF.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II. With data monitor, make
sure "DTRL REQ" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of parking brake switch.
Parking brake ON
Parking brake OFF
: DTRL REQ ON
: DTRL REQ OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WKIA1449E
5. CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II and perform self-diagnosis for BCM.
Displayed self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check BCM CAN communication system.
Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection
Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" .
SKIA1039E
Revision: October 2004
LT-44
2005 Titan
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Aiming Adjustment
EKS00A9Q
A
Refer to LT-29, "Aiming Adjustment" .
Bulb Replacement
EKS00A9R
B
Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
Removal and Installation
EKS00A9S
C
Refer to LT-31, "Removal and Installation" .
Disassembly and Assembly
EKS00A9T
Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-45
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28491
EKS00A9U
WKIA3581E
Revision: October 2004
LT-46
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
System Description
EKS00A9V
A
Automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with ambient light.
Timing for when the lamps turn on/off can be selected using four modes.
OUTLINE
B
The auto light control system uses an optical sensor that detects outside brightness.
When the lighting switch is in “AUTO” position, it automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with the ambient light. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four steps. For the details of the setting, refer to LT-54, "SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS" .
Optical sensor ground is supplied
●
to optical sensor terminal 3
●
through BCM (body control module) terminal 18.
When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position and when outside brightness is darker than prescribed level,
input is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 58
●
through optical sensor terminal 4.
The headlamps will then illuminate. For a description of headlamp operation, refer to LT-5, "System Description" .
C
D
E
F
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
G
Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the AUTO position, and the ignition switch is turned from
ON or ACC to OFF, and one of the front doors is opened, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the headlamps are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
H
I
DELAY TIMER FUNCTION
When the ignition switch is ON and auto light switch is ON, the BCM turns on/off the headlamps. In delay timer
function, ignition is OFF, auto light sensor power source is OFF and the headlamps are not turned on/off by the
J
BCM. On condition that:
●
when the state of ignition switch ON or ACC is ON and output judgment by auto light function is headlamp
ON changes to ignition switch and ACC are OFF and any door switch is ON, output judgment by BCM
should be headlamp ON for 5 minutes by timer. After time out, output judgment by BCM should be head- LT
lamp OFF.
●
when the state of any door switch is turned to ON from OFF while 45 second or 5 minute timer is counting,
timer stops, and restarts counting for 5 minutes, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON. After time out, L
BCM judges output as headlamp OFF.
●
when the state of front door switch (driver side), front door switch (passenger side), rear door switch LH,
rear door switch RH or back door latch (door ajar switch) is ON turns to all door switches are OFF while 45 M
second or 5 minute timer is counting, timer stops, and restarts counting for 45 seconds, then BCM judges
output as headlamp ON. After timer out, BCM judges output as headlamp OFF.
●
when the state is ignition switch ON or ACC is ON or auto light switch OFF while timer is counting, timer
stops counting and BCM turns on/off lamps according to headlamp function, front fog lamp function, auto
light function and headlamp battery save function.
Delay timer control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS00A9W
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Major Components and Functions
EKS00A9X
Components
Functions
●
Turns on/off circuits of tail light and headlamp according to signals from light sensor, lighting switch
(AUTO), driver door switch, passenger door switch, rear door switch, and ignition switch (ON,
OFF).
●
Converts ambient light (lux) to voltage, and sends it to BCM. (Detects lightness of 50 to 1,300 lux)
BCM
Optical sensor
Revision: October 2004
LT-47
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS00A9Y
WKWA2443E
Revision: October 2004
LT-48
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —
EKS00A9Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2444E
Revision: October 2004
LT-49
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
LKWA0282E
Revision: October 2004
LT-50
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2445E
Revision: October 2004
LT-51
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00AA0
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
121
R/L
Front door switch RH signal
OFF
Front door
switch RH
122
R/L
Door switch RH signal
OFF
Door switch RH
131
GR
Rear door switch RH signal
OFF
Rear door
switch RH
18
P
Sensor ground
ON
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
—
0V
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
Revision: October 2004
LT-52
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Terminal
No.
Measuring condition
Wire
color
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Operation or condition
A
B
34
L
Combination switch output 3
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
C
SKIA5291E
35
36
O/B
D
Combination switch output 2
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
E
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
471
SB
2
Front door switch LH signal
47
SB
481
R/Y
58
Door switch LH signal
Rear door switch LH signal
W/R
67
B
70
W/B
Optical sensor signal
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Front door
switch LH
Door switch LH
Rear door
switch LH
F
G
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
H
I
When optical sensor is illuminated
3.1V or moreNote
When optical sensor is not illuminated
0.6V or less
Ground
ON
—
0V
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
J
LT
1 Crew cab
2 King cab
L
NOTE:
Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy standard.
M
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS00AA1
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire color
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
38
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
52
L
Headlamp low (LH)
ON
54
R/Y
Revision: October 2004
Signal name
Headlamp low (RH)
ON
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
LT-53
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire color
55
G
56
L/W1
Y
2
57
R/L
59
B
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Headlamp high (LH)
ON
Headlamp high (RH)
ON
Parking, license, and tail
lamp
ON
Ground
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
1ST position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
—
0V
1 USA
2 Canada
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS00AA2
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-47, "System Description" .
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-54, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to LT-61, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart
by Symptom" .
Does the auto light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EKS00AA3
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS
●
Sensitivity of auto light system can be adjusted using CONSULT-II. Refer to LT-57, "WORK SUPPORT" .
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
Confirm BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-54, "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START position
59
34
35
IPDM E/R
Battery
40
41
53
Revision: October 2004
LT-54
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Refer to LT-49, "Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
A
B
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
C
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
D
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
M20
70 (W/B)
(–)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
G
H
I
WKIA1436E
J
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
LT
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
L
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
M
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
LT-55
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00AA4
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-56
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
4.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
A
B
C
LKIA0169E
D
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING" or "ILL DELAY SET" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "MODE 1-4" of setting to be changed (CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING). Touch "MODE1-8" of setting
to be changed (ILL DELAY SET).
Touch "CHANGE SETT ".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
E
F
G
H
Work Support Setting Item
Sensitivity of auto light can be selected and set from four modes.
●
I
Work item
Description
CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING
Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes.
●
MODE 1 (Normal-default)/ MODE 2 (Desensitized)/MODE 3 (Sensitive)/MODE4 (Insensitive)
ILL DELAY SET
●
MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/MODE 5 (90 sec.)/MODE
6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.)
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J
Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer
period among eight modes.
L
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
All signals
Monitors all the signals.
Selection from menu
Selects and monitors individual signal.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
Revision: October 2004
LT
LT-57
2005 Titan
M
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Monitor item
Contents
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position:
ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the passenger door as judged from the passenger door switch signal. (Door
is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (RH) signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (LH) signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Not used.
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
CARGO LAMP SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of cargo lamp.
OPTICAL SENSOR
[0 - 5V]
Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical
sensor signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
TAIL LAMP
HEAD LAMP
Description
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF.
FR FOG LAMP
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CARGO LAMP
Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
Display Item List
Monitored item
CONSULT-II display
Description
CAN communication
CAN communication [U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
CAN communication system
CAN communication system 1 to 6
[U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN system.
Revision: October 2004
LT-58
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
EKS00AA5
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
B
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
C
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
D
E
F
G
BBIA0369E
2.
H
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
I
J
LT
BCIA0029E
L
3.
Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-59
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG
MODE" screen.
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
All items will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitor the predetermined item.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select any item for monitoring.
Touch "START".
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Display or
unit
TAIL&CLR REQ
Headlamp low beam
request
Headlamp high beam
request
Item name
Parking, license plate
and tail lamps request
Front fog lamps request
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch "START".
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test item
Tail lamp relay output
Revision: October 2004
CONSULT-II screen display
TAIL LAMP
Description
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at
your option.
LT-60
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Test item
CONSULT-II screen display
Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output
Description
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation
(OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Headlamp high beam repeats ON-OFF
every 1 second).
LAMPS
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at
your option.
Front fog lamp relay output
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
EKS00AA6
Trouble phenomenon
●
●
●
Parking lamps and headlamp will not go out when outside of
the vehicle becomes light. (Lighting switch 1st position and
2nd position operate normally.)
Headlamps go out when outside of the vehicle becomes
light, but parking lamps stay on.
Parking lamps illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes
dark, but headlamps stay off. (Lighting switch 1st position and
2nd position operate normally.)
Auto light adjustment system will not operate. (Lighting switch
AUTO, 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.)
●
Refer to LT-57, "WORK SUPPORT" .
●
Refer to LT-61, "Lighting Switch Inspection" .
●
C
Refer to LT-62, "Optical Sensor System Inspection" .
Shut off delay feature will not operate.
D
E
If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
●
Refer to LT-57, "WORK SUPPORT" .
●
Refer to LT-62, "Optical Sensor System Inspection" .
F
If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
●
G
Refer to LT-62, "Optical Sensor System Inspection" .
If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
H
●
CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to BCS-13,
"CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" .
I
●
CAN communication line inspection between BCM and combination meter. Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection
Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" .
●
Refer to BL-35, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" .
Auto light adjustment system will not operate.
If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
Lighting Switch Inspection
J
LT
EKS00AA7
1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
L
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "AUTO LIGHT SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation
of lighting switch.
M
: AUTO LIGHT SW ON
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
B
Malfunction system and reference
Parking lamps and headlamps will not illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.)
When lighting switch is in
AUTO position
A
LT-61
SKIA4196E
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Optical Sensor System Inspection
EKS00AA8
1. CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "OPTICAL SENSOR" data monitor, check difference in the voltage when the optical sensor is illuminated and not illuminated.
Illuminated
OPTICAL SENSOR
Not illuminated
OPTICAL SENSOR
: 3.1V or more
: 0.6V or less
NOTE:
Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If
the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value
may not satisfy the standard.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WKIA0486E
2. CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connectors and optical sensor connector.
Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM harness connector
M18 terminal 18 (P) and optical sensor harness connector M402
terminal 3 (P).
18 (P) - 3 (P)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector
M18 terminal 18 (P) and ground.
18 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WKIA1754E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
3. CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM harness connector
M20 terminal 58 (W/R) and optical sensor harness connector
M402 terminal 4 (W/R).
58 (W/R) - 4 (W/R)
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector
M20 terminal 58 (W/R) and ground.
58 (W/R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
WKIA1755E
OK
>> Replace optical sensor. Refer to LT-63, "Removal and
Installation of Optical Sensor" . Recheck sensor output
with CONSULT-II. If NG, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LT-62
2005 Titan
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor
EKS00AA9
REMOVAL
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove defroster grille. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
Disconnect the connector.
Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
C
D
WKIA1061E
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-63
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
FRONT FOG LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26150
EKS00AAA
WKIA3582E
System Description
EKS00AAB
Control of the fog lamps is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) for front fog lamp operation.
When the lighting switch is placed in the fog lamp position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the fog lamps to illuminate. When the headlamps are illuminated, this input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication
lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the front fog lamp relay coil. When activated, this relay directs power to the front fog lamps.
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
to front fog lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
Revision: October 2004
LT-64
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
A
FOG LAMP OPERATION
The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or
AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the fog lamp switch must be ON for fog lamp operation.
With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, the CPU of the IPDM E/R grounds the coil side of the fog lamp
relay. The fog lamp relay then directs power
●
through 20A fuse (No. 56, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 50
●
to front fog lamp LH terminal +, and
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 51
●
to front fog lamp RH terminal +.
Ground is supplied
●
to front fog lamp LH and RH terminal –
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate.
B
C
D
E
F
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" .
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
G
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), the fog lamp switch is ON, and the
ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the fog lamps (and headlamps) remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the fog lamps (and
headlamps) are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
H
CAN Communication System Description
I
EKS00AAC
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-65
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —
EKS00AAD
WKWA2406E
Revision: October 2004
LT-66
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2407E
Revision: October 2004
LT-67
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00AAE
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
LT-68
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
O/B
Combination switch output 2
36
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Operation or condition
A
B
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
C
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
D
E
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS00AAF
F
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
38
B
39
Signal
name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ground
ON
—
0V
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
50
W/R
Front fog
lamp (LH)
ON
Front fog
lamp (RH)
ON
Ground
ON
51
W/R
59
B
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position
or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and
the front fog lamp switch must be ON
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
I
LT
EKS00AAG
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-64, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-70, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the front fog lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
LT-69
J
0V
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H
Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position
or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and
the front fog lamp switch must be ON
—
G
2005 Titan
L
M
FRONT FOG LAMP
Preliminary Check
EKS00AAH
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
Confirm BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-70, "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
Power source
BCM
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START position
59
Battery
53
Battery (Fog lamps ON)
56
IPDM E/R
Refer to LT-66, "Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
M20
70 (W/B)
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
WKIA1436E
Revision: October 2004
LT-70
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
B
Continuity
Ground
Yes
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
D
LIIA0915E
CONSULT-II Functions
EKS00AAI
E
Refer to LT-17, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Refer to LT-20, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
EKS00AAJ
F
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
G
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "FR FOG SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of
lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
FOG position
H
: FR FOG SW ON
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
I
SKIA5897E
J
2. FOG LAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
LT
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "FOG" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure fog lamps operate.
L
M
Fog lamps should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: October 2004
WKIA1438E
LT-71
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
3. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "FR FOG REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in
FOG position.
When lighting switch is in
FOG position
: FR FOG REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
SKIA5898E
4. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
Start auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . When front
fog lamp relay is operating, check voltage between left/right front fog
lamp connector terminals and ground.
Terminals
Front fog lamp (+)
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
LH
E101
+ (W/R)
RH
E102
+ (W/R)
WKIA1064E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front fog lamp bulbs and replace as necessary.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
EKS00AAK
1. BULB INSPECTION
Inspect bulbs of lamps which do not illuminate. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace lamp bulb. Refer to LT-74, "Bulb Replacement" .
2. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND FRONT FOG LAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative front fog lamp connector.
Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM
E/R and harness connector terminal of front fog lamps.
Terminals
IPDM E/R
Connector
E123
Terminal
(wire color)
Front fog lamp
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
50 (W/R)
LH
E101
+ (W/R)
51 (W/R)
RH
E102
+ (W/R)
Yes
WKIA1465E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ground circuit. If OK, replace IPDM E/R. Refer to
PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . If NG, repair harness or connector.
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and front fog lamps.
Revision: October 2004
LT-72
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
EKS00AAL
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming
adjustment, make sure of the following.
●
Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
●
Place vehicle on level ground.
●
See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjustment
screw.
NOTE:
Access adjustment screw from underneath front bumper. Use a T-3
(3 mm) Torx® bit or a 3 mm allen wrench to adjust. Turn screw clockwise to raise pattern and counterclockwise to lower pattern.
A
B
C
D
E
WKIA1396E
F
1.
2.
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown.
Turn front fog lamps ON.
G
H
I
MEL327G
3.
●
Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge
of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of
the fog lamp centers as shown.
When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps
and opposite fog lamp.
J
LT
L
M
MEL328G
Revision: October 2004
LT-73
2005 Titan
FRONT FOG LAMP
Bulb Replacement
1.
2.
EKS00AAM
Disconnect electrical connector.
Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
CAUTION:
● Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep
grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not
touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being
turned off. Burning may result.
● Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time
because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to
replace it with new one.
Removal and Installation
WKIA1394E
EKS00AAN
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
CAUTION:
●
Do not leave fog lamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
entering the fog lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly just before replacement bulb is installed.
●
Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the
glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance.
1. Position the fender protector aside.
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove nut and pull fog lamp out of front fascia.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1395E
Revision: October 2004
LT-74
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26120
A
EKS00AAO
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA3583E
System Description
EKS00AAP
J
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 8.
LT
L
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 24.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
M
LH Turn
When the turn signal switch is moved to the left position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs
turn signal from BCM terminal 60.
The BCM supplies power
●
through BCM terminal 60
●
to front combination lamp LH terminal 5
Revision: October 2004
LT-75
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
through front combination lamp LH terminal 4
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
●
to rear combination lamp LH terminal 8
●
through rear combination lamp LH terminal 1
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator
lamp within combination meter.
●
RH Turn
When the turn signal switch is moved to the right position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs
turn signal from BCM terminal 61.
The BCM supplies power
●
through BCM terminal 61
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 5
●
through front combination lamp RH terminal 4
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
●
to rear combination lamp RH terminal 8
●
through rear combination lamp RH terminal 1
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator
lamp within combination meter.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 8.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the hazard switch is depressed, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 29
●
through hazard switch terminal 4
●
through hazard switch terminal 6
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the hazard switch is depressed, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from
BCM terminals 60 and 61.
The BCM supplies power
●
through BCM terminals 60 and 61
●
to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5
●
through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
●
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 8
●
through rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator
lamps within combination meter.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION
Power is supplied at all times
Revision: October 2004
LT-76
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 8.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the remote keyless entry system is triggered by input from the keyfob, the BCM, interpreting it as turn
signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61.
The BCM supplies power
●
through BCM terminals 60 and 61
●
to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5
●
through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
●
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 8
●
through rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1
●
to grounds E9, E15 and E24.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator
lamps within combination meter.
With power and input supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps when keyfob is
used to activate the remote keyless entry system.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" .
CAN Communication System Description
I
EKS00AAQ
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-77
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN —
EKS00AAR
WKWA2408E
Revision: October 2004
LT-78
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2446E
Revision: October 2004
LT-79
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00AAS
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
29
W/B
Hazard switch signal
OFF
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
Hazard
switch
ON
0V
OFF
5V
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
Revision: October 2004
LT-80
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Terminal
No.
Measuring condition
Wire
color
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
B
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
C
SKIA5291E
35
36
O/B
R/W
D
Combination switch output 2
Combination switch output 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
E
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
60
G/B
Turn signal (left)
ON
F
G
H
Combination
switch
Turn left ON
I
SKIA3009J
J
61
G/Y
Turn signal (right)
ON
Combination
switch
Turn right ON
LT
SKIA3009J
67
B
70
W/B
Ground
ON
—
0V
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
L
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS00AAT
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-75, "System Description" .
Perform preliminary check. Refer to LT-82, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
LT-81
2005 Titan
M
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Preliminary Check
EKS00AAU
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START position
59
Refer to LT-78, "Wiring Diagram — TURN —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
M20
70 (W/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
WKIA1436E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
LT-82
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00AAV
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
E
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
2.
J
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
LT
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-83
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
4.
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
LKIA0169E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
All signals
Monitors all the signals.
Selection from menu
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
HAZARD SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Hazard ON (ON)/Hazard OFF (OFF)" status, determined from hazard switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
BRAKE SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of stop lamp switch.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" or "OFF" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Description
FLASHER (RH)
Turn signal lamp (right) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
FLASHER (LH)
Turn signal lamp (left) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
Revision: October 2004
LT-84
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate
EKS00AAW
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make
sure "TURN SIGNAL R" and "TURN SIGNAL L" turns ON-OFF
linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
TURN RH position
When lighting switch is in
TURN LH position
B
C
: TURN SIGNAL R ON
: TURN SIGNAL L ON
D
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
SKIA4499E
E
F
2. ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "FLASHER" during active test. Refer to LT-84, "ACTIVE
TEST" .
2. Make sure "FLASHER RH" and "FLASHER LH" operate.
G
H
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
I
J
SKIA6190E
3. CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMPS CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and front combination lamp LH and
RH connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
60 (G/B) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11
terminal 5 (G/B).
60 (G/B) - 5 (G/B)
4.
LT
M
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
61 (G/Y) and front combination lamp RH harness connector
E107 terminal 5 (G/Y).
61 (G/Y) - 5 (G/Y)
L
WKIA1466E
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LT-85
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
4. CHECK GROUND
1.
Check continuity between front combination lamp LH harness
connector E11 terminal 4 (B) and ground.
4 (B) - Ground
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front combination lamp RH harness
connector E107 terminal 4 (B) and ground.
4 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1467E
5. CHECK BULB
Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" .
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate
EKS00AAX
1. CHECK TAIL LAMPS AND STOP LAMPS
Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" .
2. CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMPS CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and rear combination lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
61 (G/Y) and rear combination lamp RH harness connector C14
terminal 8 (G/Y).
61 (G/Y) - 8 (G/Y)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
60 (G/B) and rear combination lamp LH harness connector C13
terminal 8 (G/B).
60 (G/B) - 8 (G/B)
: Continuity should exist.
WKIA1675E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LT-86
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector
C13 LH and C14 RH terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 (B) - Ground
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check rear combination lamp connector for proper connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
D
WKIA1676E
Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamps Operate
EKS00AAY
1. CHECK BULB
Make sure bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" for
front turn signal bulb. Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" for rear turn signal bulb.
E
F
G
2. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
H
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make
sure "HAZARD SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of hazard
switch.
When hazard switch is in
ON position
I
: HAZARD SW ON
J
LT
SKIA4500E
L
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29
(W/B) and ground.
M
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
M18
29 (W/B)
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Hazard switch is ON
0V
Hazard switch is OFF
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
LT-87
WKIA1677E
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
3. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and hazard switch connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
29 (W/B) and hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 4
(W/B).
29 (W/B) - 4 (W/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1674E
4. CHECK GROUND
Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 6 (B) and ground.
6 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1471E
5. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH
1.
2.
Disconnect hazard switch connector.
Check continuity of hazard switch.
Terminal
Hazard switch
4
6
Condition
Continuity
Hazard switch is ON
Yes
Hazard switch is OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps does not work after
setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace hazard switch. Refer to LT-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate
WKIA1472E
EKS00AAZ
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
LT-88
2005 Titan
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)
EKS00AB0
A
Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" .
Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)
EKS00AB1
B
Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp
EKS00AB2
C
Refer to LT-31, "Removal and Installation" .
Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp
EKS00AB3
Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-89
2005 Titan
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
PFP:25540
EKS00AB4
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove steering column cover.
While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward
driver door and disconnect from the base.
LKIA0013E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
LT-90
2005 Titan
HAZARD SWITCH
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
PFP:25290
A
EKS00AB5
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" .
While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
B
C
D
E
WKIA1402E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-91
2005 Titan
COMBINATION SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —
PFP:25567
EKS00AB6
WKWA2410E
Revision: October 2004
LT-92
2005 Titan
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Reading Function
EKS00AB7
A
For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00AB8
B
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
D
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
E
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
F
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
G
H
I
J
BBIA0369E
2.
LT
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-93
2005 Titan
COMBINATION SWITCH
4.
Touch "COMB SW".
LKIA0283E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the signals will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn Right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn Left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Headlamp switch 1 (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting
switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Auto light switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front fog lamp switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
INT VOLUME
[1 - 7]
Revision: October 2004
Displays intermittent operation knob setting (1 - 7), determined from wiper switch signal.
LT-94
2005 Titan
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Inspection
EKS00AB9
1. SYSTEM CHECK
A
Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs.
B
System 1
System 2
System 3
System 4
System 5
—
FR WASHER
FR WIPER LO
TURN LH
TURN RH
FR WIPER HI
—
FR WIPER INT
PASSING
HEAD LAMP1
INT VOLUME 1
—
—
HEAD LAMP2
HI BEAM
—
INT VOLUME 3
AUTO LIGHT
—
TAIL LAMP
INT VOLUME 2
—
—
FR FOG
—
C
D
>> GO TO 2.
E
2. SYSTEM CHECK
With CONSULT-II
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Connect CONSULT-II, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT
TEST ITEM" screen.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR".
3. Select "START", and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.
Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that
"FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3,
to which the auto light switch belongs, turn ON-OFF normally.
F
G
H
I
J
SKIA7075E
LT
Without CONSULT-II
Operate combination switch, and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.
Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER
INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally.
L
Check results
Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.>>Replace lighting switch or wiper switch.
Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally.>>GO TO 3.
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-95
2005 Titan
COMBINATION SWITCH
3. HARNESS INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals.
Terminals
Suspect
system
BCM
Connector
1
2
3
M18
4
5
3.
Combination switch
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
Input 1
6 (V)
6 (V)
Output 1
36 (R/W)
1 (R/W)
Input 2
5 (G/B)
7 (G/B)
Output 2
35 (O/B)
2 (O/B)
Input 3
4 (Y)
LKIA0284E
10 (Y)
M28
Output 3
34 (L)
3 (L)
Input 4
3 (G/Y)
9 (G/Y)
Output 4
33 (R/Y)
4 (R/Y)
Input 5
2 (SB)
8 (SB)
Output 5
32 (R/G)
5 (R/G)
Yes
Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system
and ground.
Terminals
Suspect
system
BCM
Connector
1
2
3
M18
4
5
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
Input 1
6 (V)
Output 1
36 (R/W)
Input 2
5 (G/B)
Output 2
35 (O/B)
Input 3
4 (Y)
Output 3
34 (L)
Input 4
3 (G/Y)
Output 4
33 (R/Y)
Input 5
2 (SB)
Output 5
32 (R/G)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit.
Revision: October 2004
LT-96
2005 Titan
COMBINATION SWITCH
4. BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF.
Set wiper dial to position 4.
Connect BCM and combination switch connectors, and check
BCM output terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system.
B
C
Terminals
Suspect system
Combination switch (+)
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
1
Output 1
1 (R/W)
2
Output 2
2 (O/B)
Output 3
3 (L)
4
Output 4
4 (R/Y)
5
Output 5
5 (R/G)
M28
3
D
E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
G
H
SKIA4976E
I
5. COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection.
J
Procedure
1
Replace
lighting
switch.
2
Confirm
check
results.
3
OK
INSPECTION END
NG
Replace wiper
switch.
4
Confirm
check
results.
5
OK
INSPECTION END
NG
Replace switch
base.
6
Confirm
check
results.
7
OK
INSPECTION END
NG
Confirm symptom
again.
LT
L
>> Inspection End.
Removal and Installation
EKS00ABA
For details, refer to LT-90, "Removal and Installation" .
Switch Circuit Inspection
EKS00ABB
For details, refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
Revision: October 2004
LT-97
2005 Titan
M
STOP LAMP
STOP LAMP
System Description
PFP:26550
EKS00ABC
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in fuse block (J/B)]
●
to stop lamp switch terminal 1 and
●
to stop lamp relay terminal 1 (with VDC).
When the brake pedal is pressed, the stop lamp switch is closed and power is supplied
●
through stop lamp switch terminal 2
●
to stop lamp relay terminal 3 (with VDC)
●
through stop lamp relay terminal 4 (with VDC)
●
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 7, and
●
to high-mounted stop lamp terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
●
to high-mounted stop lamp terminal 2
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
With power and ground supplied, the stop lamps illuminate.
Revision: October 2004
LT-98
2005 Titan
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —
EKS00ABD
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1534E
Revision: October 2004
LT-99
2005 Titan
STOP LAMP
WKWA1510E
Revision: October 2004
LT-100
2005 Titan
STOP LAMP
High-Mounted Stop Lamp
EKS00ABE
BULB REPLACEMENT
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove the high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to LT-101, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
Turn bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it from lamp housing.
Pull bulb from socket.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove access caps.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove 2 nuts and remove high-mounted stop lamp.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
High-mounted stop
lamp nuts:
C
D
3.38 N·m (0.34 kg-m, 30 in-lb)
E
WKIA2875E
Stop Lamp
F
EKS00ABF
BULB REPLACEMENT
G
Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-101
2005 Titan
BACK-UP LAMP
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —
PFP:26550
EKS00ABG
WKWA2447E
Revision: October 2004
LT-102
2005 Titan
BACK-UP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
EKS00ABH
A
Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
Removal and Installation
EKS00ABI
B
Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-103
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26550
EKS00ABJ
WKIA3584E
System Description
EKS00ABK
Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting
switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control
module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to illuminate.
This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across
the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay
coil. This relay, when energized, directs power to the parking, license plate and tail lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
●
to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38, and
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Revision: October 2004
LT-104
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives
input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is
communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU in the IPDM E/R controls the
tail lamp relay coil, which when energized, directs power
●
through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 57
●
to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6
●
to license plate lamps terminal + and
●
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6.
Ground is supplied
●
to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4
●
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1 and
●
to license plate lamps terminal –
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the parking, license plate and tail lamps illuminate.
A
B
C
D
E
F
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
G
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position, and the ignition switch is turned
from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the parking, license and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the parking,
license plate and tail lamps are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
CAN Communication System Description
H
I
EKS00ABL
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-105
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Schematic
EKS00ABM
WKWA2413E
Revision: October 2004
LT-106
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —
EKS00ABN
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2414E
Revision: October 2004
LT-107
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
WKWA2415E
Revision: October 2004
LT-108
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1562E
Revision: October 2004
LT-109
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00ABO
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
SB
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
LT-110
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
O/B
Combination switch output 2
36
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
B
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
C
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
D
E
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS00ABP
F
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
38
B
39
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ground
ON
—
0V
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
57
R/L
Parking, license, and tail
lamp
ON
Ground
ON
59
B
Signal name
Lighting switch
1ST position
—
H
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
I
0V
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G
EKS00ABQ
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-104, "System Description" .
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-112, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do the parking, license and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-111
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Preliminary Check
EKS00ABR
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ON or START position
59
Battery
53
Battery (Tail lamps ON)
37
IPDM E/R
Refer to LT-107, "Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
M20
70 (W/B)
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
WKIA1436E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
LT-112
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
CONSULT-II Functions
EKS00ABS
Refer to LT-17, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" and LT-20, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate
EKS00ABT
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "LIGHT SW 1ST" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of
lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
1ST position
D
E
F
SKIA5956E
G
2. ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Touch "TAIL" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
4. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamps operate.
H
I
J
Parking, license plate and tail lamps should operate
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
2. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamps operate.
LT
WKIA1438E
L
Parking, license plate and tail lamps should operate
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
M
3. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "TAIL & CLR REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is
in 1ST position.
When lighting switch is in
1ST position
: TAIL & CLR REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: October 2004
B
C
: LIGHT SW 1ST ON
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
A
LT-113
SKIA5958E
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp, license plate lamp and rear combination lamp connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
1.
2.
3.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Start auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Front combination lamp (+)
Connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
Voltage
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
6 (R/L)
Ground
Battery voltage
WKIA1473E
Terminals
License plate lamps (+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
C12
+ (R/L)
Ground
Voltage
Battery voltage
WKIA3472E
Terminals
Rear combination lamp (+)
Connector
RH
C14
LH
C13
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
6 (R/L)
Ground
Voltage
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: October 2004
WKIA1679E
LT-114
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
5. CHECK PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
front combination lamp harness connector.
B
Terminals
IPDM E/R
C
Front combination lamp
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
E124
57 (R/L)
Connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
6 (R/L)
D
Yes
WKIA1475E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
license plate lamps harness connector.
E
F
Terminals
IPDM E/R
License plate lamps
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
E124
57 (R/L)
C12
+ (R/L)
Continuity
G
Yes
H
WKIA3473E
I
5.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
rear combination lamp harness connector.
J
Terminals
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
E124
57 (R/L)
Rear combination lamp
Connector
RH
C14
LH
C13
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
6 (R/L)
LT
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LT-115
L
WKIA1681E
M
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
6. CHECK GROUND
1.
Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Front combination lamp
Connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
4 (B)
Ground
Yes
WKIA1467E
2.
Check continuity between license plate lamps harness connector and ground.
Terminals
License plate lamps
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
C12
– (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
WKIA3474E
3.
Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Rear combination lamp
Connector
RH
C14
LH
C13
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
1 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check bulbs.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1676E
Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)
EKS00ABU
1. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
Turn ignition switch ON. Turn the combination switch (lighting switch) to the OFF position. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
2. Verify that the parking, license plate, and tail lamps turn on and off after approximately 10 minutes.
OK or NG
OK
>> Ignition relay malfunction. Refer to PG-17, "Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction" .
NG
>> Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
LT-116
2005 Titan
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Front Parking Lamp
EKS00ABV
A
BULB REPLACEMENT
For bulb replacement, refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" .
Tail Lamp
EKS00ABW
BULB REPLACEMENT
B
For bulb replacement, refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-117
2005 Titan
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Bulb Replacement
PFP:26554
EKS00ABX
1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts.
2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle.
3. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
4. Remove bulb.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1760E
Removal and Installation
EKS00ABY
1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts.
2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle.
3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear combination lamp
mounting bolts
: 14.2 N·m (1.4 kg-m, 126 in-lb)
WKIA1760E
Revision: October 2004
LT-118
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
TRAILER TOW
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:93020
A
EKS00ABZ
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKIA3585E
System Description
EKS00AC0
Power is supplied at all times
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 61
●
to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and
Revision: October 2004
LT-119
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 30A fusible link (letter j , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and
●
through 40A fusible link (letter k , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2
●
to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2, and
●
to trailer connector terminal 2
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
●
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION
The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1.
With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied
●
through the tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R
●
through 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 49
●
to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1.
When energized, trailer tow relay 1 supplies tail lamp power to trailer connector terminal 6.
TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
The trailer turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM. If either turn signal or the hazard lamps
are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them flash.
Left turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 52
●
to trailer connector terminal 1.
Right turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 51
●
to trailer connector terminal 4.
TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION
The trailer stop lamps are controlled by the electric brake. The electric brake receives stop lamp switch signal
when the brake pedal is pressed.
When the brake pedal is pressed, power is supplied
●
through electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 3
●
to trailer connector terminal 3.
TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
The trailer power supply is controlled by the trailer tow relay 2.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 16
Revision: October 2004
LT-120
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1.
When energized, the trailer tow relay 2 supplies power
●
through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7
●
to trailer connector terminal 5.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-121
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
Schematic
EKS00AC1
WKWA2417E
Revision: October 2004
LT-122
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
Wiring Diagram — T/TOW —
EKS00AC2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2418E
Revision: October 2004
LT-123
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
WKWA2419E
Revision: October 2004
LT-124
2005 Titan
TRAILER TOW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2420E
Revision: October 2004
LT-125
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26410
EKS00AC3
WKIA3586E
Revision: October 2004
LT-126
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description
EKS00AC4
When room lamp and personal lamp switch is in DOOR position, room lamp and personal lamp ON/OFF is
controlled by timer according to signals from switches including key switch (with column shift) or key switch
and key lock solenoid (with floor shift), front door switch LH side, unlock signal from keyfob, door lock and
unlock switch, key cylinder lock and unlock switch, and ignition switch.
When room lamp and personal lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room lamp
and personal lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second.
The room lamp and personal lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module).
Room lamp and personal lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-II.
Step and foot lamp turns ON when front or rear doors are opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when
front and rear doors are closed (all door switches OFF).
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
A
B
C
D
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
E
●
to key switch terminal 3, and
●
through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
F
●
to BCM terminal 57, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
G
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to cargo lamp relay terminals 2 and 5.
When the key is inserted in key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift), H
power is supplied
●
through the key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
I
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
J
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
LT
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
L
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
through case ground of front door switch LH (crew cab) or
●
through front door switch LH terminal 3 (king cab)
M
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the front door RH is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through front door switch RH terminal 2
●
through case ground of front door switch RH (crew cab) or
●
through front door switch RH terminal 3 (king cab)
●
through grounds B117 and B132 (king cab).
When the rear door LH (crew cab) is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 48
●
through rear door switch LH terminal 2
●
through case ground of rear door switch LH.
When the rear door LH (king cab) is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through rear door switch upper LH and rear door switch lower LH terminal 1
Revision: October 2004
LT-127
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
through rear door switch upper LH and rear door switch lower LH terminal 2
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
When the rear door RH (crew cab) is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 13
●
through rear door switch RH terminal 2
●
through case ground of rear door switch RH.
When the rear door RH (king cab) is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through rear door switch upper RH and rear door switch lower RH terminal 1
●
through rear door switch upper RH and rear door switch lower RH terminal 2
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
When the front door LH or RH is unlocked by the door lock and unlock switch, BCM receives serial data
●
to BCM terminal 22
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (crew cab) or 12 (king cab) and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 (crew cab) or 15 (king cab)
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is unlocked by the key, the BCM receives serial data
●
to BCM terminal 22
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (crew cab) or 12 (king cab)
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (crew cab) or 7 (king cab)
●
through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 6
●
to front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the BCM, ground is supplied
●
to door mirror LH and RH terminal 13 (with puddle lamps)
●
to front room/map lamp assembly terminal 1 and
●
to personal lamps 2nd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console)
●
through front room/map lamp assembly terminal 2
●
through BCM terminal 63.
With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate.
When the BCM receives cargo lamp switch input, ground is supplied to cargo lamp relay terminal 1, which
energizes the cargo lamp relay. When this relay is energized, power is supplied
●
through cargo lamp relay terminal 3
●
to high-mount stop lamp (cargo lamp) terminal 3, and
●
to rear combination lamp (tailgate cargo lamp) LH and RH terminal 3.
●
SWITCH OPERATION
When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied
●
to front and rear (crew cab) step lamps LH and RH and foot lamp LH and RH (with foot lamps) terminal –
●
through BCM terminal 62.
And power is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 56
●
to front and rear (crew cab) step lamps LH and RH terminal +
●
to door mirror LH and RH terminal 12 (with puddle lamps)
●
to front room/map lamp assembly terminal 6
●
to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal 1 (with vanity lamps)
●
to personal lamp 2nd row terminal 3 (with rear roof console)
●
to room lamp terminal 2
●
to foot lamp LH and RH terminal + (with foot lamps).
Revision: October 2004
LT-128
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
When front room/map lamp assembly switch is ON, ground is supplied
●
to front room/map lamp assembly terminal 5
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When vanity lamp (LH and RH) is ON, ground is supplied
●
to vanity lamp (LH and RH) terminal 2
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When cargo lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 31
●
through cargo lamp switch terminal 1
●
through cargo lamp switch terminal 3
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
A
B
C
D
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION
E
When lamp switch is in DOOR position, and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs timer control
(maximum 30 seconds) for interior room lamp and map lamp ON/OFF.
Power is supplied
F
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) terminal 3.
Key is removed from key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key
G
switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37.
Serial data is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 22
H
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (crew cab) or 12 (king cab).
At the time that front door LH is opened, BCM detects that front door LH is unlocked. It determines that interior
room lamp and map lamp timer operation conditions are met, and turns the interior room lamps ON for 30 secI
onds.
Key is in key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key switch ON),
power is supplied
J
●
through key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
When key is removed from key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift)
(key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM detects that key has been removed, LT
determines that interior room lamp and map lamp timer conditions are met, and turns the interior room lamps
ON for 30 seconds.
When front door LH opens → closes, and the key is not inserted in the key switch (with column shift) or key L
switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door
open) → 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior room lamp operation are met and
turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds.
M
Timer control is canceled under the following conditions.
●
Front door LH is locked [when locked by keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front
door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)]
●
Front door LH is opened (front door switch LH turns ON)
●
Ignition switch ON.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
If interior lamp is left ON, it will not be turned off even when door is closed.
BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned off.
BCM controls interior lamps listed below:
●
Room lamp
●
Vanity lamps
●
Front room/map lamp assembly
●
Personal lamp 2nd row
●
Step lamps
●
Puddle lamps
Revision: October 2004
LT-129
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Foot lamps
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when
●
signal received from keyfob, or main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked
●
door is opened or closed
●
key is removed from key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) or
inserted in key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift).
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
●
Revision: October 2004
LT-130
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Schematic
EKS00AC5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2461E
Revision: October 2004
LT-131
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
WKWA1563E
Revision: October 2004
LT-132
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
LKWA0285E
Revision: October 2004
LT-133
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —
EKS00AC6
WKWA2448E
Revision: October 2004
LT-134
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
LKWA0286E
Revision: October 2004
LT-135
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
WKWA1505E
Revision: October 2004
LT-136
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2449E
Revision: October 2004
LT-137
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
WKWA2450E
Revision: October 2004
LT-138
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2451E
Revision: October 2004
LT-139
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
WKWA2452E
Revision: October 2004
LT-140
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2471E
Revision: October 2004
LT-141
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
Terminal
No.
EKS00AC7
Measuring condition
Wire
color
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Operation or condition
121
R/L
Front door switch RH
signal
OFF
Front door switch
RH
122
R/L
Door switch RH signal
OFF
Door switch RH
131
GR
Rear door switch RH
signal
OFF
Rear door switch
RH
22
G
Power window switch
serial link
—
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
—
PIIA2344J
Cargo lamp switch ON.
0V
Cargo lamp switch OFF.
Battery voltage
Vehicle key is removed.
0V
Vehicle key is inserted.
Battery voltage
31
P/L
Cargo lamp switch signal
OFF
37
B/R
Key-in switch detection
signal
OFF
38
W/L
Ignition power supply
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
471
SB
Front door switch LH
signal
OFF
Front door switch
LH
472
SB
Door switch LH signal
OFF
Door switch LH
481
R/Y
50
R/Y
56
R/G
Rear door switch LH
signal
OFF
Cargo bedlamp control
OFF
Battery saver output
signal
OFF
—
Rear door switch
LH
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
Cargo lamp switch ON
0V
Cargo lamp switch OFF
Battery voltage
30 minutes after ignition switch is
turned to OFF
ON
—
Battery voltage
—
Battery voltage
57
Y/R
Battery power supply
OFF
62
R/W
Step lamp signal
OFF
Any door is open (ON)
0V
All doors are closed (OFF)
63
L
67
B
70
W/B
Interior room/map lamp
signal
0V
OFF
Each interior lamp
switch in DOOR
position
Any
door
switch
Battery voltage
ON
(open)
0V
OFF
(closed)
Battery voltage
Ground
ON
—
0V
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
1 Crew cab
2 King cab
Revision: October 2004
LT-142
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS00AC8
A
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-127, "System Description" .
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-143, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
B
C
EKS00AC9
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
D
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown BCM fuses or fusible link.
Unit
Power source
E
Fuse or fusible link No.
f
Battery
BCM
Ignition switch ON or START position
22
F
59
Refer to LT-134, "Wiring Diagram — INT/L —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
J
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
57 (Y/R)
M20
M18
70 (W/B)
Ground
OFF
ON
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
38 (W/L)
0V
Battery voltage
LT
L
WKIA1478E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
M
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check harness ground circuit.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
LT-143
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00ACA
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
LT-144
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
4.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
A
B
C
SKIA4963E
D
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
F
G
Display Item List
H
Item
Description
CONSULT-II
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
The 30 seconds operating function of the interior room lamps can be
selected when driver door is released (unlocked).
ON/OFF
ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET
The time in order to escalate illumination can be adjusted when the
interior room lamps are turned on.
MODE 1 - 7
ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET
The time in order to diminish illumination can be adjusted when the
interior room lamps are turned off.
MODE 1 - 7
I
J
Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF".
LT
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Time (sec.)
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
0
L
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
All signals
Monitors all the signals.
Selection from menu
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
KEY ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Key inserted (ON)/key removed (OFF)" status judged from the key switch signal.
Revision: October 2004
LT-145
2005 Titan
M
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Monitor item
Contents
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from passenger door switch
signal.
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch RH
signal.
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch LH
signal.
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Not used.
KEY CYL LK-SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door locked (ON)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver door.
KEY CYL UN-SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver
door.
CDL LOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door locked (ON)/Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection
switch in driver door.
CDL UNLOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in passenger door.
KEYLESS LOCK
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Locked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lock signal.
KEYLESS UNLOCK
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Unlocked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from unlock signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" or "OFF" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
INT LAMP
IGN ILLUMNOTE
Description
Interior room lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
Ignition keyhole illumination can be operated by ON-OFF operation.
NOTE: This item is displayed but this model is not equipped.
Front Room/Map Lamp Assembly Control Does Not Operate
EKS00ACB
1. CHECK EACH SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make
sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with
switch operation. Refer to LT-145, "Display Item List" for switches
and their functions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
SKIA5930E
Revision: October 2004
LT-146
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
2. ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
A
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "INT LAMP" active test.
When switch is in "DOOR" position, use active test to make sure
interior room lamp operates.
B
Room lamps should turn on.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
C
D
LKIA0092E
3. CHECK FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP ASSEMBLY INPUT
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between front room/map lamp assembly harness
connector R102 terminal 6 (R/G) and ground.
6 (R/G) - Ground
F
: Battery voltage should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
WKIA1683E
4. CHECK FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
63 (L) and front room/map lamp assembly harness connector
R102 terminal 1 (L).
63 (L) - 1 (L)
LT
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front room/map lamp assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
WKIA1480E
M
5. CHECK FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and interior room lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (R/G) and front room/map lamp assembly harness connector
R102 terminal 6 (R/G).
56 (R/G) - 6 (R/G)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if interior lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector between BCM and room/
map lamp.
Revision: October 2004
LT-147
WKIA1481E
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Personal Lamp 2nd Row Control Does Not Operate (Room/Map Lamps Operate)
EKS00ACC
1. CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make
sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with
switch operation. Refer to LT-128, "SWITCH OPERATION" for
switches and their function.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning door switch.
SKIA5930E
2. CHECK PERSONAL LAMP 2ND ROW OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Confirm lamp switch is in the "DOOR" position.
Disconnect personal lamp 2nd row connector.
Open any door.
Check voltage between personal lamp 2nd row harness connector R203 terminal 3 (R/G) and ground.
3 (R/G) - Ground
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1482E
3. CHECK PERSONAL LAMP 2ND ROW CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front room/map lamp assembly connector.
Check continuity between front room/map lamp assembly harness connector R102 terminal 2 (R) and personal lamp 2nd row
harness connector R203 terminal 1 (R).
2 (R) - 1 (R)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace personal lamp 2nd row.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1684E
Revision: October 2004
LT-148
2005 Titan
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
All Step/Foot/Puddle Lamps Do Not Operate
EKS00ACD
1. CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH
A
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make
sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with
switch operation. Refer to LT-145, "Display Item List" for switches
and their functions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
B
C
D
SKIA5930E
E
2. CHECK STEP LAMP POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between front step lamp LH harness connector
D11 terminal + (R/G) and ground.
+ (R/G) - Ground
F
: Battery voltage should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
H
LKIA0306E
I
3. CHECK STEP LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
62 (R/W) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal – (R/W).
– (R/W) - 62 (R/W)
J
LT
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
WKIA1484E
4. CHECK STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (R/G) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal + (R/G).
+ (R/G) - 56 (R/G)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
LT-149
WKIA1485E
2005 Titan
M
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate
EKS00ACE
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
All interior room lamp switches are OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (R/G) and ground.
56 (R/G) - Ground
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair harness or connector. In a case of making a
short circuit, be sure to disconnect battery negative
cable after repairing harness, and then reconnect.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: October 2004
LT-150
WKIA1486E
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
ILLUMINATION
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:27545
A
EKS00ACF
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKIA3587E
System Description
EKS00ACG
Control of the illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated)
the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input
signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN
communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This
relay, when energized, directs power to the illumination lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
●
to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
Revision: October 2004
LT-151
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse [No.19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 8, and
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38, and
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 24.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
through grounds M57, M61, and M79, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
●
ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives
input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R
across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil, which, when
energized, directs power
●
through 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 49
●
to illumination control switch terminal 1
●
to VDC OFF switch terminal 3 (with VDC)
●
to front room/map lamp assembly (console box illumination) terminal 7
●
to AV switch terminal 3
●
to hazard switch terminal 7
●
to audio unit terminal 8
●
to differential lock mode switch terminal 4 (with electronic locking rear differential)
●
to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 3 (with rear sonar system)
●
to glove box lamp terminal + (with glove box lamp)
●
to display control unit terminal 14 (with NAVI)
●
to 4WD shift switch terminal 7 (with 4-wheel drive)
●
to A/C control unit terminal 23
●
to cargo lamp switch terminal 4
●
to DVD player terminal 12 (with DVD entertainment system)
●
to NAVI control unit terminal 25 (with NAVI)
●
to pedal adjusting switch terminal 5
●
to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 4
●
to A/T device terminal 11 (with floor shift)
●
to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 5 (with heated seats)
●
to tow mode switch terminal 3.
Illumination is controlled
●
through illumination control switch terminal 2
●
to VDC OFF switch terminal 4 (with VDC)
●
to front room/map lamp assembly (console box illumination) terminal 8
●
to AV switch terminal 4
Revision: October 2004
LT-152
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
to hazard switch terminal 8
●
to audio unit terminal 7
●
to differential lock mode switch terminal 5 (with electronic locking rear differential)
●
to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 4 (with rear sonar system)
●
to 4WD switch terminal 8 (with 4-wheel drive)
●
to A/C control unit terminal 24
●
to cargo lamp switch terminal 2
●
to DVD player terminal 10 (with DVD entertainment system)
●
to pedal adjusting switch terminal 6
●
to A/T device terminal 12 (with floor shift)
●
to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 6 (with heated seats)
●
to tow mode switch terminal 4
●
to combination meter terminal 18.
Ground is supplied
●
to illumination control switch terminal 3
●
to glove box lamp terminal – (with glove box lamp)
●
to display control unit terminal 3 (with NAVI) and
●
to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
●
to NAVI control unit terminal 30 (with NAVI)
●
through grounds B117 and B132.
With power and ground supplied, illumination lamps illuminate.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
I
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated), and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control function is activated.
Under this condition, the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the illumination lamps are
J
turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) after
illumination lamps are turned off by the battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
LT
CAN Communication System Description
EKS00ACH
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-153
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
EKS00ACI
WKWA2453E
Revision: October 2004
LT-154
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2472E
Revision: October 2004
LT-155
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
WKWA2473E
Revision: October 2004
LT-156
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —
EKS00ACJ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2427E
Revision: October 2004
LT-157
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
WKWA2454E
Revision: October 2004
LT-158
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2455E
Revision: October 2004
LT-159
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
WKWA2456E
Revision: October 2004
LT-160
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2457E
Revision: October 2004
LT-161
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
WKWA2458E
Revision: October 2004
LT-162
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2459E
Revision: October 2004
LT-163
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
WKWA2460E
Revision: October 2004
LT-164
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2435E
Revision: October 2004
LT-165
2005 Titan
ILLUMINATION
Removal and Installation of Illumination Control Switch
EKS00ACK
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from
cluster lid A.
WKIA1403E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
LT-166
2005 Titan
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
PFP:26297
A
EKS00ACL
Item
Wattage (W)*
Low
51 (HB4)
High
60 (HB3)
B
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
C
Exterior Lamp
EKS00ACM
Item
Front combination lamp
Rear combination lamp
Wattage (W)*
Turn signal lamp/parking lamp
27/8
Side marker
3.8
Stop/Tail lamp
27/7
Turn signal lamp
27
Back-up lamp
18
Cargo lamp (tailgate)
16
Fog lamp
D
E
F
37.5
License plate lamp
5
High-mounted stop lamp
*
Cargo lamp (in high-mounted stop lamp)
G
16
H
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Interior Lamp/Illumination
EKS00ACN
Item
I
Wattage (W)*
Glove box lamp
3.4
Room/Map lamp
8
A/T device lamp
3
Foot lamp
3.4
Step lamp
3.8
Vanity lamp
1.32
Personal lamp
5
Puddle lamp
8
J
LT
L
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
M
Revision: October 2004
LT-167
2005 Titan
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Revision: October 2004
LT-168
2005 Titan
B ENGINE
A
LU
SECTION
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................ 5
Lubrication Circuit .................................................... 5
System Drawing ....................................................... 6
ENGINE OIL ............................................................... 7
Inspection ................................................................. 7
OIL LEVEL ............................................................ 7
OIL APPEARANCE ............................................... 7
OIL LEAKAGE ....................................................... 7
OIL PRESSURE CHECK ...................................... 7
Changing Engine Oil ................................................ 8
OIL FILTER ............................................................... 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............... 10
OIL COOLER ............................................................ 11
Removal and Installation ........................................ 11
REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 12
OIL PUMP ................................................................. 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 14
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 14
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 14
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 14
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 15
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 16
Standard and Limit .................................................. 16
OIL PRESSURE .................................................. 16
OIL PUMP ........................................................... 16
REGULATOR VALVE .......................................... 16
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY ..................................... 16
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LU-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
PFP:00001
EBS00NIK
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
and remove the old liquid gasket sealing using Tool.
Tool number
●
●
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
Tap the seal cutter to insert it.
In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, lightly tap to slide it.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove the old liquid gasket adhering to the gasket application
surface and the mating surface using suitable tool.
● Remove the liquid gasket completely from the groove of the
liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign material.
PBIC0003E
3.
Attach the liquid gasket tube to the Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Apply the liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location
with the specified dimensions.
WBIA0567E
If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply the
liquid gasket to the groove.
● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the liquid gasket inside
the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be
applied outside the holes.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If the liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten after the installation.
● Wait 30 minutes or more after installation before refilling the
engine with engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
Revision: October 2004
LU-2
SEM159F
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EBS00KN3
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST25051001
(J-25695-1)
Oil pressure gauge
LU
Measuring oil pressure
Maximum measuring range:
2,452 kPa (25 kg/cm2 , 356 psi)
C
D
S-NT050
ST25052000
(J-25695-2)
Hose
Adapting oil pressure gauge to cylinder block
E
F
S-NT559
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
G
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
H
I
NT046
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench
Removing and installing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
J
K
S-NT375
WS39930000
( — )
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
L
M
S-NT052
Revision: October 2004
LU-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
EBS00KN4
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Deep socket
Removing and installing oil pressure switch
Deep socket 26 mm (1.02 in)
NT818
Revision: October 2004
LU-4
2005 Titan
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication Circuit
PFP:15010
A
EBS00KN5
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0399E
1.
Exhaust camshaft
2.
Intake camshaft
3.
Main oil galley
4.
Chain tensioner (Left bank)
5.
Oil filter
6.
Oil cooler
7.
Oil pan
8.
Oil strainer
9.
Oil pump
J
K
10. Chain tensioner (Right bank)
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LU-5
2005 Titan
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
System Drawing
EBS00KN6
PBIC1901E
Revision: October 2004
LU-6
2005 Titan
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
PFP:KLA92
A
EBS00KN7
OIL LEVEL
●
●
●
Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a
flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is
already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking.
Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range
as indicated on the dipstick.
If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as required. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
LU
C
D
SMA954C
E
OIL APPEARANCE
●
●
Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair the broken
parts.
OIL LEAKAGE
F
G
Check for oil leakage around the following areas:
●
Oil pan
●
Oil pan drain plug
●
Oil pressure sensor
●
Oil filter
●
Oil cooler
●
Intake valve timing control cover
●
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
●
Front cover
●
Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
●
Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
●
Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear)
H
I
J
K
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
L
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
●
Put the selector lever in the Park “P” position.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" .
2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool.
3. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Remove oil pressure sensor.
M
WBIA0538E
Revision: October 2004
LU-7
2005 Titan
ENGINE OIL
5.
Install Tools.
Tool number
: ST25051001 (J-25695-1)
: ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
WBIA0571E
6.
7.
Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (175°F)]
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
8.
a.
b.
Engine Speed
Approximate Discharge Pressure
Idle speed
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
2,000 rpm
More than 294 (3.0, 43)
CAUTION:
If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages.
After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows:
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine.
Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Oil pressure sensor torque
c.
: 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running.
Changing Engine Oil
EBS00KN8
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
●
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may
cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with
used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly
with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool.
2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components.
3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug.
5. Drain engine oil.
6. Install drain plug with new washer.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug
7.
KBIA2498E
: 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
Refill with new engine oil. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Revision: October 2004
LU-8
2005 Titan
ENGINE OIL
Engine oil capacity (Approximate):
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
Unit:
6.2 (6 1/2, 5-1/2)
Without oil filter change
5.9 (6-1/4, 5-1/4)
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
(US qt, Imp qt)
A
LU
7.6 (8, 6-3/4)
CAUTION:
● The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
● Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the
engine.
8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
9. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
LU-9
2005 Titan
OIL FILTER
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
PFP:15208
EBS00KN9
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
The oil filter is provided with a relief valve.
Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine
oil are hot.
● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any
engine oil leakage or spillage.
● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
● Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
●
WBIA0388E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter.
SMA010
3.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification.
Oil filter:
4.
5.
17.7 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
Inspect the engine for oil leakage. Refer to LU-10, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" .
Install the engine front undercover using power tool.
SMA229B
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" .
Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage.
Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required.
Revision: October 2004
LU-10
2005 Titan
OIL COOLER
OIL COOLER
Removal and Installation
PFP:21305
A
EBS00KNA
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0414E
1.
Oil pan
2.
Water hose
3.
Water pipe
4.
Water hose
5.
Connector bolt
6.
Oil filter
7.
Oil cooler
8.
O-ring
9.
Relief valve
10. Water hose
11. Connector pipe
J
K
12. Gasket
WARNING:
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil and engine coolant are hot.
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove engine front undercover using power tool.
Disconnect water hoses, pinching hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling.
CAUTION:
Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt.
Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "REMOVAL" .
CAUTION:
Do not spill engine oil on the drive belts.
Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler.
M
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Oil Cooler
Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air through engine coolant
inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly.
Relief Valve
Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove
valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it.
Revision: October 2004
LU-11
2005 Titan
OIL COOLER
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following:
●
Confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler or oil pan.
●
Tighten the connecting bolt after aligning the stopper on the oil
pan side with protrusion of the oil cooler.
KBIA2500E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check levels and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" and CO-10, "LEVEL
CHECK" .
Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil and engine coolant.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check engine oil level and engine coolant level again.
Revision: October 2004
LU-12
2005 Titan
OIL PUMP
OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
PFP:15010
A
EBS00KNB
LU
C
D
E
F
WBIA0415E
1.
Oil pump body
2.
Outer rotor
3.
Inner rotor
4.
Oil pump cover
5.
Oil pump drive spacer
6.
Regulator valve
7.
Regulator spring
8.
Regulator plug
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
G
I
Remove front cover. Refer to EM-36, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the oil pump drive spacer.
Remove the oil pump.
J
K
L
KBIA2512E
M
INSTALLATION
1.
●
●
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention of the following:
When inserting the oil pump drive spacer, align the crankshaft
key and the flat face of the inner rotor.
If they are not aligned, rotate the oil pump inner rotor by hand.
Make sure that the each part is aligned and tap lightly until it
reaches the end.
KBIA2490E
Revision: October 2004
LU-13
2005 Titan
OIL PUMP
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
●
Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil.
Stop engine and wait 10 minutes.
Check level and add engine oil as required. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" .
Disassembly and Assembly
EBS00KNC
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove oil pump cover.
Remove inner rotor and outer rotor from oil pump body.
Remove the regulator plug, regulator spring and regulator valve.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Clearance of Oil Pump Parts
●
Measure radial clearance using a suitable tool.
Body to outer rotor (position 1)
: 0.114 - 0.200 mm (0.0045 - 0.0079 in)
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip (position 2)
: Below 0.180 mm (0.0071 in)
PBIC0139E
●
Measure side clearance using suitable tools.
Body to inner rotor (position 3)
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
Body to outer rotor (position 4)
: 0.030 - 0.090 mm (0.0012 - 0.0035 in)
PBIC0140E
●
1.
Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body
as follows.
Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor
(position 5) using suitable tool.
PBIC0141E
Revision: October 2004
LU-14
2005 Titan
OIL PUMP
2.
Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body to brazed portion
(position 6) using suitable tool.
A
LU
C
PBIC0142E
D
3.
Calculate the clearance using the following formula.
● (Clearance) = (Inner diameter of oil pump body) - (Outer diameter of inner rotor)
E
Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing
clearance
: 0.045 - 0.091 mm (0.0018 - 0.0036 in)
F
Regulator Valve Clearance
Check regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance using the following formula.
●
(Clearance) = D1 (Valve hole diameter) - D2 (Outer Diameter of
valve)
G
Regulator valve to oil pump cover
: 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in)
H
CAUTION:
Coat regulator valve with engine oil.
●
Check that it falls smoothly into the regulator valve hole by
its own weight.
●
I
PBIC0143E
J
ASSEMBLY
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Install the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks on the
oil pump cover side.
K
L
M
PBIC0144E
Revision: October 2004
LU-15
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
PFP:00030
EBS00KND
OIL PRESSURE
Engine speed
rpm
Approximate discharge oil pressure
Idle speed
2,000
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
More than 294 (3.0, 43)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
OIL PUMP
Unit: mm (in)
Body to outer rotor radial clearance
0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079)
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance
Below 0.180 (0.0071)
Body to inner rotor side clearance
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Body to outer rotor side clearance
0.030 - 0.090 (0.0012 - 0.0035)
Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance
0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
REGULATOR VALVE
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance
0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY
Unit:
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
6.2 (6 1/2, 5-1/2)
Without oil filter change
5.9 (6-1/4, 5-1/4)
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Revision: October 2004
(US qt, Imp qt)
7.6 (8, 6-3/4)
LU-16
2005 Titan
L MAINTENANCE
A
B
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ............................................... 4
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ....................................... 5
General Maintenance ............................................... 5
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 7
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ....................... 7
Schedule 1 ............................................................... 7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 7
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............... 8
Schedule 2 ............................................................... 9
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 9
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............. 10
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .......11
Fluids and Lubricants ..............................................11
SAE Viscosity Number ........................................... 12
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL .................................... 12
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO ..... 12
ENGINE MAINTENANCE ......................................... 13
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 13
DRIVE BELT TENSION ...................................... 13
Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 13
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 13
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ........................ 14
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 15
Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 16
Changing Fuel Filter ............................................... 16
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter ........................ 16
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 16
Changing Engine Oil .............................................. 17
Changing Oil Filter ................................................. 17
Changing Spark Plugs ........................................... 18
REMOVAL ........................................................... 18
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 18
Revision: October 2004
INSTALLATION ................................................... 19
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 19
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ................... 20
Changing In-cabin Microfilter .................................. 20
Checking Exhaust System ...................................... 21
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 21
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 23
Changing Transfer Fluid ......................................... 24
DRAINING ........................................................... 24
FILLING ............................................................... 24
Checking Transfer Fluid ......................................... 24
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL ................ 24
Changing Transfer Oil Filter ................................... 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 25
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
Checking Propeller Shaft ........................................ 26
Checking Final Drive Oil ......................................... 26
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 26
Changing Final Drive Oil ......................................... 27
DRAINING ........................................................... 27
FILLING ............................................................... 27
Balancing Wheels ................................................... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ..................... 27
Tire Rotation ........................................................... 30
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks .................. 30
Checking Brake Lines and Cables ......................... 30
Checking Disc Brake .............................................. 30
ROTOR ................................................................ 30
CALIPER ............................................................. 31
PAD ..................................................................... 31
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ..................... 31
STEERING GEAR ............................................... 31
STEERING LINKAGE ......................................... 31
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines .............. 31
CHECKING FLUID LEVEL .................................. 31
CHECKING LINES .............................................. 32
Checking Axle and Suspension Parts .................... 32
FRONT AND REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION
PARTS ................................................................. 32
MA-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
DRIVE SHAFT ..................................................... 32
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches ........ 33
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors
Revision: October 2004
and Adjusters ..........................................................34
MA-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
ELS0019C
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
Revision: October 2004
MA-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
ELS0019D
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter cap wrench
Removing and installing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
NT375
—
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
WBIA0539E
Commercial Service Tool
ELS0019E
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-45695)
Coolant refill tool
Filling cooling system
LMA053
Revision: October 2004
MA-4
2005 Titan
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance
PFP:00000
A
ELS0019F
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owner can perform these
checks and inspections or have their NISSAN dealers perform them.
B
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Tires
Check the pressure with a gauge at least once a month and always prior to a
long distance trip. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Wheel lug nuts
When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any
loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Windshield
Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.
Tire rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
Wheel alignment and
balance
If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel
balancing may be needed.
C
Reference page
—
WT-6, "Rotation"
E
—
WT-6, "Rotation"
F
WT-5, "Balancing
Wheels", FSU-6, "Front
Wheel Alignment"
G
Windshield wiper
blades
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Doors and engine
hood
Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back
hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
MA-33, "Lubricating
Locks, Hinges and Hood
Latches"
Make sure that the head lamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and
other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check head
lamp aim. Clean the head lamps on a regular basis.
LT-29, "Aiming Adjustment" for US, LT-45,
"Aiming Adjustment" for
Canada
Lamps
—
H
I
J
K
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the
vehicle, etc.
Item
Reference page
Make sure that all warning lamps and buzzers/chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and
washer
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not
streak.
—
Windshield defroster
Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient
quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
—
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering
condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Seats
Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. to
make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every
position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the
latches lock securely for folding-down rear seat backs.
PS-7, "CHECKING
STEERING WHEEL
PLAY"
—
Seat belts
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and
retractors) operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely. Check the
belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
SB-10, "Seat Belt
Inspection", MA-34,
"Checking Seat Belts,
Buckles, Retractors,
Anchors and Adjusters"
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
—
MA-5
MA
DI-25, "Electrical Components Inspection"
Warning lamps and
buzzers/chimes
Revision: October 2004
D
2005 Titan
M
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Item
Reference page
Brakes
Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
—
Brake pedal and
booster
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance
under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Keep the floor
mats away from the pedal.
BR-6, "Inspection and
Adjustment", BR-18,
"On-Vehicle Service"
Parking brake
Check that the parking brake control has the proper travel and make sure that
the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is
applied.
PB-3, "On-Vehicle Service"
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector
lever in the P position without applying the brakes.
—
UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Item
Reference page
Windshield washer
fluid
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Engine coolant level
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Radiator and hoses
Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that
may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation,
deterioration or loose connections.
—
MA-13
—
Brake fluid level
Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the
reservoirs
MA-30
Battery
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
—
Engine drive belt
Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
MA-13
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine.
MA-17
Power steering fluid
level and lines
Check the level on the reservoir with the engine off. Check the lines for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
MA-31
Automatic transmission fluid level
Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the
engine idling.
MA-21
Exhaust system
Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate
the trouble and correct it.
MA-21
The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around
the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt
can easily accumulate.
—
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle
has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is
normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for
the cause and correct it immediately.
—
Underbody
Fluid leaks
Revision: October 2004
MA-6
2005 Titan
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance
PFP:00026
A
ELS0019G
Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in
which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic
maintenance at the same mileage or time intervals, whichever comes first.
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently includes
one or more of the following driving conditions:
Schedule 1
●
Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
●
Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures
remaining below freezing.
●
Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
●
Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
●
Driving in dusty conditions.
●
Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads.
●
Towing a trailer or a car-top carrier.
Emission Control System Maintenance
MA-7
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-8
B
C
D
E
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown
in Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits.
Schedule 2
Emission Control System Maintenance
MA-9
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-10
Maintenance for off-road driving (4x4 only)
After driving the vehicle off-road through sand, mud, or water; more frequent maintenance may be required for
the following items:
Brake pads and rotors
Brake lines and hoses
Rear final drive oil, transmission fluid, and transfer fluid
Steering linkage
Drive shafts
Engine air cleaner filter
In-cabin microfilters
Schedule 1
ELS0019H
F
G
H
I
J
K
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Drive belts
NOTE (1)
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (2)
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
30
(48)
24
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
MA-13
[R]
MA-16
EVAP vapor lines
I*
MA-19
Fuel lines
I*
MA-16
Fuel filter
NOTE (3)
MA-16
Engine coolant
NOTE (4)
MA-13
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Intake and exhaust valve
clearance*
Revision: October 2004
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
NOTE (5)
MA-18
EM-52
MA-7
2005 Titan
MA
M
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
60
(96)
48
Drive belts
NOTE (1)
I*
MA-13
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (2)
[R]
MA-16
EVAP vapor lines
I*
MA-19
Fuel lines
I*
MA-16
Fuel filter
NOTE (3)
Engine coolant
NOTE (4)
MA-16
R*
MA-13
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Intake and exhaust valve
clearance*
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
MA-18
NOTE (5)
EM-52
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to the FL section.
(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x
1,000
(km x
1,000)
Months
3.75
(6)
3
7.5
(12)
6
Brake lines and cables
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
I
Brake pads and rotors
I
I
I
26.25
(42)
21
30
(48)
24
Reference
Section
- Page
or
- Content
Title
I
MA-30
I
MA-30
Automatic transmission fluid
NOTE (1)
I
I
MA-21
Transfer fluid and front final drive oil
NOTE (1)
I
I
MA-24,
MA-26
Rear final drive oil
NOTE (1)
I
I
MA-24,
MA-26
I
MA-31,
MA-32
Steering gear, linkage, axle, and suspension
parts
Tire Rotation
I
I
I
NOTE (2)
MA-30
Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4x4)
I
I
I
I
MA-26
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
MA-21
R
MA-20
In-cabin microfilter
Revision: October 2004
R
MA-8
2005 Titan
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x
1,000
(km x
1,000)
Months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
Brake lines and cables
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
I
Brake pads and rotors
I
Automatic transmission fluid
I
NOTE (1)
I
I
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section
- Page
or
- Content
Title
I
MA-30
I
MA-30
I
MA-21
Transfer fluid and front final drive oil
NOTE (1)
I
I
MA-24,
MA-26
Rear final drive oil
NOTE (1)
I
I
MA-24,
MA-26
I
MA-31,
MA-32
Steering gear, linkage, axle, and suspension
parts
Tire Rotation
I
I
I
NOTE (2)
A
B
C
D
E
MA-30
Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4x4)
I
I
I
I
MA-26
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
MA-21
R
MA-20
In-cabin microfilter
R
(1) If towing a trailer, or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000
km) or 24 months.
(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.
Schedule 2
F
G
H
ELS0019I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes
first.
Drive belts
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
NOTE (1)
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content
Title
I*
MA-13
[R]
[R]
MA-16
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
MA-19
Fuel lines
I*
I*
MA-16
Air cleaner filter
Fuel filter
NOTE (2)
Engine coolant
NOTE (3)
R*
MA-13
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Intake and exhaust valve clearance*
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
NOTE (4)
MA-18
EM-52
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to FL section.
(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
Revision: October 2004
J
K
MA
MA-16
Engine oil
Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED
type)
I
MA-9
2005 Titan
M
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
L = Lubricate. [ ]: At the mileage interval only.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x
1,000
(km x
1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section
- Page
or
- Content
Title
Brake lines and cables
I
I
I
I
MA-30
Brake pads and rotors
I
I
I
I
MA-30
Automatic transmission fluid
I
I
I
I
MA-21
Transfer fluid and front final drive oil
I
I
I
I
MA-24,
MA-26
Rear final drive oil
I
I
I
I
MA-24,
MA-26
I
MA-31,
MA-32
Steering gear, linkage, axle, and suspension
parts.
Tire rotation
Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft
(4x4)
I
NOTE (1)
MA-30
I
Exhaust system
In-cabin microfilter
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
MA-26
I
MA-21
R
MA-20
(1) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.
Revision: October 2004
MA-10
2005 Titan
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fluids and Lubricants
Metric
Fuel
105.8
With oil filter
change
Without oil filter
change
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Cooling system
A
ELS0019J
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Engine oil
Drain and refill
PFP:00000
With reservoir
at MAX level
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
6.2
5.9
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
US measure
Imp measure
28 gal
23 1/4 gal
6 1/2 qt
6 1/4 qt
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 87 AKI (RON 91), or E-85 Ethanol
fuel for Flexible Fuel Vehicles (FFV) *8
5 1/4 qt
●
API Certification Mark*1
●
API grade SL, Energy Conserving*1
●
ILSAC grade GF-III*1
7.6
8 qt
6 3/4 qt
12.2
3 1/4 gal
2 5/8 gal
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
coolant or equivalent
10.6
11 1/4 qt
9 3/8 qt
Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*2
Rear final drive oil
2.01
4 1/4 pt
3 1/2 pt
Transfer fluid
2.0
2 1/8 qt
1 3/4 qt
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental
U.S and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *7
Front final drive oil
1.6
3 3/8 pt
2 7/8 pt
API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90 *6
Power steering fluid (PSF)
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*3
Brake fluid
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake
Fluid or equivalent,
DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) *4
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)
Brake grease
—
—
—
PBC (poly butyl cuprysil) grease or equivalent
1 1/4 gal
1 gal
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent
1.54 ± 0.11 lb
1.54 ± 0.11 lb
6.8 fl oz
7.0 fl oz
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricants
4.5
0.70 ± 0.05 kg
200 m
NISSAN Luminous Oil Type S (DH-PS)
(part no. KLH00-PAGS0) or equivalent*5
*3: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III or MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
*4: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer.
*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”.
*6: See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.
*7: DEXRONTM III, MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN
dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTM III or MERCONTM Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
*8: For further details, refer to GI-5, "Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended)" .
MA-11
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
HFC-134a (R-134a)*5
*1: For further details, refer to MA-12, "SAE Viscosity Number" .
*2: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
Revision: October 2004
C
5 1/2 qt
API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 Gear Oil (Part
No. 999MP-DF100P) or equivalent *6
Windshield washer fluid
B
2005 Titan
MA
M
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
SAE Viscosity Number
ELS0019K
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
●
●
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE
10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the ambient
temperature is above -18°C (0°F).
Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy.
MMA117AA
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant
solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system
additives are not necessary.
For outside temperatures down to:
Anti-freeze coolant mixture ratio
°C
°F
Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze coolant
Demineralized water or distilled
water
– 35°
– 30°
50 %
50 %
CAUTION:
●
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water
or distilled water.
●
Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Revision: October 2004
MA-12
2005 Titan
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Checking Drive Belts
PFP:00000
A
ELS0019L
B
C
D
E
F
G
LBIA0391E
1.
Drive Belt
2.
Power Steering Pump Pulley
3.
4.
Crankshaft Pulley
5.
A/C Compressor
6.
Generator pulley
Idler Pulley
7.
Cooling Fan Pulley
8.
Water Pump Pulley
9.
Drive Belt Tensioner
H
WARNING:
I
Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly (inlet) when inspecting drive belt.
2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range
J
“A” (between three line notches) as shown.
NOTE:
● Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
K
● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be as shown.
● The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner.
3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks.
MA
4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to EM-12,
"DRIVE BELTS" .
DRIVE BELT TENSION
M
There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the auto
tensioner.
Changing Engine Coolant
ELS0019M
WARNING:
●
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
●
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a
turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
Revision: October 2004
MA-13
2005 Titan
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
3.
Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and
remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required
when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only).
CAUTION:
Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts.
WBIA0391E
4.
When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine
removal or repair, it is necessary to drain the cylinder block.
Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank
and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown.
PBIC0146E
WBIA0392E
5.
6.
Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installing it.
Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "FLUSHING COOLING
SYSTEM" .
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
1.
Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if
removed for a total system drain or for engine removal or repair.
● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance Thread
Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
Radiator drain plug
RH cylinder block drain plug
2.
3.
: Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" .
: Refer to EM-76, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.
Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the cooling
system.
Revision: October 2004
MA-14
2005 Titan
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
4.
5.
Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is
placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed
position.
● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water.
Refer to MA-12, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
A
B
C
D
Cooling system capacity
(with reservoir “MAX” level)
6.
8.
E
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure
7.
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids
and Lubricants" .
: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 ,
80 - 120 psi)
F
CAUTION:
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air
dryer.
LLIA0058E
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible
hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air
trapped in the refill hose.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 - 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)
10.
11.
12.
13.
J
Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
K
When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then
open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling
system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into
the cooling system.
Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap.
Remove the non-vented reservoir cap.
Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system
and top up the system as necessary before installing the vented reservoir cap.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the “MAX” line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave
the vented reservoir cap off.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
Revision: October 2004
MA-15
H
I
LLIA0057E
9.
G
2005 Titan
MA
M
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
Checking Fuel Lines
ELS0019N
Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improper mounting, leaks,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration.
As necessary, repair or replace any faulty parts.
SMA803A
Changing Fuel Filter
ELS0019O
The fuel filter is part of the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. Refer to FL-5, "FUEL
LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
WARNING:
Before replacing the fuel filter, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL
PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
ELS0019P
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
LBIA0394E
1.
Air cleaner case (upper)
4.
Air duct and resonator assembly
2.
Air cleaner filter
3.
Air cleaner case (lower)
NOTE:
●
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
●
Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper).
3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower).
5. Install the air cleaner case (upper).
Revision: October 2004
MA-16
2005 Titan
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
6.
Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
A
Changing Engine Oil
ELS001H6
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot.
●
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Warm up the engine, and check for any oil leaks.
2. Stop the engine and wait for at least 10 minutes.
3. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap to drain the old oil.
4. Install a new washer on the oil drain plug, then install the oil drain plug in the oil pan.
Oil drain plug
5.
C
D
: Refer to EM-76, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
E
CAUTION:
Clean the drain plug and install with a new washer.
Refill the engine with new specified engine oil.
Oil grade and viscosity
Oil capacity
6.
7.
8.
B
F
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
CAUTION:
The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use the “Refill oil capacity” values as a reference and check the oil level using the dipstick when filling the engine with oil.
Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for any oil leaks.
Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 minutes.
Check the oil level using the dipstick as shown. Add oil as necessary and install the oil filler cap.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill the engine with oil.
G
H
I
J
K
SMA954C
MA
Changing Oil Filter
1.
Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number
2.
ELS0019R
M
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
WARNING:
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot.
NOTE:
The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve.
Clean the oil filter mounting surface on the cylinder block. Coat
the oil filter rubber seal with engine oil as shown.
SMA010
Revision: October 2004
MA-17
2005 Titan
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
3.
4.
Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten
the oil filter an additional 2/3 turn as shown.
Add new specified engine oil as necessary. Refer to MA-17,
"Changing Engine Oil" .
● Clean any oil spills off the engine.
SMA702C
Changing Spark Plugs
ELS0019S
KBIA2505E
1.
Ignition coil
2.
Spark plug
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil.
Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" .
Remove the spark plug(s) using a suitable tool.
SEM294A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
●
Frequent engine starts
●
Low ambient temperatures
The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
Revision: October 2004
MA-18
2005 Titan
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
●
●
Extended highway driving
Frequent high engine revolution
A
Spark Plug Types
Make
NGK
Model
B
Standard model
FFV model
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
PLFR5A-11D
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
PLFR4A-11D
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
PLFR6A-11D
Gap (nominal)
C
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
D
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
●
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
●
E
F
G
SMA773C
●
If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time
●
H
I
: Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi)
: Less than 20 seconds
J
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between
change intervals.
K
MA
M
SMA806CA
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines
1.
2.
ELS0019T
Visually inspect the EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration.
Inspect the vacuum relief valve of the fuel tank filler cap for clogging and sticking. Refer to EC-37, "How to
Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage" .
Revision: October 2004
MA-19
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Changing In-cabin Microfilter
1.
PFP:00100
ELS0019U
Remove the instrument lower cover RH.
LLIA0072E
2.
a.
Remove the glove box assembly.
Remove the two lower glove box screws.
LJIA0146E
b.
c.
Open the glove box, then remove the four upper glove box
screws.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the two glove box striker screws.
Remove the glove box assembly from the instrument panel to
access the in-cabin microfilter cover.
WJIA0628E
3.
4.
Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
LJIA0134E
Revision: October 2004
MA-20
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
5.
Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and
cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right.
Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater
and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE:
The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The
end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the
vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
A
B
C
LJIA0148E
D
6.
Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
E
F
G
LJIA0134E
7.
Install the glove box assembly in reverse order of removal.
Lower glove box screws
Upper glove box screws
8.
H
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
I
Install the instrument lower cover RH.
J
K
MA
LLIA0072E
Checking Exhaust System
ELS0019V
M
Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment,
leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
SMA211A
Checking A/T Fluid
1.
2.
3.
ELS0019W
Warm up the engine.
Check for any fluid leaks.
Remove the ATF level gauge bolt.
Revision: October 2004
MA-21
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
6.
Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30° to 50°C (86° to 122°F) using the “COLD” range on
the ATF level gauge as follows:
Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear
position. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position.
Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
Remove the ATF level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free
paper.
CAUTION:
When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use
a lint-free paper, not a cloth.
WLIA0014E
Re-insert the ATF level gauge into the charging pipe until the
cap contacts the top of the charging pipe as shown.
CAUTION:
To check fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap
contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge
reversed from the normal inserted position.
Remove the ATF level gauge and note the fluid level. If the fluid
level is at low side of range, add fluid to the transmission
through the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
SCIA1684E
Do not overfill the transmission with fluid.
Drive the vehicle to increase the ATF temperature to 80° C (176° F).
Allow the ATF temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-II to monitor the fluid
temperature as follows:
SLIA0016E
a.
b.
c.
NOTE:
Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the fluid temperature data
using the CONSULT-II.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”.
Revision: October 2004
MA-22
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
7.
Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately
65°C (149°F) using the “HOT” range on the A/T fluid level gauge
as shown.
CAUTION:
● When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always
use lint-free paper, not a cloth.
A
B
C
WLIA0014E
D
To check the fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until
the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the
gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as
shown.
8. Check the fluid condition.
● If the fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may
be an internal problem with the transmission. Refer to AT-183,
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS" . Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission.
● If the ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler lines
using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the
transmission.
9. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt.
10. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
●
Level gauge bolt:
F
G
SCIA1684E
H
I
: Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
Changing A/T Fluid
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
ELS0019X
Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80° C (176° F).
Stop the engine.
Remove the ATF level gauge bolt.
Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission
with new ATF. Always refill with the same volume as the drained
fluid and use the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add
fluid as necessary.
J
K
MA
M
WLIA0014E
●
●
To flush out the old fluid from the coolers, pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine idling
and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line.
When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about
the same as the color of the new fluid, flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity.
Transmission fluid type and capacity
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.
Revision: October 2004
MA-23
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
●
●
●
Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such
as the exhaust manifold.
Do not reuse the drain plug gasket.
Drain plug
5.
6.
7.
8.
: Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80° C (176° F).
Check the fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If the fluid is still dirty, repeat
steps 2 through 5.
Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt.
Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt
: Refer to AT-271, "Components" .
Changing Transfer Fluid
ELS001H7
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Stop the engine.
Remove the drain plug and gasket to drain the transfer fluid as
shown.
Install the new gasket on the drain plug and install the drain plug
in the transfer. Tighten the drain plug to specification.
Drain plug
: Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the gasket.
WDIA0214E
FILLING
1.
Remove the filler plug and gasket. Fill with new specified fluid
until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug
mounting hole as shown.
Fluid grade and capacity
2.
3.
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids
and Lubricants" .
CAUTION:
Carefully fill the transfer with fluid. Filling should take
approximately three minutes.
Leave the vehicle for three minutes and then check the fluid
level again as shown.
Install the new gasket on the filler plug and install the filler plug
in the transfer. Tighten the filler plug to specification.
Filler plug
WDIA0211E
: Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the gasket.
Checking Transfer Fluid
ELS001H8
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL
1.
Check for any fluid leaks from the transfer assembly or around it and correct as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
MA-24
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
2.
3.
Remove the filler plug to check the fluid level at the filler plug
mounting hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start the engine while checking the fluid level.
Install the new gasket on the filler plug and install the filler plug
in the transfer. Tighten the filler plug to specification.
Filler plug
A
B
: Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
C
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the gasket.
WDIA0211E
D
Changing Transfer Oil Filter
ELS001H9
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the oil filter bolts and oil filter.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage the center case and oil filter.
● Loosen the bolts and detach oil filter evenly.
E
F
G
SMT875C
2.
H
Remove the O-rings from the oil filter.
I
J
K
SDIA2327E
3.
4.
MA
Remove the oil filter stud from the oil filter.
Remove the O-ring from the oil filter stud.
M
SDIA2784E
Revision: October 2004
MA-25
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply ATF to the O-ring, and install it on the oil filter stud.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Install the oil filter stud to the oil filter.
SDIA2784E
3.
Apply ATF to the two O-rings, and install them on the oil filter.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-rings.
SDIA2327E
4.
5.
6.
Install the oil filter to the transfer assembly. Tighten the bolts to
the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
● Do not damage the oil filter.
● Attach the oil filter and tighten the bolts evenly.
Check the transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Checking Transfer
Fluid" .
Start the engine for one minute. Then stop the engine and
recheck the transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Checking Transfer
Fluid" .
Checking Propeller Shaft
SDIA2136E
ELS001A0
Check the front and rear propeller shafts for damage, dents, and cracks. Check the joints for looseness and
any damage. Repair or replace as necessary.
Checking Final Drive Oil
ELS001A1
NOTE:
Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL
1.
2.
3.
Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly or around it.
Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking oil level.
Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final
drive assembly and tighten to specification.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
LDIA0127E
Revision: October 2004
MA-26
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Oil grade and viscosity
Filler plug
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
: Refer to FFD-14, "Components" (FFD), RFD-14, "Removal and
Installation" (RFD without ELD), RFD-82, "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD).
Changing Final Drive Oil
A
B
ELS001A2
NOTE:
Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
C
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Stop the engine.
Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil.
Apply sealant to the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Filler plug
D
E
F
: Refer to FFD-14, "Components" (FFD), RFD-14, "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD), RFD-82, "Removal and Installation" (RFD with
ELD).
G
FILLING
1.
Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the
gear oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug
mounting hole as shown.
Oil grade and capacity
2.
H
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants" .
I
After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown.
Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final
drive assembly and tighten to specification.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
J
LDIA0127E
K
Filler plug
: Refer to FFD-14, "Components" (FFD), RFD-14, "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD), RFD-82, "Removal and Installation" (RFD with
ELD).
Balancing Wheels
MA
ELS001HB
REMOVAL
1.
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
● After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the
wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
●
1.
2.
If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with
a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Revision: October 2004
MA-27
2005 Titan
M
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Indicated imbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance
weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value.
Example:
37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz)
SMA054D
a.
b.
Install balance weight in the position shown.
When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved
area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance
weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
● Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with
new ones.
● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
WDIA0060E
c.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
SMA056D
3.
4.
5.
Start wheel balancer again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position
(angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or
below.
Revision: October 2004
MA-28
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance)
Dynamic (At rim flange)
Maximum allowable imbalance
●
Static
5 g (0.18 oz) (one side)
A
10 g (0.35 oz)
If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat installation procedures.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
Revision: October 2004
MA-29
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Tire Rotation
1.
Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown.
Wheel nuts
2.
3.
ELS001A4
: Refer to WT-5, "WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY" .
Adjust the tire pressure to specification. Refer to WT-33, "Tire" .
After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle
has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after a wheel
and tire have been installed such as after repairing a flat tire.
AMA159
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks
●
●
●
ELS001A5
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank. It should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir tank.
If the fluid level is extremely low, check the brake system.
If the brake warning lamp comes on when the fluid is at the correct level, check the brake fluid level switch and the parking
brake switch.
WFIA0173E
Checking Brake Lines and Cables
1.
2.
ELS001A6
Check the brake lines and hoses for cracks, deterioration, and
other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
CAUTION:
If brake fluid leaks are visible around the brake line joints,
retighten the joint, or replace damaged parts as necessary.
Check for brake fluid leaks by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.
SBR389C
Checking Disc Brake
ELS001A7
ROTOR
Check the rotor condition for wear or damage. Refer to BR-33,
"Front Disc Brake" , BR-34, "Rear Disc Brake" .
SMA260A
Revision: October 2004
MA-30
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
CALIPER
A
Check the caliper for leaks, repair as necessary.
B
C
SMA922A
D
PAD
Check the pads for wear or damage. Refer to BR-33, "Front Disc
Brake" , BR-34, "Rear Disc Brake" .
E
F
G
LMA051
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage
H
ELS001A8
STEERING GEAR
●
●
I
Check the steering gear housing for looseness, damage, and oil
leakage as shown.
Check the steering column connections for looseness.
J
K
SGIA0506E
MA
STEERING LINKAGE
●
Check the ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage, and grease leakage.
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines
ELS001A9
CHECKING FLUID LEVEL
Check the power steering fluid level with the engine off.
●
Check fluid level on reservoir. Use “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50° to 80°C (122° to 176°F). Use “COLD” range at fluid
temperatures of 0° to 30°C (32° to 86°F).
CAUTION:
●
Do not overfill.
●
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
●
LGIA0021E
Revision: October 2004
MA-31
2005 Titan
M
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
CHECKING LINES
●
Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,
loose connections, chafing, and deterioration.
SGIA0506E
Checking Axle and Suspension Parts
ELS001AA
FRONT AND REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS
Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage.
●
Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.
●
Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise.
SMA525A
●
●
●
Check the axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
Check the strut and shock absorber for oil leakage or other damage.
Check the suspension ball joints for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage.
DRIVE SHAFT
Check the boots and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage, and
grease leakage.
SFA901
Revision: October 2004
MA-32
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches
ELS001AB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
WLIA0019E
NOTE:
Lubricate the locations shown with a suitable multi-purpose grease. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants"
Revision: October 2004
MA-33
2005 Titan
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters
ELS001AC
Check the seat belt buckles, webbing, retractors, anchors and adjusters. Replace any seat belt assembly as
necessary. Refer to SB-10, "Seat Belt Inspection" .
●
Check the seat belt anchors for loose mounting bolts, damage, or excessive wear.
●
Check the seat belt webbing for any damage, cuts, fraying, or excessive wear.
●
Check the retractor for smooth operation.
●
Check the function of the buckles by inserting the seat belt tongue and checking for proper engagement of
the buckle and press the button on the buckle to check for proper release of the seat belt tongue.
CAUTION:
●
After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached components, such as the guide rail set. NISSAN recommends replacing all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision, unless they are not damaged and are inspected to confirm they are operating
properly after a minor collision.
Also inspect all seat belt assemblies that are not in use during a collision, and replace any components if damaged or not operating properly. The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if
the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags
have been deployed.
●
If any component of the seat belt assembly is suspected of being damaged or not operating properly, do not repair the component. Replace the components as an assembly.
●
If the seat belt webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged then replace the seat belt assembly.
●
Never lubricate the seat belt buckle or tongue.
●
When replacing any seat belt assembly always use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
Revision: October 2004
MA-34
2005 Titan
J AIR CONDITIONER
A
B
SECTION
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4
Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 4
General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 5
A/C Identification Label ............................................ 6
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 6
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT
CONNECTION ...................................................... 6
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7
Precautions for Servicing Compressor ..................... 9
Precautions for Service Equipment .......................... 9
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT .............. 9
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ........................ 9
VACUUM PUMP ................................................. 10
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .................................... 10
SERVICE HOSES ............................................... 10
SERVICE COUPLERS .........................................11
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE .......................11
CHARGING CYLINDER .......................................11
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................11
PREPARATION ......................................................... 12
Special Service Tools ............................................. 12
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 12
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 16
Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 16
REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 16
Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 16
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............. 16
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE .............................. 17
Component Layout ................................................. 18
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ............................... 18
LUBRICANT ............................................................. 20
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 20
LUBRICANT ........................................................ 20
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 20
Revision: October 2004
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 22
Description .............................................................. 22
Operation ................................................................ 22
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL ................................. 22
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL ............................. 22
INTAKE DOORS CONTROL ............................... 22
MODE DOOR CONTROL ................................... 22
DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL ........................ 22
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 22
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ............................ 23
Description of Control System ................................ 24
Control Operation ................................................... 24
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ............................................... 25
RECIRCULATION () SWITCH ............................. 25
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 25
OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0) ..... 25
A/C SWITCH ....................................................... 25
MODE CONTROL DIAL ...................................... 25
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL .................... 25
Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 25
System Description ................................................. 26
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 26
CAN Communication System Description .............. 27
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 28
CONSULT-II Function (HVAC) ................................ 28
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ....................... 28
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 29
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 29
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 31
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ....................... 31
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 32
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 33
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 33
SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 33
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 34
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 34
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ............ 35
Schematic ............................................................... 36
MTC-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Wiring Diagram — A/C — ....................................... 37
Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value... 43
PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ............ 43
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR
FRONT AIR CONTROL ....................................... 43
A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI
Only) ....................................................................... 45
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 45
Operational Check .................................................. 47
CHECKING BLOWER ......................................... 47
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR ............................ 47
CHECKING RECIRCULATION ............................ 47
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE ......... 48
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE .......... 48
CHECK A/C SWITCH .......................................... 48
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control ........................................................................... 49
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 49
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 50
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FORA/C SYSTEM... 50
Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 52
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 52
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 53
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 53
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE
DOOR MOTOR ................................................... 53
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 56
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 56
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 57
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 57
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX
DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) .................................... 58
Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 60
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 60
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 61
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 61
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE
DOOR MOTOR ................................................... 62
Defroster Door Motor Circuit ................................... 63
SYMPTOM: .......................................................... 63
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 63
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 64
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 64
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ............................ 64
Front Blower Motor Circuit ...................................... 67
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 67
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 68
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 68
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER
MOTOR ............................................................... 69
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 73
Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 74
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 74
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 75
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET
CLUTCH .............................................................. 75
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 79
Insufficient Cooling ................................................. 80
Revision: October 2004
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................80
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES ................81
PERFORMANCE CHART ....................................83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE ...................................................................84
Insufficient Heating .................................................87
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................87
Noise .......................................................................88
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................88
Self-diagnosis .........................................................89
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................89
Water Valve Circuit ..................................................90
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................90
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER
VALVE ..................................................................90
COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................92
Intake Sensor Circuit ...............................................92
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................92
DIAGNOSTICPROCEDUREFORINTAKESENSOR .....................................................................92
COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................94
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................95
Removal and Installation .........................................95
REMOVAL ............................................................95
INSTALLATION ....................................................95
INTAKE SENSOR ......................................................96
Removal and Installation .........................................96
REMOVAL ............................................................96
INSTALLATION ....................................................96
BLOWER MOTOR .....................................................97
Removal and Installation .........................................97
REMOVAL ............................................................97
INSTALLATION ....................................................97
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................98
Removal and Installation .........................................98
FUNCTION ..........................................................98
REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................98
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ..........................98
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ............... 100
Removal and Installation ....................................... 100
REMOVAL .......................................................... 100
INSTALLATION .................................................. 101
HEATER CORE ....................................................... 102
Removal and Installation ....................................... 102
REMOVAL .......................................................... 103
INSTALLATION .................................................. 103
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ................................. 104
Removal and Installation ....................................... 104
REMOVAL .......................................................... 104
INSTALLATION .................................................. 104
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR .......................................... 105
Removal and Installation ....................................... 105
REMOVAL .......................................................... 105
INSTALLATION .................................................. 105
MODE DOOR MOTOR ............................................ 106
Removal and Installation ....................................... 106
REMOVAL .......................................................... 106
INSTALLATION .................................................. 106
MTC-2
2005 Titan
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ......................................... 107
Removal and Installation ...................................... 107
REMOVAL ......................................................... 107
INSTALLATION ................................................. 107
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL .......................... 108
Removal and Installation ...................................... 108
REMOVAL ......................................................... 108
INSTALLATION ................................................. 108
DUCTS AND GRILLES .......................................... 109
Removal and Installation ...................................... 109
DEFROSTER NOZZLE ......................................110
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT ................110
RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT ......................110
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT .......................... 111
FLOOR DUCT .................................................... 111
GRILLES ............................................................ 111
REFRIGERANT LINES ............................................112
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ................112
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT .................................................................112
Components ..........................................................114
Removal and Installation for Compressor .............115
REMOVAL ..........................................................115
INSTALLATION ..................................................116
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch ..116
REMOVAL ..........................................................116
INSPECTION .....................................................117
INSTALLATION ..................................................118
BREAK-IN OPERATION ....................................119
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible
Hose ......................................................................119
REMOVAL ..........................................................119
INSTALLATION ..................................................119
Removal andInstallation for High-pressure Flexible
Hose ......................................................................119
REMOVAL ..........................................................119
INSTALLATION ................................................. 119
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 120
REMOVAL ......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION ................................................. 120
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe . 120
REMOVAL ......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION ................................................. 120
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor .................................................................. 120
REMOVAL ......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION ................................................. 120
Removal and Installation for Condenser .............. 120
REMOVAL ......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION ................................................. 121
Removal and Installation for Evaporator .............. 122
REMOVAL ......................................................... 122
INSTALLATION ................................................. 123
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve ...... 123
REMOVAL ......................................................... 123
INSTALLATION ................................................. 123
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 123
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Dye Leak Detector ................................................ 123
Dye Injection ......................................................... 124
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 124
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK
DETECTOR ....................................................... 124
CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 125
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 127
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ................ 127
COMPRESSOR ................................................ 127
LUBRICANT ...................................................... 127
REFRIGERANT ................................................. 127
ENGINE IDLING SPEED .................................. 127
BELT TENSION ................................................. 127
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-3
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EJS0031M
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
EJS0031N
WARNING:
●
CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To
determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant
Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier.
●
Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
●
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed:
–
When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
–
When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
–
Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
–
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a)
recovery equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming
service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
–
Do not allow lubricant, NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent, to come in
contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
Contaminated Refrigerant
EJS0031O
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
●
Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
●
Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply.
●
Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-4
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility
does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In
addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN
Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precautions
EJS0031P
WARNING:
●
Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
●
Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or
air conditioning system.
●
Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
●
Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
●
Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
●
Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
●
Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
●
Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EJS0031Q
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet
(UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
MTC
Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J- K
41995).
For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions
L
and precautions prior to performing work.
A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal
should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a M
future service.
Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period
of time cannot be removed .
Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure
occurs.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-5
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
A/C Identification Label
EJS0031R
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification
label on the underside of hood.
WJIA0672E
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection
EJS0031S
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
●
Expansion valve to cooling unit
●
Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit)
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
●
●
The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This
reduces the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction
of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing
characteristics.
The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections.
SHA815E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-6
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A
A/C Compressor and Condenser
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1020E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-7
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
1.
High-pressure service valve
4.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
5.
Condenser
6.
Compressor shaft seal
7.
High-pressure flexible hose
8.
Low-pressure flexible hose
9.
Low-pressure service valve
10. Low-pressure pipe
2.
Grommet
3.
11. Expansion valve
High-pressure pipe
12. Drain hose
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or
around the connection.
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
Connection type
O-ring
size
Part number*
D
New
8
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
Former
10
J2476 89956
9.25 (0.3642)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
New
12
W
mm (in)
Former
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
New
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.091)
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
92195 AH300
21.8 (0.858)
2.4 (0.094)
16
Former
New
SHA814E
mm (in)
19
Former
New
24
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
WARNING:
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
●
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber.
●
When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
●
After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
●
When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
connection.
●
Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
●
Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
●
Always replace used O-rings.
●
When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not
to apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Lubricant name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS)
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
●
O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
●
When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
●
Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-8
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
RHA861F
Precautions for Servicing Compressor
●
●
●
●
●
●
EJS0031T
H
Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in CompresI
sor” exactly. Refer to MTC-20, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" .
Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
MTC
After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both
directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is
installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour.
After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal K
operation. Refer to MTC-116, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch".
Precautions for Service Equipment
EJS0031U
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any
refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-9
2005 Titan
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
VACUUM PUMP
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into
the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off
after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
●
Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of
the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the
pump.
●
For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate
the hose from the pump.
●
If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose
from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is
open and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270D
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-134a or
134a). Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant.
SHA533D
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
Revision: October 2004
MTC-10
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
SERVICE COUPLERS
A
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. If an improper
connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
B
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
C
RHA273D
D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified
lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2"-16 ACME.
E
F
G
RHA274D
H
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EJS0031V
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses"
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-11
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EJS003RG
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-38873-A)
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
LHA171
KV99233130
(J-29884)
Pulley puller
Removing pulley
LHA172
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment
EJS003RH
Never mix HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and/or the specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or
the lubricant.
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubricant.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used refrigerant/lubricant contamination will
occur and compressor failure will result.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HFC-134a (R-134a)
( — )
Refrigerant
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
●
large container 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT196
Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG),
type S (DH-PS)
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a)
swash plate compressors (NISSAN
only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp
fl oz)
KLH00-PAGR0
( — )
NISSAN A/C System Lubricant
Type S (DH-PS)
S-NT197
—
(J-43600)
Recovery/Recycling
Recharging equipment (ACR2000)
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
and Recharging
WJIA0293E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-12
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector
Power supply:
A
●
DC 12V (battery terminal)
B
C
D
AHA281A
—
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety
goggles
(J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447) qty. 24
HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant
dye
(J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner
E
Power supply:
●
DC 12V (battery terminal)
F
G
H
ZHA200H
—
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak detector
Power supply:
●
DC 12V (battery terminal)
For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles
I
MTC
SHA438F
—
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a)
PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after
charging system with dye.)
SHA439F
—
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle
SHA440F
For cleaning dye spills.
SHA441F
Revision: October 2004
MTC-13
L
M
For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent
leak detection dye into A/C system.
—
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
K
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses
and couplers)
Identification:
●
The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size-Thread size
●
1/2”-16 ACME
RJIA0196E
Service hoses:
●
Hose color:
High side hose
(J-39500-72B)
●
Low side hose
(J-39500-72R)
●
Utility hose
(J-39500-72Y)
S-NT201
High side coupler
(J-39500-20A)
●
Low side coupler
(J-39500-24A)
Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
●
High side hose: Red with black stripe
●
Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
●
1/2”-16 ACME
Hose fitting to service hose:
Service couplers
●
●
●
M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.
S-NT202
—
(J-39699)
Refrigerant weight scale
For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size-Thread size
●
1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT200
—
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)
Capacity:
●
Air displacement: 4 CFM
●
Micron rating: 20 microns
●
Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size-Thread size
●
1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT203
Revision: October 2004
MTC-14
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
EJS003RI
A
Tool name
Description
(J-41810-NI)
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a)
For checking refrigerant purity and
system contamination
B
C
D
RJIA0197E
Power tool
E
Loosening bolts and nuts
F
PBIC0190E
(J-44614)
Clutch disc holding tool
G
Clutch disc holding tool
H
I
WHA230
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-15
2005 Titan
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Refrigerant Cycle
PFP:KA990
EJS0031Z
REFRIGERANT FLOW
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coils
are controlled by externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case.
Refrigerant System Protection
EJS00320
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM.
The ECM de-energizes the A/C relay to disengage the magnetic compressor clutch when pressure on the high
pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below
about 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2 , 17.4 psi).
Revision: October 2004
MTC-16
2005 Titan
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor.
When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 2,990 kPa (30.5 kg/
cm2 , 433.6 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1347E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-17
2005 Titan
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Component Layout
EJS00321
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
LJIA0141E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-18
2005 Titan
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1.
Defroster nozzle
2.
LH side demister duct
3.
LH ventilator duct
4.
RH side demister duct
5.
RH ventilator duct
6.
Center ventilator duct
7.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
8.
Floor duct
9.
Clips
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-19
2005 Titan
LUBRICANT
LUBRICANT
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
PFP:KLG00
EJS00322
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain
the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
●
Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
●
Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
LUBRICANT
Name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS)
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation.
Start the engine and set the following conditions:
test condition
●
Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
●
A/C switch: On
●
Blower speed: Max. position
●
Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
●
Intake position: Recirculation (
)
●
Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the following table.
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system.
Amount of lubricant to be added:
Lubricant to be added to system
Part replaced
m
Amount of lubricant
(US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
Remarks
Front evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not replaced.
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *1
In case of refrigerant leak
*1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed.
Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" .
Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" .
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into
the recovery/recycling equipment.
Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the
amount of lubricant drained.
Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container.
Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this
lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-20
2005 Titan
LUBRICANT
8.
9.
Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant
to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant
at this time.
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
RHA065DD
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-21
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Description
PFP:27500
EJS003TN
The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the position of the front air controls temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following two sensors:
●
Intake sensor
●
PBR (Position Balanced Resistor).
The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to control:
●
Outlet air volume
●
Air temperature
●
Air distribution
Operation
EJS003TO
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL
The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature changed based on the position of the temperature
switch.
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Blower speed is controlled based on front blower switch settings.
When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower
switch is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned counterclockwise.
When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing.
INTAKE DOORS CONTROL
The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (recirculation is not allowed in
floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes) control dial setting.
MODE DOOR CONTROL
The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode control dial.
DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL
The defroster door is controlled by turning the defroster dial to front defroster.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
WJIA1379E
When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM.
BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-22
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line.
Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
A
B
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
The self-diagnostic system is built into the front air control to quickly locate the cause of symptoms. Refer to
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-23
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Description of Control System
EJS003TP
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs.
The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below:
WJIA1448E
Control Operation
EJS003TQ
Front air control
WJIA1405E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-24
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
A
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
RECIRCULATION () SWITCH
●
●
●
When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor mode.
B
C
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
When switch is ON, rear window is defogged.
D
OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0)
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet
doors are set to the foot position.
E
A/C SWITCH
The compressor is ON or OFF.
F
MODE CONTROL DIAL
Controls the air discharge outlets through control of the mode and defroster doors.
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL
G
Manually control the blower speed. Fourteen speeds are available for manual control.
Discharge Air Flow
H
EJS003TR
I
MTC
K
WJIA0540E
L
M
WJIA1297E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-25
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
System Description
EJS003TS
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
WJIA0531E
WJIA1406E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-26
2005 Titan
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
CAN Communication System Description
EJS003TU
A
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-27
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (HVAC)
PFP:00004
EJS003TV
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
Description
Displays front air control self-diagnosis results.
Displays front air control input/output data in real time.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Front air control part number can be read.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the
ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “HVAC” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “HVAC” is not
indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC)
Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-28
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Operation Procedure
1.
A
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen to view all set DTC's.
B
C
D
BCIA0031E
E
Display Item List
DTC
Description
Reference page
F
B2573
Battery voltage out of range
SC-4, "BATTERY"
B2575
BCM not responding to A/C request
MTC-75, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET
CLUTCH"
B2576
BCM not responding to rear defroster request
GW-95, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER"
B2577
Air mix door motor (Front) circuit failure
MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR
MOTOR (FRONT)"
B2581
Intake sensor circuit short
B2582
Intake sensor circuit open
B2583
Defroster door motor circuit failure
MTC-63, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
U1000
CAN bus fault
LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
B2586
Intake door motor (front) circuit malfunction
MTC-60, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
B2587
Stuck button
MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT"
B2588
Mode door motor circuit failure
MTC-52, "Mode Door Motor Circuit"
G
H
MTC-60, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
I
MTC
K
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
L
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
M
BCIA0031E
2.
Touch either “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen.
All signals
Monitors all the items.
Selection from menu
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
3.
4.
When “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch items to be monitored. When “MAIN SIGNALS” is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch “START”.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-29
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5.
Touch “RECORD” while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch “STOP”.
Display Item List
Monitor item
BATT VIA CAN
IGN VIA CAN
Value
Contents
"V"
Displays battery voltage signal.
"ON/OFF"
Displays ignition switch signal.
EVAP TEMP SEN
"°C/°F"
RR TEMPSET FR
"V"
Displays air mix door (front) set point signal.
Displays intake sensor signal.
MODE FDBCK
"V"
Displays mode door motor feedback signal.
DVR MIX FDBCK
"V"
Displays air mix door motor (front) feedback signal.
DEF FDBCK
"V"
Displays defroster door motor feedback signal.
RECIRC
"ON/OFF"
Displays recirculation switch signal.
A/C
"ON/OFF"
Displays A/C switch signal.
RR DEFOG
"ON/OFF"
Displays rear defroster request signal.
MODE SELECT
" [ PNL ]"
" [ MIX ]"
" [ FLR ]"
" [ DEFR ]"
" [ MAX ]"
" [ DENT ]"
Displays mode door motor position.
*: DENT is displayed when MODE switch is between selections.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-30
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EJS003TW
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
E
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the
ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
2.
MTC
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “BCM” is not
indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC)
Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-31
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
Touch “AIR CONDITIONER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
WJIA0468E
2.
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
BCIA0031E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on
"DATA MONITOR" screen.
All Signals
Monitors all the items.
Selection from menu
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to
be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items
will be monitored.
Touch "START".
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP".
WJIA0469E
Display Item List
Monitor item name “operation or
unit”
Contents
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “IGN Position (ON)/(OFF), ACC Position (OFF)” status as judged from ignition switch signal.
COMP ON SIG
“ON/OFF”
Displays “COMP (ON)/COMP (OFF)” status as judged from air conditioner switch signal.
FAN ON SIG
“ON/OFF”
Displays “FAN (ON)/FAN (OFF)” status as judged from blower motor switch signal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-32
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
EJS003TX
A
WORK FLOW
B
C
D
SHA900E
*1
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
E
SYMPTOM TABLE
Symptom
Reference Page
A/C system does not come on.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System.
MTC-49
A/C system cannot be controlled.
Go to Self-diagnosis Function.
MTC-45
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor.
MTC-52
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor.
MTC-56
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor.
MTC-60
Defroster door motor is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Defroster Door Motor.
MTC-63
Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor.
MTC-67
Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
MTC-74
Insufficient cooling
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
MTC-80
Insufficient heating
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
MTC-87
Noise
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
MTC-88
Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis.
MTC-89
Air outlet does not change.
Mode door motor is malfunctioning.
F
G
Discharge air temperature does not change.
Air mix door motor is malfunctioning.
H
Intake door does not change.
Intake door motor is malfunctioning.
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-33
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EJS003TY
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WJIA1407E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-34
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1449E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-35
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Schematic
EJS003TZ
WJWA0217E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-36
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — A/C —
EJS003U0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJWA0218E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-37
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0219E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-38
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJWA0220E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-39
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0221E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-40
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJWA0222E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-41
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0223E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-42
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value
EJS003U1
A
Measure voltage between each terminal and ground by following
Terminals and Reference Value for front air control.
B
C
D
WJIA1412E
PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
E
F
G
WJIA0402E
H
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Ignition
switch
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
1
B
Ground
-
-
0V
2
Y
Sensor power
ON
-
5V
3
W/G
Air mix door motor (Front) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
4
G
Air mix door motor (Front) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
5
BR/W
Mode door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
6
P/L
Mode door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
7
O
Intake door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
8
G/B
Intake door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
9
L/B
Intake sensor
ON
10
W/G
Water valve
Item
11
Y/B
Rear defroster request
12
W/R
Compressor ON signal
14
Y/G
Power supply for IGN
Water valve open
0V
ON
Water valve closed
5V
A/C switch OFF
5V
ON
A/C switch ON
0V
-
Battery voltage
15
P
Sensor ground
ON
-
0V
16
GR
Mode door motor feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
18
SB
Air mix door motor (Front) feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
19
LG
Defroster door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
20
P/B
Defroster door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
21
V/R
Sensor return
ON
-
0 - 5V
22
Y/R
Power supply for BAT
-
-
Battery voltage
23
R/L
Illumination +
Revision: October 2004
ON
Park lamps ON
MTC-43
K
L
M
Battery voltage
ON
ON
MTC
0 - 5V
ON
ON
I
Battery voltage
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal No.
Wire
color
24
BR
Item
Illumination -
Ignition
switch
-
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Park lamps ON
PIIA2344E
25
LG/B
Defroster door motor feedback
ON
26
R/B
34
Front blower request
ON
L
CAN-H
ON
-
0 - 5V
35
P
CAN-L
ON
-
0 - 5V
36
L/R
Fan ON signal
ON
40
G/R
Variable Blower Control output
ON
Revision: October 2004
-
0 - 5V
Front blower motor OFF
Battery voltage
Front blower motor ON
0V
Fan switch OFF
5V
Fan switch ON
0V
MTC-44
-
0 - 5V
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)
EJS003U2
DESCRIPTION
A
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. Refer to applicable sections
(items) for details. Fault codes (if any are present) will be displayed in the ambient temperature display area.
Refer to MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
WJIA1414E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-45
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART
Code No.
Reference page
03
Battery voltage out of range
SC-4, "BATTERY"
20
BCM not responding to A/C request
MTC-75, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET
CLUTCH"
21
BCM not responding to rear defroster request
GW-95, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER"
22
Air mix door motor (Front) circuit failure
MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
56
Intake sensor circuit short
57
Intake sensor circuit open
62
Defroster door motor circuit failure
MTC-63, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
80
CAN bus fault
LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
82
Intake door motor (front) circuit malfunction
MTC-62, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR
MOTOR"
90
Stuck button
MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT"
92
Mode door motor circuit failure
MTC-52, "Mode Door Motor Circuit"
Revision: October 2004
MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
MTC-46
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operational Check
EJS003U3
A
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
Conditions
: Engine running and at normal operating temperature
B
CHECKING BLOWER
1.
Turn fan control switch clockwise. Blower should operate on low
speed.
2. Turn the fan control switch again, and continue checking blower
speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on MAX speed.
If NG, go to MTC-69, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER
MOTOR"
If OK, continue with next check.
C
D
E
WJIA1426E
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR
1.
F
Turn the mode switch to each mode position.
G
H
I
WJIA1427E
2.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-25, "Discharge Air Flow" .
Mode door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-52, "Mode Door
Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual
inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF or D/F
is selected.
MTC
K
L
WJIA1297E
CHECKING RECIRCULATION
1.
Press recirculation (
) switch one time. Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Press recirculation (
) switch one more time. Recirculation
indicator should go off.
3. Listen for intake door position change (blower sound should
change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-60, "Intake Door
Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual
inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF, D/F or floor is selected.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-47
WJIA1428E
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Rotate temperature control dial counterclockwise.
2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation if OK, go to
trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-80, "Insufficient Cooling" . If air
mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA1429E
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Rotate temperature control dial clockwise.
2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to
trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-87, "Insufficient Heating" . If air
mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA1430E
CHECK A/C SWITCH
1.
2.
Press A/C switch with the fan switch ON.
A/C switch indicator will turn ON.
● Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual
inspection).
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual
inspection).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-74, "Magnet Clutch
Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA1431E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-48
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control
EJS003U5
A
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA1411E
*1
MTC-49, "Power Supply and Ground *2
Circuit for Front Air Control".
MTC
MTC-47, "Operational Check"
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-49
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes
information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner
operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door
motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then
controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the
various switches and temperature dial are operated, data is input to
the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air conditioner system.
WJIA1412E
Potentio Temperature Control (PTC)
The PTC is built into the front air control. It can be set from cold to
hot or any intermediate position by rotating the temperature dial.
WJIA1413E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
WJIA0414E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-50
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
A
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminals 14 (Y/G) and 22 (Y/R), and ground.
Terminals
B
Ignition switch position
C
(+)
Front air
control
connector
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
(-)
OFF
ACC
ON
Approx. 0V
Approx. 0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
D
M49
14 (Y/G)
M49
22 (Y/R)
Ground
WJIA0415E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check 10A fuses [Nos. 8 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-77, "FUSE BLOCKJUNCTION BOX(J/B)" .
● If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
● If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 - Ground
G
H
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
F
I
: Continuity should exist.
MTC
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
WJIA1351E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-51
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Mode Door Motor Circuit
EJS003U6
SYMPTOM:
●
Air outlet does not change.
●
Mode door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1425E
*1
MTC-25, "Discharge Air Flow".
*2
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
*3
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)".
*4
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
*5
MTC-53, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR
MOTOR".
*6
MTC-33, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
Revision: October 2004
MTC-52
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
A
Mode door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Mode door motor
●
PBR (built into mode door motor)
B
System Operation
C
The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door
motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the
mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it.
The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit.
D
E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It
rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by the
front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates
the mode door.
F
G
H
WJIA0587E
I
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS
MTC
Self-diagnosis code 92 or DTC B2588 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function
(With NAVI Only)" .
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector and mode door motor
connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 5 (BR/W) and mode door motor harness connector
M142 terminal 5 (BR/W) and between front air control harness
connector M49 terminal 6 (P/L) and mode door motor harness
connector M142 terminal 6 (P/L).
5-5
6-6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
MTC-53
L
M
LJIA0027E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to MTC-106, "MODE DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
K
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK PBR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the mode door motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between mode door motor harness connector
M142 terminal 3 (Y) and ground.
3 - Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LJIA0028E
4. CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN MODE DOOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control connector.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M142 terminal 3 (Y) and front air control harness connector M49
terminal 2 (Y).
3-2
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
LJIA0029E
5. CHECK PBR GROUND REFERENCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control connector.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M142 terminal 1 (P) and front air control harness connector M49
terminal 15 (P).
1 - 15
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
LJIA0031E
6. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect the front air control connector and mode door motor
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 16 (GR) and ground.
Press mode switch through all modes.
16 - Ground
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-54
LJIA0032E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the mode door motor connector and front air control
harness connector.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M142 terminal 2 (GR) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 16 (GR).
2 - 16
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to MTC-106, "MODE
DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
D
LJIA0034E
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-55
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
EJS003U7
SYMPTOM:
●
Discharge air temperature does not change.
●
Air mix door motor does not operate.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1432E
*1
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
*4
MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR
MOTOR (FRONT)".
Revision: October 2004
*2
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)".
MTC-56
*3
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
A
Air mix door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Air mix door motors (Front)
●
PBR (built-into air mix motors)
B
System Operation
C
The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver. The front air control then
applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix
door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door.
D
E
Air Mix Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motors
F
G
H
WJIA0435E
The front air mix door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling
unit. This motor rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed
to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back
to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors.
I
MTC
K
WJIA1417E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-57
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)
1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Self-diagnosis code 22 or DTC B2577 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function
(With NAVI Only)" .
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector and air mix door motor
(front) connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 3 (W/G) and 4 (G) and air mix door motor (front)
harness connector M147 terminal 1 (W/G) and 6 (G).
3-1
4-6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (front). Refer to MTC-107,
"AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA1418E
3. CHECK PBR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M147 terminal 3 (Y) and ground.
3 - Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WJIA1419E
4. CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) AND
FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness
connector M147 terminal 3 (Y) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 (Y).
3-2
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-58
WJIA1420E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK PBR GROUND REFERENCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness
connector M147 terminal 2 (P) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 15 (P).
2 - 15
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
D
WJIA1421E
6. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
Reconnect the front air control connector and air mix door motor
(Front) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 (SB) and ground.
Rotate Front temperature control dial through complete range.
18 - Ground
F
G
: Approx. 0V - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> GO TO 7.
H
LJIA0041E
I
7. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
MTC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) connector and front air
control connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness
connector M147 terminal 4 (SB) and front air control harness
connector M49 terminal 18 (SB).
4 - 18
L
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (Front). Refer to MTC-107,
"AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
K
MTC-59
M
WJIA1422E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Door Motor Circuit
EJS003U8
SYMPTOM:
●
Intake door does not change.
●
Intake door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1433E
*1
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
Revision: October 2004
*2
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)".
MTC-60
*3
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
A
Intake door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Intake door motor
B
System Operation
The intake door control determines the intake door positions based on the position of the recirculation switch.
When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates closing off the fresh air inlet and
recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motor rotates in the
opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin.
C
D
Intake Doors Control Specification
E
F
G
WJIA0436E
H
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that
air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is
conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
I
MTC
K
WJIA0552E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-61
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Self-diagnosis code 82 or DTC B2586 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function
(With NAVI Only)" .
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector and intake door motor
connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 7 (O) and intake door motor harness connector
M58 terminal 1 (O) and between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 8 (G/B) and intake door motor harness connector M58 terminal 6 (G/B).
7-1
8-6
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor. Refer to MTC-105, "INTAKE DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-62
WJIA0591E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
EJS003U9
A
SYMPTOM:
●
●
Defroster door does not change.
Defroster door motor does not operate normally.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1423E
*1
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
Revision: October 2004
*2
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis
Function (With NAVI Only)".
MTC-63
*3
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Defroster door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Defroster door motor
System Operation
The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the mode switch. When the
mode switch is in the defroster position, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts.
When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing
off air flow to the defroster ducts.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Defroster door motor
The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling
unit. The front air control sends a voltage to rotate the defroster door
directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor
ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied
to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door.
WJIA0592E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Self-diagnosis code 62 or DTC B2583 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function
(With NAVI Only)" .
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector and defroster door motor
connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 19 (LG) and defroster door motor connector M144
terminal 1 (LG) and between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 20 (P/B) and defroster door motor connector M144
terminal 6 (P/B).
19 - 1
20 - 6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
WJIA0553E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-104, "DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-64
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK PBR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect the defroster door motor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between defroster door motor harness connector
M144 terminal 3 (Y) and ground.
3 - Ground
B
: Approx. 5V.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
D
WJIA0554E
4. CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR AND FRONT
E
AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control connector.
Check continuity between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 3 (Y) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 2 (Y).
3-2
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
H
WJIA0555E
I
5. CHECK PBR GROUND REFERENCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
MTC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control connector.
Check continuity between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 2 (P) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 15 (P).
2 - 15
K
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
L
WJIA0556E
6. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect the front air control connector and defroster door
motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 25 (LG/B) and ground.
Change mode between floor, defroster, and panel.
25 - Ground
: Approx.0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-65
WJIA0557E
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the defroster door motor connector and front air control connector.
Check continuity between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 4 (LG/B) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 25 (LG/B).
4 - 25
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-104,
"DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-66
WJIA0558E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Front Blower Motor Circuit
EJS003UA
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
●
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under cold starting conditions.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1451E
*1
.MTC-47, "Operational Check" .
*2
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)".
*4
MTC-69, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR".
*5
EC-192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR"EC-205, "DTC P0125
ECT SENSOR"
Revision: October 2004
MTC-67
*3
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
●
●
●
●
●
Front air control
Front blower switch
Variable blower control
Front blower motor
Front blower motor relay
System Operation
WJIA1385E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control
The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control
to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt
range (approx.).
WJIA0559E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-68
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
A
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting
blower speed control.
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA1386E
1. CHECK FUSES
H
Check 20A fuses [No. 24 and 27 (Located in the fuse and fusible link box)]. For fuse layout. Refer to PG-78,
"FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX" .
I
Fuses are good.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
MTC
2. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor connector.
Press the mode switch to select any mode except off.
Turn the front blower control dial to high.
Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector
M62 terminal 2 (W/L) and ground.
2 - Ground
M
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
L
WJIA0593E
MTC-69
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor relay.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminals 5 (GR) and ground.
5 - Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1359E
4. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Refer to MTC-73, "Front Blower Motor Relay" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor relay.
5. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminal 3 (W/L) and front blower motor harness connector
M62 terminal 2 (W/L).
3-2
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1360E
6. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect variable blower control harness connector.
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminals 3 (W/L) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 1 (W/L).
3-1
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1361E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-70
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 40 (G/R) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 2 (G/R).
40 - 2
B
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
D
WJIA1387E
8. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminal 2 (Y/G) and ground.
2 - Ground
F
: Battery voltage.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
WJIA1363E
9. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front blower motor relay connector
M107 terminal 1 (R/B) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 26 (R/B).
1 - 26
MTC
K
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL
UNIT" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
WJIA1364E
M
10. REPLACE FUSES
1. Replace fuses.
2. Activate the front blower motor.
3. Do fuses blow?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-71
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
11. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor connector and variable blower
control connector.
Check continuity between variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 1 (W/L) and ground.
1 - Ground.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1365E
12. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 40 (G/R) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 2 (G/R).
40 - 2
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1387E
13. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Refer to MTC-97, "BLOWER MOTOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor. Refer to MTC-97, "BLOWER MOTOR" .
14. CHECK BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front blower motor harness connector
M62 terminal 1 (L/W) and variable blower control harness connector
M122 terminal 3 (L/W).
1-3
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1367E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-72
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
15. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between variable blower control harness connector
M122 terminal 4 (B/W) and ground.
4 - ground
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control. Refer to MTC-108,
"VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
D
WJIA1368E
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front Blower Motor Relay
E
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and
ground to coil side terminals of relay.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
WJIA1401E
L
Front Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
●
Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit.
●
Apply 12 volts to terminal 1 and ground to terminal 2 and verify
that the motor operates freely and quietly.
M
WJIA1265E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-73
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Magnet Clutch Circuit
EJS003UD
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1435E
*1
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
*4
MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
Revision: October 2004
*2
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis *3
Function (With NAVI Only)".
MTC-74
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal
from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control
The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor.
When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns
OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value.
A
B
C
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA1392E
1. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUITS
Check intake sensor. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Malfunctioning intake sensor. Refer to MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit" .
K
L
2. PERFORM AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
Does magnet clutch operate?
YES or NO
YES >> ●
WITH CONSULT-II
GO TO 5.
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
GO TO 6.
>> Check 10A fuse (No. 42, located in IPDM E/R), and GO TO 3.
●
NO
Revision: October 2004
MTC
MTC-75
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and A/C compressor (magnet
clutch) connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E119
terminal 11 (Y/B) and A/C compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B).
11 – 1
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA0560E
4. CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT
Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage to terminal
1 of A/C compressor.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to MTC-116, "Removal
and Installation for Compressor Clutch" .
WJIA1452E
5. CHECK BCM INPUT (COMPRESSOR ON) SIGNAL
Check compressor ON/OFF signal. Refer to MTC-31, "CONSULT-II
Function (BCM)" .
A/C SW ON
A/C SW OFF
: COMP ON SIG ON
: COMP ON SIG OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
WJIA0469E
6. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
27 (W/R) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal
12 (W/R).
27 - 12
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
WJIA1443E
MTC-76
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL)
1.
2.
3.
A
Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 12 (W/R) and ground.
B
Terminals
C
(+)
Condition
Front air
control connector
Voltage
(-)
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
D
WJIA0449E
M49
12 (W/R)
Ground
A/C switch: ON
Approx. 0V
A/C switch: OFF
Approx. 5V
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when A/C switch is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95,
"CONTROL UNIT" .
NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when A/C switch is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
F
G
8. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage of refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to MTC-28, "CONSULT-II Function (HVAC)" .
I
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal
70 (B/W) and ground.
MTC
Terminals
K
(+)
ECM connector
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
(-)
F54
70 (B/W)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> ●
Condition
Voltage
A/C switch: ON
Approx. 0.36 - 3.88V
L
WITH CONSULT-II
GO TO 9.
LJIA0124E
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
GO TO 10.
>> Refer to EC-620, "REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR" .
●
NG
Revision: October 2004
MTC-77
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
9. CHECK BCM INPUT (FAN ON) SIGNAL
Check FAN ON/OFF signal. Refer to MTC-31, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" .
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL
DIAL ON
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL
DIAL OFF
: FAN ON SIG ON
: FAN ON SIG OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
WJIA0469E
10. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
28 (L/R) and front air control harness connector M50 terminal 36
(L/R).
28 - 36
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1393E
11. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (FAN ON SIGNAL)
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 36 (L/R) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Front air control connector
M50
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
36 (L/R)
Condition
Voltage
A/C switch: ON
Blower motor
operates
Approx. 0V
A/C switch: OFF
Approx. 5V
(-)
Ground
WJIA1394E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when blower motor is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95,
"CONTROL UNIT" .
NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when blower motor is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: October 2004
MTC-78
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
12. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
A
Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
●
BCM – ECM
●
ECM – IPDM E/R
●
ECM – Front air control
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part(s).
B
C
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
D
The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the condenser.
E
F
G
WJIA1444E
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-79
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Cooling
EJS003UE
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1436E
*3
*1
.MTC-47, "Operational Check" .
*2
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)".
*4
EC-436, "DTC P1217 ENGINE
OVER TEMPERATURE" .
*5
MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant". *6
*7
MTC-83, "Test Reading"
*8
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts"
Revision: October 2004
MTC-80
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
CHART".
.MTC-81, "PERFORMANCE TEST
DIAGNOSES"
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0533E
*1
MTC-83, "PERFORMANCE
CHART".
*4
MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
Revision: October 2004
*2
MTC-83, "PERFORMANCE
CHART".
MTC-81
*3
MTC-84, "Trouble Diagnoses for
Unusual Pressure".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJIA1371E
*1
MTC-116, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch".
Revision: October 2004
*2
MTC-67, "Front Blower Motor Circuit".
MTC-82
*3
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
A
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Door window
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode switch
B
C
(Ventilation) set
Recirculation (REC) switch
D
(Recirculation) set
Max. speed set
Blower speed
Engine speed
E
Idle speed
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
F
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator
°C (°F)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
20 (68)
5.3 - 6.5 (42 - 44)
25 (77)
9.7 - 11.5 (49 - 53)
30 (86)
13.8 - 16.3 (57 - 61)
35 (95)
18.0 - 21.2 (64 - 70)
40 (104)
22.2 - 25.7 (72 - 78)
50 - 60
20 (68)
6.5 - 7.7 (44 - 46)
25 (77)
11.5 - 13.3 (53 - 56)
30 (86)
16.3 - 18.8 (61 - 66)
35 (95)
21.2 - 24.0 (70 - 75)
40 (104)
25.7 - 29.2 (78 - 85)
60 - 70
G
H
I
MTC
K
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
50 - 70
Revision: October 2004
L
High-pressure (Discharge side)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
20 (68)
680 - 840
(6.94 - 8.57, 98.6 - 121.8)
160 - 198
(1.63 - 2.02, 23.2 - 28.7)
25 (77)
800 - 985
(8.16 - 10.05, 116.0 - 142.8)
198 - 245
(2.02 - 2.50, 28.7 - 35.5)
30 (86)
940 - 1,150
(9.59 - 11.73, 136.3 - 166.8)
225 - 278
(2.30 - 2.84, 32.6 - 40.3)
35 (95)
1,160 - 1,410
(11.83 - 14.38, 168.2 - 204.5)
273 - 335
(2.78 - 3.42, 39.6 - 48.6)
40 (104)
1,325 - 1,620
(13.52 - 16.52, 192.1 - 234.9)
325 - 398
(3.32 - 4.06, 47.1 - 57.7)
M
MTC-83
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE
Whenever system′s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperatureto-operating pressure table).
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Pressure is reduced soon
after water is splashed on
condenser.
Air suction by cooling fan is
insufficient.
Probable cause
Excessive refrigerant charge
in refrigeration cycle
Insufficient condenser cooling
performance
↓
1. Condenser fins are clogged.
Corrective action
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
●
Clean condenser.
●
Check and repair cooling fan
if necessary.
2. Improper fan rotation of
cooling fan
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too high.
●
Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
●
When compressor is
stopped high-pressure
value quickly drops by
approximately 196 kPa (2
kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It then
decreases gradually thereafter.
AC359A
Engine tends to overheat.
●
●
An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than
areas near the evaporator
outlet.
Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
Poor heat exchange in condenser
(After compressor operation
stops, high-pressure
decreases too slowly.)
↓
Air in refrigeration cycle
Evacuate repeatedly and
recharge system.
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair engine cooling system.
●
Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side
●
Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
●
Expansion valve is open a
little compared with the
specification.
Replace expansion valve.
↓
Improper expansion valve
adjustment
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts
located between compressor
and condenser are clogged or
crushed.
●
Check and repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
AC360A
Revision: October 2004
MTC-84
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
High- and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
No temperature difference
between high- and low-pressure sides.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
AC356A
Corrective action
Replace compressor.
A
B
C
Replace compressor.
D
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
●
●
●
●
●
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
AC353A
There is a big temperature
difference between liquid
tank outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
Probable cause
Liquid tank inside is slightly
clogged.
Corrective action
●
Replace liquid tank.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted.
Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
There is a big temperature difference between expansion
valve inlet and outlet while the
valve itself is frosted.
High-pressure pipe located
between liquit tank and expansion valve is clogged.
●
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
Low refrigerant charge.
↓
Leaking fittings or components.
Check refrigerant system for
leaks. Refer to MTC-123,
"Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Expansion valve closes a little
compared with the specification.
↓
●
1. Improper expansion valve
adjustment.
Remove foreign particles by
using compressed air.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
2. Malfunctioning expansion
valve.
3. Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas near
the evaporator outlet.
Air flow volume is too low.
Revision: October 2004
F
G
Temperature difference
occurs somewhere in highpressure side.
Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
E
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
or crushed.
Evaporator is frozen.
MTC-85
●
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
●
Check intake sensor circuit.
Refer to MTC-92, "Intake
Sensor Circuit" .
●
Repair evaporator fins.
●
Replace evaporator.
●
Refer to MTC-67, "Front
Blower Motor Circuit" .
2005 Titan
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side sometimes
becomes negative.
Refrigerant cycle
●
●
Air conditioning system
does not function and does
not cyclically cool the compartment air.
The system constantly functions for a certain period of
time after compressor is
stopped and restarted.
Probable cause
Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically.
↓
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
↓
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
Corrective action
●
Drain water from refrigerant
or replace refrigerant.
●
Replace liquid tank.
AC354A
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
Leave the system at rest until
no frost is present. Start it
again to check whether or not
the malfunction is caused by
water or foreign particles.
●
If water is the cause, initially
cooling is okay. Then the
water freezes causing a
blockage. Drain water from
refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
●
If due to foreign particles,
remove expansion valve
and remove the particles
with dry and compressed air
(not shop air).
●
If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion
valve.
●
Replace liquid tank.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
Liquid tank or front/rear side of
expansion valve′s pipe is
frosted or dewed.
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
↓
Expansion valve or liquid tank
is frosted.
AC362A
Revision: October 2004
MTC-86
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Heating
EJS003UF
A
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1437E
*1
.MTC-47, "Operational Check"
*2
MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
*3
MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)".
*4
MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE *5
CHART".
MTC-67, "Front Blower Motor Circuit".
*6
EC-192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR".
*7
CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant".
CO-11, "REFILLING ENGINE
COOLANT".
*9
MTC-90, "Water Valve Circuit"
*8
*10 CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE
ANALYSIS"
Revision: October 2004
MTC-87
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Noise
EJS003UG
SYMPTOM: Noise
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA0473E
*1
MTC-116, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch".
*2
MTC-117, "Clutch Disc".
*4
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
*5
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts".
Revision: October 2004
MTC-88
*3
MTC-20, "Maintenance of Lubricant
Quantity in Compressor".
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Self-diagnosis
EJS003UH
A
SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
WJIA1438E
*1
MTC-49, "Power Supply and Ground *2
Circuit for Front Air Control".
MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
*4
MTC-47, "Operational Check".
MTC-33, "SYMPTOM TABLE".
*5
*3
MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-89
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Water Valve Circuit
EJS003UI
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front heater
cores to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control through the water valve relay.
WJIA1015E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE
1. CHECK WATER VALVE RELAY POWER INPUT CIRCUITS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect water valve relay connector M7.
Check voltage between water valve relay harness connector terminals and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Water valve
relay connector
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
(-)
OFF
ON
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
0V
Battery voltage
WJIA0900E
2 (Y/R)
M7
3 (Y/G)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK WATER VALVE CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select MAX A/C with mode switch.
Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector
M7 terminal 1 (W/G) and ground, as MAX A/C is switched OFF
and ON.
Terminals
(+)
Condition
Water valve
relay connector
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
(-)
M7
1 (W/G)
Ground
Continuity
WJIA0901E
MAX A/C: ON
Yes
MAX A/C: OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-90
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK WATER VALVE CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
1 - 10
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M49.
Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector
M7 terminal 1 (W/G) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 10 (W/G).
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector
M7 terminal 1 (W/G) and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
D
WJIA1014E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
E
4. CHECK WATER VALVE RELAY
F
Check water valve relay. Refer to MTC-92, "Water Valve Relay" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace water valve relay.
G
H
5. CHECK WATER VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect water valve connector F68.
Check continuity between water valve harness connector F68
terminal - (B) and ground.
I
MTC
(-) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
WJIA1373E
L
6. CHECK WATER VALVE POWER CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between water valve relay connector M7 terminal 5 (Y/L) and water valve connector F68 terminal + (Y/L)
5 - (+)
2.
M
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector
M7 terminal 5 (Y/L) and ground.
5 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace water valve.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
WJIA0903E
MTC-91
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Water Valve Relay
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and
ground to coil side terminals of relay.
LHA160
Intake Sensor Circuit
EJS003UJ
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit. It converts
temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
WJIA0571E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. (56, 57 or DTC
B2581, B2582 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting Self-diagnosis).
WJIA0464E
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M146
terminal 2 (L/B) and ground.
2 - Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WJIA1375E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-92
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M146 terminal 1 (V/R) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 21 (V/R).
1 - 21
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
D
WJIA1376E
3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
E
Refer to MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" .
2. Go to self-diagnosis MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> 1. Replace intake sensor. Refer to MTC-96, "INTAKE SENSOR" .
2. Go to self-diagnosis MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" and perform self-diagnosis.
F
G
H
4. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
2-9
4.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M146 terminal 2 (L/B) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 9 (L/B).
MTC
: Continuity should exist.
K
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M146 terminal 2 (L/B) and ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WJIA1377E
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" .
2. Go to self-diagnosis MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-93
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance
between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
209.0
−10 (14)
160.0
−5 (23)
123.0
0 (32)
95.8
5 (41)
74.9
10 (50)
58.9
15 (59)
46.7
20 (68)
37.3
25 (77)
30.0
30 (86)
24.2
35 (95)
19.7
40 (104)
16.1
45 (113)
13.2
WJIA1378E
If NG, replace intake sensor.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-94
2005 Titan
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:27500
A
EJS0032V
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the three control knobs from the front air control unit.
Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the four screws securing the front air control unit to the
cluster lid C.
Disconnect the two electrical connectors.
Remove the front air control unit.
B
C
D
E
LJIA0130E
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-95
2005 Titan
INTAKE SENSOR
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27723
EJS0032W
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE:
The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling
unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover.
Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the
heater and cooling unit assembly.
WJIA1349E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-96
2005 Titan
BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27226
A
EJS0032X
Blower Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
LJIA0136E
1.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Blower motor
3.
Variable blower control
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor.
I
INSTALLATION
MTC
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-97
2005 Titan
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
PFP:27277
EJS0032Y
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin
microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the
recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located
in the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
LJIA0012E
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving
conditions. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" . It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin
microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1.
Remove the instrument lower cover RH.
LLIA0072E
2.
a.
Remove the glove box assembly.
Remove the two lower glove box screws.
LJIA0146E
b.
c.
Open the glove box, then remove the four upper glove box
screws.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the two glove box striker screws.
Remove the glove box assembly from the instrument panel to
access the in-cabin microfilter cover.
WJIA0628E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-98
2005 Titan
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
3.
4.
Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
A
B
C
LJIA0134E
D
5.
Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and
cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right.
Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater
and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE:
The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The
end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the
vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
E
F
G
LJIA0148E
6.
Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
H
I
MTC
LJIA0134E
7.
Install the glove box assembly in reverse order of removal.
Lower glove box screws
Upper glove box screws
8.
K
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
L
Install the instrument lower cover RH.
M
LLIA0072E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-99
2005 Titan
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:27110
EJS0032Z
WJIA0695E
1.
High-pressure A/C pipe
2.
Expansion valve
4.
A/C drain hose
5.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
3.
Low-pressure A/C pipe
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-112, "Discharging Refrigerant" .
Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the exhaust system. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
Disconnect the high/low pressure pipes from the expansion valve.
Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-100
2005 Titan
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
8. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Remove the steering column. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation" .
10. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse
block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to PG-38, "Harness Layout" .
11. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling
unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
13. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
A
B
C
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with a new one, and apply
compressor oil to it when installing it.
●
After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
●
Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
●
Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-112, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" .
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-101
2005 Titan
HEATER CORE
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
PFP:27140
EJS00330
Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0138E
1.
Heater core cover
2.
Heater core pipe bracket
3.
4.
Upper bracket
5.
Upper heater and cooling unit case
6.
A/C evaporator
7.
Lower heater and cooling unit case
8.
Blower motor
9.
Variable blower control
Revision: October 2004
MTC-102
Heater core
2005 Titan
HEATER CORE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket.
Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover.
Remove the heater core pipe bracket.
Remove the heater core.
NOTE:
If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking
from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new
ones before installing the new heater core.
B
C
D
E
LJIA0134E
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-103
2005 Titan
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27733
EJS00331
Defroster Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0622E
1.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Intake door motor
3.
Air mix door motor
4.
Variable blower control
5.
Mode door motor
6.
Defroster door motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-104
2005 Titan
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27730
A
EJS00332
Intake Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0622E
1.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Intake door motor
3.
Air mix door motor
4.
Variable blower control
5.
Mode door motor
6.
Defroster door motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-105
2005 Titan
MODE DOOR MOTOR
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27731
EJS00333
Mode Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0622E
1.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Intake door motor
3.
Air mix door motor
4.
Variable blower control
5.
Mode door motor
6.
Defroster door motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-106
2005 Titan
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27732
A
EJS00334
Air Mix Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0622E
1.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Intake door motor
3.
Air mix door motor
4.
Variable blower control
5.
Mode door motor
6.
Defroster door motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-107
2005 Titan
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
PFP:27200
EJS00335
Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0622E
1.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Intake door motor
3.
Air mix door motor
4.
Variable blower control
5.
Mode door motor
6.
Defroster door motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the blower motor resistor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-108
2005 Titan
DUCTS AND GRILLES
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
PFP:27860
A
EJS00336
Ducts - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
LJIA0141E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-109
2005 Titan
DUCTS AND GRILLES
1.
Defroster nozzle
2.
LH side demister duct
3.
LH ventilator duct
4.
RH side demister duct
5.
RH ventilator duct
6.
Center ventilator duct
7.
Heater and cooling unit assembly
8.
Floor duct
9.
Clips
Grilles
WJIA0696E
1.
Instrument panel
2.
Side ventilator assembly LH
3.
Storage tray bottom cover (LH)
4.
Cluster lid D ventilator LH
5.
Cluster lid D ventilator RH
6.
Side ventilator assembly RH
7.
Storage tray bottom cover (RH)
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the defroster nozzle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
MTC-110
2005 Titan
DUCTS AND GRILLES
3.
Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct.
A
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B
Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the defroster nozzle.
Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts.
Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts.
Remove the center ventilator duct.
C
D
Installation
E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
F
Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-41, "FLOOR TRIM" .
Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct.
G
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
H
GRILLES
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the interior trim panel as necessary. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" or EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
Remove the ventilator grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation
I
MTC
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-111
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
PFP:92600
EJS00337
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WJIA0579E
1.
Shut-off valve
2.
A/C service valve
3.
Recovery/Recycling equipment ACR 2000
(J-43600) with refrigerant identifier
WARNING:
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment
meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a
(R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before
resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and
lubricant manufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
WJIA0580E
1.
Shut-off valve
Revision: October 2004
2.
A/C service valve
MTC-112
3.
Recovery/Recycling equipment ACR
2000 (J-43600) with refrigerant identifier
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
4.
Refrigerant container (HFC-134a)
7.
Manifold gauge set (J-39183)
5.
Weight scale (J-39650)
6.
Evacuating vacuum pump (J-39699)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0530E
*1
MTC-20, "CHECKING AND
ADJUSTING"
*3
MTC-123, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks"
*2
MTC-123, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks"
*4
MTC-81, "PERFORMANCE TEST
DIAGNOSES"
Revision: October 2004
MTC-113
*5
MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant"
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
Components
EJS00338
A/C Compressor and Condenser
WJIA1020E
Revision: October 2004
MTC-114
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
1.
High-pressure service valve
2.
Grommet
3.
High-pressure pipe
4.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
5.
Condenser
6.
Compressor shaft seal
7.
High-pressure flexible hose
8.
Low-pressure flexible hose
9.
Low-pressure service valve
10. Low-pressure pipe
11. Expansion valve
A
12. Drain hose
B
NOTE:
Refer to MTC-6, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" .
Removal and Installation for Compressor
EJS00339
C
A/C Compressor Mounting
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0698E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield using power tool.
Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" .
Disconnect the compressor electrical connector.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose from the compressor.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-115
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
8.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new
one, apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installation.
●
After recharging the A/C system with refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
EJS0033A
Magnet Clutch Assembly
WJIA0372E
1.
Magnet clutch assembly
2.
Magnet coil
3.
Pulley
4.
Clutch disc
5.
Snap ring
6.
Thermal protector (built in)
7.
Compressor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the compressor. Refer to MTC-115, "Removal and Installation for Compressor" .
Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
3.
: J-44614
Remove the clutch disc.
WHA228
Revision: October 2004
MTC-116
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
4.
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable
tool.
A
B
C
RHA072C
D
5.
Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the
small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the
puller on the small adapter.
Tool number
E
: KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION:
To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller
claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not
into the pulley groove.
F
G
WJIA1017E
6.
Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver,
remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the
magnet coil.
H
I
MTC
WHA212
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
K
L
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat,
replace clutch disc and pulley.
M
WHA183
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving,
replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable
solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-117
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
INSTALLATION
1.
Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION:
Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the
compressor front head.
WHA213
2.
3.
Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install
the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
Tool number
:
—
(J-38873-A)
WJIA1016E
4.
Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the
original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand.
WHA184
5.
Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc
from turning and tighten the bolt to specification.
Tool number
: J-44614
CAUTION:
After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch
pulley rotates smoothly.
WHA229
Revision: October 2004
MTC-118
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
6.
Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as
shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
A
: 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
B
7.
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting
spacer to readjust.
8. Connect the compressor electrical connector.
9. Install the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" .
10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
C
D
E
F
G
WHA194
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS0033B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the engine room cover using power tool.
Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT"
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
H
I
MTC
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
●
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS0033C
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the engine under cover using power tool.
Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT"
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
Revision: October 2004
MTC-119
2005 Titan
L
M
REFRIGERANT LINES
●
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
EJS0033D
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Reposition the IPDM E/R aside.
Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" .
Position aside the front floor insulator.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
●
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe
EJS0033E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
●
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
EJS0033F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector.
Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
LJIA0145E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
●
Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor when installing it.
Removal and Installation for Condenser
EJS0033G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-12, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
MTC-120
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
3.
4.
5.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
● Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser
as necessary.
Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the
condenser.
A
B
C
D
E
LJIA0145E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe and the high-pressure flexible hose with new ones,
then apply compressor oil to them after installing them.
●
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
●
Replace the grommets as necessary.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-121
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
EJS0033H
Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0138E
1.
Heater core cover
2.
Heater core pipe bracket
3.
Heater core
4.
Upper bracket
5.
Upper heater and cooling unit case
6.
A/C evaporator
7.
Lower heater and cooling unit case
8.
Blower motor
9.
Variable blower control
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the heater core. Refer to MTC-102, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
MTC-122
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
2.
3.
4.
Remove the defroster mode door arm.
Separate the heater core and cooling unit case.
Remove the evaporator.
A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones.
Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them.
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
C
EJS0033I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
D
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the cooler grommet.
Remove the expansion valve.
E
F
G
WJIA0582E
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
I
Expansion valve bolts
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt
: 4 N·m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
: Refer to MTC-114, "Components" .
MTC
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
●
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
EJS0033J
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant
leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow
extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not
properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all
system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe
along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the
component.
CAUTION:
Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will
improve the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
1.
EJS0033K
Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a
low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye
will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
Revision: October 2004
MTC-123
2005 Titan
K
L
M
REFRIGERANT LINES
2.
3.
4.
If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or
cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent
future misdiagnosis.
Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak
detector (J-41995).
NOTE:
● Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean.
● Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
● Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
EJS0033L
NOTE:
This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must
be replaced.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg-cm2 , 50 psi).
Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into
the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459).
CAUTION:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service
procedures.
Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve.
Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON.
When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a
(R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve.
Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and
location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
EJS0033M
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE:
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent.
Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate
device. To use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's
operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance.
SHA196FA
Revision: October 2004
MTC-124
2005 Titan
REFRIGERANT LINES
1.
Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the
point to be checked as shown.
A
B
C
SHA707EA
D
2.
When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the
probe as shown.
E
F
G
SHA706E
3.
H
Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown.
I
MTC
K
SHA708EA
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette
smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the
leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to MTC-112, "SETTING OF
SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT" .
3.
4.
Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above a temperature of
16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified
amount of refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa
(3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) pressure.
Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge “a” to evaporator inlet “f”) to
the low-pressure side (evaporator drain hose “g” to compressor shaft seal “k”). Refer to MTC-114, "Components" . Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector
probe completely around the following connections and components.
● Check the compressor shaft seal
● Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, and relief valve
● Check the liquid tank
Revision: October 2004
MTC-125
2005 Titan
L
M
REFRIGERANT LINES
Check the refrigerant pressure sensor
● Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to
prevent leaks).
NOTE:
After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
● Evaporator
With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in
the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the
manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant
leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose.
NOTE:
Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with
water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak,
then repeat the leak check.
Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and
connections.
If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11.
Start the engine.
Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
NOTE:
For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually.
A/C switch to ON
Air flow to VENT mode
Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode
Temperature to MAX cold
Blower speed to HIGH
●
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following
steps 4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning
the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor.
The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after
the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks
are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
SHA839E
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling recharging equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed,
recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant
identifier equipment (J-41810-NI).
14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling recharging equipment
and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI).
15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling recharging equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or
component as necessary.
16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant
leaks.
17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check" .
Revision: October 2004
MTC-126
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
PFP:00030
A
EJS0033N
COMPRESSOR
Make
ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL
Model
DKS-17D
Type
Swash plate
Displacement
175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3 ) / revolution
Cylinder bore × stroke
30.5 mm (1.20 in) x 24.0 mm (0.94 in)
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V
B
C
D
LUBRICANT
E
Make
ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL
Model
DKS-17D
Name
NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS)
Part number
KLH00-PAGS0
Capacity
200 m
F
G
(6.8 US fl oz, 7.0 lmp fl oz)
REFRIGERANT
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54 ± 0.11 lb)
H
ENGINE IDLING SPEED
I
Refer to EC-76, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" .
BELT TENSION
MTC
Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment" .
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
MTC-127
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
MTC-128
2005 Titan
F BRAKES
A
B
SECTION
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................... 3
On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 3
PEDAL STROKE ................................................... 3
INSPECT COMPONENTS .................................... 3
ADJUSTMENT ...................................................... 3
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ................................... 4
Components ............................................................. 4
Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
REMOVAL ............................................................. 4
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ........................................... 6
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
COMPONENTS ..................................................... 6
REMOVAL ............................................................. 6
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 9
Parking Drum Brake ................................................. 9
Parking Brake Control .............................................. 9
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PB-1
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
PFP:00002
EFS004P1
Kent-Moore No.
Tool name
Description
J-21177-A
Brake drum clearance gauge
Measuring rear rotor drum to parking
brake shoe clearance
WFIA0167E
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
PB-2
2005 Titan
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:36010
A
EFS004P2
PEDAL STROKE
●
When parking brake pedal is operated with the specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified
number of notches. Check by listening and counting the ratchet clicks.
Pedal stroke
: 3 − 4 notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb)]
C
INSPECT COMPONENTS
●
●
●
●
Make sure the components are attached properly (check for looseness, backlash, etc.).
Check parking brake pedal assembly for bend, damage and cracks, and replace if necessary.
Check cable for wear and damage, and replace if necessary.
Check parking brake warning lamp switch for malfunction, and replace if necessary.
D
E
ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
B
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Insert a deep socket wrench to rotate adjusting nut and loosen
cable sufficiently. Then, disengage the parking brake pedal to
the return position.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it.
PB
G
H
WFIA0165E
3.
Remove the rotor and measure inner diameter at widest point
using Tool.
Tool number
a.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
J
: J-21177-A
Transfer measurement less 0.6 mm using Tool as shown to the
parking brake shoes, and adjust accordingly.
Using wheel nuts, secure disc to hub and prevent it from tilting.
Rotate disc rotor to make sure there is no drag.
Adjust cable as follows:
Operate pedal 10 or more times with a force of 490 N (50 kg,
110 lb).
Rotate adjusting nut with deep socket to adjust pedal stroke to
specification.
Pedal stroke
c.
I
K
L
M
: 3 − 4 notches [under force of
196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb)]
With pedal completely returned, make sure there is no drag on
the parking brake.
WFIA0217E
Revision: October 2004
PB-3
2005 Titan
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Components
PFP:36010
EFS004P3
WFIA0218E
1.
Pedal assembly
2.
Front cable
3.
Right rear cable
4.
Left rear cable
5.
Return spring
6.
Equalizer
7.
Adjusting nut
8.
Lock plate
Removal and Installation
EFS004P4
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove lower instrument panel. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" .
On models with floor shift, remove center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" .
Remove floor trim. Refer to EI-41, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove adjusting nut.
Remove the lock plate from the front cable.
Remove front cable retaining bolts and nut.
Disconnect return spring from equalizer.
Disconnect the front cable from the equalizer and remove front
cable.
9. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
10. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle
lever. Refer to PB-6, "PARKING BRAKE SHOE" .
11. Remove equalizer from right and left rear cables.
12. Remove right and left rear cables retaining bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables.
Revision: October 2004
PB-4
WFIA0165E
2005 Titan
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it.
●
Adjust parking brake. Refer to PB-3, "ADJUSTMENT" .
B
C
D
E
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PB-5
2005 Titan
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Removal and Installation
PFP:44060
EFS004P5
COMPONENTS
LFIA0222E
1.
Anti-rattle pins
2.
Back plate
3.
Shoes
4.
Return springs
5.
Adjuster
6.
Retainers
7.
Toggle lever
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other
materials.
NOTE:
Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position.
1. Remove the rear disc rotor. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
2. Remove the return springs.
3. Remove the adjuster.
4. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes.
5. Disconnect the rear cable from the toggle lever.
Revision: October 2004
PB-6
2005 Titan
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lining Thickness Inspection
●
A
Check thickness of lining.
Standard thickness “A”
Repair limit thickness “A”
: 3.79 ± 0.21 mm
(0.149 ± 0.008 in)
: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
B
C
D
SBR021A
E
Drum Inner Diameter Inspection
●
Check drum inner diameter.
Standard inner
diameter
Maximum inner
diameter
: 205 ± 0.13 mm (8.07 ± 0.01 in)
PB
: 205.7 mm (8.10 in)
G
H
SBR768A
Other Inspections
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check shoe sliding surface on back plate for excessive wear and damage.
Check anti-rattle pins for excessive wear and corrosion.
Check return springs for sagging.
Check adjuster for rough operation.
When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the threads. Refer
to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage
inside drum.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Refer to PB-6, "COMPONENTS" and apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly.
●
Assemble adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating
it in the direction shown by the arrow.
●
Shorten adjuster by rotating it.
NOTE:
After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows.
1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-3, "ADJUSTMENT" .
CAUTION:
●
To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off
SFIA0153E
period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in
operation.
●
Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of lining.
Perform parking brake burnishing operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following conditions:
Revision: October 2004
J
K
L
INSTALLATION
2.
I
PB-7
2005 Titan
M
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
●
●
●
3.
Vehicle speed at 40 km/h (25 MPH)
Parking brake operating force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb) set
For a period of 30 seconds
After burnishing operation, check pedal stroke of parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified
stroke. Refer to PB-3, "ADJUSTMENT" .
Revision: October 2004
PB-8
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Drum Brake
PFP:00030
A
EFS004P6
Unit: mm (in)
Type
Drum
Standard thickness (new)
Brake lining
Wear limit thickness
Standard inner diameter (new)
Drum inner diameter (disc)
Wear limit of inner diameter
B
3.79 ± 0.21 (0.149 ± 0.008)
0.5 (0.020)
C
205 ± 0.13 (8.07 ± 0.01)
205.7 (8.10)
Parking Brake Control
EFS004P7
Control type
D
Foot pedal
Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb)]
3 – 4 notches
Number of notches when warning lamp switch comes on
E
1 notch
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PB-9
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
PB-10
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ...................... 4
Schematic ................................................................ 4
Wiring Diagram — POWER — ................................. 6
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW.
IN ANY POSITION ................................................ 6
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION
SW. IN ACC OR ON .............................................11
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW.
IN ON .................................................................. 12
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW.
IN ON AND/OR START ....................................... 13
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ...................................... 16
System Description ................................................ 16
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R ........... 16
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL ......... 16
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL ........................... 17
CAN Communication System Description .............. 17
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction ... 17
CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 18
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ...................... 18
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS .......................... 19
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 19
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 21
Auto Active Test ..................................................... 22
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 22
OPERATION PROCEDURE ............................... 22
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE... 22
Schematic .............................................................. 24
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement ........................... 25
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection .......... 26
Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) ........ 27
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R ................... 28
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
Revision: October 2004
GROUND CIRCUIT ................................................... 29
Ground Distribution ................................................. 29
MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 29
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 32
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS .......................... 35
BODY HARNESS ................................................ 36
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS ..................................... 37
HARNESS ................................................................. 38
Harness Layout ...................................................... 38
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT ................. 38
OUTLINE (KING CAB MODELS) ........................ 39
OUTLINE (CREW CAB MODELS) ...................... 40
MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 41
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) .............. 43
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) ............. 46
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS .......................... 48
CHASSIS HARNESS .......................................... 50
BODY HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS) ........... 52
BODY HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS) ......... 54
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS)... 56
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS)... 58
ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 60
FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH ............................ 61
FRONT DOOR HARNESS RH ............................ 61
REAR DOOR HARNESS LH (CREW CAB MODELS) .................................................................... 62
REAR DOOR HARNESS RH (CREW CAB MODELS) .................................................................... 62
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) ...................... 63
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ............................ 65
Electrical Units Location ......................................... 65
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 65
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 66
Fuse ........................................................................ 68
Fusible Link ............................................................ 68
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) ............................. 68
HARNESS CONNECTOR ......................................... 69
Description .............................................................. 69
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING
PG-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
TYPE) .................................................................. 69
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING
TYPE) .................................................................. 70
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT
SRS COMPONENT TYPE) ................................. 71
ELECTRICAL UNITS ................................................ 72
Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 72
STANDARDIZED RELAY .......................................... 73
Description .............................................................. 73
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND
Revision: October 2004
MIXED TYPE RELAYS ........................................73
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ..................73
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) ......................75
Terminal Arrangement .............................................75
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) .......................77
Terminal Arrangement .............................................77
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX ..............................78
Terminal Arrangement .............................................78
FUSE AND RELAY BOX ...........................................79
Terminal Arrangement .............................................79
PG-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EKS00AR4
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
EKS00AR5
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section.
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section.
●
Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section.
H
I
J
PG
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PG-3
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Schematic
PFP:24110
EKS00AR6
For detailed ground distribution, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" .
WKWA2608E
Revision: October 2004
PG-4
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA2609E
Revision: October 2004
PG-5
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — POWER —
EKS00AR7
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
WKWA2610E
Revision: October 2004
PG-6
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA2611E
Revision: October 2004
PG-7
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
WKWA2612E
Revision: October 2004
PG-8
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA2614E
Revision: October 2004
PG-9
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
WKWA2629E
Revision: October 2004
PG-10
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA2631E
Revision: October 2004
PG-11
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
WKWA2632E
Revision: October 2004
PG-12
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA2633E
Revision: October 2004
PG-13
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
WKWA2634E
Revision: October 2004
PG-14
2005 Titan
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA2635E
Revision: October 2004
PG-15
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
PFP:284B7
System Description
EKS00AR8
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block
which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits.
●
IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control,
etc.
●
It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION:
None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
●
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps:
● Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
● Parking lamps
● Tail lamps and license lamps
● Front fog lamps
Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
Heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay.
A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor
(magnetic clutch).
Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the starter relay.
Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays.
Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN
H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can
transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
● When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control.
After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
● Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
Controlled system
Headlamp
Tail and parking lamps
Cooling fan
Fail-safe mode
●
With the ignition switch ON, the headlamp (low) is ON.
●
With the ignition switch OFF, the headlamp (low) is OFF.
●
With the ignition switch ON, the tail and parking lamps are ON.
●
With the ignition switch OFF, the tail and parking lamps are OFF.
●
With the ignition switch ON, the cooling fan HI operates.
●
With the ignition switch OFF, the cooling fan stops.
Front wiper
Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper LO and HI remains in the same status it
was in just before fail−safe control was initiated.
Heated mirrors
Heated mirror relay OFF
A/C compressor
A/C compressor OFF
Front fog lamps
Front fog lamp relay OFF
Revision: October 2004
PG-16
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
● CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
● Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
● When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
● Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
● All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
● IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
● CAN communication is stopped.
● When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status.
● When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status.
CAN Communication System Description
C
D
E
F
G
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
●
B
EKS00AR9
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
●
A
EKS00ARA
When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM
E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal
received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Ignition switch signal
Ignition relay status
Tail lamp relay
ON
ON
—
OFF
OFF
—
ON
OFF
—
OFF
ON
ON (10 minutes)
H
I
J
PG
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PG-17
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-II Function
●
EKS00ARB
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Inspection Item, Diagnosis Mode
Description
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
The IPDM E/R performs diagnosis of CAN communication and self-diagnosis.
DATA MONITOR
The input/output data of the IPDM E/R is displayed in real time.
ACTIVE TEST
The IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to electronic components to check their operation.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
● If “IPDM E/R” is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM"
screen, then refer to LAN-5, "PRECAUTIONS" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
PG-18
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
4.
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” or “DATA MONITOR”.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen.
Self-diagnosis results are displayed.
E
F
G
WKIA1264E
H
Display Item List
Display items
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
TIME
CONSULT-II
display code
Malfunction detection
—
—
●
CAN COMM CIRC
U1000
●
If CAN communication reception/transmission
data has a malfunction, or if any of the control
units fail, data reception/transmission cannot be
confirmed.
When the data in CAN communication is not
received before the specified time.
CRNT
PAST
—
—
Possible
causes
I
—
J
Any of items
listed below
have errors:
X
X
●
TRANSMIT
DIAG
●
ECM
●
BCM/SEC
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
●
CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
●
PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECT FROM MENU” on the “DATA MONITOR” screen.
ALL SIGNALS
All signals will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitors the predetermined item(s).
SELECT FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal(s).
3.
4.
Touch “START”.
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU".
Revision: October 2004
PG-19
L
M
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
PG
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
5.
Touch “RECORD” while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch “STOP”.
Revision: October 2004
PG-20
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
All Signals, Main Signals, Select From Menu
Item name
CONSULT-II
screen display
A
Monitor item selection
Display or unit
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECT
FROM MENU
Description
B
Motor fan request
MOTOR FAN
REQ
1/2/3/4
X
X
X
Signal status input from ECM
Compressor
request
AC COMP REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from ECM
Tail & clear
request
TAIL & CLR REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
H/L LO request
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
H/L HI request
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
FR fog request
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
FR wiper request
FR WIP REQ
STOP/1LOW/
LOW/HI
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Wiper auto stop
WIP AUTO
STOP
ACT P/STOP P
X
X
X
Output status of IPDM E/R
Wiper protection
WIP PROT
OFF/Block
X
X
X
Control status of IPDM E/R
Starter request
ST RLY REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
Status of input signal NOTE
Ignition relay
status
IGN RLY
ON/OFF
X
X
Ignition relay status monitored
with IPDM E/R
X
D
E
F
G
H
Rear defogger
request (heated
mirror)
RR DEF REQ
ON/OFF
X
Oil pressure
switch
OIL P SW
OPEN/CLOSE
X
Hood switch
HOOD SW
OFF
X
Theft warning
horn request
THFT HRN REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Horn chirp
HORN CHIRP
ON/OFF
X
X
Output status of IPDM E/R
Daytime running
lamp request
DTRL REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
X
Signal status input from IPDM
E/R
Signal status input from IPDM
E/R (function is not enabled)
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is in ACC position,
display may not be correct.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG-MODE” screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch “START”.
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test name
CONSULT-II screen display
Description
Heated mirror
REAR DEFOGGER
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the heated mirror relay can be operated.
Front wiper (HI, LO) output
FRONT WIPER
With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON), the front wiper relay
(Lo, Hi) can be operated.
Cooling fan output
MOTOR FAN
With a certain operation (1, 2, 3, 4), the cooling fan can be operated.
Lamp (HI, LO, TAIL, FOG)
output
EXTERNAL LAMPS
With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON, TAIL ON, FOG ON), the
lamp relay (Low, High, Tail, Fog) can be operated.
Revision: October 2004
I
J
PG
L
M
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
PG-21
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Test name
CONSULT-II screen display
Cornering lamp output
CORNERING LAMP
Horn output
HORN
Description
—
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the horn relay can be operated.
Auto Active Test
EKS00ARC
DESCRIPTION
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to
the following systems:
Front wipers
Tail, parking, and license lamps
Front fog lamps
Headlamps (Hi, Lo) (Daytime light system if equipped)
A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by
wiper operation).
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition
switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF.
When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform BL-35, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" or BL-37, "Door Switch Check (Crew
Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
●
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps are repeated three times.
WKIA1694E
Revision: October 2004
PG-22
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Concept of Auto Active Test
IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication
between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
●
If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed
using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
●
Symptom
Inspection contents
Perform auto active
test. Does system in
question operate?
NO
YES
A/C compressor does
not operate.
Perform auto active
test. Does magnetic
clutch operate?
NO
YES
Cooling fan does not
operate.
Oil pressure warning
lamp does not operate.
Perform auto active
test. Does cooling fan
operate?
Perform auto active
test. Does oil pressure warning lamp
blink?
NO
YES
NO
B
C
Possible cause
YES
Any of front wipers, tail
and parking lamps, front
fog lamps, and headlamps (Hi, Lo) do not
operate.
A
●
BCM signal input system
●
Lamp/wiper motor malfunction
●
Lamp/wiper motor ground circuit malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and system in
question
●
IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
●
BCM signal input circuit
●
CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM
●
CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
Magnetic clutch malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and magnetic
clutch
●
IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
●
ECM signal input circuit
●
CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
Cooling fan motor malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and cooling fan
motor
●
IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and oil pressure
switch
●
Oil pressure switch malfunction
●
IPDM E/R
●
CAN communication signal between BCM and combination meter
●
Combination meter
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PG-23
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Schematic
EKS00ARD
WKWA2636E
Revision: October 2004
PG-24
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
EKS00ARE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA1695E
Revision: October 2004
PG-25
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
EKS00ARF
1. FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION
●
Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown.
Terminal No.
Signal name
Fuse, fusible link No.
1, 2, 22
Battery power
a, c, d, e, l
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace fuse or fusible link.
2. POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E118 terminals 1 (B/Y), 2 (R) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness.
SKIA1987E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E122 and E124.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E122
terminal 38 (B), and E124 terminal 59 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground circuit harness of IPDM E/R.
WKIA1453E
Revision: October 2004
PG-26
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
EKS00ARG
CAUTION:
If a CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on which control unit(s) carry out CAN communication.
A
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Connect CONSULT-II and select "IPDM E/R" on the Diagnosis System Selection screen.
Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the diagnosis mode selection screen.
Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
CONSULT-II Display
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
TIME
CONSULT-II
display code
CRNT
PAST
—
—
—
Details of diagnosis result
No malfunction
D
E
Any of items listed below have errors:
CAN COMM CIRC
U1000
X
X
●
TRANSMIT DIAG
●
ECM
●
BCM/SEC
F
NOTE:
The Details for Display for the Period are as follows:
●
CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
●
PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed
NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.>>INSPECTION END.
CAN COMM CIRC>>Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PG-27
2005 Titan
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
EKS00ARH
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect negative battery cable.
Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
WKIA1454E
3.
4.
Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
WKIA1696E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
PG-28
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
Ground Distribution
PFP:24080
A
EKS00ARI
MAIN HARNESS
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3628E
Revision: October 2004
PG-29
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
WKIA3629E
Revision: October 2004
PG-30
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3631E
Revision: October 2004
PG-31
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
WKIA3632E
Revision: October 2004
PG-32
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3634E
Revision: October 2004
PG-33
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
WKIA1459E
Revision: October 2004
PG-34
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA1460E
Revision: October 2004
PG-35
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
BODY HARNESS
WKIA2850E
Revision: October 2004
PG-36
2005 Titan
GROUND CIRCUIT
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2851E
Revision: October 2004
PG-37
2005 Titan
HARNESS
HARNESS
Harness Layout
PFP:24010
EKS00ARJ
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the drawings:
●
Main Harness
●
Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
●
Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
●
Engine Control Harness
●
Body Harness and Rear Bumper Sub Harness
●
Body No. 2 Harness and Fuel Pump Sub Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
SEL252V
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated below.
Water proof type
Connector type
●
Cavity: Less than 4
●
Relay connector
●
Cavity: From 5 to 8
●
Cavity: More than 9
●
Ground terminal etc.
Revision: October 2004
Male
Standard type
Female
Male
Female
—
PG-38
2005 Titan
HARNESS
OUTLINE (KING CAB MODELS)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LKIA0455E
PG
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PG-39
2005 Titan
HARNESS
OUTLINE (CREW CAB MODELS)
WKIA2853E
Revision: October 2004
PG-40
2005 Titan
HARNESS
MAIN HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3700E
Revision: October 2004
PG-41
2005 Titan
HARNESS
WKIA3635E
Revision: October 2004
PG-42
2005 Titan
HARNESS
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)
Engine Compartment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2857E
Refer to PG-46, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness.
Revision: October 2004
PG-43
2005 Titan
HARNESS
WKIA2858E
Revision: October 2004
PG-44
2005 Titan
HARNESS
Passenger Compartment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3636E
Revision: October 2004
PG-45
2005 Titan
HARNESS
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)
Engine Compartment
WKIA3701E
Refer to PG-43, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness.
Revision: October 2004
PG-46
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3637E
Revision: October 2004
PG-47
2005 Titan
HARNESS
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS
WKIA3702E
Revision: October 2004
PG-48
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3639E
Revision: October 2004
PG-49
2005 Titan
HARNESS
CHASSIS HARNESS
WKIA3703E
Revision: October 2004
PG-50
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3640E
Revision: October 2004
PG-51
2005 Titan
HARNESS
BODY HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS)
WKIA3704E
Revision: October 2004
PG-52
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3641E
Revision: October 2004
PG-53
2005 Titan
HARNESS
BODY HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS)
WKIA3705E
Revision: October 2004
PG-54
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3642E
Revision: October 2004
PG-55
2005 Titan
HARNESS
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS)
LKIA0462E
Revision: October 2004
PG-56
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2867E
Revision: October 2004
PG-57
2005 Titan
HARNESS
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS)
LKIA0473E
Revision: October 2004
PG-58
2005 Titan
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3643E
Revision: October 2004
PG-59
2005 Titan
HARNESS
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
WKIA3645E
Revision: October 2004
PG-60
2005 Titan
HARNESS
FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA3646E
I
FRONT DOOR HARNESS RH
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3647E
Revision: October 2004
PG-61
2005 Titan
HARNESS
REAR DOOR HARNESS LH (CREW CAB MODELS)
WKIA1727E
REAR DOOR HARNESS RH (CREW CAB MODELS)
WKIA1728E
Revision: October 2004
PG-62
2005 Titan
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
EKS00ARK
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring
diagram.
Code
Section
MTC
AF1B1
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 1
AF1B2
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 2
APPS1
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
APPS2
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
APPS3
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Manual Air Conditioner
ABLS
BRC
Anti-Lock Brake System Limited Slip
ABS
BRC
Anti-Lock Brake System
ASC/BS
EC
ASCD Brake Switch
ASC/SW
EC
ASCD Steering Switch
ASCBOF
EC
ASCD Brake Switch
ASCIND
EC
ASCD Indicator
A/T
AT
A/T Assembly
AT/IND
DI
A/T Indicator Lamp
AUDIO
AV
Audio
AUTO/DP
SE
Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTO/L
LT
Auto Light Control
BACK/L
LT
Back-up Lamp
BRK/SW
EC
Brake Switch
CAN
EC
CAN Communication Line
CAN
LAN
CAN System
CHARGE
SC
Charging System
COOL/F
EC
Cooling Fan Control
COMBSW
LT
Combination Switch
COMM
AV
Audio Visual Communication System
COMPAS
DI
Compass and Thermometer
D/LOCK
BL
Power Door Lock
DIFLOC
DI
Rear Final Drive
DEF
GW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
Rear Window Defogger
DTRL
LT
Headlamp - With Daytime Light System
DVD
AV
DVD Entertainment System
ECM/PW
EC
ECM Power Supply for Back-Up
ECTS
EC
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
ETC1
EC
Electric Throttle Control Function
ETC2
EC
Throttle Control Motor Relay
ETC3
EC
Throttle Control Motor
F/FOG
LT
Front Fog Lamp
F/PUMP
EC
Fuel Pump
FTTS
EC
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
FUELB1
EC
Fuel Injection System Bank 1
FUELB2
EC
Fuel Injection System Bank 2
H/LAMP
LT
Headlamp
HORN
WW
Horn
HSEAT
SE
Heated Seat
I/MIRR
GW
Inside Mirror (Auto Anti-Dazzling Mirror)
IATS
EC
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
IGNSYS
EC
Ignition System
Revision: October 2004
B
Wiring Diagram Name
A/C,M
A
PG-63
M
2005 Titan
HARNESS
ILL
LT
Illumination
INJECT
EC
Injectors
INT/L
LT
Room/Map, Vanity, Cargo, Personal, Foot, Step, and Puddle Lamps
KEYLES
BL
Remote Keyless Entry System
KS
EC
Knock Sensor
MAFS
EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor
MAIN
EC
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
METER
DI
Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges
MIL/DL
EC
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MIRROR
GW
Door Mirror
MMSW
AT
Manual Mode Switch
NATS
BL
Nissan Anti-Theft System
NAVI
AV
Navigation System
O2H2B1
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 1
O2H2B2
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 2
O2S2B1
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 1
O2S2B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 2
P/SCKT
WW
Power Socket
PEDAL
AP
Adjustable Pedal System
PGC/V
EC
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve
PHASE
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1)
PNP/SW
EC
Park/Neutral Position Switch
POS
EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
POWER
PG
Power Supply Routing
PRE/SE
EC
EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor
PS/SEN
EC
Power Steering Pressure Sensor
RP/SEN
EC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
SEAT
SE
Power Seat
SEN/PW
EC
Sensor Power Supply
SHIFT
AT
A/T Shift Lock System
SONAR
DI
Rear Sonar System
SROOF
RF
Sunroof
SRS
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
START
SC
Starting System
STOP/L
LT
Stop Lamp
T/TOW
LT
Trailer Tow
T/WARN
WT
Low Tire Pressure Warning System
TAIL/L
LT
Parking, License and Tail Lamps
T/F
TF
Transfer Case
TPS1
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS2
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS3
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TRNSCV
BL
HOMELINK® Universal Transceiver
LT
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps
TURN
VDC
BRC
Vehicle Dynamic Control System
VEHSEC
BL
Vehicle security (theft warning) system
VENT/V
EC
EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve
WARN
DI
Warning Lamps
WINDOW
GW
Power Window
WIPER
WW
Front Wiper and Washer
Revision: October 2004
PG-64
2005 Titan
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PFP:25230
A
EKS00ARL
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA1703E
Revision: October 2004
PG-65
2005 Titan
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WKIA2872E
Revision: October 2004
PG-66
2005 Titan
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA1705E
Revision: October 2004
PG-67
2005 Titan
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Fuse
●
●
●
●
EKS00ARM
If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before
installing new fuse.
Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not
used for a long period of time.
CEL083
Fusible Link
EKS00ARN
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is
questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
●
If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
●
Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
●
Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
EKS00ARO
For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20
seconds.
A circuit breaker is used for the following systems:
●
Power seat
●
Power windows
●
Power door locks
●
Remote keyless entry system
●
Power sunroof
●
Rear window wiper
SBF284E
Revision: October 2004
PG-68
2005 Titan
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
PFP:B4341
A
EKS00ARP
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
●
The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
●
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
SEL769DA
Revision: October 2004
PG-69
2005 Titan
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
●
The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
●
The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below.
CAUTION:
●
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
●
Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
●
AEL299C
Revision: October 2004
PG-70
2005 Titan
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
●
Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
●
Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked,
the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION:
●
Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors
from SRS components.
●
A
B
C
D
E
WHIA0103E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PG-71
2005 Titan
ELECTRICAL UNITS
ELECTRICAL UNITS
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:23710
EKS00ARQ
WKIA3648E
Revision: October 2004
PG-72
2005 Titan
STANDARDIZED RELAY
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
PFP:25230
A
EKS00ARR
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SEL881H
H
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
I
J
PG
L
M
SEL882H
1M
1 Make
2M
2 Make
1T
1 Transfer
1M·1B
1 Make 1 Break
Revision: October 2004
PG-73
2005 Titan
STANDARDIZED RELAY
WKIA0253E
Revision: October 2004
PG-74
2005 Titan
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:84341
A
EKS00ARS
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
LKIA0385E
Revision: October 2004
PG-75
2005 Titan
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
WKIA1845E
Revision: October 2004
PG-76
2005 Titan
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:24350
A
EKS00ART
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA1706E
Revision: October 2004
PG-77
2005 Titan
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:24381
EKS00ARU
WKIA3649E
Revision: October 2004
PG-78
2005 Titan
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:24012
A
EKS00ARV
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2870E
Revision: October 2004
PG-79
2005 Titan
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Revision: October 2004
PG-80
2005 Titan
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
A
B
SECTION
PROPELLER SHAFT
C
PR
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 3
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 3
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT .................................... 4
On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 4
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION ........................ 4
INSPECTION ........................................................ 4
Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
REMOVAL ............................................................. 5
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 5
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5
Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 5
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 5
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 6
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT ...................................... 8
On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 8
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION ........................ 8
INSPECTION ........................................................ 8
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 11
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 11
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 12
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 15
General Specifications ............................................ 15
Snap Ring ............................................................... 15
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PR-1
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
PFP:00002
EDS001O0
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
205-D002
Bearing splitter
Removing center support bearing
ZZA0700D
Revision: October 2004
PR-2
2005 Titan
Symptom
Revision: October 2004
Vibration
Differential
Axle
Suspension
Tires
Road wheel
Drive shaft
Brakes
Steering
Noise
Excessive run out
Possible cause and suspected parts
Rotation imbalance
×
×
PR-3
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PR-4 (front)
PR-8(rear)
PR-4 (front)
PR-8 (rear)
PR-4 (front)
PR-8(rear)
Reference page
Uneven rotation torque
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
PFP:00003
EDS001O1
A
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
2005 Titan
C
PR
E
F
G
H
I
×: Applicable
J
K
L
M
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:37200
EDS001O2
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION
NOTE:
If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first.
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points
by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands.
Propeller shaft runout limit
2.
3.
4.
: 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less
If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller
shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° degrees and reconnect the propeller shaft.
Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications,
replace the propeller shaft assembly.
After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle.
SDIA1759E
INSPECTION
Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Removal and Installation
EDS001O3
Model 2F1310
WDIA0047E
1.
Propeller shaft tube
2.
Snap ring
4.
Journal
5.
Flange yoke
Revision: October 2004
3.
PR-4
Journal bearing
2005 Titan
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
A
Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and
the companion flange of the front final drive as shown.
CAUTION:
For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange
yoke and companion flange of the front final drive.
Remove the bolts and then remove the front propeller shaft from
the front final drive and transfer.
B
C
SDIA2046E
PR
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
Inspect the propeller shaft tube runout. If run out exceeds the
limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Propeller shaft runout limit
E
: 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less
F
G
LDIA0118E
●
While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of
the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Journal axial play
●
H
I
: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage
is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
J
K
LDIA0117E
INSTALLATION
L
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001O4
DISASSEMBLY
Journal
1.
Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft tube and flange
yoke as shown.
CAUTION:
For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the front propeller shaft or flange yoke.
SPD128
Revision: October 2004
PR-5
2005 Titan
M
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT
2.
Remove the snap ring.
APD011
3.
Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the
yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or
yoke hole.
SPD732
4.
Remove the bearing at the opposite side in above operation.
NOTE:
Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed.
SPD131
ASSEMBLY
Journal
1.
Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on
the bearing inner surface.
NOTE:
During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not
fall down.
WPD019
Revision: October 2004
PR-6
2005 Titan
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT
2.
Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial
direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to PR-15, "Snap
Ring" .
NOTE:
Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides
within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in).
A
B
C
APD012
PR
3.
Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring
to zero by tapping the yoke.
E
F
G
SPD732
4.
Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the
propeller shaft joint flex effort specification.
Propeller shaft joint flex
effort
H
: 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
or less
I
J
LDIA0119E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PR-7
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:37000
EDS001O5
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION
NOTE:
If vibration is present at high speed, check propeller shaft runout first, then check mounting between propeller
shaft and companion flange.
1.
Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points
by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands.
Propeller shaft runout limit
2.
3.
4.
: 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less
If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller
shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° degrees and reconnect propeller
shaft.
Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications,
replace the propeller shaft assembly.
After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle.
SDIA1781E
INSPECTION
Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Removal and Installation
EDS001O6
Model 2S1350
WDIA0048E
1.
Propeller shaft tube
2.
Snap ring
3.
Journal bearing
4.
Sleeve yoke
5.
Journal
6.
Flange yoke
Revision: October 2004
PR-8
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
Model 3S1350
A
B
C
PR
E
F
G
H
WDIA0064E
1.
Propeller shaft tube
2.
Snap ring
3.
Journal bearing
4.
Sleeve yoke
5.
Journal
6.
Center support bearing
7.
Center support bearing bracket
8.
Dust shield
9.
Clamp
10. Boot
11. Slip yoke
J
12. Flange yoke
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
K
Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake.
Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and
the companion flange of the rear final drive as shown.
CAUTION:
For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or the companion flange.
Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear
final drive.
L
M
WDIA0065E
Revision: October 2004
I
PR-9
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
4.
For model 3S1350, remove the center support bearing bracket
nuts, and remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive.
WDIA0066E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit,
replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Propeller shaft runout limit
: 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or
less
LDIA0121E
●
While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of
the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Journal axial play
●
: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage
is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
LDIA0117E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Revision: October 2004
PR-10
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001O7
A
DISASSEMBLY
Journal
1.
2.
Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft tube and flange
yoke as shown.
CAUTION:
For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke.
B
C
PR
E
SPD128
3.
Remove the snap rings.
F
G
H
APD011
4.
Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the
yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or
yoke hole.
I
J
K
L
SPD732
5.
Remove the bearing at the opposite side of above operation.
NOTE:
Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed.
M
SPD131
Center Support Bearing
1.
Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
PR-11
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
2.
3.
Put matching marks on the propeller shaft tube and the slip yoke
as shown.
CAUTION:
For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the propeller
shaft tube or slip yoke.
Remove and discard the clamp near the center support bearing,
then slide the slip yoke off of propeller shaft tube.
LDIA0151E
4.
5.
Lift the dust shield off of the center support bearing.
Press the center support bearing off the propeller shaft tube
using Tool and suitable hydraulic press.
Tool number
: 205-D002
LDIA0152E
ASSEMBLY
Journal
1.
Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on
the bearing inner surface.
NOTE:
During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not
fall down.
WPD019
2.
Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial
direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to PR-15, "Snap
Ring" .
NOTE:
Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides
within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in).
APD012
Revision: October 2004
PR-12
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
3.
Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring
to zero by tapping the yoke.
A
B
C
SPD732
PR
4.
Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the
joint flex effort specification.
Propeller shaft joint
flex effort
: 2.26 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb)
or less
E
F
G
LDIA0119E
Center Support Bearing
1.
2.
Apply a thin coat of multi-purpose grease to both the propeller shaft tube and the inside surface of the
center support bearing.
Install the center support bearing on the propeller shaft tube
using a suitable pipe pressing on the inner race.
H
I
J
K
LDIA0153E
3.
4.
5.
Install the dust shield.
Install a new clamp over the boot on the slip yoke.
Align the matching marks and install the slip yoke on the propeller shaft tube.
M
LDIA0151E
6.
Clean the surfaces and position the boot over the propeller shaft tube and tighten the clamp.
Revision: October 2004
PR-13
L
2005 Titan
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
7.
Install the center support bearing bracket, then install the rear
propeller shaft assembly in the vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal
and Installation" .
WDIA0066E
Revision: October 2004
PR-14
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
A
EDS001O8
4X2 Model
Applied model
VK56DE
B
Body
King cab
Crew cab
Propeller shaft model
2S1350
3S1350
2
3
Coupling method with rear final drive
Flange type
Flange type
Coupling method with transmission
Sleeve type
Sleeve type
Number of joints
Shaft length (Spider to spider)
C
PR
869 mm (34.21in) (front shaft)
1619 mm (63.74 in)
1209 mm (47.60 in) (rear shaft)
Shaft outer diameter
127.6 mm (5.02 in)
Journal axial play
E
88.9 mm (3.50 in)
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
Propeller shaft runout limit
1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less
Propeller shaft joint flex effort
0.6 mm (0.24 in) or less
F
2.26 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb) or less
G
4X4 Model
Applied model
VK56DE
Front
Propeller shaft model
H
Rear
2F1310
2S1350
Number of joints
2
Coupling method with front final drive
I
Flange type
Coupling method with transfer
Flange type
Sleeve type
Shaft length (Spider to spider)
718 mm (28.27 in)
1619 mm (63.74 in)
63 5 mm (2.5 in)
127.6 mm (5.02 in)
Shaft outer diameter
Journal axial play
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
Propeller shaft runout limit
Propeller shaft joint flex effort
0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less
1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less
1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
or less
2.26 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb)
or less
Snap Ring
J
K
L
EDS001O9
Model 2F1310
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Color
Part Number*
1.99 (0.0783)
White
37146-C9400
2.02 (0.0795)
Yellow
37147-C9400
2.05 (0.0807)
Red
37148-C9400
2.08 (0.0819)
Green
37149-C9400
2.11 (0.0831)
Blue
37150-C9400
2.14 (0.0843)
Light brown
37151-C9400
2.17 (0.0854)
Black
37152-C9400
2.20 (0.0866)
No paint
37153-C9400
*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: October 2004
PR-15
2005 Titan
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Model 2S1350 / 3S1350
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Color
Part Number*
1.600 - 1.638 (0.0630 - 0.0645)
Black
37146-7S000
1.549 - 1.588 (0.0610 - 0.0625)
Black
37147-7S000
1.524 - 1.562 (0.0600 - 0.0615)
Black
37148-7S000
1.499 - 1.537 (0.0590 - 0.0605)
Black
37149-7S000
*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: October 2004
PR-16
2005 Titan
G STEERING
A
B
SECTION
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions for Steering System .............................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools (SST) ..................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5
POWER STEERING FLUID ........................................ 6
Checking Fluid Level ................................................ 6
Checking Fluid Leakage ........................................... 6
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System ................................. 6
STEERING WHEEL .................................................... 7
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 7
CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION ..... 7
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY ................ 7
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL .......................................................... 7
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE .................................................................. 7
CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..... 7
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
STEERING COLUMN ................................................. 9
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
Revision: October 2004
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 13
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 13
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 14
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 15
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY ...................... 15
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ............ 16
Removal and Installation ........................................ 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 18
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 18
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 21
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ............................... 27
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 27
CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE ................ 27
Removal and Installation ........................................ 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 27
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 28
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY ............. 28
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 28
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 29
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29
HYDRAULIC LINE .................................................... 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 34
Steering Wheel ....................................................... 34
Steering Column ..................................................... 34
Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket ................ 35
Steering Gear ......................................................... 35
Oil Pump ................................................................. 36
Steering Fluid .......................................................... 36
PS-1
2005 Titan
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EGS000SS
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Steering System
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EGS000ST
Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere
with their operation.
Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic parts.
Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease.
Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation.
Perform functional tests whenever designated.
Revision: October 2004
PS-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (SST)
PFP:00002
A
EGS000SU
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
ST3127 S000
(See J25765-A)
Preload gauge
1. GG9103000
(J25765-A)
Torque wrench
2. HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3. HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
Inspecting of pinion rotating torque and rotational torque for ball joint
C
D
E
S-NT541
F
HT72520000
(J25730-A)
Ball joint remover
a: 33 mm (1.30 in)
b: 50 mm (1.97 in)
r: 11.5 mm (0.453 in)
Removing steering outer socket
PS
H
NT546
—
(J-46213)
Rear cover wrench
a: 21.6 mm (0.850 in)
b: 34.9 mm (1.374 in)
Removing and installing rear cover
I
J
SGIA0516E
KV48104400
(
—
)
Teflon ring correcting tool
a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
c: 100 mm (3.94 in)
Installing of rack Teflon ring
K
L
S-NT550
KV48103400
(
—
)
Torque adapter
Inspecting rotational torque
M
ZZA0824D
Revision: October 2004
PS-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
1. KV48105300-4 and 5295262U10
(
—
)
Connector A and O-ring
2. KV48105300-3 and 5295262U00
(
—
)
Eye-bolt and O-ring
3. KV48103500
(J26357 and J26357-10)
Pressure gauge and shut-off valve
4. KV48105300-1 and 5295262U00
(
—
)
Connector B and O-ring
5. KV48105300-2
(
—
)
Nut
Measuring oil pump relief pressure
SGIA0427E
—
(J-44372)
Spring gauge
Measuring steering wheel turning force
LST024
Commercial Service Tools
EGS000SV
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Removing nuts and bolts
PBIC0190E
(J-1859A)
Steering wheel puller
Removing steering wheel
LHIA0043E
(J-42578)
Steering wheel puller legs
Removing steering wheel
LHIA0044E
Revision: October 2004
PS-4
2005 Titan
Symptom
Revision: October 2004
Outer socket ball joint end play
Steering fluid leakage
Steering wheel play
Steering wheel turning force
Drive belt looseness
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
PS-5
Shake
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
DIFFERENTIAL
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
J
AXLE
Steering linkage looseness
Improper installation or looseness of steering column
Steering column deformation or damage
Mounting rubber deterioration
Improper installation or looseness of tilt lock lever
Improper steering wheel
Outer socket ball joint rotating torque
Noise
Outer socket ball joint swinging force
Possible cause and suspected parts
Air in hydraulic system
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-16
PS-13
PS-11
PS-16
PS-15
PS-7
EM-12
PS-7
PS-7
PS-6
PS-21
PS-21
PS-21
PS-6
PS-6
Reference page
Fluid level
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
PFP:00003
EGS000SW
A
Use chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2005 Titan
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
K
I
L
M
POWER STEERING FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
PFP:KLF20
EGS000SX
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank.
Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° – 80°C (122° – 176°F).
Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° – 30°C (32° – 86°F).
CAUTION:
●
Do not overfill.
●
Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
●
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
LGIA0021E
Checking Fluid Leakage
EGS000SY
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for
leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° – 80°C (122° –
176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle.
2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times.
3. Hold steering wheel at each “lock” position for five seconds to
check fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more
than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may
SGIA0506E
be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to PS-27, "POWER STEERING OIL
PUMP" .
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear.
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
EGS000SZ
Incomplete air bleeding causes the following. When this happens, bleed air again.
●
Air bubbles in reservoir tank.
●
Clicking noise in oil pump.
●
Excessive buzzing in oil pump.
NOTE:
When vehicle is stationary or while steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may be heard from
oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system.
1. Stop engine, and then turn steering wheel fully to right and left several times.
CAUTION:
Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and
add fluid as needed.
2. Run engine at idle speed. Turn steering wheel fully right and then fully left, hold for about three seconds.
Then check for fluid leakage.
3. Repeat step 2 several times at about three second intervals.
CAUTION:
Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. Check for air bubbles or cloudy fluid.
5. If air bubbles or cloudiness still exists, stop engine, perform steps 2 and 3 again until air bubbles or cloudiness does not exist.
6. Stop engine, check fluid level.
Revision: October 2004
PS-6
2005 Titan
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
PFP:48430
A
EGS000T0
CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION
●
●
Check installation condition of steering gear assembly, front suspension, axle and steering column.
Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial
direction.
End play of the axial direction for steering wheel
●
: 0 mm (0 in)
B
C
Check if the mounting nuts for steering gear assembly are loose.
Refer to PS-16, "POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE" .
D
E
F
LGIA0024E
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY
1.
PS
Turn tires straight ahead, start engine, then turn steering wheel to the left and right lightly, and measure
steering wheel movement on the outer circumference when steering wheel is turned up to the point where
tires start moving.
Steering wheel play on the outer circumference
: 0 − 35 mm (0 − 1.38 in)
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL
●
1.
2.
3.
H
Check neutral position on steering wheel after confirming that front wheel alignment is correct. Refer to
FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" .
Turn tires straight ahead, check if steering wheel is in the neutral position.
If it is not in the neutral position, remove steering wheel and reinstall it correctly.
If the neutral position cannot be attained by repositioning the steering wheel two teeth or less on steering
stem, loosen tie-rod lock nuts of steering outer sockets, then adjust tie-rods by the same amount in the
opposite direction.
I
J
K
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tool number
Steering wheel
turning force
6.
7.
L
Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake.
Start engine.
Bring power steering fluid up to operating temperature of 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F).
Tires need to be inflated to specified pressure. Refer to WT-33, "Tire" .
Check steering wheel turning force using Tool when steering
wheel has been turned 360° from the neutral position.
M
: J-44372
: 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less
If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, inspect
steering column. Refer to PS-11, "INSPECTION AFTER
REMOVAL" .
If steering column meets specification, repair steering gear.
Refer to PS-13, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
WGIA0035E
CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
When checking front wheel turning angle, refer to FSU-8, "FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE" .
Revision: October 2004
PS-7
2005 Titan
STEERING WHEEL
Removal and Installation
EGS000T1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-44, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect steering wheel switches.
Remove the steering wheel center nut.
Remove the steering wheel using Tools.
Tool number
A: J-1859A
B: J-42578
CAUTION:
Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be
rotated out of position.
6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If
damaged, replace the steering wheel.
● Remove steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel
switches, if required.
WHIA0124E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make
sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral
position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right
end position and ending with the knob at the top.
Steering wheel
center nut
: 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
WGIA0038E
CAUTION:
The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position.
Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel
beyond the limited number of turns. (The spiral cable can be turned up to 2.6 turns from the neutral
position to both the right and left.)
Revision: October 2004
PS-8
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and Installation
PFP:48810
A
EGS000T2
Column Shift Model
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
K
WGIA0141E
1.
Driver air bag module
Steering wheel
3.
Steering wheel side cover
4.
Combination switch and spiral cable 5.
2.
Steering column assembly
6.
Collar
7.
Hole cover seal
Clamp
9.
Hole cover mounting plate
8.
10. Hole cover
11. Upper joint
12. Upper shaft
13. Boot clamp
14. Lower joint shaft
15. Boot and clips (plastic)
Revision: October 2004
PS-9
L
M
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
Floor Shift Model
WGIA0140E
1.
Driver air bag module
2.
Steering wheel
3.
Steering wheel side cover
4.
Combination switch and spiral cable 5.
Steering column assembly
6.
Collar
7.
Hole cover seal
Clamp
9.
Hole cover mounting plate
8.
10. Hole cover
11. Upper joint
12. Upper shaft
13. Boot clamp
14. Lower joint shaft
15. Boot and clips (plastic)
CAUTION:
●
Care must be taken not to give axial impact to steering column assembly during removal and
installation.
●
Care must be taken not to move steering gear during removal of steering column assembly.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove spiral cable from steering column assembly with combination switches attached. Refer to SRS46, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove tilt lever knob from tilt lever by inserting a suitable tool
into slot of tilt lever knob, then depress tab and withdraw tilt lever
knob.
WGIA0061E
Revision: October 2004
PS-10
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
3.
4.
5.
Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" .
Remove steering column cover and ignition key finisher. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove mounting screws of knee protector, then remove knee
protector from vehicle.
A
B
C
D
LGIA0026E
6.
7.
On models equipped with column shift, disconnect shift cable from steering column. Refer to AT-236,
"Control Device Removal and Installation" .
Remove lock nut and bolt, then separate lower joint from upper
joint.
E
F
PS
H
LGIA0027E
8.
Remove mounting nuts from steering member, remove steering
column assembly from steering member.
I
J
K
L
LGIA0028E
M
9. Remove hole cover seal and clamp.
10. Remove mounting nuts, then remove hole cover from dash panel.
11. Raise vehicle, then remove mounting bolt (lower side) of lower
joint and remove lower joint from vehicle.
LGIA0029E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
Check for damage to steering column jacket tube. If damage is found, replace steering column with new
one.
Revision: October 2004
PS-11
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
●
If vehicle has been in a collision, check column length “L1 ” or
“L2 ” as shown. If out of specification, replace steering column
with new one.
Steering column length
: 158 mm (6.22 in)
L1
L2
: 262 mm (10.31 in)
SGIA0475E
●
Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When installing the steering column, finger-tighten all of the lower bracket and joint retaining bolts;
then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column.
NOTE:
Align slit of the coupling joint with projection on dust cover. Insert the
joint until surface "A" contacts surface "B".
●
After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves
smoothly. Make sure the number of turns are the same from the
straight-forward position to left and right locks. Make sure that
the steering wheel is in a neutral position when driving straight
ahead.
●
When installing steering column to steering member, install
mounting nut from front side of vehicle.
SST491C
Revision: October 2004
PS-12
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
Range "A"
●
A
After installing steering column to vehicle, check tilt device and its operation range is as specified.
: 61.3 mm (2.41 in)
Check if steering wheel operation can turn to the end of the left
and right stops smoothly.
B
C
D
WGIA0083E
Disassembly and Assembly
EGS000T3
E
Column Shift Model
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
WGIA0085E
1.
Steering column assembly
2.
Ignition switch
3.
Upper joint
4.
Spring
5.
Tilt lever knob
6.
Self-shear screw
Revision: October 2004
PS-13
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
Floor Shift Model
WGIA0088E
1.
Steering column assembly
2.
Ignition switch
3.
Upper joint
4.
Spring
5.
Tilt lever knob
6.
Self-shear screw
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove spring from steering column assembly and tilt lever.
Remove mounting bolt from upper joint, then remove upper joint from steering column assembly.
Remove ignition switch tamper resistant self-shear type screws with a drill or other appropriate tool.
Revision: October 2004
PS-14
2005 Titan
STEERING COLUMN
ASSEMBLY
●
●
A
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Install new tamper resistant self-shear type screws.
B
C
D
WGIA0009E
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
E
When the steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows:
1. Check the column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose
grease. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
F
2. Check the column tube for deformation or breakage. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
3.
PS
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard during a turn, check the length (L) of the column.
If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assemH
bly.
Steering column length (L)
4.
5.
6.
7.
: 610 mm (24.02 in)
Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary.
Check for wear around the seal edges, replace as necessary.
Check for corrosion or pitting around the seal sliding area.
Replace the seal and shaft in case of seal edge wear or damage.
I
J
WGIA0080E
8.
K
After installing the steering column, check the tilt mechanism for
proper operation.
Tilt mechanism range
(Manual tilt)
: 3° per notch at 5 steps
L
M
WGIA0026E
CAUTION:
●
Do not exert any load or impact in the axial direction immediately before or after column removal.
●
After installation, check for smooth steering wheel rotation, without any catches or noise.
●
Replace the column if it is depleted of grease, worn, damaged, or if any scratches or coating separation is present on the shaft seal area.
●
The lower nut on the upper joint may not be reused.
●
During lower joint detachment, insert a tool into the yoke groove to prevent gouging damage.
Revision: October 2004
PS-15
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
PFP:49001
EGS000T4
WGIA0092E
1.
Cotter pin
2.
Mounting bracket
3.
Bushing
4.
Washer
5.
Steering gear assembly
6.
Mounting insulator
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if steering column is separated from steering gear
assembly. Therefore secure steering wheel to avoid turning.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn wheels to the straight-ahead position.
Remove tires from vehicle using power tool.
Remove undercover using power tool.
On 4x4 models, remove front final drive, then support drive shafts with wire. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal
and Installation" .
Make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover
cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns
with mark on rear cover cap.
SST491C
6.
Remove cotter pin at steering outer socket and discard, then loosen mounting nut.
Revision: October 2004
PS-16
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
7.
Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool.
Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
CAUTION:
Temporarily tighten mounting nut to prevent damage to
threads and to prevent Tool from coming off.
Tool number
8.
A
B
: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
On 4x2 models, remove stabilizer bar mounting bolts and reposition stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-11, "STABILIZER BAR" .
C
SDIA1434E
D
9.
Remove oil piping (high pressure side and low pressure side)
from steering gear assembly, then drain fluid from piping.
E
F
PS
LGIA0032E
10. Remove lower joint mounting bolt of lower shaft.
H
I
J
LGIA0029E
11. Remove mounting bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly
using power tool, and then remove steering gear assembly from
vehicle.
K
L
M
LGIA0024E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6,
"Front Wheel Alignment" .
●
After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-148,
"Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" .
Revision: October 2004
PS-17
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
●
With steering wheel in straight ahead position, make sure slit of
lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on
rear cover cap
SST491C
●
After installation, bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic
System" .
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions.
Disassembly and Assembly
EGS000T5
WGIA0093E
1.
Outer socket
2.
Boot clamp (small)
3.
Boot
4.
Inner socket
5.
Boot clamp (large)
6.
Gear housing assembly
7.
Cylinder tubes
8.
Rear cover cap
9.
Rear cover
10. O-ring
11. Sub-gear assembly
12. Rack oil seal
13. Rack assembly
14. Rack Teflon® ring
15. O-ring
16. End cover assembly
Revision: October 2004
PS-18
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
CAUTION:
●
Secure steering gear assembly with a vise, using copper plates or something similar to prevent it
from being damaged. Do not grip cylinder with a vise.
●
Before performing disassembly, clean steering gear assembly with kerosene. Be careful not to
bring any kerosene into contact with the discharge and return port connectors.
A
B
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly.
Remove rear cover cap from gear housing assembly.
Measure adjusting screw height from gear housing assembly,
then loosen adjusting screw.
CAUTION:
● Do not turn adjusting screw more than twice.
● Replace steering gear assembly when adjusting screw is
removed or more than twice.
C
D
E
F
SGIA0568E
4.
PS
Use a Tool to remove rear cover from sub-gear assembly.
Tool number
:
—
(J-46213)
H
I
J
SGIA0507E
5.
Remove O-ring with a flat-bladed screwdriver, and pull out rear
cover.
K
L
M
SGIA0508E
6.
7.
8.
Remove sub-gear assembly from gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
In order to protect oil seal from any damage, pull sub-gear assembly out straightly.
Loosen lock nut of outer socket, and remove outer socket.
Remove boot clamps of the small diameter side and the large diameter side, then remove boot.
CAUTION:
When removing boots, be careful not to damage inner socket and gear housing assembly. If they
are damaged, change them to avoid oil leaks.
Revision: October 2004
PS-19
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
9.
Drill out the clinching part of cylinder outer rim with a 3 mm (0.12
in) drill in 1.5 mm (0.059 in) depth.
STC0013D
10. Remove end cover assembly with a 45 mm (1.77 in) open head
wrench or suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage gear housing assembly. If it is
damaged, replace gear housing assembly. Otherwise, oil
leaks may result.
SST081B
11. Pull rack assembly with oil seal out of gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder. If it is damaged, replace gear housing assembly. Otherwise, oil
leaks may result.
12. Heat rack Teflon® ring to approximately 40°C (104°F) with a
dryer, then remove it and O-ring from rack assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage rack assembly. If it is damaged,
replace with a new one to avoid oil leaks.
SGIA0151E
13. Use a taped 29 mm (1.14 in) socket and an extension bar.
Remove rack oil seal from gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage gear housing assembly and cylinder inner wall. If it is damaged, gear housing assembly
must be replaced. Otherwise, oil leaks will result.
SGIA0179E
Revision: October 2004
PS-20
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot
A
Check boot for cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary.
Rack Assembly
B
Check rack gear for damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
Sub-Gear Assembly
●
●
Check pinion gear for damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
Check bearing while rotating it. Replace bearing if bearing ball race was dented, worn, or damaged.
Gear Housing Assembly
C
D
Check gear housing assembly for damage and scratches (inner wall). Replace if necessary.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
E
Swing Torque
●
Hook a spring balance at the point shown in the figure. Confirm
if the reading is within the specification. When ball stud and
inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the
specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace
socket.
F
PS
H
SGIA0547E
I
Item
Measuring point
Swing torque
Measuring value
Outer socket
Inner socket
Cotter pin hole of stud
Shown as L: 83.2 mm (3.276 in)
0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb)
1.0 − 7.8 N·m (0.11 − 0.79 kg-m, 9 − 69 in-lb)
4.84 − 46.7 N (0.50 − 4.7 kg, 4 - 34 lb)
12.1 − 93.7 N (1.3 − 9.5 kg, 9 − 69 lb)
Rotating Torque
●
Using Tool, check if reading is within the value specified below. If
the value is outside the standard, replace outer sockets.
Tool number
K
L
: ST3127 S000 (J-25765-A)
Rotating torque
: 0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m,
3 − 25 in-lb)
M
SST882B
Revision: October 2004
PS-21
J
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Axial End Play
●
Apply load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) to ball stud axially. Use a dial
gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud
makes. Check if the reading is within specification. If the value is
outside specification, replace outer and inner sockets.
Outer socket : 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or less
Inner socket : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less
SGIA0057E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Apply Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring. Put an O-ring into rack Teflon® ring.
● Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Heat rack Teflon® ring to approximately 40°C (104°F) with a
dryer. Assemble it to mounting groove of rack.
NOTE:
Do not reuse rack Teflon® ring.
SGIA0153E
3.
To fit rack Teflon® ring on rack, use rack Teflon® ring installation tool from tooth side. Compress rim of
ring using Tool.
Tool number
: KV48104400 (
—
)
SGIA0154E
4.
Apply multi-purpose grease to rack oil seal. Insert rack oil seal, then insert rack assembly to gear housing
assembly. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse rack oil seal.
● When inserting rack assembly, do not damage retainer sliding part. If it is damaged, replace
gear housing assembly.
● When inserting rack assembly, do not damage cylinder inner wall. If it is damaged, it may cause
oil leaks. Replace gear housing assembly.
Revision: October 2004
PS-22
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
●
Attach rack oil seal. Both inner lip and outer lip should
face each other.
A
B
C
SGIA0205E
D
a.
To avoid damaging inner rack oil seal, wrap an OHP sheet
[approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm (3.94 in)] around rack
teeth. Place oil seal on sheet. Then, pull oil seal along with OHP
sheet until they pass the toothed section of rack, then remove
sheet.
E
F
PS
SGIA0155E
b.
Insert rack oil seal (inner) to piston (rack Teflon® ring) position
and push retainer to adjust screw side with fingers lightly. Then
make rack move in gear housing assembly and install rack oil
seal (inner) to fit with gear housing assembly.
H
I
J
SGIA0548E
c.
When installing outer rack oil seal, cover the end of rack with an
OHP sheet [70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm (3.94 in)]. It will avoid
damaging rack oil seal. Then place oil seal on sheet. Pull rack oil
seal along with OHP sheet until they pass rack end, then
remove sheet.
K
L
M
SGIA0157E
d.
Install end cover assembly to rack, move it to gear housing assembly.
Revision: October 2004
PS-23
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
5.
Using a 45 mm (1.77 in) open head wrench or suitable tool,
tighten end cover assembly to specification.
CAUTION:
Do not damage rack surface. If it is damaged, it may cause
oil leaks. Replace rack assembly.
SST081B
6.
After tightening end cover assembly, caulk cylinder at one point
as shown using a punch. This will prevent end cover from getting loose.
SGIA0158E
7.
8.
9.
Install sub-gear assembly to gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Oil seal may be damaged if sub-gear assembly is not installed correctly.
Apply Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" . Then install O-ring to rear cover.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Install rear cover to gear housing assembly using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(J-46213)
10. Make sure projection on rear cover cap aligns with mark on gear housing assembly.
11. Apply thread locking sealant (Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED
CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" ) to the thread of
the adjusting screw. Then set adjusting screw height from gear
housing assembly. The adjusting screw height is the same as it
was measured previously.
SGIA0568E
12. Rotate pinion ten times through entire rack range to seat gears and to check operation.
Revision: October 2004
PS-24
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
13. With steering gear in neutral position, measure pinion rotating
torque using Tool from within –180° to +180°, while applying and
holding maximum torque to pinion gear.
Tool number
A
: ST3127 S000 (J25765-A),
KV48103400 ( — )
B
C
SGIA0483E
14. After loosening adjusting screw once, tighten it again with torque of 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb). Then
loosen it within 20° – 40°.
15. Measure pinion rotating torque using Tool, then confirm whether
the reading is within the specified value. If the reading is not
within the specified value, readjust screw angle with adjusting
screw. If the reading is still not within the specified value or the
rotating torque of adjusting screw is less than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m,
44 in-lb), replace the steering gear assembly.
Pinion rotating torque:
Around neutral position (within ±100°)
Average “A”:
0.8 − 2.0 N·m (0.09 − 0.20 kg-m, 7 − 17 in-lb)
Other than above (more than ±100°)
Maximum variation “B”:
2.3 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb)
SGIA0160E
H
J
K
L
Less than 0.265 mm (0.010 in)
Axial direction of rack
5 mm (0.197 in) away from end of
gear housing
Radius direction of rack
Shaft direction of adjusting screw
Measuring point
PS-25
F
I
SGIA0484E
Revision: October 2004
E
PS
16. Turn pinion to the full left lock position with inner socket to gear housing assembly.
17. Mount dial gauge to rack as shown. Measure vertical movement
of rack when pinion is turned counterclockwise with torque of
19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb). Check if reading is within the specified value. If reading is outside of the specification, readjust
screw angle with adjusting screw. If reading is still outside of
specification, or if the rotating torque of adjusting screw is less
than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb), replace the steering gear
assembly.
Amount of vertical movement with rack
D
2005 Titan
M
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
18. Install large-diameter side of boot to gear housing assembly.
19. Install small-diameter side of boot to the mounting groove of
inner socket boot.
SGIA0550E
20. Install boot clamp to the small-diameter side of boot.
21. Install boot clamp to large-diamter side of boot and crimp
securely.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the boot clamps.
AST139
22. Install cylinder tubes to gear housing assembly.
23. Install lock nut and outer socket to inner socket.
24. Tighten lightly tie-rod in specified length “L”, then tighten lock nut
at specified torque. Refer to PS-18, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Reconfirm if tie-rod length is within limit of specified length
“L”.
Inner socket length “L”
: 115.2 mm (4.54 in)
CAUTION:
Perform toe-in adjustment after this procedure. Length
achieved after toe-in adjustment is not necessarily the
value given here.
SGIA0167E
Revision: October 2004
PS-26
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
PFP:49110
A
EGS000T6
CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE
CAUTION:
Before starting work, confirm belt tension is proper.
1. Connect Tool between oil pump discharge connector and high
pressure hose and then bleed air from the hydraulic circuit.
B
C
Tool number:
Pressure gauge and shut-off valve
Oil pump side
High pressure
piping side
2.
3.
4.
5.
KV48103500
(J26357 and J26357-10)
D
Connector A and
O-ring
KV48105300-4 and
5295262U10 (
—
)
Eye-bolt and O-ring
KV48105300-3 and
5295262U00 (
—
)
Connector B and
O-ring
KV48105300-1 and
5295262U00 (
—
)
Nut
KV48105300-2 (
—
E
SGIA0570E
F
)
Start engine. Allow engine to run until tank temperature reaches 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F).
PS
CAUTION:
● Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed,
fluid pressure in power steering pump increases to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature
excessively.
H
● Be careful not to contact hose with belt when engine is started.
With engine at idle, close shut-off valve and read the relief oil pressure.
I
Relief oil pressure : 9.0 – 9.8 mPa (91.77 – 99.93 kg/cm2 , 1305.34 – 1421.37 psi)
CAUTION:
Do not close shut-off valve of pressure gauge for more than 10 seconds.
After measurement, open shut-off valve slowly.
● If relief oil pressure is outside the specification, disassemble and repair oil pump. Refer to PS-18, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
After inspection, disconnect oil pressure gauge and oil pressure gauge adapter from hydraulic circuit, connect oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose. Add fluid and bleed air from hydraulic circuit
thoroughly. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
Removal and Installation
J
K
L
EGS000T7
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank.
Remove engine room cover. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove power steering reservoir tank.
Remove serpentine drive belt belt from auto tensioner and power steering pump. Refer to EM-12,
"Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect pressure sensor electrical connector.
Remove high pressure and low pressure piping from power steering oil pump. Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .
Remove mounting bolts, then remove power steering pump.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" for tightening torque.
●
After installation, bleed air. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
NOTE:
Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment.
Revision: October 2004
PS-27
2005 Titan
M
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Disassembly and Assembly
EGS000T8
WGIA0076E
1.
Bracket
2.
Rear cover
3.
Gasket
4.
Lock pin
5.
Cam ring
6.
Rotor
7.
Vane
8.
Cartridge
9.
Side plate
10. O-ring
11. Body assembly
12. Oil seal
13. Drive shaft assembly
14. Snap ring
15. Pulley
16. Spring washer
17. Flow control valve
18. Pressure sensor
19. Connector bolt
20. Copper washer
21. Bracket
22. Suction pipe
23. O-ring
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
Disassemble power steering oil pump only if the following items are found.
●
Oil leakage from oil pump
●
Deformed or damaged pulley
●
Poor performance
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Mount the oil pump in a vise as needed.
CAUTION:
When retaining drive shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft.
1. Unscrew three bracket bolts and remove bracket from rear cover.
2. Unscrew four rear cover bolts and remove rear cover from body assembly.
3. Remove gasket from body assembly.
4. Remove lock pin, cartridge and side plate from body assembly.
5. Remove pulley from drive shaft assembly.
Revision: October 2004
PS-28
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
6.
Remove snap ring from drive shaft assembly, then press out
drive shaft assembly.
CAUTION:
When removing snap ring, be careful not to damage drive
shaft assembly.
A
B
C
SST010B
D
7.
Using a screwdriver, remove oil seal from body assembly.
E
F
PS
SST034A
8.
9.
Remove O-ring from body assembly.
Remove connector bolt, then flow control valve and spring from
body assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop and deform the flow control valve.
H
I
J
K
SGIA0524E
10. Remove suction pipe from body assembly.
11. Remove O-ring for suction pipe.
L
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection
●
M
Check body assembly and the inside of rear cover for damage. If any damage is found, replace with new
part for rear cover and replace with new power steering pump assembly for body assembly.
Cartridge Assembly Inspection
●
Check cam ring, side plate, rotor and vane for damage. If any damage is found, replace cartridge assembly with new one.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
When retaining drive shaft assembly in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise
and shaft.
NOTE:
Mount the oil pump in a vise as needed.
1. Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to oil seal lip and to the circumference of oil seal.
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Revision: October 2004
PS-29
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
2.
Install oil seal to body assembly using suitable tool.
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seal.
SST038A
3.
4.
5.
Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to drive shaft assembly and press drive shaft assembly into body assembly with suitable tool, then install snap ring.
NOTE:
Do not reuse snap ring.
Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring and install O-ring into body assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Install side plate to body assembly.
SGIA0422E
6.
Install lock pin into lock pin hole, and install cam-ring as shown.
● When installing cam ring, align letter "E" to rear cover as
shown.
CAUTION:
Do not confuse the assembling direction of cam ring. If
cam ring is installed facing the incorrect direction, it may
cause pump operation malfunction.
WGIA0079E
7.
Install rotor to body assembly.
Revision: October 2004
PS-30
2005 Titan
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
●
When installing rotor, the punch mark on the face of the rotor
faces the body assembly.
A
B
C
SGIA0424E
D
8.
Install vane to rotor with round portion facing outside.
E
F
PS
SST843A
9. Check if drive shaft assembly turns smoothly.
10. Install gasket to body assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse gasket.
11. Install rear cover to body assembly and tighten bolts to the specified torque.
12. Install bracket to rear cover and tighten bolts at the specified torque.
13. Install pulley to drive shaft assembly then tighten lock nut at the specified torque.
14. Install spring and flow control valve, copper washers, joint and connector bolt to body assembly. Then
tighten connector bolt to the specified torque.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-ring.
15. Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring, then install O-ring to suction pipe.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-ring.
16. Install suction pipe to body assembly.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PS-31
2005 Titan
HYDRAULIC LINE
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
PFP:49721
EGS000T9
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal.
WGIA0111E
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High pressure hose
4.
Oil cooler
5.
Steering gear assembly
6.
Reservoir tank bracket
7.
Eye bolt
Revision: October 2004
PS-32
2005 Titan
HYDRAULIC LINE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then
correct if needed.
A
B
C
SGIA0563E
●
To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of
power steering pump, and attach eye joint to power steering
pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to
specification.
D
E
F
PS
WGIA0089E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
PS-33
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Wheel
PFP:00030
EGS000TA
End play of the axial direction for steering wheel
0 mm (0 in)
Steering wheel play on the outer circumference
0 − 35 mm (0 − 1.38 in)
Steering wheel turning force
39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less
Steering Column
EGS000TB
Inspection After Assembly
Unit: mm (in)
WGIA0080E
Steering column length “L”
610 (24.02)
Inspection After Removal
Unit: mm (in)
SGIA0475E
158 (6.22)
Steering column length “L1 ”
2
Steering column length “L ”
262 (10.31)
Inspection After Installation
WGIA0083E
Range “A”
61.3 mm (2.41 in)
Tilt mechanism range (Manual tilt)
Revision: October 2004
3° per notch at 5 steps
PS-34
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket
EGS000TC
A
B
C
D
SGIA0358E
0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb)
Swinging torque
Measurement on spring balance
Tie-rod ball joint outer socket
●
E
4.84 − 46.7 N (0.50 − 4.7 kg, 4 − 34 lb)
Measuring point: cotter pin hole of stud
0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb)
Rotating torque
Axial end play
0.5 mm (0.020 in) or less
1.0 − 7.8 N·m (0.11 − 0.79 kg-m, 9 − 69 in-lb)
Swinging torque
Measurement on spring balance
Tie-rod ball joint inner socket
●
F
PS
12.1 − 93.7 N (1.3 − 9.5 kg, 9 − 69 lb)
Measuring point: L mark see above,
L=83.2 mm (3.276 in).
Axial end play
0.2 mm (0.08 in) or less
H
Unit: mm (in)
I
J
K
L
SGIA0167E
Inner socket length “L”
115.2 (4.54)
Steering Gear
EGS000TD
Steering gear model
PR26AM
Rack neutral position, dimension “L” (rack stroke)
85.5 mm (3.36 in)
STC0034D
Revision: October 2004
PS-35
2005 Titan
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering gear model
Rack sliding force
PR26AM
At the neutral point:
Range within ± 11.5 mm
(±0.453 in) from the neutral
position
(in power ON)
Area average value
147 − 211 N (14.99 − 21.52 kg, 33.1 − 47.52 lb)
Allowable variation
98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) or less
Peak value
Whole area (in power OFF)
294 N (30.0 kg, 66 lb) or less
Allowable variation
147 N (16 kg, 35 lb) or less
Oil Pump
Relief oil pressure
EGS000TE
9.0 − 9.8 mPa (91.77 − 99.93 kg/cm2 , 1305.34 − 1421.37 psi)
Steering Fluid
EGS000TF
Fluid capacity
Revision: October 2004
Approx. 1.0
PS-36
(1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt)
2005 Titan
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
A
B
SECTION
REAR AXLE
C
RAX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
AXLE SHAFT .............................................................. 5
On-Vehicle Inspection .............................................. 5
REAR AXLE .......................................................... 5
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ......................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
AXLE BEARING ....................................................... 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
AXLE OIL SEAL ....................................................... 11
Removal and Installation ........................................ 11
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 12
Axle Bearing ........................................................... 12
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RAX-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
PFP:00001
EDS001QG
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires
on ground.
* Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Revision: October 2004
RAX-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS001QH
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV40101000
(J-25604-01)
Axle stand
B
Removing axle shaft
C
RAX
NT159
ST36230000
(J-25840-A)
Slide hammer
E
Removing axle shaft
F
NT126
205-D002
( — )
Bearing splitter
G
Removing axle shaft bearing
H
I
ZZA0700D
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001QI
J
Tool name
Description
Power tools
Removing and installing nuts and bolts
K
L
PBIC0190E
M
Revision: October 2004
RAX-3
2005 Titan
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EDS001QJ
RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PR-8, "INSPECTION"
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
RAX-5
×
Wheel bearing damage
×
RAX-5
×
Parts interference
×
RAX-6
×
Improper installation, looseness
×
Noise
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
Vibration
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
Shudder
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
Reference page
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
REAR FINAL DRIVE
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: October 2004
RAX-4
2005 Titan
AXLE SHAFT
AXLE SHAFT
On-Vehicle Inspection
PFP:38164
A
EDS001QK
REAR AXLE
●
●
●
Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as
necessary.
Retighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to RAX-6,
"Removal and Installation" .
B
C
RAX
E
SMA525A
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
F
Check the axial end play, replace as necessary.
●
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RAX-5
2005 Titan
AXLE SHAFT
Removal and Installation
EDS001QL
WDIA0110E
1.
Axle shaft
2.
Snap ring
3.
Bearing ring retainer
4.
Axle shaft bearing and cup
5.
Axle oil seal
6.
Axle shaft bearing cage
7.
ABS sensor rotor
8.
Back plate
9.
Torque member
10. ABS sensor
Revision: October 2004
11. Rear final drive
RAX-6
12. Breather
2005 Titan
AXLE SHAFT
CAUTION:
Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative.
A
REMOVAL
B
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Remove the ABS sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the rear brake rotor. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
RAX
E
F
LDIA0112E
5.
Tool number
Tool number
6.
7.
G
Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown.
CAUTION:
● The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle
shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to
damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing.
● Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be
replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed
from the axle shaft housing.
A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01)
B: ST36230000 (J-25840-A)
H
I
LDIA0116E
Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers.
Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size
drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the
bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm
(0.25 in) deep].
CAUTION:
● Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft.
● Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer,
the drill may damage the axle shaft surface.
K
L
M
LDIA0148E
8.
9.
Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the
bearing ring retainer to remove it.
CAUTION:
Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring
retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage
the axle shaft.
Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press.
LDIA0149E
10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press.
Revision: October 2004
RAX-7
J
2005 Titan
AXLE SHAFT
Tool number
: 205-D002
CAUTION:
● Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft.
● Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal,
doing so will damage the axle shaft.
11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
12. Remove the wheel bearing cage.
NOTE:
● If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the
ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" .
● The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS
sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" .
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Axle Shaft
●
●
●
●
Clean and remove all nicks and burrs.
Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary.
Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary.
Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum)
: 39.726 mm (1.5640 in)
Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup
●
Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear.
Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Bearing Cage
●
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Housing
●
Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. Refer to BRC-40,
"Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor.
Install the axle shaft bearing cage.
Install a new axle oil seal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft.
● Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm
(30 in) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 in)
and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 in).
● Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using
a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (.0015
in) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing
cup and seat.
CAUTION:
Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and
LDIA0150E
axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct
direction.
Revision: October 2004
RAX-8
2005 Titan
AXLE SHAFT
5.
Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft.
A
● Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lb)
until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing
ring retainer in at least one point.
B
6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers.
7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing.
8. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to
C
specification.
9. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation" .
10. Install the rear brake rotor. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
RAX
11. Install the rear ABS sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RAX-9
2005 Titan
AXLE BEARING
AXLE BEARING
Removal and Installation
PFP:40120
EDS001QM
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. Refer to RAX-10,
"Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is
removed from the axle shaft housing.
Revision: October 2004
RAX-10
2005 Titan
AXLE OIL SEAL
AXLE OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:43252
A
EDS001QN
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. Refer to RAX-11,
"Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is
removed from the axle shaft housing.
B
C
RAX
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RAX-11
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Axle Bearing
Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum)
Revision: October 2004
PFP:00030
EDS001QO
39.726 mm (1.5640 in) minimum
RAX-12
2005 Titan
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
ROOF
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 8
SUNROOF ................................................................ 10
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 10
System Description ................................................ 10
OUTLINE ............................................................. 10
OPERATION ....................................................... 10
Revision: October 2004
RF-1
RETAINED POWER OPERATION ...................... 11
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE ....................... 11
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION ........ 12
CAN Communication System Description .............. 12
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — ................................ 13
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 15
Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor
Assembly ................................................................ 15
Work Flow ............................................................... 15
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 16
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 16
Work Support .......................................................... 17
Active Test .............................................................. 17
Data Monitor ........................................................... 17
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 17
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 18
Sunroof Switch System Check ............................... 19
SunroofMotorAssemblyPowerSupplyandGround
Circuit Check .......................................................... 20
Door Switch Check ................................................. 21
Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 23
GAP ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 23
HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT .............. 23
Removal and Installation ........................................ 23
SUNROOF UNIT ................................................. 25
GLASS LID .......................................................... 25
WIND DEFLECTOR ............................................ 26
SUNSHADE ........................................................ 26
SUNROOF MOTOR ............................................ 26
DRAIN HOSES .................................................... 27
WEATHERSTRIP ................................................ 28
LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY ............................. 28
2005 Titan
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS004DI
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions
EIS004DJ
Disconnect both battery cables in advance.
●
Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance.
●
Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.
●
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may
get in the way with cloth.
●
When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape.
●
Keep removed parts protected with cloth.
●
If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.
●
If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.
●
Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.
●
After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.
●
Remove stains in the following way.
Water-soluble stains:
Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain
with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely.
Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.
●
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.
●
Revision: October 2004
RF-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EIS004DK
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and
Rattle Kit
E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
SIIA0994E
RF
Commercial Service Tool
EIS004DL
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
J
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
K
L
SIIA0995E
M
Revision: October 2004
RF-3
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS004DM
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: October 2004
RF-4
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
F
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
RF
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
L
●
Revision: October 2004
RF-5
2005 Titan
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS004DN
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: October 2004
RF-6
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
A
B
C
D
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
E
F
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition, look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
G
H
RF
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
K
L
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: October 2004
RF-7
2005 Titan
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS004DO
LIWA0276E
Revision: October 2004
RF-8
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: October 2004
RF-9
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:91210
EIS004DP
WIIA0558E
System Description
EIS004DQ
OUTLINE
Electric sunroof system consists of
●
Sunroof switch
●
Sunroof motor assembly
●
Front door switches
●
BCM (body control module)
BCM supplies power to the sunroof motor. Sunroof operation depends on sunroof switch position.
OPERATION
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through BCM terminal 69
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 5.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 7
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Revision: October 2004
RF-10
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
TILT UP OPERATION
A
When the tilt switch is operated for tilt up, ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 4
●
through sunroof switch terminal 4
●
through sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will tilt up.
B
C
TILT DOWN OPERATION
D
When the tilt switch is operated for tilt down, ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 10
●
through sunroof switch terminal 6
●
through sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will tilt down.
E
F
SLIDE OPEN OPERATION
G
When the switch is operated for slide open, ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 9
●
through sunroof switch terminal 3
●
through sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will slide open.
H
RF
SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION
J
When the switch is operated for slide close, ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 3
●
through sunroof switch terminal 1
●
through sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will slide closed.
K
L
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to RF-16, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" .
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE
If the battery is disconnected, or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the slide switch will
become inoperable and the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from
any sunroof position (full open, partially open, closed, partially vented, and vented), push and hold the sunroof
tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. After it has closed all the way, push
and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) for more than 2 seconds to re-establish the motor preset position. The
sunroof should then operate normally.
Revision: October 2004
RF-11
2005 Titan
M
SUNROOF
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION
The CPU (central processing unit) monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fully-closed
or other) by the signals from the sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following sliding close operations, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until it reaches full open position.
●
automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position.
●
automatic close operation during retained power operation.
CAN Communication System Description
EIS004DR
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
RF-12
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
EIS004DS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
WIWA0170E
Revision: October 2004
RF-13
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
WIWA0318E
Revision: October 2004
RF-14
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EIS004DT
A
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
12
R/L
Front door switch RH signal
38
W/L
Ignition power supply
47
SB
Front door switch LH signal
67
B
Condition
ON (Open)
0
W/L
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ACC or ON
Battery voltage
OFF (Close)
Battery voltage
—
—
Battery voltage
Within 45 second after ignition switch is
turned OFF
Battery voltage
When front door LH or RH is open while
retained power is operating
0
E
69
W/R
Power window power supply
—
Battery voltage
70
W/B
BAT power supply
—
Battery voltage
Terminal
1
3
Wire Color
W/L
P/W
Item
RAP signal
Sunroof switch CLOSE signal
Condition
4
O
Sunroof switch TILT UP signal
W/R
7
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
When front door LH or RH is open while
retained power is operating
0
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch
CLOSE position
0
J
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
TILT UP position
0
K
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
B
Ground
—
—
8
Y
Ground signal
—
—
9
P
Sunroof switch OPEN signal
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch
OPEN position
Other than above
Sunroof switch TILT DOWN signal
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
TILT DOWN position
Other than above
Work Flow
L
M
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
EIS004DV
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to RF-10, "System Description" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction.
Refer to RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
Does sunroof system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
RF-15
H
Battery voltage
—
L/R
G
RF
BAT power supply
10
F
Voltage
(Approx.)
Within 45 second after ignition switch is
turned OFF
Other than above
5
EIS004DU
Ignition switch ON
Other than above
4.
5.
D
Ignition switch ON
Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor Assembly
1.
2.
3.
C
0
Ground
RAP signal
B
OFF (Close)
ON (Open)
68
Voltage
(Approx.)
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS004DW
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0369E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM".
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
RF-16
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
4.
Touch "RETAINED PWR".
A
B
C
LIIA0163E
D
5.
Select diagnosis mode. "DATA MONITOR", "ACTIVE TEST" and
"WORK SUPPORT" are available.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
Work Support
EIS004DZ
H
Work item
Description
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power supply period between two steps.
RETAINED PWR SET
●
RF
MODE 1 (45 sec.) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.)
Active Test
EIS004DY
J
Test item
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM to power window system,
power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED
PWR" on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF"
position. "RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II
screen when ignition switch ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking
retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is
turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF.
RETAINED PWR
Data Monitor
EIS004DX
Monitored item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch driver side.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch passenger side.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
Symptom
Sunroof does not operate.
Revision: October 2004
EIS004E0
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
Refer to page
1. Sunroof motor assembly power supply and
ground circuit check
RF-20
2. Sunroof switch system check
RF-19
3. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
RF-18
4. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-26
RF-17
2005 Titan
K
L
M
SUNROOF
Symptom
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
Refer to page
1. Check the retained power operation mode setting
RF-17
2. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
RF-18
3. Door switch check
RF-21
4. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-26
Motor does not stop at the sunroof fully-open or fully-closed
position.
1. Initialization procedure check
RF-11
2. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-26
Sunroof interruption detection does not operate properly.
1. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-26
Retained power operation does not operate properly.
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS004E1
1. CHECK FUSE
Check the following BCM fuse and fusible link.
Component Parts
BCM
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
38 (IGN power supply)
10A
59
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
Location
Fuse and relay box
Fuse and fusible link box
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM connectors M18 and M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
M18
M20
(–)
38 (W/L)
70 (W/B)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch ON
Ground
Igniting switch OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0229E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
Connector
M20
Terminals (Wire color)
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0915E
Revision: October 2004
RF-18
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
Sunroof Switch System Check
EIS004E2
1. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector and sunroof switch connector.
Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 3 (P/W), 4 (O), 8 (Y), 9 (P), 10
(L/R) and sunroof switch connector R104 terminals 1 (P/W), 2 (Y), 3 (P), 4 (O), 6 (L/R).
3 (P/W) - 1 (P/W)
4 (O) - 4 (O)
8 (Y) - 2 (Y)
9 (P) - 3 (P)
10 (L/R) - 6 (L/R)
C
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between sunroof motor
assembly and sunroof switch.
E
LIIA1245E
F
2. CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH
G
Operate sunroof switch, and check continuity of the sunroof switch as follows.
Terminals
Condition
1
3
2
4
6
Continuity
Sunroof switch in CLOSE position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in OPEN position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in TILT UP position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position
Yes
Other than above
No
H
RF
J
WIIA0232E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof switch and harness are OK. Refer to RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
NG
>> Replace sunroof switch.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RF-19
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS004E3
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the sunroof motor assembly connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 1(W/L), 5 (W/R) and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
1 (W/L)
R4
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Ground
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after
ignition switch is turned
OFF
Battery voltage
When front door LH or
RH is open while retained
power is operating
0
WIIA0250E
5 (W/R)
Ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminal 7 (B) and ground.
7 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to
RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0251E
3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69
and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0425E
Revision: October 2004
RF-20
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
4. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
68 (W/L) - 1 (W/L)
69 (W/R) - 5 (W/R)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/
L), 69 (W/R) and sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminal
1 (W/L), 5 (W/R).
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/
L), 69 (W/R) and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
D
LIIA1246E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof motor assembly power supply circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to
RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly.
F
Door Switch Check
G
EIS004E4
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Monitor item
Condition
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
H
RF
OPEN
: ON
CLOSE
: OFF
OPEN
: ON
CLOSE
: OFF
J
K
PIIA2464E
L
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
Item
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
RH
M18
Ground
LH
M19
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Door switch
OPEN
0
Door switch
CLOSE
Battery
voltage
Door switch
OPEN
0
Door switch
CLOSE
Battery
voltage
(–)
12 (R/L)
47 (SB)
M
WIIA0234E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switches are OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
RF-21
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front door switches and BCM connectors.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 (SB or R/L) and
BCM connectors M18, M19 terminals 12 (R/L), 47 (SB).
Front door switch LH
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
Front door switch RH
2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B8 or
front door switch RH connector B108 terminal 2 (SB or R/L) and
ground.
2 (SB or R/L) - Ground : Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0235E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly.
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
Check continuity between each door switch terminal 2 and body ground part of door switch.
Terminal
2
Body ground part
of door switch
Condition
Continuity
Door switch pushed
No
Door switch released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
WIIA0289E
4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 12 (R/L), M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground.
12 (R/L) - Ground
47 (SB) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0234E
Revision: October 2004
RF-22
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
Fitting Adjustment
EIS004E5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WIIA0312E
RF
GAP ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
If any gap or height difference between glass lid and roof panel is found, check glass lid fit and adjust as follows:
1. Open sunshade assembly.
2. Loosen glass lid securing screws (2 each on left and right sides), then tilt glass lid down.
3. Manually adjust glass lid from outside of vehicle so it resembles "A-A" as shown in the figure.
4. After adjusting glass lid tilt glass lid up and tighten screws.
5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly.
HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
EIS004E6
After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and glass lid alignment.
Handle glass lid with care so not to cause damage.
●
For easier installation, mark each point before removal.
CAUTION:
●
Always work with a helper.
●
Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly. Then, after removal, do not move the motor
assembly.
●
●
Revision: October 2004
RF-23
K
L
M
Tilt glass lid up and down.
Check height difference between roof panel and glass lid, and compare to "A-A".
Removal and Installation
J
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
●
After installing the sunroof and glass lid, check gap adjustment to ensure there is no malfunction.
WIIA0238E
Revision: October 2004
RF-24
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
1.
Glass lid assembly
2.
Wind deflector
3.
Rear drain hoses
4.
Shade stoppers
5.
Sunroof bracket
6.
Sunshade assembly
7.
Front drain hoses
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof frame assembly
10. Overhead console bracket
11.
Side cover LH
A
12. Side cover RH
B
SUNROOF UNIT
Removal
CAUTION:
●
Always work with a helper.
●
When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage.
●
After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, be sure to check gap adjustment to ensure there is
no malfunction.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
2. Remove the sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-25, "GLASS LID" .
3. Remove overhead console bracket.
4. Disconnect the drain hoses.
5. Remove front sunroof bolts.
6. Remove rear sunroof bracket bolts.
7. Remove the side bolts and the sunroof unit.
C
D
E
F
G
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Position the sunroof frame assembly and install the side bolts.
Install the rear brackets.
Install the front mounting bolts.
Connect drain hoses.
Install the overhead console bracket.
Install the sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-25, "GLASS LID" .
Install headlining. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
H
RF
J
GLASS LID
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Open sunshade.
Ensure glass lid is closed.
Remove side cover LH and RH.
Remove the screws securing glass lid to the sunroof frame
assembly.
Remove the glass lid assembly.
L
M
WIIA0252E
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position glass lid to sunroof assembly.
Install the glass lid assembly screws. (First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid to
prevent lid from moving while tightening other bolts.)
Adjust the glass lid assembly. Refer to RF-23, "Fitting Adjustment" .
Install side cover LH and RH.
Revision: October 2004
RF-25
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
WIND DEFLECTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Open the sunroof.
Remove screws from the left, center, and right side wind deflector holders.
Remove the wind deflector from the sunroof frame assembly.
LIIA1099E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SUNSHADE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the sunroof frame assembly. Refer to RF-25, "SUNROOF UNIT" .
Remove the sunshade stoppers (2 points) from the rear end of
the sunroof frame assembly.
Remove the sunshade assembly from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly.
SBT251A
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SUNROOF MOTOR
Removal
CAUTION:
●
When removing the sunroof motor, be sure that the sunroof is in the fully closed position.
●
Never run the removed motor as a single unit.
1. Position the sunroof assembly in the fully closed position.
2. Remove the front roof console assembly. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the sunroof motor
assembly.
4. Remove the mounting screws and then remove sunroof motor
assembly.
LIIA0270E
Revision: October 2004
RF-26
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
Installation
CAUTION:
Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position.
1. Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally little by little so that
the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof unit
and the mounting surface becomes parallel. Then, secure the
motor with bolts.
Sunroof motor bolts
2.
3.
4.
A
B
C
:2.3 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20in-lb)
Connect the wire harness connector to the sunroof motor
assembly.
Install the roof console assembly. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" .
Reset the sunroof motor memory. Refer to RF-11, "MEMORY
RESET PROCEDURE" .
D
LIIA0270E
DRAIN HOSES
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
WIIA0253E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RF-27
2005 Titan
SUNROOF
1.
Remove the headlining. Refer to EI-43, "Removal and Installation" .
2.
3.
4.
Visually check the drain hoses for proper connections, damage or deterioration.
Remove each drain hose and check visually for damage, cracks or deterioration.
Pour water through the drain hose to check for damage.
If any damage is found, replace the drain hose.
LIIA0272E
●
WEATHERSTRIP
Visually check weatherstrip for any damage, deterioration, or flattening.
●
In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour water around it to find the damaged or
gaped portion, remove glass lid assembly.
●
If any damage is found, replace glass lid assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not remove weatherstrip.
LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Before replacing any suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of the noise being experienced.
1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to the wire or rail
groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required.
2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, remove rear guide, then replace
wire.
Revision: October 2004
RF-28
2005 Titan
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
A
B
SECTION
REAR FINAL DRIVE
C
RFD
E
CONTENTS
WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ............................................... 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 8
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 8
DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 9
Cross-Sectional View ............................................... 9
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL ...................................... 10
Changing Differential Gear Oil ............................... 10
FILLING ............................................................... 10
Checking Differential Gear Oil ................................ 10
FRONT OIL SEAL .....................................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
CARRIER COVER .................................................... 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................ 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 14
Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 15
COMPONENTS .................................................. 15
ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT... 16
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ............... 23
SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS ............... 24
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 27
Revision: October 2004
F
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 33
General Specifications ............................................ 33
Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 33
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE ....... 33
PRELOAD TORQUE ........................................... 33
BACKLASH ......................................................... 33
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT ....................... 33
SELECTIVE PARTS ............................................ 34
G
WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL
I
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 35
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 35
Precautions ............................................................. 35
Service Notice or Precaution .................................. 36
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 36
PREPARATION ......................................................... 37
Special Service Tools ............................................. 37
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 40
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 41
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ................................... 41
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL ...................................... 42
Changing Differential Gear Oil ................................ 42
FILLING ............................................................... 42
Checking Differential Gear Oil ................................ 42
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 43
Cross-sectional View .............................................. 43
Differential Lock Operation ..................................... 44
System Description ................................................. 44
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID .................... 44
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH ....... 44
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT ............ 44
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH ............. 44
DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP .......................... 44
System Diagram ..................................................... 45
RFD-1
2005 Titan
H
J
K
L
M
COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION ...... 45
CAN Communication .............................................. 45
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 45
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 46
Fail-safe Function ................................................... 46
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis ......................... 46
BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 46
Location of Electrical Parts ..................................... 47
Wiring Diagram — DIFLOC — ................................ 48
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms .................. 50
Differential Lock Control Unit Input/Output Signal
Reference Values ................................................... 50
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
INSPECTION TABLE .......................................... 50
CONSULT-II Function (DIFF LOCK) ....................... 52
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE ................ 52
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE ............................. 53
DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM .................... 56
Power Supply Circuit For Differential Lock Control
Unit ......................................................................... 56
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 56
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ................... 56
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 57
Differential Lock Control Unit .................................. 58
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 58
Differential Lock Mode Switch ................................ 58
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 58
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ................... 58
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 59
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 61
Differential Lock Position Switch ............................. 62
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 62
DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS
AND REFERENCE VALUE ................................. 62
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 63
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 65
Differential Lock Solenoid Relay ............................. 65
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 65
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 65
Differential Lock Solenoid ....................................... 66
Revision: October 2004
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................66
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ...................66
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................67
COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................70
ABS System ............................................................70
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................70
CAN Communication Line .......................................71
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ..............72
DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON ......72
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................72
DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Change .......75
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................75
DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Sometimes Flashes ...76
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................76
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT ..................78
Removal and Installation .........................................78
REMOVAL ............................................................78
INSTALLATION ....................................................78
FRONT OIL SEAL .....................................................79
Removal and Installation .........................................79
REMOVAL ............................................................79
INSTALLATION ....................................................80
CARRIER COVER .....................................................81
Removal and Installation .........................................81
REMOVAL ............................................................81
INSTALLATION ....................................................81
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY .............................82
Removal and Installation .........................................82
REMOVAL ............................................................82
INSTALLATION ....................................................82
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................83
COMPONENTS ...................................................83
ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT...84
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................87
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................91
SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS ................92
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................94
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......99
General Specifications ............................................99
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................99
PRELOAD TORQUE ...........................................99
BACKLASH ..........................................................99
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT .......................99
SELECTIVE PARTS .......................................... 100
RFD-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
A
EDS001OQ
Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required,
be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied.
B
Overhaul should be done in a clean work area, it is preferable to work in dustproof area.
Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the exterior of
the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly.
C
Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them
with a new ones if necessary.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time when the unit is disassembled.
RFD
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, observe it.
E
Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them.
Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil,
F
and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces.
Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components.
Avoid using cotton gloves or shop rags to prevent entering of lint.
During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and apply new differential gear oil, petroleum G
jelly, or multi-purpose grease as specified for each vehicle, if necessary.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EDS001OR
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV40104000
(
—
)
Flange wrench
a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
Removing and installing drive pinion nut
NT659
ST33290001
(J-34286)
Puller
Removing front oil seal
ZZA0601D
ST15310000
(
—
)
Drift
a: 96mm (3.77 in) dia.
b: 84 mm (3.30 in) dia.
Installing front oil seal
NT115
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge set
Inspecting drive pinion bearing preload
and total preload
1. GG91030000
(J-25765)
Torque wrench
2. HT62940000 (1/2″)
(
—
)
Socket adapter
NT124
3. HT62900000 (3/8″)
(
—
)
Socket adapter
—
(C-4164)
Adjuster tool
Removing and installing side bearing adjuster
WDIA0192E
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing carrier cover
S-NT046
Revision: October 2004
RFD-4
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST30021000
(J-22912-01)
Puller
Removing drive pinion rear bearing inner
race
A
B
C
ZZA0700D
ST33081000
(
—
)
Adapter
a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia.
b: 33.5 mm (1.32 in) dia.
Removing and installing side bearing inner race
RFD
E
ZZA1000D
ST23550000
(
—
)
Pin punch
a: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia.
Removing and installing lock pin
F
G
H
NT410
—
(8144)
Pinion block
Adjusting pinion gear height
I
J
SDIA2599E
—
(6740)
Cone
Adjusting pinion gear height
K
L
SDIA2601E
—
(6741)
Screw
Adjusting pinion gear height
M
SDIA2602E
—
(6739)
Pinion height lock
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2603E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-5
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(D-115-2)
Scooter block
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2604E
TBD
Arbor disc
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2605E
—
(D-115-3)
Arbor
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2606E
ST01500001
(
—
)
Drift
a: 89mm (3.50 in) dia.
b: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer
race
ZZA0811D
ST30022000
(
—
)
Drift
a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer
race
NT660
ST33022000
(
—
)
Drift
a: 49 mm (1.92 in) dia.
b: 67 mm (2.63 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion front bearing outer
race
NT660
Revision: October 2004
RFD-6
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(C-4040)
Installer
Installing drive pinion rear bearing inner
race
A
B
C
SDIA2607E
KV38100300
(J-25523)
Drift
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
c: 32mm (1.26 in) dia.
Installing side bearing inner race
RFD
E
ZZA1046D
F
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001OS
Tool name
Description
Puller
Removing companion flange and side
bearing inner race
G
H
I
NT077
Puller
Removing side bearing inner race
J
K
ZZB0823D
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
L
M
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-7
2005 Titan
×
×
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
×
TIRES
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
AXLE SHAFT
×
BRAKES
×
STEERING
MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil"
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
2005 Titan
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
RFD-18, "Companion Flange Runout"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
×
Gear oil improper
RFD-17, "Backlash"
PFP:00003
×
Companion flange excessive runout
—
EDS001OT
×
Backlash incorrect
RFD-16, "Tooth Contact"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
Tooth surfaces worn
—
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
RFD-8
Gear contact improper
Reference page
Noise
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
×: Applicable
Revision: October 2004
Gear tooth rough
DESCRIPTION
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DESCRIPTION
Cross-Sectional View
PFP:00000
A
EDS001OU
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
SDIA2636E
1.
Companion flange
2.
Drive pinion
3.
Drive gear
4.
Differential case
5.
Pinion mate gear
6.
Axle shaft
7.
Side gear
8.
Pinion mate shaft
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-9
2005 Titan
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
PFP:KLD30
EDS002HV
Refer to MA-27, "Changing Final Drive Oil" .
FILLING
Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
Checking Differential Gear Oil
EDS002HW
Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-10
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:38189
A
EDS001OX
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
B
Remove wheel and tire assemblies.
Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc
Rotor" .
C
Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times.
Record the rotating torque.
Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using
RFD
Tool.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
)
E
F
LDIA0122E
7.
Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark
should be in line with the mark on companion flange.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
G
H
I
J
SDIA2590E
8.
K
Remove companion flange using a suitable tool.
L
M
LDIA0123E
9.
Remove front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
LDIA0124E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-11
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install front oil seal
into axle housing using Tool.
Tool number
: ST15310000 (
— )
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● When installing, do not incline oil seal.
●
LDIA0125E
2.
Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install companion flange.
SDIA2590E
3.
4.
Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinion
gear and tighten nut until there is zero bearing end play.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer.
Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and
flange wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading
recorded in step 5 above during removal plus an additional 0.56
N·m (5 in-lb).
Tool number
5.
6.
7.
8.
: KV40104000 (
—
)
LDIA0122E
If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in
6.8 N·m (5 ft-lb) increments until proper rotating torque is
achieved. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and do not
exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible
spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the
required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible spacer.
Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required. Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive
Oil" .
Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of
Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-12
2005 Titan
CARRIER COVER
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
CARRIER COVER
Removal and Installation
PFP:38351
A
EDS001OY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Drain gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" .
Remove carrier cover.
● Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover.
● Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover.
B
C
RFD
E
LDIA0126E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
application and mounting surfaces.
Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA2639E
Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover.
Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-13
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:38300
EDS001OZ
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
●
Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do
so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" .
2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
● Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove axle shaft. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Support rear final drive using a suitable jack.
5. Disconnect the following components from rear final drive.
● Brake tube block connectors. Refer to BR-13, "Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and
Brake Hose" .
● ABS sensor wire harness. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" (without VDC), BRC-150,
"Removal and Installation" (with VDC).
● Parking brake cable.
● Brake tube.
6. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube at the mounting clip on
top of axle housing. Then remove the metal clip to disconnect
brake line from the mounting clip on top of axle housing.
7. Remove rear shock absorber lower bolts. Refer to RSU-7,
"Removal and Installation" .
8. Remove leaf spring U-bolt nuts. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and
Installation" .
9. Remove rear final drive assembly.
LDIA0126E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
●
Bleed the air from brake system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-14
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001P0
A
COMPONENTS
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WDIA0112E
1.
Drive pinion nut
2.
Drive pinion nut washer
3.
Companion flange
4.
Front oil seal
5.
Front bearing thrust washer
6.
Drive pinion front bearing
7.
Axle housing
8.
Drain plug
9.
Axle shaft assembly
10. Side bearing cap
11. Adjuster lock plate
12. Carrier cover
13. Filler plug
14. Drive pinion
15. Drive pinion height adjusting washer
16. Drive pinion rear bearing
17. Collapsible spacer
18. Side bearing adjuster
19. Side bearing
20. Differential case
21. Drive gear
22. Pinion mate thrust washer
23. Pinion mate gear
24. Pinion mate shaft
25. Lock pin
26. Side gear thrust washer
27. Side gear
28. Breather
Revision: October 2004
RFD-15
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Total Preload Torque
1.
2.
Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing
rollers.
Check total preload using Tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Total preload (with oil seal)
Gear ratio 2.937 Type:
2.49 - 5.27 N·m (0.26 - 0.53 kg-m, 22- 46 in-lb)
Gear ratio 3.357 Type:
2.38 - 5.16 N·m (0.25 - 0.52 kg-m, 21 - 45 in-lb)
PDIA0309E
NOTE:
Total preload torque = Pinion bearing torque + Side bearing torque
● If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble it to check and adjust each part. Adjust pinion
bearing preload and side bearing preload.
Adjust pinion bearing preload first, then adjust side bearing preload.
When the preload torque is large
On pinion bearings: Replace collapsible spacer.
On side bearings:
Loosen side bearing adjuster.
When the preload is small
On pinion bearings: Tighten drive pinion nut.
On side bearings:
Tighten side bearing adjuster.
Tooth Contact
Checking gear tooth contact pattern is necessary to verify correct relationship between drive gear and drive
pinion. Gears which are not positioned in proper arrangement may be noisy and/or have a short life. Check
gear tooth contact pattern to obtain the best contact for low noise and long life.
1. Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-19, "DISASSEMBLY" .
2. Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth.
3. Apply red lead to drive gear.
CAUTION:
Apply red lead to both the faces of 3 to 4 gears at 4 locations evenly spaced on drive gear.
PDIA0321E
4.
Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate drive gear in
both directions.
PDIA0322E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-16
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
A
B
C
RFD
E
F
SDIA2591E
5.
If outside the standard, adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer and backlash. Refer to RFD-25, "Drive
Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" , RFD-17, "Backlash" .
G
Backlash
1.
2.
Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-19, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check drive gear to drive pinion backlash using a dial indicator
at several points.
H
I
Drive gear to drive pinion backlash:
0.08 - 0.13 mm (0.0031 - 0.0051 in)
3.
a.
b.
c.
If outside the standard, adjust side bearing adjuster.
CAUTION:
Check tooth contact and total preload after adjusting side
bearing adjuster. Refer to RFD-16, "Total Preload Torque" ,
RFD-16, "Tooth Contact" .
Remove adjuster lock plate.
Loosen side bearing cap bolts.
Tighten or loosen each side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
J
K
SDIA2640E
L
(C - 4164)
M
PDIA0337E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-17
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
d.
In case of lots of backlash, loosen side bearing adjuster A and
tighten side bearing adjuster B. In case of less backlash, loosen
side bearing adjuster B and tighten side bearing adjuster A.
PDIA0330E
e.
f.
After adjusting backlash and tighten cap bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" .
Install adjuster lock plate and tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" .
PDIA0331E
Companion Flange Runout
1.
2.
Fit a dial indicator onto companion flange face (inner side of propeller shaft mounting bolt holes).
Rotate companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
3.
4.
Fit a test indicator to the inner side of companion flange (socket
diameter).
Rotate companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
5.
a.
b.
c.
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) or less
: 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) or less
SDIA2078E
If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure
below to adjust.
Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion by 90° step, and
search for the point where the runout is the minimum.
If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace companion flange.
If the runout value still outside of the limit after companion flange has been replaced, check drive pinion
bearing and drive pinion assembly.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-18
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DISASSEMBLY
Differential Assembly
1.
2.
A
Remove carrier cover bolts.
Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number
B
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
● Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the
mating surface.
C
RFD
SDIA2581E
3.
4.
For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on one side of
side bearing cap.
CAUTION:
● Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The
matching marks are used to reinstall them in their original positions.
● For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
Remove adjuster lock plates.
E
F
G
H
PDIA0310E
5.
Remove side bearing caps.
I
J
K
PDIA0311E
6.
L
Remove side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(C - 4164)
M
PDIA0337E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-19
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
7.
8.
Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not
mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with
bearing.
Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing.
PDIA0312E
9.
Remove side bearing inner races using suitable puller.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage differential case.
SDIA2635E
10. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on differential
case and drive gear.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage differential
case and drive gear.
11. Remove drive gear bolts.
12. Tap drive gear off differential case with a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Tap evenly all around to keep drive gear from binding.
SDIA2238E
13. Pull lock pin out of pinion mate shaft, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST23550000 (
— )
PDIA0062E
14. Remove pinion mate shaft.
SDIA0031J
Revision: October 2004
RFD-20
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
15. Turn pinion mate gear, then remove pinion mate gear, pinion
mate thrust washer, side gear and side gear thrust washer from
differential case.
A
B
C
SDIA0032J
RFD
Drive Pinion Assembly
1.
2.
Remove differential case assembly. Refer to RFD-19, "Differential Assembly" .
Remove drive pinion nut and washer using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
E
)
F
G
PDIA0314E
3.
Put a matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The
mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
H
I
J
K
SDIA2590E
4.
Remove companion flange using a suitable Tool.
L
M
PDIA0315E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-21
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
5.
Remove front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
6.
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
Remove front bearing thrust washer.
SDIA2586E
7.
8.
Remove drive pinion assembly and collapsible spacer from axle
housing, using press.
CAUTION:
Do not drop drive pinion assembly.
Remove drive pinion front bearing inner race from axle housing.
PDIA0316E
9.
Tap drive pinion front bearing outer race uniformly with a brass
bar or equivalent to remove.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
10. Tap drive pinion rear bearing outer race uniformly with a brass
bar or equivalent for removal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
SDIA2641E
11. Remove drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion
height adjusting washer, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST30021000 (J-22912-01)
SDIA2236E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-22
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Drive Gear and Drive Pinion
●
●
●
A
If gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine cause and adjust, repair, or replace as necessary.
If gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new gears.
Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both drive pinion and
drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each pinion
gear and drive gear before proceeding with assembly.
C
Bearing
●
●
B
If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or unusual noise from bearing,
replace with new bearing assembly (as a new set).
RFD
Bearing must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled.
Side Gear, Pinion Mate and Pinion Mate Shaft
●
●
●
Replace with a new one if found any cracks or damage on the surface of the tooth.
Replace with a new one if found any worn or chipped mark on the contact sides of thrust washer.
Replace both side gear and pinion mate gear as a set when replacing side gear or pinion mate gear.
Side Gear Thrust Washer and Pinion Mate Thrust Washer
●
F
Replace with a new one if found that it is chipped (by friction), damaged, or unusual worn.
G
Differential Case
●
E
Replace with a new one if found any wear or cracks on the contact sides of differential case.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-23
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS
Side Gear Thrust Washer
1.
Place differential case straight up so that side gear to be measured comes upward.
PDIA0460E
2.
Using a thickness gauge, measure the clearance between side
gear back and differential case at 3 different points, while rotating side gear. Average the 3 readings, and then measure the
clearance. (Measure the clearance of the other side as well.)
Side gear back clearance standard:
0.305 mm (0.0120 in) or less.
(Each gear should rotate smoothly without
excessive resistance during differential
motion.)
3.
CAUTION:
To prevent side gear from tilting, insert thickness gauges
with the same thickness from both sides.
If the back clearance is outside the standard, use a thicker/thinner side gear thrust washer to adjust.
When the back clearance is large:
Use a thicker thrust washer.
When the back clearance is small:
Use a thinner thrust washer.
CAUTION:
Select a side gear thrust washer for right and left individually.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-24
SDIA0583E
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer
●
A
Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only.
Matching numbers on both drive pinion and drive gear are
etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the
numbers of each drive pinion and drive gear before proceeding
with assembly.
B
C
SDIA2241E
●
●
●
The mounting distance from the center line of drive gear to the back face of drive pinion for the Model 226
axle assembly is 109.5 mm (4.312 in).
On the button end of each drive pinion, there is etched a plus (+) number, a minus (-) number, or a zero
(0), which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This dimension is controlled by
a selective drive pinion height adjusting washer between drive pinion inner bearing race and drive pinion.
For example: If a drive pinion is etched m+8 (+3), it would require 0.08 mm (0.003 in) less drive pinion
height adjusting washer than a drive pinion etched “0”. This means decreasing drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness; increases the mounting distance of drive pinion to 109.6 mm (4.315 in). If a drive
pinion is etched m-8 (-3), it would require adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in) more to drive pinion height adjusting
washer than would be required if drive pinion were etched “0”. By adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in), the mounting distance of drive pinion was decreased to 109.4 mm (4.309 in) which is just what m-8 (a-3) etching
indicated.
To change drive pinion adjustment, use different drive pinion height adjusting washers which come in different thickness.
Use the following tables as a guide for selecting the correct drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness
to add or subtract from the old drive pinion height adjusting washer.
OLD DRIVE
PINION
MARKING
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
NEW DRIVE PINION MARKING mm (in)
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+4
+0.20
(+0.008)
+0.18
(+0.007)
+0.15
(+0.006)
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
+3
+0.18
(+0.007)
+0.15
(+0.006)
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
+2
+0.15
(+0.006)
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
+1
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
0
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-1
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-2
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-0.15
(-0.006)
-3
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-0.15
(-0.006)
-0.18
(-0.007)
-4
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-0.15
(-0.006)
-0.18
(-0.007)
-0.20
(-0.008)
Revision: October 2004
RFD-25
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
1.
2.
Make sure all parts are clean and that drive pinion bearings are
well lubricated.
Assemble drive pinion bearings into Tools.
Tool number
A:
B:
C:
—
—
—
(8144)
(6740)
(6741)
SDIA2242E
3.
Install drive pinion bearing inner race and drive pinion height
adjusting washer to axle housing using tool as shown.
PDIA0318E
4.
Turn the assembly several times to seat drive pinion bearings.
PDIA0319E
5.
Measure the turning torque, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Turning torque specification
: 1.2 - 2.8 N-m (0.13 - 0.28 kg-m, 11 - 24 in-lb)
PDIA0320E
6.
Tighten side bearing caps to the specified torque installing Tools
as shown.
Tool number
A:
B:
C:
D:
—
—
—
—
(6739)
(D-115-2)
TBD
(D-115-3)
SDIA2646E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-26
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
7.
8.
9.
Put scooter block on pinion height block. Make sure that dial
indicator is level adjusting pressure with a hand. Dial indicator
indicates “0”.
Slide dial indicator along arbor. Record the maximum.
Adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer so that the maximum
will be “0”.
A
B
C
SDIA2647E
RFD
ASSEMBLY
Drive Pinion Assembly
1.
Press a drive pinion rear bearing outer race into axle housing,
using Tools.
Tool number
A: ST01500001 (
B: ST30022000 (
E
— )
— )
F
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing.
G
PDIA0323E
2.
Press a drive pinion front bearing outer race into axle housing,
using Tool.
Tool number
3.
H
: ST33022000 (
—
I
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion front bearing.
Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to RFD-25,
"Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" .
J
K
PDIA0324E
4.
Tool number
5.
6.
7.
L
Press a drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion
height adjusting washer to drive pinion, using Tool.
:
—
(C - 4040)
M
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing.
Apply gear oil to drive pinon rear bearing and drive pinon front
bearing.
Install drive pinion front bearing inner race in axle housing.
Install front bearing thrust washer to axle housing.
SDIA2592E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-27
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
8.
Apply multi-purpose grease to front oil seal lip. Install front oil
seal into axle housing using Tool.
Tool number
: ST15310000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● When installing, do not incline oil seal.
●
PDIA0326E
9.
Install collapsible spacer to drive pinion. And then install drive
pinion assembly in axle housing.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse collapsible spacer.
● Be careful not to damage front oil seal.
SDIA2595E
10. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange.
SDIA2590E
11. Install companion flange onto drive pinion. Tap companion
flange with a soft hammer until fully seated.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage companion flange and front oil
seal.
PDIA0328E
12. Install drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer. Tighten drive
pinion nut until total preload is within specification.
● The threaded portion of drive pinion and drive pinion nut
should be free from oil or grease.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer.
PDIA0313E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-28
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
13. Tighten drive pinion nut by very small degrees until the specified
preload is achieved. When checking the preload, turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set the bearing rollers,
using Tool.
Tool number
A
B
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Pinion bearing preload
: 1.7 - 3.8 N·m (0.18 - 0.38 kg-m, 15 - 33 in-lb)
a.
This procedure will have to be repeated if:
Maximum preload is achieved before the minimum drive pinion nut torque is reached.
● Minimum preload is not achieved before maximum drive pinion nut torque is reached.
●
C
PDIA0309E
Differential Assembly
1.
2.
RFD
E
Assemble side gear thrust washers with the same thickness as
the ones installed prior to disassembly or reinstall the old ones
on side gears.
Assemble side gear and side gear thrust washer into differential
case.
F
G
H
SDIA0193J
3.
Align 2 pinion mate gears in diagonally opposite positions, then
rotate and assemble them into differential case after assembling
pinion mate thrust washer to pinion mate gear.
I
J
K
SDIA0036J
4.
5.
Align lock pin holes on differential case and shaft, and assemble
pinion mate shaft.
Measure side gear end play. If necessary, select the appropriate
side gear thrust washers. Refer to RFD-24, "Side Gear Thrust
Washer" .
M
SDIA0037J
Revision: October 2004
RFD-29
L
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
6.
Drive a lock pin into pinion mate shaft, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST23550000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse lock pin.
PDIA0062E
7.
Apply gear oil to gear tooth surfaces and thrust surfaces and
check to see they turn properly.
SPD322
8.
Align the matching mark of differential case with the mark of
drive gear, then install drive gear.
SDIA2593E
9.
Apply thread locking sealant into the thread hole of drive gear.
● Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Drive gear back and threaded holes shall be cleaned and
decreased sufficiently.
SDIA2594E
10. Install drive gear on the bolts, and then tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the bolts.
● Tighten bolts in a crisscross fashion.
SDIA0247J
Revision: October 2004
RFD-30
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
11. Press side bearing inner races to differential case using Tools.
Tool number
A
A: KV38100300 (J-25523)
B: ST33081000 ( — )
CAUTION:
Do not reuse side bearing.
B
C
SDIA2240E
RFD
12. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
E
F
G
PDIA0381E
13. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly
with side bearing outer races into axle housing.
H
I
J
PDIA0312E
14. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle
housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing.
CAUTION:
Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of
side bearing adjusters.
K
L
M
PDIA0329E
15. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(C - 4164)
16. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to RFD17, "Backlash" .
17. Check total preload. Refer to RFD-16, "Total Preload Torque" .
18. Check tooth contact. Refer to RFD-16, "Tooth Contact" .
PDIA0337E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-31
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
19. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
application and mounting surfaces.
20. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA2639E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-32
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
A
EDS001P1
Engine
VK56DE
Vehicle grade
Standard
Tow package or off road package
Transmission
5A/T
Final drive model
M226
Gear ratio
B
C
2.937
3.357
Number of pinion gears
2
Number of teeth (Drive gear / drive pinion)
Oil capacity (Approx.)
47/16
RFD
47/14
2.01 (4-1/4, 3-1/2)
(US pt, lmp pt)
Drive pinion adjustment spacer type
Collapsible
E
Inspection and Adjustment
EDS001P2
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Side gear backlash (Clearance between side gear
and differential case)
F
Standard
0.305 (0.0120) or less.
(Each gear should rotate smoothly without excessive resistance during differential motion.)
G
PRELOAD TORQUE
Unit: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
H
Specification
Item
Total preload (Drive pinion torque to rotate plus)
Gear ratio 2.937 Type
Gear ratio 3.357 type
2.49 - 5.27 (0.26 - 0.53, 22 - 46)
2.38 - 5.16 (0.25 - 0.52, 21 - 45)
Drive pinion bearing preload
I
1.7 - 3.8 (0.18 - 0.38, 15 - 33)
J
BACKLASH
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Standard
Drive gear to drive pinion gear
K
0.08 - 0.13 (0.0031 - 0.0051)
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Companion flange face
0.10 (0.0039) or less
Inner side of companion flange
0.13 (0.0051) or less
Revision: October 2004
L
Runout limit
RFD-33
M
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
SELECTIVE PARTS
Side Gear Thrust Washer
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Package part number*
0.76 (0.030)
0.79 (0.031)
0.81 (0.032)
0.84 (0.033)
0.86 (0.034)
38424 8S101
0.89 (0.035)
0.91 (0.036)
0.94 (0.037)
0.97 (0.038)
0.99 (0.039)
38424 8S102
*Always check with the parts department for the latest parts information.
Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Package part number*
0.076 (0.030)
0.079 (0.031)
0.081 (0.032)
0.084 (0.033)
0.086 (0.034)
38151 8S101
0.089 (0.035)
0.091 (0.036)
0.094 (0.037)
0.097 (0.038)
0.099 (0.039)
38151 8S102
0.102 (0.040)
0.104 (0.041)
0.107 (0.042)
0.109 (0.043)
0.112 (0.044)
38151 8S103
0.114 (0.045)
0.117 (0.046)
0.119 (0.047)
0.122 (0.048)
0.124 (0.049)
38151 8S104
0.127 (0.050)
0.130 (0.051)
0.132 (0.052)
0.135 (0.053)
0.137 (0.054)
38151 8S105
*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-34
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EDS001P3
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
RFD
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions
●
EDS001P4
Before connecting or disconnecting differential lock control
unit harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Because battery voltage is applied to differential lock control unit even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
H
I
J
SEF289H
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from differential lock control unit, take care not to damage
pin terminals (bend or break).
When connecting pin connectors make sure that there are
not any bends or breaks on differential lock control unit pin
terminal.
L
M
SEF291H
●
Before replacing differential lock control unit, perform differential lock control unit input/output signal inspection
and make sure whether differential lock control unit functions properly or not. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
SDIA1848E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-35
K
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Service Notice or Precaution
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EDS001P5
Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required,
be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied.
Overhaul should be done in a clean work area, it is preferable to work in dustproof area.
Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the exterior of
the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly.
Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them
with a new ones if necessary.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time when the unit is disassembled.
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, observe it.
Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them.
Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil,
and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces.
Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components.
Avoid using cotton gloves or shop rags to prevent entering of lint.
During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and apply new differential gear oil, petroleum
jelly, or multi-purpose grease as specified for each vehicle, if necessary.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EDS001P6
When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When performing trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Revision: October 2004
RFD-36
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS001P7
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV40104000
(
—
)
Flange wrench
a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
B
Removing and installing drive pinion nut
C
RFD
NT659
ST33290001
(J-34286)
Puller
E
Removing front oil seal
F
G
ZZA0601D
ST15310000
(
—
)
Drift
a: 96mm (3.77 in) dia.
b: 84 mm (3.30 in) dia.
Installing front oil seal
H
I
NT115
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge set
Inspecting drive pinion bearing preload
and total preload
1. GG91030000
(J-25765)
Torque wrench
K
2. HT62940000 (1/2″)
(
—
)
Socket adapter
L
NT124
3. HT62900000 (3/8″)
(
—
)
Socket adapter
—
(C - 4164)
Adjuster tool
Removing and installing side bearing adjuster
WDIA0192E
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing carrier cover
S-NT046
Revision: October 2004
J
RFD-37
2005 Titan
M
PREPARATION
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST30021000
(J-22912-01)
Puller
Removing drive pinion rear bearing inner
race
ZZA0700D
ST33081000
(
—
)
Adapter
a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia.
b: 33.5 mm (1.32 in) dia.
Removing and installing side bearing inner race
ZZA1000D
—
(8144)
Pinion block
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2599E
—
(6740)
Cone
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2601E
—
(6741)
Screw
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2602E
—
(6739)
Pinion height lock
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2603E
—
(D-115-2)
Scooter block
Adjusting pinion gear height
SDIA2604E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-38
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
TBD
Arbor disc
Adjusting pinion gear height
A
B
C
SDIA2605E
—
(D-115-3)
Arbor
Adjusting pinion gear height
RFD
E
SDIA2606E
ST01500001
(
—
)
Drift
a: 89mm (3.50 in) dia.
b: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer
race
F
G
H
ZZA0811D
ST30022000
(
—
)
Drift
a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer
race
I
J
NT660
ST33022000
(
—
)
Drift
a: 49 mm (1.92 in) dia.
b: 67 mm (2.63 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion front bearing outer
race
K
L
NT660
—
(C-4040)
Installer
Installing drive pinion rear bearing inner
race
SDIA2607E
KV38100300
(J-25523)
Drift
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
c: 32mm (1.26 in) dia.
Installing side bearing inner race
ZZA1046D
Revision: October 2004
RFD-39
2005 Titan
M
PREPARATION
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001P8
Tool name
Description
Puller
Removing companion flange and side
bearing inner race
NT077
Puller
Removing side bearing inner race
ZZB0823D
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-40
2005 Titan
×
Gear oil improper
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
×
TIRES
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
AXLE SHAFT
×
BRAKES
×
STEERING
RFD-86, "Companion Flange Runout"
MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil"
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
2005 Titan
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
×
Companion flange excessive runout
RFD-85, "Backlash"
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
×
Backlash incorrect
—
PFP:00003
×
Tooth surfaces worn
RFD-84, "Tooth Contact"
EDS001P9
×
Gear contact improper
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
RFD-41
—
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Reference page
Noise
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
×: Applicable
Revision: October 2004
Gear tooth rough
A
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
PFP:KLD30
EDS002HX
Refer to MA-27, "Changing Final Drive Oil" .
FILLING
Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
Checking Differential Gear Oil
EDS002HY
Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-42
2005 Titan
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View
PFP:28496
A
EDS001PC
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
SDIA2519E
1.
Companion flange
2.
Drive pinion
3.
Drive gear
4.
Differential case
5.
Pinion mate gear
6.
Axle shaft
7.
Side gear
8.
Spring
9.
Differential lock solenoid
10. Pinion mate shaft
11. Pressure plate
K
L
12. Differential lock position switch
13. Cam ring
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-43
2005 Titan
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Differential Lock Operation
EDS001PD
SDIA2498E
1.
2.
3.
Differential lock solenoid operates pressure plate.
Pressure plate presses cam ring.
Engage cam ring and side gear, and then differential is locked.
System Description
EDS001PE
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID
It is operated by signal from differential lock control unit, and it operates pressure plate so as to switch lock/
unlock.
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
It detects that differential is in lock or unlock by pressure plate position, and sends it to differential lock control
unit.
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
●
●
●
Differential lock control unit controls differential lock solenoid by input signals of each sensor and each
switch.
As a fail-safe function, differential lock disengages, if malfunction is detected in differential lock system.
Self-diagnosis can be done with CONSULT-II.
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH
Able to select differential lock and unlock.
DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP
The following is the indications of indicator lamp.
Condition
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp
Differential lock/unlock
ON/OFF
Differential lock standby condition
Differential lock system malfunction
Lamp check
Flashing: 1 time/2 seconds
OFF (Even if differential lock mode switch is turned ON)
Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON.
Turns OFF after engine start.
NOTE:
Differential lock standby condition is the condition that differential lock mode switch is ON and differential is unlocked.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-44
2005 Titan
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
System Diagram
EDS001PF
A
B
C
RFD
E
F
SDIA2500E
G
COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Component parts
Function
H
●
Controls differential lock solenoid and switches differential lock/unlock.
Differential lock control unit
●
As a fail-safe function, differential lock disengages, if malfunction is detected in differential lock
system.
Differential lock solenoid
Controls pressure plate by current from differential lock control unit.
Differential lock position switch
Detects that differential is lock or unlock condition.
Differential lock mode switch
Able to select differential lock or unlock.
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp
Illuminates that differential is in lock or lock standby condition.
I
J
Transmits the following signals via CAN communication to differential lock control unit.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
Transfer control unit
●
Vehicle speed signal
●
VDC operation signal
K
Transmits the following signal via CAN communication to differential lock control unit.
●
4WD shift switch signal
CAN Communication
L
EDS001PG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
M
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-45
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-safe Function
PFP:00004
EDS001PH
If any malfunction occurs in differential lock system, and control unit detects the malfunction, DIFF LOCK indicator lamp on combination meter does not turn ON to indicate system malfunction. Differential lock control unit
turns differential lock solenoid OFF.
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis
EDS001PI
BASIC CONCEPT
●
●
To perform trouble diagnosis, it is the most important to have understanding about vehicle systems (control and mechanism) thoroughly.
It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection.
First of all, reproduce symptoms, and understand them fully.
Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some cases,
it will be necessary to check symptoms by driving vehicle with
customer.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. It is dangerous to make an
easy guess like "maybe the customer means that...," or
"maybe the customer mentions this symptom".
SEF233G
●
●
●
It is essential to check symptoms right from the beginning in
order to repair malfunctions completely.
For intermittent malfunctions, reproduce symptoms based on
interview with customer and past examples. Do not perform
inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent malfunctions are
caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be effective to shake
suspected harness or connector by hand. When repairing without any symptom diagnosis, you cannot judge if malfunctions
have actually been eliminated.
After completing diagnosis, always erase diagnostic memory.
Refer to RFD-54, "How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results" .
For intermittent malfunctions, move harness or harness connector by hand. Then check for poor contact or reproduced open circuit.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-46
SEF234G
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Location of Electrical Parts
EDS001PJ
A
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BDIA0015E
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-47
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Wiring Diagram — DIFLOC —
EDS001PK
BDWA0052E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-48
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
A
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BDWA0053E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-49
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms
EDS001PL
If DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not turn ON after engine start, perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS
MODE" .
Reference
Symptom
Condition
Check item
page
CAN communication line
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not turn ON.
(DIFF LOCK indicator lamp check)
Ignition switch: ON
Power supply and ground for differential
lock control unit
RFD-72
Combination meter
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not change.
●
Engine running
Combination meter
●
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
Differential lock mode switch
RFD-75
CAN communication line
Combination meter
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp sometimes flashes.
●
Engine running
●
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
Differential lock mode switch
Differential lock position switch
RFD-76
Differential inner parts
Differential Lock Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values
EDS001PM
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Specifications with CONSULT-II
Monitor item [Unit]
Content
Condition
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Power supply voltage for
differential lock control unit
Ignition switch: ON
4WD MODE [2H/4H/
4Lo]
Condition of 4WD shift
switch
4WD shift switch
(Engine running)
Battery voltage
2WD
2H
4H
4H
4LO
Vehicle stopped
VHCL S/SEN-R [km/h]
or [mph]
Wheel speed (Rear wheel
right)
Wheel speed (Rear wheel
left)
Vehicle running
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under standard condition.
Wheel speed (Average
value of rear wheel right
and left)
D-LOCK SW SIG [ON/
OFF]
Condition of differential
lock mode switch
D-LOCK SIG [ON/OFF]
Revision: October 2004
Control status of differential lock
Approximately
equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of
±10%)
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under standard condition.
Vehicle stopped
VHCL S/SEN-RL [km/h]
or [mph]
4Lo
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle stopped
VHCL S/SEN-L [km/h] or
[mph]
Display value
Approximately
equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of
±10%)
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under standard condition.
Approximately
equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of
±10%)
Differential lock mode switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
OFF
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
RFD-50
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Monitor item [Unit]
RELAY ON [ON/OFF]
RELAY MTR [ON/OFF]
SOL MTR [ON/OFF]
IND MTR [ON/OFF]
D-LOCK POS SW [ON/
OFF]
Content
Condition
Operating condition of differential lock solenoid
relay (integrated in differential lock control unit)
Control status of differential lock solenoid relay
(integrated in differential
lock control unit)
Control status of differential lock solenoid
Control status of DIFF
LOCK indicator lamp
Condition of differential
lock position switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Display value
A
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
C
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON
ON
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF
OFF
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
B
RFD
E
F
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: ON)
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: OFF)
OFF
G
H
Specifications Between Differential Lock Control Unit Terminals
I
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT
J
K
L
SDIA2573E
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
1
2
L
L
Power supply
Power supply
M
Data (Approx.)
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
3
B
Ground
Always
4
P
CAN-L
–
–
5
L
CAN-H
–
–
9
G
Differential lock mode switch
(ON)
10
B
Ignition switch: ON
Ground
Revision: October 2004
RFD-51
0V
Differential lock mode switch: ON
Battery voltage
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
0V
Always
0V
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Terminal
11
Wire
color
V
12
13
15
20
Y
G/W
Y/R
W/R
Item
Condition
Differential lock solenoid (-)
Differential lock solenoid (+)
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Differential lock mode switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Battery voltage
Differential lock mode switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Battery voltage
K-LINE (CONSULT-II signal)
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Differential lock position
switch
Data (Approx.)
–
–
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
Battery voltage
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
21
L
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp
Ignition switch: ON
22
O
Differential lock mode switch
(OFF)
Ignition switch: ON
Differential lock mode switch: ON
(DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON)
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
(DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF)
Battery voltage
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON
0V
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF
Battery voltage
Differential lock mode switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
CONSULT-II Function (DIFF LOCK)
EDS001PN
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DIFF LOCK
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Reference
page
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
●
Displays diff lock self-diagnostic results.
RFD-53
DATA MONITOR
●
Displays diff lock input/output data in the time.
RFD-55
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
●
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
—
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
●
For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector on vehicle.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
BDIA0013E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-52
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
A
B
C
BCIA0029E
RFD
5.
6.
Touch “DIFF LOCK”.
If “DIFF LOCK” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
E
F
G
BCIA0030E
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
H
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to RFD-52, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
With engine at idle, touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
NOTE:
● The details for “TIME” are as follow:
– “0”: Error currently detected with differential lock control
unit.
– Except for “0”: Error detected in the past and memorized
with differential lock control unit.
Detects frequency of driving after DTC occurs (frequency
SDIA2547E
of turning ignition switch “ON/OFF”).
I
J
K
L
Display Item List
M
Items (CONSULT-II screen
terms)
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Check item
*INITIAL START*
[P1833]
●
Due to removal of battery which cuts off power supply to differential control unit, self-diagnosis memory function is suspended.
RFD-56, "Power Supply Circuit
For Differential Lock Control
Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 1
[P1834]
●
Malfunction is detected in the memory (RAM) system of differential lock control unit.
RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 2
[P1835]
●
Malfunction is detected in the memory (ROM) system of differential lock control unit.
RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 3
[P1836]
●
Malfunction is detected in the memory (EEPROM) system of differential lock control unit.
RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 4
[P1837]
●
AD converter system of differential lock control unit is malfunctioning.
RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit"
ON SW
[P1838]
●
More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected due to
short circuit of differential lock mode switch.
RFD-58, "Differential Lock Mode
Switch"
Revision: October 2004
RFD-53
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Items (CONSULT-II screen
terms)
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Check item
POSI SW ON
[P1839]
●
When differential lock position switch is ON, rotation difference
occurs in wheel speed (rear wheel right and left).
RFD-62, "Differential Lock Position Switch"
RELAY
[P1844]
●
Differential lock control unit detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
RFD-65, "Differential Lock Solenoid Relay", RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid"
SOL CIRCUIT
[P1847]
●
Malfunction is detected in differential lock control unit internal circuit.
RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid"
SOL DISCONNECT
[P1848]
●
Differential lock solenoid internal circuit or harness is open.
●
Differential lock solenoid relay does not switch to ON position.
RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid"
SOL SHORT
[P1849]
●
Differential lock solenoid internal circuit or harness is shorted.
RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid"
SOL CURRENT
[P1850]
●
Differential lock solenoid relay does not switch to OFF position.
RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid"
●
Malfunction related to wheel sensor has been detected by ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit).
RFD-70, "ABS System"
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
●
Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication line.
RFD-71, "CAN Communication
Line"
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY
BE REQUIRED.
●
No NG item has been detected.
ABS SYSTEM
[C1203]
—
CAUTION:
If “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication
line.
How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results
1.
2.
3.
Perform applicably inspection of malfunctioning item and then repair or replace.
Start engine and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II screen to erase DTC memory.
CAUTION:
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicably diagnosis.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-54
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DATA MONITOR MODE
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
A
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to RFD-52, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
Select from “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”, screen of data monitor mode is displayed.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
Display Item List
×: Standard
–: Not applicable
B
C
RFD
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor item (Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
BATTERY VOLT [V]
×
×
×
Power supply voltage for differential lock
control unit.
4WD MODE [2H/4H/4Lo]
×
×
×
4WD shift switch signal status via CAN
communication line is displayed.
VHCL S/SEN-R [km/h] or [mph]
×
–
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear wheel
sensor right signal is displayed.
VHCL S/SEN-L [km/h] or [mph]
×
–
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear wheel
sensor left signal is displayed.
×
Average value between wheel speed calculated by rear wheel sensor right signal
and rear wheel sensor left signal is displayed.
VHCL S/SEN-RL [km/h] or [mph]
×
×
E
D-LOCK SW SIG [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Condition of differential lock mode switch
is displayed.
D-LOCK SIG [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Control status of differential lock is displayed.
RELAY ON [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Operating condition of differential lock
solenoid relay is displayed (integrated in
differential lock control unit).
RELAY MTR [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Control status of differential lock solenoid
relay is displayed (integrated in differential
lock control unit).
SOL MTR [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Control status of differential lock solenoid
is displayed.
IND MTR [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Control status of DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp is displayed.
D-LOCK POS SW [ON/OFF]
×
×
×
Condition of differential lock position switch
is displayed.
Voltage [V]
–
–
×
The value measured by the voltage probe
is displayed.
Frequency [Hz]
–
–
×
DUTY-HI (high) [%]
–
–
×
DUTY-LOW (low) [%]
–
–
×
PLS WIDTH-HI [msec]
–
–
×
PLS WIDTH-LOW [msec]
–
–
×
Revision: October 2004
RFD-55
The value measured by the pulse probe is
displayed.
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Power Supply Circuit For Differential Lock Control Unit
PFP:00000
EDS001PO
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitor item [Unit]
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Content
Condition
Power supply voltage for
differential lock control unit
Ignition switch: ON
Display value
Battery voltage
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
1
L
Power supply
2
L
Power supply
Data (Approx.)
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
3
B
Ground
Always
0V
10
B
Ground
Always
0V
15
Y/R
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-56
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminals and ground.
B
C
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
1 (L) - Ground
0V
2 (L) - Ground
0V
15 (Y/R) - Ground
Battery voltage
B77
RFD
E
SDIA2562E
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminals and ground.
G
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
1 (L) - Ground
B77
2 (L) - Ground
H
Battery voltage
15 (Y/R) - Ground
OK or NG
SDIA2563E
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
● 10A fuse [No. 15 or 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for short or open between battery and differential lock control unit harness connector
terminal 15
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and differential lock control unit harness connector terminals 1 and 2
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
I
J
K
L
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 3 (B), 10 (B) and ground.
M
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SDIA2564E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-57
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT"
.
Differential Lock Control Unit
EDS001PP
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Is the “CONTROL UNIT 1 [P1834]”, “CONTROL UNIT 2 [P1835]”, “CONTROL UNIT 3 [P1836]” or “CONTROL
UNIT 4 [P1837]” displayed?
YES >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT"
.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Differential Lock Mode Switch
EDS001PQ
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitor item
D-LOCK SW SIG [ON/
OFF]
Content
Condition of differential
lock mode switch
Condition
Display value
Differential lock mode switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
OFF
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
9
G
Differential lock mode switch
(ON)
Ignition switch: ON
22
O
Differential lock mode switch
(OFF)
Ignition switch: ON
Data (Approx.)
Differential lock mode switch: ON
Battery voltage
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
0V
Differential lock mode switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-58
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “D-LOCK SW SIG”.
Monitor item
D-LOCK SW SIG
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
C
Display
value
Condition
●
B
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
RFD
E
SDIA2540E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminals and ground.
Connector
G
H
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
9 (G) Ground
Ignition switch: ON
B77
F
22 (O) Ground
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
Battery
voltage
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
0V
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
Battery
voltage
I
J
SDIA2568E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-59
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Disconnect differential lock mode switch harness connector.
Check voltage between differential lock mode switch harness
connector terminal 3 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M149
3 (R/B) - Ground
Battery voltage
SDIA2534E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between differential lock mode switch harness
connector terminal 3 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M149
3 (R/B) - Ground
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
SDIA2643E
● 10A fuse [No. 15, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and differential lock mode switch harness
connector terminals 3
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock mode switch harness connector.
Operate differential lock mode switch and check continuity
between differential lock mode switch terminals.
Connector
Terminal
1-3
M149
2-3
Condition
Continuity
Differential lock mode switch: ON
No
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Yes
Differential lock mode switch: ON
Yes
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace differential lock mode switch.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-60
SDIA2535E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
MODE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
–
–
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and differential lock mode switch harness con- B
nector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
C
Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 9
(G) and differential lock mode switch harness connector M149
terminal 2 (G).
Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 22
RFD
(O) and differential lock mode switch harness connector M149
terminal 1 (O).
Continuity should exist.
E
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SDIA2569E
F
5. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
G
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
H
I
J
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT"
.
K
COMPONENT INSPECTION
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock mode switch harness connector.
Operate differential lock mode switch and check continuity
between differential lock mode switch terminals.
Connector
Terminal
1-3
M149
2-3
4.
Condition
Continuity
Differential lock mode switch: ON
No
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Yes
Differential lock mode switch: ON
Yes
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
No
If NG, replace differential lock mode switch.
SDIA2535E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-61
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Differential Lock Position Switch
EDS001PR
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitor item
D-LOCK POS SW [ON/
OFF]
Content
Condition
Condition of differential
lock position switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Display value
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: ON)
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: OFF)
OFF
DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
20
W/R
Differential lock position
switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF
switch: ON
●
4WD shift
switch: 4LO
Data (Approx.)
Differential lock mode switch: ON
(DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON)
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
(DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF)
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-62
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “D-LOCK POS SW SIG”.
Monitor item
D-LOCK POS
SW SIG
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF
switch: ON
●
4WD shift
switch: 4LO
C
Display
value
Condition
●
B
RFD
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: ON)
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: OFF)
OFF
E
SDIA2538E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminal and ground.
F
G
H
Connector
B77
Terminal
(Wire
color)
20 (W/R)
- Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch:
ON
●
4WD shift switch:
4LO
I
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: ON)
0V
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
(DIFF LOCK indicator
lamp: OFF)
Battery
voltage
J
SDIA2570E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock position switch harness connector.
Check continuity between differential lock position switch harness connector C16 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SDIA2644E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-63
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock position switch harness connector.
Remove differential lock position switch. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
Pull differential lock position switch and check continuity
between differential lock position switch harness connector terminals.
Connector
Terminal
C16
1-3
Condition
Continuity
Pull differential position switch
Yes
Release Differential position
switch
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace differential lock position switch.
SDIA2537E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
POSITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and differential lock position switch harness
connector.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminal 20 (W/R) and differential lock position
switch harness connector C16 terminal 1 (W/R).
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SDIA2645E
5. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT"
.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-64
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock position switch harness connector.
Remove differential lock position switch. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
Pull differential lock position switch and check continuity
between differential lock position switch harness connector terminals.
B
C
Connector
Terminal
C16
5.
1-3
Condition
Continuity
Pull differential position switch
Yes
Release Differential position
switch
No
RFD
If NG, replace differential lock position switch.
E
SDIA2537E
Differential Lock Solenoid Relay
EDS001PS
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitor item
Content
Operating condition of differential lock solenoid
relay (integrated in differential lock control unit)
RELAY ON [ON/OFF]
F
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Display value
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
G
H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID SYSTEM
I
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Is “RELAY [P1844]” displayed?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock solenoid. Refer to RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID RELAY SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “RELAY ON”.
Monitor item
RELAY ON
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF
switch: ON
●
4WD shift
switch: 4LO
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
M
SDIA2642E
RFD-65
K
L
Display
value
Condition
J
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any item is damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT"
.
Differential Lock Solenoid
EDS001PT
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitor item
RELAY ON [ON/OFF]
RELAY MTR [ON/OFF]
SOL MTR [ON/OFF]
Content
Condition
Operating condition of differential lock solenoid
relay (integrated in differential lock control unit)
Control status of differential lock solenoid relay
(integrated in differential
lock control unit)
Control status of differential lock solenoid
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Display value
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
11
12
V
Y
Differential lock solenoid (-)
Differential lock solenoid (+)
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF
switch: ON
●
4WD shift
switch: 4LO
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF
switch: ON
●
4WD shift
switch: 4LO
Data (Approx.)
Differential lock mode switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Battery voltage
Differential lock mode switch: ON
0V
Differential lock mode switch: OFF
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-66
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “RELAY ON”, “RELAY
MTR”, “SOL MTR”.
Monitor item
RELAY MTR
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF
switch: ON
●
4WD shift
switch: 4LO
SOL MTR
C
Display
value
Condition
RELAY ON
B
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
Differential lock mode
switch: ON
ON
Differential lock mode
switch: OFF
OFF
RFD
E
SDIA2539E
G
H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminal and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
B77
12 (Y) Ground
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
VDC OFF switch: ON
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
I
Data
(Approx.)
J
Differential
lock mode
switch: ON
0V
K
Differential
lock mode
switch: OFF
Battery
voltage
Differential
lock mode
switch: ON
0V
Differential
lock mode
switch: OFF
Battery
voltage
Condition
11 (V) Ground
SDIA2565E
RFD-67
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
F
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector.
Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminals 11 and 12.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Resistance (Approx.)
B77
11 (V) - 12 (Y)
3.4 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SDIA2566E
3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock solenoid harness connector.
Check resistance between differential lock solenoid harness
connector C17 terminals 2 and 4.
2-4
: Approx. 3.4Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace differential solenoid. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" .
SDIA2531E
4. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock solenoid harness connector.
Check operation by applying battery voltage to differential lock
solenoid harness connector terminals.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
Connector
Terminal
C17
4 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground)
Does solenoid operate?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace differential solenoid. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-68
SDIA2634E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
SOLENOID
1.
2.
3.
–
–
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and differential lock solenoid harness connec- B
tor.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
C
Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 11
(V) and differential lock solenoid harness connector C17 terminal 2 (V).
Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 12
RFD
(Y) and differential lock solenoid harness connector C17 terminal 4 (Y).
11 (V) - 2 (V)
12 (Y) - 4 (Y)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
SDIA2567E
F
G
6. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
H
7. CHECK DTC
J
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT"
.
I
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-69
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock solenoid harness connector.
Check resistance between differential lock solenoid harness
connector C17 terminal 2 and 4.
2-4
4.
: Approx. 3.4Ω
If NG, replace differential lock solenoid. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" .
SDIA2531E
5.
6.
Check operation by applying battery voltage to differential lock
solenoid harness connector terminals.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
Connector
Terminal
C17
4 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground)
If NG, replace differential lock solenoid.
SDIA2634E
ABS System
EDS001PU
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) again. Refer to BRC-24,
"SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-70
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
CAN Communication Line
EDS001PV
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with in CONSULT-II.
3. Perform the self-diagnosis.
Is the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” displayed?
YES >> Go to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
C
RFD
E
F
SDIA1850E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-71
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON
PFP:00007
EDS001PW
SYMPTOM:
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not turn ON for approx. 1 second when turning ignition switch to
“ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SYSTEM FOR CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. Refer to RFD-71, "CAN Communication
Line"
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
1 (L) - Ground
0V
B77
2 (L) - Ground
0V
15 (Y/R) - Ground
Battery voltage
SDIA2562E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness
connector terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
1 (L) - Ground
B77
2 (L) - Ground
Battery voltage
15 (Y/R) - Ground
OK or NG
SDIA2563E
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
● 10A fuse [No. 15 or 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for short or open between battery and differential lock control unit harness connector
terminal 15
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and differential lock control unit harness connector terminals 1 and 2
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-72
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminals 3 (B), 10 (B) and ground.
B
Continuity should exist.
C
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
RFD
SDIA2564E
E
4. CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminal and ground
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M24
24 (O/L) - Ground
0V
G
H
I
PDIA0228E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M24
24 (O/L) - Ground
0V
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
SDIA2396E
● 10A fuse [No.14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and combination meter harness connector
terminal 24
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-73
J
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness
connector B77 terminal 21 (L) and combination meter harness
connector M24 terminal 14 (L)
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SDIA2572E
6. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check combination meter. Refer to DI-8, "Combination Meter" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" .
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-74
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Change
EDS001PX
SYMPTOM:
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not change when turning differential lock mode switch to “ON” after
engine start.
A
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP
C
Confirm DIFF LOCK indicator lamp when ignition switch is turned to ON.
Does DIFF LOCK indicator lamp turn on?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to RFD-72, "DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON" .
RFD
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
F
3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH
G
Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock mode switch system. Refer to RFD-58, "Differential Lock Mode
Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
I
4. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check combination meter. Refer to DI-8, "Combination Meter" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" .
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
K
L
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
M
6. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
J
RFD-75
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Sometimes Flashes
EDS001PY
SYMPTOM:
DIFF LOCK indicator lamp sometimes flashes when it turns ON or OFF during driving.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP
Confirm DIFF LOCK indicator lamp when ignition switch is turned to ON.
Does DIFF LOCK indicator lamp turn on?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to RFD-72, "DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH
Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock mode switch system. Refer to RFD-58, "Differential Lock Mode
Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SWITCH
Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock position switch system. Refer to RFD-62, "Differential Lock Position Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/
Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-76
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
7. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL INNER PARTS
A
1. Disassemble rear final drive assembly. Refer to RFD-83, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
2. Check differential inner parts.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-77
2005 Titan
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:28496
EDS001PZ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Remove jack and tools.
Remove both rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear lower finisher LH. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" .
Remove rear upper finisher LH. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" .
Remove seatback latch striker LH. Refer to SE-101, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to SB-8, "Removal and
Installation of Rear Seat Belt" .
8. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" .
9. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to
disconnect connector.
10. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
LDIA0156E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts
Revision: October 2004
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
RFD-78
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:38189
A
EDS001Q0
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
B
Remove wheel and tire assemblies.
Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc
Rotor" .
C
Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times.
Record the rotating torque.
Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using
RFD
Tool.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
)
E
F
LDIA0122E
7.
Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark
should be in line with the mark on companion flange.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
G
H
I
J
SDIA2590E
8.
K
Remove companion flange using a suitable tool.
L
M
LDIA0123E
9.
Remove front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
LDIA0124E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-79
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install front oil seal
into axle housing using Tool.
Tool number
: ST15310000 (
— )
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● When installing, do not incline oil seal.
●
LDIA0125E
2.
Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install companion flange.
SDIA2590E
3.
4.
Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinon
gear and tighten nut until there is zero bearing end play.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer.
Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and
flange wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading
recorded in step 5 above during removal plus an additional 0.56
N·m (5 in-lb).
Tool number
5.
6.
7.
8.
: KV40104000 (
—
)
LDIA0122E
If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in
6.8 N·m (5 ft-lb) increments until proper rotating torque is
achieved. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and do not
exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible
spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the
required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible spacer.
Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required. Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive
Oil" .
Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of
Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-80
2005 Titan
CARRIER COVER
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
CARRIER COVER
Removal and Installation
PFP:38351
A
EDS001Q1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" .
Remove carrier cover.
● Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover.
● Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover.
B
C
RFD
E
LDIA0126E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
application and mounting surfaces.
Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA2639E
Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover.
Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-81
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:38300
EDS001Q2
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
●
Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do
so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" .
2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
● Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove axle shaft. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Support rear final drive using a suitable jack.
5. Disconnect the following components from rear final drive.
● Brake tube block connectors. Refer to BR-13, "Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and
Brake Hose" .
● ABS sensor wire harness. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" .
● Parking brake cable.
● Brake tube.
LDIA0126E
●
●
Differential lock position switch harness connector.
Differential lock solenoid harness connector.
LDIA0158E
6.
7.
8.
9.
Disconnect brake hose from brake tube at the mounting clip on top of axle housing. Then remove the
metal clip to disconnect brake line from the mounting clip on top of axle housing.
Remove rear shock absorber lower bolts. Refer to RSU-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove leaf spring U-bolt nuts. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear final drive assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" .
●
Bleed the air from brake system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Revision: October 2004
RFD-82
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001Q3
A
COMPONENTS
B
C
RFD
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WDIA0113E
1.
Drive pinion nut
2.
Drive pinion nut washer
3.
Companion flange
4.
Front oil seal
5.
Front bearing thrust washer
6.
Drive pinion front bearing
7.
Axle housing
8.
Differential lock position switch
9.
Breather
10. Sensor connector
11. Drain plug
12. Axle shaft assembly
13. Side bearing cap
14. Adjuster lock plate
15. Carrier cover
16. Filler plug
17. Drive pinion
18. Drive pinion height adjusting washer
19. Drive pinion rear bearing
20. Collapsible spacer
21. Side bearing adjuster
22. Side bearing
23. Differential case assembly
24. Drive gear
25. Differential lock solenoid
26. Solenoid washer
Revision: October 2004
RFD-83
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Total Preload Torque
1.
2.
Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing
rollers.
Check total preload using preload gauge set.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Total preload (with oil seal)
2.38 - 5.16 N·m (0.25 - 0.52 kg-m, 21 - 45 in-lb)
NOTE:
Total preload torque = Pinion bearing torque + Side bearing
torque
● If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble it to
check and adjust each part. Adjust the pinion bearing preload and the side bearing preload.
Adjust the pinion bearing preload first, then adjust the side bearing preload.
PDIA0309E
When the preload torque is large
On pinion bearings: Replace collapsible spacer.
On side bearings:
Loosen side bearing adjuster.
When the preload is small
On pinion bearings: Tighten drive pinion nut.
On side bearings:
Tighten side bearing adjuster.
Tooth Contact
Checking gear tooth contact pattern is necessary to verify correct relationship between drive gear and drive
pinion. Gears which are not positioned in proper arrangement may be noisy and/or have a short life. Check
gear tooth contact pattern to obtain the best contact for low noise and long life.
1. Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-87, "DISASSEMBLY" .
2. Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth.
3. Apply red lead to drive gear.
CAUTION:
Apply red lead to both the faces of 3 to 4 gears at 4 locations evenly spaced on drive gear.
SDIA2623E
4.
Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate drive gear in
both directions.
PDIA0322E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-84
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
A
B
C
RFD
E
F
SDIA2591E
5.
If outside the standard, adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer and backlash. Refer to RFD-92, "Drive
Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" , RFD-85, "Backlash" .
G
Backlash
1.
2.
Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-87, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check drive gear to drive pinion backlash using a dial indicator
at several points.
H
I
Drive gear to drive pinion backlash
: 0.08 - 0.13 mm (0.0031 - 0.0051 in)
3.
a.
b.
c.
If outside the standard, adjust side bearing adjuster.
CAUTION:
Check tooth contact and total preload after adjusting side
bearing adjuster. Refer to RFD-84, "Total Preload Torque" ,
RFD-84, "Tooth Contact" .
Remove adjuster lock plate.
Loosen side bearing cap bolts.
Tighten or loosen each side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
J
K
SDIA2640E
L
(C - 4164)
M
PDIA0337E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-85
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
d.
In case of lots of backlash, loosen side bearing adjuster A and
tighten side bearing adjuster B. In case of less backlash, loosen
side bearing adjuster B and tighten side bearing adjuster A.
PDIA0330E
e.
f.
After adjusting backlash and tighten cap bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
Install adjuster lock plate and tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Install adjuster lock plate to grooving of differential lock
solenoid.
SDIA2582E
Companion Flange Runout
1.
2.
Fit a dial indicator onto companion flange face (inner side of propeller shaft mounting bolt holes).
Rotate companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
3.
4.
Fit a test indicator to the inner side of companion flange (socket
diameter).
Rotate companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
5.
a.
b.
c.
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) or less
: 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) or less
SDIA2078E
If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure
below to adjust.
Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion by 90° step, and
search for the point where the runout is the minimum.
If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace companion flange.
If the runout value still outside of the limit after companion flange has been replaced, check drive pinion
bearing and drive pinion assembly.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-86
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
DISASSEMBLY
Differential Assembly
1.
2.
A
Remove carrier cover bolts.
Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number
B
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
● Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the
mating surface.
C
RFD
SDIA2581E
3.
E
Remove differential sensor connector bolts and differential lock
solenoid connector.
F
G
H
SDIA2585E
4.
5.
For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on one side of
side bearing cap.
CAUTION:
● Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The
matching marks are used to reinstall them in their original positions.
● For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
Remove adjuster lock plates.
I
J
K
SDIA2583E
6.
L
Remove side bearing caps.
M
SDIA2587E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-87
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
7.
Remove side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(C - 4164)
PDIA0337E
8.
9.
Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not
mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with
bearing.
Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing.
SDIA2588E
10. Remove bracket of differential lock position switch connector and bolts.
11. Remove differential lock position switch.
12. Remove side bearing inner race and washer using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33081000 (
— )
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage differential case assembly and
differential lock solenoid.
13. Remove differential lock solenoid and solenoid washer.
SDIA2584E
14. Remove side bearing inner race using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33081000 (
— )
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage differential case assembly.
SDIA2589E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-88
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
15. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on differential
case assembly and drive gear.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage differential
case and drive gear.
16. Remove drive gear mounting bolts.
17. Tap drive gear off differential case assembly with a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Tap evenly all around to keep drive gear from binding.
A
B
C
SDIA2238E
RFD
Drive Pinion Assembly
1.
2.
Remove differential case assembly. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" .
Remove drive pinion nut and washer using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
E
)
F
G
PDIA0314E
3.
Put a matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The
mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
H
I
J
K
SDIA2590E
4.
Remove companion flange using a suitable tool.
L
M
PDIA0315E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-89
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
5.
Remove front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
6.
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
Remove front bearing thrust washer.
SDIA2586E
7.
8.
Remove drive pinion assembly and collapsible spacer from axle
housing, using suitable press.
CAUTION:
Do not drop drive pinion assembly.
Remove drive pinion front bearing inner race from axle housing.
PDIA0316E
9.
Tap drive pinion front bearing outer race uniformly with a brass
bar or equivalent to remove.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
10. Tap drive pinion rear bearing outer race uniformly with a brass
bar or equivalent for removal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage axle housing.
SDIA2641E
11. Remove drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion
height adjusting washer, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST30021000 (J-22912-01)
SDIA2236E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-90
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Drive Gear and Drive Pinion
●
●
●
A
If the gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine the cause and adjust, repair, or replace as
necessary.
If the gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new gears.
Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both drive pinion and
drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each pinion
gear and drive gear before proceeding with assembly.
B
C
Bearing
●
●
If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or unusual noise from the bearing,
RFD
replace with new bearing assembly (as a new set).
Bearing must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled.
Differential Case Assembly
●
●
E
If the gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new differential case assembly.
If the movement is not smooth when pushing cam ring of differential case assembly with a hand.
F
Differential Lock Solenoid
●
If the operating part of differential lock solenoid is not smooth, perform component inspection. Refer to
RFD-70, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-91
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS
Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer
●
Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only.
Matching numbers on both drive pinion and drive gear are
etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the
numbers of each drive pinion and drive gear before proceeding
with assembly.
SDIA2241E
●
●
●
The mounting distance from the center line of drive gear to the back face of drive pinion for the Model 226
axle assembly is 109.5 mm (4.312 in).
On the button end of each drive pinion, there is etched a plus (+) number, a minus (-) number, or a zero
(0), which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This dimension is controlled by
a selective drive pinion height adjusting washer between drive pinion inner bearing race and drive pinion.
For example: If a drive pinion is etched m+8 (+3), it would require 0.08 mm (0.003 in) less drive pinion
height adjusting washer than a drive pinion etched “0”. This means decreasing drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness; increases the mounting distance of drive pinion to 109.6 mm (4.315 in). If a drive
pinion is etched m-8 (-3), it would require adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in) more to drive pinion height adjusting
washer than would be required if drive pinion were etched “0”. By adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in), the mounting distance of drive pinion was decreased to 109.4 mm (4.309 in) which is just what m-8 (a-3) etching
indicated.
To change drive pinion adjustment, use different drive pinion height adjusting washers which come in different thickness.
Use the following tables as a guide for selecting the correct drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness
to add or subtract from the old drive pinion height adjusting washer.
OLD DRIVE
PINION
MARKING
NEW DRIVE PINION MARKING mm (in)
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+4
+0.20
(+0.008)
+0.18
(+0.007)
+0.15
(+0.006)
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
+3
+0.18
(+0.007)
+0.15
(+0.006)
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
+2
+0.15
(+0.006)
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
+1
+0.13
(+0.005)
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
0
+0.10
(+0.004)
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-1
+0.08
(+0.003)
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-2
+0.05
(+0.002)
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-0.15
(-0.006)
-3
+0.02
(+0.001)
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-0.15
(-0.006)
-0.18
(-0.007)
-4
0
(0)
-0.02
(-0.001)
-0.05
(-0.002)
-0.08
(-0.003)
-0.10
(-0.004)
-0.13
(-0.005)
-0.15
(-0.006)
-0.18
(-0.007)
-0.20
(-0.008)
Revision: October 2004
RFD-92
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
1.
2.
Make sure all parts are clean and that drive pinion bearings are
well lubricated.
Assemble drive pinion bearings into the tools.
Tool number
A:
B:
C:
—
—
—
A
(8144)
(6740)
(6741)
B
C
SDIA2242E
3.
RFD
Install drive pinion bearing inner race and drive pinion height
adjusting washer to axle housing using tool as shown.
E
F
G
PDIA0318E
4.
Turn the assembly several times to seat drive pinion bearings.
H
I
J
PDIA0319E
5.
K
Measure the turning torque, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
L
Turning torque specification
: 1.2 - 2.8 N-m (0.13 - 0.28 kg-m, 11 - 24 in-lb)
M
PDIA0320E
6.
Tighten side bearing caps to the specified torque installing tools
as shown.
Tool number
A:
B:
C:
D:
—
—
—
—
(6739)
(D-115-2)
TBD
(D-115-3)
SDIA2646E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-93
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
7.
8.
9.
Put scooter block on pinion height block. Make sure that dial
indicator is level adjusting pressure with a hand. Dial indicator
indicates “0”.
Slide dial indicator along arbor. Record the maximum.
Adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer so that the maximum
will be “0”.
SDIA2647E
ASSEMBLY
Drive Pinion Assembly
1.
Press a drive pinion rear bearing outer race into axle housing,
using Tool.
Tool number
A: ST01500001 ( — )
B: ST30022000 ( — )
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing.
PDIA0323E
2.
Press a drive pinion front bearing outer race into axle housing,
using Tool.
Tool number
3.
: ST33022000 (
— )
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion front bearing.
Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to RFD-92,
"Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" .
PDIA0324E
4.
Press a drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion
height adjusting washer to drive pinion, using Tool.
Tool number
5.
6.
7.
:
—
(C - 4040)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing.
Apply gear oil to drive pinon rear bearing and drive pinon front
bearing.
Install drive pinion front bearing inner race in axle housing.
Install front bearing thrust washer to axle housing.
SDIA2592E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-94
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
8.
Apply multi-purpose grease to front oil seal lip. Install front oil
seal into axle housing using Tool.
Tool number
: ST15310000 (
—
A
)
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.
● When installing, do not incline oil seal.
B
C
PDIA0326E
RFD
9.
Install collapsible spacer to drive pinion. And then install drive
pinion assembly in axle housing.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse collapsible spacer.
● Be careful not to damage front oil seal.
E
F
G
SDIA2595E
10. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange.
H
I
J
SDIA2590E
11. Install companion flange onto drive pinion. Tap companion
flange with a soft hammer until fully seated.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage companion flange and front oil
seal.
K
L
M
PDIA0328E
12. Install drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer. Tighten drive
pinion nut until total preload is within specification.
● The threaded portion of drive pinion and drive pinion nut
should be free from oil or grease.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer.
PDIA0313E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-95
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
13. Tighten drive pinion nut by very small degrees until the specified
preload is achieved. When checking the preload, turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set the bearing rollers,
using Tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Pinion bearing preload:
1.7 - 3.8 N·m (0.18 - 0.38 kg-m, 15 - 33 in-lb)
a.
This procedure will have to be repeated if:
Maximum preload is achieved before the minimum drive pinion nut torque is reached.
● Minimum preload is not achieved before maximum drive pinion nut torque is reached.
●
PDIA0309E
Differential Assembly
1.
Align the matching mark of differential case assembly with the
mark of drive gear, then install drive gear.
SDIA2593E
2.
Apply thread locking sealant into the thread hole of drive gear.
● Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
The drive gear back and threaded holes shall be cleaned
and decreased sufficiently.
SDIA2594E
3.
Install drive gear on the bolts, and then tighten to the specified
torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the bolts.
● Tighten bolts in a crisscross fashion.
SDIA0247J
Revision: October 2004
RFD-96
2005 Titan
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
4.
Press side bearing inner races to differential case assembly
using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33081000 (
—
A
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse side bearing.
B
C
SDIA2630E
RFD
5.
6.
Install differential lock solenoid and washer.
Press side bearing inner races to differential case assembly
using Tool.
Tool number
E
A: KV38100300 (J-25523)
B: ST33081000 ( — )
F
G
SDIA2631E
7.
8.
Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove
any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock
position switch.
Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and
tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified
torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
H
I
J
K
L
SDIA2633E
9.
Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
PDIA0381E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-97
2005 Titan
M
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
10. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly
with side bearing outer races into axle housing.
11. Apply multi-purpose grease to sensor connector.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse sensor connector.
SDIA2588E
12. Connect differential lock solenoid harness and sensor connector. Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA2585E
13. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle
housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing.
CAUTION:
Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of
side bearing adjusters.
SDIA2632E
14. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number
:
—
(C - 4164)
15. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to RFD85, "Backlash" .
16. Check total preload. Refer to RFD-84, "Total Preload Torque" .
17. Check tooth contact. Refer to RFD-84, "Tooth Contact" .
PDIA0337E
18. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
application and mounting surfaces.
19. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA2639E
Revision: October 2004
RFD-98
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
Engine
PFP:00030
A
EDS001Q4
VK56DE
Transmission
5A/T
Final drive model
M226
Gear ratio
3.357
Number of pinion gears
B
C
2
Number of teeth (Drive gear / drive pinion)
Oil capacity (Approx.)
47/14
RFD
2.01 (4-1/4, 3-1/2)
(US pt, lmp pt)
Drive pinion adjustment spacer type
Collapsible
Inspection and Adjustment
EDS001Q5
E
PRELOAD TORQUE
Unit: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Item
Specification
Total preload (Drive pinion torque to rotate plus)
F
2.38 - 5.16 (0.25 - 0.52, 21 - 45)
Drive pinion bearing preload
1.7 - 3.8 (0.18 - 0.38, 15 - 33)
G
BACKLASH
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Standard
Drive gear to drive pinion gear
H
0.08 - 0.13 (0.0031 - 0.0051)
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT
Unit: mm (in)
Item
I
Runout limit
Companion flange face
0.10 (0.0039) or less
Inner side of companion flange
0.13 (0.0051) or less
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RFD-99
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL]
SELECTIVE PARTS
Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Package part number*
0.076 (0.030)
0.079 (0.031)
0.081 (0.032)
0.084 (0.033)
0.086 (0.034)
38151 8S101
0.089 (0.035)
0.091 (0.036)
0.094 (0.037)
0.097 (0.038)
0.099 (0.039)
38151 8S102
0.102 (0.040)
0.104 (0.041)
0.107 (0.042)
0.109 (0.043)
0.112 (0.044)
38151 8S103
0.114 (0.045)
0.117 (0.046)
0.119 (0.047)
0.122 (0.048)
0.124 (0.049)
38151 8S104
0.127 (0.050)
0.130 (0.051)
0.132 (0.052)
0.135 (0.053)
0.137 (0.054)
38151 8S105
*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: October 2004
RFD-100
2005 Titan
E SUSPENSION
A
B
SECTION
REAR SUSPENSION
C
D
RSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ............................. 5
Components ............................................................. 5
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 6
SHOCK ABSORBER .................................................. 7
Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
LEAF SPRING ............................................................ 8
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 9
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 11
General Specifications (Rear) ................................ 11
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) ............................... 11
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RSU-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
●
PFP:00001
EES001CT
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with
tires on ground.
* Fuel, radiator coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in their
designated positions.
Revision: October 2004
RSU-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EES001CU
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Removing nuts and bolts
B
C
D
PBIC0190E
RSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RSU-3
2005 Titan
Revision: October 2004
Shake
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
RSU-4
×
×
×
×
×
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
STEERING
×
TIRES
×
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
AXLE
×
RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
REAR FINAL DRIVE
PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
RSU-5
×
Suspension looseness
RSU-5
Parts interference
×
RSU-8
RSU-5
Bushing or mounting deterioration
Noise
Spring fatigue
RSU-7
Symptoms
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
RSU-5
Reference page
Improper installation, looseness
NOISE VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:54000
EES001CV
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace the parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2005 Titan
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Components
PFP:55020
A
EES001CW
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LEIA0102E
1.
Rear final drive
2.
Rear leaf spring
3.
Rear spring bushing (front)
4.
Rear spring pad
5.
Rear spring shackle bushing
6.
Rear spring shackle
7.
Bumper
8.
Rear spring clip U-bolts
9.
Rear spring bushing (rear)
10. Shock absorber
Revision: October 2004
11. Shock absorber (left side)
RSU-5
12. Shock absorber (right side)
2005 Titan
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts and bolts must
be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil full; the
spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground.
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
●
●
●
EES001CX
Check the rear suspension parts for any excessive play, cracks, wear, and other damage.
Shake each rear wheel to check for any excessive play as
shown.
Tighten all of the nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
RSU-5, "Components" .
CAUTION:
When installing the components with rubber bushings, the
final tightening of the nuts and bolts must be done with the
vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant,
and engine oil full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats
in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground.
SMA525A
●
●
Check the shock absorbers for oil leaks, deformation, and other
damage.
Check the shock absorber bushings for excessive wear and
other damage.
LEIA0103E
Revision: October 2004
RSU-6
2005 Titan
SHOCK ABSORBER
SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
PFP:56210
A
EES001CY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack.
Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts
using power tool.
B
C
D
RSU
LEIA0104E
3.
Remove the shock absorber.
F
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber as necessary.
G
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Shock absorber upper and lower nuts
H
: Refer to RSU-5, "Components" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RSU-7
2005 Titan
LEAF SPRING
LEAF SPRING
Removal and Installation
PFP:55020
EES001CZ
LEIA0102E
1.
Rear final drive
2.
Rear leaf spring
3.
Rear spring bushing (front)
4.
Rear spring pad
5.
Rear spring shackle bushing
6.
Rear spring shackle
7.
Bumper
8.
Rear spring clip U-bolts
9.
Rear spring bushing (rear)
10. Shock absorber
Revision: October 2004
11. Shock absorber (left side)
RSU-8
12. Shock absorber (right side)
2005 Titan
LEAF SPRING
CAUTION:
When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts and bolts must
be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil full; the
spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground.
A
REMOVAL
B
1.
2.
Support the rear final drive assembly with a suitable jack to relieve the tension from the leaf spring.
● The axle weight should be supported, but there should be no compression in the spring.
Remove the shock absorber lower nut and bolt using power tool.
C
D
RSU
LEIA0104E
3.
Remove the four rear spring clip U-bolt nuts using power tool,
then remove the rear spring pad.
F
G
H
I
LEIA0106E
J
4.
Remove the rear spring shackle lower nut and bolt using power
tool.
● If removing the LH rear leaf spring, remove the storage box if
equipped, to access the rear spring shackle lower nut and
bolt. Refer to EI-50, "Removal and Installation" .
K
L
M
LEIA0105E
5.
6.
7.
Remove the rear leaf spring front nut and bolt using power tool.
Remove the rear leaf spring.
Remove the rear spring shackle from the rear leaf spring as necessary, using power tool.
LEIA0107E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
Check the rear leaf spring for any cracks or damage. Replace the rear leaf spring if necessary.
Revision: October 2004
RSU-9
2005 Titan
LEAF SPRING
●
●
Check the rear spring shackle, rear spring clip U-bolts, bumper, and rear spring pad for excessive wear,
cracks, straightness, and damage. Replace any components if necessary.
Check all bushings for deformation and cracks. Replace any bushings if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Apply soapsuds to all of the rubber bushings.
Install the rear spring shackle and rear leaf spring front nut and bolt. Finger-tighten the nuts.
Install the rear spring clip U-bolts and bumper on top of the rear leaf spring.
Install the rear spring pad, and nuts under the axle case.
Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts diagonally and evenly.
● Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts so the lengths of all the
exposed rear spring clip U-bolt threads under spring pad are
equal in length as shown.
Install the shock absorber, and finger-tighten the nuts.
WEIA0075E
7.
Remove the jack supporting the rear final drive assembly and
bounce the rear of the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
(unladen)
SRA703
8.
Tighten the rear spring shackle nuts, rear leaf spring front nut and shock absorber nuts to specification.
When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final nut tightening must be carried out under
unladen* conditions with the tires on level ground.
* (Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.)
Revision: October 2004
RSU-10
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications (Rear)
Suspension type
PFP:00030
A
EES001D0
Rigid axle with semi-elliptic leaf spring
Shock absorber type
B
Double-acting hydraulic
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)
EES001D1
Unit: mm (in)
C
D
RSU
F
LEIA0085E
Drive type
4X2
Body
Front wheelarch height
(Hf)
Rear wheelarch height
(Hr)
4X4
G
King Cab
Crew Cab
King Cab
Crew Cab
265/70R18
913 (35.9)
916 (36.1)
952 (37.5) *2
955 (37.6) *2
285/70R17
914 (36.0)
917 (36.1)
953 (37.5) *2
956 (37.6) *2
245/75R17
904 (35.6)
907 (35.7)
941 (37.0)
944 (37.2)
265/70R18
955 (37.6)
956 (37.6)
995 (39.2) *2
996 (39.2) *2
285/70R17
956 (37.6)
957 (37.7)
996 (39.2) *2
997 (39.3) *2
245/75R17
946 (37.2)
947 (37.3)
984 (38.7)
985 (38.8)
H
I
J
*1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: Includes when equipped with tow package.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
RSU-11
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
RSU-12
2005 Titan
H RESTRAINTS
A
B
SECTION
SEAT BELTS
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions for Seat Belt Service ............................ 2
AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 2
SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 3
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt ............. 3
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT
RETRACTOR ........................................................ 5
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT
BUCKLE ................................................................ 6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER
BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE..... 7
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt ............. 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
Seat Belt Inspection ................................................ 10
AFTER A COLLISION ......................................... 10
PRELIMINARY CHECKS .................................... 10
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE
CHECK ................................................................ 11
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE
CHECK ................................................................ 12
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR
CHILDREN) SYSTEM ............................................... 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ............. 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SB-1
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EHS0013L
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Seat Belt Service
EHS0013M
CAUTION:
●
Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect
both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
●
After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner assembly connector, ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
●
Do not disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.
●
Do not reuse seat belt anchor bolts after removal. Replace with new ones.
●
Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
●
Never oil tongue and buckle.
●
If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
assembly.
●
If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
●
When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
●
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
●
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do
so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pretensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which
the air bags are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
●
The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
●
The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e., torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
●
The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
●
Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
●
The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
Revision: October 2004
SB-2
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt
PFP:86884
A
EHS0013N
CREW CAB
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
WHIA0127E
1.
Assist handle
2.
Assist handle screw covers
3.
D-ring anchor bolt cover
4.
Seat belt buckle
5.
Seat belt retractor and belt assembly LH
6.
Anchor cover
7.
Seat belt pre-tensioner connector
8.
Center pillar lower finisher
9.
Seat belt anchor
10. Center pillar
11. Center pillar upper finisher
12. Seat belt height adjuster
13. Seat belt height adjuster finisher
Revision: October 2004
SB-3
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
KING CAB
WHIA0137E
1.
Seat belt height adjuster
2.
Seat belt height adjuster finisher
3.
Door finisher
4.
Armrest
5.
D-ring anchor bolt cover
6.
Seat belt buckle
7.
Seat belt retractor and belt assembly LH
8.
Anchor cover
9.
Seat belt pre-tensioner connector
10. Lower door finisher
Revision: October 2004
11. Rear door LH
SB-4
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal - Crew Cab
A
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
2. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly.
● On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
LHIA0047E
3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector.
CAUTION:
●
For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector,
insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift
the lock and remove the connector.
●
Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock
into the connector.
L
M
PHIA0341E
Installation - Crew Cab
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
●
Insure that seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
●
Removal - King Cab
1.
2.
Remove D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt.
Remove anchor cover and bolt.
Revision: October 2004
SB-5
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
3. Remove lower finisher.
4. Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
CAUTION:
●
For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector,
insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift
the lock and remove the connector.
●
Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock
into the connector.
5. Remove seat belt retractor and belt assembly.
PHIA0341E
Installation - King Cab
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal - Bucket Seat
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher.
Remove the anchor bolt and buckle.
Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector.
WHIA0128E
Installation - Bucket Seat
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
SB-6
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
WHIA0139E
1.
Center front seat
2.
Seat belt anchor bolts
4.
Seat belt assembly
5.
Seat belt buckle
3.
Anchor bolt covers
K
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove center front seat. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt.
Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt buckle.
L
Installation
M
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
SB-7
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt
EHS0013O
WHIA0232E
1.
D-ring anchor bolt cover
4.
Seat belt pre-tensioner connector
5.
Lower side finisher
6.
Seat belt lower anchor
7.
Seat belt lower anchor cover
8.
Push pins
9.
Center anchor bracket cover
10. Center seat belt retractor and belt
assembly
2.
D-ring anchor
11. Seat belt buckles
3.
Seat belt retractor and belt assembly
RH
12. Center seat belt anchor bracket
13. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly
LH
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
Revision: October 2004
SB-8
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Remove rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" .
Remove rear seat assembly. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" .
Remove seat belt D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt.
Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt.
Remove lower side finisher. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly.
Remove center seat belt lower anchor bolt.
Remove center seat belt retractor.
Remove center anchor bracket cover.
Remove push pins from center seat belt webbing sleeve.
Remove bolts from anchor bracket and remove center seat belt retractor and belt assembly.
Remove center belt bracket from floor.
Remove seat belt buckles.
A
B
C
D
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bracket bolts before seat installation.
●
Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bolt after seat installation with the seat cushion raised.
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SB-9
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection
EHS0013P
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
●
The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
●
The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
●
The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
●
Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
●
The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should
sound for about seven seconds.
Fasten drivers seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should
stop.
If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning
lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels
freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and
holds securely.
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built
up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does
not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET”
and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor:
1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening.
3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean
cloth.
5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly.
7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
Revision: October 2004
SB-10
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
A
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop)
the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a
specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to
fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly.
B
C
D
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending
further.
E
ALR Function Stationary Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is
in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
F
G
SB
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop.
The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock.
Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SB-11
2005 Titan
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.
Remove the seat belt retractor assembly.
Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting
the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration.
LRS199
15 degrees or less tilt
35 degrees or more tilt
3.
: Belt can be pulled out.
: Belt locks and cannot be pulled out.
If NG, replace the retractor assembly.
Revision: October 2004
SB-12
2005 Titan
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
PFP:75466
A
EHS0013Q
NOTE:
The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SB-13
2005 Titan
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
PFP:88000
EHS0013R
WHIA0141E
1. Fold rear seat backs down.
2. Remove bolts and remove tether anchors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
SB-14
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
BATTERY .................................................................... 4
How to Handle Battery ............................................. 4
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ............................................................... 4
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL .................... 4
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ............................... 5
CHARGING THE BATTERY ................................. 6
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester .......................................................... 6
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART .................. 8
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
STARTING SYSTEM ................................................ 10
System Description ................................................ 10
Wiring Diagram — START — ..................................11
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ........................................................ 12
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 12
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 13
Revision: October 2004
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 14
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 15
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING
VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE ......................................................... 16
Removal and Installation ........................................ 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 17
System Description ................................................. 17
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — ............................. 18
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ......................................................... 19
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 20
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 21
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 22
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 23
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 23
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 ........................... 24
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 25
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR .............................. 26
Removal and Installation ........................................ 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 27
Battery .................................................................... 27
Starter ..................................................................... 27
Generator ............................................................... 27
SC-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS00A89
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00A8A
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Revision: October 2004
SC-2
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EKS00A8B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-44373)
Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester
B
Model 620
C
D
SEL403X
E
F
Commercial Service Tools
EKS00A8C
Tool name
G
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
H
I
PBIC0190E
J
SC
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SC-3
2005 Titan
BATTERY
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
PFP:AYBGL
EKS00A8D
CAUTION:
●
If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
●
After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
●
Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging
a battery.
●
The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept
clean and dry.
●
The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
●
At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance”
and “maintenance-free”.
MEL040F
●
When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of
time, disconnect the negative battery terminal.
MEL041F
●
Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a
close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.
MEL042F
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
WARNING:
Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Revision: October 2004
SC-4
2005 Titan
BATTERY
Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
●
●
A
B
C
MEL043F
D
Sulphation
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltage
and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of
charging sulphated batteries.
A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test.
E
F
G
PKIA2353E
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK
1.
2.
H
Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading
according to electrolyte temperature.
I
J
SC
MEL042FA
Hydrometer Temperature Correction
L
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
71 (160)
0.032
66 (150)
0.028
60 (140)
0.024
54 (130)
0.020
49 (120)
0.016
43 (110)
0.012
38 (100)
0.008
32 (90)
0.004
27 (80)
0
21 (70)
−0.004
16 (60)
−0.008
10 (50)
−0.012
4 (40)
−0.016
−1 (30)
−0.020
−7 (20)
−0.024
Revision: October 2004
SC-5
M
2005 Titan
BATTERY
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
−12 (10)
−0.028
−18 (0)
−0.032
Corrected specific gravity
Approximate charge condition
1.260 - 1.280
Fully charged
1.230 - 1.250
3/4 charged
1.200 - 1.220
1/2 charged
1.170 - 1.190
1/4 charged
1.140 - 1.160
Almost discharged
1.110 - 1.130
Completely discharged
CHARGING THE BATTERY
CAUTION:
●
Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery.
●
Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
●
When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the
charger first, as this may cause a spark.
●
If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55°C (131°F), stop charging. Always charge battery
at a temperature below 55°C (131°F).
Charging Rates
Amps
Time
50
1 hour
25
2 hours
10
5 hours
5
10 hours
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
NOTE:
The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps
indicated above refer to initial charge rate.
●
If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be
replaced.
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
EKS00A8E
CAUTION:
When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection.
NOTE:
●
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.
●
If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to
remove the surface charge.
●
If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C
(32°F). Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to
make the selection.
Revision: October 2004
SC-6
2005 Titan
BATTERY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair
as necessary.
Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends
with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
NOTE:
The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends
and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean
the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the
test.
Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal.
The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys,
select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER”
key.
A
B
C
SEL404X
D
E
F
G
SEL405X
5.
6.
7.
Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top
case of the battery to be tested.
NOTE:
The battery type and rating will have either of the following.
CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.)
JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard.
Battery is stamped with a number such as:
80D26L: 80 (rank of output), D (physical size-depth), 26 (width
in cm). The last character L (post configuration) is not input into
the tester.
The tester requires the rating for the battery be entered exactly
as it is written or stamped on the battery. Do not attempt a CCA
conversion for JIS stamped batteries. JIS must be input directly.
Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating.
NOTE:
The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA or JIS.
Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-12, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
ITEM CHART" .
I
J
SC
SEL406X
L
M
SEL407X
Revision: October 2004
SC-7
H
2005 Titan
BATTERY
8.
9.
Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
NOTE:
● If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the
battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press
the “ENTER” button to make the selection.
● When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently
been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”.
SEL576X
● If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE
& RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER
CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”.
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
Service procedure
GOOD BATTERY
Battery is OK. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System
Tester" .
REPLACE BATTERY
Replace battery.
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery
test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
BAD CELL-REPLACE
Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester
to confirm repair.
GOOD-RECHARGE
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester.
Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.)
Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair.
CHARGE & RETEST
Revision: October 2004
NOTE:
If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER
CHARGE”.
SC-8
2005 Titan
BATTERY
Removal and Installation
EKS00A8F
A
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal and positive battery
terminal.
CAUTION:
Remove negative battery terminal first.
Remove the battery cover.
Remove the battery clamp bolt and battery clamp.
Remove the battery.
B
C
D
WKIA1385E
INSTALLATION
E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When installing, install the positive battery terminal first.
Battery clamp bolt
Battery terminal nut
F
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SC-9
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:23300
EKS00A8G
Power is supplied at all times:
●
through 40A fusible link (letter m , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to ignition switch terminal B.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied:
●
from ignition switch terminal ST
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 21.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied to IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) CPU.
With the selector lever in the P or N position, power is supplied:
●
through A/T assembly terminal 9
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 48.
Ground is supplied at all times:
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
●
through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Then the starter relay is turned on.
The IPDM E/R is energized and power is supplied:
●
from terminal 19 of the IPDM E/R
●
to terminal 1 of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates.
Revision: October 2004
SC-10
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — START —
EKS00A8H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
WKWA2189E
Revision: October 2004
SC-11
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
EKS00A8I
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/
Charging System Tester" .
3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test.
SEL408X
4.
Start the engine.
SEL409X
5.
Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-12,
"DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" .
NOTE:
● If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start,
perform engine diagnosis.
● For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION” incidents, refer to SC-15, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" .
SEL410X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL
Service procedure
Go to SC-13, "WORK FLOW" .
CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW
CHARGE BATTERY
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble
Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" .
REPLACE BATTERY
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery
test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses
with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
Revision: October 2004
SC-12
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
WKIA3559E
*1
SC-12
*4
SC-15
Revision: October 2004
*2
SC-14
*3
SC-13
SC-15
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check Starter Motor Circuit
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO STARTER MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check that the starter motor connector F27 connection is clean and tight.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal 2
(B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
Battery voltage should
exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter
motor for open circuit.
WKIA2105E
2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT
Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal 2 (B/R)
and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
: Less than 0.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter
motor for poor continuity.
WKIA2106E
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Starter motor ground circuit is OK. Further inspection is
necessary. Refer to SC-13, "WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Check harness between the starter motor case and
ground for poor continuity.
WKIA3437E
Revision: October 2004
SC-14
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check Magnetic Switch Circuit
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MAGNETIC SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter motor connector F28.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal 1
(W/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
C
D
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 40A fusible link (letter m , located in fuse and fusible
link box)
● Ignition switch
● Starter relay [within the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)]
● Harness for open or short
E
F
WKIA2108E
G
2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON MAGNETIC SWITCH CIRCUIT
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect starter motor connector F28.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal 1
(W/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
J
: Less than 1V
OK or NG
OK
>> Magnetic switch circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-13, "WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the magnetic
switch for poor continuity.
SC
L
WKIA1792E
M
Revision: October 2004
SC-15
2005 Titan
STARTING SYSTEM
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Engine coolant temperature
Voltage V
−30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F)
8.4
−19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F)
8.9
−9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F)
9.3
More than 1°C (More than 34°F)
9.7
Removal and Installation
EKS00A8J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove/disconnect the starter harness connectors.
Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools.
Remove the starter.
WKIA1388E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten terminal nut carefully.
Terminal nut
Revision: October 2004
: 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
SC-16
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:23100
A
EKS00A8K
The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
Power is supplied at all times:
●
to generator terminal 4
●
through 10A fuse (No. 30, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
Terminal 1 supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is
controlled by the IC regulator at terminal 4 detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the
140A fusible link (letter a , located in the fusible link box).
Ground is supplied:
●
to generator terminal 2
●
through body ground E203.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 24 for the charge warning lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal 13 of the combination meter through terminal 3 of the generator. With power
and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off.
If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a fault is indicated.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SC-17
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —
EKS00A8L
WKWA1140E
Revision: October 2004
SC-18
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
EKS00A8M
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/
Charging system tester.
3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test.
4. Start engine.
A
B
C
D
E
SEL417X
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed.
Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about
5 seconds, then return the engine to idle.
Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to
continue.
NOTE:
● If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display.
● Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting,
particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect
this without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected.
The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the
DIODE/RIPPLE check.
When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads.
● Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster.
● Headlamp high beam
● Rear window defogger
NOTE:
Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads.
F
G
H
SEL418X
J
SC
L
SEL419X
Press “ENTER” to continue.
SEL420X
Revision: October 2004
SC-19
I
2005 Titan
M
CHARGING SYSTEM
10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about
5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in
engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue.
NOTE:
If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press
“ENTER” to restart the test.
SEL421X
11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-20,
"DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" .
SEL422X
12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
SEL577X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL
Service procedure
Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result.
NO CHARGING VOLTAGE
LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to SC-21, "WORK FLOW" .
HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE
DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL
Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result.
EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED
Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair.
DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED
Go to SC-21, "WORK FLOW" .
Revision: October 2004
SC-20
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
WKIA3560E
Revision: October 2004
SC-21
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit
1. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT CONNECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check to see if terminal 3 is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal 3 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
2. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect E205 connector from generator.
Apply ground to connector E205 terminal 3 (BR/W) with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Charge warning lamp should
light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO SC-21, "WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Charge warning lamp
● Harness for open or short between combination
meter and fuse
● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator
Revision: October 2004
SC-22
WKIA2110E
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check Battery Circuit
A
1. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check to see if terminal 1 is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal 1 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
2. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/R)
and ground using a digital circuit tester.
B
C
D
E
Battery voltage should exist.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 140A fusible link (letter a , located in fusible link box)
● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link
G
WKIA2111E
H
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
I
Start the engine.
Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/
R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm.
J
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and
Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete
Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
SC
L
WKIA2112E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit
M
1. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CONNECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check to see if terminal 3 is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal 3 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
Revision: October 2004
SC-23
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
2. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect E205 connector from generator.
Apply ground to connector E205 terminal 3 (BR/W) with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Charge warning lamp should
light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and
Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete
battery/starting/charging system test.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Charge warning lamp
● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse
● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator
WKIA2110E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
Check Battery Circuit
1. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check to see if terminal 1 is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal 1 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
2. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/R)
and ground using a digital circuit tester.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 140A fusible link (letter a , located in fusible link box)
● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link
WKIA2111E
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Start the engine.
Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/
R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm.
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
WKIA2112E
Revision: October 2004
SC-24
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
4. CHECK GENERATOR DRIVE BELT TENSION
A
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check generator drive belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing
complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Readjust drive belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment" .
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
Check Voltage Regulator Circuit
B
C
D
1. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT CONNECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check to see if terminal 4 is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal 4 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
E
2. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
G
Check voltage between generator connector E205 terminal 4 (Y/B)
and ground using a digital circuit tester.
F
H
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse (No. 30, located in fuse and fusible link box)
● Harness for open or short between generator and
fuse
I
J
WKIA2113E
SC
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Start the engine.
Check voltage between generator connector E205 terminal 4 (Y/
B) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm.
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and
Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete
Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
Revision: October 2004
L
SC-25
M
WKIA2114E
2005 Titan
CHARGING SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following
symptoms occur while generator is operating:
●
Excessive voltage is produced.
●
No voltage is produced.
Removal and Installation
EKS00A8N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the fan shroud. Refer to CO-12, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove lower bracket, using power tools.
Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools.
Remove/disconnect the generator harness connectors.
Remove the generator.
WKIA1390E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install the generator and check the tension of the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment" .
CAUTION:
Tighten terminal nut carefully.
Terminal nut
Revision: October 2004
: 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
SC-26
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Battery
PFP:00030
A
EKS00A8P
Standard battery
Heavy duty battery
Gr. 24
Gr. 27
Capacity (20 HR) minimum V-AH
72
80
Cold cranking current
(For reference value)
650
710
Type
A
B
C
Starter
EKS00A8Q
Application
D
All models
Manufacturer
Mitsubishi
M002T85571ZCKD
Type
Reduction gear type
System voltage
12V
Terminal voltage
No-load
E
11V
Current
F
Less than 145A
Revolution
More than 3,300 rpm
Minimum diameter of commutator
31.4 mm (1.236 in)
Minimum length of brush
11.0 mm (0.433 in)
Brush spring tension
G
26.7-36.1 N (2.72 - 3.68 kg, 5.93 - 8.02 lb)
Clearance between pinion front edge and
pinion stopper
H
0.5 - 2.0 mm (0.020 - 0.079 in)
Generator
EKS00A8R
LR1130-701
Type
J
Hitachi
Nominal rating
12V-130A
Ground polarity
Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied)
1,200 rpm
SC
More than 78A/1,800 rpm
More than 108A/2,500 rpm
More than 130A/5,000 rpm
Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied)
Regulated output voltage
14.1 - 14.7V @ 25°C
Minimum length of brush
6 mm (0.24 in)
Brush spring pressure
L
M
1.0 - 3.432 N (0.102 - 0.3501 kg, 0.22 - 0.7715 lbs)
Slip ring minimum outer diameter
26 mm (1.02 in)
Rotor (Field coil) resistance
Revision: October 2004
I
2.1 ohms
SC-27
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
SC-28
2005 Titan
I BODY
A
B
SECTION
SEAT
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for Work ................................................ 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ...........................11
ComponentPartsAndHarnessConnectorLocation
....11
Manual Operation ....................................................11
Automatic Operation .............................................. 12
System Description ................................................ 12
FAIL- SAFE MODE ............................................. 13
CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE ......................... 13
MEMORY STORING AND KEYFOB INTERLOCK STORING ................................................. 14
MEMORY OPERATION ...................................... 15
ENTRY OPERATION .......................................... 15
EXITING OPERATION ........................................ 15
Revision: October 2004
SE-1
KEYFOB INTERLOCK OPERATION .................. 16
CAN Communication System Description .............. 16
Schematic ............................................................... 17
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — ............................... 19
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 29
Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat
Control Unit ............................................................. 29
Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic
Drive Positioner Control Unit .................................. 31
Work Flow ............................................................... 33
Preliminary Check .................................................. 34
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION ......................... 34
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
INSPECTION ...................................................... 34
CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.) .......... 37
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE .......... 37
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ............................. 39
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 40
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 41
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULTII (Self-Diagnosis) ................................................... 41
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 41
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection .............................. 43
Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection .................... 44
Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection ................... 45
Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection .................... 47
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection ................ 48
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check ................................ 49
Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check ............................... 51
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection ............................ 53
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection ........................ 54
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection ................. 55
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection .................. 56
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection .............. 57
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check .............................. 58
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check ............................. 60
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection ............................. 62
Reclining Switch Inspection .................................... 63
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection .................. 65
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection ................... 66
2005 Titan
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection ................... 67
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection .............. 68
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover
Switch) Circuit Check ............................................. 70
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch)
Circuit Check .......................................................... 71
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit
Inspection ............................................................... 73
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection .................. 74
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection ..... 75
Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection ......................................................... 77
A/TDevice (Detent Switch) CircuitInspection(Floor
Shift) ....................................................................... 78
A/T Device (Detent Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) ............................................................... 79
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection ................. 80
UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection ........ 81
Removal and Installation ........................................ 83
POWER SEAT ........................................................... 84
Revision: October 2004
Schematic ...............................................................84
Wiring Diagram — SEAT — ....................................85
HEATED SEAT ..........................................................88
Description ..............................................................88
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — .................................89
FRONT SEAT ............................................................91
Removal and Installation .........................................91
REMOVAL ............................................................96
INSTALLATION ....................................................96
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................96
SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD ...............................96
REMOVAL OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY .............97
INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY .....98
SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD ........................98
REAR SEAT ............................................................. 100
Removal and Installation ....................................... 100
REMOVAL ......................................................... 100
INSTALLATION ................................................. 100
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 101
SE-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EIS004F4
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Work
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
●
B
C
D
E
F
G
EIS004F5
When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
H
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
SE
Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them.
Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.
J
Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally.
Follow the steps below to clean components.
K
Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the
fouled area.
Then rub with a soft and dry cloth.
L
Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe
the fouled area.
Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub
M
with a soft and dry cloth.
Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline.
For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
Revision: October 2004
SE-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EIS004F6
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit
Repairing the cause of noise
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tool
EIS004F7
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Revision: October 2004
SE-4
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS004F8
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to SE-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
SE
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
J
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
K
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: October 2004
SE-5
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to SE-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
●
Revision: October 2004
SE-6
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS004F9
F
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
H
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
SE
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
J
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
L
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
M
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: October 2004
SE-7
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: October 2004
SE-8
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS004FA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
LIWA0276E
Revision: October 2004
SE-9
2005 Titan
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT844
Revision: October 2004
SE-10
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
PFP:28491
A
EIS004FB
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
LIIA1990E
Manual Operation
EIS004FC
The driving position [seat position, pedal position (accelerator, brake) and door mirror position can be adjusted
with the power seat switch LH, pedal adjusting switch or door mirror remote control switch.
NOTE:
●
The door mirrors can be manually operated with the ignition switch turned ACC or ON.
●
Adjusting pedal operates only when A/T shift lever is in P position (except when ignition switch turned to
OFF).
●
If A/T device (detent switch) error is detected, manual adjustable pedal operation cannot be performed
when ignition switch turns ON.
Revision: October 2004
SE-11
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Automatic Operation
EIS004FD
Function
Description
The seat, pedal (accelerator, brake) and door mirror move to the stored driving position by pushing seat memory switch (1 or 2).
Memory operation
Entry/Exiting function
Exiting operation
At exit, the seat moves backward. (Exiting position)
Entry operation
At entry, the seat returns from Exiting position to the previous driving position before
the Exiting operation.
Perform memory operation, turnout operation and return operation by pressing keyfob unlock button.
Keyfob interlock operation
NOTE:
● Disconnecting the battery erases the stored memory.
●
After connecting the battery, insert the key into the ignition cylinder and turn the front door switch LH ON (open)→OFF (close)→ON
(open), the Entry/Exiting function becomes possible.
●
After Exiting operation is carried out, return operation can be operated.
Auto operation temporary stop
conditions.
Auto operation stop conditions.
When ignition switch is turned to START during seat memory switch operation and return
operation, seat memory switch operation and return operation is stopped.
●
When the vehicle speed becomes 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher (memory switch operation
and entry operation).
●
When the setting switch, seat memory switch 1 or 2 are pressed.
●
When A/T selector lever is in any position other than P.
●
When the door mirror switch is operated (when ignition switch turned to ON).
●
When power seat switch turned ON.
●
When pedal adjusting switch turned ON.
●
When front seat sliding Entry/Exiting setting is OFF (entry/exiting operation).
NOTE:
During automatic operation, if the ignition switch is turned ON→START, the automatic operation is suspended. When the ignition switch
returns to ON, it resumes.
System Description
●
●
●
EIS004FE
The system automatically moves the front seat to facilitate entry/exit to/from the vehicle. The driver seat
control unit can also store the optimum driving positions (front seat, pedal position and door mirror position) for 2 people. If the front seat is changed, one-touch operation allows changing to the other driving
position.
The settings (ON/OFF) of the automatic sliding seat (Entry/Exiting operation) at entry/exit can be changed
as desired, using the display unit in the center of the instrument panel. The set content is transmitted by
CAN communication, from display unit (without NAVI) or display control unit (with NAVI) to driver seat control unit.
Using CONSULT-ll, the seat slide amount at entry/exit setting can be changed.
Revision: October 2004
SE-12
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
FAIL- SAFE MODE
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seats or pedals are
detected for T2 or more, status is judged “Output error”.
OPERATED PORTION
A
T2
Seat sliding
Approx. 0.1 sec.
Seat reclining
Same as above
Seat lifting (Front)
Same as above
Seat lifting (Rear)
Same as above
Pedal adjust
Same as above
B
C
D
CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE
The mode is cancelled when the A/T selector lever is shifted to P position from any other position.
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-13
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
MEMORY STORING AND KEYFOB INTERLOCK STORING
●
●
Store the 2 driving positions and shifts to the stored driving position with the memory switch.
Keyfob interlock function is set simultaneously with setting driving position memory. It can set driving position to memory position.
LIIA1666E
NOTE:
●
If another keyfob interlock function setting is performed by same key, the newly registered setting is valid.
●
If a new memory string is performed to memory switch that already set keyfob interlock function, keyfob
interlock function setting is reset.
●
If the keyfob has not been previously programmed to the vehicle, keyfob interlock function cannot set.
Revision: October 2004
SE-14
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
MEMORY OPERATION
A
Selecting the memorized position.
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0693E
NOTE:
The front seat position and pedal adjustment functions (see the following table) operate simultaneously in the
order of priority.
Priority
Function
Priority
G
Function
1
Seat sliding, (door mirror LH/RH)*
4
Seat lifter-FR
2
Pedal
5
Seat lifter-RR
3
Seat reclining
H
SE
*: In conjunction with sliding the seat, the door mirrors are positioned.
ENTRY OPERATION
When the seat is in the exiting position, the following operation moves the seat to the previous position before
the exiting operation.
J
K
L
M
LIIA0855E
EXITING OPERATION
At Entry/Exiting, the seat is automatically moved to the exiting position.
LIIA0856E
Revision: October 2004
SE-15
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
KEYFOB INTERLOCK OPERATION
●
The system performs memory operation, exiting operation and return operation by pressing keyfob unlock
button.
LIIA1667E
NOTE:
●
If Entry/Exiting operation is cancelled, the system performs memory operation only.
●
If ignition switch turns ON in the middle of memory operation, the system does not perform exiting operation after memory operation.
●
If ignition switch turns ON in the middle of exiting operation, entry operation starts at that time.
CAN Communication System Description
EIS004FF
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
SE-16
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Schematic
EIS004FG
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0794E
Revision: October 2004
SE-17
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
WIWA0602E
Revision: October 2004
SE-18
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —
EIS004FH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0577E
Revision: October 2004
SE-19
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
WIWA0578E
Revision: October 2004
SE-20
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0579E
Revision: October 2004
SE-21
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
WIWA0220E
Revision: October 2004
SE-22
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
WITH FLOOR SHIFT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0795E
Revision: October 2004
SE-23
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
WITH COLUMN SHIFT
WIWA0603E
Revision: October 2004
SE-24
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
LIWA0449E
Revision: October 2004
SE-25
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
LIWA0439E
Revision: October 2004
SE-26
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
LIWA0440E
Revision: October 2004
SE-27
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
WIWA0604E
Revision: October 2004
SE-28
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EIS004FI
A
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
11
O
38
W/L
39
L
40
P
47
SB
67
B
70
W/B
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Ignition switch (ACC or ON)
Ignition switch (ACC or ON position)
Battery voltage
Ignition switch (ON or START)
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
Battery voltage
CAN-H
—
—
CAN-L
—
—
ITEM
Front door switch LH
ON (Open) → OFF (Closed)
C
0 → Battery voltage
Ground
—
0
Battery power supply (fusible
link)
—
Battery voltage
WIRE
COLOR
D
E
Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit
TERMINAL
B
ITEM
CONDITION
EIS004FJ
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
F
G
1
L
UART LINE (RX)
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
H
PIIA4813E
3
L
CAN-H
6
O
Ignition switch (ON or START)
—
Ignition switch (ON or START
position)
—
SE
Battery voltage
J
9
L/R
Reclining motor sensor signal
ON (seat reclining motor operation)
K
SIIA0692J
Other than above
L
0 or 5
M
ON (rear lifting motor operation)
10
W
Rear lifting motor sensor signal
SIIA0693J
Other than above
11
12
R/B
O/B
Sliding switch BACKWARD signal
Reclining switch BACKWARD
signal
ON (seat sliding switch BACKWARD operation)
Other than above
ON (seat reclining switch BACKWARD operation)
Other than above
13
L/B
Front lifting switch DOWN signal
ON (front lifting switch DOWN
operation)
Other than above
Revision: October 2004
SE-29
0 or 5
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
14
G/W
Rear lifting switch DOWN signal
CONDITION
ON (rear lifting switch DOWN
operation)
Other than above
15
L/Y
Pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD signal
ON (pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD operation)
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
0
Battery voltage
0
Other than above
Battery voltage
5
16
W
Seat sensor power
Ignition switch ON
17
W
UART LINE (TX)
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4814E
19
P
CAN-L
—
Selector lever in P position
21
L/R
A/T device (detent switch) signal
24
Y/G
Seat sliding motor sensor signal
Selector lever other than P position with ignition key in ignition cylinder
—
0
Battery voltage
ON (seat sliding motor operation)
PIIA3277E
Other than above
25
LG
Front lifting motor sensor signal
0 or 5
ON (front lifting motor operation)
SIIA0691J
Other than above.
26
P/B
Seat sliding switch FORWARD
signal
ON (seat sliding switch FORWARD operation)
Other than above
27
G/B
Seat reclining switch FORWARD signal
ON (seat reclining switch FORWARD operation)
Other than above
28
Y/B
Front lifting switch UP signal
ON (front lifting switch UP operation)
Other than above
29
R/W
Rear lifting switch UP signal
ON (rear lifting switch UP operation)
Other than above
30
R
Pedal adjusting switch FORWARD signal
ON (pedal adjusting switch FORWARD operation)
Other than above
Revision: October 2004
SE-30
0 or 5
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
31
L/Y
32
B
33
35
36
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Sensor ground
—
0
Ground
—
0
L/B
Battery power supply (PTC)
—
Battery voltage
V/W
Sliding motor FORWARD output signal
Sliding switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated)
Battery voltage
Y/G
ITEM
Reclining motor FORWARD output signal
Other than above
Reclining switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
37
38
BR
B/W
Front lifting motor DOWN output
signal
Rear lifting motor UP output signal
Front lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Rear end lifting switch UP operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
39
Y
Rear lifting motor DOWN output
signal
Rear end lifting switch DOWN
operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
40
42
44
Y/R
O/B
Y/R
Battery power supply
Sliding motor BACKWARD output signal
Reclining motor BACKWARD
output signal
GR
Front lifting motor UP output signal
B/W
D
0
Battery voltage
Front lifting switch UP operation
(Motor operated)
Ground
—
E
0
Battery voltage
F
0
Battery voltage
G
0
Battery voltage
Other than above
48
Battery voltage
Sliding switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
45
C
Battery voltage
Reclining switch BACKWARD
operation (Motor operated)
B
0
—
Other than above
A
H
0
SE
Battery voltage
0
J
Battery voltage
0
K
0
Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
EIS004FK
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
2
LG
Changeover switch RH signal
3
Y/B
Mirror switch UP signal
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Changeover switch in RH position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in UP position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in LEFT position
0
Other than above
5
4
V/W
Mirror switch LEFT signal
5
R/B
Mirror sensor (RH vertical) signal
Mirror motor RH is operated UP or
DOWN
Changes between 3.4 (close to
peak) 0.6 (close to valley)
6
L/Y
Mirror sensor (LH vertical) signal
Mirror motor LH is operated UP or
DOWN
Changes between 3.4 (close to
peak) 0.6 (close to valley)
8
BR/Y
9
LG/B
Pedal sensor input signal
Seat memory switch 1 signal
Revision: October 2004
Pedal position front end
0.5
Pedal position rear end
4.5
Memory switch 1 ON
0
Memory switch 1 OFF
5
SE-31
2005 Titan
L
M
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
10
L
ITEM
UART LINE (TX)
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4813E
12
P
13
Y/G
14
GR/R
15
V/R
Seat memory switch indictor 1
signal
Memory switch 1 ON
0
Memory switch 1 OFF
Battery voltage
Seat memory switch indictor 2
signal
Memory switch 2 ON
0
Memory switch 2 OFF
Battery voltage
Mirror motor RH is operated UP
Mirror motor RH UP signal
Other than above
Mirror motor RH is operated LEFT
Mirror motor RH LEFT signal
Other than above
Mirror motor LH is operated DOWN
Mirror motor LH DOWN signal
16
O
Other than above
Mirror motor LH is operated RIGHT
Mirror motor LH RIGHT signal
Changeover switch LH signal
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
1.5 - Battery voltage
Other than above
0
Changeover switch in LH position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in DOWN position
0
Other than above
5
18
BR/W
19
SB
Mirror switch DOWN signal
20
GR
Mirror switch RIGHT signal
21
L/W
Mirror sensor (RH horizontal)
signal
Mirror motor RH is operated LEFT
or RIGHT
Changes between 3.4 (close to left
edge) 0.6 (close to right edge)
22
G
Mirror sensor (LH horizontal)
signal
Mirror motor LH is operated LEFT
or RIGHT
Changes between 3.4 (close to left
edge) 0.6 (close to right edge)
24
G/O
Seat memory set switch signal
25
P/L
Seat memory switch 2 signal
26
W
UART LINE (RX)
Mirror switch in RIGHT position
0
Other than above
5
Set switch 1 ON
0
Set switch 1 OFF
5
Memory switch 2 ON
0
Memory switch 2 OFF
5
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4814E
Mirror motor RH is operated DOWN
Mirror motor RH DOWN signal
30
Y
Other than above
Mirror motor RH is operated RIGHT
Mirror motor RH RIGHT signal
Other than above
Mirror motor LH is operated UP
31
R
Mirror motor LH UP signal
Revision: October 2004
Other than above
SE-32
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
32
BR
Mirror motor LH LEFT signal
33
W/L
Sensor power supply
—
5
34
Y/R
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
37
G
39
L/B
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
40
B/W
Ground
—
0
41
W/G
Sensor ground
—
0
ITEM
CONDITION
Mirror motor LH is operated LEFT
Pedal adjust motor FORWARD
signal
45
R
Pedal adjust motor BACKWARD signal
48
B
Ground
Other than above
Pedal adjust motor FORWARD
operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Pedal adjust motor BACKWARD
operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
—
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
A
1.5 - Battery voltage
0
B
C
Battery voltage
0
D
E
Battery voltage
0
F
0
EIS004FL
G
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the system description. Refer to SE-12, "System Description" .
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to SE-34, "Preliminary Check" .
H
Check the self-diagnosis, results using CONSULT-II. Refer to SE-37, "CONSULT-II Function (AUTO
DRIVE POS.)" .
Repair or replace depending on the self-diagnostic results.
SE
Based on the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to SE-41,
"Symptom Chart" .
Does the automatic drive positioner system operate normally?
J
If it is normal, GO TO 8.
If it is not normal, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-33
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Preliminary Check
EIS004FM
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION
The settings of the automatic driving positioner system can be changed, using CONSULT-II and the display in
the center of the instrument panel.
×: Applicable –: Not applicable
Setting item
CONSULT–II
(WORK SUPPORT)
Content
Sliding Front Seat
When Entry/ Exiting
Vehicle
The seat sliding turnout and
return at entry/exit can be
selected: ON (operated)–OFF
(not operated)
Reset custom settings*
All settings to default.
Default
setting
Factory
setting
×
×
—
—
—
—
40mm
The distance at exiting operation can be selected from the
following 3 modes.
SEAT SLIDE
VOLUME SET
Display unit
80mm
—
150mm
ON
ON: Indicator lamp ON
—
×
OFF
OFF: Indicator lamp OFF
×
—
Default: Setting button
ON
—
—
—
It is possible to set sliding front seat for entry/exit of vehicle by pressing set switch.
Content
Setting change operation
The seat sliding turnout and
return at entry/exit can be operated.
The seat sliding turnout and
return at entry/exit can not be
operated.
Indicator LEDs
Blinking twice
Press the set switch for more than 10 seconds
Blinking once
*: Setting of sliding front seat for entry/exit of vehicle is ON at factory-shipment. But if custom settings are reset, setting turns OFF.
NOTE:
After the setting is registered, the new setting is effective, even if the battery is disconnected.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1. CHECK BCM FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if any of the following fuses in the BCM are blown.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery power supply
f (50A)
BCM
ON or START power supply
59 (10A)
ACC or ON power supply
4 (10A)
NOTE:
Refer to SE-11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to SE11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" .
Revision: October 2004
SE-34
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
B
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
M20
Power
source
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(–)
C
70 (W/B)
Battery
power
supply
—
38 (W/L)
ON or
START
power
supply
ON or
START
ACC or
ON
power
supply
ACC or
ON
Ground
M18
11 (O)
Battery voltage
D
Battery voltage
LIIA0995E
Battery voltage
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace the harness.
G
3. CHECK BCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and ground.
67 (B) - Ground
E
SE
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> BCM circuit is OK. Check the driver seat control unit.
GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace the harness.
J
K
L
LIIA0915E
4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
M
Check if any of the following fuses in the driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit are
blown.
Unit
Driver seat control unit
Power source
Fuse No.
START power supply
2 (10A)
Battery power supply
22 (15A)
Battery power supply
f (50A)
NOTE:
Refer to SE-11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to SE11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" .
Revision: October 2004
SE-35
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
5. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery
power
supply
—
Battery
voltage
Battery
power
supply
—
Battery
voltage
START
power
supply
START
Battery
voltage
(–)
33 (L/B)
P3
40 (Y/R)
P2
Power
source
Ground
6 (O)
PIIA4819E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
6. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between the driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 32, P3 terminal 48 and
ground.
32 (B) - Ground
48 (B/W) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Driver seat control unit circuit check is OK. Check automatic drive positioner control unit. GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
PIIA4542E
7. CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 34, 39 and
ground.
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
(+)
M34
34 (Y/R)
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
OFF
Battery voltage
OFF
Battery voltage
(–)
Ground
39 (L/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
PIIA4543E
Revision: October 2004
SE-36
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
8. CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 40, 48 and
ground.
40 (B/W) - Ground
48 (B) - Ground
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Automatic drive positioner control unit circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
PIIA4544E
CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)
E
EIS004FN
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
F
AUTO DRIVE POS.
diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the driver seat
control unit for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals
are received from the driver seat control unit and received data is displayed.
G
Displays driver seat control unit self-diagnosis results.
H
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Displays driver seat control unit input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
ECU PART NUMBER
SE
Driver seat control unit part number can be read.
J
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
K
L
M
BBIA0369E
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: October 2004
SE-37
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “AUTO DRIVE POS”.
If “AUTO DRIVE POS.” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
6.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS“,
“ECU PART NUMBER” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available.
BCIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
SE-38
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
A
DISPLAY ITEM LIST
CONSULT-II display
Item
Malfunction is detected when...
Reference
page
B
CAN COMM CIRC
[U1000]
CAN communication
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
LAN-7
SEAT SLIDE
[B2112]
Seat slide motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if
any motor operations of seat slide is detected for 0.1 second or
more, status is judged “Output error”.
SE-43
SE-53
C
SEAT RECLINING
[B2113]
Seat reclining motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if
any motor operations of seat reclining is detected for 0.1 second or
more, status is judged “Output error”.
SE-44
SE-54
D
SEAT LIFTER FR
[B2114]
Seat lifting FR motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if
any motor operations of seat lifting FR is detected for 0.1 second or
more, status is judged “Output error”.
SE-45
SE-55
E
SEAT LIFTER RR
[B2115]
Seat lifting RR motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if
any motor operations of seat lifting RR is detected for 0.1 second or
more, status is judged “Output error”.
SE-47
SE-56
F
ADJ PEDAL
MOTOR
[B2117]
Pedal adjust motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if
motor operations of seat pedal is detected for 0.1 second or more,
status is judged “Output error”.
SE-48
SE-57
ADJ PEDAL SENSOR
[B2120]
Pedal adjust sensor
When pedal adjust sensor detects 0.5V or lower, or 4.5V or higher,
for 0.5 seconds or more.
SE-57
DETENT SW
[B2126]
Park SW
With the A/T selector lever in P position (park switch OFF), if the
vehicle speed of 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher was input the park switch
input system is judged malfunctioning.
SE-78
UART COMM
[B2128]
UART communication
Malfunction is detected in UART communication.
SE-81
H
SE
NOTE:
●
If park switch error is detected, manual adjustable pedal operation cannot be performed when ignition
switch turns ON.
●
The displays of CAN communication and detection switch display error detecting condition from memory
erase to the present on “TIME”.
–
If error is detected in the past and present error is detected, “CRNT” is displayed.
–
If error is detected in the past and present error is not detected, “PAST” is displayed.
–
If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”.
●
Any items other than CAN communication and park switch count error detection frequency occurred after
erase history to “1-127”.
–
If error was detected in the past, error detection frequency from memory erase to the present is displayed
on “TIME”.
–
If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”.
–
Can clear the detected memory.
Normal: Clear memory in normal condition, history is erased and nothing is displayed on “TIME”.
Error: Clear memory in error condition, error is detected again and “1” is displayed on “TIME”.
Revision: October 2004
SE-39
G
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
DATA MONITOR
SELECTIOM FROM MENU
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
SLIDE SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal is displayed.
SLIDE SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal is displayed.
RECLN SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed.
RECLN SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed.
LIFT FR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed.
LIFT FR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (UP) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (DOWN) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW–RH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (RIGHT) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW–LH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (LEFT) signal is displayed.
MIR CHNG SW–R
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (switching to RIGHT) signal is
displayed.
MIR CHNG SW–L
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (switching to LEFT) signal is
displayed.
SET SW
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal is displayed.
PEDAL SW-FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (FR) signal is displayed.
PEDAL SW-RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (RR) signal is displayed.
MEMORY SW1
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal is displayed.
MEMORY SW2
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal is displayed.
DETENT SW
“ON/OFF”
The A/T selector lever position “OFF (P position)/ON (other than P position)”
judged from the park switch signal is displayed.
STARTER SW
“ON/OFF”
Ignition switch ON (START, ON)/OFF (ignition switch IGN, ACC, or OFF) status
judged from the ignition switch signal is displayed.
SLIDE PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves backward, the
value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases.
RECLN PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves backward, the
value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases.
LIFT FR PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value
increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
LIFT RR PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value
increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
MIR/SEN RH R–L
“V”
Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed.
MIR/SEN RH U–D
“V”
Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH R–L
“V”
Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH U–D
“V”
Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed.
PEDAL SEN
“V”
The pedal position (voltage) judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed.
Revision: October 2004
SE-40
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
During vehicle driving, do not perform active test.
NOTE:
If active test is performed, reset seat memory and keyfob interlock drive positioner after performing work.
DISPLAY ITEM LIST
Test item
A
B
Description
C
SEAT SLIDE
The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
SEAT RECLINING
The reclining motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
SEAT LIFTER FR
The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
SEAT LIFTER RR
The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
PEDAL MOTOR
The pedal adjust motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
MEMORY SW INDCTR
The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal.
MIRROR MOTOR RH
The RH mirror motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive
signal.
MIRROR MOTOR LH
The LH mirror motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive
signal.
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
D
E
EIS004FO
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
F
G
CAUTION:
H
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Connect to CONSULT-II, and select “AUTO DRIVE POS.” on the “SELECT DIAG SYSTEM” screen.
SE
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
CONSULT-II display code
J
Diagnosis item
INITIAL DIAG
TRANSMIT DIAG
K
ECM
U1000
IPDM E/R
L
METER/M&A
I-KEY
Contents displayed
No malfunction>>Inspection End
Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to “CAN System”. Refer to
LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
Symptom Chart
EIS004FP
Diagnoses / service procedure
Symptom
Only setting change function cannot be set with display.
Revision: October 2004
Refer to
page
1. Preliminary check
SE-34
2. CAN communication inspection using CONSULT-II (selfdiagnosis)
SE-41
3. If the above systems are
normal, check display system
AV-78
SE-41
Navigation system
2005 Titan
M
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Diagnoses / service procedure
Symptom
A part of seat system does not operate (both automatically and manually).
A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate
(both automatically and manually).
A part of seat system does not operate (only automatic
operation).
A part of door mirror system does not operate (only
automatic operation).
All of the automatic operations do not operate.
A part of seat system does not operate (only manual
operation).
A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate
(only manual operation).
Only memory switch operation.
Refer to
page
1. Sliding motor circuit inspection
SE-43
2. Reclining motor circuit inspection
SE-44
3. Lifting motor (front) circuit inspection
SE-45
4. Lifting motor (rear) circuit inspection
SE-47
5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Pedal adjusting motor circuit inspection
SE-48
2. Mirror motor LH circuit check
SE-49
3. Mirror motor RH circuit check
SE-51
4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit.
SE-11
1. Sliding sensor circuit inspection
SE-53
2. Reclining sensor circuit inspection
SE-54
3. Lifting sensor (front) circuit inspection
SE-55
4. Lifting sensor (rear) circuit inspection
SE-56
5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Mirror sensor LH circuit check
SE-58
2. Mirror sensor RH circuit check
SE-60
3. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit.
SE-11
1. Park switch circuit inspection
SE-78
2. UART communication line circuit inspection
SE-81
3. Pedal adjusting sensor circuit inspection
SE-57
4. If all the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit.
SE-11
1. Sliding switch circuit inspection
SE-62
2. Reclining switch circuit inspection
SE-63
3. Lifting switch (front) circuit inspection
SE-65
4. Lifting switch (rear) circuit inspection
SE-66
5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Pedal adjusting switch circuit inspection
SE-68
2. Door mirror remote control switch (change over switch)
circuit inspection
SE-70
3. Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) switching circuit inspection
SE-71
4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit
SE-11
1. Seat memory switch circuit inspection
SE-74
2. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Seat memory indicator lamp circuit inspection
SE-75
Seat memory indicator lamps 1 and 2 do not illuminate.
2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the driver
seat control unit.
SE-11
The Entry/Exiting does not operate when door is opened
and closed.
(The Entry/Exiting operates with key switch)
1. Front door switch circuit inspection
SE-80
Revision: October 2004
2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the BCM.
SE-42
BCS-19
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Diagnoses / service procedure
Symptom
Refer to
page
Only door mirror system does not operate (only manual
operation).
1.Door mirror remote control switch ground circuit inspection
SE-73
Only door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation).
1. Door mirror sensor power supply and ground circuit
inspection
SE-77
Only seat system does not operate (only manual operation).
1. Power seat switch ground circuit inspection
SE-67
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection
A
B
C
EIS004FQ
1. CHECK SEAT SLIDING MECHANISM
D
Check the following.
●
Operation malfunction caused by sliding rail deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials
●
Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the sliding motor LH or sliding rail connector rod
●
Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
E
F
G
2. CHECK FUNCTION
H
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “SEAT SLIDE” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
SEAT SLIDE
Description
SE
The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding motor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
J
K
PIIA0265E
3. CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3
terminals 35, 42 and sliding motor connector P4 terminals 4, 6.
35 (V/W) - 6 (V/W)
42 (O/B) - 4 (O/B)
4.
L
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3
terminals 35, 42 and ground.
35 (V/W) - Ground
42 (O/B) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0696E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-43
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
(–)
Sliding switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
35 (V/W)
P3
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ground
42 (O/B)
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
Sliding switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
Battery voltage
Other than above
PIIA4801E
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace sliding motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection
EIS004FR
1. CHECK SEAT RECLINING MECHANISM
Check the following.
Operation malfunction caused by an interference with the center pillar or center console
●
Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
●
2. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “SEAT RECLINING” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
SEAT
RECLINING
Description
The reclining motor LH is activated by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Reclining motor LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PIIA0268E
Revision: October 2004
SE-44
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
36 (Y/G) – 4 (Y/G)
44 (Y/R) – 3 (Y/R)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 36, 44 and reclining motor LH
connector P5 terminals 3, 4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3
terminals 36, 44 and ground.
36 (Y/G) – Ground
44 (Y/R) – Ground
D
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
B
E
LIIA0697E
F
4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
G
H
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
(–)
Ground
44 (Y/R)
SE
Reclining switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
36 (Y/G)
P3
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
Reclining switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
Battery voltage
Other than above
J
PIIA4802E
K
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace reclining motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection
L
EIS004FS
1. CHECK SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) MECHANISM
M
Check the following.
●
Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials
●
Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (front) or lead screws
●
Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
Revision: October 2004
SE-45
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER FR” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
SEAT
LIFTER FR
Description
The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting motor (front) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PIIA0271E
3. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front).
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 37, 45 and lifting motor (front)
connector P6 terminals 4, 6.
37 (BR) - 6 (BR)
45 (GR) - 4 (GR)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3
terminals 37, 45 and ground.
37 (BR) - Ground
45 (GR) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0698E
4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front).
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
(–)
Lifting switch (front) ON
(DOWN operation)
37 (BR)
P3
Condition
Ground
45 (GR)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Other than above
Llifting switch (front) ON
(UP operation)
0
Battery voltage
Other than above
PIIA4805E
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
Revision: October 2004
SE-46
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection
EIS004FT
1. CHECK SEAT LIFTING (REAR) MECHANISM
A
Check the following.
●
Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials
●
Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (rear) or lead screws
●
Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
B
C
D
2. CHECK FUNCTION
E
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER RR” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
Description
SEAT LIFTER
RR
The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
F
G
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting motor (rear) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
PIIA0274E
3. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear).
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 38, 39 and lifting motor (rear)
connector P7 terminals 4, 6.
38 (B/W) - 6 (B/W)
39 (Y) - 4 (Y)
4.
SE
K
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit P3 terminals
38, 39 and ground.
38 (B/W) - Ground
39 (Y) - Ground
Revision: October 2004
L
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
LIIA0699E
SE-47
J
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear).
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
(+)
(–)
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(UP operation)
38 (B/W)
P3
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ground
Other than above
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(DOWN operation)
39 (Y)
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
Other than above
PIIA4804E
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection
EIS004FU
1. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MECHANISM
Check the following.
Operation malfunction caused by pedal adjusting mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other
foreign materials
●
Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
●
2. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “PEDAL” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
ADJ PEDAL MOTOR
Description
The pedal adjusting motor is activated by receiving the
drive signal.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting motor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PIIA4555E
Revision: October 2004
SE-48
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
37 (G) - 1 (G)
45 (R) - 2 (R)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting motor.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 37, 45 and
pedal adjusting motor connector E109 terminals 1, 2.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M34 terminals 37, 45 and ground.
37 (G) - Ground
45 (R) - Ground
D
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
B
E
LIIA1755E
F
4. CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting motor.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
G
H
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
SE
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (FORWARD operation)
37 (G)
Battery voltage
J
Other than above
M34
Ground
45 (R)
0
PIIA4806E
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (BACKWARD operation)
Battery voltage
Other than above
K
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-2, "ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY" .
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check
EIS004FV
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH MECHANISM
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
Revision: October 2004
SE-49
2005 Titan
L
M
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT–II
Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR LH” in the ACTIVE
TEST.
Test item
Description
MIRROR MOTOR
LH
The mirror motor LH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/
RIGHT by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT–II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror motor LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PIIA4784E
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR LH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 16, 31, 32 and
door mirror LH connector D4 terminals 1, 2, 3.
16 (O) - 3 (O)
31 (R) - 1 (R)
32 (BR) - 2 (BR)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 16, 31, 32 and ground.
16 (O) - Ground
31 (R) - Ground
32 (BR) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0999E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4. CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
2
(BR)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(–)
When motor is
operated UP
1
(R)
D4
Condition
1.5 - Battery voltage
Other than above
Ground
When motor is
operated LEFT
0
1.5 - Battery voltage
Other than above
3
(O)
When motor is
operated DOWN or RIGHT
0
LIIA1000E
1.5 - Battery voltage
Other than above
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-50
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check
EIS004FW
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH MECHANISM
A
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
B
C
2. CHECK FUNCTION
D
With CONSULT–II
Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR RH” in the ACTIVE
TEST.
E
Test item
Description
MIRROR MOTOR
RH
The mirror motor RH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/
RIGHT by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT–II
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror motor RH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
F
G
PIIA0202E
H
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
SE
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 14, 15, 30 and
door mirror RH connector D107 terminals 1, 2, 3.
J
14 (GR/R) - 1 (GR/R)
: Continuity should exist.
15 (V/R) - 2 (V/R)
: Continuity should exist.
30 (Y) - 3 (Y)
: Continuity should exist.
K
4.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 14, 15, 30 and ground.
14 (GR/R) - Ground
15 (V/R) - Ground
30 (Y) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
L
LIIA1001E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-51
2005 Titan
M
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
4. CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Mirror motor is operated
UP
1 (GR/R)
1.5 - Battery
voltage
Other than above
D107
2 (V/R)
Ground
0
Mirror motor is operated
LEFT
1.5 - Battery
voltage
Other than above
3 (Y)
0
Mirror motor is operated
DOWN or RIGHT
LIIA1002E
1.5 - Battery
voltage
Other than above
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-52
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
EIS004FX
1. CHECK FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “SLIDE PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
SLIDE PULSE
—
B
Contents
The seat sliding position (pulse) judged
from the sliding sensor signal is displayed
C
D
E
PIIA4558E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Condition
F
G
Signal
H
(–)
SE
P2
24 (Y/G)
Ground
Sliding
motor
operation
PIIA4556E
J
PIIA3277E
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK SLIDING MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
L
1.
2.
M
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding motor LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 16, 24, 31 and sliding motor P4 terminals 1, 2, 3.
16 (W) - 3 (W)
24 (Y/G) - 2 (Y/G)
31 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit P2 terminals
24, 31 and ground.
16 (W) - Ground
24 (Y/G) - Ground
31 (L/Y) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist
LIIA0706E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace sliding motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-53
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection
EIS004FY
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “RECLN PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
RECLN PULSE
—
Contents
The seat reclining position (pulse) judged
from the reclining sensor is displayed
PIIA4558E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
P2
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
(–)
9 (L/R)
Ground
Condition
Signal
Reclining
motor
operation
PIIA4559E
PIIA3278E
OK or NG
OK
>> Reclining sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK RECLINING MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 9, 31 and reclining motor LH connector P5 terminals 1,
2.
9 (L/R) - 1 (L/R)
31 (L/Y) - 2 (L/Y)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 9, 31 and ground.
9 (L/R) - Ground
31 (L/Y) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0707E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace reclining motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-54
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection
EIS004FZ
1. CHECK FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “LIFT FR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
LIFT FR PULSE
—
B
Contents
The front lifting position (pulse) judged
from the lifting sensor (front) is displayed
C
D
E
PIIA4558E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
P2
25 (LG)
Condition
F
G
Signal
H
(–)
Ground
SE
Lifting
motor
(front)
operation
PIIA4561E
J
PIIA3278E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting sensor (front) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
2. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front).
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 16, 25, 31 and lifting motor
(front) connector P6 terminals 1, 2, 3.
16 (W) - 3 (W)
25 (LG) - 2 (LG)
31 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 16, 25, 31 and ground.
16 (W) - Ground
25 (LG) - Ground
31 (L/Y) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0708E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-55
2005 Titan
M
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection
EIS004G0
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check operation with “LIFT RR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure pulse changes.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
LIFT RR PULSE
—
The rear lifting position (pulse) judged from
the lifting sensor (rear) is displayed.
PIIA4558E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
P2
10 (W)
Condition
Signal
(–)
Ground
Lifting
motor
(rear)
operation
PIIA4563E
PIIA3278E
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting sensor (rear) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear).
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 10, 16, 31 and lifting motor (rear)
connector P7 terminals 1, 2, 3.
10 (W) - 2 (W)
16 (W) - 3 (W)
31 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 10, 16, 31 and ground.
10 (W) - Ground
16 (W) - Ground
31 (L/Y) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0709E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-56
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection
EIS004G1
1. CHECK FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Operate the pedal adjusting switch with “PEDAL SEN” on the DATA
MONITOR to make sure the voltage changes.
B
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
PEDAL
SEN
Contents
C
The pedal adjusting position (voltage) judged from the
pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed.
“V”
D
PIIA4568E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
E
F
G
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
M33
8 (BR/Y)
Condition
(–)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
H
Pedal
front end position
0.5
Pedal
back end position
4.5
SE
PIIA4569E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-57
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting sensor.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner connector M33, M34 terminals 8, 33, 41 and pedal
adjusting sensor connector E110 terminals 3, 4, 5.
8 (BR/Y) - 4 (BR/Y)
33 (W/L) - 3 (W/L)
41 (W/G) - 5 (W/G)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33, M34 terminals 8, 33, 41 and ground.
8 (BR/Y) - Ground
33 (W/L) - Ground
41 (W/G) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. Refer
to ACC-2, "ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ASSEMBLY" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1305E
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check
EIS004G2
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction in memory control
NOTE:
If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
Revision: October 2004
SE-58
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR
A
With CONSULT–II
Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SE LH R–L, MIR/SE LH U–
D" in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION or
UNIT]
Contents
MIR/SE LH R–L
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor (LH/
RH) is displayed.
MIR/SE LH U–D
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor (UP/
DOWN) is displayed.
Without CONSULT–II
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
2. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
D4
Condition
(–)
7 (L/Y)
Ground
8 (G)
B
Mirror motor is
operated UP or
DOWN
Mirror motor is
operated LEFT or
RIGHT
C
D
PIIA0197E
E
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
F
Changes between
3.4 (close to peak) –
0.6 (close to valley)
G
Changes between
3.4 (close to right edge) –
0.6 (close to left edge)
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror sensor LH is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
LIIA1306E
SE
3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1
1.
2.
3.
33 (W/L) - 5 (W/L)
41 (W/G) - 6 (W/G)
4.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and door
mirror LH connector D4 terminals 5, 6.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
L
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and ground.
33 (W/L) - Ground
41 (W/G) - Ground
Revision: October 2004
M
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1307E
SE-59
K
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2
1.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 6, 22 and door
mirror LH connector D4 terminals 7, 8.
6 (L/Y) - 7 (L/Y)
22 (G) - 8 (G)
2.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 6, 22 and ground.
6 (L/Y) - Ground
22 (G) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror
Assembly" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check
LIIA1308E
EIS004G3
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction in memory control
NOTE:
If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
2. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR
With CONSULT–II
Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SE RH R–L, MIR/SE RH U–
D" in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION or
UNIT]
Contents
MIR/SE RH R–L
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (LH/
RH) is displayed.
MIR/SE RH U–D
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (UP/
DOWN) is displayed.
1.
2.
Without CONSULT–II
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
Mirror motor is
operated UP or
DOWN
7 (R/B)
D107
Condition
Ground
8 (L/W)
Mirror motor is
operated LEFT or
RIGHT
Voltage(V)
(Approx.)
Changes between
3.4 (close to peak) –
0.6 (close to valley)
Changes between
3.4 (close to left edge) –
0.6 (close to right edge)
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror sensor RH is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
PIIA0197E
LIIA1309E
SE-60
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1
1.
2.
3.
33 (W/L) - 5 (W/L)
41 (W/G) - 6 (W/G)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and door
mirror RH connector D107 terminals 5, 6.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and ground.
33 (W/L) - Ground
41 (W/G) - Ground
D
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
B
E
LIIA1311E
F
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2
1.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 5, 21 and door
mirror RH connector D107 terminals 7, 8.
5 (R/B) - 7 (R/B)
21 (L/W) - 8 (L/W)
2.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 5, 21 and ground.
5 (R/B) - Ground
21 (L/W) - Ground
G
SE
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror
Assembly" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
LIIA1312E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-61
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection
EIS004G4
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
With “SLIDE SW-FR, SLIDE SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the sliding switch to check ON/OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
SLIDE SW–
FR
"ON/
OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal
is displayed.
SLIDE SW–
RR
"ON/
OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal
is displayed.
PIIA0313E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Sliding switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
0
(–)
11 (R/B)
Other than above
P2
Ground
26 (P/B)
Battery voltage
Sliding switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
Other than above
0
PIIA4577E
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and power seat switch LH connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 11, 26 and power seat switch LH connector P8 terminals 1, 7.
11 (R/B) - 7 (R/B)
26 (P/B) - 1 (P/B)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 11, 26 and ground.
11 (R/B) - Ground
26 (P/B) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1125E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-62
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK SLIDING SWITCH
A
Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
7
P8
3
1
Continuity
Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Sliding switch ON (FORWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91,
"Removal and Installation" .
Reclining Switch Inspection
B
C
D
LIIA1126E
E
EIS004G5
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
With “RECLN SW-FR, RECLN SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR,
operate the reclining switch to check ON/OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
F
G
Contents
H
RECLN SW
–FR
“ON/
OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR)
signal is displayed.
RECLN SW
–RR
“ON/
OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR)
signal is displayed.
SE
J
PIIA0313E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
M
Reclining switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
Other than above
Ground
27 (G/B)
L
(–)
12 (O/B)
P2
K
Reclining switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
Other than above
0
Battery voltage
PIIA4580E
0
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Reclining switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
SE-63
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 12, 27 and power seat switch LH connector P8 terminals 9, 10.
12 (O/B) - 9 (O/B)
27 (G/B) - 10 (G/B)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 12, 27 and ground.
12 (O/B) - Ground
27 (G/B) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1127E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. RECLINING SWITCH INSPECTION
Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows.
Connector
Terminal
9
P8
3
10
Condition
Continuity
Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Reclining switch ON (FORWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
SE-64
LIIA1128E
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection
EIS004G6
1. CHECK FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
With “LIFT FR SW-UP, LIFT FR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR,
operate the lifting switch (front) to check ON/OFF operation.
B
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
C
LIFT FR SW–
DN
"ON/
OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch
(DOWN) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW–
UP
"ON/
OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP)
signal is displayed.
D
PIIA0323E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
E
F
G
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
(–)
H
Lifting switch (front) ON
(DOWN operation)
13 (L/B)
P2
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ground
28 (Y/B)
Other than above
0
Lifting switch (front) ON
(UP operation)
Other than above
SE
Battery voltage
0
PIIA4583E
J
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting switch (front) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
L
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 13, 28 and power seat switch LH connector P2 terminals 5, 6.
13 (L/B) - 5 (L/B)
28 (Y/B) - 6 (Y/B)
3.
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 13, 28 and ground
13 (L/B) - Ground
28 (Y/B) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1129E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-65
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows.
Connector
Terminals
Condition
5
P8
3
6
Continuity
Lifting switch (front) ON
(DOWN operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Lifting switch (front) ON
(UP operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection
LIIA1130E
EIS004G7
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
With “LIFT RR SW-UP, LIFT RR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR,
operate the rear lifting switch to check ON/OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or
UNIT]
Contents
LIFT RR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged
from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged
from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is
displayed.
PIIA0323E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(DOWN operation)
0
(–)
14 (G/W)
Other than above
P2
Ground
29 (R/W)
Battery voltage
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(UP operation)
Other than above
0
PIIA4586E
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting switch (rear) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
SE-66
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
14 (G/W) - 8 (G/W)
29 (R/W) - 2 (R/W)
3.
A
Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 14, 29 and power seat switch connector P8 terminals
2, 8.
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 14, 29 and ground.
14 (G/W) - Ground
29 (R/W) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
D
LIIA1131E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
F
3. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows.
G
Terminals
Connector
(+)
(–)
8
P8
3
2
Condition
Continuity
H
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(DOWN operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(UP operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
SE
LIIA1132E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection
J
K
EIS004G8
1. CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch LH.
Check continuity between power seat switch LH connector P8
terminal 3 and ground.
3 (B) – Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1133E
Revision: October 2004
SE-67
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection
EIS004G9
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
With “PEDAL SW-FR, PEDAL SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR,
operate the pedal adjusting switch to check ON/OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or
UNIT]
Contents
PEDAL SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status
judged from the pedal adjusting switch
(FR) signal is displayed.
PEDAL SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status
judged from the pedal adjusting switch
(RR) signal is displayed.
PIIA4590E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (BACKWARD operation)
0
(–)
15 (L)
Other than above
P2
Ground
30 (R)
Battery voltage
PIIA4591E
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (FORWARD operation)
Other than above
0
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and pedal adjusting switch.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 15, 30 and pedal adjusting switch connector M96 terminals 2, 3.
15 (L) - 2 (L/Y)
30 (R) - 3 (R)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 15, 30 and ground.
15 (L) - Ground
30 (R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0726E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-68
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH
A
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch as follows.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
(–)
2
M96
1
3
Condition
B
Continuity
Pedal adjusting switch ON
(BACWARD operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Pedal adjusting switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
C
D
LIIA1014E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace pedal adjusting switch. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
E
4. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
F
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector M96 terminal 1 and ground.
1 (B) - Ground
G
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
SE
LIIA1015E
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-69
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check
EIS004GA
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT–II
Check the operation on “MIR CHNG SW–R” or “MIR CHNG SW–L"
in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION
or UNIT]
Contents
MIR CHNG S
W–R
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the changeover switch
(switching to RIGHT) signal is displayed.
MIR CHNG S
W–L
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the changeover switch
(switching to LEFT) signal is displayed.
PIIA0191E
Without CONSULT–II
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
2. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
2 (LG)
M33
Condition
(-)
Ground
18 (BR/W)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Changeover switch
RIGHT position
0
Other than above
5
Changeover switch
LEFT position
0
Other than above
5
PIIA4767E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door mirror remote control switch (changeover switch) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 2, 18 and door mirror remote control
switch connector D10 terminals 2, 3.
2 (LG) - 3 (LG)
18 (BR/W) - 2 (BR/W)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 2, 18 and ground.
2 (LG) - Ground
18 (BR/W) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1821E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
SE-70
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH)
A
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch as follows.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
(–)
3
D10
13
2
Condition
B
Continuity
Changeover switch
RIGHT position
Yes
Other than above
No
Changeover switch LEFT
position
Yes
Other than above
No
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check
LIIA1822E
E
EIS004GB
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH) SIGNAL
With CONSULT–II
Check
the
operation
on
“MIR CON SW–UP/DN”
“MIR CON SW–RH/LH” in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION
or UNIT]
G
and
H
Contents
MIR CON SW
–UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (UP)
signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW
–DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch
(DOWN) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW
–RH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch
(RIGHT) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW
–LH
“ON/OFF”
1.
2.
SE
J
PIIA0199E
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch
(LEFT) signal is displayed.
K
Without CONSULT–II
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
Terminals (Wire color)
Connector
(+)
(-)
3 (Y/B)
4 (V/W)
M33
Ground
19 (SB)
20 (GR)
L
M
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Mirror switch UP operation
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch LEFT operation
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch DOWN operation
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch RIGHT operation
0
Other than above
5
PIIA4771E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
SE-71
F
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and
door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminals 4, 5, 6, 14.
3 (Y/B) - 6 (Y/B)
4 (V/W) - 5 (V/W)
19 (SB) - 14 (SB)
20 (GR) - 4 (GR)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and ground.
3 (Y/B) - Ground
4 (V/W) - Ground
19 (SB) - Ground
20 (GR) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1823E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH)
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch as follows.
Connector
Terminals
4
5
D10
13
6
14
Switch condition
Continuity
Mirror switch RIGHT operation
Yes
Other than above
No
Mirror switch LEFT operation
Yes
Other than above
No
Mirror switch UP operation
Yes
Other than above
No
Mirror switch DOWN operation
Yes
Other than above
No
LIIA1824E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
Revision: October 2004
SE-72
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection
EIS004GC
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch.
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminal 7 and ground.
13 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
LIIA1825E
2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH)
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch as follows.
Connector
Terminals
Condition
3
D10
13
2
F
G
Continuity
Changeover switch
RIGHT position
Yes
Other than above
No
Changeover switch LEFT
position
Yes
Other than above
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
H
SE
J
LIIA1822E
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-73
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
EIS004GD
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
With “SET SW, MEMORY SW1, MEMORY SW2” on the DATA
MONITOR, operate the switch to check ON/OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or
UNIT]
Contents
MEMORY SW1
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat
memory switch 1 signal is displayed.
MEMORY SW2
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat
memory switch 2 signal is displayed.
SET SW
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the setting
switch signal is displayed.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat memory switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA0309E
2. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat memory switch.
Operate the setting switch and seat memory switch.
Check continuity between seat memory switch as follows.
Connector
Terminal
1
D5
2
4
3
Condition
Continuity
Memory switch 1 ON
Yes
Memory switch 1: OFF
No
Memory switch 2: ON
Yes
Memory switch 2: OFF
No
Set switch: ON
Yes
Set switch: OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace seat memory switch.
Revision: October 2004
LIIA1020E
SE-74
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
9 (LG/B) - 1 (LG/B)
24 (G/O) - 3 (G/O)
25 (P/L) - 2 (P/L)
3.
A
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 9, 24, 25 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 1, 2, 3.
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
D
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 9, 24, 25 and ground.
9 (LG/B) - Ground
24 (G/O) - Ground
25 (P/L) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
PIIA4576E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
F
4. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check continuity between seat memory switch D5 terminal 4 and
ground.
4 (B) - Ground
H
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
SE
J
PIIA4821E
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
K
EIS004GE
1. CHECK FUNCTION
L
With CONSULT-II
With “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in ACTIVE TEST, check operation.
Test item
MEMORY SW
INDCTR
M
Description
The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat memory switch indicator lamp circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA0319E
Revision: October 2004
SE-75
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
2. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat memory switch.
Check voltage between seat memory switch connector D5 terminal 5 and ground.
5 (Y/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
PIIA4595E
3. CHECK SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 12, 13 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 6, 7.
12 (P) - 6 (P)
13 (Y/G) - 7 (Y/G)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 12, 13 and ground.
12 (P) - Ground
13 (Y/G) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1022E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect seat memory switch.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M33 terminals 12, 13 and ground.
12 (P) - Ground
13 (Y/G) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
NG
>> Replace seat memory switch.
LIIA1134E
Revision: October 2004
SE-76
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection
EIS004GF
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and door
mirror connector D4 (LH), D107 (RH) terminals 5, 6.
33 (W/L) - 5 (W/L)
41 (W/G) - 6 (W/G)
4.
C
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and ground.
33 (W/L) - Ground
41 (W/G) - Ground
D
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
LIIA1023E
2. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
G
Connect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror
LH.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M34 terminal 33 and ground.
33 (W/L) - Ground
H
SE
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
J
LIIA1136E
3. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M34 terminal 41 and ground.
41 (W/G) - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
LIIA1135E
Revision: October 2004
F
SE-77
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A/T Device (Detent Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift)
EIS004GG
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT
SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF.
Monitor item
[OPERATION or UNIT]
DETENT SW
“ON/
OFF”
Contents
The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other
than P position (ON)” judged from the park switch signal
is displayed.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device (detent switch) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA0291E
2. CHECK A/T DEVICE (DETENT SWITCH) HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T device and driver seat control unit.
Check continuity between A/T device connector M203 terminal 6
and driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 21.
6 (L/R) - 21 (L/R)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between A/T device connector M203 terminal 6
and ground.
6 (L/R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1024E
3. CHECK A/T DEVICE
Check continuity between A/T device (detent switch) as follows.
Connector
M203
Terminals
5
Condition
6
Continuity
P position
No
Other than
P position
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device is OK.
NG
>> Replace A/T device.
LIIA0991E
Revision: October 2004
SE-78
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A/T Device (Detent Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift)
EIS0062J
1. CHECK FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT
SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF.
B
Monitor item
[OPERATION or UNIT]
DETENT SW
“ON/
OFF”
Contents
C
The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other
than P position (ON)” judged from the park switch signal
is displayed.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device (detent switch) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
PIIA0291E
F
2. CHECK A/T DEVICE (DETENT SWITCH) HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T device and driver seat control unit.
Check continuity between A/T device connector M68 terminal 8
and driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 21.
8 (L/R) - 21 (L/R)
4.
E
G
H
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminal 21 and ground.
21 (L/R) - Ground
SE
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
LIIA1992E
K
3. CHECK DETENTION SWITCH
Check continuity between A/T device (detent switch) as follows.
L
Connector
M68
Terminals
1
Condition
8
Continuity
P position
No
Other than
P position
Yes
M
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device is OK.
NG
>> Replace A/T device.
LIIA1993E
Revision: October 2004
SE-79
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection
EIS004GH
1. CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Touch "BCM" with “DOOR SW DR” on the DATA MONITOR, check
ON/OFF operation when the front door is open and closed.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
DOOR SW
DR*
“ON/
OFF”
Contents
Door open (ON)/door closed (OFF) status judged from
the front door switch is displayed.
*:Refer to SE-40, "DATA MONITOR" .
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switch LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA0291E
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door switch LH.
Check continuity between front door switch LH terminal 2 and body ground part of front door switch (crew
cab) or body ground (king cab).
Connector
B8
Terminals
2
Ground
Condition
Continuity
With the front door switch
LH pressed
No
With the front door switch
LH released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace front door switch LH.
LIIA0948E
3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M19 terminal 47 and
front door switch LH connector B8 terminal 2.
47 (SB) - 2 (SB)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector M19 terminal 47 and
ground.
47 (SB) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switch LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: October 2004
LIIA1027E
SE-80
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection
EIS004GI
1. CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
P2
17 (W)
B
C
Condition
Signal
(–)
Ground
D
Pedal
adjusting
switch ON
(FORWARD or
BACKWARD
operation)
PIIA4599E
PIIA4814E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace driver
seat control unit.
● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace automatic driver seat control unit.
2. CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 2
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
M33
10 (L)
Condition
Signal
K
Pedal
adjusting
switch ON
(FORWARD or
BACKWARD
operation)
L
PIIA4816E
M
PIIA4813E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace driver
seat control unit.
Revision: October 2004
H
J
(–)
Ground
G
SE
Check signal between automatic drive positioner control unit connector ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
E
SE-81
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3. CHECK UART LINE HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 1, 17, and automatic drive positioner connector M33
terminals 10, 26.
1 (L) - 10 (L)
17 (W) - 26 (W)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2
terminals 1, 17 and ground.
PIIA4598E
1 (L) - Ground
17 (W) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
Does the automatic drive positioner operate when the driver seat control unit is exchanged?
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
Revision: October 2004
SE-82
2005 Titan
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Removal and Installation
EIS004GJ
A
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" and BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-83
2005 Titan
POWER SEAT
POWER SEAT
Schematic
PFP:87016
EIS004GK
WIWA0596E
Revision: October 2004
SE-84
2005 Titan
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —
EIS004GL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0597E
Revision: October 2004
SE-85
2005 Titan
POWER SEAT
WIWA0598E
Revision: October 2004
SE-86
2005 Titan
POWER SEAT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0599E
Revision: October 2004
SE-87
2005 Titan
HEATED SEAT
HEATED SEAT
Description
●
●
●
PFP:87335
EIS004GM
When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit.
To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated.
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim.
WIIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
SE-88
2005 Titan
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —
EIS004GO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0600E
Revision: October 2004
SE-89
2005 Titan
HEATED SEAT
WIWA0601E
Revision: October 2004
SE-90
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
FRONT SEAT
Removal and Installation
PFP:87000
A
EIS004GP
Driver Seat
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0615E
Revision: October 2004
SE-91
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
1.
Headrest
2.
Headrest holder with multi position
lock
3.
Seatback assembly
4.
Lumbar support lever
5.
Power seat switch escutcheon
6.
Recliner switch knob
7.
Slide switch knob
8.
Driver power seat frame assembly
9.
LH outer leg cover
10. Driver seat wiring harness
11. Bolt cover
12. Seat cushion outer finisher
13. Outer pedestal finisher
14. Seat cushion front finisher
15. Seat cushion inner finisher
16. Seat cushion frame
17. Seat cushion heating element
18. Seat cushion pad
19. Seat cushion trim cover
20. Armrest bolt cover
21. Armrest assembly
22
Headrest holder
25. Seatback pad
28
23
Seatback board
24. Seatback frame
26
Seatback trim cover
27
Seat slide switch
Recliner switch
Revision: October 2004
SE-92
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
Center Seat
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0616E
1.
Armrest assembly
2.
Rear hinge cover
3.
Inboard armrest support cover
4.
Armrest support
5.
Armrest bolt cover
6.
Seat belt tongue
Revision: October 2004
SE-93
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
7.
Center seat pan
10. Seat cushion pad
8.
LH pedestal support
9.
RH pedestal support
11. Seat cushion cover
12. Lower armrest pivot cover
13. Upper armrest pivot cover
14. Armrest pivot release lever
15. Armrest release bracket
16. Armrest pivot arm
17. Inboard lower pivot cover
Revision: October 2004
SE-94
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
Passenger Seat
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0617E
1.
Headrest
2.
Headrest holder with multi position
lock
3.
Seatback board
4.
Armrest assembly
5.
Armrest bolt cover
6.
Fold flat link bar
Revision: October 2004
SE-95
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
7.
Outboard reclining arm outer cover
8.
Outboard reclining arm inner cover
9.
Inboard reclining arm inner cove
10. Latch cover
11. LH outer leg cover
12. Outboard reclining arm inner cover
13. Seat cushion inner cover
14. Passenger seat wiring harness
15. Inner front leg cover
16. Power seat frame assembly
17. NVH assembly
18. Seat cushion front finisher
19. Outer pedestal finisher
20. Seat cushion outer finisher
21. Seat cushion assembly
22. Power seat switch escutcheon
23. Slide switch knob
24. Recliner switch knob
25. Seatback assembly
26. Headrest holder
27. Seatback frame
28. Seatback trim cover
29. Seatback pad
30. Recliner switch
31. Seat slide switch
REMOVAL
When removing or installing the seat trim, handle it carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and
wait at least 3 minutes.
●
When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy.
●
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while installing the seat. Always handle it with
care.
●
After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced.
●
Front passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect
the Occupant Classification System calibration.
●
Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly.
1. Slide the seat until the four body mounting bolts are visible and a tool can be inserted.
NOTE:
● If disassembling the seat after removal, set the front/rear cushion lifters to the top position.
2. Disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
3. Disconnect the side air bag module harness connector.
4. Remove the four body mounting bolts.
5. Disconnect the power seat harness connectors and remove the seat from the vehicle.
NOTE:
When removing and installing the seat, use shop cloths to protect the vehicle from damage.
INSTALLATION
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS004GQ
SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD
WARNING:
Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag
module prior to disposal of seatback assembly.
NOTE:
Only complete outboard seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags.
NOTE:
Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position.
Revision: October 2004
SE-96
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
1.
Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback.
A
B
C
PIIA0163E
D
2.
Remove the retainer.
E
F
G
SIIA0113E
H
3.
Remove the headrest.
4.
From inside of the seatback, squeeze the headrest holder tabs
at the base of the stay pipe and pull the up to remove.
NOTE:
Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/
rear and right/left).
SE
J
K
LRS023
5.
L
Remove the snap ring and the lumbar support lever knob.
M
PIIA1156E
6.
Disconnect the seatback heater harness. Remove the seatback trim and pad assembly. Remove the hog
ring to separate the seatback trim from the pad and the heater unit.
REMOVAL OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
After completing the steps 1 and 2 of "Seatback Trim and Pad", remove the side air bag harness connector from the seat cushion.
Remove the mounting bolts (2 for each side) and seatback assembly.
Revision: October 2004
SE-97
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD
CAUTION:
●
Front passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect
the Occupant Classification System calibration.
●
Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly.
●
When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage.
●
During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in.
Do not add additional clips.
●
The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to SRS-67, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
1. Remove the power seat switch knobs and power seat switch
escutcheon (or recline knobs on manual seat).
LIIA0681E
2.
Remove the front seat cushion finisher (inner).
LIIA0285E
3.
4.
Remove the power seat switch screws (or lift knobs on manual seats).
Remove four bolts and the seat cushion assembly.
SIIA0503E
5.
Remove the retainer on the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater.
Revision: October 2004
SE-98
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT
6.
On the drivers seat only, after removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to separate
the trim cover from the pad and seat cushion heater unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SE-99
2005 Titan
REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT
Removal and Installation
PFP:88300
EIS004GR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Lift the seat cushion into the stowed position.
Remove the seatbelt and seat anchor bolts.
LIIA1187E
3.
Release the seatback and remove the seat.
LIIA1188E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
SE-100
2005 Titan
REAR SEAT
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS004GS
A
RH
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0408E
Revision: October 2004
SE-101
2005 Titan
REAR SEAT
1.
Seatback pad
2.
Seatback trim
3.
Headrest
4.
Headrest guide
5.
Seatback frame
6.
Armrest cup holder assembly
7.
Armrest
8.
Inner inboard pivot cover
9.
Inboard outer pivot cover
11.
Inboard seat support
12. Grocery bag hooks
10. Seat pivot anchor
13. Seat cushion frame
14. Outboard seat support
15. Seat cushion release assembly
16. Release lever handle
17. Outboard pivot cover
18. Seatback latch striker
19. Seatback latch release strap
20. Seat cushion pad
21. Seat cushion trim
22. Seatback latch
Revision: October 2004
SE-102
2005 Titan
REAR SEAT
LH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0407E
1.
Seatback pad
2.
Headrest
3.
Seatback latch
4.
Seatback latch release strap
5.
Seatback latch striker
6.
Seatback frame
Revision: October 2004
SE-103
2005 Titan
REAR SEAT
7.
8.
Release lever trim
9.
10. Seat cushion release handle
Outboard hinge cover
11.
RH support
12. Grocery bag hooks
13. LH support
14. Seatback pivot anchor
15. Seat cushion pad
16. Seat cushion trim
17. Seatback trim
18. Inboard pivot cover
19. Inner inboard pivot cover
20. Headrest guide
Revision: October 2004
SE-104
Seat cushion frame
2005 Titan
H RESTRAINTS
A
B
SECTION
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER” Service ..................................... 3
Occupant Classification System Precaution ............ 3
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ............................................... 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 5
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ....... 6
SRS Configuration ................................................... 6
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ..... 7
Front Side Air Bag .................................................... 7
Side Curtain Air Bag ................................................. 7
Occupant Classification System ............................... 7
Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ........... 8
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 9
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................. 9
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ....................................... 9
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR ............... 9
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 10
SRS Components Parts Location ............................11
Schematic .............................................................. 12
Wiring Diagram — SRS — ..................................... 13
CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG) ........................... 19
CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 19
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
WITH CONSULT-II .............................................. 19
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 20
Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II) ..... 20
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE... 20
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 21
SRS Operation Check ............................................ 21
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 21
Trouble Diagnosis With CONSULT-II ..................... 23
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 23
Revision: October 2004
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 28
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED
FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) .............. 31
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 31
Trouble Diagnosis Without CONSULT-II ................. 37
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 37
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART ........... 38
Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does
Not Turn Off ............................................................ 42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 42
Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does
Not Turn On ............................................................ 43
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 ........................... 43
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE .................................... 44
Removal and Installation ........................................ 44
REMOVAL ........................................................... 44
INSTALLATION ................................................... 45
SPIRAL CABLE ........................................................ 46
Removal and Installation ........................................ 46
REMOVAL ........................................................... 46
INSTALLATION ................................................... 47
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .............. 49
Removal and Installation ........................................ 49
REMOVAL ........................................................... 49
INSTALLATION ................................................... 49
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION .................. 50
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ............................ 52
Removal and Installation ........................................ 52
REMOVAL ........................................................... 52
INSTALLATION ................................................... 52
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ........................ 53
Removal and Installation ........................................ 53
REMOVAL ........................................................... 53
INSTALLATION ................................................... 53
CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................................... 55
Removal and Installation ........................................ 55
REMOVAL ........................................................... 55
INSTALLATION ................................................... 55
SRS-1
2005 Titan
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ................... 56
Removal and Installation ........................................ 56
REMOVAL ........................................................... 56
INSTALLATION .................................................... 56
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................... 57
Removal and Installation ........................................ 57
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..................................... 58
Removal and Installation ........................................ 58
REMOVAL ........................................................... 58
INSTALLATION .................................................... 58
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. ................................. 58
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ 59
Removal and Installation ........................................ 59
DISPOSALOFAIRBAGMODULEANDSEATBELT
PRE-TENSIONER ..................................................... 60
Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner ...................................................................... 60
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL ..................... 60
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG
MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) ................... 61
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT
Revision: October 2004
BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) .....................................................................65
DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULES AND
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS WHILE
MOUNTED IN VEHICLE ......................................65
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER ......................................66
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ..........................................67
For Frontal Collision ................................................67
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) ...................................................................67
For Side Collision ....................................................68
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION .................................................................68
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE
COLLISION ..........................................................68
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) ......68
For Rollover ............................................................69
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER...69
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER ...................................................................69
SRS INSPECTION (FOR ROLLOVER) ...............70
SRS-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EHS0013S
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
B
C
D
E
F
G
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
EHS0013T
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
SRS
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bags and seat belt
I
pre-tensioners to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or J
rust before installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
K
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad
side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing
L
down.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
M
Occupant Classification System Precaution
EHS0013U
Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly.
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution
EHS0013V
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" in PG section
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section
Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-3
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EHS0013W
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV99105300
(J-41246)
Air bag module bracket
Anchoring air bag module
S-NT354
—
(J-39401-100)
Passenger air bag module bracket
Anchoring passenger air bag module
LHIA0045E
KV99106400
(J-38381)
Deployment tool
Disposing of air bag modules and front seat
belt pre-tensioners
S-NT357
—
(J-38381-80)
Deployment tool adapter for front driver air bag module, passenger air bag
module, side curtain air bag module
and front seat belt pre-tensioner
Connecting between the deployment tool and
front driver air bag module, passenger air bag
module, side curtain air bag module and front
seat belt pre-tensioner
WHIA0089E
—
(J-38381-65)
Deployment tool adapter for front passenger air bag module (for service kit
level)
Connecting between the deployment tool and
front passenger air bag module
SHIA0173E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-4
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV99109000
(J-44230)
Deployment tool adapter for front side
air bag module
Connecting between the deployment tool and
front side air bag module
A
B
C
ZZA1190D
—
(J-42057-UPD)
Air bag key set
Part of kit (J-42057)
Removing and installing air bag lock
D
E
LRS210
F
Commercial Service Tools
EHS0013X
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
G
Description
(J-1859A)
Steering wheel puller
Removing steering wheel
SRS
I
LHIA0043E
(J-42578)
Steering wheel puller legs
Removing steering wheel
J
K
LHIA0044E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-5
2005 Titan
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SRS Configuration
PFP:28556
EHS0013Y
WHIA0224E
The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is activated while the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module, front passenger air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioners are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision.
SRS configurations for some collision modes are as follows:
SRS configuration
Frontal collision
Left side collision
Right side collision
Rollover
Driver air bag module
×
—
—
—
Front passenger air bag module
×
—
—
—
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
×
—
—
×
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
×
—
—
×
Front LH side air bag module (if equipped)
—
×
—
—
Front RH side air bag module (if equipped)
—
—
×
—
LH side curtain air bag module (if equipped)
—
×
—
×
RH side curtain air bag module (if equipped)
—
—
×
×
Revision: October 2004
SRS-6
2005 Titan
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for
both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates
simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal
collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level
occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is
immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are
securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and
the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the
load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt
web tension while maintaining force.
EHS0013Z
A
B
C
D
SRS444
E
Front Side Air Bag
EHS00140
Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies.
Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown.
F
G
SRS
WHIA0008E
Side Curtain Air Bag
I
EHS00141
Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining.
Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as
shown.
J
K
L
WHIA0041E
Occupant Classification System
EHS001B5
The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if
child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the
occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension
sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on
classification of passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor
unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor
Revision: October 2004
SRS-7
2005 Titan
M
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will turn
on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator.
WHIA0187E
Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors
EHS00143
The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors.
●
Driver front air bag module
●
Passenger front air bag module
●
LH side curtain air bag module
●
RH side curtain air bag module
●
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
●
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector
to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with
the connector housing.
WHIA0103E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-8
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
PFP:00004
A
EHS00144
CAUTION:
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to do so in
this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors.
●
Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify SRS wiring harnesses. If a harness is damaged, replace
it with a new one.
●
Keep ground connections clean.
B
C
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
D
The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II.
The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows:
E
User mode
Diagnosis mode
Display type
“AIR BAG” warning lamp
X
X
ON-OFF operation
CONSULT-II
—
X
Monitoring
F
G
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the sympSRS
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Information From Customer
WHAT - Vehicle model
WHEN - Date, Frequencies
WHERE - Road conditions
HOW - Operating conditions, Symptoms
I
J
Preliminary Check
Check that the following parts are in good order.
●
Battery (Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery" .)
●
Fuse (Refer to SRS-13, "Wiring Diagram — SRS —" .)
●
System component-to-harness connections
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-9
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
WHIA0098E
*1: SRS-9
*2: SRS-21
*3: SRS-31
*4: SRS-37
Revision: October 2004
SRS-10
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Components Parts Location
EHS00145
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
WHIA0221E
1.
Side curtain air bag modules
(If equipped)
2.
Front RH side air bag module
(If equipped)
3.
RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
(If equipped)
4.
Front RH seatbelt pre-tensioner
5.
Belt tension sensor
6.
Occupant classification system sensor
7.
Occupant classification system con- 8.
trol unit
Front passenger air bag off
indicator
9.
Front passenger air bag module
J
K
10. Crash zone sensor
11. Air bag warning lamp
12. Spiral cable
13. Driver air bag module
14. Front LH seatbelt pre-tensioner 15. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
(If equipped)
16. Front LH side air bag module
(If equipped)
17. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-11
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Schematic
EHS00146
WHWA0126E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-12
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — SRS —
EHS00147
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
WHWA0117E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-13
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHWA0118E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-14
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
WHWA0123E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-15
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHWA0124E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-16
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
WHWA0125E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-17
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHWA0122E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-18
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)
EHS001B6
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
AIR BAG diagnostic mode
Description
A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis
mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs.
B
SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The
stored results will remain until memory erasing is executed.
C
SELF-DIAG [PAST]
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle
model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on
the CONSULT-II screen, as shown. When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the
part number for the compatibility. After installation,
replacement with a correct unit can be checked by
confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-II screen.
For NISSAN MODEL A60, the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit discriminated numbers assigned
are F627 with front side and side curtain air
bag modules and F611 without front side and
side curtain air bag modules.
D
E
F
G
ARS366
SRS
CONSULT-II Function
EHS00148
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II
From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis
mode.
I
J
K
L
SRS803
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode
To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
SRS804
Revision: October 2004
SRS-19
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
●
“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
A current self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II
screen in real time.
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is
detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
SRS701
●
“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-II screen by
touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-II and select “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELFDIAG [PAST]” mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is
not erased, the User mode will continue to show the system
malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if
the malfunction is repaired completely.
SRS702
●
“TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased.
Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)
●
●
EHS00149
The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis
mode”.
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
SHIA0183E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-20
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis
mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
SRS Operation Check
EHS0014A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Checking SRS Operation Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp—User Mode
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the
examples.
A
B
C
D
E
F
BF-1845D
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-21
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Warning lamp examples
“AIR BAG” warning lamp operation-User mode-
SRS condition
●
No malfunction is detected.
●
No further action is necessary.
●
The system is malfunctioning and
needs to be repaired as indicated.
●
Air bag is deployed.
●
Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed.
●
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
●
Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning.
●
SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is
malfunctioning.
●
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
●
Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning.
Reference item
—
SHIA0011E
Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE 2" or SRS-37,
"DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" .
SHIA0012E
Go to SRS-67, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
Go to SRS-42, "Trouble Diagnosis:
“AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn Off" .
SHIA0013E
Go to SRS-43, "Trouble Diagnosis:
“AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn On" .
SHIA0014E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-22
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis With CONSULT-II
EHS0014B
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected
in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
B
C
D
E
BDIA0013E
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
G
SRS
I
BCIA0029E
5.
J
Touch “AIR BAG”.
If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
K
L
M
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]".
BCIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-23
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7.
Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]".
WHIA0151E
If no malfunction is detected on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]" even
though malfunction is detected in "SRS Operation Check", refer to
SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" , to diagnose the following cases:
●
Self-diagnostic result "SELF-DIAG [PAST]" (previously stored in
the memory) might not be erased after repair.
●
The SRS system malfunctions intermittently.
SRS701
Revision: October 2004
SRS-24
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]")
Diagnostic item
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode.
●
●
NO DTC IS DETECTED
●
Low battery voltage (Less than
9V)
●
Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased
after repair.
Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
B
●
Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" .
C
●
Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" .
D
●
No malfunction is detected.
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1049] or [B1054]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral
cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050] or [B1055]
●
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051] or [B1056]
●
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1052] or [B1057]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1065] or [B1070]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1066] or [B1071]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067] or [B1072]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
3. Replace front passenger air bag
module. (Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1068] or [B1073]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable).
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).
Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.
—
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
E
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace driver air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
F
4. Replace the spiral cable.
5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
G
6. Replace the related harness.
SRS
Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
●
Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to
each other.
Crash zone sensor
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the crash zone sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1134]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1135]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
●
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1137]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
SRS-25
I
J
K
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1033] or [B1034]
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
Revision: October 2004
A
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module).
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1129]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1130]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
●
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1132]
●
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1118] or [B1119]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module).
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1113] or [B1114]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
[B1086]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1087]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
[B1089]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
[B1081]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1082]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
[B1084]
●
Revision: October 2004
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
SRS-26
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1150]
●
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1151]
●
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
●
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1153]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1145]
●
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1146]
●
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1148]
●
CONTROL UNIT
[B1XXX]
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1017], [B1020] or [B1021]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
●
Occupant classification system is malfunctioning.
Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted.
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
[B1022]
C
D
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
E
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
F
3. Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
G
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
SRS
I
3. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning.
SRS-27
J
K
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Revision: October 2004
B
2. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
●
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1018]
A
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
●
Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
BELT TENSION SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1019]
3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly.
4. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[B1023]
3. Replace front passenger air bag off
indicator.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is
eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still
observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Final Check of SRS Using CONSULT-II—Diagnosis Mode
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected
in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
BDIA0013E
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-28
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
7.
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”,
repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 8.
If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the
malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely.
SRS
I
J
SRS701
8.
Touch “ERASE”.
NOTE:
Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction
(“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”).
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not
erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the
operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired
completely.
L
M
WHIA0152E
9.
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II to “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
BCIA0031E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-29
K
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
11. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode.
12. Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II.
13. Go to SRS-21, "Checking SRS Operation Using “AIR BAG”
Warning Lamp—User Mode" .
SRS702
Revision: October 2004
SRS-30
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)
Check SRS Repair History
A
1. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY THAT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT WAS NOT ERASED AFTER REPAIR
B
Check repair history of the SRS.
Have any previous repairs been made to the SRS?
Yes
>> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased
after repair. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
No
>> Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" .
C
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
Check SRS Intermittent Malfunction Using CONSULT-II—Diagnosis Mode
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected
in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
E
F
G
SRS
I
BDIA0013E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
J
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-31
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
BCIA0031E
7.
If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to
step 10.
WHIA0152E
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch
“BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”.
SRS702
8.
Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
NOTE:
With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed.
BCIA0031E
9. Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
10. Touch “PRINT”.
11. Compare diagnostic codes to SRS-33, "CONSULT-II Diagnostic
Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG
RECORD")" .
12. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears.
13. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II, and both battery cables.
WHIA0153E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-32
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
14. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”,
that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the
Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component.
15. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking.
CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD")
Diagnostic item
●
Low battery voltage (Less than
9V)
●
Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
●
Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased
after repair.
●
Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" .
●
●
Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" .
NO DTC IS DETECTED
●
No malfunction is detected.
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1049] or [B1054]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral
cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050] or [B1055]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051] or [B1056]
●
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1052] or [B1057]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1065] or [B1070]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1066] or [B1071]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067] or [B1072]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1068] or [B1073]
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).
Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.
Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
C
D
E
—
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace driver air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the spiral cable.
F
G
SRS
5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.
I
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
J
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front passenger air bag
module. (Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
●
Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to
each other.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
Crash zone sensor
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
K
L
M
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1033] or [B1034]
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the crash zone sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
Revision: October 2004
B
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode.
A
SRS-33
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1134]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1135]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
●
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1137]
●
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1129]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1130]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
●
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1132]
●
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1118] or [B1119]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module).
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module).
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1113] or [B1114]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
[B1086]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1087]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
[B1089]
●
Revision: October 2004
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
SRS-34
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
[B1081]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1082]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
[B1084]
●
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1150]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1151]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
●
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1153]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1145]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1146]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1148]
●
CONTROL UNIT
[B1XXX]
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1017], [B1020] or [B1021]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
G
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
3. Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
I
J
K
5. Replace the related harness.
L
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
SRS-35
SRS
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
5. Replace the related harness.
Revision: October 2004
E
F
Occupant classification system is malfunctioning.
Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning.
D
3. Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
●
●
C
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1018]
B
5. Replace the related harness.
2. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
[B1022]
A
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
●
Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
BELT TENSION SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1019]
3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly.
4. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[B1023]
3. Replace front passenger air bag off
indicator.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-36
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Without CONSULT-II
EHS0014C
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
Inspect SRS Malfunction Using "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp—Diagnosis Mode
NOTE:
SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second.
3. Wait more than 3 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two more times (3 times total).
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
SRS is now in Diagnosis mode.
"AIR BAG" warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-37
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART
SHIA0026E
WHIA0197E
WHIA0198E
WHIA0199E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-38
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
WHIA0200E
D
E
F
G
WHIA0201E
SRS
I
J
K
WHIA0202E
L
M
WHIA0203E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-39
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHIA0204E
WHIA0205E
WHIA0206E
WHIA0222E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-40
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
WHIA0223E
D
E
F
G
WHIA0211E
SRS
I
J
K
WHIA0212E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-41
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off
EHS0014D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
1. CHECK CONDITION OF AIR BAG MODULE
Inspect for any deployed air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners.
Are any air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners deployed?
YES >> Refer to SRS-67, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN
Replace 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON.
Does the fuse blow again?
YES >> Repair main harness.
NO
>> Inspection End.
4. CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER and touch
“START”.
Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-II?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Visually inspect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connections. If the connections are OK, replace
the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-58,
"Removal and Installation" .
BCIA0030E
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION
Check for loose connections between the combination meter and the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-58, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Properly connect the combination meter and air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. If
“AIR BAG” warning lamp still does not turn off, replace the wiring harness.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-42
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On
EHS0014E
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
1. CHECK METER FUSE
B
Check the 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK METER FUSE AGAIN
D
Replace 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON.
Does the fuse blow again?
YES >> Repair the related harness.
NO
>> Inspection End.
E
3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINA-
F
TION METER
Disconnect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors and turn ignition switch ON.
G
Does “AIR BAG” warning lamp turn on?
YES >> Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-58, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Check the combination meter power and ground circuits. If OK, replace combination meter. SRS
Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-43
2005 Titan
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:K8510
EHS0014F
WHIA0159E
1.
Horn harness
2.
Steering wheel hook
3.
Inflator harness
4.
Side lids RH/LH
5.
Driver air bag module
6.
Steering wheel
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a
driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced.
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove the left and right side bolts.
2. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel.
3. Disconnect the air bag harness and horn connectors, then
remove the driver air bag module.
● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
WHIA0184E
CAUTION:
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
●
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
●
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
●
Do not disassemble air bag module.
●
Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
●
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
●
Revision: October 2004
SRS-44
2005 Titan
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
●
●
Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
air bag module.
A
B
C
SBF814E
D
INSTALLATION
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
●
If driver air bag module is being replaced due to deployment, spiral cable must also be replaced. Refer to
SRS-46, "SPIRAL CABLE" .
●
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-45
2005 Titan
SPIRAL CABLE
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
PFP:25554
EHS0014G
WHIA0109E
1.
Steering wheel
2.
Lighting and turn signal switch
3.
Wiper and washer switch
4.
Spiral cable
5.
Driver air bag module connector
6.
Column cover upper
7.
Column assembly
8.
Column cover lower
9.
Screw (Do not remove)
10. Screw
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
2. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-44, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove the steering wheel center nut.
4. Disconnect the steering wheel switch/ horn connector from the spiral cable.
5. Remove the steering wheel using Tool.
Tool number:
6.
A: J-1859A
B: J-42578
Remove the column cover upper and lower.
WHIA0124E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-46
2005 Titan
SPIRAL CABLE
7.
Remove wiper washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
A
B
C
LHIA0034E
D
8.
While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward
driver door and disconnect from base.
E
F
G
LHIA0035E
9.
SRS
Remove the screws, release the clip, and remove the spiral
cable.
CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble spiral cable.
● Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
I
J
K
LHIA0036E
10. Remove the spiral cable connectors.
CAUTION:
With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel
beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5
turns from the right end position.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make
sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral
position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right
end position and ending with the knob at the top.
●
If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering
Angle Sensor Neutral Position" for steering angle sensor adjustment.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure
no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation
Check" .
Revision: October 2004
SRS-47
WGIA0038E
2005 Titan
L
M
SPIRAL CABLE
CAUTION:
●
The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the
cable is not installed in the correct position.
●
With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap
by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of
turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise
about 2.5 turns from the right end position.
Steering wheel center nut
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
PHIA0275E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-48
2005 Titan
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:K8515
A
EHS0014H
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors.
Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger
air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Refer to
SRS-50, "WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION" for wiring harness modification procedure.
B
C
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module con- D
nectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least E
3 minutes.
●
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX" .
F
2. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember.
3. Disconnect the air bag module electrical connectors.
G
● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
SRS
4. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer
to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL" .
5. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove air
I
bag module from the instrument panel assembly.
WHIA0110E
CAUTION:
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front
of air bag module.
●
Always place front passenger air bag module with caution
label side facing upward.
●
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air
bag module or harness connectors.
●
Do not disassemble air bag module.
●
Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
●
Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
●
●
●
J
K
L
M
WHIA0111E
Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
air bag module.
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
Original Passenger Air Bag Module
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-49
2005 Titan
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
CAUTION:
●
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
●
Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module
1.
Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument
panel pad assembly.
WHIA0110E
2.
3.
Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL" .
Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air
bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket.
CAUTION:
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
●
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors.
Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger
air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module.
NOTE:
The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger
air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle
that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is
not required.
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
●
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors.
2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors.
3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-50
2005 Titan
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
4.
Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used
vehicle wiring harness.
A
B
C
LHIA0017E
D
5.
Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink
tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in
the heat shrink tubing.
E
F
G
WHIA0062E
6.
7.
8.
SRS
Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire.
Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness.
Locate the front passenger air bag service replacement connector that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to
access the yellow service replacement connector and remove
the dust cover from the connector.
I
J
K
WHIA0118E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-51
2005 Titan
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:K8EH0
EHS0014I
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag
module prior to disposal of seatback assembly.
Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced. Refer to
SE-97, "Removal of seatback assembly" .
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front
of air bag module.
1. Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-96, "REMOVAL" .
2. Remove the seatback trim and pad. Refer to SE-96, "SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD" .
WHIA0053E
3. Remove the seatback rear finisher and remove the retainers
securing the seat cushion trim. Refer to SE-98, "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" .
4. Remove air bag module harness clips.
5. Remove the fasteners from the front side air bag module and remove the front side air bag module.
CAUTION:
When using a clip removal tool to remove the seatback
board, take care not to damage the harness for front side air
bag module.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front
of air bag module.
●
Always place the front side air bag module with the mounting stud side facing down.
●
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdrivers, etc.) into
air bag module or harness connectors.
●
Do not disassemble air bag module.
●
Do not expose front seatback assembly (side air bag module) to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
●
Replace front seatback assembly (side air bag module) if it
has been dropped or sustained an impact.
●
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
air bag module.
●
If front side air bag module is deployed, the front seatback
assembly must be replaced.
●
SRS623
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag
module prior to disposal of seatback assembly.
Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced. Refer to SE-97, "Removal of seatback assembly"
.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-52
2005 Titan
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:985P0
A
EHS0014J
B
C
D
E
F
LHIA0055E
G
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
SRS
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a
direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
I
least 3 minutes.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-43, "Removal and Installation" .
J
2. Disconnect front side curtain air bag module connectors.
● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors" .
K
3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag module.
CAUTION:
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
●
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
●
Do not disassemble air bag module.
●
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
●
Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped
or sustained an impact.
●
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
air bag module.
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
●
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
Revision: October 2004
SRS-53
2005 Titan
L
M
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
●
After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is
detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
Revision: October 2004
SRS-54
2005 Titan
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:98531
A
EHS0014K
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector.
3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
B
C
D
E
LHIA0056E
CAUTION:
●
Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
●
Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
F
G
INSTALLATION
SRS
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
●
After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS21, "SRS Operation Check" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-55
2005 Titan
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:98830
EHS0014L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and
Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts.
3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
LHIA0062E
CAUTION:
Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
●
Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
●
Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
●
Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
●
INSTALLATION
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
Revision: October 2004
SRS-56
2005 Titan
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Removal and Installation
PFP:86884
A
EHS0014M
For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-57
2005 Titan
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:28556
EHS0014N
REMOVAL
LHIA0063E
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" .
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors.
4. Remove fixing bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
●
Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
●
Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
●
Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
CAUTION:
●
The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "⇐" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the
vehicle as equipped. Refer to SRS-19, "CONSULT-II Function" .
Revision: October 2004
SRS-58
2005 Titan
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:98852
A
EHS0014O
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an
integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to SE-96,
"REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and SE-98, "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
SRS-59
2005 Titan
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:00014
EHS0014P
Before disposing of air bag module, seat belt pre-tensioner or vehicle equipped with such systems, deploy
the systems. If such systems have already been deployed due to an accident, dispose of them as indicated in “SRS-66, "DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .
When deploying the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, always use the Special Service Tool
Deployment tool [KV99106400 (J-38381)].
When deploying the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the
component being deployed.
When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, a fairly loud noise is made, followed by smoke
being released. The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale smoke since it irritates the
throat and can cause choking.
Only deploy one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner at a time.
Due to heat, leave deployed air bag module unattended for at least 30 minutes after deployment. Leave
deployed seat belt pre-tensioner unattended for at least 10 minutes after deployment.
Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
Never apply water to the deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
Wash your hands thoroughly after finishing work.
Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6 m (20 ft) on all sides when deploying air bag
module or seat belt pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle.
Use a voltmeter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged.
Do not dispose of the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner undeployed.
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL
Connecting to Battery
CAUTION:
The battery must show voltage of 9.6V or more.
Remove the battery from the vehicle and place it on dry wood blocks
approximately 5 m (16 ft) away from the vehicle.
●
Wait 3 minutes after the vehicle battery is disconnected before
proceeding.
●
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
and black clip to negative terminal.
Make sure the polarity is correct. The right side lamp in the tool
marked “deployment tool power” should glow with a green
light. If the right side lamp glows red, reverse the connections
to the battery.
SRS019
Deployment Tool Check
Place the deployment tool switch to the ON position. The left side
lamp in the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage” should illuminate. If it does not illuminate, replace the tool.
SBF266H
Revision: October 2004
SRS-60
2005 Titan
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery connected)
A
Switch operation
Left side lamp, green*
“AIR BAG CONNECTOR
VOLTAGE”
Right side lamp, green*
“DEPLOYMENT TOOL
POWER”
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
B
*: If this lamp glows red, the tool is connected to the battery incorrectly. Reverse the connections and make sure the lamp glows green.
C
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)
D
Unless the vehicle is being scrapped, deploying the air bag in the
vehicle is not recommended. This may cause damage to the vehicle
interior.
Anchor the deployment Tool in a vise secured to a firm foundation
during deployment.
Tool number:
E
KV99105300 (J-41246)
F
SRS232-C
G
Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle)
1.
Using wire, secure air bag module to the Tool at two places.
Tool number:
2.
SRS
KV99105300 (J-41246)
CAUTION:
Use wire of at least 1 mm (0.04 in) diameter.
Firmly secure Tool with air bag module attached, in a vise.
Tool number:
I
KV99105300 (J-41246)
J
LHIA0037E
3.
K
Connect deployment Tool A to air bag module connector using
Tool B.
L
Tool number:
A: KV99106400 (J-38381)
B: KV99105300 (J-38381-80)
M
WHIA0120E
4.
Connect red clip of Tool to battery positive terminal and black
clip to negative terminal.
Tool number:
5.
6.
KV99106400 (J-38381)
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
LHIA0038E
Revision: October 2004
SRS-61
2005 Titan
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
CAUTION:
When deploying the driver air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
Deployment of Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle)
1.
Firmly secure the Tool A in a vise, then secure Tool B to Tool A.
Tool number:
A: KV99105300 (J-41246)
B: J-39401-100
LHIA0040E
2.
Match the two holes in the Tool and front passenger air bag
module and fix them with two bolts.
Tool number:
J-39401-100
LHIA0041E
3.
Connect deployment Tool A to front passenger air bag module
using Tool B.
Tool number:
A: KV99106400 (J-38381)
B: KV99105300 (J-38381-80)
LHIA0050E
4.
Connect red clip of the Tool to battery positive terminal and
black clip to negative terminal.
Tool number:
KV99106400 (J-38381)
5.
The lamp on the right side of the Tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
6. Press the button on the Tool. The left side lamp on the tool,
marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air
bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
●
When deploying the front passenger air bag module, do not
stand on the deploying side.
●
Stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-62
SRS020-B
2005 Titan
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Deployment of Front Side Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle)
1.
A
Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter holes in air bag module
bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246)] at the positions shown.
B
C
SRS490-B
2.
3.
Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] in a vise.
Insert the stud bolts of side air bag module into the two holes in
air bag module bracket (held in vise) and fix them with two M6
nuts.
CAUTION:
Side air bag module should be secured to air bag module
bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] in a vise with stud bolt
side facing down.
D
E
F
G
SHIA0197E
SRS
4.
Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] connector to connector on air bag module using deployment tool
adapter [SST: KV99109000 (J-44230)].
I
J
K
WHIA0045E
5.
6.
7.
L
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
and black clip to negative terminal.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the front side air bag module, stand at
least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
M
LHIA0064E
Deployment of Side Curtain Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle)
NOTE:
The side curtain air bag module has a front and rear inflator that are connected by the fabric of the side curtain
air bag. Follow the procedure to cut the fabric from the inflators, and then follow the procedure to deploy each
inflator.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-63
2005 Titan
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
1.
Cut the inflator from side curtain air bag module.
SHIA0198E
2.
Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] to the
inflator using deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80).
WHIA0073E
3.
Put the inflator connected with the deployment tool [SST:
KV99106400 (J-38381)] into a tire without a wheel.
SHIA0201E
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Put the tire with the inflator onto another tire without wheel. Add
an additional tire without a wheel and then a tire mounted on a
wheel on top.
CAUTION:
Tie all tires together with a strap in order to keep them
standing.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
and black clip to negative terminal.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
WHIA0048E
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the side curtain air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the side curtain air bag module.
Repeat this procedure to deploy the second inflator.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-64
2005 Titan
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)
1.
A
Firmly grip pre-tensioner in a vise and cut off the webbing.
B
C
WHIA0122E
2.
Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] connector to front seat belt pre-tensioner using deployment tool adapter
(J-38381-80).
D
E
F
G
LHIA0039E
SRS
3.
4.
5.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
and black clip to negative terminal.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “seat belt pre-tensioner connector voltage”, will
illuminate and the seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the front seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at
least 5 m (16 ft) away from the seat belt pre-tensioner.
I
J
K
SRS242
L
DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULES AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS WHILE
MOUNTED IN VEHICLE
When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners while they are mounted in
vehicle.
CAUTION:
When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, ensure vehicle is empty.
1. Disconnect both the vehicle battery cables and wait 3 minutes.
2. Disconnect all air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner harness connectors.
3. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] to air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
For driver air bag module, use deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80).
For front passenger air bag module, use deployment tool adapter (J-38381-65).
For side curtain air bag module, use deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80).
For side air bag module, use deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99109000 (J-44230)].
Revision: October 2004
SRS-65
2005 Titan
M
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
4.
5.
6.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
and black clip to negative terminal.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy.
CAUTION:
Deploy only one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner at
a time.
SRS006-C
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Deployed air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are very hot. Before disposing of air bag module or
seat belt pre-tensioner, wait at least 30 minutes or 10 minutes, respectively. Seal them in a plastic bag before
disposal.
CAUTION:
●
Never apply water to a deployed air bag module or seat belt
pre-tensioner.
●
Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag
module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
●
No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module
deployment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since it
irritates the throat and can cause choking.
●
Do not disassemble air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
●
Air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners cannot be
reused.
●
Wash your hands thoroughly after finishing work.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-66
SBF276H
2005 Titan
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
PFP:00015
A
EHS001DD
Check the SRS components using the following table.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part
Air bag module
(driver and front passenger air bag module)
SRS is activated
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
B
C
SRS is NOT activated
1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with
the wheel.
3. Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the
instrument panel.
D
E
4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
5. If damaged—REPLACE. Install air bag modules with new fasteners.
Air bag modules must be deployed before disposal.
Crash zone sensor
REPLACE the crash
zone sensor and
bracket with new fasteners.
F
1. Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals
for deformities, and harness for binding.
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone
sensor and bracket.
G
3. Install the crash zone sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
SRS
5. If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
REPLACE
Install seat belt pretensioner assemblies
with new fasteners.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and
harness for binding.
I
2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3. Check retractor for smooth operation.
J
4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
6. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new
fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before disposal.
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.
L
2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Steering wheel
1. Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
2. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall.
6. If damaged—REPLACE.
Spiral cable
REPLACE the spiral
cable.
1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall.
5. If damaged—REPLACE.
Revision: October 2004
K
SRS-67
2005 Titan
M
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Part
Occupant classification system (Passenger seat)
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
1. Remove passenger seat.
2. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
3. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
4. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
6. If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.
Harness and connectors
1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
2. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness.
Instrument panel
1. Visually check instrument panel for damage.
REPLACE the instrument panel assembly.
2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.
3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel.
For Side Collision
EHS001DE
Check the SRS components using the following table.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION
1.
–
–
–
2.
–
3.
Replace the following components:
Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
Diagnosis sensor unit
(LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION
1.
–
2.
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION)
Part
(LH or RH) side curtain air bag module
Front (LH or RH) side
air bag module
SRS is activated
Replace the side curtain air bag module.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
REPLACE front seatback assembly.
SRS is NOT activated
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on
the collision side.
2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module.
3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module.
4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
Air bag modules must be deployed before disposal.
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seatback on
the collision side.
2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-68
2005 Titan
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Part
SRS is activated
(LH or RH) side air
bag (satellite) sensor
REPLACE the side
air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision
side with new fasteners.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness
connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with
new fasteners.
1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
Diagnosis sensor unit
SRS is NOT activated
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag
(satellite) sensor.
A
B
3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
C
5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
D
2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
E
1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly.
If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly,
–
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
–
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
F
2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors
for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
G
4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
SRS
6. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
The seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before disposal.
Seat (with front side
air bag)
REPLACE front seatback assembly.
1. Visually check the seat on the collision side.
2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
deformities.
–
Harness, connectors and terminals
–
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front
seat)
I
J
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front
seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Center inner pillar
1. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
2. If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar.
Trim/headlining
K
L
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
For Rollover
EHS001DF
Check the SRS components using the following table.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" .
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER
1.
–
–
2.
–
3.
Replace the following components:
Diagnosis sensor unit
(LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER
1.
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-69
2005 Titan
M
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
–
2.
If the front seatback assembly is damaged, the front seatback assembly must be replaced.
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR ROLLOVER)
Part
(LH or RH) side curtain air bag module
Front (LH or RH) side
air bag module
SRS is activated
Replace the side curtain air bag module.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
REPLACE front seatback assembly.
SRS is NOT activated
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on
the collision side.
2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module.
3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module.
4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
Air bag modules must be deployed before disposal.
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on
the collision side.
2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly.
(LH or RH) side air
bag (satellite) sensor
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE the side
air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision
side with new fasteners.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness
connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with
new fasteners.
1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag
(satellite) sensor.
3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly.
If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly,
–
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
–
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors
for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
The seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies must be deployed before disposal.
Seat (with front side
air bag)
REPLACE front seatback assembly.
1. Visually check the seat on the collision side.
2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
deformities.
–
Harness, connectors and terminals
–
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front
seat)
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front
seatback is damaged, the front seatback assembly must be replaced.
Center inner pillar
1. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
2. If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar.
Trim/headlining
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
Revision: October 2004
SRS-70
2005 Titan
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
A
B
SECTION
TRANSFER
C
TF
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer
Control Unit Replacement ........................................ 4
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN ....... 4
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD
SHIFT SWITCH AT “2WD” .................................... 5
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD
SHIFT SWITCH AT “4H” OR “4LO” ....................... 5
Precautions .............................................................. 6
Service Notice .......................................................... 6
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 7
PREPARATION ........................................................... 8
Special Service Tools ............................................... 8
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 10
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................11
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ....................................11
TRANSFER FLUID ................................................... 12
Replacement .......................................................... 12
DRAINING ........................................................... 12
FILLING ............................................................... 12
Inspection ............................................................... 12
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL ................ 12
4WD SYSTEM .......................................................... 13
Cross-section View ................................................ 13
Power Transfer ....................................................... 14
POWER TRANSFER DIAGRAM ........................ 14
POWER TRANSFER FLOW ............................... 15
System Description ................................................ 15
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE ........................ 15
WAIT DETECTION SWITCH .............................. 15
4LO SWITCH ...................................................... 15
ATP SWITCH ...................................................... 15
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT ............................. 15
TRANSFER RELAY ............................................ 15
4WD SHIFT SWITCH AND INDICATOR LAMP... 16
4WD WARNING LAMP ....................................... 17
Revision: October 2004
ATP WARNING LAMP ......................................... 17
System Diagram ..................................................... 18
COMPONENTS FUNCTION ............................... 18
CAN Communication .............................................. 19
............................................................................ 19
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 20
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis ......................... 20
BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 20
Location of Electrical Parts ..................................... 21
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 22
Wiring Diagram — T/F — ....................................... 23
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms .................. 27
Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values ............................................................ 27
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION
TABLE ................................................................. 27
CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD) ..... 31
FUNCTION .......................................................... 31
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE ................ 31
SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE ............................... 33
DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 34
Self-Diagnostic Procedure ...................................... 36
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
CONSULT-II) ....................................................... 36
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT
CONSULT-II) ....................................................... 36
ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS ................................. 37
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM .................... 38
Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit ...... 38
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 38
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 38
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 39
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 40
Transfer Control Unit .............................................. 40
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 40
Output Shaft Revolution Signal (TCM) ................... 41
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 41
Vehicle Speed Sensor (ABS) .................................. 42
TF-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 42
4LO Switch ............................................................. 42
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 42
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 43
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 44
4WD Shift Switch .................................................... 45
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 45
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 45
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 46
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 48
Wait Detection Switch ............................................. 49
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 49
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 49
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 50
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 51
PNP Switch Signal (TCM) ...................................... 52
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 52
Actuator Motor ........................................................ 53
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 53
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 53
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 54
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 56
Actuator Position Switch ......................................... 57
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 57
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 57
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 58
Transfer Control Device .......................................... 60
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 60
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 60
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 61
Engine Speed Signal (ECM) ................................... 63
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 63
CAN Communication Line ...................................... 64
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 64
ATP Switch ............................................................. 64
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 64
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND
REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 64
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 65
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............. 68
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp and 4LO Indicator Lamp
Do Not Turn ON ...................................................... 68
SYMPTOM: .......................................................... 68
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 68
Revision: October 2004
4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON .................70
SYMPTOM: ..........................................................70
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp or 4LO Indicator Lamp
Do Not Change .......................................................73
SYMPTOM: ..........................................................73
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................73
ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON ..................74
SYMPTOM: ..........................................................74
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................74
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats Flashing ..........76
SYMPTOM: ..........................................................76
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................77
4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly .......................77
SYMPTOM: ..........................................................77
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................78
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT ...................................79
Removal and Installation .........................................79
REMOVAL ............................................................79
INSTALLATION ....................................................79
FRONT OIL SEAL .....................................................80
Removal and Installation .........................................80
REMOVAL ............................................................80
INSTALLATION ....................................................81
REAR OIL SEAL .......................................................82
Removal and Installation .........................................82
REMOVAL ............................................................82
INSTALLATION ....................................................82
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE ..............................84
Removal and Installation .........................................84
REMOVAL ............................................................84
INSTALLATION ....................................................84
AIR BREATHER HOSE .............................................86
Removal and Installation .........................................86
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY ...........................................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
REMOVAL ............................................................87
INSTALLATION ....................................................87
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................88
COMPONENTS ...................................................88
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................90
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................95
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................96
PLANETARY CARRIER .......................................... 104
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 104
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 104
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 105
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 106
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ............................................ 108
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 108
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 108
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 108
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 109
SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 110
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 110
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 110
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 110
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 111
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 112
TF-2
2005 Titan
General Specifications ..........................................112
Pinion Gear End Play ........................................... 112
Clearance Between Shift Fork and Sleeve ........... 112
A
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-3
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EDS001MG
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
EDS001MH
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN
1.
2.
Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD”, “4H”, “4LO”, “4H” and “2WD” in order. (Stay at each switch position for at
least 2 seconds.)
Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
SDIA2481E
●
●
If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit.
Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table below.
Revision: October 2004
TF-4
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
Transfer position adjustment pattern
4WD shift switch condition
A
Refer procedure
4WD shift switch is under “2WD” condition when engine is being stopped.
TF-5, "METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD
SHIFT SWITCH AT “2WD”"
4WD shift switch is under “4H” or “4LO” condition when engine is being stopped.
TF-5, "METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD
SHIFT SWITCH AT “4H” OR “4LO”"
NOTE:
Method of adjustment can be chosen voluntarily, according to location of 4WD shift switch.
C
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “2WD”
Select adjustment pattern
1.
2.
B
TF
Start engine. (Stay for at least 10 seconds.)
Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Indicator lamp condition
E
Refer procedure
When 4WD shift indicator lamp or 4LO indicator lamp is flashing.
TF-5, "Pattern A"
Except for above.
TF-5, "Pattern B"
F
Pattern A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to “N” position with brake pedal depressed. (Stay for at least 2
seconds.)
Turn 4WD shift switch to “4LO” position. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.)
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Start engine.
Erase self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-34, "How to erase self-diagnostic results" (with CONSULT-II) or TF-37,
"ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without CONSULT-II).
Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. Refer to TF-4, "CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN" .
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check.
G
H
I
J
Pattern B
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to “N” position with brake pedal depressed. (Stay for at least 2
seconds.)
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Start engine.
Erase self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-34, "How to erase self-diagnostic results" (with CONSULT-II) or TF-37,
"ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without CONSULT-II).
Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. Refer to TF-4, "CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN" .
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “4H” OR “4LO”
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine. (Stay for at least 10 second.)
Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to “N” position with brake pedal depressed. (Stay for at least 2
seconds.)
Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.)
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Start engine.
Erase self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-34, "How to erase self-diagnostic results" (with CONSULT-II) or TF-37,
"ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without CONSULT-II).
Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. Refer to TF-4, "CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN" .
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Revision: October 2004
TF-5
2005 Titan
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
●
EDS001MI
Before connecting or disconnecting the transfer control
unit harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect battery ground cable. Because battery voltage is
applied to transfer control unit even if ignition switch is
turned “OFF”.
SEF289H
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from transfer control unit, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break).
When connecting pin connectors make sure that there are
not any bends or breaks on transfer control unit pin terminal.
SEF291H
●
Before replacing transfer control unit, perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection and make sure
transfer control unit functions properly. Refer to TF-27,
"Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
MEF040DB
Service Notice
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EDS001MJ
After overhaul refill the transfer with new transfer fluid.
Check the fluid level or replace the fluid only with the vehicle parked on level ground.
During removal or installation, keep inside of transfer clear of dust or dirt.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the transfer. It is important to prevent the internal
parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matchmarks are required, be
certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them
with a new ones if necessary.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should replaced any time the transfer is disassembled.
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, use it.
Observe the specified torque when assembling.
Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them.
Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
Revision: October 2004
TF-6
2005 Titan
PRECAUTIONS
●
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transfer.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
A
EDS001MK
When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When performing trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
●
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-7
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EDS001ML
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV40104000
(
—
)
Flange wrench
●
Removing self-lock nut
●
Installing self-lock nut
a: 85 mm (3.35 in)
b: 65 mm (2.56 in)
NT659
ST33290001
(J-34286)
Puller
●
Removing front oil seal
●
Removing rear oil seal
●
Removing metal bushing
●
Installing front oil seal
●
Installing rear oil seal
●
Installing rear bearing
●
Installing front bearing
ZZA0601D
KV38100500
(
—
)
Drift
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
ZZA0811D
KV40105310
(
—
)
Drift
●
Installing dust cover
a: 89 mm (3.50 in) dia.
b: 80.7 mm (3.17 in) dia.
ZZA1003D
KV38100200
(
—
)
Drift
●
Removing sun gear assembly
●
Removing input bearing
●
Installing sun gear assembly
a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
ZZA1143D
ST30720000
(J-25405)
Drift
●
Installing input bearing
●
Installing input oil seal
●
Installing carrier bearing
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55 mm (2.17 in) dia.
ZZA0811D
KV32102700
(
—
)
Drift
●
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
ZZA0534D
Revision: October 2004
TF-8
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV40104830
(
—
)
Drift
●
A
Installing input oil seal
B
a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
b: 63.5 mm (2.50 in) dia.
C
ZZA1003D
ST35300000
(
—
)
Drift
●
Removing carrier bearing
●
Installing metal bushing
●
Removing front bearing
TF
a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
E
NT073
ST30021000
(J-22912-01)
Puller
●
Removing carrier bearing
●
Removing front bearing
●
Removing rear bearing
F
G
H
ZZA0537D
ST33710000
(
—
)
Drift
●
Removing needle bearing
●
Removing metal bushing
●
Removing rear bearing
I
a: 89 mm (3.5 in)
b: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia.
c: 24 mm (0.94 in) dia.
J
ZZA1057D
ST35325000
(
—
)
Drift bar
●
Removing metal bushing
a: 215 mm (8.46 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
c: M12 × 1.5P
K
L
NT663
ST33220000
(
—
)
Drift
●
Installing needle bearing
M
a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia.
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
c: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
ZZA1046D
Revision: October 2004
TF-9
2005 Titan
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST27863000
(
—
)
Drift
●
Installing carrier bearing
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
ZZA1003D
ST30901000
(J-26010-01)
Drift
●
Installing rear bearing
●
Installing front bearing
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35.2 mm (1.38 in) dia.
ZZA0978D
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001MM
Tool name
Description
Puller
●
Removing companion flange
●
Removing mainshaft rear bearing
●
Removing mainshaft rear bearing
●
Removing retaining pin
NT077
Puller
ZZB0823D
Pin punch
a: 6mm (0.24in) dia.
NT410
Power tool
●
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
TF-10
2005 Titan
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
A
EDS001MN
Symptom
3
1
Hard to shift or will not shift
1
1
2
2
TF-96
TF-105
BEARING (Worn or damaged)
TF-110
SHIFT FORK (Worn or damaged)
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
TF-88
Transfer fluid leakage
O-RING (Worn or damaged)
2
LIQUID GASKET (Damaged)
1
GEAR (Worn or damaged)
Noise
TRANSFER FLUID (Wrong)
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
TRANSFER FLUID (Level low)
Reference page
TRANSFER FLUID (Level too high)
TF-12
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
3
3
B
C
TF
E
F
G
2
2
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-11
2005 Titan
TRANSFER FLUID
TRANSFER FLUID
Replacement
PFP:31001
EDS001MO
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Stop engine.
Remove the drain plug and gasket. Drain the fluid.
Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
WDIA0214E
FILLING
1.
2.
Remove the filler plug and gasket.
Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug hole.
Fluid grade:
Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Fluid capacity:
Approx. 2.0
3.
4.
(2-1/8 US pt, 1-3/4 Imp pt)
CAUTION:
Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes.)
Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again.
Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Inspection
WDIA0211E
EDS001MP
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer assembly or around it.
Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking fluid level.
Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
WDIA0211E
Revision: October 2004
TF-12
2005 Titan
4WD SYSTEM
4WD SYSTEM
Cross-section View
PFP:33084
A
EDS001MQ
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
WDIA0222E
1.
Mainshaft
2.
Rear case
4.
7.
3.
Oil pump assembly
Clutch gear
5.
2-4 shift fork
6.
2-4 sleeve
Drive chain
8.
Sprocket
9.
L-H shift fork
10. L-H sleeve
11. Internal gear
12. Front case
13. Planetary carrier assembly
14. Sun gear assembly
15. L-H shift rod
16. Control shift rod
17. Companion flange
18. Front drive shaft
19. Transfer control device
Revision: October 2004
TF-13
2005 Titan
M
4WD SYSTEM
Power Transfer
EDS001MR
POWER TRANSFER DIAGRAM
WDIA0223E
1.
Mainshaft
2.
Clutch gear
3.
2-4 sleeve
4.
Drive chain
5.
Sprocket
6.
L-H sleeve
7.
Planetary carrier assembly
8.
Sun gear assembly
9.
Front drive shaft
Revision: October 2004
TF-14
2005 Titan
4WD SYSTEM
POWER TRANSFER FLOW
A
B
C
TF
E
SDIA2213E
System Description
F
EDS001MS
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Actuator motor and actuator position switch are integrated. Transfer control device shifts from 4H-4LO and
between 2WD-4WD.
Actuator Motor
Actuator motor is operated by signal from transfer control unit and it operates control shift rod so as to shift
from 4H-4LO and between 2WD-4WD.
Actuator Position Switch
G
H
I
Actuator position switch detects actuator motor position and sends it to transfer control unit.
WAIT DETECTION SWITCH
Wait detection switch detects if transfer gear is in 4WD by 2-4 shift fork position.
NOTE:
If 4WD shift switch is switched to 4H or 4LO, transfer is not in 4WD completely when gear does not engage.
(Wait detection system is operating.)
J
K
4LO SWITCH
4LO switch detects if transfer gear is under 4LO condition by L-H shift fork position.
L
ATP SWITCH
ATP switch detects if transfer gear is under neutral condition by L-H shift fork position.
NOTE:
Transfer gear may be under neutral condition when shifting between 4H-4LO.
M
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
●
●
Transfer control unit controls transfer control device by input signals of each sensor and each switch, and
it directs shifts from 4H-4LO and 2WD-4WD.
Self-diagnosis can be done.
TRANSFER RELAY
Transfer relay applies power to transfer control unit.
Revision: October 2004
TF-15
2005 Titan
4WD SYSTEM
4WD SHIFT SWITCH AND INDICATOR LAMP
SDIA2363E
4WD Shift Switch
4WD shift switch is able to select from 2WD, 4H or 4LO.
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp
●
●
Displays driving conditions selected by 4WD shift switch with rear indicator, front and center indicator
while engine is running. (When 4H or 4LO, 4LO indicator lamp also works on. And when 4WD warning
lamp is turned on, all 4WD shift indicator lamps are turned off.)
Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately 1 second after the engine starts if system is normal.
4LO Indicator Lamp
●
●
Displays 4LO condition while engine is running. 4LO indicator lamp flashes if transfer gear does not shift
completely under 4H⇔4LO. In this condition, transfer may be under neutral condition and A/T parking
mechanism may not be operated.
Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately 1 second after the engine starts if system is normal.
Revision: October 2004
TF-16
2005 Titan
4WD SYSTEM
4WD WARNING LAMP
Turns ON or FLASH when there is a malfunction in 4WD system.
Also turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately 1 second after the engine starts if system is normal.
A
4WD Warning Lamp Indication
B
Condition
Lamp check
4WD system malfunction
4WD warning lamp
Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON.
Turns OFF after engine start.
ON
(For indicated malfunction items, see the “NOTE”)
During self-diagnosis
Large difference in diameter of front/
rear tires
C
TF
Flickers at malfunction mode.
Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds
(Continuing to flash until turning ignition switch OFF)
Other than above (system normal)
E
OFF
NOTE:
4WD warning lamp is turned on when the following one or more parts are malfunctioning.
●
Vehicle speed signal (from ABS)
●
CAN communication line
●
AD converter
●
Engine speed signal
●
4WD shift switch
●
Wait detection switch
●
Actuator motor
●
Transfer control device
●
PNP switch signal
F
G
H
I
ATP WARNING LAMP
When A/T selector lever is in “P” position, vehicle may move because A/T parking mechanism does not operate when transfer is under neutral condition. ATP warning lamp is turned on to indicate this condition to the
driver.
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-17
2005 Titan
4WD SYSTEM
System Diagram
EDS001MT
PDIA0152E
COMPONENTS FUNCTION
Component
Function
Transfer control unit
Controls transfer control device and switches 4H-4LO under 4WD condition and 2WD-4WD.
Transfer control device
Actuator motor and actuator position switch are integrated so as to switch driving types.
Actuator motor
Controls shift rods by signals from transfer control unit.
Actuator position switch
Detects actuator motor position.
Wait detection switch
Detects that transfer is under 4WD condition.
4LO switch
Detects that transfer is under 4LO condition.
ATP switch
Detects that transfer is under neutral condition.
4WD shift switch
Able to select from 2WD, 4H or 4LO.
4WD warning lamp
●
Illuminates if malfunction is detected in electrical system of 4WD system.
●
There is 1 blink in 2 seconds if rotation difference of front wheels and rear wheels is large.
ATP warning lamp
Indicates that A/T parking mechanism does not operate when A/T selector lever is in “P” position
and transfer is under neutral condition.
4WD shift indicator lamp
Displays driving condition selected by 4WD shift switch.
4LO indicator lamp
Displays 4LO condition.
Transmits the following signals via CAN communication to Transfer control unit.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
●
Vehicle speed signal
●
Stop lamp switch signal (brake signal)
Transmits the following signal via CAN communication to Transfer control unit.
TCM
ECM
Revision: October 2004
●
Output shaft revolution signal
●
A/T position indicator signal (PNP switch signal)
Transmits engine speed signal via CAN communication to Transfer control unit.
TF-18
2005 Titan
4WD SYSTEM
CAN Communication
EDS001MU
A
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-19
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis
PFP:00004
EDS001MV
BASIC CONCEPT
●
●
To perform trouble diagnosis, it is the most important to have understanding about vehicle systems (control and mechanism) thoroughly.
It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection.
First of all, reproduce symptoms, and understand them fully.
Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some cases,
it will be necessary to check symptoms by driving vehicle with
customer.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. It is dangerous to make an
easy guess like "maybe the customer means that...," or
"maybe the customer mentions this symptom".
SEF233G
●
●
●
It is essential to check symptoms right from the beginning in
order to repair malfunctions completely.
For intermittent malfunctions, reproduce symptoms based on
interview with customer and past examples. Do not perform
inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent malfunctions are
caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be effective to shake
suspected harness or connector by hand. When repairing without any symptom diagnosis, you cannot judge if malfunctions
have actually been eliminated.
After completing diagnosis, always erase diagnostic memory.
Refer to TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
For intermittent malfunctions, move harness or harness connector by hand. Then check for poor contact or reproduced open circuit.
Revision: October 2004
TF-20
SEF234G
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Location of Electrical Parts
EDS001MW
A
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WDIA0208E
Revision: October 2004
TF-21
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram
EDS001MX
WDWA0024E
Revision: October 2004
TF-22
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — T/F —
EDS001MY
A
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WDWA0025E
Revision: October 2004
TF-23
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WDWA0026E
Revision: October 2004
TF-24
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WDWA0027E
Revision: October 2004
TF-25
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WDWA0028E
Revision: October 2004
TF-26
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms
EDS001MZ
If 4WD warning lamp turns ON, perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-36, "Self-Diagnostic Procedure" .
Symptom
Condition
Check item
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator
lamp do not turn ON
(4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator
lamp check)
Ignition switch: ON
4WD warning lamp does not turn ON
(4WD warning lamp check)
Ignition switch: ON
Power supply and ground for transfer
control unit
A
Reference page
TF-68
B
Combination meter
Power supply and ground for transfer
control unit
C
TF-70
Combination meter
TF
4WD shift switch
Wait detection switch
4WD shift indicator lamp or 4LO indicator
lamp does not change
4LO switch
Engine running
TF-73
ATP switch
E
Transfer inner parts
CAN communication line
F
4WD shift switch
PNP switch signal
ATP warning lamp does not turn ON
Engine running
ATP switch
TF-74
G
Combination meter
Transfer inner parts
H
Wait detection switch
4WD shift indicator lamp repeats flashing
4LO switch
Engine running
TF-76
I
Transfer inner parts
4WD warning lamp flashes slowly
Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds
Tire size is different between front and
rear of vehicle.
While driving
TF-77
J
Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values
EDS001N0
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Specifications with CONSULT-II
Monitored item [Unit]
VHCL/S SEN·FR [km/h]
or [mph]
VHCL/S SEN·RR [km/h]
or [mph]
Content
Wheel speed (Front wheel)
Wheel speed (Rear wheel)
K
Condition
Vehicle stopped
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running
Approximately
equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%)
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under standard condition.
Vehicle stopped
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running
Approximately
equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%)
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under standard condition.
Engine stopped
(Engine speed: Less than 400 rpm)
ENGINE SPEED [rpm]
Engine speed
Engine running
(Engine speed: 400 rpm or more)
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Power supply voltage for
transfer control unit
2WD SWITCH [ON/
OFF]
Input condition from 4WD
shift switch
Revision: October 2004
Display value
Ignition switch: ON
0 rpm
Approximately
equal to the indication on tachometer
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD
ON
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
OFF
TF-27
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item [Unit]
4H SWITCH [ON/OFF]
4L SWITCH [ON/OFF]
4L POSI SW [ON/OFF]
ATP SWITCH [ON/OFF]
WAIT DETCT SW [ON/
OFF]
4WD MODE [2H/4H/4L]
VHCL/S COMP [km/h]
or [mph]
SHIFT ACT 1 [ON/OFF]
SHIFT AC MON1 [ON/
OFF]
SHIFT ACT 2 [ON/OFF]
SHIFT AC MON2 [ON/
OFF]
Revision: October 2004
Content
Condition
Display value
Input condition from 4WD
shift switch
4WD shift switch: 4H
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
OFF
Input condition from 4WD
shift switch
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
Condition of 4LO switch
Condition of ATP switch
Condition of wait detection
switch
Control status of 4WD
(Output condition of 4WD
shift indicator lamp and
4LO indicator lamp)
Vehicle speed
Output condition to actuator motor (clockwise)
Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit
signal output
Output condition to actuator motor (counterclockwise)
Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit
signal output
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
OFF
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
Except the above
OFF
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor is
operating.)
ON
Brake pedal depressed
Except the above
OFF
●
Vehicle stopped
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4H and 4LO
ON
●
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OFF
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “P”
position
●
4WD shift switch
(Engine running)
2WD
2H
4H
4H
4LO
4L
Vehicle stopped
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running
Approximately
equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%)
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under standard condition.
●
Vehicle stopped
●
ON
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO
ON
●
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4LO to 4H
ON
●
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4LO to 4H
ON
●
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
●
Brake pedal depressed
TF-28
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item [Unit]
Content
Condition
Operating condition of
actuator motor relay (integrated in transfer control
unit)
SHIFT ACT/R MON
[ON/OFF]
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
●
Brake pedal depressed
Display value
A
When 4WD shift switch is
operated
ON
When 4WD shift switch is
not operated
OFF
SHIFT POS SW1 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 1
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 4H
OFF
SHIFT POS SW2 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 2
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
OFF
SHIFT POS SW3 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 3
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
ON
4WD shift switch: 4LO
OFF
SHIFT POS SW4 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 4
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OFF
4WD FAIL LAMP [ON/
OFF]
4WD warning lamp condition
4WD warning lamp: ON
ON
4WD warning lamp: OFF
OFF
Rear indicator of 4WD shift
indicator lamp condition
Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp: ON
ON
2WD IND [ON/OFF]
Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp: OFF
OFF
Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp
: ON
ON
4H IND [ON/OFF]
Front and center indicator
of 4WD shift indicator lamp
condition
Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp
: OFF
OFF
4LO indicator lamp: ON
ON
4LO indicator lamp: OFF
OFF
4LO indicator lamp condition
4L IND [ON/OFF]
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
Specifications between transfer control unit terminals
J
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT
K
L
M
WDIA0140E
NOTE:
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal
Wire
color
1
L
2
Condition
Data (Approx.)
CAN-H
–
–
P
CAN-L
–
–
3
L
K-LINE (CONSULT-II signal)
–
–
6
B
Ground
10
11
LG/B
W/L
Item
Actuator position switch 1
Actuator position switch 2
Revision: October 2004
Always
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 4H
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
Battery voltage
TF-29
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal
Wire
color
12
BR
Actuator position switch 3
13
BR/W
Actuator position switch 4
14
G/W
15
O
4WD shift switch (4H)
16
R
4WD shift switch (4LO)
17
G/Y
Item
Wait detection switch
B
Ground
19
W
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
24
R/B
V
ATP switch
4LO switch
25
L/W
Ignition switch monitor
27
Y/R
Actuator motor power supply
28
Y/L
Actuator motor (+)
31
G/B
Actuator motor (-)
32
B
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “N” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 4H
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
0V
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
Always
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
Battery voltage
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “P” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “N” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor is operating.)
0V
Except the above
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4LO
0V
Except the above
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD to 4H or 4H to 4LO or 2WD to 4LO
Battery voltage
Except the above
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO to 4H or 4H to 2WD or 4LO to 2WD
Battery voltage
Except the above
0V
Actuator motor ground
Revision: October 2004
Data (Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
4WD shift switch (2WD)
18
23
Condition
Always
TF-30
0V
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal
35
36
Wire
color
B/W
L
Item
4WD shift indicator lamp
(Rear indicator)
4WD shift indicator lamp
(Front and center indicator)
37
W/G
4LO indicator lamp
38
W/B
4WD warning lamp
39
40
L/B
Y
Condition
ATP warning lamp
Transfer relay 2
44
Y/R
Power supply
45
Y/R
Power supply
Engine running
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “P” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
Data (Approx.)
Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp
: ON
0V
Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp
: OFF
Battery voltage
Front and center indicator of 4WD shift
indicator lamp: ON
0V
Front and center indicator of 4WD shift
indicator lamp: OFF
Battery voltage
4LO indicator lamp: ON
0V
4LO indicator lamp: OFF
Battery voltage
4WD warning lamp: ON
0V
4WD warning lamp: OFF
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor is operating.)
Battery voltage
Except the above
0V
A
B
C
TF
E
F
G
ignition switch ON
0V
ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD)
H
I
J
EDS001N1
FUNCTION
K
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ALL MODE AWD/4WD diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
L
Displays transfer control unit self-diagnosis results.
Displays transfer control unit input/output data in real time.
M
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
Transfer control unit part number can be read.
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
NOTE:
For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Revision: October 2004
TF-31
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2.
3.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector on vehicle.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
BBIA0369E
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
6.
Touch “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”.
If “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
TF-32
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
A
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to TF-31, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
B
With engine at idle, touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
C
NOTE:
● The details for “TIME” are as follow:
– “0”: Error currently detected with transfer control unit.
TF
– Except for “0”: Error detected in the past and memorized
with transfer control unit.
Detects frequency of driving after DTC occurs (frequency
of turning ignition switch “ON/OFF”).
E
SDIA2687E
Display item list
Items (CONSULT-II screen
terms)
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Check item
*INITIAL START*
[P1801]
●
Due to removal of battery which cuts off power supply to transfer
control unit, self-diagnosis memory function is suspended.
TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For
Transfer Control Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 1
[P1802]
●
Malfunction is detected in the memory (RAM) system of transfer
control unit.
TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 2
[P1803]
●
Malfunction is detected in the memory (ROM) system of transfer
control unit.
TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit"
CONTROL UNIT 3
[P1804]
●
Malfunction is detected in the memory (EEPROM) system of
transfer control unit.
TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit"
●
Malfunction is detected in output shaft revolution signal that is
output from TCM through CAN communication.
●
Improper signal is input while driving.
●
Malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal that is output from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) through CAN communication.
VHCL SPEED SEN·AT
[P1807]
VHCL SPEED SEN·ABS
[P1808]
J
TF-42, "Vehicle Speed Sensor
(ABS)"
●
AD converter system of transfer control unit is malfunctioning.
TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit"
4L POSI SW TF
[P1810]
●
Improper signal from 4LO switch is input due to open or short circuit.
TF-42, "4LO Switch"
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[P1811]
●
Power supply voltage for transfer control unit is abnormally low
while driving.
TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For
Transfer Control Unit"
4WD MODE SW
[P1813]
●
More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected due to
short circuit of 4WD shift switch.
TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch"
4WD DETECT SWITCH
[P1814]
●
Improper signal from wait detection switch is input due to open or
short circuit.
TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch"
PNP SW/CIRC
[P1816]
●
When A/T PNP switch signal is malfunction or communication
error between the vehicles.
TF-52, "PNP Switch Signal
(TCM)"
●
Motor does not operate properly due to open or short circuit in
actuator motor.
●
Malfunction is detected in the actuator motor. (When 4WD shift
switch is operated and actuator motor is not operated)
●
Improper signal from actuator position switch is input due to open
or short circuit.
●
Malfunction is detected in the actuator position switch.
●
Malfunction is detected in the transfer relay 2.
●
Malfunction occurs in transfer control device drive circuit.
SHIFT ACT POSI SW
[P1818]
SHIFT ACT CIR
[P1819]
Revision: October 2004
TF-33
H
TF-41, "Output Shaft Revolution
Signal (TCM)"
Improper signal is input while driving.
SHIFT ACTUATOR
[P1817]
G
I
●
CONTROL UNIT 4
[P1809]
F
K
L
TF-53, "Actuator Motor"
TF-57, "Actuator Position
Switch"
TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For
Transfer Control Unit", TF-60,
"Transfer Control Device"
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Items (CONSULT-II screen
terms)
ENGINE SPEED SIG
[P1820]
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Check item
●
Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal that is output from
ECM through CAN communication.
●
Improper signal is input while driving.
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
●
Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication line.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY
BE REQUIRED.
●
No NG item has been detected.
TF-63, "Engine Speed Signal
(ECM)"
TF-64, "CAN Communication
Line"
—
CAUTION:
If “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication
line.
NOTE:
If “SHIFT ACT POSI SW [P1818]” or “SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819]” is displayed, first erase self-diagnostic results. (“SHIFT ACT POSI SW
[P1818]” or “SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819]” may be displayed after installing transfer control unit or transfer assembly.)
How to erase self-diagnostic results
1.
2.
3.
Perform applicably inspection of malfunctioning item and then repair or replace.
Start engine and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II screen to erase DTC memory.
CAUTION:
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicably diagnosis.
DATA MONITOR MODE
Operation procedure
1.
2.
3.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to TF-31, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
Select from “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”, screen of data monitor mode is displayed.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
Display item list
×: Standard
–: Not applicable
Monitor item selection
Monitored item (Unit)
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
Remarks
VHCL/S SEN·FR [km/h] or [mph]
×
–
×
Wheel speed calculated by ABS
actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
Signal input with CAN communication line.
VHCL/S SEN·RR [km/h] or [mph]
×
–
×
Wheel speed calculated by TCM.
Signal input with CAN communication line.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm]
×
–
×
Engine speed is displayed.
Signal input with CAN communication line.
BATTERY VOLT [V]
×
–
×
Power supply voltage for transfer
control unit.
2WD SWITCH [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
4H SWITCH [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
4L SWITCH [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
4WD shift switch signal status is
displayed.
(4L means 4LO of 4WD shift
switch.)
Revision: October 2004
TF-34
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitor item selection
Monitored item (Unit)
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
A
Remarks
4L POSI SW [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
This means 4LO switch.
4LO switch signal status is displayed.
ATP SWITCH [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
ATP switch signal status is displayed.
WAIT DETCT SW [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
Wait detection switch signal status is displayed.
×
Control status of 4WD recognized
by transfer control unit. (2WD, 4H
or 4LO)
4WD MODE [2H/4H/4L]
–
×
B
C
TF
E
VHCL/S COMP [km/h] or [mph]
–
×
×
Vehicle speed recognized by
transfer control unit.
SHIFT ACT 1 [ON/OFF]
–
×
×
Output condition to actuator
motor (clockwise)
SHIFT ACT MON 1 [ON/OFF]
–
–
×
Check signal (reinput signal) for
transfer control unit signal output
SHIFT ACT 2 [ON/OFF]
–
×
×
Output condition to actuator
motor (counterclockwise)
SHIFT ACT MON 2 [ON/OFF]
–
–
×
Check signal (reinput signal) for
transfer control unit signal output
H
SFT ACT/R MON [ON/OFF]
–
–
×
Operating condition of actuator
motor relay (integrated in transfer
control unit)
I
SHIFT POS SW 1 [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
Condition of actuator position
switch 1
SHIFT POS SW 2 [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
Condition of actuator position
switch 2
SHIFT POS SW 3 [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
Condition of actuator position
switch 3
F
G
J
K
SHIFT POS SW 4 [ON/OFF]
×
–
×
Condition of actuator position
switch 4
4WD FAIL LAMP [ON/OFF]
–
×
×
Control status of 4WD warning
lamp is displayed.
2WD IND [ON/OFF]
–
–
×
Control status of 4WD shift indicator lamp (rear) is displayed.
4H IND [ON/OFF]
–
–
×
Control status of 4WD shift indicator lamp (front and center) is
displayed.
4L IND [ON/OFF]
–
–
×
Control status of 4LO indicator
lamp is displayed.
Voltage [V]
–
–
×
The value measured by the voltage probe is displayed.
Frequency [Hz]
–
–
×
DUTY-HI (high) [%]
–
–
×
DUTY-LOW (low) [%]
–
–
×
PLS WIDTH-HI [msec]
–
–
×
PLS WIDTH-LOW [msec]
–
–
×
Revision: October 2004
TF-35
The value measured by the pulse
probe is displayed.
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Self-Diagnostic Procedure
EDS001N2
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)
Refer to TF-33, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Description
If the engine starts when there is something wrong with the 4WD system, the 4WD warning lamp turns ON or
flickers in the combination meter. When the system functions properly, the warning lamp turns ON when the
ignition switch is turned to “ON”, and it turns OFF after engine starts. To locate the cause of a problem, start
the self-diagnosis function. The 4WD warning lamp in the combination meter will indicate the problem area by
flickering according to the self-diagnostic results. As for the details of the 4WD warning lamp flickering patterns, refer to TF-36, "Diagnostic procedure" .
Diagnostic procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Warn up engine.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, and then turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
4WD warning lamp ON.
If 4WD warning lamp does not turn ON, refer to TF-70, "4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON" .
Move A/T selector lever to “R” position.
Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD”, “4H” and “2WD” in order.
Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
Turn 4WD shift switch to “4H”, “2WD” and “4H” in order.
Move A/T selector lever to “N” position.
Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
Read the flickering of 4WD warning lamp.
Refer to TF-36, "Judgement self-diagnosis" .
Judgement self-diagnosis
When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by flickering of the 4WD warning lamp.
PDIA0227E
Flickering pattern or
flickering condition
2
3
Items
Output shaft revolution
signal (from TCM)
Diagnostic item is detected when...
●
Malfunction is detected in output shaft revolution signal
that is output from TCM through CAN communication.
●
Improper signal is input while driving.
TF-41, "Output Shaft
Revolution Signal
(TCM)"
●
Malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal that is
output from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
through CAN communication.
TF-42, "Vehicle Speed
Sensor (ABS)"
Vehicle speed signal
(from ABS)
●
4
CAN communication
Revision: October 2004
Check item
Improper signal is input while driving.
Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication.
TF-36
TF-64, "CAN Communication Line"
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Flickering pattern or
flickering condition
Items
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Check item
5
AD converter
AD converter system of transfer control unit is malfunctioning.
TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit"
6
4LO switch
Improper signal from 4LO switch is input due to open or
short circuit.
TF-42, "4LO Switch"
7
Engine speed signal
●
●
Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal that is
output from ECM through CAN communication.
Improper signal is input while driving.
C
TF
Power supply
Power supply voltage for transfer control unit is abnormally low while driving.
TF-38, "Power Supply
Circuit For Transfer
Control Unit"
9
4WD shift switch
More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected
due to short circuit of 4WD shift switch.
TF-45, "4WD Shift
Switch"
Wait detection switch
Improper signal from wait detection switch is input due to
open or short circuit.
TF-49, "Wait Detection
Switch"
11
12
Actuator motor
●
Motor does not operate properly due to open or short
circuit in actuator motor.
●
Malfunction is detected in the actuator motor. (When
4WD shift switch is operated and actuator motor is not
operated.)
●
Improper signal from actuator position switch is input
due to open or short circuit.
●
Malfunction is detected in the actuator position switch.
●
Malfunction is detected in the transfer relay 2.
Malfunction occurs in transfer control device drive circuit.
Actuator position switch
13
Transfer control device
●
14
PNP switch signal
When A/T PNP switch signal is malfunction or communication error between the vehicles.
Repeats flickering
every 0.25 sec.
Data erase display
Repeats flickering
every 2 to 5 sec.
No flickering
—
PNP switch or 4WD
shift switch
●
Power supply failure of memory back-up.
●
Battery is disconnected for a long time.
●
Battery performance is poor.
Circuits that the self-diagnosis covers have no malfunction.
PNP switch or 4WD shift switch circuit is shorted or open.
TF-53, "Actuator Motor"
G
TF-57, "Actuator Position Switch"
I
TF-52, "PNP Switch
Signal (TCM)"
J
TF-38, "Power Supply
Circuit For Transfer
Control Unit"
K
—
L
TF-52, "PNP Switch
Signal (TCM)" or TF45, "4WD Shift Switch"
In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after performing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
TF-37
H
TF-38, "Power Supply
Circuit For Transfer
Control Unit", TF-60,
"Transfer Control
Device"
ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
●
E
F
NOTE:
If “actuator position switch” or “transfer control device” is displayed, first erase self-diagnostic results. (They may be displayed after
installing transfer control unit or transfer assembly.)
●
B
TF-63, "Engine Speed
Signal (ECM)"
8
10
A
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit
PFP:00000
EDS001N3
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item [Unit]
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Content
Power supply voltage for
transfer control unit
Condition
Ignition switch: ON
Display value
Battery voltage
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
Data (Approx.)
6
B
Ground
Always
0V
18
B
Ground
Always
0V
19
W
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
25
L/W
Ignition switch monitor
32
B
Actuator motor ground
40
Y
Transfer relay 2
44
Y/R
Power supply
45
Y/R
Power supply
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Always
0V
Ignition switch: ON
0V
Ignition switch: OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
TF-38
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
B
C
Connector
E142
E143
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
19 (W) - Ground
Battery voltage
25 (L/W) - Ground
0V
40 (Y) - Ground
Battery voltage
TF
44 (Y/R) - Ground
45 (Y/R) - Ground
E
0V
SDIA2799E
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
G
Connector
E142
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
19 (W) - Ground
H
25 (L/W) - Ground
40 (Y) - Ground
E143
Battery voltage
44 (Y/R) - Ground
SDIA2800E
45 (Y/R) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay
box]
● 20A fuse [No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R]
● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E142
terminal 19 (W), and connector E143 terminals 40 (Y), 44 (Y/R) and 45 (Y/R)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector
E142 terminal 25 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46
terminal 2 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and
ground
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-39
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 6 (B), 18 (B), E143 terminal 32 (B) and
ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
SDIA2801E
3. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" .
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Apply 12V direct current between terminals 1 and 2 of transfer
relay 1 and 2.
Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
OFF
No
3.
If NG, replace the transfer relay 1 or 2. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
SCIA1245E
Transfer Control Unit
EDS001N4
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: October 2004
TF-40
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
2. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITH CONSULT-II)
A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
B
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
5. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Is the “CONTROL UNIT 1 [P1802]”, “CONTROL UNIT 2 [P1803]”, “CONTROL UNIT 3 [P1804]” or “CONTROL
UNIT 4 [P1809]” displayed?
TF
YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
3. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Perform the self-diagnosis and then erase self-diagnostic results. Refer to TF-36, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)" and TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
2. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate AD converter?
YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
Output Shaft Revolution Signal (TCM)
F
G
H
EDS001N5
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
I
Perform self-diagnosis with TCM. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
K
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with TCM again. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-41
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Sensor (ABS)
EDS001N6
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without VDC) or BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC).
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) again. Refer to BRC-24,
"SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without VDC) or BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC).
4LO Switch
EDS001N7
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item
4L POSI SW [ON/OFF]
Content
Condition
Condition of 4LO switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
●
Brake pedal depressed
Display value
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
Except the above
OFF
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
24
V
4LO switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “N” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
Data (Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 4LO
0V
Except the above
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
TF-42
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK 4LO POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “4L POSI SW”.
Condition
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N” position
●
Brake pedal depressed
C
Display value
4WD shift switch: 4LO
●
B
ON
TF
Except the above
OFF
E
PDIA0220E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
E142
G
H
Terminal
(Wire
color)
24 (V) Ground
F
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever
“N” position
●
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Except the above
Brake pedal
depressed
I
0V
Battery
voltage
J
PDIA0201E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND 4LO SWITCH
L
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the 4LO switch harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 24 (V) and 4LO switch harness connector F60
terminal 13 (V).
M
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
PDIA0202E
Revision: October 2004
TF-43
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect 4LO switch harness connector.
Check continuity between 4LO switch harness connector F60
terminal 12 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
PDIA0203E
4. CHECK 4LO SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect 4LO switch harness connector.
Remove 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
Push and release 4LO switch and check continuity between
4LO switch terminals 12 and 13.
Terminal
12 - 13
Condition
Continuity
Push 4LO switch
Yes
Release 4LO switch
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
PDIA0204E
5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT" .
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect 4LO switch harness connector.
Remove 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-44
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
4.
Push and release 4LO switch and check continuity between
4LO switch terminals 12 and 13.
Terminal
12 - 13
5.
Condition
A
Continuity
Push 4LO switch
Yes
Release 4LO switch
No
B
If NG, replace the 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of
Electrical Parts" .
C
PDIA0204E
TF
4WD Shift Switch
EDS001N8
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item [Unit]
Content
Condition
Display value
2WD SWITCH [ON/
OFF]
Input condition from 4WD
shift switch
4WD shift switch: 2WD
ON
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
OFF
4WD shift switch: 4H
ON
4H SWITCH [ON/OFF]
Input condition from 4WD
shift switch
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
OFF
4L SWITCH [ON/OFF]
Input condition from 4WD
shift switch
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
OFF
4WD MODE [2H/4H/4L]
Control status of 4WD
(Output condition of 4WD
shift indicator lamp and
4LO indicator lamp)
4WD shift switch
(Engine running)
2WD
2H
4H
4H
4LO
4L
14
G/W
4WD shift switch (2WD)
15
O
4WD shift switch (4H)
16
R
4WD shift switch (4LO)
Ignition switch: ON
Data (Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 4H
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
0V
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
TF-45
F
G
H
I
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
E
2005 Titan
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “2WD SWITCH”, “4H
SWITCH”, “4L SWITCH” with operating 4WD shift switch.
SDIA2382E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
14 (G/W) Ground
E142
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
15 (O) Ground
4WD shift switch: 4H
16 (R) Ground
4WD shift switch: 4LO
0V
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
0V
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
PDIA0209E
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
TF-46
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
2. CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector.
Check voltage between 4WD shift switch harness connector terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M141
1 (Y/R) - Ground
Battery voltage
B
C
TF
PDIA0210E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between 4WD shift switch harness connector terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M141
1 (Y/R) - Ground
0V
E
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
SDIA2383E
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link
box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box]
● Harness for short or open between battery and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 1 (Y/R)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46
terminal 2 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and
ground.
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
H
I
J
K
L
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AND TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
1.
2.
3.
–
–
–
M
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the 4WD shift switch harness connector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 14 (G/W)
and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 3 (G/W).
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 15 (O)
and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 5 (O).
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 16 (R)
and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 6 (R).
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
TF-47
PDIA0211E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
4. CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector.
Operate 4WD shift switch and check continuity between 4WD
shift switch terminals.
Terminal
1-3
1-5
1-6
Condition
Continuity
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Yes
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
No
4WD shift switch: 4H
Yes
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
No
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Yes
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
No
PDIA0212E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace 4WD shift switch.
5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" .
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector.
Operate 4WD shift switch and check continuity between 4WD
shift switch terminals.
Terminal
1-3
1-5
1-6
4.
Condition
Continuity
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Yes
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
No
4WD shift switch: 4H
Yes
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
No
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Yes
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
No
PDIA0212E
If NG, replace the 4WD shift switch.
Revision: October 2004
TF-48
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Wait Detection Switch
EDS001N9
A
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item
WAIT DETCT SW [ON/
OFF]
Content
Condition
Condition of wait detection
switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
●
●
Brake pedal depressed
Display value
ON
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4H and 4LO
A/T selector lever “N”
position
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OFF
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
17
G/Y
Wait detection switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “N” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
B
C
TF
Data (Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
E
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
F
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-49
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK WAIT DETECTION SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “WAIT DETCT SWITCH”.
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N” position
●
Brake pedal depressed
Display value
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OFF
PDIA0221E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
E142
Terminal
(Wire
color)
17 (G/Y)
- Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever
“N” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
4WD shift switch
: 4H and 4LO
4WD shift switch: 2WD
0V
Battery
voltage
PDIA0205E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND WAIT DETECTION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the wait detection switch harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 17 (G/Y) and wait detection switch harness
connector F59 terminal 10 (G/Y).
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
PDIA0206E
Revision: October 2004
TF-50
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect wait detection switch harness connector.
Check continuity between wait detection switch harness connector F59 terminal 11 (B) and ground.
B
Continuity should exist.
C
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
PDIA0207E
E
4. CHECK WAIT DETECTION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect wait detection switch harness connector.
Remove wait detection switch.
Push and release wait detection switch and check continuity
between wait detection switch terminals 10 and 11.
Terminal
10 - 11
Condition
G
H
Continuity
Push wait detection switch
Yes
Release wait detection switch
No
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace wait detection switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
J
PDIA0208E
5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
K
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" .
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect wait detection switch harness connector.
Remove wait detection switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-51
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
4.
Push and release wait detection switch and check continuity
between wait detection switch terminals 10 and 11.
Terminal
10 - 11
5.
Condition
Continuity
Push wait detection switch
Yes
Release wait detection switch
No
If NG, replace the wait detection switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
PDIA0208E
PNP Switch Signal (TCM)
EDS001NA
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Perform self-diagnosis with TCM. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with TCM again. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-52
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Actuator Motor
EDS001NB
A
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item
SHIFT ACT 1 [ON/OFF]
SHIFT AC MON1 [ON/
OFF]
SHIFT ACT 2 [ON/OFF]
SHIFT AC MON2 [ON/
OFF]
Content
Condition
Output condition to actuator motor (clockwise)
Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit
signal output
Output condition to actuator motor (counterclockwise)
Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit
signal output
●
Vehicle stopped
●
●
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Display value
ON
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO
ON
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4LO to 4H
ON
●
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
OFF
ON
OFF
Actuator motor power supply
28
Y/L
Actuator motor (+)
31
G/B
Actuator motor (-)
TF
F
●
Brake pedal depressed
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
4WD shift switch
: 4LO to 4H
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
Except the above
●
Brake pedal depressed
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
Y/R
C
E
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
27
B
G
H
I
Data (Approx.)
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD to 4H or 4H to 4LO or 2WD to 4LO
Battery voltage
Except the above
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO to 4H or 4H to 2WD or 4LO to 2WD
Battery voltage
Except the above
0V
J
K
L
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-53
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ACTUATOR MOTOR SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “SHIFT ACT 1”, “SHIFT ACT MON 1”,
“SHIFT ACT 2”, “SHIFT ACT MON 2”.
Monitored item
Condition
SHIFT ACT 1
SHIFT AC MON1
●
Vehicle
stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “N”
position
SHIFT ACT 2
●
Brake pedal
depressed
SHIFT AC MON2
Display value
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO
ON
Except the above
OFF
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO
ON
Except the above
OFF
PDIA0223E
4WD shift switch
: 4LO to 4H
ON
Except the above
OFF
4WD shift switch
: 4LO to 4H
ON
Except the above
OFF
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
28 (Y/L)
- Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 2WD to 4H or 4H to 4LO or
2WD to 4LO
Battery
voltage
Except the above
E143
31 (G/B)
- Ground
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO to 4H or 4H to 2WD or
4LO to 2WD
Except the above
Battery
voltage
SDIA2806E
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
TF-54
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
2. CHECK ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal 27 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
27 (Y/R) - Ground
Battery voltage
B
C
TF
SDIA2807E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal 27 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
27 (Y/R) - Ground
0V
E
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
SDIA2808E
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link
box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box]
● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E143
terminal 27 (Y/R)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46
terminal 2 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and
ground.
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
H
I
J
K
L
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND ACTUATOR MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
–
–
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the transfer control device (actuator motor) harness connector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 28 (Y/L)
and transfer control device (actuator motor) harness connector
F58 terminal 24 (Y/L).
Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 31 (G/B)
and transfer control device (actuator motor) harness connector
F58 terminal 23 (G/B).
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
TF-55
WDIA0209E
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
4. CHECK ACTUATOR MOTOR
1.
2.
Remove transfer control device. Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" .
Check operation by applying battery voltage to transfer control
device (actuator motor) terminals 23 and 24.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat the harness.
Terminal
Actuator motor
24 (Battery voltage) - 23 (Ground)
Clockwise rotate
23 (Battery voltage) - 24 (Ground)
Counterclockwise rotate
Does actuator motor rotate?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace transfer control device (actuator motor). Refer
to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" .
SDIA2386E
5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" .
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove transfer control device. Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" .
Check operation by applying battery voltage to transfer control
device (actuator motor) terminals 23 and 24.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat the harness.
Terminal
Actuator motor
24 (Battery voltage) - 23 (Ground)
Clockwise rotate
23 (Battery voltage) - 24 (Ground)
Counterclockwise rotate
If NG, replace transfer control device (actuator motor). Refer to
TF-84, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-56
SDIA2386E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Actuator Position Switch
EDS001NC
A
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item [Unit]
Content
Condition
Display value
SHIFT POS SW1 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 1
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 4H
OFF
SHIFT POS SW2 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 2
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
OFF
SHIFT POS SW3 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 3
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
ON
4WD shift switch: 4LO
OFF
SHIFT POS SW4 [ON/
OFF]
Condition of actuator position switch 4
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OFF
10
11
12
13
LG/B
W/L
BR
BR/W
Actuator position switch 1
Actuator position switch 2
Actuator position switch 3
Actuator position switch 4
C
TF
E
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
B
Data (Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 4H
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
0V
4WD shift switch: 4LO
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
4WD shift switch: 2WD
Battery voltage
F
G
H
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-57
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “SHIFT POS SW1”, “SHIFT POS SW2”,
“SHIFT POS SW3”, “SHIFT POS SW4”.
Monitored item
SHIFT POS SW1
SHIFT POS SW2
SHIFT POS SW3
SHIFT POS SW4
1.
2.
Condition
Display value
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 4H
OFF
4WD shift switch: 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
OFF
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
ON
4WD shift switch: 4LO
OFF
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
ON
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OFF
PDIA0224E
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO
10 (LG/B)
- Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
4WD shift switch: 4H
4WD shift switch: 4LO
11 (W/L)
- Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
E142
12 (BR) Ground
13 (BR/
W) Ground
4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H
PDIA0216E
0V
Battery
voltage
4WD shift switch: 4LO
4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO
0V
Battery
voltage
4WD shift switch: 2WD
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
TF-58
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
–
–
–
–
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the transfer control device (actuator position
B
switch) harness connector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 10 (LG/B)
C
and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness
connector F58 terminal 26 (LG/B).
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 11 (W/L)
and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness
TF
connector F58 terminal 20 (W/L).
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 12 (BR)
and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness
E
connector F58 terminal 21 (BR).
PDIA0217E
Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 13 (BR/
W) and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector F58 terminal 25 (BR/W).
F
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector F58 terminal 22 (B) and ground.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
PDIA0219E
M
4. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace transfer control device. Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-59
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
Transfer Control Device
EDS001ND
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item [Unit]
Content
Condition
Operating condition of
actuator motor relay (integrated in transfer control
unit)
SHIFT ACT/R MON
[ON/OFF]
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “N”
position
●
Brake pedal depressed
Display value
When 4WD shift switch is
operated
ON
When 4WD shift switch is
not operated
OFF
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
25
L/W
Ignition switch monitor
27
Y/R
Actuator motor power supply
32
B
Actuator motor ground
40
Y
Transfer relay 2
Data (Approx.)
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Always
0V
Ignition switch: ON
0V
Ignition switch: OFF
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
TF-60
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
B
C
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
E142
25 (L/W) - Ground
E143
27 (Y/R) - Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
0V
TF
E
SDIA2816E
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
G
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
E142
25 (L/W) - Ground
E143
27 (Y/R) - Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Battery voltage
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
SDIA2817E
replace damaged parts.
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay
box]
● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E143
terminal 27 (Y/R)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46
terminal 2 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector
E142 terminal 25 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and
ground
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 32 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
SDIA2818E
Revision: October 2004
TF-61
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
40 (Y) - Ground
Battery voltage
SDIA2819E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
40 (Y) - Ground
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 40 (Y)
● Transfer relay 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
SDIA2820E
4. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK-1 >> With CONSULT-II: GO TO 5.
OK-2 >> Without CONSULT-II: GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
5. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Is the “SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819]” displayed?
YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: October 2004
TF-62
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
6. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
A
Without CONSULT-II
Perform the self-diagnosis and then erase self-diagnostic results. Refer to TF-36, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)" and TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
2. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate transfer control device?
YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
1.
Engine Speed Signal (ECM)
EDS001NE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
C
TF
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
E
Perform self-diagnosis with ECM. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
G
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
H
I
3. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with ECM again. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-63
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
CAN Communication Line
EDS001NF
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with in CONSULT-II.
3. Perform the self-diagnosis.
Is the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” displayed?
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen and go to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
NO
>> Inspection End.
SDIA2390E
ATP Switch
EDS001NG
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Data are reference value.
Monitored item [Unit]
ATP SWITCH [ON/OFF]
Content
Condition
Condition of ATP switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever “P”
position
●
Brake pedal depressed
Display value
4WD shift switch
: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor is
operating.)
ON
Except the above
OFF
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
23
R/B
ATP switch
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector
lever “P” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
Data (Approx.)
4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor is operating.)
0V
Except the above
Battery voltage
CAUTION:
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Revision: October 2004
TF-64
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK ATP SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATP SWITCH”.
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever
“P” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
B
C
Display value
4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor is operating.)
ON
TF
Except the above
OFF
E
SDIA2391E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminal and ground.
Connector
E142
G
H
Terminal
(Wire
color)
23 (R/B)
- Ground
F
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
●
Vehicle stopped
●
Engine running
●
A/T selector lever
“P” position
●
Brake pedal
depressed
4WD shift switch: 4H
to 4LO or 4LO to 4H
(While actuator motor
is operating.)
Except the above
I
0V
J
Battery
voltage
SDIA2392E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND ATP SWITCH
L
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the ATP switch harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 23 (R/B) and ATP switch harness connector
F55 terminal 8 (R/B).
M
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SDIA2393E
Revision: October 2004
TF-65
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ATP switch harness connector.
Check continuity between ATP switch harness connector F55
terminal 9 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
SDIA2394E
4. CHECK ATP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ATP switch harness connector.
Remove ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
Push and release ATP switch and check continuity between ATP
switch terminals 8 and 9.
Terminal
8-9
Condition
Continuity
Push ATP switch
Yes
Release ATP switch
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
SDIA2395E
5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK ATP WARNING LAMP
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Set the A/T selector lever to “P” position and engage the parking brake.
3. Switch 4WD shift switch from 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H.
Does ATP warning lamp turn “ON”, while actuator motor is operating?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Go to TF-74, "ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON" .
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ATP switch harness connector.
Remove ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-66
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM
4.
Push and release ATP switch and check continuity between ATP
switch terminals 8 and 9.
Terminal
8-9
5.
Condition
A
Continuity
Push ATP switch
Yes
Release ATP switch
No
B
If NG, replace the ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" .
C
SDIA2395E
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-67
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp and 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON
PFP:00007
EDS001NH
SYMPTOM:
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not turn ON for approx. 1 second when turning
ignition switch to “ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
E142
E143
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
19 (W) - Ground
Battery voltage
25 (L/W) - Ground
0V
40 (Y) - Ground
Battery voltage
44 (Y/R) - Ground
45 (Y/R) - Ground
0V
SDIA2799E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
E142
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
19 (W) - Ground
25 (L/W) - Ground
40 (Y) - Ground
E143
Battery voltage
44 (Y/R) - Ground
SDIA2800E
45 (Y/R) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay
box]
● 20A fuse [No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R]
● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E142
terminal 19 (W), and connector E143 terminals 40 (Y), 44 (Y/R) and 45 (Y/R)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector
E142 terminal 25 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46
terminal 2 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and
ground
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-68
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 6 (B), 18 (B), E143 terminal 32 (B) and
ground.
B
C
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
SDIA2801E
E
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M24
24 (O/L) - Ground
0V
G
H
I
PDIA0228E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M24
24 (O/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
SDIA2396E
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link
box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box]
● Harness for short or open between battery and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 (O/L)
● Battery and Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-69
J
2005 Titan
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER
1.
2.
3.
–
–
–
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 35 (B/W)
and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 32 (B/
W)
Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 36 (L)
and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 31 (L)
Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 37 (W/G)
and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 33 (W/
G)
Continuity should exist.
WDIA0210E
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP AND 4LO INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
6. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON
EDS001NI
SYMPTOM:
4WD warning lamp do not turn ON when turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Revision: October 2004
TF-70
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
B
C
Connector
E142
E143
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
19 (W) - Ground
Battery voltage
25 (L/W) - Ground
0V
40 (Y) - Ground
Battery voltage
TF
44 (Y/R) - Ground
45 (Y/R) - Ground
E
0V
SDIA2799E
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector
terminals and ground.
G
Connector
E142
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
19 (W) - Ground
H
25 (L/W) - Ground
40 (Y) - Ground
E143
Battery voltage
44 (Y/R) - Ground
SDIA2800E
45 (Y/R) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay
box]
● 20A fuse [No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R]
● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E142
terminal 19 (W), and connector E143 terminals 40 (Y), 44 (Y/R) and 45 (Y/R)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector
E142 terminal 25 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46
terminal 2 (L/W)
● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and
ground
● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-71
2005 Titan
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 6 (B), 18 (B), E143 terminal 32 (B) and
ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
SDIA2801E
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M24
24 (O/L) - Ground
0V
PDIA0228E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M24
24 (O/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
replace damaged parts.
SDIA2396E
● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link
box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box]
● Harness for short or open between battery and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 (O/L)
● Battery and Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
Revision: October 2004
TF-72
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 38 (W/B) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 34 (W/B).
B
C
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TF
WDIA0212E
E
5. CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
G
H
6. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
I
J
7. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp or 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Change
EDS001NJ
SYMPTOM:
4WD shift indicator lamp or 4LO indicator lamp do not change when switch 4WD shift switch.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp when ignition switch is turned to ON.
Do 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp turn on?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to TF-68, "4WD Shift Indicator Lamp and 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON" .
2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD shift switch system. Refer to TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
TF-73
2005 Titan
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR WAIT DETECTION SWITCH
Perform trouble diagnosis for wait detection switch system. Refer to TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4LO SWITCH
Perform trouble diagnosis for 4LO switch system. Refer to TF-42, "4LO Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SYSTEM FOR ATP SWITCH
Perform trouble diagnosis for ATP switch system. Refer to TF-64, "ATP Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
8. CHECK TRANSFER INNER PARTS
1. Disassemble transfer assembly. Refer to TF-88, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
2. Check transfer inner parts.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON
EDS001NK
SYMPTOM:
ATP warning lamp does not turn ON when 4WD shift switch from “4H” to “4LO” or “4LO” to “4H” with
A/T selector lever “P” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SYSTEM FOR CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-36, "Self-Diagnostic Procedure" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate CAN communication?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
TF-74
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
A
Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD shift switch system. Refer to TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR PNP SWITCH SIGNAL
C
Perform trouble diagnosis for PNP switch signal system. Refer to TF-52, "PNP Switch Signal (TCM)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TF
4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR ATP SWITCH
E
Perform trouble diagnosis for ATP switch system. Refer to TF-64, "ATP Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
G
5. CHECK ATP WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Disconnect ATP switch harness connector.
Check voltage between ATP switch harness connector terminal
and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
F55
8 (R/B) Ground
I
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch
: ON
H
A/T selector lever “P”
position
Except the above
Battery
voltage
J
0V
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
SDIA2397E
L
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 39 (L/B) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 6 (L/B).
M
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
WDIA0213E
Revision: October 2004
TF-75
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
7. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND ATP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector and ATP switch harness connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 7 (R/B) and ATP switch harness connector F55
terminal 8 (R/B).
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SDIA2398E
8. CHECK ATP WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" .
9. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
11. CHECK TRANSFER INNER PARTS
1. Disassemble transfer assembly. Refer to TF-88, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
2. Check transfer inner parts.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats Flashing
EDS001NL
SYMPTOM:
4WD shift indicator lamp keeps flashing.
Revision: October 2004
TF-76
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
1. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD”.
2. Move vehicle forward and backward, or drive straight increasing or decreasing under 20 km/h (12 MPH).
Dose 4WD shift indicator lamp keep flashing?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
B
C
2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR WAIT DETECTION SWITCH
TF
Perform trouble diagnosis for wait detection switch system. Refer to TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4LO SWITCH
F
Perform trouble diagnosis for 4LO switch system. Refer to TF-42, "4LO Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
4. SYMPTOM CHECK
H
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
I
5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
J
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK TRANSFER INNER PARTS
L
M
1. Disassemble transfer assembly. Refer to TF-88, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
2. Check transfer inner parts.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly
EDS001NM
SYMPTOM:
While driving, 4WD warning lamp flashes slowly. (When continuing to flash until turning ignition
switch OFF.)
NOTE:
Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds
Revision: October 2004
K
TF-77
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK TIRE
Check the following.
Tire pressure
●
Wear condition
●
Longitudinal tire size (There is no difference between longitudinal tires.)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
2. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
TF-78
2005 Titan
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:33084
A
EDS001NN
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX"
.
Disconnect transfer control unit connectors.
Remove the transfer control unit.
B
C
TF
E
F
BDIA0014E
INSTALLATION
G
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts
●
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
H
After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly
and transfer control unit. Refer to TF-4, "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-79
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:38189
EDS001NO
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Partially drain transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing Transfer Fluid" .
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove companion flange self-lock nut, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
)
LDIA0142E
4.
Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with
the mark on the companion flange.
CAUTION:
Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive
shaft. Do not damage the front drive shaft.
SDIA2214E
5.
Remove companion flange, using suitable tool.
WDIA0193E
6.
Remove front oil seal from front case, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front case.
LDIA0144E
Revision: October 2004
TF-80
2005 Titan
FRONT OIL SEAL
INSTALLATION
1.
A
Install front oil seal until it is flush with end face of front case,
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100500 (
—
)
B
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
C
LDIA0145E
2.
Align the matching mark of the front drive shaft with the matching mark of the companion flange, then install the companion
flange.
TF
E
F
G
SDIA2214E
3.
Tool number
4.
5.
H
Tighten self-lock nut to the specified torque, using Tool. Refer to
TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
: KV40104000 (
—
)
I
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-lock nut.
Install front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" .
Refill the transfer fluid and check fluid level and for fluid leakage.
Refer to MA-24, "FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL" .
J
K
LDIA0147E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-81
2005 Titan
REAR OIL SEAL
REAR OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:33140
EDS001NP
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Partially drain transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing Transfer Fluid" .
Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove dust cover from rear case.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the rear case.
LDIA0138E
4.
Remove rear oil seal from rear case, using Tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the rear case.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
LDIA0139E
INSTALLATION
1.
Install rear oil seal until it is flush with end face of rear case,
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100500 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
●
LDIA0140E
2.
Install dust cover to rear case, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40105310 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse dust cover.
● Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover.
●
PDIA0116E
Revision: October 2004
TF-82
2005 Titan
REAR OIL SEAL
●
Be sure to align indicator at top of transfer as shown.
A
B
C
LDIA0141E
TF
3.
4.
Install the rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Refill transfer fluid, check fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to MA-24, "FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID
LEVEL" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-83
2005 Titan
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Removal and Installation
PFP:33251
EDS001NQ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
Disconnect transfer control device harness connector.
Remove breather hose from transfer control device.
Remove bolts and detach control device.
LDIA0136E
INSTALLATION
1.
Install O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly.
LDIA0137E
2.
a.
Install transfer control device.
Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed
screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod.
PDIA0119E
b.
Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control
shift rod, and install.
NOTE:
Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
PDIA0120E
Revision: October 2004
TF-84
2005 Titan
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
c.
3.
4.
5.
Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
Install breather hose to transfer control device.
Connect transfer control device harness connector.
After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG,
adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control
unit. Refer to TF-4, "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and
Transfer Control Unit Replacement" .
A
B
C
SDIA2212E
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-85
2005 Titan
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation
PFP:31098
EDS001NR
Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation information.
SDIA2409E
CAUTION:
●
Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
twisting when installing it.
●
Install air breather hose into breather tube (metal connector) and transfer control device (case
connector) until hose end reaches the base of the tube.
Revision: October 2004
TF-86
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:33100
A
EDS001NS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
Remove A/T undercover using power tools.
Remove center exhaust tubes and muffler. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" .
Remove front and rear propeller shafts. Refer to PR-5, "REMOVAL" (front), PR-9, "REMOVAL" (rear).
CAUTION:
Do not damage spline, sleeve yoke or rear oil seal when removing the rear propeller shaft.
NOTE:
Insert a plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft.
5. Remove A/T bolts. Refer to AT-268, "COMPONENTS" .
6. Position two suitable jacks under A/T and transfer assembly.
7. Remove A/T crossmember. Refer to AT-268, "COMPONENTS" .
WARNING:
Support A/T and transfer assembly using two suitable jacks while removing A/T crossmember.
8. Remove breather hoses from the transfer rear case and transfer control device.
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the following:
● ATP switch
● 4LO switch
● Wait detection switch
● Transfer control device
10. Remove transfer to A/T and A/T to transfer bolts.
WARNING:
Support transfer assembly using suitable jack while removing it.
11. Remove transfer assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage rear oil seal (A/T).
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
INSTALLATION
K
Install in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing the transfer to the transmission, install the bolts
to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
●
●
L
: 36 N·m (3.7kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
Check the fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to MA-24,
"Changing Transfer Fluid" .
After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG,
adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control
unit. Refer to TF-4, "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and
Transfer Control Unit Replacement" .
M
SMT872C
Revision: October 2004
TF-87
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001NT
COMPONENTS
SDIA2449E
1.
Baffle plate
2.
Breather tube
3.
Front case
4.
Snap ring
5.
Input oil seal
6.
Self-lock nut
7.
Companion flange
8.
Front oil seal
9.
4LO switch (gray with green paint)
10. ATP switch (black)
11. Rear case
12. Wait detection switch (gray)
13. Gasket
14. Filler plug
15. Drain plug
16. O-ring
17. Transfer control device
18. Harness bracket
19. Dust cover
20. Rear oil seal
21. Retainer bolt
22. Gasket
Revision: October 2004
TF-88
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
A
B
C
TF
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WDIA0207E
1.
Input bearing
2.
Snap ring
3.
Internal gear
4.
Carrier bearing
5.
Sun gear
6.
Needle bearing
7.
Metal bushing
8.
Planetary carrier assembly
9.
L-H sleeve
10. Drive chain
11. Mainshaft
12. Sprocket
13. 2-4 sleeve
14. Clutch gear
15. Oil pump assembly
16. Retainer
17. Mainshaft rear bearing
18. Front bearing
19. Front drive shaft
20. Rear bearing
21. L-H shift fork
22. L-H shift rod
23. Retaining pin
24. 2-4 shift bracket
25. 2-4 shift fork
26. Fork guide collar
27. 2-4 shift fork spring
28. Retaining ring
29. Snap ring
30. Shift collar
31. Clevis pin
32. Drum cam
33. Control shift rod
M
34. Spacer
Revision: October 2004
TF-89
L
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove drain plug and filler plug.
Remove transfer control device from rear case.
Remove O-ring form transfer control device.
SDIA2212E
4.
Remove the self-lock nut from the companion flange, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
)
SDIA2841E
5.
Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with
the mark on the companion flange.
CAUTION:
Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive
shaft. Do not damage the front drive shaft.
SDIA2214E
6.
Remove the companion flange, using suitable tool.
WDIA0133E
Revision: October 2004
TF-90
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
7.
Remove front oil seal from front case, using Tool.
Tool number
A
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front case or front drive shaft.
B
C
SDIA2423E
TF
8.
Remove the 4LO switch [gray (with green paint)] and ATP switch
(black) from front case.
E
F
G
PDIA0090E
9.
Remove wait detection switch (gray) from rear case.
H
I
J
PDIA0091E
10. Remove dust cover from rear case, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the rear case.
K
L
M
PDIA0092E
11. Remove rear oil seal from rear case, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the rear case or mainshaft.
SDIA2424E
Revision: October 2004
TF-91
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
12. Remove the input oil seal from front case, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front case, sun gear or input bearing.
PDIA0094E
13. Remove the retainer bolts and gaskets.
PDIA0097E
14. Remove rear case bolts and harness bracket from rear case.
PDIA0299E
15. Separate front case and rear case. Then remove rear case by
prying it up, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surface.
16. Remove spacer from the control shift rod.
CAUTION:
Do not drop spacer.
PDIA0096E
17. Remove snap ring from mainshaft, using suitable tool.
SDIA2430E
Revision: October 2004
TF-92
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
18. Remove the mainshaft rear bearing from mainshaft, using suitable tool.
19. Remove retainer from mainshaft.
A
B
C
WDIA0135E
TF
20. Remove snap ring from mainshaft, using suitable tool.
21. Remove oil pump assembly from mainshaft.
E
F
G
SDIA2461E
22. Remove snap ring from mainshaft, using suitable tool.
23. Remove clutch gear from mainshaft.
H
I
J
SDIA2462E
24. Remove snap ring from L-H shift rod assembly, using suitable
tool.
25. Remove 2-4 sleeve and 2-4 shift fork assembly from mainshaft.
K
L
M
SDIA2463E
26. Remove drive chain together with sprocket and front drive shaft
from front case.
27. Remove spacer and needle bearing from mainshaft.
28. Remove mainshaft from sun gear assembly.
29. Remove L-H shift rod assembly and control shift rod assembly
from front case.
30. Remove L-H sleeve together with L-H shift fork assembly from
planetary carrier assembly.
SDIA2464E
Revision: October 2004
TF-93
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
31. Remove snap ring from sun gear.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the sun gear or input bearing.
PDIA0099E
32. Press the sun gear assembly and planetary carrier assembly
from front case, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100200 (
—
)
PDIA0100E
33. Remove snap ring from front case.
PDIA0101E
34. Remove internal gear from front case.
PDIA0305E
35. Remove snap ring from front case.
PDIA0103E
Revision: October 2004
TF-94
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
36. Remove the input bearing from front case, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100200 (
—
A
)
B
C
PDIA0104E
TF
37. Remove baffle plate from front case.
38. Remove the breather tube from front case.
E
F
G
PDIA0105E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Case
H
Check contact surfaces of shift rod and bearing for wear and damage. If any is found, replace with new one.
I
J
K
PDIA0145E
Sleeve
L
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new one.
●
Damage and excessive wear of contact surfaces of sprocket,
mainshaft and sleeve.
●
Sleeve must move smoothly.
M
PDIA0136E
Revision: October 2004
TF-95
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
Gear, Shaft and Drive Chain
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, uneven wear and bending of the shaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage and peeling of the gear.
●
Excessive wear or damage to the drive chain
PDIA0137E
Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and rough rotation. If necessary,
replace it with a new one.
PDIA0300E
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install breather tube.
CAUTION:
Install breather tube in the direction shown.
PDIA0107E
2.
Install baffle plate to front case, and tighten bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Install baffle plate by pushing it in the direction shown
while tightening the bolt.
SDIA2479E
Revision: October 2004
TF-96
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
3.
Install the input bearing to front case, using Tool.
Tool number
A
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B
C
PDIA0108E
4.
TF
Install snap ring to front case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
E
F
G
PDIA0103E
5.
Install internal gear with groove facing up into front case.
H
I
J
PDIA0102E
6.
Install snap ring to front case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
K
L
M
PDIA0101E
7.
Install the planetary carrier assembly and sun gear assembly to
front case, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100200 (
—
)
PDIA0109E
Revision: October 2004
TF-97
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
8.
Install snap ring to sun gear.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse snap ring.
● Do not damage the sun gear.
PDIA0099E
9.
Set L-H sleeve together with L-H shift fork assembly onto planetary carrier assembly.
SDIA2438E
10. Install control shift rod assembly to front case.
CAUTION:
Set pin of L-H shift fork assembly into the groove of drum
cam.
11. Turn control shift rod assembly fully counterclockwise.
WDIA0215E
12. Install L-H shift rod assembly through L-H shift fork assembly
opening to front case.
CAUTION:
Set pin of L-H shift rod assembly into the groove of drum
cam.
13. Install mainshaft to sun gear assembly.
14. Apply ATF to spacer and periphery of needle bearing, install to
mainshaft.
WDIA0216E
15. Set front drive shaft and sprocket to drive chain.
CAUTION:
Identification mark of drive chain should be on the side of
rear bearing of front drive shaft.
PDIA0110E
Revision: October 2004
TF-98
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
16. Install drive chain together with front drive shaft and sprocket to
front case.
A
B
C
SDIA2464E
17. Install 2-4 sleeve and 2-4 shift fork assembly to mainshaft.
CAUTION:
● Install with proper orientation of 2-4 sleeve.
● Install 2-4 shift fork with engaging the grooves of 2-4 shift
fork in the retaining pin of 2-4 shift bracket.
TF
E
F
G
SDIA2467E
18. Install snap ring to L-H shift rod assembly, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
19. Install clutch gear to mainshaft.
H
I
J
SDIA2463E
20. Install snap ring to mainshaft, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
21. Install oil pump assembly to mainshaft.
K
L
M
SDIA2462E
22. Install snap ring to mainshaft, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
SDIA2461E
Revision: October 2004
TF-99
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
23. Install retainer to mainshaft.
CAUTION:
Set the projection of oil pump assembly to identification
hole, and then align locating hole of retainer to L-H shift rod
assembly.
SDIA2468E
24. Install the mainshaft rear bearing to mainshaft, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV32102700 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not push too hard in order to avoid snap rings becoming
dislodged from mainshaft.
SDIA2469E
25. Install snap ring to mainshaft, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
26. Install spacer to control shift rod.
SDIA2430E
27. Apply liquid gasket to mating surface of front case.
● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent.
Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to mating surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
application and mating surfaces.
28. Install rear case to front case.
WDIA0217E
29. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the harness brackets.
PDIA0299E
Revision: October 2004
TF-100
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
30. Install the retainer bolts with new gaskets. Tighten the bolts to
the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse gasket.
● Tighten them to the specified torque again.
A
B
C
PDIA0097E
TF
31. Install input oil seal to front case, using Tools.
Dimension A
: 4.0 - 4.6 mm (0.157 - 0.181 in)
Tool number
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: KV40104830 ( — )
E
F
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
G
PDIA0114E
32. Install rear oil seal until it is flush with end face of rear case,
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100500 (
—
H
)
I
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
J
PDIA0115E
33. Apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the new dust cover.
Position the dust cover using the identification mark as shown.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse dust cover.
● Position the identification mark at the position shown.
L
M
SDIA2208E
34. Install the dust cover to the rear case, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40105310 (
—
)
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse dust cover.
● Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover.
PDIA0116E
Revision: October 2004
TF-101
K
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
35. Apply sealant to threads of wait detection switch (gray). Then
install it to rear case and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
PDIA0091E
36. Apply sealant to threads of 4LO switch (gray with green paint)
and ATP switch (black). Then install them to front case and
tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
PDIA0090E
37. Install front oil seal until it is flush with end face of front case,
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100500 (
—
)
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
PDIA0117E
38. Align the matching mark on the front drive shaft with the mark on
the companion flange, then install the companion flange.
SDIA2779E
Revision: October 2004
TF-102
2005 Titan
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
39. Tighten self-lock nut to the specified torque, using Tool. Refer to
TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
Tool number
: KV40104000 (
—
A
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-lock nut.
40. Install O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly.
B
C
WDIA0219E
TF
41. Install transfer control device to rear case.
a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed
screwdriver, and then put a mark on control shift rod.
E
F
G
PDIA0119E
b.
Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control
shift rod, and install.
NOTE:
Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
H
I
J
PDIA0120E
c.
K
Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
L
M
SDIA2212E
42. Install the drain plug and filler plug with new gaskets to the rear case. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Revision: October 2004
TF-103
2005 Titan
PLANETARY CARRIER
PLANETARY CARRIER
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:33113
EDS001NU
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove snap ring.
Remove sun gear assembly from planetary carrier assembly,
using suitable tool.
PDIA0162E
3.
Remove snap ring from sun gear assembly, using suitable tool.
SDIA2353E
4.
Remove the carrier bearing from sun gear, using Tools.
Tool number
A: ST35300000 ( — )
B: ST30021000 (J-22912-01)
SDIA2149E
5.
Remove the needle bearing from sun gear, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33710000 (
—
)
SDIA2354E
Revision: October 2004
TF-104
2005 Titan
PLANETARY CARRIER
6.
Remove the metal bushing from sun gear, using Tools.
Tool number
A
A: ST33710000 ( — )
B: ST35325000 ( — )
C: ST33290001 (J-34286)
B
C
SDIA2168E
TF
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and rough rotation. If necessary,
replace it with a new one.
E
F
G
MTF0041D
H
Planetary Carrier
●
Measure end play of each pinion gear, and make sure the measurement is within specification shown below. If out of specification, replace planetary carrier with new one.
Pinion gear end play
●
I
: 0.1 - 0.7 mm (0.004 - 0.028 in)
J
Check working face of each gear, bearing and others for damage, burrs, partial wear, dents and other abnormality. If any is
found, replace planetary carrier with new one.
K
PDIA0146E
L
Sun Gear
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
If oil passage of sun gear is clogged. For this, try to pass a 3.6
mm (0.142 in) dia. wire through oil passage as shown.
●
Check the sliding and contact surface of each gear and bearing
for damage, burrs, partial wear, dents and other abnormality. If
any is found, replace the sun gear assembly with a new one.
M
PDIA0147E
Revision: October 2004
TF-105
2005 Titan
PLANETARY CARRIER
Internal Gear
Check the internal gear teeth for damage, partial wear, dents or
other abnormality. If any is found, replace the internal gear with a
new one.
PDIA0157E
ASSEMBLY
1.
Apply ATF to periphery of metal bushing, then install the metal
bushing until it becomes dimension "A", using Tool.
Dimension A
: 7.7 - 8.3mm (0.303 - 0.327in)
Tool number
: ST35300000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse metal bushing.
WDIA0206E
2.
Apply ATF to needle bearing, then install the needle bearing
until it becomes dimension "B", using Tool.
Dimension B
: 62.5 - 63.1mm (2.461 - 2.484in)
Tool number
: ST33220000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse needle bearing.
SDIA2478E
3.
Install the carrier bearing to sun gear, using Tools.
Tool number
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: ST27863000 ( — )
PDIA0149E
Revision: October 2004
TF-106
2005 Titan
PLANETARY CARRIER
4.
Install snap ring to sun gear assembly, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
A
B
C
SDIA2353E
TF
5.
6.
Install sun gear assembly to planetary carrier assembly.
Install snap ring to planetary carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
E
F
G
PDIA0163E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-107
2005 Titan
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:39100
EDS001NV
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove the front bearing, using Tools.
Tool number
A: ST35300000 ( — )
B: ST30021000 (J-22912-01)
SDIA2106E
2.
Remove the rear bearing, using Tools.
Tool number
A: ST33710000 ( — )
B: ST30021000 (J-22912-01)
PDIA0153E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Front drive shaft
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear and bending of shaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage and peeling of gear.
PDIA0154E
Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and rough rotation. If necessary,
replace it with a new one.
MTF0041D
Revision: October 2004
TF-108
2005 Titan
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
ASSEMBLY
1.
A
Install the rear bearing, using Tools.
Tool number
A: KV38100500 ( — )
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
B
C
PDIA0155E
2.
TF
Install the front bearing, using Tools.
Tool number
E
A: KV38100500 ( — )
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
F
G
PDIA0156E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
TF-109
2005 Titan
SHIFT CONTROL
SHIFT CONTROL
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:33167
EDS001NW
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove snap ring and retaining pin using suitable tool. Then
remove drum cam from control shift rod.
PDIA0122E
2.
3.
Remove retaining pin from L-H shift rod, using suitable tool.
Remove 2-4 shift bracket
PDIA0125E
4.
5.
Remove retaining ring from 2-4 shift fork, using suitable tool.
Remove fork guide collar and 2-4 shift fork spring from 2-4 shift
fork
WDIA0226E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shift fork
●
Measure clearance between shift fork and sleeve. If it is out of
specification, replace it with new one.
Standard value
2-4
: Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in)
L-H
: Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in)
PDIA0134E
Revision: October 2004
TF-110
2005 Titan
SHIFT CONTROL
Shift rod and fork components
●
A
Check working face of shift rod and fork for wear, partial wear,
abrasion, bending and other abnormality. If any is found, replace
with new one.
B
C
PDIA0135E
TF
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Install clevis pin and shift collar to L-H shift fork after assembling them.
CAUTION:
Use caution when installing L-H shift fork, clevis pin or shift collar.
Install clevis pin and shift collar to 2-4 shift bracket after assembling them.
CAUTION:
Use caution when installing 2-4 shift bracket.
Install guide fork collar and 2-4 shift fork spring to the 2-4 shift
fork, and then secure it with the retaining ring.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse retaining ring.
● Be careful with orientation.
E
F
G
H
I
WDIA0218E
4.
5.
Install 2-4shift bracket to the L-H shift rod.
Install retaining pin evenly to the L-H shift rod.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin.
J
K
L
M
PDIA0125E
6.
7.
Install drum cam to the control shift rod, and then secure it with
retaining pin.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin.
Install snap ring to the control shift rod.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
PDIA0122E
Revision: October 2004
TF-111
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
EDS001NX
Applied model
VK56DE
Transfer model
TX15A
Gear ratio
High
1.000
Low
2.596
Planetary gear
Number of teeth
Sun gear
57
Internal gear
91
Front drive sprocket
38
Front drive shaft
38
Fluid capacity (Approx.)
(US qt, lmp qt)
2.0 (2-1/8, 1-3/4)
Pinion Gear End Play
EDS001NY
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Standard
Pinion gear end play
0.1 - 0.7 (0.004 - 0.028)
Clearance Between Shift Fork and Sleeve
EDS001NZ
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Standard
2-4 shift fork to 2-4 sleeve
Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in)
L-H shift fork to L-H sleeve
Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in)
Revision: October 2004
TF-112
2005 Titan
E SUSPENSION
A
B
SECTION
ROAD WHEELS & TIRES
C
D
WT
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Special Service Tool ................................................. 2
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 3
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 3
WHEEL ....................................................................... 4
Inspection ................................................................. 4
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY ................................. 5
Balancing Wheels .................................................... 5
REMOVAL ............................................................. 5
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ...................... 5
Rotation .................................................................... 6
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM ............ 7
System Components ................................................ 7
System Description .................................................. 7
TRANSMITTER ..................................................... 7
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ............. 7
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ...................... 8
WARNING LAMP AND BUZZER .......................... 8
DISPLAY UNIT (WITH NAVI) ................................ 8
CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 9
System Description .................................................. 9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES .......................................... 10
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 10
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 12
ID Registration Procedure ...................................... 13
ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER
ACTIVATION TOOL ............................................ 13
ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER
ACTIVATION TOOL ............................................ 14
Transmitter Wake Up Operation ............................. 15
WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL ........ 15
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 16
Self-Diagnosis ........................................................ 17
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 17
FUNCTION .......................................................... 17
Revision: October 2004
............................................................................ 17
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 19
INTRODUCTION ................................................. 19
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 19
Preliminary Check .................................................. 20
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart .......................... 21
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS ........................................................................ 23
Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM) ..... 23
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24 ... 23
Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1 ................................... 23
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41,
42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48 ............................... 23
Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2 ................................... 24
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38 ... 24
Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal ........................ 25
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52 ........................... 25
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............. 26
Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On
When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ........................ 26
Inspection2:WarningLampStaysOnWhenIgnition
Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 26
Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition
Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 28
Inspection 4: Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On .................................. 29
Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In
Display Unit Does Not Exist .................................... 30
Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed... 30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................. 31
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) ............................... 31
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 33
Road Wheel ............................................................ 33
Tire ......................................................................... 33
WT-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EES001D2
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-45295)
Transmitter activation tool
ID registration
LEIA0035E
Commercial Service Tools
EES001D3
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Removing wheel nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: October 2004
WT-2
2005 Titan
TIRES
Symptom
ROAD
WHEEL
Revision: October 2004
Incorrect tire pressure
Vibration
Uneven tire wear
Deformation or damage
WT-3
Non-uniformity
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy, shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
TIRES
BRAKE
STEERING
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
ROAD WHEEL
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
×
DIFFERENTIAL
×
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart.
Refer to TIRES in this chart.
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (RAX),
RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (RSU)
FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (FFD),
RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (RFD)
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (FAX),
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (FSU)
WT-33
—
—
WT-6
WT-33
WT-5
WT-4
Reference page
Incorrect tire size
Imbalance
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Out-of-round
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
PFP:00003
EES001D4
A
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
×: Applicable
2005 Titan
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
×
L
M
WHEEL
WHEEL
Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
PFP:40300
EES001D5
Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If
deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance
machine.
Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. Refer to WT-33,
"Road Wheel" .
Check front wheel bearings for looseness.
Check front suspension for looseness.
SFA975B
Revision: October 2004
WT-4
2005 Titan
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
Balancing Wheels
PFP:40300
A
EES001D6
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION:
After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
●
1.
2.
B
C
D
If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
WT
Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with
a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the desig- F
nated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
G
● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
H
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance
weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
I
balance weight value.
Example:
37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz)
J
SMA054D
K
a.
b.
Install balance weight in the position shown.
When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved
area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance
weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
● Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with
new ones.
● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
L
M
SMA055D
Revision: October 2004
WT-5
2005 Titan
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
c.
3.
4.
5.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
Start wheel balancer again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual
imbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or below.
● If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance):
Maximum allowable imbalance
Dynamic (At rim flange)
Static
SMA056D
5 g (0.18 oz) (one side)
10 g (0.35 oz)
Rotation
EES001PX
NOTE:
Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" .
1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do
not include the spare tire when rotating the tires.
Wheel nut torque
2.
3.
: 133 N·m (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
Adjust the tire pressure to specification. Refer to WT-33, "Tire" .
After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle
has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after every
wheel and tire have been installed such as after repairing a flat
tire.
Revision: October 2004
WT-6
SMA829C
2005 Titan
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
System Components
PFP:40300
A
EES001D8
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
LEIA0101E
System Description
EES001D9
J
TRANSMITTER
A sensor-transmitter integrated with a valve is installed on a wheel,
and transmits a detected air pressure signal in the form of a radio
wave.
K
L
M
LEIA0028E
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Receives the air pressure signal transmitted by the transmitter in
each wheel.
LEIA0069E
Revision: October 2004
WT-7
2005 Titan
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Reads the air pressure signal received by the remote keyless entry
receiver, and controls the warning lamp and the buzzer operations
as shown below. It also has a judgement function to detect a system
malfunction.
LEIA0068E
WARNING LAMP AND BUZZER
Indicates low tire pressure or system malfunction.
Condition
Warning lamp
Buzzer
Less than 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi)
[Flat tire]
ON
Sounds for
10 sec.
System malfunction
ON
OFF
LEIA0055E
DISPLAY UNIT (WITH NAVI)
Displays the air pressure of each tire.
●
After the ignition switch is turned on, the pressure values will not
be displayed until the data of each wheel is received.
LEIA0067E
Revision: October 2004
WT-8
2005 Titan
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
A
EES001DA
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WT-9
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Wiring Diagram
PFP:00004
EES001DB
WEWA0030E
Revision: October 2004
WT-10
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WEWA0031E
Revision: October 2004
WT-11
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
Terminal
+
Item
EES001DC
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
–
15 (L/W)
Tire pressure warning check
connector
—
5V
18 (P)
Remote keyless entry receiver
(Ground)
—
0V
Stand-by
OCC3879D
Remote keyless entry receiver
(Power supply)
19 (V/W)
Press any of the electronic
switches
OCC3882D
Ground
Stand-by
20 (G/W)
OCC3881D
Remote keyless entry receiver
(Signal)
Press any of the electronic
switches
OCC3880D
(
38 (W/L)
Ignition switch
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
39 (L)
Data line (CAN H)
—
—
40 (P)
Data line (CAN L)
—
—
67 (B)
GND
—
0V
70 (W/B)
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
) : Wire color
Revision: October 2004
WT-12
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
ID Registration Procedure
EES001DD
A
ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected B
during self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON.
C
2. Select "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch “BCM” on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
D
NOTE:
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
4. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
WT
5. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST".
6. With the transmitter activation tool (J-45295) pushed against the
front left transmitter position of the tire air valve, press the button
F
for 5 seconds.
Tool number
—
(J-45295)
G
H
LEIA0036E
7.
Register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH and RR LH. When ID registration of each wheel has
been completed, a buzzer sounds and the warning lamp flashes.
Activation tire position
Buzzer
1
Front LH
Once
2
Front RH
2 times
3
Rear RH
3 times
4
Rear LH
4 times
Hazard warning lamp
I
CONSULT-II
J
2 times flashing
“YET”
↓
“DONE”
K
8. After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure.
NOTE:
Be sure to register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH, to RR LH, or the self-diagnostic results display will not function properly.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WT-13
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch “BCM” on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
NOTE:
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
4. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on “SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
5. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on “SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST".
6. Adjust the tire pressure to the values shown in the table below for ID registration, and drive the vehicle at
15 km/h (9.4 MPH) or more for a few minutes.
7.
Tire position
Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Front – Left
250 (2.5, 36)
Front – Right
230 (2.3, 33)
Rear – Right
210 (2.1, 30)
Rear – Left
190 (1.9, 27)
After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure.
Activation tire position
CONSULT-II
Front LH
“YET”
↓
“DONE”
Front RH
Rear RH
Rear LH
8.
Inflate all tires to proper pressure.
Tire pressure
17 inch tire
: 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2 , 35 psi)
18 inch tire
: 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2 , 35 psi)
Revision: October 2004
WT-14
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Transmitter Wake Up Operation
EES001DE
A
WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
1.
With the transmitter activation tool (J-45295) pushed against the
front left transmitter, press the button for 5 seconds.
Tool number
●
—
B
(J-45295)
With ignition switch ON, as the warning lamp flashes per the
following diagram, the respective transmitter then must be
woken up.
C
D
LEIA0036E
2.
When the BCM finishes assigning each tire ID, the BCM flashes the hazard warning lamps and trailer WT
flasher lamps (if equipped) and sends flashing indicator status by CAN according to the following time
chart. Please see trailer flasher specification details of trailer flashing lamps since the BCM controls trailer
flasher lamps as brake lamps.
F
G
H
I
J
K
LEIA0059E
3.
After completing wake up of all transmitters, make sure low tire pressure warning lamp goes out.
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WT-15
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EES001PY
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM
diagnostic test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received
data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Inspection by part
ACTIVE TEST
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Revision: October 2004
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication
can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
WT-16
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Self-Diagnosis
EES001DF
DESCRIPTION
A
During driving, the low tire pressure warning system receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter
installed in each wheel, and gives alarms when the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit (BCM) for this
system has pressure judgement and trouble diagnosis functions.
B
FUNCTION
When the low tire pressure warning system detects low inflation pressure or another unusual symptom, the
warning lamp in the combination meter comes on. To start the self-diagnostic results mode, ground the tire
pressure warning check terminal. The malfunction location is indicated by the warning lamp flashing and the
buzzer sounds.
C
D
CONSULT-II Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System
ITEM
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Front - Left transmitter
×
×
Front - Right transmitter
×
×
Rear - Left transmitter
×
×
Rear - Right transmitter
×
×
Warning lamp
—
×
Vehicle speed
×
×
Buzzer (in combination meter)
—
×
CAN Communication
×
—
WT
F
G
H
× : Applicable
– : Not applicable
I
Self-Diagnostic Results Mode
Diagnostic item
FLAT - TIRE - FL
FLAT - TIRE - FR
FLAT - TIRE - RR
FLAT - TIRE - RL
Diagnostic item is detected when ···
J
Front-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
Front-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
Rear-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
Rear-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
[NO-DATA] - FL
[NO-DATA] - FR
[NO-DATA] - RR
[NO-DATA] - RL
Data from front-left transmitter cannot be received.
Data from front-right transmitter cannot be received.
Data from rear-right transmitter cannot be received.
Data from rear-left transmitter cannot be received.
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - FL
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - FR
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - RR
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - RL
Checksum data from front-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
Checksum data from front-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
Checksum data from rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
Checksum data from rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - FL
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - FR
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - RR
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - RL
Air pressure data from front-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
Air pressure data from front-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
Air pressure data from rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
Air pressure data from rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
[CODE- ERR] - FL
[CODE- ERR] - FR
[CODE- ERR] - RR
[CODE- ERR] - RL
Function code data from front-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
Function code data from front-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
Function code data from rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
Function code data from rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FL
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FR
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RR
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RL
Battery voltage of front-left transmitter drops.
Battery voltage of front-right transmitter drops.
Battery voltage of rear-right transmitter drops.
Battery voltage of rear-left transmitter drops.
VHCL_SPEED_SIG_ERR
Vehicle speed signal is in error.
K
L
M
NOTE:
Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID or the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on
CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
WT-17
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Data Monitor Mode
MONITOR
VHCL SPEED
AIR PRESS FL
AIR PRESS FR
AIR PRESS RR
AIR PRESS RL
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
Drive vehicle.
●
Vehicle speed (km/h or MPH)
Drive vehicle for a few minutes.
or
●
Tire pressure (kPa or psi)
Ignition switch ON and activation tool
is transmitting activation signals.
ID REGST FL1
ID REGST FR1
ID REGST RR1
ID REGST RL1
Registration ID: DONE
No registration ID: YET
Ignition switch ON
WARNING LAMP
Low tire pressure warning lamp on: ON
Low tire pressure warning lamp off: OFF
BUZZER
Buzzer in combination meter on: ON
Buzzer in combination meter off : OFF
NOTE:
Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID, or the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on
CONSULT-II.
Revision: October 2004
WT-18
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
EES001DG
A
INTRODUCTION
●
●
●
Before troubleshooting, verify customer complaints.
If a vehicle malfunction is difficult to reproduce, harnesses, harness connectors or terminals may be malfunctioning. Hold and shake these parts to make sure they are securely connected.
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage or resistance of each circuit, be careful not to damage or
deform connector terminals.
B
C
WORK FLOW
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEIA0100E
Preliminary check :
Revision: October 2004
WT-20
Self-diagnosis :
WT-17
WT-19
Trouble diagnosis for symptoms :
WT-26
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Preliminary Check
EES001DH
BASIC INSPECTION
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
Confirm BCM configuration for "DISPLAY STYLE" is set to:
●
"MODE1" for vehicles without Navigation display screen.
●
"MODE2" for vehicles with Navigation display screen.
Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "DISPLAY STYLE" to "MODE1" or "MODE2". Refer to BCS-16,
"WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
2. CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES
Check all tire pressures.
Tire pressure
17 inch tire
: 240 kPa (2.3 kg/cm2 , 35 psi)
18 inch tire
: 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2 , 35 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
3. CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp activation.
2. Does low tire pressure warning lamp activate for 1 second when ignition switch is turned “ON”?
Does warning lamp activate?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check fuse and combination meter.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect BCM harness connector.
2. Check terminals for damage or loose connection.
3. Reconnect harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
Check transmitter activation tool battery.
OK or NG
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Replace transmitter activation tool battery.
Revision: October 2004
WT-20
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart
EES001DI
A
Code/Symptom
15
16
17
18
Malfunction part
Reference
page
Front-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
Front-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
Rear-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
B
—
Rear-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
C
21
22
23
24
Transmitter no data (front - left)
Transmitter no data (front - right)
Transmitter no data (rear - right)
Transmitter no data (rear - left)
WT-23,
"Inspection 1:
Transmitter or
Control Unit
(BCM)"
31
32
33
34
Transmitter checksum error (front - left)
Transmitter checksum error (front - right)
Transmitter checksum error (rear - right)
Transmitter checksum error (rear - left)
WT-23,
"Inspection 2:
Transmitter 1"
35
36
37
38
Transmitter pressure data error (front - left)
Transmitter pressure data error (front - right)
Transmitter pressure data error (rear - right)
Transmitter pressure data error (rear - left)
WT-24,
"Inspection 3:
Transmitter 2"
41
42
43
44
Transmitter function code error (front - left)
Transmitter function code error (front - right)
Transmitter function code error (rear - right)
Transmitter function code error (rear - left)
WT-23,
"Inspection 2:
Transmitter 1"
45
46
47
48
Transmitter battery voltage low (front - left)
Transmitter battery voltage low (front - right)
Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - right)
Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - left)
WT-23,
"Inspection 2:
Transmitter 1"
Vehicle speed signal
WT-25,
"Inspection 4:
Vehicle Speed
Signal"
Fuse or combination meter
BCM connector or circuit
BCM
WT-26,
"Inspection 1:
Warning
Lamp Does
Not Come On
When Ignition
Switch Is
Turned On"
Combination meter
BCM connector or circuit
BCM
WT-26,
"Inspection 2:
Warning
Lamp Stays
On When
Ignition
Switch Is
Turned On"
BCM harness connector or circuit
BCM
Transmitter's mode off
ID registration not yet
WT-28,
"Inspection 3:
Warning
Lamp Flashes
When Ignition
Switch Is
Turned
On"WT-28
52
Low tire pressure warning lamp does
not come on when ignition switch is
turned on.
Low tire pressure warning lamp stays
on when ignition switch is turned on.
Low tire pressure warning lamp
flashes when ignition switch is turned
on.
Revision: October 2004
WT-21
2005 Titan
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Code/Symptom
Malfunction part
Reference
page
BCM harness connector or circuit
BCM
WT-28,
"Inspection 3:
Warning
Lamp Flashes
When Ignition
Switch Is
Turned On"
“TIRE PRESSURE” information in display does not exist.
Fuse
Display unit
BCM
WT-30,
"Inspection 5:
“TIRE PRESSURE” Information In
Display Unit
Does Not
Exist"
ID registration cannot be completed.
Transmitter
Remote keyless entry receiver harness connector or circuit
Remote keyless entry receiver
BCM harness connector or circuit
BCM
WT-30,
"Inspection 6:
ID Registration Cannot
Be Completed"
Hazard warning lamp flashes when
ignition switch is turned on.
Revision: October 2004
WT-22
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)
PFP:00000
A
EES001DJ
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24
1. CHECK CONTROL UNIT
B
Drive for several minutes. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM”.
Are all tire pressures displayed as 0 kPa?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
C
2. CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CONNECTOR
D
Check remote keyless entry receiver connector for damage or loose connections.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM, then GO TO 3. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair or replace remote keyless entry receiver connector.
WT
F
3. ID REGISTRATION
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Is there a tire that cannot register ID?
YES >> Replace transmitter of the tire, then GO TO 5. Refer to WT-31, "Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)" .
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
4. VEHICLE DRIVING
1.
2.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping.
Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed
becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH).
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
1.
2.
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for
10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC.
Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1
EES001DK
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48
1. ID REGISTRATION (CORRECTION OF TRANSMITTER LOCATION)
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for
10 minutes.
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2004
J
K
5. ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
1.
2.
I
WT-23
2005 Titan
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
2. REPLACE TRANSMITTER
1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp again for flashing, replace malfunctioning transmitter.
2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO Inspection 1. Refer to WT-23, "Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)" .
3. VEHICLE DRIVING
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10
minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning transmitter, and perform “Step 3” again. Refer to WT-31, "Transmitter
(Pressure Sensor)" .
Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2
EES001DL
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38
1. CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES
Check all tire pressures.
Tire pressure
17 inch tire
: 240 kPa (2.4 kg/m2 , 35 psi)
18 inch tire
: 240 kPa (2.4 kg/m2 , 35 psi)
Are there any tires with pressure of “64 psi” or more?
YES >> Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. VEHICLE DRIVING
1.
2.
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping.
Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed
becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH).
>> Replace transmitter with new one if “DATA MONITOR ITEM” displays 64 psi or more. Refer to
WT-31, "Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)" . Then GO TO 3.
3. ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
1.
2.
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for
10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC.
Revision: October 2004
WT-24
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal
EES001DM
A
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link con- B
nector, then turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
C
3. Select "BCM" on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
NOTE:
If the BCM is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit"
D
4. Select "BCM C/U" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen, and select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
5. Check display contents in self-diagnostic results.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
WT
YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
NO
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2. CHECK BCM
F
Perform BCM diagnosis. Refer to BCS-11, "CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE" .
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> Perform Vehicle Speed Sensor Inspection. Refer to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WT-25
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
PFP:00007
Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned
On
EES001DN
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
1.
With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
3. Select "BCM" on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
NOTE:
If the BCM is not indicated, refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
4. Select "BCM C/U" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen, and select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
5. Check display contents in self-diagnostic results.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Malfunciton in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter operation.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-8, "Combination Meter" .
3. CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Disconnect BCM harness connectors.
Does the low tire pressure warning lamp activate?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NO
>> Check combination meter and repair or replace. Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of
Combination Meter" .
Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EES001DO
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect BCM harness connectors.
2. Check terminals for damage or loose connections.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: October 2004
WT-26
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (BAT)
A
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 70 (W/B) and ground.
1.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
70 (W/B)
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
12 V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short.
B
C
D
LEIA0098E
WT
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (IGN)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 38 (W/L) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
F
G
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
12 V
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short.
I
WEIA0038E
J
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67
(B) and ground.
Terminals
Continuity
(+)
L
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit.
Revision: October 2004
K
WT-27
M
LIIA1040E
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EES001DP
NOTE:
If warning lamp flashes as shown, the system is normal.
Flash Mode A
●
This mode shows transmitter status is OFF-mode.
Carry out transmitter wake up operation. Refer to WT-15,
"Transmitter Wake Up Operation" .
SEIA0347E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect BCM harness connectors M18 and M20.
2. Check terminals for damage or loose connections.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2. CHECK TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CHECK CONNECTOR CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 15 (L/W) and check connector M123 terminal
1 (L/W).
Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
WEIA0052E
Revision: October 2004
WT-28
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Inspection 4: Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EES001DQ
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
B
Disconnect BCM harness connector M20.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
67 (B) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Ground
C
Continuity
D
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit.
WT
LIIA1040E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WT-29
2005 Titan
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In Display Unit Does Not Exist
EES001DR
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
1.
With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
3. Select "BCM" on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
NOTE:
If the BCM is not indicated, refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
4. Select "BCM C/U" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen, and select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
5. Check display contents in self-diagnostic results.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Malfunciton in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DISPLAY UNIT
Perform display unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-118, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" (without NAVI) or AV-121,
"Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" (with NAVI).
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed
EES001DS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. ID REGISTRATION (ALL)
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Go To WT-23, "Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)" .
Revision: October 2004
WT-30
2005 Titan
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
PFP:00000
A
EES001DT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and
break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the
bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
B
C
D
WT
SEIA0047E
3.
4.
5.
Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the
tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto
turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees
from mounting/dismounting head.
Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the
tire and remove the transmitter.
Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
F
G
H
SEIA0048E
I
INSTALLATION
1.
Place first side of tire onto rim.
J
K
L
SEIA0049E
M
2.
Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut.
Transmitter nut
tightening torque
: 5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
LEIA0028E
Revision: October 2004
WT-31
2005 Titan
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter
is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE:
Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-5,
"Balancing Wheels" .
Install Wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on
vehicle.
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to PS-7,
"CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL" .
Revision: October 2004
WT-32
SEIA0048E
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
Wheel type
Maximum radial
runout limit
Maximum residual
imbalance
PFP:00030
A
EES001DU
Steel
Aluminum
Inside
Outside
B
Lateral mm (in)
0.3 (0.012) or less
1.0 (0.039) or less
0.9 (0.035) or less
Radial mm (in)
0.3 (0.012) or less
0.8 (0.031) or less
0.4 (0.016) or less
Dynamic
(at rim flange)
Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side)
Static (at rim flange)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
D
Tire
EES001DV
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Air pressure
Tire size
Conventional tire
Spare tire
—
240 (2.4, 35)
P245/75R17
240 (2.4, 35)
—
P285/70R17
240 (2.4, 35)
—
P265/70R18
240 (2.4, 35)
—
Full size spare tire
C
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WT-33
2005 Titan
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: October 2004
WT-34
2005 Titan
K ELECTRICAL
A
B
SECTION
WIPER, WASHER & HORN
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .................. 4
Components Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................... 4
System Description .................................................. 4
LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION ...................... 5
HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION ........................... 5
INTERMITTENT OPERATION .............................. 5
AUTO STOP OPERATION .................................... 5
FRONT WASHER OPERATION ........................... 6
MIST OPERATION ................................................ 6
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION ......................................... 6
COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION..... 7
CAN Communication System Description ................ 9
Schematic .............................................................. 10
Wiring Diagram — WIPER — .................................11
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 14
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ..... 15
Work Flow .............................................................. 15
Preliminary Inspection ............................................ 15
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 15
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 17
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 17
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 18
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 18
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 19
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 19
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 20
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 20
Trouble Diagnosis .................................................. 21
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 21
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT .................................................................. 24
ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPER-
Revision: October 2004
ATE ...................................................................... 25
ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE... 27
ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................................................... 28
FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION
SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED... 29
WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT
WASHER OPERATES ........................................ 29
FRONTWIPERSOPERATEFOR10SECONDS,
STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER
REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES,
THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE ......................... 29
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms,
Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location ............... 31
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage .......................................................................... 31
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 32
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .................................... 32
Washer Tube Layout .............................................. 33
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer
Switch ..................................................................... 33
REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION ................................................... 33
Removal and Installation of Washer Tank .............. 33
REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION ................................................... 34
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............. 34
REMOVAL ........................................................... 34
INSTALLATION ................................................... 34
POWER SOCKET ..................................................... 35
Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT — ................................ 35
Removal and Installation of Power Sockets ........... 36
REMOVAL ........................................................... 36
INSTALLATION ................................................... 36
HORN ........................................................................ 37
WW-1
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Wiring Diagram — HORN — .................................. 37
Removal and Installation ........................................ 38
REMOVAL ........................................................... 38
INSTALLATION .................................................... 38
Revision: October 2004
WW-2
2005 Titan
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTION
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EKS00AE9
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
EKS00AEA
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WW-3
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Components Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28810
EKS00AEB
WKIA3460E
System Description
EKS00AEC
Both front wiper relays are located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room).
The wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals. Terminal combination status is read by the BCM (body control module) when the wiper switch is
turned ON.
●
BCM controls front wiper LO, HI, and INT (intermittent) operation.
●
IPDM E/R operates the wiper motor according to CAN communication signals from the BCM.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 30A fuse (No. 39, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to front wiper relay (located in the IPDM E/R).
With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination switch terminal 12
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 and
●
to front wiper motor terminal 1
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
●
●
Revision: October 2004
WW-4
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to the low position, the BCM detects a low speed wiper ON request through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading
function.
The BCM then sends a front wiper (low) request signal over CAN communication lines
●
from BCM terminals 39 and 40
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (low) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay.
With the front wiper relay energized, power is supplied
●
through front wiper relay
●
to front wiper HI relay
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 32
●
to front wiper motor terminal 3.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
A
B
C
D
E
HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to the high position, the BCM detects a high speed wiper ON request through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading
function.
The BCM then sends a front wiper (high) request signal over CAN communication lines
●
from BCM terminals 39 and 40
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
When the IPDM E/R receives a front wiper (high) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper
and the front wiper HI relays.
With the front wiper and the front wiper HI relays energized, power is supplied
●
through front wiper relay
●
to front wiper HI relay
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 35
●
to front wiper motor terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
INTERMITTENT OPERATION
Wiper intermittent operation delay interval is determined from the combination of the intermittent wiper dial
position inputs and vehicle speed. During each intermittent operation delay interval, the BCM sends a front
wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R to operate the wipers.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to an intermittent
position, the BCM detects a front wiper (intermittent) ON request through the combination switch (wiper
switch) reading function.
The BCM then sends a front wiper (intermittent) request signal over CAN communication lines
●
from BCM terminals 39 and 40
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40.
When the BCM determines that combination switch status is front wiper intermittent ON, it performs the following operations.
●
BCM detects ON/OFF status of intermittent wiper dial position
●
BCM calculates operation interval from wiper dial position and vehicle speed signal received through CAN
communications.
●
BCM sends front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R at calculated operation interval.
When the IPDM E/R receives a front wiper request signal (INT), it supplies ground to energize the front wiper
relay. It then sends an auto-stop signal to the BCM, and conducts intermittent front wiper motor operation.
AUTO STOP OPERATION
When the wiper arms are not located at the base of the windshield, and the wiper switch is turned OFF, the
wiper motor will continue to operate until the wiper arms reach the windshield base. When the wiper arms
reach the base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 6 and 1 are connected.
Ground is supplied
Revision: October 2004
WW-5
2005 Titan
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
to IPDM E/R terminal 43
●
through front wiper motor terminal 6
●
through front wiper motor terminal 1
●
through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
The IPDM E/R sends an auto stop operation signal to the BCM through CAN communication lines.
When the BCM receives an auto stop operation signal, the BCM sends wiper stop signal to the IPDM E/R over
CAN communication lines. The IPDM E/R then de-energizes the front wiper relay.
The wiper motor will then stop the wiper arms at the STOP position.
●
FRONT WASHER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front washer switch is OFF, the front washer
motor is supplied power
●
through 10A fuse (No. 9, located in the fuse block J/B)
●
to front washer motor terminal 1.
When the front wiper switch is in the front washer position, the BCM detects a front washer signal request
through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading function.
Combination switch ground is supplied
●
to front washer motor terminal 2
●
through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 11
●
through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 12
●
through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
With ground supplied, the front washer motor operates.
When the BCM detects that front washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, the BCM uses CAN
communication and sends a wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R for low speed operation of wipers.
When the BCM detects that the washer switch is OFF, low speed operation cycles approximately 3 times and
then stops.
MIST OPERATION
When the wiper switch is temporarily placed in the mist position, wiper low speed operation cycles once and
then stops.
For additional information about wiper operation under this condition, refer to WW-5, "LOW SPEED WIPER
OPERATION" .
If the switch is held in the mist position, low speed operation continues.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
The BCM includes fail-safe function to prevent malfunction of electrical components controlled by CAN communications if a malfunction in CAN communications occurs.
The BCM uses CAN communications to stop output of electrical components it controls.
Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper system remains in same status as just before fail-safe control was initiated. (If wiper was in low speed operation just before fail-safe, it continues low speed operation
until ignition switch is turned OFF.)
When fail-safe status is initiated, the BCM remains in standby until normal signals are received.
When normal signals are received, fail-safe status is canceled.
Revision: October 2004
WW-6
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Description
●
●
A
BCM reads combination switch status, and controls related systems such as headlamps and wipers,
according to the results.
BCM reads information for a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5)
and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
Operation Description
●
●
●
BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically, and allows current to flow in
turn.
If any (1 or more) switches are turned ON, the circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of the input terminal (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, the interface in the BCM
detects a voltage change, and the BCM determines that the switch is ON.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
SKIA8639E
Revision: October 2004
WW-7
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches
●
BCM reads operation status of the combination switch using combinations shown in the table below.
SKIA8640E
Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch is Turned ON)
●
●
●
When the wiper switch is turned ON, contact in the combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 1
transistor is activated, the BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 3.
When the OUTPUT 1 transistor is ON, the BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 3, and judges that
front wiper low is ON. Then the BCM sends a front wiper request signal (LO) to the IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
When OUTPUT 1 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 3, and recognizes that the wiper switch is continuously ON.
PKIA4848E
Revision: October 2004
WW-8
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
NOTE:
Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after the switch is turned ON,
electrical loads are activated with time delay. This time delay is so short that it cannot be detected by human
senses.
A
Operation Mode
B
The combination switch reading function has the operation modes shown below.
1. Normal status
–
When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
2. Sleep status
–
When BCM is in sleep status, transistors of OUTPUT 1 stop the output, and BCM enters low current consumption mode. OUTPUT (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF every 10 ms, and only input from light switch system
is accepted.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
SKIA4961E
CAN Communication System Description
M
EKS00AED
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: October 2004
WW-9
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS00AEE
WKWA2261E
Revision: October 2004
WW-10
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —
EKS00AEF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
WKWA2256E
Revision: October 2004
WW-11
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
WKWA2257E
Revision: October 2004
WW-12
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
WKWA2258E
Revision: October 2004
WW-13
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS00AEG
Measuring condition
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Signal name
2
SB
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
Reference Value (V)
(Approx.)
SKIA5291E
3
G/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
Y
Combination switch input 3
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
G/B
Combination switch input 2
6
V
Combination switch input 1
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
32
R/G
Combination switch output 5
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
L
Combination switch output 3
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: October 2004
WW-14
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Measuring condition
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Signal name
35
O/B
Combination switch output 2
36
R/W
Combination switch output 1
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference Value (V)
(Approx.)
A
B
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
C
SKIA5292E
38
W/L
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery
39
L
CAN-H
ON
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
ON
—
—
67
B
Ground
—
—
0
70
W/B
OFF
—
Battery
Battery power
D
E
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS00AEH
F
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
32
L
35
43
Signal name
Low speed signal
L/B
High speed signal
L/Y
Wiper auto stop signal
Ignition
switch
ON
ON
Operation or condition
Wiper switch
Wiper switch
ON
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
OFF
0
LO
Battery
OFF
0
HI
Battery
Wiper operating
Battery
Wiper stopped
0
38
B
Ground
—
—
0
39
L
CAN-H
ON
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
ON
—
—
59
B
Ground
—
—
0
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G
H
I
J
WW
EKS00AEI
L
Confirm the trouble symptom or customer complaint.
Understand the system description, refer to WW-4, "System Description" .
Perform preliminary inspection, refer to WW-15, "Preliminary Inspection" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does wiper function operate normally? If it operates normally, GO TO 6. If not, GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Inspection
M
EKS00AEJ
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Inspection procedure
1. CHECK FUSE
Check if wiper or washer fuse is blown.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Front washer motor
Ignition ON or START
9
Front wiper relay
Battery
39
Ignition ON or START
59
Battery
f
BCM
Revision: October 2004
WW-15
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (W/L)
M20
70 (W/B)
(–)
Ground
OFF
ON
0V
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between BCM and fuse.
WKIA1434E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM)
Check for continuity between BCM terminal and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
condition
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair/replace BCM ground circuit.
WKIA1435E
Revision: October 2004
WW-16
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS00AEK
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
E
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
2.
J
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
WW
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
WW-17
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST
ITEM" screen.
LKIA0183E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal.
IGN SW CAN
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN switch ON (ON)/Other OFF or ACC (OFF)" status as judged from CAN communications.
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
(1 - 7)
Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal.
INT VOLUME
FR WIPER STOP
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto-stop signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
"0.0 km/h"
Displays vehicle speed as received from CAN communication.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s).
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Front wiper HI output
Revision: October 2004
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
FR WIPER (HI)
Description
Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
WW-18
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Test item
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
Description
Front wiper LO output
FR WIPER (LO)
Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Front wiper INT output
FR WIPER (INT)
Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
A
B
EKS00AEL
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
C
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
D
E
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0369E
J
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
WW
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: October 2004
WW-19
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG
MODE" screen.
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitors predetermined items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Display or unit
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
FR WIP REQ
STOP/1LO/LO/HI
x
x
x
Signal status input from BCM.
Wiper auto stop
WIP AUTO STOP
ACT P/STOP P
x
x
x
Output status of IPDM E/R.
Wiper protection
WIP PROT
OFF/LS/HS/BLOCK
x
x
x
Control status of IPDM E/R.
Item name
Front wiper
request
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s).
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Front wiper (HI, LO) output
Revision: October 2004
CONSULT-II
screen display
FRONT WIPER
Description
With a certain operation (OFF, HI, LO) front wiper relays can be operated.
WW-20
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00AEM
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
A
CAUTION:
During IPDM E/R fail-safe control, front wipers may not operate. Refer to PG-16, "CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL" to make sure that it is not in fail-safe status.
B
Inspection Procedure
1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (1)
C
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
1.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-22,
"Auto Active Test" .
2. Confirm front wiper operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
F
SKIA3486E
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WW-21
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (2) INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and front wiper motor harness connector terminals.
Terminals
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
32 (L)
E121
3 (L)
35 (L/B)
E122
Continuity
E23
2 (L/B)
43 (L/Y)
Yes
6 (L/Y)
WKIA2827E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and ground.
Terminals
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
32 (L)
E121
35 (L/B)
E122
Ground
No
43 (L/Y)
WKIA1424E
5.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E122
38 (B)
E124
59 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
WKIA1425E
6.
Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector
terminal 1 and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E23
1 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper
motor and ground.
Revision: October 2004
WW-22
WKIA2828E
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
A
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When front wiper relay, and front wiper HI relay are operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals
and ground.
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
When front wiper relay, and front wiper HI relay are operating,
check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground.
B
C
D
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(–)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Stopped
0
LO operation
Battery voltage
Stopped
0
HI operation
Battery voltage
E
Terminal (wire color)
32 (L)
E121
Ground
35 (L/B)
F
WKIA1427E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the front wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and
Linkage" .
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
G
H
4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM (1) INSPECTION
I
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER INT", "FR WIPER LOW" and "FR WIPER HI" turn
ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check wiper switch. Refer to WW-7, "COMBINATION
SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
J
WW
L
WKIA1018E
5. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM (2) INSPECTION
M
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out self-diagnosis of BCM.
Displayed self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check CAN communication line of BCM.
GO TO BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection Using
CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" .
SKIA1039E
Revision: October 2004
WW-23
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT
Inspection Procedure
1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (1) INSPECTION
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that
"WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to
wiper operation.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SKIA5301E
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (2) INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
front wiper motor harness connector.
Terminals
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
Connector
E122
43 (L/Y)
E23
6 (L/Y)
Yes
WKIA2829E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
E122
43 (L/Y)
Continuity
Ground
No
WKIA1429E
5.
Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector
terminal 1 and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
E23
1 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> ● Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
● Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper
motor and ground.
Revision: October 2004
WW-24
WKIA2828E
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
A
With CONSULT-II
Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Select "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When front wipers are operating and when stopped, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 43 and
ground.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
2. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
3. When front wipers are operating and when stopped, measure
voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 43 and ground.
C
D
E
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
(–)
E122
43 (L/Y)
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Wiper operating
Battery
voltage
Wiper stopped
0V
F
G
WKIA1431E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" .
1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (1) INSPECTION
J
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Select "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
4. Confirm front wiper low operation.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-22,
"Auto Active Test" .
2. Confirm front wiper low operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WW
L
1.
WW-25
H
I
ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPERATE
Inspection Procedure
Revision: October 2004
B
M
SKIA3486E
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (2) INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front wiper motor harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
Connector
E121
32 (L)
E23
3 (L)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
WKIA2830E
3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Select "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When front wiper relay is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals.
Without CONSULT-II
Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
When front wiper relay is operating, check voltage between
IPDM E/R terminals.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal (wire
color)
E122
38 (B)
E124
59 (B)
Connector
Terminal (wire
color)
E121
32 (L)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery
voltage
WKIA3198E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage"
.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER HI" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper
switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
Revision: October 2004
WW-26
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE
Inspection Procedure
A
1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (1) INSPECTION
B
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
4. Confirm front wiper high operation.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-22,
"Auto Active Test" .
2. Confirm front wiper operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
E
SKIA3486E
F
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (2) INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front wiper motor harness connector terminal.
H
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E121
35 (L/B)
I
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
E23
2 (L/B)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
J
WW
WKIA2852E
L
M
Revision: October 2004
WW-27
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When front wiper relay (HI) is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
2. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" .
3. When front wiper relay (HI) is operating, check voltage between
IPDM E/R terminals.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal (wire
color)
E122
38 (B)
E124
59 (B)
Connector
Terminal (wire
color)
E121
35 (L/B)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery
voltage
WKIA3200E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage"
.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With “WIPER” data monitor, check
that “FR WIPER HI” turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper
switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE
Inspection Procedure
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper
switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
Revision: October 2004
WW-28
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED
Inspection Procedure
A
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
B
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "INT VOLUME" changes in order from 1 to 7 according to operation of the intermittent switch dial position.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
C
D
WKIA1018E
WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT WASHER OPERATES
Inspection Procedure
E
F
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of
front washer switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
G
H
I
WKIA1018E
J
FRONT WIPERS OPERATE FOR 10 SECONDS, STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER
REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES, THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE
CAUTION:
WW
●
When auto stop signal has not varied for 10 seconds or longer while IPDM E/R is operating front
wipers, IPDM E/R considers front wipers locked and stops wiper output, which causes this symptom.
L
●
This status can be checked by using IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR". Under this condition, "WIP
PROT" reads "BLOCK".
Inspection Procedure
M
1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (1) INSPECTION
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that
"WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to
wiper operation.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SKIA5301E
Revision: October 2004
WW-29
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (2) INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front wiper motor harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
Connector
E122
43 (L/Y)
E23
6 (L/Y)
Yes
WKIA2856E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
E122
43 (L/Y)
Continuity
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1429E
3. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (3) INSPECTION
While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure
voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 43 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Terminal
(wire color)
(–)
Connector
E122
43 (L/Y)
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Wiper operating
Battery
voltge
Wiper stopped
0V
WKIA1431E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" .
Revision: October 2004
WW-30
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop
Location
EKS00AEN
A
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Operate the wiper motor, and stop it at the auto stop position.
Remove the wiper arm mounting covers.
Remove the wiper arm mounting nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
B
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (Auto Stop).
Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before
tightening nut.
Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it "OFF".
Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance "L1" and "L2".
Clearance "L1"
Clearance "L2"
●
●
D
E
: 41.5 - 56.5 mm (1.634 - 2.224 in)
: 52.5 - 67.5 mm (2.067 - 2.657 in)
F
SEL543TA
Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness.
Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper arm nuts
G
: 23.6 N·m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb)
H
I
SEL024J
J
Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage
EKS00AEO
WW
L
M
LKIA0408E
1.
Wiper arm mounting covers
2.
Wiper arm mounting nuts
3.
Front RH wiper arm and blade assembly
4.
Wiper frame mounting bolts
5.
Wiper frame assembly
6.
Wiper motor to frame mounting bolts
7.
Wiper motor mounting spacer
8.
Wiper motor
9.
Front LH wiper arm and blade assembly
REMOVAL
1.
Operate the wiper motor, and stop it at the auto stop position.
Revision: October 2004
WW-31
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the cowl top RH/LH. Refer to EI-21, "COWL TOP" .
Disconnect wiper motor connector.
Remove cowl top extension bracket.
Remove wiper frame assembly mounting bolts, and remove
wiper frame assembly.
Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly.
LKIA0409E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
●
Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper
switch OFF (auto stop).
2. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
3. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle.
4. Install cowl top extension bracket.
5. Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper
switch OFF (auto stop).
6. Install cowl top RH/LH. Refer to EI-21, "COWL TOP" .
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
●
●
●
EKS00AEP
This vehicle is equipped with non-adjustable washer nozzles.
If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the
washer nozzle is installed correctly.
If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid
spray coverage is not satisfactory, replace washer nozzle.
PKIA2552E
Revision: October 2004
WW-32
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Tube Layout
EKS00AEQ
A
B
C
D
E
F
LKIA0451E
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
G
EKS00AER
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove steering column covers.
Remove wiper washer switch connector.
Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch
away from steering column to remove.
H
I
J
WKIA0071E
WW
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Washer Tank
L
EKS00AES
REMOVAL
1.
Remove side washer tank screw.
M
LKIA0452E
Revision: October 2004
WW-33
2005 Titan
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2.
Remove front washer motor connector, washer fluid level sensor
connector, and front washer hoses.
LKIA0453E
3.
Remove front washer tank screw, then remove washer tank.
LKIA0413E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer tank inlet, and check for water leaks.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Washer tank installation screws:
5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor
EKS00AET
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove washer tank. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" .
Pull out front washer motor in the direction of the arrow as
shown, and remove the front washer motor from the washer
tank.
WKIA1647E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing front washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
WW-34
2005 Titan
POWER SOCKET
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —
PFP:253A2
A
EKS00AEU
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
WKWA2259E
Revision: October 2004
WW-35
2005 Titan
POWER SOCKET
Removal and Installation of Power Sockets
EKS00AEV
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removal and Installation is common for all four power sockets.
1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on
the ring out from square hole.
2. Disconnect power socket connector.
3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls.
WKIA1035E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2004
WW-36
2005 Titan
HORN
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —
PFP:25610
A
EKS00AEW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
WKWA2260E
Revision: October 2004
WW-37
2005 Titan
HORN
Removal and Installation
EKS00AEX
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" .
Disconnect horn connector.
Remove horn bolt and remove horn from vehicle.
LKIA0419E
INSTALLATION
1.
Tighten horn bolt to specified torque.
Horn bolt
2.
3.
: 17 N·m (1.7 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
Reconnect horn connector.
Install front grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" .
Revision: October 2004
WW-38
2005 Titan